You are on page 1of 908

B202/B178/B180

SERVICE MANUAL
002366MIU
B202/B178/B180
SERVICE MANUAL
B202/B178/B180
SERVICE MANUAL

002366MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies.

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY


FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including


desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.

 2005 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.


WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.

Untrained and uncertified users utilizing


information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.

Ricoh Corporation
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE COMPANY
GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN
B202 DSc428 LD328c Aficio 3228C C2824
B178 DSc435 LD335c Aficio 3235C C3528
B180 DSc445 LD345c Aficio 3245C C4535

DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 06/2005 Original Printing
B202/B178/B180
TABLE OF CONTENTS

INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................1-1
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-1
1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT.................................................1-2
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-2
1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS ..........................................................1-3
1.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS ........................................................................1-3
1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS ................................................................1-3
1.3 COPIER.....................................................................................................1-4
1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS .......................................1-4
1.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART .......................................................1-5
1.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION........................................................................1-6
1.4.1 COPIER............................................................................................1-6
Accessory Check ..................................................................................1-6
Installation Procedure ...........................................................................1-7
Settings Relevant to Contract .............................................................1-11
1.4.2 MOVING MACHINE........................................................................1-12
1.4.3 TRANSPORTING MACHINE..........................................................1-13
1.5 OPTIONAL UNIT .....................................................................................1-15
1.5.1 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT ....................................................1-15
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-15
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-16
1.5.2 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT....................................................1-19
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-19
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-20
1.5.3 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY ..............................................................1-23
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-23
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-24
1.5.4 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER ......................................1-27
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-27
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-27
1.5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER...................................................................1-30
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-30
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-30
1.5.6 PUNCH UNIT .................................................................................1-33
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-33
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-34
1.5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY ...........................................................1-37
Accessories Check List.......................................................................1-37

SM i B202/B178/B180
Rev. 06/2006
Installing the Multi-Bin Output Tray .....................................................1-38
1.5.8 BOOKLET FINISHER .....................................................................1-39
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-39
Adjusting the Height............................................................................1-40
Main Body...........................................................................................1-41
Optional Punch Unit ............................................................................1-44
1.5.9 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION............................................1-48
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.....................................................1-48
ACCESSARY CHECK ........................................................................1-49
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..........................................................1-50
1.5.10 KEY COUNTER HOLDER............................................................1-55
1.5.11 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ................................................1-57
1.5.12 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ................................................1-59
1.5.13 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
(SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION) .......................................1-61
1.6 PRINTER OPTIONS................................................................................1-64
1.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................1-64
I/F Card Slot........................................................................................1-64
SD Card Slot.......................................................................................1-64
1.6.2 POSTSCRIPT 3..............................................................................1-65
1.6.3 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER ........................................................1-66
1.6.4 IEEE 1394 (FIREWIRE)..................................................................1-67
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-67
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394........................................................1-68
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394 ........................................................1-68
1.6.5 IEEE 1284 ......................................................................................1-69
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-69
1.6.6 IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) ...................................................1-70
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-70
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN ...................................................1-72
SP MODE SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11B WIRELESS LAN .............1-73
1.6.7 BLUETOOTH..................................................................................1-74
1.6.8 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ...............................1-75
Before You Begin The Procedure .......................................................1-75
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-75
Seal Check And Removal ...................................................................1-76
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-77
1.6.9 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS ........................................................1-79

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-1
2.1 SETTINGS.................................................................................................2-1
New Unit Set.........................................................................................2-1
PM Counter Reset ................................................................................2-1
2.2 PM TABLES ..............................................................................................2-2
2.3 OTHERS ...................................................................................................2-4

B202/B178/B180 ii SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1


3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ......................................................................................3-1
3.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ..............................................................................3-2
3.2.1 SCANNING.......................................................................................3-2
Scanner sub-scan magnification ...........................................................3-2
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration..............................3-2
Main scan dot position correction .........................................................3-3
3.2.2 ARDF................................................................................................3-4
ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration .................................3-4
3.2.3 REGISTRATION...............................................................................3-5
Image Area ...........................................................................................3-5
Leading Edge........................................................................................3-5
Side to Side ..........................................................................................3-5
Adjustment Standard ............................................................................3-5
Paper Registration Standard.................................................................3-5
Adjustment Procedure ..........................................................................3-6
3.2.4 COLOR REGISTRATION .................................................................3-6
Line Position Adjustment ......................................................................3-6
Adjustment of Line Speed for Thick Paper............................................3-6
3.2.5 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION ..................................................3-7
Copy Mode ...........................................................................................3-7
Printer Mode .......................................................................................3-12
3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT......................................................................3-14
3.3.1 TOP COVER ..................................................................................3-14
3.3.2 DUPLEX CONTROL BOARD .........................................................3-14
3.3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 1 .....................................................3-15
3.3.4 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 2 AND SWITCH .............................3-16
3.3.5 EXIT SENSOR 3 AND DUPLEX INVERTER SENSOR..................3-16
3.3.6 EXIT SENSOR 1 AND 2 .................................................................3-16
3.4 DUPLEX FEED UNIT ..............................................................................3-17
3.4.1 DUPLEX DRIVE BOARD................................................................3-17
3.4.2 DUPLEX FEED MOTOR ................................................................3-17
3.4.3 DUPLEX FEED SENSOR...............................................................3-18
3.5 EXTERIOR COVERS ..............................................................................3-19
3.5.1 REAR, FRONT, AND RIGHT SIDES ..............................................3-19
3.5.2 LEFT SIDE .....................................................................................3-21
3.5.3 OPERATION PANEL AND SCANNER COVERS...........................3-22
3.6 SCANNER UNIT......................................................................................3-23
3.6.1 EXPOSURE GLASS.......................................................................3-23
3.6.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH/WIDTH SENSOR ..........................................3-23
3.6.3 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU).......................................................3-24
When reassembling ............................................................................3-24
3.6.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER ...................................................3-26
3.6.5 XENON LAMP ................................................................................3-26
3.6.6 SCANNER POWER SUPPLY UNIT (PSU) ....................................3-28
3.6.7 SCANNER MOTOR........................................................................3-28

SM iii B202/B178/B180
3.6.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE ..............................................................3-29
3.6.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE.................................................................3-32
3.6.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT .................................3-35
3.7 LASER OPTICS ......................................................................................3-36
3.7.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS .....................................................3-36
3.7.2 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT ..................................................3-37
Adjustments after Replacing the Laser Optics Housing Unit...............3-43
3.7.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR ........................................................3-44
3.7.4 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR DRIVE BOARD ..............................3-45
3.7.5 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS ........................3-45
3.8 PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...........................................................3-46
3.9 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................3-47
3.9.1 PICK-UP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ..........................3-47
Tray 1 and Tray 2 ...............................................................................3-47
By-pass Tray.......................................................................................3-47
3.9.2 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION BOARD ...........................................3-49
3.9.3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR ...............................................3-50
3.9.4 RIGHT DOOR UNIT .......................................................................3-50
3.9.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR AND RELAY SENSORS .....................3-51
3.9.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES.............................................................3-51
3.9.7 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH ..............................................................3-52
3.9.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR .......................................................................3-52
3.9.9 PAPER FEED MOTOR...................................................................3-53
3.10 TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT .....................................3-54
3.10.1 TRANSFER UNIT .........................................................................3-54
3.10.2 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT............................................3-55
3.10.3 CLEANING BLADE AND CLEANING ROLLER ...........................3-56
3.10.4 TRANSFER BELT ........................................................................3-58
When you reinstall the transfer belt ....................................................3-59
3.10.5 TRANSFER UNIT DRIVE MOTOR...............................................3-60
3.11 ID SENSORS ........................................................................................3-61
3.12 FUSING .................................................................................................3-62
3.12.1 FUSING UNIT...............................................................................3-62
3.12.2 UPPER COVER............................................................................3-63
3.12.3 THERMOSTAT AND HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR............3-64
3.12.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR AND FUSE .......................3-65
Reassembling .....................................................................................3-65
3.12.5 HEATING ROLLER LAMP AND PRESSURE ROLLER LAMP ....3-66
3.12.6 FUSING BELT UNIT.....................................................................3-67
3.12.7 HOT ROLLER AND HEATING ROLLER ......................................3-68
Reassembling .....................................................................................3-68
3.12.8 UPPER PAPER GUIDE PLATE AND STRIPPER PAWLS...........3-69
3.12.9 LOWER PAPER GUIDE PLATE AND STRIPPER PAWLS..........3-70
3.12.10 CLEANING ROLLER AND OIL SUPPLY ROLLER ....................3-71
3.12.11 PRESSURE ROLLER.................................................................3-72
Reassembling .....................................................................................3-72
3.12.12 DRIVE GEAR .............................................................................3-72
3.12.13 FUSING UNIT FAN.....................................................................3-73
3.12.14 PAPER EXIT ..............................................................................3-74

B202/B178/B180 iv SM
3.13 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..............................................................3-75
3.13.1 MOVING THE CONTROLLER BOX OUT OF THE WAY .............3-75
3.13.2 MOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C,
B OUT OF THE WAY ...................................................................3-76
3.13.3 CONTROLLER, IPU, AND BCU ...................................................3-76
3.13.4 HDD..............................................................................................3-78
When reassembling the HDD .............................................................3-78
3.13.5 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE .....................................3-79
NVRAM on the BCU ...........................................................................3-79
NVRAM on the Controller ...................................................................3-80
3.13.6 REMOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD - C, B .......3-81
3.13.7 SUB POWER SUPPLY UNIT .......................................................3-81
3.13.8 PSU ..............................................................................................3-82
3.13.9 DRIVER BOARD ..........................................................................3-82
3.14 DRIVE UNIT ..........................................................................................3-83
3.14.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH ...........................................................3-83
3.14.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES ......................................................3-83
3.14.3 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR - CMY .................................................3-84
3.14.4 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - CMY AND DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - K ....3-86
3.14.5 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - K...........................................3-87
3.15 TONER SUPPLY UNIT .........................................................................3-88
M Toner Supply Unit ...........................................................................3-88
C and Y Toner Supply Units ...............................................................3-92
K Toner Supply Unit............................................................................3-93

TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1
4.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS .........................................4-1
4.1.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT .........................................4-1
4.1.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT ...............................4-3
4.1.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT .......................................4-4
4.2 SCANNER TEST MODE ...........................................................................4-8
4.2.1 VPU TEST MODE ............................................................................4-8
SP4-907-1 VPU Test Pattern: R ...........................................................4-8
SP4-907-2 VPU Test Pattern: G ...........................................................4-8
SP4-907-3 VPU Test Pattern: B ...........................................................4-8
4.2.2 IPU TEST MODE..............................................................................4-8
SP4-904-1 Register Access..................................................................4-8
SP4-904-2 Image Path .........................................................................4-8
4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ...............................................................4-10
4.3.1 SUMMARY .....................................................................................4-10
SC Code Classification .......................................................................4-11
4.4 SC TABLE ...............................................................................................4-12
4.5 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 1 .............................................................4-51
4.5.1 IMAGE QUALITY............................................................................4-51
Work-flow............................................................................................4-51
4.6 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2 .............................................................4-53

SM v B202/B178/B180
4.6.1 IMAGE QUALITY............................................................................4-53
Detailed Explanation ...........................................................................4-57
Copy Image processing ......................................................................4-62
4.6.2 COLOR SHIFT ...............................................................................4-64
Adjustment Standard: Max. 150 mm..................................................4-66
How to measure the gap between color lines .....................................4-72
4.6.3 COLOR SHIFT AFTER TRANSFER UNIT REPLACEMENT .........4-74
Check the color shift level ...................................................................4-74
Fusing/ Registration Roller Speed Adjustment ...................................4-74
4.6.4 BLACK OVER PRINT .....................................................................4-77
Black Over Print Disabled ...................................................................4-77
Black Over Print Enabled....................................................................4-77
4.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................4-78
4.7.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................4-78
4.8 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................4-80
4.9 LEDS (BCU) ............................................................................................4-80

SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1
5.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ...........5-1
Entering SP Mode.................................................................................5-1
Exiting SP Mode ...................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES ....................................................................5-2
SP Mode Button Summary ...................................................................5-3
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ...........5-4
Selecting the Program Number.............................................................5-4
Exiting Service Mode ............................................................................5-4
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ...................................................................5-5
5.1.3 REMARKS........................................................................................5-6
Display on the Control Panel Screen ....................................................5-6
Others ...................................................................................................5-7
5.2 COPY SERVICE MODE............................................................................5-8
5.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE..................................................................5-8
SP1-XXX (Feed) ...................................................................................5-8
SP2-XXX (Drum).................................................................................5-19
SP3-XXX (Process) ............................................................................5-35
SP4-XXX (Scanner) ............................................................................5-45
SP5-XXX (Mode) ................................................................................5-55
SP6-XXX (Peripherals) .......................................................................5-83
SP7-XXX (Data Log)...........................................................................5-86
SP8-xxx: Data Log2 ............................................................................5-97
5.2.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE .................................................................5-134
ARDF Input Check: SP6-007 ............................................................5-136
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor...........................................................5-137
Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2) .................................................5-137
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table) ................................................5-137

B202/B178/B180 vi SM
Table 4: Original Size Detection .......................................................5-138
5.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE .............................................................5-139
5.2.4 TEST PATTERN (SP5-997) .........................................................5-143
5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ..................................................................5-144
SP1-XXX (Service Mode) .................................................................5-144
5.4 SCANNER SP MODE ...........................................................................5-146
SP1-xxx (System and Others) ..........................................................5-146
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) ..................................................5-146
5.5 REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET ..................................................5-147
5.5.1 SOFTWARE RESET ....................................................................5-147
5.5.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET ...................5-147
System Setting Reset .......................................................................5-147
Copier Setting Reset.........................................................................5-148
5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE ...........................................................................5-149
5.6.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE..................................................................5-149
5.6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ..................................................................5-150
5.6.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE...............................................................5-151
5.6.3 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL.............5-154
5.6.4 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA ..................................................5-155
5.6.5 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................5-156
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card ...................................5-156
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM................................................5-156
5.6.6 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE .........................................5-157
5.6.7 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS...............................5-160
5.7 SD CARD APPLI MOVE........................................................................5-161
5.7.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-161
5.7.2 MOVE EXEC ................................................................................5-162
5.7.3 UNDO EXEC ................................................................................5-163
5.8 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ..................................................5-164
5.8.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-164
5.8.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ................................................5-165
5.9 USING THE DEBUG LOG.....................................................................5-166
5.9.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG ...........5-166
5.9.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD .....................5-169
5.9.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY ...........................................5-170
5.9.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES .........................................................5-171
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key .............5-171
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log ..........................5-171
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log ....................5-171
5.10 DIP SWITCHES...................................................................................5-172
Controller Board................................................................................5-172
BCU Board........................................................................................5-172

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 6-1


6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................................6-1

SM vii B202/B178/B180
6.1.2 PAPER PATH ...................................................................................6-2
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-3
6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE......................................................................6-4
Overview...............................................................................................6-4
6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS ......................................................................6-6
6.2 PROCESS CONTROL ..............................................................................6-8
6.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................6-8
6.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL ...................................................................6-8
Overview...............................................................................................6-8
Process Control Self Check ..................................................................6-9
6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE ....................6-10
Step 1: VSG Adjustment .....................................................................6-10
Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation .......................................6-11
Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection .......................................................6-11
Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation ......................................................6-11
Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment .........................6-12
Step 6: ID Sensor Highlight Pattern Generation .................................6-13
Step 7: Sensor Pattern Density Detection...........................................6-13
Step 8: VL (LD Power) Selection ........................................................6-13
6.2.4 VREF COMPENSATION DURING A PRINT JOB ..........................6-14
Highlight Pattern .................................................................................6-14
Adjustment Process ............................................................................6-14
6.2.5 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL .........................................................6-15
Overview.............................................................................................6-15
Toner Supply Control Modes ..............................................................6-15
6.2.6 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION ............................6-16
Introduction .........................................................................................6-16
Toner Near End Detection 1 ...............................................................6-17
Toner Near End Detection 2 ...............................................................6-17
Toner End Detection ...........................................................................6-18
Toner End Recovery ...........................................................................6-18
6.2.7 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION ......................................................6-19
6.3 SCANNING..............................................................................................6-20
6.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-20
6.3.2 SCANNER DRIVE ..........................................................................6-21
6.3.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION........................................................6-22
6.3.4 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ..................................................6-23
6.4 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................6-24
6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-24
6.4.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM .................................................................6-25
Signal Processing ...............................................................................6-25
A/D Conversion...................................................................................6-25
White Level Correction........................................................................6-25
Others .................................................................................................6-25
Black Level Correction ........................................................................6-26
Adjustments ........................................................................................6-26
VPU Test Mode ..................................................................................6-26
6.4.3 IPU BLOCK DIAGRAM...................................................................6-27
Shading Correction .............................................................................6-27

B202/B178/B180 viii SM
Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction ..........................................6-28
Scan Line Correction ..........................................................................6-28
Image Separation................................................................................6-28
ACS (Auto Color Select) .....................................................................6-29
Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction) .....................6-30
Filtering ...............................................................................................6-31
ADS (Auto Image Density Selection) ..................................................6-31
Color Conversion ................................................................................6-32
Main Scan Magnification.....................................................................6-33
Printer Gamma Correction ..................................................................6-34
Error Diffusion .....................................................................................6-36
IPU Board Test ...................................................................................6-36
6.5 IMAGE DATA PATH................................................................................6-37
Copier Application...............................................................................6-37
Printer Application...............................................................................6-37
Scanner Application (1 bit/8 bits) ........................................................6-37
Fax Application (Transmission/Reception)..........................................6-37
6.6 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................6-38
6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-38
6.6.2 OPTICAL PATH..............................................................................6-39
6.6.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR ........................................6-40
Overview.............................................................................................6-40
Main Scan Start Detection ..................................................................6-40
Clock Frequency Adjustment ..............................................................6-40
6.6.4 DUAL BEAM WRITING ..................................................................6-41
Dual Beam Mechanism.......................................................................6-41
Laser Beam Pitch Change Mechanism...............................................6-41
Printing Mode and Black LD Unit Position ..........................................6-42
6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH .....................................................................6-43
Front and Upper Left Cover Switch.....................................................6-43
Error Messages ..................................................................................6-44
6.6.6 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ..............................6-45
Overview.............................................................................................6-45
Summary of Each Adjustment ............................................................6-46
Adjustment Conditions ........................................................................6-47
Main Scan Skew Adjustment ..............................................................6-48
6.6.7 DIFFERENCES IN THE COPY AND PRINTER MODES ...............6-48
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT ...................................................................6-49
6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-49
6.7.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-50
6.7.3 DRUM GEAR POSITION SENSORS .............................................6-51
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-51
Initialization Process and SC Codes ...................................................6-52
6.7.4 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING .............................................6-53
6.7.5 DRUM CLEANING..........................................................................6-54
6.7.6 WASTE TONER COLLECTION .....................................................6-55
Waste Toner Path ...............................................................................6-55
Waste Toner Vibrator..........................................................................6-56
6.7.7 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION ...............................6-57

SM ix B202/B178/B180
6.8 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................6-58
6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-58
6.8.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-59
6.8.3 DEVELOPER AGITATION .............................................................6-60
6.8.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS ...................................................................6-61
6.8.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM .....................................................6-62
Overview.............................................................................................6-62
Toner Agitation and Attraction ............................................................6-62
Air Flow and Toner Flow .....................................................................6-63
Toner Near End Detection ..................................................................6-63
Toner Transport ..................................................................................6-64
6.8.6 TONER CARTRIDGE DETECTION ...............................................6-65
6.9 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................6-66
6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-66
6.9.2 DRIVE – TRAY 1, TRAY 2, AND BY-PASS TRAY .........................6-67
6.9.3 PAPER LIFT – TRAYS 1 & 2..........................................................6-68
6.9.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2....................................6-69
6.9.5 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2 ..............................6-70
6.9.6 PAPER END DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2 ....................................6-70
6.9.7 REGISTRATION.............................................................................6-71
6.9.8 PAPER FEED LINE SPEED...........................................................6-72
6.9.9 GRIP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM .......................................6-73
6.10 DUPLEX UNIT.......................................................................................6-74
6.10.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-74
6.10.2 DUPLEX OPERATION .................................................................6-75
Up to A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF ............................................................6-75
Larger than A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF...................................................6-75
6.10.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT...........................................................6-76
6.10.4 FEED TO EXTERNAL EXIT TRAY (NON-DUPLEX MODE) ........6-77
6.10.5 FEED TO DUPLEX FEED UNIT ...................................................6-78
6.10.6 FEED TO TWO-TRAY FINISHER AND BOOKLET FINISHER ....6-79
With Optional One-Tray Paper Feed Unit ...........................................6-79
With Optional LCT or Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit ...............................6-79
6.10.7 DUPLEX FEED UNIT ...................................................................6-80
Drive ...................................................................................................6-80
Feed-in and feed-out...........................................................................6-80
6.11 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION .................................6-81
6.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-81
6.11.2 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE ............................................................6-82
Drive Motor .........................................................................................6-82
Transfer belt speed control .................................................................6-83
Transfer belt mark sensor ...................................................................6-84
6.11.3 TRANSFER CURRENT................................................................6-85
6.11.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING .....................................................6-86
6.11.5 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT ......................................................6-87
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-87
Transfer Belt Sensor ...........................................................................6-88
Copier ACS.........................................................................................6-88
Printer ACS.........................................................................................6-89

B202/B178/B180 x SM
6.12 FUSING .................................................................................................6-90
6.12.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-90
6.12.2 FUSING UNIT DRIVE...................................................................6-91
Belt and Rollers ..................................................................................6-91
Fusing Clutch......................................................................................6-91
6.12.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL..........................................6-92
Fusing Temperatures..........................................................................6-92
Temperature Corrections ....................................................................6-93
Overheat Protection ............................................................................6-93
6.12.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES ...........................................................6-94
Overview.............................................................................................6-94
Panel Off Mode ...................................................................................6-95
Auto Off Mode.....................................................................................6-96
6.13 PAPER EXIT .........................................................................................6-97
6.13.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-97
6.13.2 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION ..............................................6-98
6.14 PRINTER FUNCTIONS .........................................................................6-99
6.14.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-99
6.14.2 HARD DISK ................................................................................6-101
Overview...........................................................................................6-101
Data Transfer....................................................................................6-101
6.14.3 PRINT DATA PROCESSING .....................................................6-102
RPCS Driver .....................................................................................6-102
PCL5e/PCL6c Driver.........................................................................6-102
PS3 Driver ........................................................................................6-103
CMS (Color Management System) ...................................................6-103
Gray Correction ................................................................................6-103
BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)..........................6-103
Gamma Correction............................................................................6-103
Toner Limitation ................................................................................6-104
Dither Processing and ROP/RIP .......................................................6-104
6.14.4 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS .....................................................6-105
Sample Print .....................................................................................6-105
Locked Print......................................................................................6-105
6.14.5 JOB SPOOLING .........................................................................6-106
Related SP Modes ............................................................................6-106
Paper Source Selection ....................................................................6-107
Auto Continue ...................................................................................6-108
Paper Output Tray ............................................................................6-109
Stapling.............................................................................................6-109
Punching...........................................................................................6-110
6.15 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)...................................................6-111
6.16 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ....................................6-112
6.16.1 AUTO ERASE MEMORY ...........................................................6-112
Types of Data Overwritten and Not Overwritten ...............................6-112
Overwrite timing ................................................................................6-112

SM xi B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. 7-1
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................7-1
1.1 BASIC..................................................................................................7-1
1.2 PRINTER.............................................................................................7-4
1.3 SCANNER ...........................................................................................7-5
2. SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES......................................................................7-6
2.1 PAPER FEED......................................................................................7-6
2.2 PAPER EXIT .......................................................................................7-7
PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION ....................................7-8
3. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES .....................................................................7-9
3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS ............................................................................7-9
3.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE ........................................................................7-10
SCANNER ..........................................................................................7-10
Scanner Drivers ..................................................................................7-10
Scanner Utilities ..................................................................................7-10
4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION ...................................................................7-11
5. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ..........................................................................7-13
5.1 ARDF.................................................................................................7-13
5.2 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT .......................................................7-14
5.3 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT ......................................................7-14
5.4 2000-SHEET LARGE CAPACITY TRAY ...........................................7-14
5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER & PUNCH UNIT ...........................................7-15
5.6 BOOKLET FINISHER ........................................................................7-16
5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY ..............................................................7-16
5.8 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION...............................................7-17

PUNCH KIT B377


SEE SECTION B377 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED B598


SEE SECTION B598 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599


SEE SECTION B599 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600


SEE SECTION B600 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601


SEE SECTION B601 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

B202/B178/B180 xii SM
BOOKLET FINISHER B602
SEE SECTION B602 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

FAX OPTION TYPE 3245 B712


SEE SECTION B712 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

SM xiii B202/B178/B180
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES
PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
4. The copier drives some of its components when it completes the warm-up
period. Be careful to keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical
components as the copier starts operation.
5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS


Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by
accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Immediately wash eyes with
plenty of water. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS


The copier and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer service
representative who has completed the training course on those models.

CAUTION
1. The NVRAM module installed on the controller has a lithium battery which
can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an
identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM.
Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in
accordance with local regulations.
2. The optional fax and memory expansion units contain lithium batteries, which
can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace only with the same or an
equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Do not recharge or burn
the batteries. Used batteries must be handled in accordance with local
regulations.
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly
when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, the maintenance unit which includes developer or the
organic photoconductor in accordance with local regulations. (These are
non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not
put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.

LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired
in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all
chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of
the optical subsystem is required.

WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Optics Housing Unit section. Laser
beams can seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
CAUTION CAUTION
CAUTION- CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION
VORSICHT CAUTION- CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION
VORSICHT
WHEN OPEN WHEN OPEN
AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT- LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B VORSICHT- LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B
WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN

>PS< >PS<
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved
with those marks.

Symbols and Abbreviations


This manual uses several symbols.

Symbol What it means


Refer to section number
 See Core Tech Manual for details
 Screw
 Connector
 E-ring
 Clip ring

Short Edge Feed (SEF) Long Edge Feed (LEF)


INSTALLATION

POSITION 1
TAB
B712 FAX OPTION TYPE 3245

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

POSITION 2
TAB
TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED B598

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

POSITION 3
TAB
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600

TROUBLESHOOTING

POSITION 4
TAB
TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599
BOOKLET FINISHER B602
PUNCH KIT B377

SERVICE TABLES

POSITION 5
TAB
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
POSITION 6
TAB

SPECIFICATIONS
POSITION 7

ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601


TAB
POSITION 8
TAB
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1. INSTALLATION

Installation
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
Ambient Humidity (%RH)

80%

70%

Recommended conditions:
15 to 25°C
30 to 70 %RH
54%

30%

15%

B178I901.WMF 10°C 15°C 30°C 32°C

1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)


2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)
4. Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more
5. Do not exposed the machine to the following:
1) Cool air from an air conditioner
2) Heat from a heater
6. Do not install the machine in areas that are exposed to corrosive gas.
7. Install the machine at locations lower than 2,500 m (8,200 ft.) above sea level.
8. Install the machine on a strong, level base. (Inclination on any side must be no
more than 5 mm.)
9. Do not install the machine in areas that get strong vibrations.

1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL


Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2")

SM 1-1 B202/B178/B180/
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT


Install the machine near the power source, with the clearance as shown.

[B]

[A] [C]

[D]

B178I902.WMF

A: Over 100 mm (3.9")


B: Over 100 mm (3.9")
C: Over 550 mm (22")
D: Over 75 mm (3.0")

1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

CAUTION
1. Insert the plug firmly in the outlet.
2. Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord.
3. Ground the machine.

1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 10 A


220 V ~ 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 6 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: ±10 %
3. Do not put things on the power cord.

B202/B178/B180 1-2 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS

1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS

Installation
1.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS

No. Options Remarks


1 1-tray paper feed unit
2 2-tray paper feed unit One from the three
3 Large capacity tray
4 Platen cover
One from the two
5 ARDF
6 Multi-bin output tray One from No. 6, No. 7, and No. 9
7 Two-tray finisher One from No. 6, No. 7, and No. 9
8 Punch kit (3 types) No. 7 required; One of the three types
9 Booklet finisher One from No. 6, No. 7, and No. 9
10 Punch unit (4 types) No. 9 required; One of the four types
11 Scanner accessibility option

Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)

1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS

No. Options Remarks


12 IEEE 1394
13 IEEE 802.11b
One from the four
14 IEEE 1284
15 Bluetooth
16 PostScript 3
17 File Format Converter
18 Data overwrite security unit

Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)

SM 1-3 B202/B178/B180/
COPIER

1.3 COPIER
1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS

CAUTION
Rating voltage for peripherals.
Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.

1. ARDF
Rating voltage output
connector for accessory
Max. DC24V

2. Duplex unit
Rating voltage output
connector for accessory
Max. DC24V

3. Finisher
Rating voltage output
connector for accessory
Max. DC24V

B178I903.WMF

B202/B178/B180 1-4 SM
COPIER

1.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

Installation
This flow chart shows the installation procedures.

Start

Unpack the copier.

Scanner accessbility option

The paper feed


unit or LCT installed? Yes

Install the scanner accessbility option.


Yes
No
Place the copier on the paper feed unit or
LCT, and install it. Install the copier.

No

Select the language.


The controller options installed?

Set the date and time.


Yes

Install the controller options.


Perform ACC.
No

Install the platen cover or ARDF.

Check magnification and registration.

The two-tray finisher


or booklet finisher installed?
Adjust the operation panel display if
necessary.
Yes

Specify the settings relevant to the


The punch unit installed? contract (see section 1.4.1).

Yes
End
Install the punch unit.
No
No

Install the finisher.

B178I904.WMF
You need the optional paper tray unit or the LCT if you want to install the finisher.
A punch unit is for to the two-tray finisher or the booklet finisher.

SM 1-5 B202/B178/B180/
MACHINE INSTALLATION

1.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION


1.4.1 COPIER

CAUTION
Make sure that the transfer belt is in its correct position before you move
the machine. Otherwise, the transfer belt and the black PCU can be
damaged.

Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Description Q’ty
1. Operating Instructions–System Setting................................1
2. Operating Manual–Copy Reference ....................................1
3. Operating Manual–Printer Reference ..................................1
4. CD-ROM–Printer/Scanner Driver.........................................1
5. CD-ROM–Operating Instructions .........................................1
6. Ferrite Core .........................................................................1
7. Paper Size Decal .................................................................1
8. Model Name Decal ..............................................................1
9. Operation Panel Indication Decal ........................................1
10. Energy Star Sticker............................................................1
11. Decal–Inkjet Caution..........................................................1
12. Decal–Copy Prohibition .....................................................1
14. External Tray .....................................................................1
15. Power Cord........................................................................1
16. Toner–Black ......................................................................1
17. Toner–Magenta .................................................................1
18. Toner–Cyan .......................................................................1
19. Toner–Yellow.....................................................................1
20. Exposure Glass Cleaning Cloth .........................................1
21. Cloth Holder.......................................................................1
22. NECR ................................................................................1

B202/B178/B180 1-6 SM
MACHINE INSTALLATION

Installation Procedure

Installation
CAUTION
Remove the tape from the development units (see step 2) before you turn
the main switch on. The development units can be severely damaged if you
do not remove the tape.

Put the copier on the paper tray unit or the LCT first if you will install an optional
paper tray unit or the optional LCT at the same time. Then install the copier and
other options.
NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine. You may need
them in the future if you transport the machine to another location.

[A]

B178I502.WMF
B178I501.WMF

1. Remove the tape and padding on the copier.


2. Remove the pin [A].
NOTE: Keep the pin. You may need it if you want to transport the machine
( 1.4.3).
3. Remove all tapes from the four development units.
4. Turn the transfer belt release lever clockwise.

SM 1-7 B202/B178/B180/
MACHINE INSTALLATION

5. Shake the toner cartridge five or six [A]


times.
6. Install the toner cartridges to the copier.
7. Check that the hooks [A] hold the
cartridge correctly.

B178I506.WMF

[B]
8. Install the external tray [B].

B178I507.WMF

9. Attach the cloth holder [C] to the left side of the


scanner unit.
10. Put the contract glass cleaning cloth [D] in the
holder.

[D]

[C]

B178I508.WMF

B202/B178/B180 1-8 SM
MACHINE INSTALLATION

11. Attach the duplex inverter guide [A].

Installation
12. Attach the guide cover [B].

[B]

[A]
B178I509.WMF

13. Attach the correct model name decal [C] to the


front cover with the cover [D].
14. Pull each paper tray out. Then adjust the side
guides and end guide to match the paper size.
NOTE: To move the side guides, first pull out
the tray fully. Then push down the
green lock at the rear inside the tray. [C]
[D]
15. Attach the correct paper tray number decals
[E] to the paper trays.
NOTE: Paper tray number decals are also
used for the optional paper tray or the
optional LCT. Keep these decals for
use with these optional units.
B178I510.WMF

16. Install the optional ARDF or the optional platen [E]


cover.
17. Plug in the machine. [F]
18. Make sure that the platen or ARDF
is closed and the main power is
turned off.
19. Check if the “–” mark on the breaker
switch [F] appears. It means the
breaker switch has been turned on.
20. Press the test button [G] of the
breaker. This turns off the breaker [G]
switch (switching from right to the
center position). B178R016.WMF

SM 1-9 B202/B178/B180/
MACHINE INSTALLATION

IMPORTANT
If the breaker switch does not move to the center position:
• Make sure that the power cord of the copier is securely connected to the
power supply.
• Push the test button again. If the breaker switch does not move to the center
position, replace the breaker switch.
21. Check that the breaker switch is turned off and “” mark appears on the switch.
22. Turn the breaker switch to the right position first. Then turn it to the “On”
position (left position).
23. Turn the main power switch on. The machine automatically starts the
initialization procedure. The Start button LED () turns green when this
procedure has finished.
NOTE: The machine makes a sound that is not the same as other machines in
the field. This is normal and there are no defective parts in the machine.
This sound is made by the drum drive motor.
24. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes).
25. Do the Automatic Color Calibration process (ACC) as follows:
1) Print the ACC test pattern (UP mode > Maintenance > ACC > Start).
2) Put the printout on the exposure glass.
3) Put 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart.
4) Close the ARDF or the platen cover.
5) Press “Start Scanning” on the LCD panel. The machine starts the ACC.
26. Check that the sample image has been copied normally.
27. Check that the circuit breaker works correctly.

B202/B178/B180 1-10 SM
MACHINE INSTALLATION

Settings Relevant to Contract

Installation
Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has
made a service contract.
NOTE: You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) in
accordance with the contract ( SP5-045-001).
Item SP No. Function Default
Counting SP5-045-001 Specifies if the counting method used in “0”:
method meter charge mode is based on Developments
developments or prints.
NOTE: You can set this one time only.
You cannot change the setting
after you have set it for the first
time.
/11" x 17" SP5-104-001 Specifies whether the counter is “No”: Single
double (Special Service doubled for 11" x 17" paper. counting
counting Program) NOTE: When you change this setting,
contact your supervisor.
Service Tel. SP5-812-001 Programs the service station fax
No. Setting through 004 number.
The number is printed on the counter
list when the meter charge mode is
selected. This lets the user fax the
counter data to the service station.

SM 1-11 B202/B178/B180/
MACHINE INSTALLATION

1.4.2 MOVING MACHINE

CAUTION
Make sure that the transfer belt is in its correct position before moving the
machine, otherwise the transfer belt and the black PCU may be damaged.

This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to
another floor. See section 1.4.3, “Transporting Machine” if you will use some
transport equipment.

The machine stands make it difficult to move the copier with an optional paper tray
or LCT installed. You can remove them as necessary.

1. Check that the transfer belt is in its


correct position.
2. Remove all trays from the optional
paper feed unit or LCT.
3. Remove the front stand [A]
( x 2).

[A]
B178I511.WMF

4. Remove the rear stand [B]


( x 2, 2 brackets).

[B]
B178I512.WMF

CAUTION: Reinstall the machine stands after you move the machine. The
machine can fall over when you pull out a paper tray or when you work
on the machine if you do not do this.

B202/B178/B180 1-12 SM
MACHINE INSTALLATION

1.4.3 TRANSPORTING MACHINE

Installation
CAUTION
Make sure that the transfer belt is in its correct position before you move
the machine. Otherwise, the transfer belt and the black PCU can be
damaged.

1. Make sure that the transfer belt is in its correct position.


2. Remove the machine stands ( 1.4.2)
3. Remove the toner cartridges. This does not let toner flow into the toner supply
tube caused by vibrations at the time of transport. This can also cause the tube
to be clogged with toner.
4. Put air packing into the toner cartridge holder to shield the toner supply
entrance. This does not let toner flow out to the toner cartridge holder.
5. Set the lock pin [A] (which comes
with the machine) in the transfer belt
unit.
NOTE: The lower end of the transfer
belt moves. The surfaces of
the belt and PCU can be
damaged by the friction [A]
between them if you
transport the machine
without locking the belt.
6. Make sure there is no paper left in
the paper trays. Then fix down the B178I513.WMF
bottom plates with a sheet of paper
and tape.
7. Empty out the waste toner bottle.
Then attach securing tape to not let
the toner bottle come out.
8. Turn the release lever [B]
counterclockwise to its lowermost
position. (The lever does not stay in
this position if you do not hold it.) Stick
the lever in this position with tape. [B]

NOTE: The release lever lifts the


transfer belt up and presses it
against the black PCU. The
surfaces of the belt and PCU B178I514.WMF
may be damaged by the
friction between them if you transport the machine with the two units in
this position.

SM 1-13 B202/B178/B180/
MACHINE INSTALLATION

9. Do one of the following:


Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.

NOTE: 1) Make sure you do the Auto Adjust (User Program mode) or forced Line
Position Adjustment (SP5-993-002 after you move the machine. This
optimizes color line alignment.

2) Make sure that the side fences in the trays are correctly positioned to
prevent color shifting.

B202/B178/B180 1-14 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

1.5 OPTIONAL UNIT

Installation
1.5.1 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Description Q’ty
1. Securing Bracket ................................................................1
2. Right Stand Bracket ............................................................1
3. Left Stand Bracket ..............................................................1
4. Front Stand..........................................................................1
5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1
6. Screw M4 x 10 .....................................................................4
7. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2

1 2 3 6 7

4 5

B601I929.WMF

SM 1-15 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

Installation Procedure

CAUTION
1. Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before
you start the installation procedure.
2. You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly
unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or
property damage.
3. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and
grips can be damaged.

1. Remove all tape on the paper tray


unit.

B601I919.WMF

2. Remove the paper tray. Then


remove all tape and padding.
3. Install the front stand [A] ( x 2).

[A]
B601I103.WMF

B202/B178/B180 1-16 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

Installation
4. Install the rear stand [A].
5. Attach the stand brackets [B][C]
( x 1 for each).

[B]

[A]
[C]
B601I921.WMF

[E]
6. Grasp the handle [D] and grips [E] of
the copier.
7. Lift the copier and install it on the
paper feed unit [F].

[D]

[F]

B601I007.WMF

SM 1-17 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

8. Remove tray 2 of the copier.


9. Fasten the knob screw [A].
10. Install tray 2.

[A]

B601I005.WMF

11. Open the right cover. [B]


12. Install the link bracket [B]
(1 knob screw).

B601I923.WMF

13. Turn on the main switch.


14. Check the machine's operation and copy quality.

B202/B178/B180 1-18 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

1.5.2 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

Installation
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.

Description Q’ty
1. Securing Bracket ................................................................1
2. Right Stand Bracket ............................................................1
3. Left Stand Bracket ..............................................................1
4. Front Stand..........................................................................1
5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1
6. Screw M4 x 10 .....................................................................4
7. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2

1 2 3 6 7

5
4

B598I929.WMF

SM 1-19 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

Installation Procedure

CAUTION
1. Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before
you start the installation procedure.
2. You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly
unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or
property damage.
3. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and
grips may be damaged.

1. Remove all tape on the paper tray


unit.

B598I002.WMF

2. Remove the paper trays. Then


remove all tape and padding.
3. Install the front stand [A] ( x 2).

[A] B598I103.WMF

B202/B178/B180 1-20 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

Installation
4. Install the rear stand [A].
5. Attach the stand brackets [B][C]
( x 1 for each).

[B]

[A]

[C] B598I901.WMF

6. Grasp the handle [D] and grips [E] of [E]


the copier.
7. Lift the copier and install it on the
paper feed unit [F].

[D]

[F]

B598I005.WMF

SM 1-21 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

8. Remove tray 2 of the copier.


9. Fasten the knob screw [A].
10. Install tray 2.

[A]

B598I904.WMF

11. Open the right cover. [B]


12. Install the link bracket [B]
(1 knob screw).

B598I903.WMF

13. Turn on the main switch.


14. Check the machine's operation and copy quality.

B202/B178/B180 1-22 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

1.5.3 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY

Installation
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.

Description Q’ty
1. Securing Bracket ................................................................1
2. Right Stand Bracket ............................................................1
3. Left Stand Bracket ..............................................................1
4. Front Stand..........................................................................1
5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1
6. Screw M 4 x 10 ....................................................................4
7. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2

1 2 3 6 7

5
4

B600I929.WMF

SM 1-23 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

Installation Procedure

CAUTION
1. Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before
you start the installation procedure.
2. You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly
unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or
property damage.
3. Do not lift the copier with the LCT installed. The handle and grips may be
damaged.

1. Remove all tape.

B600I002.WMF

[A]
2. Press the stopper [A]. Then pull out
the tray [B].
3. Install the front stand [C] ( x 2).

[B]

[C]
B600I004.WMF

B202/B178/B180 1-24 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

Installation
4. Install the rear stand [A].
5. Attach the stand brackets [B][C]
( x 1 for each).

[B]

[A]
[C]
B600I901.WMF

6. Grasp the handle [D] and grips [E] of [E]


the copier.
7. Lift the copier and install it on the LCT
[F].

[D]

[F]

B600I903.WMF

SM 1-25 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

8. Remove tray 2 of the copier.


9. Fasten the knob screw [A].
10. Install tray 2.

[A]

B600I904.WMF

11. Open the right cover. [B]


12. Install the link bracket [B]
(1 knob screw).

B600I918.WMF

13. Turn on the main switch.


14. Check the machine's operation and copy quality.

B202/B178/B180 1-26 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

1.5.4 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER

Installation
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Description Q’ty
1. Left stopper bracket .............................................................1
2. Right stopper bracket...........................................................1
3. Knob screw..........................................................................4
4. Stud screw...........................................................................2
5. Screw M4 x 10.....................................................................2
6. Decal ...................................................................................1
7. Decal ...................................................................................1
1 2 3 4 5

6 7
B714I501.WMF

Installation Procedure

CAUTION
Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before
you start the installation procedure.

1. Unpack the ARDF, and then remove all


tapes and shipping retainers.

B714I502.WMF

SM 1-27 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

[B]
[C]

[F]

B714I503.WMF

[A]

B714I504.WMF

2. Attach and tighten [A] ( x 2 stud). [D] [E]


3. Mount the ADF. To do this, align the screw keyholes [B] of the ARDF support
plate over the stud screws, and then slide the ARDF toward the front of the
machine.
NOTE: To avoid damaging the ADF, hold it as shown above.
4. Secure the ARDF [C] ( x 2).
5. Attach the left [D] and right [E] stopper brackets ( x 2 knob).
6. Connect the I/F cable [F] ( x 1) to the main machine.

B202/B178/B180 1-28 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

Installation
[C]

[A]

[B]

B714I505.WMF

B714I506.WMF

7. Peel off the platen sheet [A] and place it


on the exposure glass [B].
8. Align the rear left corner (of the platen
sheet) flush against the corner [C] on
the exposure glass.
9. Close the ARDF. [E]
10. Open the ARDF and check that the
platen sheet is correctly attached.
11. Attach the decal [D]. Select the most
suitable language for the installed
machine. Attach the decal to the cover.
The arrow on the decal must align with
[D]
the groove [E] on the left scale as
shown. B714I507.WMF

12. Attach the decal [F] to the top cover as


shown. Select the most suitable
[F]
language for the installed machine.
13. Turn the main switch on, and check
the operation.
14. Make a full size copy, and check that
the registrations (side-to-side and
leading edge) and image skew are
correct. If they are not, adjust the
registrations and image skew with the
SP mode. B714I508.WMF

SM 1-29 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

1.5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER


Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Description Q’ty
1. Duplex-unit support .............................................................1
2. Tray .....................................................................................2
3. Link rail ................................................................................1
4. Link-rail holder .....................................................................1
5. Long M4 x 12.......................................................................6
6. Short M4 x 8 ........................................................................2
1 2 3

6
4 B599I926.WMF

Installation Procedure

CAUTION
Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before
you start the installation procedure.

1. Remove all tape. Check that no tape remains inside


the front cover and on the left cover.
2. Fold the external tray [A].

[A]

B599I901.WMF

B202/B178/B180 1-30 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

Installation
3. Set the link rail [A] on the link-rail
holder [B].
4. Install the link-rail holder (with the
link rail) to the copier [C] (Long screw
x 2). [C]

[B]

[A]

B599I906.WMF

5. Install the duplex-unit support [D] to


the copier (Long screw x 3).

[D]

B599I907.WMF

SM 1-31 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

6. Adjust the position of the connection


bracket [A] as necessary ( x 2):
• Upper position for the copier with the
two-tray paper feed unit or LCT.
• Lower position for the copier with the
one-tray paper feed unit.

[A] B599I908.WMF

7. Connect the finisher [B] with the copier [B]


(Long screw x 1).
8. Connect the finisher cable to the
connector of the copier.

B599I902.WMF

9. Install the two trays [C] (Short screw x 1


for each). [C]
10. Extend the external tray of the copier
(see step 2).
11. Turn the main switch on and check the
operation.

B599I910.WMF

B202/B178/B180 1-32 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

1.5.6 PUNCH UNIT

Installation
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.

Description Q’ty
1. Punch unit............................................................................1
2. Sensor arm ..........................................................................1
3. Spring ..................................................................................1
4. Screw M3 x 6 .......................................................................2
5. Step screw...........................................................................2
6. Hopper.................................................................................1
7. Spacer (2 mm) .....................................................................1
8. Spacer (1 mm) .....................................................................2

2 1

8
4
B178I515.WMF

5 6 7

SM 1-33 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

Installation Procedure

CAUTION
Switch off the main machine and unplug the power cord. If the two-tray
finisher has been installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.

[A]

[C]

[B]

B178I516.WMF

B178I517.WMF

1. Unpack the punch unit. Then remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
2. Open the front door and remove the rear cover [A] ( x 4).
3. Remove the bracket [B] ( x 2) and paper guide [C] (stepped  x 1).

B202/B178/B180 1-34 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

Installation
[B]

[A]
[C]

B178I518.WMF
[E]

B178I519.WMF

[D]

4. Remove the hopper cover [A] ( x 2).


5. Install the sensor bracket [B] (stepped  x 1).
6. Install the spring [C].
7. Install the 2 mm spacer [D].
8. Install the punch unit [E] ( x 2, stepped  x 1).

SM 1-35 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

[A]

B178I520.WMF

[C]

[B]

B178I521.WMF

9. Connect the harnesses [A] and clamp them as shown.


10. Slide in the hopper [B].
11. Fasten the two 1-mm spacers [C] to the rear frame for future adjustment.
NOTE: The spacers are used to adjust the horizontal positioning of the punch
holes.
12. Reassemble the finisher. Then check the punch operation.

B202/B178/B180 1-36 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

1.5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY

Installation
Accessories Check List
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.

Description Q’ty
1. Front Tray Holder.................................................................1
2. Rear Tray Holder .................................................................1
3. Tray .....................................................................................2
4. Screw (M3 x 14)...................................................................4
5. Discharge Brush ..................................................................2
6. Ground Plate for Left Cover.................................................1
7. Ground Plate for Upper Exit.................................................1
8. Ground Plate for Lower Exit.................................................1

1 2 3 4

B178I522.WMF 5 6 7 8

SM 1-37 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

Installing the Multi-Bin Output Tray


NOTE: Install the duplex unit before you install the multi-bin output tray.

1. Open the left cover [A] of the duplex [D]


[E]
unit.
2. Install the ground plate [B] behind the
magnet.
3. Install the ground plate [C] on the rear
of the left cover.
[A]
4. Attach the ground plate to the top
cover. Then align the bottom edges of
the plate [D] and cover [E].
[C] [B]
B178I523.WMF

5. Attach the discharge brushes [F][G] to [H]


the upper edges of the paper exits.
Make sure that the ends of the brushes
[H][I] touch the ground plates [C][D]
respectively.
NOTE: Make sure the brushes do not [F]
stop paper at the exits.

[G]
[I]
[A] B178I524.WMF

6. Install the front [A] and rear [B] tray


holders on the top cover ( x 2 for [C]
each).
7. Install the upper [C] and lower [D]
trays.
8. Turn the main switch on. Then select
the SP mode menu, SP6–901–1. Then
change the multi-bin output tray
setting.
NOTE: The multi-bin output tray is not [B]
automatically recognized by the B178I525.WMF
printer mainframe. You cannot [D]
use the multi-bin output tray until you have changed this SP mode setting.

B202/B178/B180 1-38 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

1.5.8 BOOKLET FINISHER

Installation
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Description Q’ty
1. Regular tray .........................................................................1
2. Rail holder ...........................................................................1
3. Magnet catch–rear...............................................................1
4. Magnet catch–front ..............................................................1
5. Duplex-unit support .............................................................1
6. Rail joint...............................................................................1
7. Screw M4 x 12.....................................................................6
8. Screw M4 x 6.......................................................................8
9. Screw M3 x 14.....................................................................4
10. Rail ....................................................................................1
11. Stapler unit ........................................................................1
12. Staple cartridge .................................................................1
13. Pad ....................................................................................3

1 2 3 4

5
10
6

8 11
9

B602I912.WMF
13 12

NOTE: Make sure that you keep the pads. The pads are white and made of
Styrofoam.

SM 1-39 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

Adjusting the Height

[B]

[D]

[A] [C]

B602I901.WMF

B602I008.WMF

1. Check the optional paper tray type:


• Go to step 2 if the optional two-tray paper feed unit or the optional LCT is
installed.
• Go to “Main Body.” if either of them is not installed.
2. Tape the pads [A] to the right-hand side of the machine.
3. Lay the machine on its right-hand side.
4. Remove the adjuster plates [B] ( x 2).
5. Change the height [C].
6. Reinstall the adjuster plates [D] ( x 2).
7. Take the machine out of the box and stand it up.
8. Check that the height is correct. Then remove the pads.

B202/B178/B180 1-40 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

Main Body

Installation
1. Remove all tape and padding.

B602I001.WMF

2. Remove the screw cover [A].


3. Install the rail joint [B] ( x 4).
4. Reinstall the screw cover.

[A]

[B]
B602I902.WMF

5. Install the regular tray [C] ( x 4).

[C]

B602I903.WMF

SM 1-41 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

6. Install the magnet catches [A][B]


( x 2 for each).
7. Install the duplex-unit support [C] ( x 3). [A]

[C]
[B] B602I004.WMF

8. Set the rail [D] through the rail holder [E].


9. Install the rail holder (with the rail) to the
copier ( x 2).

[D] [E] B602I904.WMF

B202/B178/B180 1-42 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

Installation
10. Connect the booklet finisher unit to
the copier ( x 1).

B602I905.WMF

11. Install the stapler unit [A].

[A]

B602I907.WMF

12. Turn the knob [B] clockwise until the


staple-cartridge holder [C] goes to the
front-most position.
13. Install the staple cartridge [D] firmly to
[B]
the staple-cartridge holder.

[C]

[D] B602I908.WMF

14. Turn on the main switch and check the operation.

SM 1-43 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

Optional Punch Unit


Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Description Q’ty
1. Punch unit............................................................................1
2. Decal ...................................................................................1
3. Screw M4 x 6 (with the base) ..............................................1
4. Cable ...................................................................................2

4
B602I512.WMF

1. Remove the front lower cover


[A] ( x 2).

[A]
B602I009.WMF

B202/B178/B180 1-44 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

Installation
[E]
[F]

[B]

[C]
[D] [A]
B602I513.WMF

2. Remove the joint guard [A] ( x 2).


3. Open the front door [B].
4. Release the stopper and remove the knob [C].
5. Remove the front cover [D] ( x 2).
6. Remove the rear cover [E] ( x 3).
NOTE: Do not damage the mylar when you remove the screw.
7. Remove the right top cover with the paper entrance cover [F] ( x 4).

SM 1-45 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

8. Remove the right top cover [A] from [A]


the paper entrance cover [B].

[B]
B602I514.WMF

9. Install the punch unit [C] ( x 2, [D]


1 screw with the base [D])

[C] B602I515.WMF

10. Install the right top cover [E] ( x 2).


[E]

B602I516.WMF

B202/B178/B180 1-46 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

Installation
[B]
[A]

[C]
[D]

B602I517.WMF

11. Install the cable to the connectors as follows:


• J1003 (punch unit) [A] to CN12 (booklet finisher unit) [D]
• J1004 (punch unit) [B] to CN14 (booklet finisher unit) [C]

[F]

[E]
B602I518.WMF

B602I911.WMF

12. Fasten the cable with the clamps.


13. Reassemble the booklet finisher unit.
NOTE: Check that the side guide and the front cover correctly join with each
other [E].
14. Attach the decal [F].
15. Turn on the main switch. Then check the punch operation.

SM 1-47 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

1.5.9 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION


INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Machine Level
Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")/ 5°
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2")/ 5°

Location Requirement
Put the scanner on the right side of the mainframe as shown.
NOTE: 1) Make sure that the scanner is placed 660~724 mm above the floor.
2) Make sure that the scanner cable does not touch the floor.
3) Make sure to tell the user not to let the scanner cable get caught in
things such as a wheelchair.

G570I311.WMF

Requirement Conditions
Attach the platen cover option to the mainframe to cover the exposure glass.
Install the scanner on a solid base. Do not install the scanner in areas where the
unit can fall down when the ADF cover is opened.
Make sure you install the unit in areas that let the user get easy access to operate
the unit. Ask the customer what their requirements are before you install the unit.

B202/B178/B180 1-48 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

ACCESSARY CHECK

Installation
1. Exposure Glass Cleaner Holder..................................................... 1
2. Exposure Glass Cleaner ................................................................ 1
3. M3 x 6 screw.................................................................................. 12
4. M3 x 8 screw.................................................................................. 1
5. Ground screw................................................................................. 1
6. Core ............................................................................................... 2
7. Left support .................................................................................... 1
8. Right stay ....................................................................................... 1
9. Bracket........................................................................................... 1

1 2 3 4 5 6

9 8

G570I300.WMF

SM 1-49 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
NOTE: This installation procedure uses the following symbols.
: Screws

CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before you do the following procedure.

1. Remove the all tapes.


2. Remove rear cover [A] ( x 5). [A]

G570I301.WMF

3. Remove the ground cable [B]


( x 2).
4. Remove the duct [C]
( x 2,  x 1). [C]

[B]

G570I302.WMF

B202/B178/B180 1-50 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

[A]

Installation
[D]
[C]

[B]

G570I303.WMF
[E]
5. Remove the DF connector cable [A] ( x 2,  x1).
NOTE: Keep these screws. You will use these screws later.
6. Remove the connector bracket [B].
7. Disconnect the connector [C] of the IPU harness and release the clamp [D].
8. Remove the core [E] from the I/F cable.
NOTE: Keep this core. You will use this core later.

[L]
[G]
[K]

[F] [J]

[H]
[I] G570I304.WMF

9. Disconnect the I/F cable [F] from the IPU ( x 2). Then put it behind the ground
bracket [G] and to the left side.
10. Disconnect the harness [H] from the scanner unit to the scanner PSU ( x 3,
 x 1). Then put this harness inside the scanner frame.
11. Connect the connector of the DF connector cable [I] to the scanner PSU.
12. Bind the IPU harness [J] and DF connector cable [I] with the clamp [K]. Keep
these in the machine.
13. Attach the connector bracket [L] to the scanner PSU to keep this bracket.

SM 1-51 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

[D]

[B]
[C]

[A]
G570I305.WMF

14. Disconnect the PSU cable connector [A].


15. Detach the scanner PSU with bracket [B] ( x4). Then slide it to the right
slightly.
16. Attach the bracket [C] ( x 5).
NOTE: Use the two screws [D], which are removed in step 5.
17. Attach the scanner PSU with the bracket again ( x 4).

[F]

[E]
G570I306.WMF

18. Attach the right support [E] ( x 2).


19. Attach the left support [F] ( x 2).

B202/B178/B180 1-52 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

Installation
[A]

[D]

[B]
G570I307.WMF
[E] [C]

20. Put the I/F cable [A] through the opening on the frame. Then attach the core [B]
to the I/F cable.
21. Connect the I/F cable connector [C]. Then attach the cable holder [D] ( x 1)
and the ground [E] ( x 1) to the frame.

[F]

[I]

[H]
[G]

G570I308.WMF

22. Put the IPU cable [F] through the opening on the frame. Then attach the two
cores [G] to the IPU cable.
23. Connect the IPU cable connector [H] and attach the ground [I] ( x 1).

SM 1-53 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

[D]

[C]

[B]

[A] G570I309.WMF

24. Connect the PSU cable connector [A] and attach the ground [B]
(ground screw x 1).
25. Attach the scanner bracket [C] to the supports ( x 3) and the ground [D] ( x
1).
26. Install the duct ( x 2,  x 1) and ground cable ( x 2).

27. Cut the panel [E] along the cutout


line. [F]
NOTE: File the edge of the cutout
line.
28. Make a hole [F] for a screw in the
rear cover with a screwdriver.
29. Attach the rear cover
(M3x8 screw x 6).

[E]

G570I310.WMF

B202/B178/B180 1-54 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

1.5.10 KEY COUNTER HOLDER

Installation
1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 5).

[A]

B178I542.WMF

[B]
2. Cut a 15-mm (0.6") piece [B] off the 15 mm
tape. (0.6")
NOTE: You do not need the
smaller piece for the
installation.
B178I543.WMF

3. Remove the scanner right


cover [C] ( x 2). [C]
4. Clean the area [D] with
alcohol.
5. Attach the tape.

[D]

B178I544.WMF

SM 1-55 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT Rev. 09/2005

[A]

[D]
62 mm
(2.4")
[C]

[B]
B178I545.WMF B178I546.WMF

The view from the back The view from the top

6. Attach the key counter holder as follows.


• The bottom end of the key counter holder [B] is 62 mm (2.4") below the
bottom end of the scanner right cover [A].
• The bracket on the back of the key counter holder [C] is aligned to the rear
end of the scanner cover [D].
⇒ 7. The CN227 connector on the BCU has 8 pins. Pins # 1 to 4 are used for the
Key Counter, pins # 5 and 6 are used for the mechanical counter and pins # 7
and 8 are not used for US models. The intermediate harness [E] for the key
counter is connected to CN 227. The connector for this harness is located
inside the rear cover by the lower rear. (As shown in the illustration below).
Please connect the harness for Key Counter to this connector.
8. Reassemble the covers.
⇒ 9. Set SP 5-113-1 to 8.

[E]

B178I547.WMF

B202/B178/B180 1-56 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

1.5.11 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER

Installation
1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 5).

[A]

B178I542.WMF

[F]
2. Remove the scanner right cover [B]
( x 2).
3. Remove the rear scale [C] ( x 3). [C]
4. Remove the exposure glass [D] with
the left scale [E] ( x 2). [E]
[B]
NOTE: You do not have to remove the
ARDF exposure glass. Put the
glass marker [F] at the rear-left
corner when you reattach it if
the glass is removed.

[D]

B178I548.WMF

SM 1-57 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

5. Install the anti-condensation heater [A] [A]


in the rear-left corner of the scanner
unit ( x 2).
6. Pass the cable through the opening
[B] in the rear.

B178I549.WMF

[B]

[D]
7. Attach the clamps [C] to the rear
frame.
8. Fasten the cable with the clamps.
9. Connect the connector [D]. [C]
10. Reassemble the copier.

B178I550.WMF

B202/B178/B180 1-58 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

1.5.12 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER

Installation
CAUTION
1. Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following
procedure.
2. After you cut the lower-most rectangular piece off the right-bottom
corner of the rear cover, file the edges to smooth them. Rough edges
can hurt the user. The user pushes the tray-heater switch through this
rectangular opening.

1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 5).


2. Cut the lower-most rectangular piece
[B] off the right-bottom corner (viewed
from the rear) of the rear cover. [A]
3. File the edges to smooth them.

[B]

B178I565.WMF

4. Remove tray 1 and tray 2. [D]


5. Swing out the high voltage supply
unit [C] ( x 2).
6. Release the cable [D] for the anti-
condensation heater ( x 2).

[C]
B178I566.WMF

SM 1-59 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

[C]
7. Align the caution decal [A] with the
mark [B] on the front of the heater [A]
cover [C]. Then attach the caution
decal at this location.

[B] B178I555.WMF

8. Attach the anti-condensation heater [D]


( x 1).
9. Connect the anti-condensation heater
connector [E] to the connector [F] from [D]
the sub PSU.

[F]

[E]
B178I567.WMF

10. Reassemble the copier. Then put tray 1


and tray 2 back into the machine.
11. Attach the anti-condensation heater decal [G].

[G]
B178I552.WMF

12. Attach the “On/Stand by” decal on the left-


hand side of the main switch (not the tray
heater switch).

On

Stand by

B178I557.WMF

B202/B178/B180 1-60 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

1.5.13 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER

Installation
(SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION)

1. Remove the rear scale [A] ( x 3).


[A]
2. Remove the exposure glass [B] with
the left scale [C] ( x 2). [C]

[B]

G570I351.WMF

3. Remove the rear cover [D] ( x 3). [G]


[E]
4. Remove the right cover [E] ( x 3).
5. Remove the left cover [F] ( x 3).
6. Remove the rear frame [G]
( x 12,  x 2).

[D]
G570I352.WMF
[F]

7. Install the anti-condensation heater [H] [H]


in the rear-left corner of the scanner
unit ( x 2).
8. Pass the cable through the opening [I]
in the rear rail.

[I] G570I353.WMF

SM 1-61 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT

[B]

[C]

[D] [A]

G570I354.WMF

[E]

[F]
1

2 [G]
G570I355.WMF

9. Remove the cable opening cover [A] ( x 2).


NOTE: Keep these screws. You will use them later.
10. Attach the clamps [B] as shown.
11. Connect the heater connector [C] to the cable connector [D] and then bind the
cable with the clamps.
12. Attach the ground cable [E] to the frame ( x 1).
13. Attach the rear frame [F] ( x 12,  x 1).
14. Attach the cable bracket [G] ( x 2).
NOTE: Use the screws that are removed in step 9.
15. Assemble the left, right, rear cover, exposure glass with left scale and rear
scale.
16. Remove the rear cover of the copier ( x 6).

B202/B178/B180 1-62 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT

[F]

Installation
[E]
[D]
[B]

[C]
[G]
[A] G570I356.WMF

17. Remove the scanner bracket [A] of the scanner accessibility option ( x 4).
NOTE: If the scanner accessibility option has not been installed, do the
procedures for installing the scanner accessibility option ( 1.5.9)
before this step.
18. Remove the plate [B] in the scanner.
19. Put the cable [C] from the anti-condensation heater through the opening [D] of
the scanner bracket.
20. Connect the connector [E] of the cable to the connector [F] of the copier.
21. Attach the ground cable [G] ( x 1).
22. Attach the scanner bracket [A] ( x 4).
23. Attach the rear cover ( x 6).

SM 1-63 B202/B178/B180/
PRINTER OPTIONS

1.6 PRINTER OPTIONS


1.6.1 OVERVIEW
This machine has I/F card slots and SD card slots for optional I/F connections and
applications.

I/F Card Slot


A Ethernet&USB(ver2.0)
B File Format Converter
A
C Option
1
SD Card Slot
1 Option
2
2 Option
3 Service
3 B C B178I562.WMF

B178I561.WMF

I/F Card Slot


• Slot A is used for the standard Ethernet and USB ver.2.0 only.
• Slot B is used for the File Format Converter only.
• Slot C is used for one of the optional I/F connections: (IEEE1394, IEEE1284,
IEEE802.11 (Wireless LAN) or Bluetooth).

SD Card Slot
• Slot 1 is used for the standard printer/scanner application only.
• Slot 2 is used for one of the optional applications such as postscript 3 or data
overwrite security.
• Slot 3 is used for service only.

B202/B178/B180 1-64 SM
PRINTER OPTIONS

1.6.2 POSTSCRIPT 3

Installation
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following
procedure.

1. Remove the slot cover [A] from SD Card


Slot ( x 1).
2. Turn the SD-card face [B] to the rear of
the machine. Then push it slowly into slot
2 until you hear a click.
3. Attach the slot cover ( x 1). [A]

[B] B178I532.WMF

4. Attach the “Adobe PostScript 3” decal [C] to the


front cover.

[C]

B178I533.WMF

SM 1-65 B202/B178/B180/
PRINTER OPTIONS

1.6.3 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER

CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following
procedure.

[A]

[B]

B178I535.WMF

1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot B [A] ( x 2).
2. Install the file format converter board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).

B202/B178/B180 1-66 SM
PRINTER OPTIONS

1.6.4 IEEE 1394 (FIREWIRE)

Installation
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following
procedure.

[A]

[B]

B178I536.WMF

You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth).
1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot C [A] ( x 2).
2. Install the FireWire board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).

SM 1-67 B202/B178/B180/
PRINTER OPTIONS

UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394


Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface
settings for IEEE 1394. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
1. Press the “User Tools/Counter” key.
2. On the touch panel, press “System Settings”.
3. Press “Interface Settings”.
4. Press “IEEE1394”.
5. Press following soft keys on the touch panel. Then set up the following settings:
• “IP Address”
Set the IP Address and Subnet Mask.
• “IP over 1394”
Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables IP over 1394
as the default setting for the printing method.
• “SCSI Print”
Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables SCSI Print as
the default setting for the printing method.
• “Bi-directional SCSI Print”
Switch bi-directional printing on or off for SCSI print.

SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394


The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 1394.

SP No. Name Function


5839 004 Host Name Sets the name of the device used on the network.
Example: RNPXXXXXXXXXX
5839 007 Cycle Master Enables or disables cycle master function of the IEEE
1394 standard bus.
5839 008 BCR Mode Sets the BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) setting for
the Auto Node operation for the standard IEEE1394 bus
for when IRM is not in use. The following three settings
are available: “Standard,” “IRM Color Copy,” and
“Always Effective.”
5839 009 IRM 1394a Determines whether an IRM check for IEEE 1394a is
Check conducted for the Auto Node when IRM is not used.
5839 010 Unique ID Enables the “Node_Unique_Id” setting for enumeration
on the standard IEEE 1394 bus.
5839 011 Logout Determines how successive initiator login requests are
handled during login in for SBP-2.
5839 012 Login Enables or disables exclusive login for SBP-2.
5839 013 Login MAX Sets the limit for the number of logins for SBP-2. Range:
1 ~ 62.

B202/B178/B180 1-68 SM
PRINTER OPTIONS

1.6.5 IEEE 1284

Installation
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following
procedure.

[A]

[B]

B178I537.WMF

You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth).
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F Card Slot C ( x 2).
2. Install the interface board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).

SM 1-69 B202/B178/B180/
PRINTER OPTIONS

1.6.6 IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN)


Installation Procedure
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following
procedure.

[A]

[B]

B178I538.WMF

You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth).
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F Card Slot C ( x 2).
2. Install the wireless LAN board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).

B202/B178/B180 1-70 SM
PRINTER OPTIONS

Installation
[C]

[E]

[B]

[D]

[F]

[A] B178I539.WMF

3. If the extended antennas (option) are to be installed, pull off the edge connector
protector [A] and discard it.
4. Insert the card [B] into the PCMCIA slot. Make sure the card label faces to the
front of the machine.
5. Use the provided double-sided tape to install the antennas [C] on the left rear
corner of the machine.
NOTE: The antennas should be separated by at least 40 ~ 60 mm (1.5~2.5").
Always detach the antennas from the corners of the machine and
disconnect them before you move the machine.
6. Put the antennas through the hole in the cover [F].
7. Connect the antennas to the terminals [D].
8. Coil the cables [E]. Then hang them over the antennas as shown.
9. Attach the cover [F] ( x 2).
10. You may have to move the machine if the reception is not clear.
• Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of
equipment that generates strong magnetic fields.
• Put the machine as close as possible to the access point.

SM 1-71 B202/B178/B180/
PRINTER OPTIONS

UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN


Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface
settings for IEEE 802.11b. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
NOTE: You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet.
1. Press the “User Tools/Counter” key.
2. On the touch panel, press “System Settings”.
NOTE: The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or
wireless LAN.
3. Select “Interface Settings” → “Network” (tab) → “Network I/F Setting”
4. Press “IEEE 802.11b”. Only the wireless LAN options show.
5. Communication Mode. Select either “802.11 Ad hoc”, “Ad hoc” or
“Infrastructure”.
6. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
7. Channel. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.
Range: 1 ~ 14 (default: 11)
NOTE: The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different
countries.
8. WEP (Encryption) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is
designed to protect wireless data transmission. The same WEP key is required
on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded data. There are 64 bit and 128
bit WEP keys.
WEP:
Selects “Active” or “Inactive”. (“Inactive” is default.)
Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit 10 characters
128 bit 26 characters
9. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to show more settings. Then
select the transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps,
1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match the distance between the
closest machine or access point. This depends on which mode is selected.
NOTE: For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine and
the closest PC in the network. For the Infrastructure Mode, this is the
distance between the machine and the closest access point.
11 Mbps 140 m (153 yd.)
5.5 Mbps 200 m (219 yd.)
2 Mbps 270 m (295 yd.)
1 Mbps 400 m (437 yd.)

B202/B178/B180 1-72 SM
PRINTER OPTIONS

10. Press “Return to Default” to initialize the wireless LAN settings.

Installation
Press “Yes” to initialize the following settings:
• Transmission mode
• Channel
• Transmission Speed
• WEP
• SSID
• WEP Key

SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN


The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11b

SP No. Name Function


5840 006 Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the
country.
5840 007 Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the channels settings
allowed for your country.
5840 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
UP mode Name Function
SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
WEP Mode Used to show the maximum length of the string that can
be used for the WEP Key entry.

SM 1-73 B202/B178/B180/
PRINTER OPTIONS

1.6.7 BLUETOOTH

CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following
procedure.

[A]

[C]

[D]

[E]
[B]

B178I540.WMF

You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth).
1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot C [A] ( x 2).
2. Install the Bluetooth board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
3. Insert the Bluetooth card [C] into the slot in the interface board.
4. Press the antenna [D] to extend it.
5. Attach the antenna cap [E].

B202/B178/B180 1-74 SM
Rev. 06/2006 PRINTER OPTIONS

⇒1.6.8 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)

Installation
Before You Begin The Procedure

1. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values:
z Supervisor login password
z Administrator login name
z Administrator login password

If any of these settings are at a factory default value, tell the customer these
settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure.

 IMPORTANT NOTE
If the Customer forgets the Supervisor login password after changing it
from the default setting, a service call is required and the NVRAM must be
replaced to reset the Supervisor login and password.

2. Make sure that “Admin. Authentication” – “Machine Management” is ON.


[System Settings] – [Administrator Tools] – [Administrator Authentication
Management] - [Machine Management]

If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the
installation procedure.

3. Make sure that under Machine Management “Administrator Tools” is enabled


(selected).
[System Settings] – [Administrator Tools] – [Administrator Authentication
Management] – [Machine Management] - [Available Settings]

If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be
enabled (selected) before you do the installation procedure.

Accessory Check
The B202/B178/B180 uses a Type D Data Overwrite Security Unit. Check the
accessories and their quantities against this list:

Description Q’ty
1. SD Card ............................................................................... 1

SM 1-75 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER OPTIONS Rev. 06/2006


Seal Check and Removal

[A] B735I901.WMF

[B] B735I903.WMF

1. Ensure a customer witness is present when opening the DOSS option.


2. Make sure that:
1) The box has two pieces of tape [A] attached to the corners in the photo,
AND
2) These two tapes are blank.
¾ If you can see “VOID” on the surface of the tape, DO NOT install the
components in the box. Stop this procedure and contact the Technical Hotline
via the e-Lert form on the TSC Website. Retain the box and its contents. Any
tampering of the DOSS option will need to be investigated.

3. If the results of Step 1 are OK, remove the two pieces of tape from the box.
Note: After you remove the tapes, you will see “VOID” written on the box under
the tape [B]. This is normal.
4. The procedures outline in this bulletin needs to be followed if the DOSS option
is replaced due to a failure.

CAUTION
Before you begin any procedure, always turn OFF the machine main power
switch and unplug the power cord.

B202/B178/B180 1-76 SM
Rev. 06/2006 PRINTER OPTIONS

⇒Installation Procedure

Installation
CAUTION
The machine must always be turned off and its power cord disconnected
before you do this procedure.

NOTE: You must install the data overwrite protection unit in SD Card slot 2.
However, the postscript option for this machine is also installed in SD Card
slot 2. You must do the SD Card Appli move procedure first if you have the
postscript option installed and you want to install the data overwrite
protection unit. Move the Data Overwriting Security application (slot 3) to
the SD Card that contains the Printer/ Scanner application (slot 1).
( 5.7).
1. If the machine is ON, turn the
operation switch and the main
power switch OFF.
2. If the NIB is installed, disconnect
the network cable.
3. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]
(x1).
[A]
4. Turn the SD-Card face [B] to the
rear of the machine. Then push it
slowly into Slot 2 until you hear a
click.
5. If the NIB is installed, reconnect the
network cable.
6. Turn the main power switch ON.
7. Do SP5878 (Option Setup). B735I111.WMF

[B]
8. Exit SP mode.
9. Turn the operation switch OFF, and then turn the main power switch OFF.
10. Turn the main power switch ON.
11. Do SP5990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).

SM 1-77 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER OPTIONS Rev. 06/2006


12. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version on the diagnostic report are
the same as those in the chart below .
z [A]: “ROM Number/Firmware Version” – “HDD Format Option”
z [B]: “Loading Program” – “GW1a_zoffy” (Data Overwrite Security Unit Type C)
“Loading Program” – “GW2a_zoffy” (Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D)
Diagnostic Report: “ROM No. / Firmware “Loading Program” [B]
Version” [A]
Data Overwrite Security HDD Format Option: GW1a_zoffy:
Unit Type C B7355050 / 0.04 B7355050 / 0.04
Data Overwrite Security HDD Format Option: GW2a_zoffy:
Unit Type D B7355060 / 0.03 B7355060 / 0.03
Important: The ROM number and firmware version number change when the
firmware is upgraded.

• If the ROM numbers are not the same, or the version numbers are not the same,
this means the unit was not installed correctly.

If this happens:
¾ Make sure the MFP model and unit type match (Type C or D).
The B202/B178/B180 uses a Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D.
¾ If they do not match:
1) Do the installation procedure again, from Step 1.
2) Replace the “Data Overwrite Security Unit” (SD card) with the correct
type. Redo installation procedure.
3) Replace the NV-RAM. Redo installation procedure.

13. Turn “Auto Erase Memory Setting” ON:


User Tools >> System Settings >> Administrator Tools >> Auto Erase Memory
Setting >> ON
¾ If the customer has enabled Administrator Authentication Management -
Machine Management they will have to log in to change this User Tool
setting.

[C]

B202/B178/B180 1-78 SM
Rev. 06/2006 PRINTER OPTIONS

Installation
14. Exit User Tools.
15. Power the machine OFF/ON.

[A]
[B]

09/09/2003 14:13
Origi. Total Copies
0 1 0

16. Make sure the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed on the operation panel.
If it is not displayed, do Step 7 again.
17. Make a sample copy.
18. Make sure the overwrite icon changes as follows:
• The bottom of the icon (white part) becomes thicker [B].
• “Next Copy” is displayed for a short time under the icon.
• The icon returns to its usual shape [C].

1.6.9 CHECK ALL CONDITIONS

1. Plug in the power cord. Then turn ON the main switch.


2. Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page.
User Tools > Printer Settings > List Test Print > Config. Page
Do Sp1-004 – Print Summary if you want to print the same data. All installed
options show the “System Reference” column.

SM 1-79 B202/B178/B180
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
SETTINGS

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 SETTINGS
New Unit Set
You must enable New Unit Set (SP5-999) before you replace these units:

Maintenance
• PCU–K (SP5-999-001) • Development Unit–Y (SP5-999-006)

Preventive
• PCU–Y (SP5-999-002) • Development Unit–M (SP5-999-007)
• PCU–M (SP5-999-003) • Development Unit–C (SP5-999-008)
• PCU–C (SP5-999-004) • Fusing Unit (SP5-999-009)
• Development Unit–K (SP5-999-005)
Do this procedure to enable the New Unit Set program (and to replace a unit):
1. Start the SP mode ( 5.1.1).
2. Select a program from SP5-999-001 to 009.
3. Select “1. Enable.”
4. Select “OK.”
5. Quit the SP mode.
6. Turn the main switch off.
7. Replace the unit.
8. Turn the main switch on. The machine starts the initialization for the new unit.

PM Counter Reset
Reset the counter (SP7-804) after you replace these units:
• By-pass tray (SP7-804-011) • Tray 4 (SP7-804-015)
• Tray 1 (SP7-804-012) • Transfer unit (SP7-804-017)
• Tray 2 (SP7-804-013) • Transfer belt cleaning unit (SP7-804-
• Tray 3 (SP7-804-014) 018)

Do this procedure to enable the New Unit Set program (and to replace a unit):
1. Start the SP mode ( 5.1.1).
2. Select a program from SP7-804-011 to 018.
3. Select “EXECUTE.”
4. Quit the SP mode.

SM 2-1 B202/B178/B180
PM TABLES Rev. 09/2005

2.2 PM TABLES
Chart: A4 (LT)/5%
Mode: 3 copies/original (prints/job)
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.

Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect


Copier
B178/B180 B202
Item Remarks
60K 120K 150K EM 52K 104K 130K EM
Scanner
1st/2nd/3rd mirrors C C Optics cloth
Front and Rear Rails C C Dry cloth
Exposure Glass C C C C Dry cloth; alcohol
ADF Exposure Glass C C C C Dry cloth; alcohol
Exposure Lamp I I Dry cloth; alcohol
APS Sensor C C Dry cloth
Development
Dev. Unit–K R R 2.1
Dev. Unit–C R R 2.1
Dev. Unit–M R R 2.1
Dev. Unit–Y R R 2.1
PCU R R 2.1
Transfer
Waste Toner Bottle R R


Fusing 2.1
Pressure Roller R R
⇒ Fusing Roller
Heat Roller
R
R
R
R
Pressure Cleaning Roller R R
Oil Supply Roller R R
Fusing Belt R R
Pick-off Pawl Ass’y R R
Stripper Pawls C C Dry cloth; alcohol
Pressure Roller Thermistor C C Dry cloth; alcohol
Heating Roller Thermistor C C Dry cloth; alcohol
Spurs C C Dry cloth; alcohol
Paper Path
Registration Sensor C C Blower brush
Duplex Unit
Inverter Roller C C Damp cloth
Transport Roller C C Damp cloth
Inverter Sensor C C Blower brush
Miscellaneous
Distributed with
Dust Filter R R development unit-K
Breaker I I
Tray
Feed rollers R R
Pick-up Rollers R R
Separation Rollers R R

B202/B178/B180 2-2 SM
PM TABLES

ARDF
Item 240K EM Remarks
Pick-up Roller R C Damp cloth; alcohol
Feed Belt R C Damp cloth; alcohol
Separation Roller R C Damp cloth; alcohol
Sensors C C Blower brush
Platen Sheet Cover C Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if required.)
White Plate C Dry or damp cloth

Maintenance
Preventive
Drive Gear L Grease G501
Transport Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Exit Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Inverter Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Idle Rollers C Damp cloth; alcohol

NOTE: 240k copies (= 80k originals x 3 copies/original)

One-Tray Paper Feed Unit


Item 150K EM Remarks
Feed Roller R Damp cloth
Pick-up Roller R Damp cloth
Separation Roller R Damp cloth

Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit


Item 150K EM Remarks
Feed Rollers R Damp cloth
Pick-up Rollers R Damp cloth
Separation Rollers R Damp cloth

LCT
Item 150K EM Remarks
Relay Roller C Damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad C Damp cloth
Feed Rollers R Damp cloth
Pick-up Rollers R Damp cloth
Separation Rollers R Damp cloth

Two-Tray Finisher
Items 240K EM Remarks
Rollers C Damp cloth
Discharge Brush C Dry cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
Jogger Fences I Replace if required.

Two-Tray Finisher Punch Kit


Item 240K EM Remarks
Punch Chad C Discard chad.

SM 2-3 B202/B178/B180
OTHERS

Booklet Finisher
Item 60K EM Remarks
Rollers C Damp cloth
Shafts C Damp cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
Jogger fences I

Booklet Finisher Punch Kit


Item 60K EM Remarks
Punch Chad C C Discard chad.

2.3 OTHERS
NOTE: These units are considered as EM parts since their expected lifetimes are
relatively long.
Copier
Item 150K 250K 500K 1000K Remarks
Transfer
Transfer Unit R 2.1
Belt Cleaning Unit R 2.1
Bypass Tray
Feed Roller R 2.1
Pickup Roller R 2.1
Separation Roller R 2.1

LCT
Item 150K 250K 500K 1000K Remarks
Relay Roller R
Bottom Plate Pad R

B202/B178/B180 2-4 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
SPECIAL TOOLS

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

CAUTION
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before you do the
procedures in this section.

3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS


Part Number Description Q’ty
B6455010 SD Card 1

Replacement

Adjustment
B6456700 PCMCIA Card Adapter 1

and
B6456800 USB Reader/Writer 1
A029 9387 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE87 1
G021 9350 Loop-back Connector – Parallel NOTE 1
C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope 1
A2579300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 1
52039501 Silicon Grease G-501 1
A0929503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) 1
A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4pcs/set) 1
G5885140 Plug - IEEE1284 Type C 1

NOTE: The “Loop-back Connector–Parallel” requires the “Plug-IEEE1284 Type C”.

SM 3-1 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

3.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT


3.2.1 SCANNING
Check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin
adjustment before you do the following scanner adjustments.
NOTE: Use a C4 test chart to do the following adjustments.

Scanner sub-scan magnification


1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make
a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP4-008 if
necessary.
Standard: ±1.0%.
A

A: Sub-scan magnification
B178R505.WMF

Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration


1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make A
a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration.
Adjust the following SP modes if necessary.
Standard: 0 ± 2mm.
SP mode B
Leading Edge Registration SP4-010-001
Side-to-Side Registration SP4-011-001

B178R506.WMF

A: Leading Edge Registration


B: Side-to-side Registration

B202/B178/B180 3-2 SM
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

Main scan dot position correction


NOTE: Adjust the printer registration before you adjust the scanner.
1. Enter the SP mode and open SP4-010 and SP4-011.
2. Check that each value is the same as the factory-set value.
3. Press the “COPY Window” key and copy the C-4 chart in the full-color photo
mode.
NOTE: Make sure you copy in photo mode. This is because you cannot
correctly check color displacement in text mode.
4. Check the yellow and cyan vertical lines. (Use a Magnification Scope to do this)
Exit the SP mode to end the adjustment if they exactly overwrite the black line
at the edges of the copy. Go to the next step if the yellow and cyan lines extend
past the black line.

Replacement

Adjustment
5. Press the “SP Mode” key to go back to the SP mode. Then open SP4-932.

and
Compare the current values with this table.
SP4-932-1 Dot Position correction R left edge
SP4-932-2 Dot Position correction R right edge
SP4-932-3 Dot Position correction B left edge
SP4-932-4 Dot Position correction B right edge

SM 3-3 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

3.2.2 ARDF
ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration

B
B178R507.WMF
A: Leading edge registration
B: Side-to-side registration

B178R508.WMF

Use 11 X 17 Inch paper to make a temporary test chart as shown above.


1. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the registration. Use the following SP modes to adjust if necessary.
SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range
SP6-006-001 Side-to-Side Registration ± 3.0 mm
SP6-006-002 Leading Edge Registration (Simplex) ± 42 steps
SP6-006-003 Buckle: Duplex Front ± 42 steps
SP6-006-004 Buckle: Duplex Rear ± 45 steps

B202/B178/B180 3-4 SM
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

3.2.3 REGISTRATION
Image Area
B
Make sure that the registration is
adjusted within the adjustment standard Feed direction
range as shown below. A

Image Area

Replacement

Adjustment
A = B = C = 4.2mm (1.6") B178R509.WMF
Leading Edge

and
Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.

Side to Side
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station. Use SP mode
(SP1-002) to adjust the side-to-side registration for the optional paper feed unit,
LCT, and duplex unit.

Adjustment Standard
• Leading edge (sub-scan direction): 3 ± 0 mm
• Side to side (main-scan direction): 2 ± 0 mm

Paper Registration Standard


The registration in both main- and sub-scan directions can change within the
following tolerance.
1st side
• Sub-scan direction: 0 ± 1.5 mm
• Main-scan direction: 0 ± 2 mm
2nd side in duplex
• Sub-scan direction: 0 ± 3 mm
• Main-scan direction: 0 ± 4 mm

SM 3-5 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP5-997.
2. Print out the pattern (trimming pattern) with SP5-997.
NOTE: Registration can change slightly as shown above. Print some pages of
the trimming pattern for step 3 and 4. Then average the leading edge
and side-to-side registration values and adjust each SP mode.
3. Do the leading edge registration adjustment.
1) Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1-001.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed).
3) Input the value. Then press the  key.
4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.
4. Do the side-to-side registration adjustment.
1) Check the side-to-side registration and adjust it with SP1-002.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper feed station).
3) Input the value. Then press the  key.
4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.

3.2.4 COLOR REGISTRATION


Line Position Adjustment
The automatic line position adjustment usually is done for a specified condition to
get the best color prints.
Do the following if color registration shifts:
Do “Auto Color Registration” with the user tools (Maintenance menu – Color
Registration) or SP5-993-2 to do the forced line position adjustment. You
should also do the line position adjustment at these times:
• After you transport or move the machine (you should do the forced line
position adjustment if you install the machine at the user location.) if the
machine is pre-installed at the workshop and moved to the user location,
• When you open the drum positioning plate
• When you remove or replace the motors, clutches, and/or gears related to
the drum/development/transfer sections
• When you remove or replace the transfer belt, transfer belt unit or laser
optical housing unit

Adjustment of Line Speed for Thick Paper


You must adjust the line speed of the fusing unit (the speed of development
motor-K) at these times:
• The color registration shifts more on the trailing edge than on the leading
edge.
• The problem has not been solved by the line position adjustment.

B202/B178/B180 3-6 SM
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

3.2.5 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION


NOTE: The ACC is usually sufficient to adjust the color balance to get the best
print output. You only need the printer gamma correction to fine-tune to
meet user requirements.
Use SP modes if you want to modify the printer gamma curve created with ACC.
You can adjust the gamma data for the following:
• Highlight
• Middle
• Shadow areas
• IDmax.
The adjustable range is from 0 to 15 (16 steps).

Replacement

Adjustment
Copy Mode

and
KCMY Color Balance Adjustment
The adjustment uses only “Offset” values.
NOTE: Never change “Option” values (default value is 0).
Highlight (Low ID) Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Middle (Middle ID) Levels 3 through 7 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Shadow (High ID) Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Level 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire image
ID max
density.)
The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID,
Offset
middle ID, high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.

There are four adjustable modes (SP4-918-009):


• Copy Photo mode
• Copy Letter mode
• Copy Letter (Single Color) mode
• Copy Photo (Single Color) mode

SM 3-7 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

B178R510.WMF

B202/B178/B180 3-8 SM
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

Adjustment Procedure
1. Copy the C-4 chart in the mode that you want to adjust.
2. Enter the SP mode.
3. Select “Copy SP.”
4. Select SP4-918-009.
5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard ( the
table below).

NOTE: 1) Never change “Option” value (default value is 0).


2) Adjust the density in this order: “ID Max,” “Middle,” “Shadow,”
“Highlight.”

Replacement

Adjustment
and
- Photo Mode, Full Color -
Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard
ID max: Adjust the offset value so that
1 (K, C, M, and Y) the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
B178R968.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
2 the density of level 6 matches
that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
B178R969.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
3 the density of level 8 matches
that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
B178R970.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
dirty background does not show
4 on the copy and the density of
level 3 is slightly lighter than that
of level 3 on the C-4 chart.
B178R971.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
the color balance of black scale
levels 3 through 5 in the copy is
B178R9
72.WMF seen as gray (no C, M, or Y
should be visible). If the black
scale contains C, M, or Y, do
steps 1 to 4 again.

SM 3-9 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

- Photo Mode, Single Color -


Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard
ID max: Adjust the offset value so that
1 (K) the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
B178R973.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
2 the density of level 6 matches
that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
B178R974.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
3 the density of level 8 matches
that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
B178R975.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
dirty background does not show
B178R9
76.WMF on the copy and the density of
level 3 is slightly lighter than that
of level 3 on the C-4 chart.

- Text (Letter) Mode, Full Color -

Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard
ID max: Adjust the offset value so that
1 (K, C, M, and Y) the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
B178R977.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
2 the density of level 6 matches
that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
B178R978.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
3 the density of level 8 matches
that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
B178R979.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
dirty background does not show
B178R9
80.WMF on the copy and the density of
level 3 is slightly lighter than that
of level 3 on the C-4 chart.

B202/B178/B180 3-10 SM
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

- Text (Letter) Mode, Single Color -

Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard
ID max: Adjust the offset value so that
1 (K) the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
B178R981.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
2 the density of level 6 matches
that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
B178R982.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
3 the density of level 8 matches
that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
B178R983.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
dirty background does not show
B178R9
84.WMF on the copy and the density of

Replacement
level 3 is slightly lighter than that

Adjustment
of level 3 on the C-4 chart.

and
NOTE: Text parts of the test pattern cannot be printed clearly after you adjust
“shadow” as shown above. At this time, check if the 5 line/mm pattern at
each corner is printed clearly. If it is not, adjust the offset value of “shadow”
again until it is.

SM 3-11 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

Printer Mode
There are six adjustable modes (select these modes with printer SP1-102-001):
• 1200 x 1200 photo mode
• 600 x 600 text mode
• 1800 x 600 text mode
• 600 x 600 photo mode
• 1800 x 600 photo mode
• 1200 x 1200 text mode
K C M Y
Highlight SP1-104-1 SP1-104-21 SP1-104-41 SP1-104-61
Shadow SP1-104-2 SP1-104-22 SP1-104-42 SP1-104-62
Middle SP1-104-3 SP1-104-23 SP1-104-43 SP1-104-63
IDmax SP1-104-4 SP1-104-24 SP1-104-44 SP1-104-64

Adjustment Procedure
1. Do ACC for the printer mode.
2. Turn the main power off and on.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select “Printer SP”.
5. Select SP1-102-001. Then select the necessary print mode to adjust.
6. Choose SP1-103-1 to print out a tone control test sheet if you want to examine
the image quality for these settings.
7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104 as shown following table lists. Compare
the tone control test sheet with the C4 test chart.
NOTE: Adjust the density in this order: “ID Max”, “Shadow”, “Middle”,
“Highlight”.
8. Use SP1-105-001 to keep the adjusted settings.

B202/B178/B180 3-12 SM
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

Adjustment Reference For Gamma Correction


The following tables show the adjustment reference for gamma correction. The
tables show the following:
• Level of the color scale on the C4 test chart
• Tone control test sheet printed in the printer SP mode.
For example, for K at text mode, grade 12 on the tone control test sheet should be
the same as grade 7 on the C4 chart.
It is not usually necessary to adjust the gamma data as shown in the table since
ACC adjusts the gamma curve automatically. You only need fine-tune of color
balance by gamma data adjustment when the result from ACC and Color
Calibration does not meet the customer’s requirements.

Replacement

Adjustment
C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

and
600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 16 -
Photo 1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 8 10 11 16 -
K Test 1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 16
sheet 600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 16 -
Text 1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 12 16 -
1200 x 1200 - 1 3 5 6 9 11 12 15 16

C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 12 13 14
Photo 1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 8 10 11 12 13
C Test 1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 5 8 10 11 12 13
sheet 600 x 600 - 1 3 4 5 8 10 11 12 13
Text 1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 12 14
1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13

C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
600 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 12 14 16 -
Photo 1800 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 12 15 16 -
M Test 1200 x 1200 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 14 16 -
sheet 600 x 600 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 14 16 -
Text 1800 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 13 14 16 -
1200 x 1200 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 13 16 -

C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
600 x 600 1 3 4 9 11 12 14 15 16 -
Photo 1800 x 600 1 3 5 8 10 11 14 15 16 -
Y 1200 x 1200 1 3 5 8 10 11 14 15 16 -
Test
sheet 14/
600 x 600 1 2 5 8 10 11 14 15 16
15
Text
1800 x 600 1 3 6 9 10 12 14 15 16 -
1200 x 1200 1 2 4 7 9 10 13 15 16 -

SM 3-13 B202/B178/B180
DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT

3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT


3.3.1 TOP COVER

1. External tray [A]


[B]
2. Open the duplex left cover [B]. [C]
3. Top cover [C] ( x 4)

[A] B178R511.WMF

3.3.2 DUPLEX CONTROL BOARD

1. Top cover ( 3.3.1)


2. Duplex control board [A] ( x 4,  x 7)

[A]

B178R512.WMF

B202/B178/B180 3-14 SM
DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT

3.3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 1

1. Top cover ( 3.3.1)


2. Exit tray [A] [B]
3. Duplex unit [B] ( x 1,  x 1)

[A]

Replacement

Adjustment
and
B178R513.WMF

4. Inner cover [C] ( x 2)


[C]
5. Duplex control board bracket [D]
( x 2,  x 7)

[D]
B178R514.WMF

6. Duplex inverter motor 1 [E]


( x 2, 1 timing belt)

[E]
B178R515.WMF

SM 3-15 B202/B178/B180
DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT

3.3.4 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 2 AND SWITCH


[A]
1. Duplex control board bracket ( 3.3.3)
2. Duplex inverter unit switch [A]
( x 1,  x 1)
3. Duplex inverter motor 2 [B]
( x 2, 1 timing belt)

[B]

B178R516.WMF

3.3.5 EXIT SENSOR 3 AND DUPLEX INVERTER SENSOR


[C]
1. Open the duplex inverter unit [A]
2. Exit sensor 3 [B] ( x 1)
3. Duplex inverter sensor [C]
( x 1,  x 2)
[B]

[A]
B178R517.WMF

[B] [A]
3.3.6 EXIT SENSOR 1 AND 2

1. Top cover ( 3.3.1)


2. Open the duplex unit.
3. Exit sensor 1 [A]
( x 1,  x 1, 1 bracket)
4. Exit sensor 2 [B] ( x 1)

B178R518.WMF

B202/B178/B180 3-16 SM
DUPLEX FEED UNIT

3.4 DUPLEX FEED UNIT


3.4.1 DUPLEX DRIVE BOARD

[B]

[A] [C]

Replacement

Adjustment
and
B178R519.WMF B178R520.WMF

1. Open the front cover


2. Duplex feed unit [A] ( x 1)
3. Inner cover [B] ( x 1)
4. Duplex drive board [C] ( x 2,  x 3)

3.4.2 DUPLEX FEED MOTOR


[A]
1. Duplex feed unit ( 3.4.1)
2. Inner cover [A] ( x 1)
3. Duplex feed motor [B]
( x 1,  x 1, 1 timing belt)

B178R521.WMF
[B]

SM 3-17 B202/B178/B180
DUPLEX FEED UNIT

3.4.3 DUPLEX FEED SENSOR

[A]

B178R522.WMF

1. Duplex feed unit ( 3.4.1)


2. Duplex feed sensor [A] ( x 1)

B202/B178/B180 3-18 SM
EXTERIOR COVERS

3.5 EXTERIOR COVERS


NOTE: 1) Go to section 3.7.2, “Laser Optics Housing Unit” if you want the removal
procedure for the paper exit tray.
2) Go to section 3.12.14, “Paper Exit” if you want the removal procedure
for the paper exit cover.

3.5.1 REAR, FRONT, AND RIGHT SIDES

1. ARDF or platen cover (if installed)


2. Rear cover [A] ( x 5, 2 hooks)

Replacement

Adjustment
and
[A]

B178R523.WMF

3. Front cover [B] (2 pins)

[B]

B178R524.WMF

SM 3-19 B202/B178/B180
EXTERIOR COVERS

4. Open the by-pass tray [A]. [D]


[C]
5. Right cover [B] ( x 2)
6. Upper right cover [C] ( x 1,
strap x 1)
7. Upper front cover [D] ( x 2)

[A] B178R525.WMF

[B]

CAUTION: Do not put things on the operation panel. The operation panel can
become unstable when you remove the upper front cover.

8. Scanner right cover ( 3.5.3)


9. Rear right cover [E]
( x 4, 1 hook)

[E]

B178R905.WMF

B202/B178/B180 3-20 SM
EXTERIOR COVERS

3.5.2 LEFT SIDE [E]

[D]

[C]
[F]

[A]

Replacement

Adjustment
and
[B]
B178R527.WMF

1. Duplex unit ( 3.3.3)


2. Duplex unit base cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Duplex inverter guide [B]
4. Duplex unit base [C] ( x 6)
5. Left cover [D] ( x 6, 1 hook)
6. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)
7. Open the upper left cover [E]
8. Scanner left cover ( 3.5.3)
9. Rear left cover [F] ( x 4)

SM 3-21 B202/B178/B180
EXTERIOR COVERS

3.5.3 OPERATION PANEL AND SCANNER COVERS

[D]

[B]

[A]
[C]

B178R528.WMF

1. ARDF or platen cover (if installed)


2. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)
3. Upper front cover ( 3.5.1)
4. Operation panel [A] ( x 4,  x 1)
5. Scanner left cover [B] ( x 2, 1 hook)
6. Scanner right cover [C] ( x 2)
7. Scanner rear cover [D] ( x 1)

B202/B178/B180 3-22 SM
SCANNER UNIT

3.6 SCANNER UNIT


3.6.1 EXPOSURE GLASS

1. Rear scale [A] ( x 3) [D]


[B]
2. Exposure glass with left scale [B]
( x 2) [C] [A]
3. ARDF exposure glass [C]
NOTE: Position the glass marker [D] at
the rear-left corner when you
reattach the exposure glass and
ARDF exposure glass.

Replacement

Adjustment
and
B178R529.WMF

3.6.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH/WIDTH SENSOR

1. Exposure glass with left scale [B]


( 3.6.1) [A]

2. Original length sensors [A]


( x 2,  x2)
3. Original width sensor 1 [B]
( x 1,  x1)

B178R530.WMF

SM 3-23 B202/B178/B180
SCANNER UNIT

3.6.3 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU)

1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)


2. Exposure glass ( 3.6.1)
3. Scanner right cover ( 3.5.3) [A]
4. Inner cover [A] ( x 4)

B178R531.WMF

[B]
5. Sensor board unit
[B] ( x 5,  x 4)
NOTE: Connect the connectors to
the SBU holding the SBU
with your hand when you
replace the SBU.

B178R532A.WMF

When reassembling
Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit:
• SP4–008 (Sub Scan Mag)
• SP4–010 (Sub Mag Reg.)
• SP4–011 (Main Scan Mag)
• SP4–688 (DF: Density Adjustment)
• SP4–800 (DF: Density Correction for R, G or B)

B202/B178/B180 3-24 SM
SCANNER UNIT

Replacement

Adjustment
and
B178R633.WMF

Input the barcode numbers with following SPs. These barcode numbers are printed
on the paper that is provided with the SBU.
Adjusting the gray valance level for each color
Input "4" with SP4-885: Level Convert Adjustment for R
Input "5" with SP4-886: Level Convert Adjustment for G
Input "6" with SP4-887: Level Convert Adjustment for B
Adjusting the printer vector correction
Input "7" with SP4-540-001: Printer Vector for R: Option
Input "8" with SP4-540-002: Printer Vector for R: Red
Input "9" with SP4-540-003: Printer Vector for R: Green
Input "10" with SP4-540-004: Printer Vector for R: Blue
Input "11" with SP4-540-021: Printer Vector for M: Option
Input "12" with SP4-540-022: Printer Vector for M: Red
Input "13" with SP4-540-023: Printer Vector for M: Green
Input "14" with SP4-540-024: Printer Vector for M: Blue

SM 3-25 B202/B178/B180
SCANNER UNIT

3.6.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER

1. Scanner rear cover ( 3.5.3)


2. Exposure lamp stabilizer [A]
( x 2,  x 2)
NOTE: Connect the connector [B]
vertically to the exposure lamp
stabilizer when you reassemble. [A]
Use caution when you do this
connection. The receptor can get
damaged easily..
[B] B178R533.WMF

3.6.5 XENON LAMP


[A]
1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)
2. Operation panel and scanner covers
( 3.5.3)
3. Exposure glass with left scale
( 3.6.1)
4. Left frame [A] ( x 2)
5. Front frame [B] ( x 5)

[B]

B178R534.WMF

[C]

6. Release the cable holder [C].


7. Xenon lamp [D] (pulley)

[D]

B178R535.WMF

B202/B178/B180 3-26 SM
SCANNER UNIT

8. Disconnect the connector [A] from the [A]


scanner stabilizer. [D]
9. Original length sensor [B] ( x 1)
10. Clamp [C] ( x 1)
[C]
11. Cable guide [D] (clamp x 1)
[B]

Reassembling
• When you reassemble the xenon lamp,
make sure that the bind is positioned and
the cable that has a black tube is run on

Replacement
the cable guide as shown [E].

Adjustment
and
[E]
B178R536.WMF

• Run the cable so there is no slack. Slide


the clamp [F] to adjust the cable slack.

OK

NG
B178R536A.WMF [F]

SM 3-27 B202/B178/B180
SCANNER UNIT

3.6.6 SCANNER POWER SUPPLY UNIT (SCANNER I/O BOARD)

1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)


2. Scanner power supply unit [A]
(all 's,  x 5) [A]

B178R537.WMF

3.6.7 SCANNER MOTOR

1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)


2. Scanner PSU with bracket [A] ( x 4) [C]
[B]
3. Scanner motor [B] ( x 2, Spring x 1)
4. Timing belt [C]

Reassembling [A]

1. Install the motor.


2. Install the timing belt.
3. Install the spring.
4. Fasten the screws.
B178R538.WMF

B202/B178/B180 3-28 SM
SCANNER UNIT

3.6.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE


[A]
1. Front frame ( 3.6.5)
2. Front scanner wire clamp [A]
3. Front scanner wire bracket [B]
( x 1)
4. Front scanner wire and scanner
drive pulley [C] ( x 1)

[C]

Replacement

Adjustment
[B]

and
B178R539.WMF

Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire


1. Position the center ball [A] [C]
in the middle of the forked
holder. [B]
2. Pass the right end (with
the ring) [B] through the
square hole. Pass the left [A]
end (with the ball) [C]
through the notch.
3. Wind the right end [D]
counterclockwise (shown
from the machine’s front)
five times. Wind the left
end clockwise three times.

B178R540.WMF

NOTE: The two red marks [D] come together when you have done this. Stick
the wire to the pulley with tape. This lets you easily handle the
assembly at the time of installation.

SM 3-29 B202/B178/B180
SCANNER UNIT

[B] [C] [D]


4. Install the drive pulley on
the shaft [A].
NOTE: Do not attach the
pulley to the shaft
with the screw at
this time.
5. Insert the left end into the
slit [B]. The end should go
via the rear track of the left
pulley [C] and the rear
track of the movable pulley
[D].

B178R541.WMF
[A]

6. Hook the right end onto


the front scanner wire
bracket [E]. The end [E]
should go via the front
track of the right pulley [F]
and the front track of the
movable pulley [G].
NOTE: Do not attach the [G]
scanner wire bracket
with the screw at this
time.

B178R542.WMF

[F]

B202/B178/B180 3-30 SM
SCANNER UNIT

[D]
7. Remove the tape from the [A]
[I]
drive pulley.
8. Insert a scanner-positioning
pin [A] through the 2nd
carriage hole [B] and the left
holes [C] in the front rail.
[G]
Insert another scanner
positioning pin [D] through
the 1st carriage hole [E] and
the right holes in the front rail
[F]. [H]
[B] [E]
9. Insert two more scanner
positioning pins in the holes

Replacement

Adjustment
in the rear rail.
[C] [F] B178R543.WMF

and
10. Screw the drive pulley to the
shaft [G].
11. Screw the scanner wire bracket to the front rail [H].
12. Install the scanner wire clamp [I].
13. Pull out the positioning pins.
NOTE: Make sure the 1st and 2nd carriages move smoothly after you remove the
positioning pins. Do steps 8 through 13 again if they do not.

SM 3-31 B202/B178/B180
SCANNER UNIT

3.6.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE


CAUTION: Do not remove screw [S1], screw [S2], or screw [S3] in the diagram
below. Image adjustment gets difficult if you remove these screws.

[S1] [S3]
[A]

[S2]

[C]

[B]

[D] B178R544.WMF

1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)


2. Operation panel and scanner covers ( 3.5.3)
3. Exposure glass with left scale ( 3.6.1)
4. Left frame ( 3.6.5)
5. Scanner PSU ( 3.6.6)
6. Five screws on the right-hand side [A] (shown from the front)
7. Two screws on the left-hand side [B] (shown from the front)
8. Pivot brackets [C][D] ( x 1 for each)

B202/B178/B180 3-32 SM
SCANNER UNIT

[C]

[A]

[B]

Replacement

Adjustment
and
[D]

B178R545.WMF

9. Rear frame [A] ( x 2,  x 7)


NOTE: Lift the right-hand side (shown from the front) of the scanner unit to
remove the screw [B] on the bottom-right corner (shown from the front).
10. Rail frame [C] ( x 5)
NOTE: Make sure that the home position sensor [D] is not damaged by the
sensor blade near the rear end of the xenon lamp when you
reassemble.
[F] [E]
11. Rear scanner wire clamp [E]
12. Rear scanner wire bracket [F]
( x 1)
13. Loosen the two screws on the
scanner-motor bracket ( 3.6.7)
14. Scanner motor gear [G] ( x 1)
15. Rear scanner wire and scanner
drive pulley [H] ( x 1)

[G] [H] B178R546.WMF

SM 3-33 B202/B178/B180
SCANNER UNIT

Reassembling the Rear Scanner Wire


1. Position the center ball [A] [B] [C]
in the middle of the forked
holder.
2. Pass the left end (with the
ball) [B] through the drive
pulley notch. Pass the [A]
right end (with the ring) [C]
through the drive pulley
hole. [D]
3. Wind the left end [B]
clockwise (shown from the
machine’s front) five times.
Wind the right end [C]
counterclockwise three
times.
B178R547.WMF

NOTE: The two red marks [D] come together when you do this. Attach the wire
to the pulley with tape. This lets you easily handle the assembly at the
time of installation.
4. Install the drive pulley on the shaft.
NOTE: Do not attach the pulley on the shaft with the screw at this time.
5. Install the wire.
NOTE: The winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scanner
should be the same as the winding on the three pulleys at the front.
This must show as a mirror image.
Example: At the front of the machine, the side of the drive pulley with the three
windings must face the front of the machine. At the rear of the machine, it must
face the rear.
6. Do steps 7 through 13 again in the “Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire”
Section.

B202/B178/B180 3-34 SM
SCANNER UNIT

3.6.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT

NOTE: It is necessary to calibrate touch panel at the following times:


• When you replace the operation panel.
• When you replace the controller board.
• When the touch panel detection function does not operate correctly
Do not use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are for design
use only.

1. Press , press , press  5 times to open the Self-Diagnostics


menu.

Replacement

Adjustment
and
B178R548.WMF

2. On the touch screen press “Touch Screen Adjust” (or press ).
3. Use a pointed (not sharp) tool to press the upper left mark .

B178R549.WMF

4. Press the lower right mark when “ ” shows.


5. Touch a few spots on the touch panel to make sure that the marker “+” shows
exactly where the screen is touched.
Press Cancel. Then start from Step 2 again if the “+” mark does not show
where the screen is touched.
6. Press [#] OK on the screen (or press ) when you are finished.
7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu. Save the
calibration settings.

SM 3-35 B202/B178/B180
LASER OPTICS

3.7 LASER OPTICS

WARNING
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before you do the
procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.

3.7.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS


The caution decals locations are shown below.

CAUTION
CAUTION- CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION
VORSICHT
WHEN OPEN
AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT- LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B
WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN

>PS<

CAUTION.WMF

CAUTION
CAUTION- CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION
VORSICHT B178R550.WMF
WHEN OPEN
AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT- LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B
WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN

>PS<

CAUTION2.WMF

 WARNING
Make sure you turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug
from the power outlet before you disassemble or adjust the laser unit. This
machine uses a class IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 655 nm and an
output of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.

B202/B178/B180 3-36 SM
LASER OPTICS

3.7.2 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT

CAUTION: Remove the sponge padding and the tag from the new unit before you
install the new laser optics-housing unit.
Steps 1 through 4 show the procedure [A]
for a newly supplied unit that replaces
the current one.
1. Top cover of the laser optics
housing unit [A] ( x 4) [B]
2. Sponge padding [B] [C]
3. Tag [C]

Replacement

Adjustment
4. Reinstall the top cover.

and
B178R551.WMF

5. ARDF or platen cover (if installed)


6. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)
[D]
7. Open the duplex inverter unit [D].
8. Open the front cover [E].

[E]

B178R552.WMF

9. Right cover, upper right cover, and upper front cover ( 3.5.1)
10. Operation panel, scanner left cover, scanner right cover, and scanner rear
cover ( 3.5.3)

SM 3-37 B202/B178/B180
LASER OPTICS

11. Remove the support [A] on the front of


the scanner unit.

[A]

B178R553.WMF

CAUTION: 1) Make sure that the cables on the rear of the scanner unit are not
caught on anything before you go to the next step. The whole
function (not only the scanner unit) can be disabled if some of the
cables are damaged.
2) Do not remove screw [S1], screw [S2], or screw [S3] in the diagram
below. Image adjustment can be difficult if you remove these
screws.

12. Lift the scanner unit [B] ( x 7) and [B]


prop the unit with the support [C].
NOTE: Remove screw [D] and
screw [E].
[C]

CAUTION: Do not lift the scanner unit


higher than the support
prop after you set the
support under the scanner [S1]
unit. The support can come [F]
off the opening [F] if you do [D]
this. [S2]

B178R554.WMF [E]
[S3]

B202/B178/B180 3-38 SM
LASER OPTICS

[A]
13. Securing screws for the paper exit tray
[A] ( x 2)
NOTE: Do not remove the paper exit
tray at this time.

Replacement

Adjustment
B178R555.WMF

and
14. Securing screws for the toner supply
unit [B] ( x 4) [B]
15. Securing screws for the laser optics
housing unit [C] ( x 2)

[C]

B178R556.WMF
[B]

16. Hold the toner supply unit [D] up . [D]


Then lower it . The pins [E] on the
front and rear shafts hold the unit.

[E] 2

B178R557.WMF

SM 3-39 B202/B178/B180
LASER OPTICS

17. Paper exit tray [A]

[A]

B178R558.WMF

[B]
18. Connector cover [B] ( x 3)
19. Three connectors [C] ( x 1)


[C] B178R909.WMF

20. Release the clamps [D] ( x 4).


21. Release the cable from the clamps [E].

[D]

B178R913.WMF

B202/B178/B180 3-40 SM
LASER OPTICS

When reassembling the laser optics housing unit, follow the notes below.
[A] [C]

OK NG

OK
[D]

[B]
NG

Replacement

Adjustment
and
B178R908.WMF

Make sure that the clamp [A] is positioned between two binds [B] and the harness
[C] is not bound by the clamp [D].
[E]

[F]

Rear view

B178R910.WMF

When you connect the harnesses from laser optics housing unit to the BCU, make
sure that the binds [E] are positioned and the binds [F] are positioned as diagram
shows.

Enter the SP mode and set "Disable" with SP2-920-1 after you replace the Laser
optics housing unit.

SM 3-41 B202/B178/B180
LASER OPTICS

[A]
22. Duct [A]
23. Securing screws for the laser optics
housing unit [B] ( x 2)
24. Put a sheet of paper [C] between the
laser optic housing unit and the machine [B]
rear frame.
NOTE: This does not let the cables be
caught by the brackets when you [C]
lift the laser optics-housing unit.
25. Hold the unit with both hands and slowly
lift it up. Make sure that the cables from
the laser diode board are not caught by
the brackets when you do this.
NOTE: The cables can be caught by the B178R561.WMF

brackets and the laser diode


board may be damaged if you are
not careful.
26. Do adjustments ( go to the procedures on the following page) after you
reinstall the laser optics-housing unit.

Do the forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-2 or User Tools > Maintenance >
Color Registration > Auto Color Registration > OK) after you install the laser optics-
housing unit.

B202/B178/B180 3-42 SM
LASER OPTICS

Adjustments after Replacing the Laser Optics Housing Unit


1. Enter SP mode.
2. Select “Disable” in SP2-920-1. This enables or disables the LD pulse correction.
3. Input the values printed on three decals on the new laser optics-housing unit
into the following SPs. Each decal has two values.
Value on the left Value on the right Function
Decal 1 SP2-109-3 SP2-109-2 Laser beam pitch
Main-scan registration
Decal 2 Not used Not used
correction for black and cyan
Main-scan registration
Decal 3 Not used Not used correction for magenta and
yellow

Replacement

Adjustment
Decal 2 Decal 3

and
Decal 1

Jp:xxxxx P:46,41 Jp:xxxxx KC:-2,-2 Jp:xxxxx MY:-2,-2


K C
600dpi 1200dpi M Y
B178R563.WMF
B178R562.WMF B178R564.WMF

NOTE: You do not need to input the values on decals 2 and 3. The machine
does the main scan registration correction for each color at the time of
automatic line position adjustment.
4. Print out the following test pattern (Cross Stitch M) with SP5-997.
5. Check these test patterns. Vertical black strips show if the laser beam pitch is
not correct.
• Cross-stitch pattern: The thin lines should be of uniform thickness (no
striping effect should show on the printout).
6. Adjust the laser beam pitch values in SP2-109-2 and 3 until the printout is
correct. Refer to the illustration shown below:

Feed direction

Adjustment not completed Adjustment completed


B178R565.WMF

7. Do SP5-993-2 or “Auto Color Registration” in the User Tools (Maintenance >


Color Registration > Auto Color Registration > OK).

SM 3-43 B202/B178/B180
LASER OPTICS

3.7.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR

[A] [C]
1. Laser optics housing unit
( 3.7.2)
2. Top cover [A] ( x 4)
3. Harness cable on the polygon-mirror-
motor drive-board [B]
4. Twelve connectors [C] on the four LD
boards
[B]

B178R566.WMF

5. Upper cover [D] ( x 11,  x 6)


NOTE: Two of the eleven [D]
connectors are on the
reverse side of the upper
cover.

B178R567.WMF

[E]
6. Air-current rectifier [E] ( x 3)
7. Polygon mirror motor [F]
( x 4,  x 1)
[F]

B178R568.WMF

B202/B178/B180 3-44 SM
LASER OPTICS

3.7.4 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR DRIVE BOARD

1. Laser optics housing unit


( 3.7.2)
2. Polygon mirror motor drive
board [A] ( x 2,  x 2)

[A]

Replacement

Adjustment
B178R569.WMF

and
3.7.5 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS

1. Laser optics housing unit ( 3.7.2)


2. Synchronizing detector boards [A]
( x 1 for each,  x 1 for each)

[A]

B178R570.WMF

SM 3-45 B202/B178/B180
PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT

3.8 PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT


NOTE: Do not touch the PCU drum. Do not let metal objects touch the
development sleeve.

1. Start the SP mode and do the New [B1] [B2]


Unit Set:
• PCU: SP5-999-001 ∼ 004
• Development unit: SP5-999-005 ∼
008
2. Turn the main switch off.
3. Open the front cover [A].
[C]
4. Loosen the 2 screws [B1][B2] (on the
drum positioning plate).
NOTE: Fasten screw [B1] first. Then
fasten screw [B2] when you
reassemble. [A]
B178R571.WMF

5. Turn the release lever [C] counter-


clockwise.
6. Lift the drum positioning plate.
7. Pull the development unit [D] out.
8. Check that the development units are
installed in the correct color order: [D]
(black → yellow → cyan → magenta
from left to right).
NOTE: Keep the units level and shake
them several times from side
to side before you install the
new development units.

B178R572.WMF

9. Release the lever and pull a PCU [E]


out until you see the handle. [E]
10. Grasp the handle [F]. Then pull the
PCU out of the machine.
11. Turn the main switch on. The machine
starts the initialization for the new unit.

B178R573.WMF [F]

B202/B178/B180 3-46 SM
PAPER FEED

3.9 PAPER FEED


3.9.1 PICK-UP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
Tray 1 and Tray 2
1. Tray 1 and Tray 2
2. Pick-up roller [A] ( x 1)
3. Feed roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Separation roller [C] ( x 1) [B]

Replacement

Adjustment
and
[A]
[C] B178R574.WMF

[A]
[C]
By-pass Tray
1. Open the right door.
2. By-pass tray cover [A] (1 hook,  x
1)
3. Raise the paper end sensor actuator
[B].
4. Pick-up roller [C] (1 hook)
[B]

B178R575.WMF

SM 3-47 B202/B178/B180
PAPER FEED

5. Feed roller [D] ( x 1) [D]


6. Vertical transport cover [E] ( x 4)
NOTE: Remove the right rear
cover ( 3.5.1). This lets
you have easier access to
the four screws.
7. Separation roller [F] ( x 1)
[F]

B178R576.WMF
[E]

B202/B178/B180 3-48 SM
PAPER FEED

3.9.2 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION BOARD

[D]

[A]
[B]

Replacement

Adjustment
and
[C]
B178R577.WMF

1. Open the by-pass tray.


2. Center the side fences [A].
3. By-pass tray cover [B] ( x 2, 2 hooks)
NOTE: There is a square opening [C] on each side. Push the hooks through
these openings to release them.
4. Paper width detection board [D] ( x 1)
NOTE: Open the bottom cover [E] to
remove the connector.

[E]

B178R578.WMF

SM 3-49 B202/B178/B180
PAPER FEED

3.9.3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR

[B]

[A]
B178R579.WMF

1. Open the right door.


2. Vertical transport cover [A] ( x 4)
NOTE: Remove the right rear cover ( 3.5.1). This lets you have easier
access to the four screws.
3. Vertical transport sensor [B] ( x 1)

3.9.4 RIGHT DOOR UNIT

B178R580.WMF
[A] [B]
B178R581.WMF

1. Rear right cover ( 3.5.1)


2. Open the right door [A].
3. Lift the vertical transport unit [B]. This removes it from its hinges ( x 3,  x
1).

B202/B178/B180 3-50 SM
PAPER FEED

3.9.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR AND RELAY SENSORS

[B]

[C]

[A]

Replacement

Adjustment
and
B178R582.WMF
B178R583.WMF

1. Right door unit ( 3.9.4)


2. Registration guide [A] ( x 2)
3. Registration sensor [B] ( x 1,  x 1)
4. Relay sensor [C] ( x 1,  x 1)

3.9.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES

1. Paper trays
2. Rear cover ( 3.5.1) [B] [A]

3. Swing out the high voltage supply unit


( 3.13.2).
4. Clutch holder [A] ( x 2, 1 bearing)
5. Paper feed clutch for tray 1 [B] ( x 1)
6. Clutch holder [C] ( x 2, 1 bearing)
7. Paper feed clutch for tray 2 [D] ( x 1)

[D] [C]
B178R584.WMF

SM 3-51 B202/B178/B180
PAPER FEED

3.9.7 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH

1. Right door unit ( 3.9.4) [B]


[A]
2. By-pass tray cover [A]
( x 1, 1 hook)
[F]
3. Loosen the screw on the right
door latch [B].
4. Turn the latch in the opposite [D]
direction.
5. Upper guide plate [C] [C]
( x 4,  x 1)
6. Support plate [D] ( x 2)
B178R585.WMF

7. Relay gear [E] (1 hook) [E]


8. By-pass feed clutch [F] ( x 1)

3.9.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)


2. Swing out the high voltage supply
unit ( 3.13.2).
3. Sub power supply unit [A]
( x 9,  x 3)
4. Tray lift motors (tray 1 [B], tray 2 [C]) [A]
( x 2,  x 1) B178R586.WMF

[B]

[C]

B178R587.WMF

B202/B178/B180 3-52 SM
PAPER FEED

3.9.9 PAPER FEED MOTOR

Replacement

Adjustment
and
[A]

B178R588.WMF

1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)


2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit ( 3.13.2).
3. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 3,  x 1)
NOTE: The connector is CN604 on the driver board.

SM 3-53 B202/B178/B180
TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT

3.10 TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT


3.10.1 TRANSFER UNIT

NOTE: Grasp the central areas of the front and rear frame when you remove or
install the transfer unit.
NOTE: Do not touch the transfer belt [A]. Do not damage the entrance mylar [B].
Reset the maintenance counter, (SP7-804-17). Then do the output check, (SP5-
804-66) after you replace the transfer unit.

[A]

[C]

[B]

B178R589.WMF

1. Duplex feed unit ( 3.4.1)


2. Turn the release lever counterclockwise. ( 3.8)
3. Pull out the transfer unit [C] until the whole unit shows ( x 2).
4. Grasp the transfer unit grips as shown above. Lift the unit to remove it.
NOTE: Grasp the front grip. Use caution not to damage the actuator on the rear.
Do the following after you replace the transfer unit:
• Set the adjustment value in SP5-995-020 to “FbOn, DncOn".
• Execute SP5-993-031 and SP5-993-033. This SP mode measures the belt
speed (middle and low) and stores the data.
• Execute SP5-995-027. This SP mode checks the belt regularity and stores the
data.
• Execute SP5-995-025. This SP clears the speed control error counter.
• Turn the main power off and on after executing above SPs.
• Forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or  > Maintenance > Color
Registration).
• Print the 1-dot grid pattern on A3/11" x 17" paper. Then check the color shift level
( 4.6.3).

B202/B178/B180 3-54 SM
TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT

3.10.2 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT

NOTE: Reset the maintenance counter, (SP7-804-18) after you replace the
transfer belt-cleaning unit.

Replacement
2

Adjustment
and
[A]

1
[B]
B178R590.WMF

Pull out the transfer belt-cleaning unit [A] ( x 1) at the same time you push the
lever.

NOTE: 1) The blade [B] can damage the belt if you do not continue to push the
lever.
2) Make sure that the transfer unit release lever is put back to the original
position ( 3.8) when you reassemble.

Do a forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or  > Maintenance > Color


Registration) after you replace the transfer belt-cleaning unit.

SM 3-55 B202/B178/B180
TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT

3.10.3 CLEANING BLADE AND CLEANING ROLLER

[A]

[B]

B178R591.WMF

1. Transfer belt cleaning unit ( 3.10.2)


2. Cleaning blade [A] ( x 2)
3. Tension spring [B]

[D]

[E] [F]

[C] B178R592.WMF

4. Lever [C]
5. Ground plate [D] ( x 1)
6. 3 gears [E] ( x 1)
7. Gear box [F] ( x 1)

B202/B178/B180 3-56 SM
TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT

[A]
[B]
[C]

Replacement

Adjustment
and
B178R593.WMF

8. Roller cover [A] ( x 1)


9. Cleaning brush gear [B] ( x 1)
10. Cleaning brush [C] (Bushing x 1)

Do the forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or “Maintenance menu –


Color registration - Auto Adjust” in User Program mode) after you replace the
cleaning blade.

SM 3-57 B202/B178/B180
TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT

3.10.4 TRANSFER BELT

NOTE: Do not touch the transfer belt. Hold the belt at its end position when you
replace the belt.

[A]

[B]

B178R594.WMF

1. Transfer belt cleaning unit ( 3.10.2)


2. Transfer unit ( 3.10.1)
3. Transfer entrance guide [A] ( x 3)
4. Right bracket [B] ( x 2)

[C]

[D] [E]

B178R595.WMF

5. Left bracket [C] ( x 2)


6. Tension roller [D] ( x 2, Spacer [E] x 1)
NOTE: Attach the spacer [E] to the original position when you reassemble.

B202/B178/B180 3-58 SM
TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT

[C]
[A]

Replacement

Adjustment
and
B178R575A.WMF
[B]

B178R632.WMF

7. Lay the transfer unit on its side.


8. Grasp the upper end of the transfer belt. Then pull the transfer belt [A] up and
out.
9. Clean the transfer belt mark sensor [C] with Blower brush.
NOTE: Clean the drive rollers with a damp cloth if they are dirty.

When you reinstall the transfer belt


The transfer belt must be installed with the mark “[B]” at the front side of the
machine.

Do the same procedures mentioned in 3.10.1 after you replace the transfer belt.

SM 3-59 B202/B178/B180
TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT

3.10.5 TRANSFER UNIT DRIVE MOTOR

[B]

[A]

B178R597.WMF

1. Transfer belt cleaning unit ( 3.10.2)


2. Pull out the transfer unit ( 3.10.1).
3. Release lever [A] ( x 1)
4. Front cover [B] ( x 3)

[C]

[D]

B178R598.WMF

5. Front plate [C] ( x 5,  x 1, Timing belt x 1, spring x 1)


6. Transfer unit drive motor [D] ( x 2)

B202/B178/B180 3-60 SM
ID SENSORS

3.11 ID SENSORS
[A]

Replacement

Adjustment
and
B178R599.WMF

1. Transfer unit ( 3.10.1)


2. Fusing unit ( 3.12.1)
3. Black PCU ( 3.8)
4. ID sensor bracket [A] ( x 2,  x 1)
Make sure that the ID sensor bracket fits on the drum-positioning plate correctly
when you reassemble.

SM 3-61 B202/B178/B180
FUSING

3.12 FUSING

CAUTION
Be careful when you handle the fusing unit. It is very hot.

3.12.1 FUSING UNIT

[A]

B178R173.WMF

1. Start the SP mode. Then execute the New Unit Set (SP5-999-009).
2. Turn the main switch off.
3. Detach the finisher from the copier if it is installed.
4. Open the duplex inverter unit if it is installed.
5. Open the upper left cover. Then pull it out.
6. Fusing unit [A]
7. Turn the main switch on. The machine starts initialization for the new unit.

If the customer uses thick paper, make some test prints on a sample of the paper
used by the customer after you replace the fusing unit. Adjust the line speed for
thick paper with the following SP if there are any color registration problems:
• SP1-004-007 (Development Motor Speed–[K] L Thick)

B202/B178/B180 3-62 SM
FUSING

3.12.2 UPPER COVER

[C]

[B]

[A]

Replacement

Adjustment
and
B178R001.WMF

1. Detach the finisher from the printer if it is installed.


2. Open the duplex inverter unit if it is installed.
3. Fusing unit ( 3.12.1)
4. Knob [A] ( x 1)
5. Upper cover [B] ( x 4)
NOTE: One of the screws [C] is longer than the other screws. Make sure that
the screw [C] is positioned as shown above when you reassemble this
unit.

SM 3-63 B202/B178/B180
FUSING

3.12.3 THERMOSTAT AND HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR

[A]

[B]

B178R002.WMF

1. Upper cover ( 3.12.2)


2. Thermostats [A] ( x 3)
3. Heating roller thermistor [B] ( x 1,  x 1, bracket x 1)

B202/B178/B180 3-64 SM
FUSING

3.12.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR AND FUSE

Replacement

Adjustment
and
[A]

B178R004.WMF

[B]

[E] [C]

[D] B178R017.WMF

1. Lower right cover [A] ( x 2)


2. Pressure roller thermistor bracket [B] ( x 1,  x 1)
3. Pressure roller thermistor [C] ( x 1)
4. Fuse assembly [D] ( x 1)
5. Fuses [E] ( x 2 each)

Reassembling
Make sure that the white part of both fuses [E] face the front direction of the
machine.

SM 3-65 B202/B178/B180
FUSING

3.12.5 HEATING ROLLER LAMP AND PRESSURE ROLLER LAMP

[A]
[C]

[D]

[B]
B178R009.WMF

1. Upper cover ( 3.12.2)


2. Heating roller lamp [A] ( x 2, terminal bracket x 2)
NOTE: Make sure the front [C] and rear [D] ends of the lamp are on the correct
terminals when you reinstall.
3. Pressure roller lamp [B] ( x 2)

B202/B178/B180 3-66 SM
FUSING

3.12.6 FUSING BELT UNIT

[A] [C]

Replacement

Adjustment
and
[B]
B178R010.WMF

1. Upper cover ( 3.12.2)


2. Heating roller lamp ( 3.12.5)
3. Pressure brackets [A] [B] (spring x 1 each)
NOTE: Use caution when you remove or attach the springs. The springs have
strong tension and require more force than usual to remove them.
4. Fusing upper unit [C] ( x 5,  x 1)

[E]

[D]

B178R011.WMF

5. Tension roller [D] (spring x 2, roller holder x 2)


6. Fusing belt unit [E]

SM 3-67 B202/B178/B180
FUSING

3.12.7 HOT ROLLER AND HEATING ROLLER

[A]

[B]

[C]

B178R011.WMF

1. Upper cover ( 3.12.2)


2. Heating roller lamp ( 3.12.5)
3. Fusing belt unit ( 3.12.6)
4. Hot roller gear [A] ( x 1)
5. Hot roller [B]
6. Heating roller [C]

Reassembling
Do the following procedures when you reassemble this unit:
• Apply grease to the roller shaft bearing of the pressure roller frame.
• Make sure that the edges of the bushings are positioned inside the shaft
bearings.

B202/B178/B180 3-68 SM
FUSING

3.12.8 UPPER PAPER GUIDE PLATE AND STRIPPER PAWLS

[B]

Replacement

Adjustment
[A]

and
B178R003.WMF

1. Upper cover ( 3.12.2)


2. Upper paper guide plate [A] ( x 2)
3. Stripper pawls [B] (spring x 1 each)

SM 3-69 B202/B178/B180
FUSING

3.12.9 LOWER PAPER GUIDE PLATE AND STRIPPER PAWLS

[B]

[A]

B178R006.WMF

1. Upper cover ( 3.12.2)


2. Pressure roller lamp ( 3.12.5)
3. Lower paper guide unit [A] ( x 4)
NOTE: The screw [B] is different from the others. Make sure that the screw [B]
is positioned as shown above.

[E]

[C] [D]

B178R007.WMF

4. Lower paper guide plate [C] ( x 3)


5. Stripper pawls [D] (spring x 1 each)
NOTE: The screw [E] is different from the others. Make sure that the screw is
positioned as shown above.

B202/B178/B180 3-70 SM
FUSING

3.12.10 CLEANING ROLLER AND OIL SUPPLY ROLLER

[B]
[A]
[C]

Replacement

Adjustment
[D]

and
[B]
B178R008.WMF [A]

1. Upper cover ( 3.12.2)


2. Pressure roller lamp ( 3.12.5)
3. Lower paper guide unit ( 3.12.9)
4. Remove the springs [A].
5. Slide off the roller holder [B].
6. Cleaning roller [C] and oil supply roller [D]

SM 3-71 B202/B178/B180
FUSING

3.12.11 PRESSURE ROLLER

[B]
[A]

[C]

B178R013.WMF

1. Upper cover ( 3.12.2)


2. Heating roller lamp and pressure roller lamp ( 3.12.5)
3. Fusing upper unit
4. Lower paper guide unit
5. Pressure roller gear [A] and bushings [B] (C-ring x 2)
6. Pressure roller [C]

Reassembling
Apply grease to both ends of the pressure roller shaft when you reassemble this
unit.

3.12.12 DRIVE GEAR

1. Fusing unit ( 3.12.1)


2. Gear hold bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Drive gear [B] ( x 1)
[B]

[A]

B178R014.WMF

B202/B178/B180 3-72 SM
FUSING

3.12.13 FUSING UNIT FAN

CAUTION
Make sure that the fan faces to the correct direction when you reinstall it.
The arrow on the fan [D] and the arrow on the duct [D] must face to the
same direction.

1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)


2. Left cover, rear left cover ( 3.5.2)
[A]
3. Connector cover (on the top of the
controller box) ( 3.13.1)

Replacement

Adjustment
4. Fusing fan duct [A] ( x 2,  x 1)

and
B178R600.WMF

5. Release the hooks. Then remove [B]


the upper cover [B].
6. Fusing fan [C] [D]

[C]

B178R601.WMF

SM 3-73 B202/B178/B180
FUSING

[C]
3.12.14 PAPER EXIT

1. Lift the scanner unit ( 3.7.2). [A]


2. Paper exit cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Exit upper limit sensor [B]
4. Paper exit sensor [C]

[B]

B178R938.WMF

B202/B178/B180 3-74 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.13 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS


3.13.1 MOVING THE CONTROLLER BOX OUT OF THE WAY

1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1) [B]


2. Connector cover [A] ( x 3)
3. Three cables [B]
4. Ground cable ( x 2) [C]
[A]

Replacement

Adjustment
and
[C]
B178R911.WMF

[E]
5. Duct [D] ( x 1,  x 2) [D]

6. Ground cable [E] ( x 1)


7. Two connectors [E]
8. Swing out the controller box [F]
( x 5).
[F]

B178R603.WMF

SM 3-75 B202/B178/B180
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.13.2 MOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C, B OUT


OF THE WAY

1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)


2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit
[A]
[A] ( x 2).

B178R604.WMF

3.13.3 CONTROLLER, IPU, AND BCU

NOTE: 1) Print out the SMC reports (“SP Mode Data” and “Logging Data”) before
you replace the BCU or controller.
2) Remove the NVRAM on the old board. Then install it on the new board
after you replace the BCU or controller.

[B]
[C]

[D]

[A] B178R605.WMF

1. Controller [A] ( x 3)
2. IPU [B] ( x 2,  x 2)
3. Option bracket [C] ( x 2)
4. Rear cover [D] ( 3.5.1)

B202/B178/B180 3-76 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

5. Connector cover ( 3.13.1)


[A]
6. Cover bracket [A] ( x 4)
7. Inner bracket [B] ( x 2)

Replacement

Adjustment
and
B178R606.WMF
[B]
8. BCU [C] (All 's,  x 8)
[C]

[D] B178R607.WMF

CAUTION: 1) Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static
electricity. Static electricity can damage NVRAM data.
2) Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the board. Attach the
NVRAM with the "half-disk” [D] heading down to the NVRAM slot.
3) Make sure that the DIP-switch settings on the old board are the
same for the new board ( 5.11) when you replace the BCU.

NOTE: 1) Make sure you print out the SMC reports (“SP Mode Data” and “Logging
Data”) before you replace the NVRAM.
2) Remove the NVRAM on the old board. Then install it on the new board
after you replace the BCU or controller. Replace the NVRAM ( 3.13.5)
if the NVRAM on the old board is defective.

SM 3-77 B202/B178/B180
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.13.4 HDD
You cannot separate the hard-disk drive into two different hard-disk drives. The
controller does not recognize the hard disk drive if you separate it.
1. Controller ( 3.13.3)
2. HDD [A] ( x 4, Shoulder-screw x 3)

[A] B178R608.WMF

When reassembling the HDD


Connect the cable as shown. A
NOTE: There are two hard disks. Each
hard disk has a specified
connector. Do not connect the B
cable to the wrong connector.
A
B

B178R015.WMF

B202/B178/B180 3-78 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.13.5 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE


NVRAM on the BCU
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes
with the machine.
2. Output the SMC data ( SP5-990-001) if possible.
3. Turn the main switch off.
4. Install an SD card into SD card slot 3. Then turn the main power on.
5. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card ( SP5-824-001) if possible.
6. Turn off the main switch. Then unplug the power cord.

Replacement
7. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and reassemble the machine.

Adjustment
and
8. Plug in the power cord. Then turn the main switch on.
9. Select a paper-size type ( SP5-131-001).
10. Specify the device number and destination code of the machine.
NOTE: 1) Contact your supervisor for details on how to enter the device
number and destination code.
2) SC 999 or “Fusing Unit Setting Error” can be show until the device
number and destination code are correctly programmed.
11. Turn the main switch off and on.
12. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM ( SP5-825-001) if you have
successfully copied them to the SD card.
13. Turn the main switch off. Then remove the SD card from SD card slot 3.
14. Turn the main switch on.
15. Reset the settings for meter charge ( SP5-930-002).
16. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.
17. Do the process control self-check.
18. Do ACC for the copier application program.
19. Do ACC for the printer application program.

SM 3-79 B202/B178/B180
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

NVRAM on the Controller


1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes
with the machine.
2. Output the SMC data ( SP5-990-001) if possible.
3. Turn the main switch off. Then put a blank formatted SD card into SD card slot
3.
4. Turn the main switch on.
5. Copy the NVRAM data ( SP5-824-001) and the address book data in the
HDD ( SP5846-051) to an SD card if possible.
NOTE: 1) An error message shows if local user information cannot be stored in
an SD card because the capacity is not enough.
2) You cannot do this procedure if the SD card is write-protected.
6. Enter SP mode. Then print out the SMC reports ( SP5-990-001) if possible.
7. Turn off the main switch. Then unplug the power cord.
8. Replace the NVRAM on the controller. Then reassemble the machine.
9. Check if the serial number shows on the operation panel. ( SP5-811-002).
Input the serial number if it does not show. (Contact your supervisor about this
setting.)
10. Plug in the power cord. Then turn the main switch on.
11. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM ( SP5-825-001) and HDD
( SP5-846-52) if you have successfully copied them to the SD card.
NOTE: 1) The counter data in the user code information clears even if step 11
is done correctly.
2) An error message shows if the download is incomplete. However,
you can still use the part of the address book data that has already
been downloaded in step 11.
3) An error message shows when the download data does not exist in
the SD card, or, if it is already deleted.
4) You cannot do this procedure if the SD card is write-protected.
12. Go out of SP mode. Then turn the main switch off. Then remove the SD card
from SD card slot 3.
13. Turn the main switch on.
14. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.
15. Do ACC for the copier application program.
16. Do ACC for the printer application program.

B202/B178/B180 3-80 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.13.6 REMOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD - C, B

[A]

Replacement

Adjustment
and
B178R609.WMF

1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)


2. High voltage supply board [A] (All 's,  x 8)

3.13.7 SUB POWER SUPPLY UNIT

[A]

B178R586.WMF

1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)


2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit ( 3.13.2)
3. Sub power supply unit [A] (All 's,  x 3)

SM 3-81 B202/B178/B180
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.13.8 PSU

[A]

B178R611.WMF

1. Left cover ( 3.5.2)


2. PSU [A] (All 's,  x 5)
NOTE: Make sure that the interlock switches on the PSU operate correctly
after you reinstall the PSU (open/close the left and front doors).

3.13.9 DRIVER BOARD

[A]

B178R612.WMF

1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)


2. Swing out the controller box ( 3.13.1).
3. Driver board [A] (All 's,  x 4)

B202/B178/B180 3-82 SM
DRIVE UNIT

3.14 DRIVE UNIT


3.14.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH

Replacement

Adjustment
[A]

and
B178R613.WMF

1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)


2. Swing out the controller box ( 3.13.1).
3. Registration clutch [A] ( x 1,  x 1)

3.14.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES


[C]
1. Drum gears ( 3.14.3).
2. Development clutch assembly [A]
( x 1,  x 1)
3. Clutch holder [B]
4. Clutch shaft [C] (1 bushing,  x 1,
1 hook)

[B]

[A]
B178R614.WMF

SM 3-83 B202/B178/B180
DRIVE UNIT

3.14.3 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR - CMY

[A]

B178R615.WMF

1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)


2. Swing out the controller box ( 3.13.1).
3. Drum gear cover [A] ( x 4,  x 5)

[B]

[C]

[E]

[D]
B178R616.WMF

4. Turn the drum gears [B] counterclockwise. Make sure the shoulder screws
[C][D] are in the three, seven, or eleven o'clock positions.
NOTE: You can align the three corners of each drum-gear shaft to the three
openings on the development-clutch securing plate [E].

B202/B178/B180 3-84 SM
DRIVE UNIT

[C]

[A]

[B]

Replacement

Adjustment
and
B178R617.WMF

5. 4 drum gears [A] ( x 2 for each)


NOTE: 1) Do not move the drum-gear shafts after you remove the drum gears.
2) The print quality can be affected if the teeth on the drum gears are
damaged. Check to make sure that they are not damaged.
6. Timing belt gear [B] (Timing belt x 1, Bushing x 1)
7. Idle gear [C]

[D]

[E]

[F]
[H]
B178R618.WMF [G]
8. 4 gear drive holders [D]∼[G] ( x 1 for each)
9. Development clutch securing plate [H] ( x 8,  x 4)
NOTE: Two of the six connectors are on the rear side.

SM 3-85 B202/B178/B180
DRIVE UNIT

[A]

[B]

B178R619.WMF

10. Development drive motor - CMY [A] ( x 5,  x 1, Spring x 1)


NOTE: Remove the three bushings [B] and install the development drive motor
first when you reassemble. Then install the bushings.

3.14.4 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - CMY AND DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - K

1. Swing out the controller box


( 3.13.1)
2. Drum drive motor - CMY [A]
( x 4,  x 1)
3. Drum drive motor - K [B]
( x 4,  x 1)
[B]

[A]

B178R620.WMF

B202/B178/B180 3-86 SM
DRIVE UNIT

3.14.5 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - K

1. Fusing fan duct ( 3.12.13)


2. Development clutch securing plate
( 3.14.3)
3. Solenoid cover [A] ( x 2)

[A]

Replacement

Adjustment
and
B178R621.WMF

[C]
2 1
[B]
B178R622.WMF
[D]

4. Development drive motor – K [B] (with the fusing clutch [C]) ( x 4,  x 2)


NOTE: Remove the bushing [D] and install the development drive motor–K
(with the fusing clutch) first when you reassemble. Then install the
bushing.

SM 3-87 B202/B178/B180
TONER SUPPLY UNIT

3.15 TONER SUPPLY UNIT


NOTE: 1) Do not touch the PCU drum. Do not let metal objects touch the
development sleeve.
2) Cover the PCUs with paper or cloth after you remove them. Keep them
in a dark place.

M Toner Supply Unit

[A]

B178R623.WMF
[B]

1. Laser optics housing unit ( 3.7.2)


2. All development units and PCUs ( 3.8)
3. Transfer unit ( 3.10.1)
4. Development clutch securing plate ( 3.14.3)
5. Right inner cover with the drum positioning plate [A] ( x 3)
6. M development unit plate [B] ( x 1)

B202/B178/B180 3-88 SM
TONER SUPPLY UNIT

[A]

Replacement

Adjustment
[B]

and
B178R624.WMF

7. Development unit left guide [A] ( x 1)


8. Open the right door.
9. Registration upper stay [B] ( x 4)

[E]

[C] [D]

B178R625.WMF

CAUTION: 1) Toner spills out when you remove the toner path cover and toner
supply pipe. Put some paper or cloth under the toner supply unit and
waste toner collection path before you remove them.
2) Use a paper clip or tape to close the pipe after you remove it.

10. Toner path cover [C] ( x 2)


11. Toner supply pipe [D]
12. Toner supply unit [E] ( x 2,  x 1)

SM 3-89 B202/B178/B180
TONER SUPPLY UNIT

Reinstalling the M Toner Supply Unit

[B]

[A]

B178R626.WMF

1. Wind the harness [A] on the shaft.


2. Insert the toner collection pipe [B].
NOTE: Make sure that the pipe does not come off the unit.

[C]

B178R627.WMF

3. Remove the toner supply unit bushing [C].

B202/B178/B180 3-90 SM
TONER SUPPLY UNIT

[A]

[B]

Replacement
B178R628.WMF

Adjustment
and
4. Install the unit [A] and secure it with the screws.
5. Unwind the harness and connect it.
6. Install the bushing.
7. Connect the toner supply pipe and the waste toner collection pipe [B].
8. Check that the pipes [C] do not come
off the unit.
9. Attach the toner path cover and
secure it with screws.
10. Reassemble the machine.

[C]

B178R629.WMF

SM 3-91 B202/B178/B180
TONER SUPPLY UNIT

C and Y Toner Supply Units

[B]

[A]

B178R630.WMF

1. Development drive motor - CMY ( 3.14.3)


2. Development unit plates ( M Toner Supply Unit)
NOTE: Remove the C and M development unit plates to replace the C toner
supply unit. Remove the Y and C development plates to replace the Y
toner supply unit.
3. Development unit left guide ( M Toner Supply Unit)
4. PCU 3C guide rail [A] ( x 2)
NOTE: 1) To replace the C toner supply unit, remove the M PCU guide. To
replace the Y toner supply unit, remove the C PCU guide.
2) Pull the front plate [B] slightly to the front side.

B202/B178/B180 3-92 SM
TONER SUPPLY UNIT

[C]

Replacement

Adjustment
[A] [B]

and
B178R631.WMF

5. Toner path cover [A] ( x 2)


6. Branch toner path covers [B][C] ( x 1)
NOTE: To replace the C toner supply unit, remove the cover on the right-hand
side [B]. To replace the Y toner supply unit, remove the cover on the
left-hand side [C].
7. Toner supply pipe and toner supply unit ( M Toner Supply Unit)

K Toner Supply Unit


1. K and Y development unit plates ( M Toner Supply Unit)
2. Development unit left guide ( M Toner Supply Unit)
3. PCU 3C guide rail ( C and Y Toner Supply Units)
NOTE: Remove the Y PCU guide.
4. Toner supply unit ( M Toner Supply Unit)

SM 3-93 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS

4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
4.1.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT
SP-3-005-006 (Developer Initialization Result)
No. Result Description Possible Causes Action
Not Developer When initializing only When done in SP mode, do
performed initialization is not the black developer, the the developer initialization
performed. initialization result again. Reinstall the engine
becomes “1000”. main firmware if the result is
the same.

Do the following when done at


0 unit replacement:
• Check if a new unit is
installed
• Check if the unit detection
system works correctly
• Check if SP2-223-001 (auto

shooting
Trouble-
initialization at unit
replacement) is enabled.
Successfully Developer -
completed initialization is
1
successfully
completed.
Forced Developer A cover was opened or When done in SP mode, do
termination initialization was the main switch was the developer initialization
forcibly terminated. turned off during the again. Reinstall the engine
initialization. main firmware if the result is
2 the same.

Turn the main switch off and


on when done at unit
replacement.
Vt error Vt is less than 0.5V 1. Check if the drum stay is correctly set and secured.
and “Reset 2. Check if the development unit is correctly set.
development unit” 3. Check the following if the problem stays:
is displayed.
• Poor connection of connectors
3
• TD sensor defective
• Harness damage
• BCU board failure
• Firmware problem (engine main or MUSIC)

SM 4-1 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS

No. Result Description Possible Causes Action


Toner supply During toner fill-up 1. Check if the toner cartridge correctly set.
error mode, Vt does not 2. Check if the amount of toner left in the toner cartridge
reach the target is sufficient.
value. 3. Check if toner is coagulated. (Shake the toner
cartridge well if it is.)
8
4. Check if the connectors of the following parts are
correctly set, and/or replace the parts.
Toner attraction pump / Air Pump / Valves
5. Check if the toner supply tube is bent, caught, or
damaged.
Failure Vt cannot be 1. Shielding tape is not 1. Remove the shielding tape
adjusted within 3.0 removed. to supply developer to the
± 0.1V. unit.
SC370 - 373 will 2. Development unit is 2. Reinstall the development
be displayed. not firmly installed, unit.
9
Turning the main causing poor
switch off and on connection of the TD
clears this SC sensor connector.
code. 3. TD sensor defective. 3. Replace the development
unit.

NOTE: The machine starts developer initialization after you set “Enable” in SP5-
999-005, 006, 007, or 008. Developer initialization automatically resumes
when you open and close the front door or turn the main switch off and on
if an error other than Error 8 occurs.

B202/B178/B180/ 4-2 SM
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS

4.1.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT


SP3-975-001 (Process Control Self-check Result)
No. Result Description Possible Causes Action
Not Process control self- - Do the process control
0
performed check is not done. self-check again.
Successfully Process control self- - -
1 completed check successfully
completed.
ID sensor Vsg cannot be 1. Dirty ID sensor (toner, 1. Clean the ID sensor.
adjustment adjusted within 4.0 ± dust, or foreign material)
error 0.5V. 2. Dirty transfer belt 2. Check the belt
cleaning. Clean or
replace the transfer
2
belt.
3. Scratched or damaged 3. Replace the transfer
transfer belt belt.
4. Defective ID sensor 4. Replace the ID
sensor.
Vmin error Vmin is not within Vmin is calculated during the self-check. Even when
the specified range. the calculated Vmin value is out of the specified range,
an optimum value is automatically used instead.
Therefore, this error code does not usually occur.

shooting
Trouble-
3 If no problem is observed with image density and/or
development gamma, nothing needs to be done.
If an image problem such as low image density is
observed, check the following points:
Transfer belt / Belt guide plate / ID sensor
Sampling Not enough data can 1. ID sensor pattern 1. Check the image
4
data error be sampled. density is too high or development process
Gamma Gamma is out of low. and correct toner
error range. 2. Residual image on density if necessary.
5 transfer belt 2. Check the transfer
0.3 > Gamma, or
6.0 < Gamma 3. Toner dropped from belt-cleaning unit.
Vk error Vk is out of range. development unit 3. Clean the development
-150 > Vk or 150 < 4. Scratched or damaged unit and correct toner
6 Vk transfer belt density.
4. Replace the transfer
belt.
Vt error Vt is out of range. 1. Development unit not 1. Check.
0.5 > Vt or 4.8 < Vt correctly installed.
2. Toner density is too low 2. Check and/or correct
7
or high. toner density.
3. TD sensor defective. 3. Replace development
unit.
Sampling Not enough data can See the possible causes and action for error codes 4,
data error be sampled during 5, and 6.
during LD the LD power
8
power correction (if “LD
correction Power” is set in SP3-
125-002).
Forced Process control self- A cover was opened or the Do the process control
9 termination check was forcibly main switch was turned off self-check again.
terminated. during the self-check.

SM 4-3 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS

4.1.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT


SP5-993-007 (Line Position Adjustment Result)
This SP shows the six digits number as a line position adjustment result on the
LCD. It shows which parts of the transfer belt has an error (front, center or rear).
• The first and second digits from left-hand indicate the result detected by the front
ID sensor.
• The third and fourth digits indicate the result detected by the canter ID sensor.
• The fifth and sixth digits indicate the result detected by the rear ID sensor.

No. Result Description Note


Successfully Data sampling was correctly done and line position
01
completed adjustment was successfully completed.
Out of adjustment The calculated result for line position correction is
02 range greater than ±2.0 mm.
(over ±2 mm)
03 Calculation Error Distance between the lines is greater than ±1.4 mm.
04 Sampling Error Data sampling cannot be done correctly.
Descending slope The ascending or descending slope of the ID sensor
05
error signal wave is out of specification. (See Note 1)
Ascending slope
06
error (See Note 1)
Pattern lines The detected number of pattern lines is less than 64
07 mismatch lines. (See Note 1)
(less than 64 lines)
Sampling time-out Data sampling cannot be done within the allocated
08
time.
Sampling start The start mark cannot be detected within the
09
error allocated time.
Pattern length The pattern length is shorter or longer than specified.
10
mismatch (See Note 1)
Pattern lines The detected number of pattern lines is over 64
11 mismatch lines.
(over 64 lines)
Magnification The calculated magnification value does not match
12 mismatch any data in the laser power frequency adjustment
data table.
Toner condition The machine is in the toner near-end or toner end
13
condition.
Not executed The machine is not ready to do the line position
17
adjustment manually from the user menu.
Potential control Line position adjustment cannot be done due to
18
error failed potential control.
Cyan line error The necessary mirror angle correction is outside the
19
adjustment range (cyan only).
Yellow The detected magnification value is out of the
26
magnification error adjustment range (yellow only).
Yellow sub scan The detected sub scan registration is out of the
27
registration error adjustment range (yellow only).
Yellow main scan The detected main scan registration is out of the
28
registration error adjustment range (yellow only).

B202/B178/B180/ 4-4 SM
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS

No. Result Description Note


Yellow skew The detected skew correction value is out of the
29
correction error adjustment range (yellow only).
Cyan magnification The detected magnification value is out of the
36
error adjustment range (cyan only).
Cyan sub scan The detected sub scan registration is out of the
37
registration error adjustment range (cyan only).
Cyan main scan The detected main scan registration is out of the
38
registration error adjustment range (cyan only).
Cyan skew The detected skew correction value is out of the
39
correction error adjustment range (cyan only).
Yellow & cyan The detected magnification value is out of the
46
magnification error adjustment range (yellow + cyan).
Yellow & cyan sub The detected sub scan registration is out of the
47 scan registration adjustment range (yellow + cyan).
error
Yellow & cyan The detected main scan registration is out of the
48 main scan adjustment range (yellow + cyan).
registration error
Yellow & cyan The detected skew correction value is out of the
49 skew correction adjustment range (yellow + cyan).
error
Magenta The detected magnification value is out of the
56

shooting
Trouble-
magnification error adjustment range (magenta only).
Magenta sub scan The detected sub scan registration is out of the
57
registration error adjustment range (magenta only).
Magenta main The detected main scan registration is out of the
58 scan registration adjustment range (magenta only).
error
Magenta skew The detected skew correction value is out of the
59
correction error adjustment range (magenta only).
Yellow & magenta The detected magnification value is out of the
66
magnification error adjustment range (yellow + magenta).
Yellow & magenta The detected sub scan registration is out of the
67 sub scan adjustment range (yellow + magenta).
registration error
Yellow & magenta The detected main scan registration is out of the
68 main scan adjustment range (yellow + magenta).
registration error
Yellow & magenta The detected skew correction value is out of the
69 skew correction adjustment range (yellow + magenta).
error
Cyan & magenta The detected magnification value is out of the
76
magnification error adjustment range (cyan + magenta).
Cyan & magenta The detected sub scan registration is out of the
77 sub scan adjustment range (cyan + magenta).
registration error
Cyan & magenta The detected main scan registration is out of the
78 main scan adjustment range (cyan + magenta).
registration error
Cyan & magenta The detected skew correction value is out of the
79 skew correction adjustment range (cyan + magenta).
error

SM 4-5 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS

No. Result Description Note


Yellow & cyan & The detected magnification value is out of the
86 magenta adjustment range (yellow + cyan + magenta).
magnification error
Yellow & cyan & The detected sub scan registration is out of the
87 magenta sub scan adjustment range (yellow + cyan + magenta).
registration error
Yellow & cyan & The detected main scan registration is out of the
magenta main adjustment range (yellow + cyan + magenta).
88
scan registration
error
Yellow & cyan & The detected skew correction value is out of the
89 magenta skew adjustment range (yellow + cyan + magenta).
correction error

Note 1: Error codes (05, 06, 07 or 10) stop sampling data at he following time: The
front, center, or, rear ID sensor detect an error. The machine can show the
error codes for all ID sensors in some cases.

Possible causes of errors in the line position adjustment


Possible
Possible Cause Action
Error Code
1 The pattern does not reach the proper density.
1. Dirty ID sensor (toner, dust, or 04, 05, 06, 07, 1. Clean the ID sensors.
foreign material) 08, 09, 10
2. Incorrect toner density 2. Correct the toner density.
Low: ID sensor cannot detect the
pattern lines.
High: Lines may be partially blank
due to incorrect toner density and/or
paper transfer current.
3. Incorrect transfer current 3. Correct the transfer current.
2 The ID sensors are affected by electrical noise or dirt/damage on the transfer belt.
1. Scratched or damaged OPC drum 02, 03, 04, 05, 1. Replace PCU
2. Scratched or damaged transfer belt 06, 10, 11, 12 2. Replace transfer belt
3. Dirty transfer belt 3. Clean or replace transfer belt
4. High voltage leak in transfer unit 4. Fix the high voltage leak
5. Residual image on transfer belt 5. Check transfer belt cleaning and
clean the belt
6. Toner dropped from development 6. Clean the development unit and
unit adjust the toner density
7. Carrier dropped from development 7. Clean the development unit and
unit adjust the toner density
3 The transfer belt is covered with toner.
Development does not work correctly. All error codes Check all units and high voltage
cable connectors.
4 None of the patterns are developed.
Development does not work correctly. 09, 04 Check all units and high voltage
cable connectors.
5 Some of the patterns are not developed;
Development does not work correctly. 07, 08 Check all units and high voltage
cable connectors.

B202/B178/B180/ 4-6 SM
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS

Possible
Possible Cause Action
Error Code
6 The machine is not in the condition to execute the line position adjustment;
The machine is in the toner near end 13 Replenish toner.
or end condition.
The machine is not ready to do the 17 Wait until machine goes to the ready
line position adjustment manually from condition from the energy saver or
the user menu. auto off mode.
Line position adjustment cannot be 18 Fix the problem causing the potential
done due to failed potential control. control error.
7 The MUSIC CPU is abnormal (1)
No error code shows. However, the 1. Fix the bias leak and/or replace
machine continues to show PCU
“execution” on the screen.
In addition, the green LED on the
BICU stays on or off under the
following condition.
1. The MUSIC CPU resets due to
electrical noise generated by a high
voltage leak on a damaged OPC
drum.
8 The MUSIC CPU is abnormal (2)
No error code shows. However, the 1. Check the connection between

shooting
Trouble-
machine continues to show the detection board and memory
“execution” on the screen. chip.
The green LED on the BICU keeps 2. Replace the toner cartridge.
blinking faintly (this is normal) even
under the following conditions:
1. Poor connection between the toner
cartridge detection board and the
memory chip on the toner cartridge
2. The memory chip on the toner
cartridge fails.

SM 4-7 B202/B178/B180
SCANNER TEST MODE

4.2 SCANNER TEST MODE


4.2.1 VPU TEST MODE
Output the VPU test pattern with SP4-907 to make sure the scanner VPU control
operates correctly. The VPU test pattern prints out after you have set the SP mode
settings and pressed the start key.

SP4-907-1 VPU Test Pattern: R


SP4-907-2 VPU Test Pattern: G
SP4-907-3 VPU Test Pattern: B
• The CCD on the SBU board may be defective if the copy is abnormal and the
VPU test pattern is normal.
• The following can be the cause if the copy is normal and the VPU test pattern is
abnormal:
• The harness may not be correctly connected between the SBU and the IPU
• The IPU or SBU board may be defective.

4.2.2 IPU TEST MODE


You can check the IPU board with the SP mode menu, SP4-904-1 or 2.
If no error is detected, the test ends. Then the completion code shows in the
operation panel display. If an error is detected, the test is interrupted. Then an error
code shows. The table below lists the completion and error codes.

SP4-904-1 Register Access


There are 16 bits switches in this SP. Each bit indicates each CPU as followings.
The error result is displayed on the operation panel in decimal number.
• 0: Normal 1: Error
Bit 0: ASIC0 image register Bit 5: ASIC3 register
Bit 1: ASIC0 serial register Bit 6: ASIC2 register
Bit 2: ASIC1 register Bit 7: ASIC4 (MC) register
Bit 3: ASIC1 register Bit 8: ASIC4 (YK) register
Bit 4: ASIC1 register Bit 9 to 15: Not used

SP4-904-2 Image Path


There are 16 bits switches in this SP. Each bit indicates each CPU path as
followings. The error result is displayed on the operation panel in decimal number.
• 0: Normal 1: Error
Bit 0: ASIC1 to ASIC3 Bit 5: ASIC3 to ASIC1
Bit 1: ASIC0 to ASIC1 Bit 6: ASIC2 to ASIC4 (MC)
Bit 2: ASIC0 to ASIC1 Bit 7: ASIC2 to ASIC4 (YK)
Bit 3: ASIC1 to ASIC2 Bit 8 to 15: Not used
Bit 4: ASIC3 to ASIC1

B202/B178/B180/ 4-8 SM
SCANNER TEST MODE

Errors may be caused by the following problems:


1) Short circuit on the signal lines
• When the IPU board is installed, a pin or two on the ASIC is damaged.
• Some conductive matter or object is trapped among the pins.
• Condensation
2) Destruction of circuit elements
• Over current or a defective element breaks the circuit.
3) Abnormal power supply
• The required voltage is not supplied to the devices.
4) Overheat/overcooling
• The environment is inappropriate for the board (the scanner unit).
5) Static electricity
• Static electricity of a high voltage occurs during the test.
6) Others
• The scanner and IPU are incorrectly connected.
When you have completed a check, turn the main switch off and on before you do
another check. When you have completed all necessary checks, turn the main
switch off and on.

shooting
Trouble-

SM 4-9 B202/B178/B180
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


4.3.1 SUMMARY
Section 4.4 shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter
(not controller errors) are put into four types. The type is determined by their reset
procedures. The table shows the classification of the SC codes.
Key Definition Reset Procedure
Controller The error has occurred in the See “Troubleshooting Procedure” in
CTL
errors controller. the table.
The error involves the fusing unit. Turn the main switch off and on.
A The machine operation is disabled. Reset the SC (set SP5-810-1). Turn
The user cannot reset the error. the main switch off and on.
The error involves one or some
specific units. The machine Turn the operation switch off and
B
operates as usual, excluding the on.
related units.
Other The error is logged. The SC-code
errors The SC will not show. Only the SC
C history is updated. The machine
history is updated.
operates as usual.
The machine operation is disabled.
You can reset the machine by
turning the operation switch or main Turn the operation switch or main
D
switch off and on. If the error occurs power switch off and on.
again, the same SC code is
displayed.

After you turn the main switch off, wait for one second or more before you turn the
main switch on ( SC 672). All SCs are logged. The print log data (SP5-990-004)
in SP mode can check the latest 10 SC codes detected and total counters when
the SC code is detected.

NOTE: 1) If the problem is related to electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then
reconnect the connectors before you replace the PCBs.
2) If the problem is related to a motor lock, first check the mechanical load
before you replace motors or sensors.

B202/B178/B180/ 4-10 SM
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SC Code Classification
The table shows the classification of the SC codes:
Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section
100 - Scanner
1XX Scanning
190 - Unique for a specific model
200 - Polygon motor
220 - Synchronization control
230 - FGATE signal related
2XX Laser exposure
240 - LD control
260 - Magnification
280 - Unique for a specific model
300 - Charge
330 - Drum potential
3XX Image development 1
350 - Development
380 - Unique for a specific model
400 - Image transfer
420 - Paper separation
430 - Cleaning
4XX Image development 2
440 - Around drum
460 - Unit
480 - Others
500 - Paper feed

shooting
Trouble-
5XX Paper feed / Fusing 515 - Duplex
520 - Paper transport
530 - Fan motor
540 - Fusing
5XX Paper feed / Fusing
560 - Others
570 - Unique for a specific model
600 - Electrical counters
620 - Mechanical counters
630 - Account control
6XX Communication 640 - CSS
650 - Network
670 - Internal data processing
680 - Unique for a specific model
700 - Original handling
7XX Peripherals 720 - Two-tray finisher
740 - Booklet finisher
800 - Error after ready condition
820 - Diagnostics error
8XX Controller
860 - Hard disk
880 - Unique for a specific model
900 - Counter
9XX Others 920 - Memory
990 - Others

SM 4-11 B202/B178/B180
SC TABLE

4.4 SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 101 Exposure lamp • The standard white level is • Exposure lamp 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
error not correctly detected when defective 2. Turn the power key off and on.
scanning the shading plate. • Lamp stabilizer 3. Check and clean the scanner
(The shading data peak defective mirror(s) and scanner lens.
does not reach the specified • Exposure lamp 4. Check and clean the shading plate.
threshold) connector defective 5. Replace the exposure lamp.
• Standard white plate 6. Replace the lamp stabilizer.
dirty 7. Replace the scanner mirror(s) or
• Scanner mirror or scanner lens.
scanner lens out of 8. Replace the SBU.
position or dirty
• SBU defective
SC 120 Scanner home • The scanner home position • Scanner I/O board or SC 121 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
position error 1 sensor does not detect the SBU defective and 122 2. Check the cable connection between
“on” condition during • Scanner motor the scanner I/O board and scanner
scanning. defective motor.
• Harness between 3. Check the cable connection between
scanner I/O board the SBU and HP sensor.
and scanner motor 4. Replace the SBU or scanner I/O
disconnected board.
• Scanner HP sensor 5. Replace the scanner motor.
defective 6. Replace the HP sensor.
• Harness between 7. Replace the following:
SBU and HP sensor • Scanner wire
disconnected • Timing belt
• Scanner wire, timing • Pulley
belt, pulley, or • Carriage
carriage defective

B202/B178/B180 4-12 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 121 Scanner home • The scanner home position • Scanner I/O board or SC 120 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
position error 2 sensor does not detect the SBU defective and 122 2. Check the cable connection between
“off” condition during • Scanner motor the scanner I/O board and scanner
scanning. defective motor.
• Harness between 3. Check the cable connection between
scanner I/O board the SBU and HP sensor.
and scanner motor 4. Replace the SBU or scanner I/O
disconnected board.
• Scanner HP sensor 5. Replace the scanner motor.
defective 6. Replace the HP sensor.
• Harness between 7. Replace the following:
SBU and HP sensor • Scanner wire
disconnected • Timing belt
• Scanner wire, timing • Pulley
belt, pulley, or • Carriage
carriage defective
SC Black level • The black level cannot be • Defective SBU 1. Replace the SBU. D
141- detection error adjusted within the target
001 value during the zero clamp
after the home position
detection.
SC Black level • The black level cannot be • Defective SBU 1. Replace the SBU. D
141- detection error adjusted within the target
002 value during the zero clamp
after the AGC.
SC 142 White level • The white level cannot be • Dirty exposure glass 1. Turn on the main switch off and on. D
detection error adjusted within the target or optics section 2. Clean the exposure glass, white plate,
during auto gain control. • SBU board defective mirrors, and lens.
• IPU board defective 3. Check if the exposure lamp is lit
• Exposure lamp during initialization.
defective 4. Check the harness connection
• Lamp stabilizer between SBU and IPU.
defective 5. Replace the exposure lamp.
6. Replace the SBU board.
7. Replace the IPU board

SM 4-13 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 144 SBU • The SBU hardware is • Defective SBU 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication inconsistent with the hardware 2. Replace the SBU.
error software. • Incorrect software 3. Update the software.
SC 161 IPU error • After the command is • IPU board defective 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
written into the DFID self- (defective connection 2. Replace the IPU board.
diagnosis startup register, between ASIC and
the correct value is not DFID, or Defective
stored in the register in the LSYNC)
specified duration.
NOTE: This error is
detected when the main
switch is turned on.
• After the negate interruption
of FGATE occurs, IPU is not
recognized in the specified
duration.
NOTE: This error is
detected during scanning
operations.
SC 195 Serial Number • Serial number stored in the • NVRAM defective Open the front cover and turn on the D
Mismatch memory does not have the • BCU replaced without main switch. Check the serial number
correct code. original NVRAM with SP5-811-002.
• Incorrect DIP-switch If the stored serial number is incorrect,
setting contact your supervisor.
For DIP-switch settings, see section
5.10.

B202/B178/B180 4-14 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 201 Polygon motor • The polygon mirror motor • Polygon mirror motor SC 221- 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
error does not reach the targeted error 1 to 4 2. Check the cables.
operating speed within 10 • Abnormal GAVD 3. Replace the polygon motor.
seconds after turning on. behavior
• The lock signal does not • Cable disconnection
become high within 3
seconds after turning off the
polygon motor.
• The lock signal does not
become low within 0.2
second after the polygon
motor reaches the targeted
operating speed.
SC 220 Synch. The front (for K&Y) or rear (for • Disconnection of the 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
detection signal C&M) laser synchronizing cable between front 2. Check the cable connection between
error 1 detector board, (used to (K&Y) or rear (C&M) front (for K&Y) or rear (for C&M)
220-001: Y determine the start timing of synchronizing synchronizing detector board and the
220-002: M laser writing), does not send a detector board and LD unit.
220-003: C signal while the polygon motor the LD unit 3. Check or reinstall the front (for K&Y)
220-004: K0 operates normally and the LD • Incorrect installation or rear (for C&M) synchronizing
220-005: K1 is on. of front (K&Y) or rear detector board.
(C&M) synchronizing 4. Replace the front (for K&Y) or rear
detector board (the (for C&M) synchronizing detector
beam does not target board.
the photo detector.) 5. Replace the laser optics-housing unit.
• Defective LD unit 6. Replace the BCU.
• Defective BCU 7. Replace the PSU.
• Defective +5VLD
circuit

SM 4-15 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 221 Synch. Main scan length detection is • Damaged or After doing one of the following, print ten D
detection signal not correctly completed ten disconnected cable jobs or more to see if the same SC code
error 2 consecutive times. between front (C&M) shows:
221-001: Y or rear (K&Y) laser 1. Turn the main switch off and on.
221-002: M The front (for C&M) or rear (for synchronizing 2. Check or replace the cable-
221-003: C K&Y) laser synchronizing detector board and connecting front (for C&M) or rear (for
221-004: K detector boards are used for the LD unit K&Y) synchronizing detector board
the main scan length • Incorrect installation and the LD unit.
detection, which automatically of front (C&M) or rear 3. Check or reinstall the front (for C&M)
corrects the main-scan (K&Y) synchronizing or rear (for K&Y) synchronizing
magnification. detector board (the detector board.
beam does not target 4. Replace the front (for C&M) or rear
the photo detector.) (for K&Y) synchronizing detector
• Defective front (C&M) board.
or rear (K&Y) 5. Replace the laser optics-housing unit.
synchronizing 6. Replace the BCU.
detector board Do the following as a temporary
• Defective LD unit measure if you cannot replace the
synch. detector board:
• Disable main scan length detection
(SP 2-919-001)

B202/B178/B180 4-16 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 230 FGATE error The BCU generates the • Poor connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
230-001: Y FGATE signal based on the between BCU and LD 2. Check the cables between the LD
230-002: M registration sensor ON timing. units units and the BCU.
230-003: C Then it sends the signal to the • Defective BCU 3. Replace the laser optics-housing unit.
230-004: K LD units. The LD units send a • Defective LD unit 4. Replace the BCU.
feedback signal to the BCU.
When the LD units start
emitting laser beams, the
feedback signal changes from
High to Low.

The SC code generates when


the BCU receives no feedback
signal (stays High) from the LD
unit 1 second after paper
reaches the position where the
laser should start writing.
SC 231 FGATE timeout When LD units emit laser • Poor connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
231-001: Y beams to print a job, the between BCU and LD 2. Check the cables between the LD
231-002: M feedback signal stays Low. units units and the BCU.
231-003: C The signal becomes High after • Defective BCU 3. Replace the laser optics-housing unit.
231-004: K laser exposure for a page is • Defective LD unit 4. Replace the BCU.
completed. The SC code is
detected in the following
cases:
• When the feedback signal
stays Low 7 seconds after
completing the laser
exposure, or
• When the feedback signal
stays Low until the laser
exposure timing for the next
page in multi-page print
mode.

SM 4-17 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 240 LD over The power supply for the LD • LD worn out 1. Replace the laser optics-housing unit. C
240-001: Y unit exceeds 110 mA. (current/light output
240-002: M characteristics have
240-003: C changed.)
240-004: K • LD broken (short
circuit)
SC 260 LD HP sensor During homing, it takes more • Defective motor 1. Check the sensor actuator position of C
not switched on than five seconds to switch the • Defective sensor the LD positioning motor.
(for K only) HP sensor on (the sensor • Mechanical problem 2. Replace the LD positioning motor.
actuator does not cover the when switching the 3. Replace the LD home position
sensor). actuator sensor.
• Brown fuse (FU81) on 4. Check and/or replace the PSU.
the Power supply unit
SC 261 LD HP sensor After the laser beam pitch is • Defective motor 1. Check the sensor actuator position of C
not switched off changed, it takes more than • Defective sensor the LD positioning motor.
(for K only) five seconds for the HP sensor • Mechanical problem 2. Replace the LD positioning motor.
to switch off. when switching the 3. Replace the LD home position
actuator sensor.
• Brown fuse (FU81) on 4. Check and/or replace the PSU.
the Power supply unit

B202/B178/B180 4-18 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 285 Line position Line position adjustment fails • Pattern sampling 1. Check and fix the problem that C
adjustment four consecutive times. error due to causes low image density. .
(MUSIC) error insufficient image 2. Clean or replace the transfer belt
density of patterns and/or the ID sensor.
used for the 3. Replace the PCU or clean the
adjustment development unit that causes toner to
• Inconsistency in the drop on the transfer belt.
sampling line position
adjustment pattern
due to dust on the
pattern, damage to
the OPC drum,
damage or toner
dropped on the
transfer belt, or a dirty
or defective ID sensor
SC 370 TD sensor [K]: During the developer • Poor connection (TD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
Adjustment initialization, the output value sensor outputs is less 2. Reset the related color development
error of the TD sensor is out of the than 0.5V.) unit.
SC 371 TD sensor [Y]: adjustment range (X ± 0.2V). • Defective TD sensor 3. Replace the related color
Adjustment NOTE: “X” is adjusted with development unit.
error SP3-006-005.
SC 372 TD sensor [C]:
Adjustment
error
SC 373 TD sensor [M] :
Adjustment
error
SC 374 Vt error [K] During the image • Poor connection (TD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
SC 375 Vt error [Y] development, Vt value is less sensor outputs is less 2. Reset the related color development
SC 376 Vt error [C] than 0.78V. than 0.5V.) unit.
SC 377 Vt error [M] • Defective TD sensor 3. Replace the related color
development unit.

SM 4-19 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 380 Black When the motor speed is • Defective motor 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
development within the target level, the • Defective BCU 2. Replace the motor.
motor error motor sends a lock signal 3. Replace the BCU.
SC 381 Color (High to Low at CN214-5) to
development the BCU.
motor error SC380 is detected under the
following conditions:
• The Lock signal stays High
2 seconds after the motor
turns on.
• The Lock signal stays Low 2
seconds after the motor
turns off.
• The Lock signal stays High
for more than 2 seconds
while the motor is on.
SC 385 ID sensor VSG Vsg is the out of adjustment • Defective ID sensor 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
adjustment range during a process control • Dirty ID sensor 2. Clean the ID sensor and adjacent
error self-check. • ID sensor parts.
disconnected 3. Check the drum cleaning condition.
Adjustment range: • Dirty drum (cleaning 4. Check the ID sensor connector.
4.0 ± 0.5V incomplete) 5. Replace the ID sensor.
SC 386 Development If the following conditions • Unsuitable toner 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
gamma error K happen three consecutive density 2. Check the process control self-check
SC 387 Development times: • Toner supply result (SP3-975). If the result is not
gamma error Y • When the development mechanism problem “1”, fix the problem according to the
SC 388 Development gamma is out of the • Laser exposure table in section 4.1.2.
gamma error C following range: problem 3. Print a full color image by disabling
SC 389 Development 0.3 ≤ γ ≥ 6.0 • Image transfer SC detection (SP5-809-001) and
gamma error M • When Vk is out of the problem check if the image quality is OK. If the
following range: image quality is not OK, fix the
-150V ≤ Vk ≥ 150V problem. Then enable the SC
• Development gamma detection again.
calculation error

B202/B178/B180 4-20 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 390 Development The high voltage supply board • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
Bias output (C/B) checks the circuit and • Defective power pack 2. Check if the harness and cables are
error detects abnormal conditions C/B output correctly connected.
such as a voltage leak or no • Damaged cable 3. Disconnect the high voltage supply
output condition. If this • Defective cables from the bias terminals on the
happens, the high voltage development unit high voltage supply board C/B.
supply board sends an error • Defective BCU Measure the DC voltage with a multi-
signal (High to Low at CN204- meter.
A18) to the BCU. • Replace the high voltage supply
board if no voltage is supplied.
The BCU checks this signal 4. If the result is OK at step 2, check if
every 2 ms and generates this the high voltage supply cable or
SC code when the error development unit is grounded.
condition occurs 250 • Replace the high voltage supply
consecutive times. cable if it is damaged.
• Replace the development unit if it
is damaged.
5. Check if the PWM signals are sent to
the high voltage supplied board from
the BCU. Replace the BCU or
harness between the BCU and high
voltage supply board if the voltage is
0.
SC 391 Charge AC: The high voltage supply board • Power pack 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
output error sends the feedback signal disconnected 2. Check the connector.
391-01: K (CN228-2 to 5; MCYK). The • Charge receptacle or 3. Check that the PCU is correctly
391-02: Y BCU checks these feedback terminal installed.
391-03: M signals every 8 ms. If the • Defective PCU bias 4. Check the PCU charge voltage input
391-04: C average of the sampled data is input terminal (the spring/conducting shaft) or
not within the control target 20 • Incorrect power pack replace the PCU.
consecutive times, this SC B/C output 5. Replace the power pack B/C.
code is generated. • Damaged cable 6. Replace the cable.
• Defective BCU 7. Replace the BCU.
• PCU not found

SM 4-21 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 392 Air pump motor Three consecutive errors are • Damaged cable 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
error detected in motor-driver-signal • Short circuit 2. Replace the air pump.
392-001: MY samples. The samples are • Defective motor 3. Check the circuit.
392-002: CK collected every 0.01 second.
SC 393 TD sensor error The development-unit drive • Loose cable 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
during warming starts. TD sensor signal is 0.78 connection 2. Check that the development unit is
up V or less. • Positioning plate out correctly installed.
393-001: K of place 3. Remove the development unit and
393-002: Y • Defective TD sensor check the connector on the rear.
393-003: C • Development unit not 4. Check the positioning plate.
393-004: M found 5. Replace the development unit.
SC 440 Drum motor No drum gear position sensor • Defective PCU 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
error signal is detected within 0.8 • Defective drum motor 2. Check and/or replace the PCU.
440-001: Black second (C2a/k: 125 mm/s, • Defective drum gear 3. Check and/or replace the sensor.
440-002: Color C2b: 162 mm/s) or 2.0 position sensor
seconds (81 mm/s).
SC Thermistor 1 When the temperature • Thermistor 1 1. Check the cable connections. C
460- error (open detected by thermistor 1, defective 2. Replace the thermistor.
001 circuit) which is at the left (fusing unit) • Cable connection 3. Replace the BCU.
side of the laser optics unit, is error
less than -30°C for 10 seconds • BCU defect
consecutively, the BCU
determines that the circuit is
open and shows this SC code.
SC Thermistor 1 When the temperature • Thermistor 1 1. Check the cable connections. C
460- error (short detected by the thermistor 1, defective 2. Replace the thermistor.
002 circuit) which is at the left (fusing unit) • Cable connection 3. Replace the BCU.
side of the laser optics unit, is error
higher than 70°C for 10 • BCU defect
seconds consecutively, the
BCU determines that the
circuit is shorted and shows
this SC code

B202/B178/B180 4-22 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC Thermistor 2 When the temperature • Thermistor 2 1. Check the cable connections. C
461- error (open detected by the thermistor 2, defective 2. Replace the thermistor.
001 circuit) which is at the right (paper • Cable connection 4. Replace the BCU.
feed section) side of the laser error
optics unit, is less than -30°C • BCU defect
for 10 seconds consecutively,
the BCU determines that the
circuit is open and shows this
SC code.
SC Thermistor 2 When the temperature • Thermistor 2 1. Check the cable connections. C
461- error (short detected by the thermistor 2, defective 2. Replace the thermistor.
002 circuit) which is at the right (paper • Cable connection 3. Replace the BCU.
feed section) side of the laser error
optics unit, is higher than 70°C • BCU defect
for 10 seconds consecutively,
the BCU determines that the
circuit is shorted and shows
this SC code
SC 471 Transfer belt The transfer belt HP sensor • Transfer belt unit not 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
H.P. error signal does not change from set correctly 2. Reset the transfer belt unit.
Low to High (home position) or • Defective transfer belt 3. Clean or replace the transfer belt
vice-versa 1 second after the H.P. sensor and/or sensor.
transfer belt contact motor transfer belt sensor 4. Replace the transfer belt contact
turns on. • Defective transfer belt motor.
contact motor 5. Check the contact and release
• Transfer belt unit mechanism of the transfer belt unit.
problem
SC 481 Waste toner The waste toner vibrator does • Loose connector 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
vibrator error not operate. • Defective motor 2. Replace the motor.

SM 4-23 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 490 Transfer bias / The high voltage supply board • Defective high 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
paper attraction transfer checks the circuit and voltage supply board 2. Check the transfer unit and replace
roller bias leak detects current leaks. If this - Transfer the belt and/or the transfer unit if it is
error happens, the high voltage • Damaged transfer damaged.
supply board sends a SC belt 3. Replace the high voltage supply
signal (High to Low at CN213- board - Transfer.
8) to the BCU.
• Transfer unit 4. Check and/or replace the high voltage
• Damaged high supply cables.
The BCU checks this signal voltage supply cables 5. Check and/or replace the dc cables
every 2 ms and generates this • Damaged cables between the BCU and high voltage
SC code when the error between the BCU and supply board.
condition occurs 250 high voltage supply 6. Replace the BCU.
consecutive times. board
• Defective BCU
SC 501 Paper Tray 1 When the tray lift motor is • Defective paper lift 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
error turned on, (if the upper limit is sensor 2. Check if the bottom plate smoothly
SC 502 Paper Tray 2 not detected within 10 • Defective tray lift moves up and down manually.
error seconds), the machine asks motor 3. Check and/or replace the paper lift
the user to reset the tray. If this • Defective bottom sensor.
condition occurs three plate lift mechanism 4. Check and/or replace the tray lift
consecutive times, the SC is motor.
generated.

B202/B178/B180 4-24 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC Tray 3 error For the paper feed unit: For the paper feed unit: 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
503-01 (Paper Feed When the tray lift motor is • Defective tray lift 2. Check the cable connections.
Unit or LCT) turned on, (if the upper limit is motor or connector 3. Check and/or replace the defective
not detected within 18 disconnection component.
seconds), the machine asks • Defective lift sensor
the user to reset the tray. If this or connector
condition occurs three disconnection
consecutive times, the SC is
generated. For the LCT:
• Defective stack
For the LCT: transport clutch or
This SC is generated under connector
the following conditions: disconnection
• If the upper or lower limit is • Defective tray motor
not detected within 15 or connector
seconds when the tray lift disconnection
motor is turned on to lift up • Defective end fence
or lower the tray home position sensor
• If the paper stack is not or connector
transported within a specific disconnection
number of pulses after the • Defective upper limit
tray motor and stack sensor or connector
transport clutch turn on to disconnection
transport the paper stack • Defective tray lift
• If the end fence home motor or connector
position sensor stays ON for disconnection
a specific number of pulses
after the tray motor and
stack transport clutch turn
on to transport the paper
stack.

SM 4-25 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC Tray 3 error • This SC is generated if the For the paper feed unit: 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
503-02 (Paper Feed following condition occurs 3 • Defective tray lift 2. Check the cable connections.
Unit or LCT) consecutive times. motor or connector 3. Check and/or replace the defective
disconnection component.
For the paper feed unit: • Defective lift sensor
When the main switch is or connector
turned or when the tray is set disconnection
and if the upper limit is already
detected, the lift motor turns on For the LCT:
to lower the bottom plate until • Defective stack
the lift sensor goes off. transport clutch or
If the motor turns on for 7 connector
seconds or more, the machine disconnection
asks the user to reset the tray. • Defective tray motor
or connector
For the LCT: disconnection
When the main switch is • Defective end fence
turned on or when the LCT is home position sensor
set, if the end fence is not in or connector
the home position (home disconnection
position sensor ON), the tray
lift motor stops.
SC Tray 4 error (3 When the tray lift motor is • Defective tray lift 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
504-01 Tray Paper turned on, (if the upper limit is motor or connector 2. Check the cable connections.
Feed Unit) not detected within 18 disconnection 3. Check and/or replace the defective
seconds), the machine asks • Defective lift sensor component.
the user to reset the tray. If this or connector
condition occurs three disconnection
consecutive times, the SC is
generated.

B202/B178/B180 4-26 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC Tray 4 error (3 When the main switch is • Defective tray lift 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
504-02 Tray Paper turned or when the tray is set motor or connector 2. Check the cable connections.
Feed Unit) and if the upper limit is already disconnection 3. Check and/or replace the defective
detected, the lift motor turns on • Defective lift sensor component.
to lower the bottom plate until or connector
the lift sensor goes off. disconnection
If the motor turns on for 7
seconds or more, the machine
asks the user to reset the tray.
If this condition occurs 3
consecutive times, this SC is
generated.
SC 530 Fusing fan The BCU does not receive the • Defective fusing fan 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
motor error lock signal (CN210-B5) 5 motor or connector 2. Check the connector and/or replace
seconds after turning on the disconnection the fusing fan motor.
fusing fan. • Defective BCU 3. Replace the BCU.
SC 541 Heating roller The temperature measured by • Loose connection of 1. Check if the heating roller thermistor A
thermistor error the heating roller thermistor the heating roller is firmly connected.
does not reach 7 °C for ten thermistor 2. Replace the fusing unit.
seconds. • Defective heating 3. Replace the BCU.
roller thermistor
• Defective BCU

SM 4-27 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 542 Heating roller When the fusing unit is not • Heating roller fusing SC 552 1. Check if the heating roller thermistor A
warm-up error running after the main switch lamp broken is firmly connected.
has been turned on or • Defective heating 2. Replace the fusing unit.
recovering, the increment of roller thermistor 3. Replace the BCU.
the heating roller temperature • Defective BCU
per three seconds is 17°C or
less. If this condition is
detected five times
consecutively, SC 542 is
defined.
The heating roller temperature
does not reach the ready
temperature while 150
seconds after the heating lamp
has been turned on.
SC 543 Heating roller The detected fusing • Defective PSU SC 553 1. Replace the PSU. A
fusing lamp temperature stays at 250°C or • Defective BCU 2. Replace the BCU.
overheat more for 2 seconds.
SC 544 Heating roller During stand-by mode or a • Defective heating SC 543 1. Replace the fusing unit. A
fusing lamp print job, the detected heating roller thermistor 2. Replace the PSU.
high roller temperature stays at • Defective PSU 3. Replace the BCU.
temperature 230 °C or more for 0.2 second. • Defective BCU
error
SC 545 Heating roller When the fusing unit is not • Heating roller SC 555 1. Replace the fusing unit. A
fusing lamp running in the Ready condition, thermistor out of
consecutive full the heating roller fusing lamp position
power keeps on with full power for 35
consecutive seconds.
SC 551 Pressure roller The measured pressure roller • Loose connection of SC 541 1. Check that the pressure roller A
thermistor error temperature does not reach pressure roller thermistor is firmly connected.
7°C for 60 seconds. thermistor 2. Replace the fusing unit.
• Defective pressure 3. Replace the BCU.
roller thermistor
• Defective BCU

B202/B178/B180 4-28 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 552 Pressure roller After the main switch is turned • Pressure roller fusing SC 542 1. Check if the pressure roller thermistor A
warm-up error on or the door is closed, the lamp broken is firmly connected.
pressure roller temperature • Defective pressure 2. Replace the fusing unit.
does not reach the ready roller thermistor 3. Replace the BCU.
temperature within 210 • Defective BCU
seconds during fusing unit
warm-up.
SC 553 Pressure roller The detected pressure roller • Defective PSU SC 543 1. Replace the fusing unit. A
fusing lamp temperature stays at 210°C or • Defective BCU 2. Replace the PSU.
overheat more for five seconds. 3. Replace the BCU.
SC 555 Pressure roller When the fusing unit is not • Pressure roller SC 545 1. Replace the fusing unit. A
fusing lamp running in the Ready condition, thermistor out of
consecutive full the pressure roller-fusing lamp position
power keeps ON with full power for
300 consecutive seconds.
SC 560 Zero cross error When the main switch is • Electrical noise in the 1. Replace the PSU. A
turned on, the machine checks supply from the
how many zero-cross signals power cord
are generated during 500 ms.
If the number of zero-cross
signal generated is either more
than 66 or less than 45 and
when this condition is detected
10 consecutive times, this
code is displayed.
SC 620 ARDF • After the ARDF is detected, • Incorrect installation 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication the break signal occurs or of ARDF 2. Check the cable connection of the
error communication timeout • ARDF defective ARDF.
occurs. • IPU board defective 3. Shut out the external noise.
• External noise 4. Replace the ARDF.
5. Replace the IPU board.

SM 4-29 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 621 Two-tray While the BCU communicates • Cable problems 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
finisher/booklet with an optional unit, an SC • BCU problems 2. Check if the cables of peripherals are
finisher code is displayed if one of • PSU problems in the correctly connected.
communication following conditions occurs. machine 3. Replace the PSU if no power is
error 1. The BCU receives the • Main board problems supplied to peripherals.
SC 622 Bank break signal which is in the peripherals 4. Replace the BCU or main board of
communication generated by the peripherals.
error peripherals only just after
SC 623 Duplex unit the main switch is turned • Cable problems 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication on. • BCU problems 2. Check if the cable of the duplex
error 2. When the BCU does not • PSU problems in the inverter unit is correctly connected.
receive an OK signal from a machine 3. Replace the PSU if no power is
peripheral 100ms after • Duplex control board supplied to the peripherals.
sending a command to it. problem 4. Replace the duplex control board in
The BCU resends the the inverter unit.
command. The BCU does
not receive an OK signal
after sending the command
3 times.
SC 630 CSS An communication error has • Communication line Logging only. CTL
communication occurred during error
error communication with the CSS.
SC 632 MF accounting The controller sends data to • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
device error 1 the accounting device, but the between the 2. Check the connection.
device does not respond. This controller and the
occurs three times. accounting device
SC 633 MF accounting After communication is
device error 2 established, the controller
receives the brake signal from
the accounting device.

B202/B178/B180 4-30 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 634 MF accounting The accounting device sends • Defective controller of 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
device error 3 the controller the report that the MF accounting 2. Replace the controller board of the
indicates a backup RAM error device accounting device.
has occurred. • Battery error 3. Replace the battery.
SC 635 MF accounting The accounting device sends
device error 4 the controller the report that
indicates the battery voltage
error has occurred.
SC 670 No response When the main power is • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
from BCU at turned on or the machine • Defective controller 2. Check the connection between the
power on starts warming up from • Defective BCU BCU and controller.
energy-saving mode, the 3. Replace the controller.
controller does not receive a 4. Replace the BCU.
command signal from the
BCU.
SC 672 Controller-to- • After the machine is • Controller stalled 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
operation panel powered on, the • Controller board 2. Check the condition of the controller
communication communication between the installed incorrectly board.
error at startup controller and the operation • Controller board 3. Check the condition of the operation
panel is not established, or defective panel.
communication with • Operation panel 4. Replace the controller board.
controller is interrupted after connector loose or 5. Replace the operation panel.
a normal startup. defective 6. Turn the main switch off, wait for one
• After startup reset of the • The controller is not second or more, and turn the main
operation panel, the completely shutdown switch on.
attention code or the when you turn the
attention acknowledge code main switch off.
is not sent from the
controller within 15 seconds.
• After the controller issues a
command to check the
communication line with the
controller at 30-second
intervals, the controller fails
to respond twice.

SM 4-31 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 680 BCU/ MUSIC After the engine CPU sends a • Toner cartridge 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication message, the Music CPU does memory chip loose 2. Check if the toner cartridge is
error not respond within five connection installed correctly.
seconds three consecutive • Memory chip problem 3. Replace the toner cartridge.
times. • Memory chip cable 4. Check if the harnesses are not
wiring problem damaged.
5. Replace the BCU.
SC 685 SBU-IPU • During data transfer, a • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication checksum error occurs. between SBU and 2. Shut out the external noise.
error • During any operation except IPU 3. Check the cable connection of the
initialization, the SBU sends • SBU board defective scanner unit.
a hardware-reset • IPU board defective 4. Replace the SBU board.
acknowledgement to the • External noise 5. Replace the IPU board.
IPU.
SC 686 BCU-IPU • After the machine is • Board connector 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication powered on or recovering between BCU and 2. Check the cable connection between
error from the power save mode, controller loose the board connector and BCU.
timeout occurs during BCU • Board connector 3. Check the cable connection between
communication. between controller controller and motherboard.
• The break signal is received and motherboard 4. Check the cable connection between
after the communication is loose motherboard and IPU.
normally established with • Board connector 5. Replace the BCU board.
the BCU. between motherboard 6. Replace the IPU board.
• Timeout occurs while the and IPU loose 7. Replace the controller board.
communication with the • BCU board defective 8. Replace the motherboard.
BCU is retried after a • IPU board defective
communication error. • Controller board
defective
• Motherboard
defective
SC 687 Memory The BCU does not receive a • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
address memory address command • Defective controller 2. Check if the controller is firmly
command error from the controller 120 • Defective BCU connected to the BCU.
seconds after paper is in the 3. Replace the controller.
position for registration. 4. Replace the BCU.

B202/B178/B180 4-32 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC GAVD • The I2C bus device ID is not • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
690- communication identified during • Defective BCU 2. Check the cable connection.
001 error initialization. • Defective LD 3. Replace the laser optics-housing unit.
690-001: Y • A device-status error occurs controller board 4. Replace the BCU board.
690-002: M during I2C bus
690-003: C communication.
690-004: K • The I2C bus communication
is not established due to an
error other than a buffer
shortage.
SC 692 GAPCI2C • The I2C bus device ID is not • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication identified during • Defective BCU 2. Check the cable connection.
error initialization. • Defective LD 3. Replace the BCU.
• A device-status error occurs controller board
during I2C bus
communication.
• The I2C bus communication
is not established due to an
error other than a buffer
shortage.
SC 700 ARDF original • After the pick-up motor is • Original stopper HP SC 701 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
pick-up turned on, the original sensor defective 2. Replace the HP sensor.
malfunction stopper HP sensor is not • Pick-up motor 3. Turn the main switch off and on.
activated. defective (not 4. Replace the pick-up motor.
rotating) 5. Replace the control board.
• Timing belt out of
position
• ARDF main board
defective
SC 701 ARDF original • The original pick-up HP • Original pick-up HP SC 700 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
pick-up/paper sensor is not activated after sensor defective 2. Replace the pick-up motor.
lift mechanism the pick-up motor is turned • Pick-up motor 3. Replace the control board.
malfunction on. defective 4. Replace the HP sensor.
• ARDF main board
defective

SM 4-33 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 722 Two-tray • The jogger fences of the • Defective jogger H.P. 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher jogger two-tray finisher donot sensor 2. Check the connection of jogger H.P.
motor error return to home position • Loose connection sensor and jogger motor connectors
within a specific time. • Defective jogger 3. Replace the jogger H.P. sensor.
• The two-tray finisher jogger motor 4. Replace the jogger motor.
motor does not leave home
position within a given time.
SC 724 Two-tray Stapling does not finish within • Staple jam 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher staple 150 ms after the staple • Loose connection 2. Check if the staple hammer motor
hammer motor hammer motor turns on. • Overload caused by connector is correctly connected.
error stapling too many 3. Check if the staple jam occurs.
pages 4. Replace the staple hammer motor.
• Defective staple
hammer motor
SC 725 Two-tray The stack feed-out belt H.P. • Defective stack feed- 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher stack sensor does not activate within out H.P. sensor 2. Check if the connectors of the stack
feed-out motor a specified time after the stack • Loose connection feed-out H.P. sensor and motor are
error feed-out motor turns on. • Stack feed-out motor correctly connected.
overload 3. Replace the stack feed-out H.P.
• Defective stack feed- sensor.
out motor 4. Replace the stack feed-out motor.

B202/B178/B180 4-34 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 726 Two-tray • The upper stack height 1 • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher shift sensor is activated • Defective upper stack 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
tray 1 lift motor consecutively (detecting height 1 sensor and motor are correctly connected.
error paper) for 15 seconds after • Defective shift tray 1 3. Replace the upper stack height 1
the shift tray starts moving lift motor sensor.
up. • Motor overload 4. Replace the shift tray 1 lift motor.
• The upper stack height
sensor 1 is deactivated
consecutively (not detecting
paper) for 15 seconds after
the shift tray starts moving
down.
• When the upper tray moves
from lower paper exit to the
upper paper exit, the upper
stack height 1 sensor is
activated.
SC 727 Two-tray The stapler cannot return to its • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher stapler home position within a • Defective stapler 2. Check if the stapler rotation motor
rotation motor specified time after the stapler rotation motor connector is correctly connected.
error rotation motor starts rotating. • Motor overload 3. Replace the stapler rotation motor.
SC 729 Two-tray The punch home position is • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher punch not detected within 250 ms • Defective punch H.P. 2. Check if the connectors of sensor,
motor error after the punch clutch turns on. sensor clutch and/or motor are correctly
• Defective punch connected.
clutch 3. Replace the punch H.P. sensor.
• Defective punch hole 4. Replace the punch clutch.
motor 5. Replace the punch hole motor.
SC 730 Two-tray The stapler home position is • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher stapler not detected within a specified • Defective stapler H.P. 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
motor error time after the staple motor sensor and motor are correctly connected.
turns on. • Defective stapler 3. Replace the stapler H.P. sensor.
motor 4. Replace the stapler motor.

SM 4-35 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 731 Two-tray The exit guide plate open • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher exit sensor is not activated within a • Defective exit guide 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
guide plate specified time after the exit plate open sensor and motor are correctly connected.
motor error guide plate motor turns on. • Defective exit guide 3. Replace the exit guide plate open
plate motor sensor.
4. Replace the exit guide plate motor.
SC 732 Two-tray Tray 1 home position is not • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher tray 1 detected within a specified • Defective tray shift 1 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
shift motor error time after the tray 1 shift motor sensor and motor are correctly connected.
turns on. • Defective tray 1 shift 3. Replace the tray shift 1 sensor.
motor 4. Replace the tray 1 shift motor.
SC 733 Two-tray • The lower stack height 1 • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher tray 2 sensor is activated • Defective lower stack 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
lift motor error consecutively (detecting height 1 sensor and motor are correctly connected.
paper) for 15 seconds after • Defective tray 2 lift 3. Replace the lower stack height 1
the shift tray starts moving motor sensor.
up. • Motor overload 4. Replace the tray 2 lift motor.
• The lower stack height
sensor 1 is deactivated
consecutively (not detecting
paper) for 15 seconds after
the shift tray starts moving
down.
SC 734 Two-tray Tray 2 home position is not • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher tray 2 detected within a specified • Defective tray shift 2 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
shift motor error time after the tray 2 shift motor sensor and motor are correctly connected.
turns on. • Defective tray 2 shift 3. Replace the tray shift 2 sensor.
motor 4. Replace the tray 2 shift motor.

B202/B178/B180 4-36 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 740 Booklet finisher • The folder home position • Defective transport 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
transport motor sensor does not turn off motor 2. Check the connection of the transport
error within 2 seconds after the • Loose connection of motor.
folder rollers start to move. the transport motor 3. Check the connection of the folder
• The folder home position • Defective folder home home position sensor.
sensor does not turn on position sensor 4. Replace the transport motor.
within 2 seconds after the • Loose connection of
folder rollers start the holder home
transporting the paper to the position sensor
booklet tray.
SC 741 Booklet finisher • The paddle home position • Defective paddle 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
paddle motor sensor does not turn off motor 2. Check that the connection of the
error within 2 seconds after the • Loose connection of paddle motor.
paddles start to move. the paddle motor 3. Check the connection of the paddle
• The paddle home position • Defective paddle home position sensor.
sensor does not turn on home position sensor 4. Check the connection of the stack-
within 2 seconds after the • Loose connection of tray upper-roller home-position
paddles start to operate. the paddle home sensor.
• The stack-tray upper roller position sensor 5. Replace the paddle motor.
home position sensor does • Defective stack-tray
not turn off within 2 seconds upper-roller home-
after the paddle motor starts position sensor
to lower the roller. • Loose connection of
• The stack-tray upper-roller the stack-tray upper-
home-position sensor does roller home-position
not turn on with in 2 sensor
seconds after the paddle
motor starts to lower the
roller.

SM 4-37 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 742 Booklet finisher • The stapler home position • Defective stapler slide 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
stapler slide sensor does not turn off motor 2. Check the connection of the stapler
motor error within 1 second after this • Loose connection of slide motor.
same sensor turns on. the stapler slide 3. Check the connection of the stapler
• The stapler home position motor home position sensor.
sensor does not turn on • Defective stapler 4. Replace the stapler home position
within 1 second when the home position sensor sensor.
stapler is coming back to its • Loose connection of 5. Replace the stapler slide motor.
home position. the stapler home
position sensor
SC 743 Booklet finisher • The front-jogger-fence • Incorrect assembling 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
front jogger home-position sensor does of the front jogger 2. Check the connection of the front
fence motor not turn off within 3 seconds fence jogger fence motor.
error after the front-jogger-fence • Loose connection of 3. Check the connection of the front-
motor starts. the front jogger fence jogger-fence home-position sensor.
• The front-jogger-fence motor 4. Replace the front-jogger-fence home-
home-position sensor does • Defective front- position sensor.
not turn on within 3 seconds jogger-fence home- 5. Replace the front jogger fence motor.
when the front-jogger-fence position sensor
motor is driving the fence to • Loose connection of
its home position. the front-jogger-fence
home-position sensor
SC 744 Booklet finisher • The rear-jogger-fence • Incorrect assembling 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
rear jogger home-position sensor does of the rear jogger 2. Check the connection of the rear
fence motor not turn off within 3 seconds fence jogger fence motor.
error after the rear-jogger-fence • Loose connection of 3. Check the connection of the rear-
motor starts. the rear jogger fence jogger-fence home-position sensor.
• The rear-jogger-fence motor 4. Replace the rear-jogger-fence home-
home-position sensor does • Defective rear-jogger- position sensor.
not turn on within 3 seconds fence home-position 5. Replace the rear jogger fence motor.
when the rear-jogger-fence sensor
motor is driving the fence to • Loose connection of
its home position. the rear-jogger-fence
home-position sensor

B202/B178/B180 4-38 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 745 Booklet finisher • The stack-tray-belt home- • Defective stack-tray 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
stack-tray exit position sensor does not exit motor 2. Check the connection of the stack-
motor error turn off within 394 • Loose connection of tray exit motor.
milliseconds after the stack- the stack-tray exit 3. Check the connection of the stack-
tray exit roller starts to drive motor tray-belt home-position sensor.
the belts. → The stack-tray • Defective stack-tray- 4. Replace the stack-tray-belt home-
exit motor retries to drive belt home-position position sensor.
the belts, but the stack-tray- sensor 5. Replace the stack-tray exit motor.
belt home-position sensor • Loose connection of
still does not turn off within the stack-tray-belt
another 394 milliseconds. home-position sensor
• The stack-tray-belt home-
position sensor does not
turn on within 1,084
milliseconds after the same
home-position sensor turns
off. → The stack-tray exit
motor retires to drive the
belts, but the stack-tray belt
home-position sensor still
does not turn on within
another 1,084 milliseconds.

SM 4-39 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 746 Booklet finisher • The stapler/folder motor • Malfunction of the 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
stapler/folder starts. However, the stapler/folder motor 2. Check the connection of the
motor error controller does not receive • Loose connection of stapler/folder motor.
the signal from the encoder the stapler/folder 3. Check the connection of the encoder
sensor within 0.1 second. motor sensor.
• The stapler/folder motor • Loose connection of 4. Check the connection of the stapler
starts to drive the stapler the encoder sensor switch.
unit, and the stapler switch • Defective encoder 5. Check the connection of the stapler
is on. However, the sensor home position sensor.
controller does not receive • Loose connection of 6. Check the connection of the folder-
the signal from the home the stapler switch roller home-position sensor.
position sensor for 0.5 • Defective stapler 7. Replace the stapler/folder motor.
second. switch 8. Replace the encoder sensor.
• The stapler starts to staple • Loose connection of 9. Replace the stapler switch.
the paper. However, the the stapler home 10.Replace the stapler home position
controller does not receive position sensor sensor.
any signal from the home 11. Replace the folder-roller home-
• Defective stapler
position sensor, and the position sensor.
home position sensor
stapler switch is off. • Loose connection of
• The stapler/folder motor the folder-roller
starts to drive the folder home-position sensor
rollers. However, the home • Defective folder-roller
position sensor does not home-position sensor
turn off within 9.247
seconds.
• The home position sensor
does not turn on within
9.247 seconds after this
same sensor turns off.

B202/B178/B180 4-40 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 747 Booklet finisher • The upper limit sensor • Defective paper 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
lift motor error detects the regular tray height sensor 2. Check the connection of the paper
while the lift motor is lifting • Loose connection of height sensor.
the regular tray. the paper height 3. Check the connection of the upper
• The paper height sensor sensor limit sensor.
does not turn off within 10 • Defective upper limit 4. Check the connection of the lift motor
seconds after the lift motor sensor encoder sensor.
starts to lower the regular • Loose connection of 5. Check the connection of the lift motor.
tray. the upper limit sensor 6. Replace the paper height sensor.
• The upper limit sensor does • Defective lift motor 7. Replace the upper limit sensor.
not turn off within 10 • Loose connection of 8. Replace the lift motor encoder sensor.
seconds after the lift motor the lift motor 9. Replace the lift motor.
starts to lower the regular • Incorrect assembling
tray. of the lift motor
• The paper height sensor • Defective lift motor
does not turn on within 10 encoder sensor
seconds after the lift motor • Loose connection of
starts to lift the regular tray. the lift motor encoder
• The controller does not sensor
receive the signal from the
lift motor encoder sensor
within 50 milliseconds after
the lift motor starts.
SC 748 Booklet finisher The CPU tries to write data in • Defective EEPROM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
backup data the EEPROM three times, but • EEPROM not 2. Check that the EEPROM is installed.
error fails to write data. installed 3. Replace the EEPROM.
SC 749 Booklet finisher A communication-error alarm • The finisher controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit is not cleared for 3 seconds. cannot communicate 2. Check the connection between the
communication with the punch-unit finisher controller and the punch-unit
error controller. controller.
SC 750 Booklet finisher The checksum in the backup • Defective EEPROM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit data is inconsistent. (on the punch-unit 2. Check that the EEPROM is installed.
controller error controller) 3. Replace the EEPROM.
• EEPROM not
installed

SM 4-41 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 751 Booklet finisher The paper edge and size • Defective sensors 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit sensors receive the 2.5-volt • Dirty sensors 2. Clean the sensors.
sensor error 1 light or weaker light even when 3. Replace the sensors.
the source emits 4.4-volt light.
SC 752 Booklet finisher • The registration motor • Incorrect assembly of 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit drives the slide unit to the the registration motor 2. Check the connection of the
registration rear side for 1 second. • Loose connection of registration motor.
motor error However, the home position the registration motor 3. Check the connection of the home
sensor does not turn on. • Defective home position sensor.
• The registration motor position sensor 4. Replace the home position sensor.
drives the slide unit to the • Loose connection of 5. Replace the registration motor.
front side for 1 second. the home position
However, the home position sensor
sensor does not turn off.
SC 753 Booklet finisher • The punch motor starts to • Malfunction of the 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit drive the punch cams. punch motor 2. Check that the connection of the
punch motor However, the controller • Loose connection of punch motor.
error does not receive the the punch motor 3. Check the connection of the home
encoder-lock signal for 60 • Defective home position sensor.
milliseconds. position sensor 4. Check the connection of the encoder
• The punch motor start to • Loose connection of sensor.
drive the punch cams. the home position 5. Replace the home position sensor.
However, the home sensor 6. Replace the encoder sensor.
positions sensor does not • Loose connection of 7. Replace the punch motor.
turn on for 250 milliseconds. the encoder sensor
• Defective encoder
sensor
SC 754 Booklet finisher The A/D inputs of the sensor • Defective sensor 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit are not corrected by varying • Dirty sensor 2. Clean the sensors.
sensor error 2 the D/A outputs. 3. Replace the sensors.
SC 818 Watch-dog While the system program is • Defective controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error running, other processes do • Software error 2. Replace the controller.
not operate at all. 3. See NOTE 1 at the end of the SC
table

B202/B178/B180 4-42 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 819 Fatal error
[696E] Process error System completely down • Defective RAM DIMM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
[766D] Memory error Unexpected system memory • Defective ROM DIMM 2. Check and/or replace the RAM DIMM.
size • Defective controller 3. Check and/or replace the ROM
• Software error DIMM.
4. Replace the controller.
5. See NOTE at the end of the SC
table.

[4361] Kernel stop The cache error trap occurs in • CPU cache error 1. Replace the controller. CTL
error the CPU.
Kernel stop Any error in the operation • Defective CPU 1. Replace the memory. CTL
error system (An error message is • Defective memory 2. Replace the controller.
output.) • Defective flash
memory
• Incorrect software
SC 820 Self-diagnostics error: CPU [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[0001] CPU error During the self-diagnostic, the • System firmware 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
to controller CPU detects an problem 2. Reinstall the controller system
[06FF] error. There are 47 types of • Defective controller firmware.
error code (0001 to 4005) 3. Replace the controller.
depending on the cause of the
error. The CPU detects an When the problem cannot be fixed with
error and displays the specific the above procedure, the following
error code with the program information displayed on the screen
address where the error needs to be fed back to a technical
occurs. support center.

• SC code
• Detailed error code
• Program address

SM 4-43 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
[0702] CPU/Memory • System firmware 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
[0709] Error problem 2. Reinstall the controller system
[070A] • Defective RAM-DIMM software.
• Defective controller 3. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
4. Replace the controller.
[0801] CPU error Same as [0001] CTL
to
[4005]
SC 821 Self-diagnostics error: ASIC [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[0B00] ASIC error The write-&-verify check error • Defective ASIC 1. Replace the controller. CTL
has occurred in the ASIC. device
[0D05] Self-diagnosis The CPU checks if the ASIC • System firmware 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error: ASIC timer works correctly problem 2. Reinstall the controller system
compared with the CPU timer. • Defective RAM-DIMM firmware.
If the ASIC timer does not • Defective controller 3. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
function in the specified range, 4. Replace the controller board.
this SC code is displayed.
SC 822 Self-diagnostic error: HDD (Hard Disk Drive) [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[3003] Timeout error When the main switch is • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
[3004] Command error turned on or starting the self- • Defective HDD 2. Check that the HDD is correctly
diagnostic, the HDD stays • Defective controller connected to the controller.
busy for the specified time or 3. Replace the HDD.
more. 4. Replace the controller.
SC 823 Self-diagnostic error: NIB [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[6101] MAC address The result of the MAC address • Defective controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
check sum error check sum does not match the 2. Replace the controller.
check sum stored in ROM.
[6104] PHY IC error The PHY IC on the controller
cannot be correctly
recognized.
[6105] PHY IC loop- An error occurred during the
back error loop-back test for the PHY IC
on the controller.

B202/B178/B180 4-44 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 824 Self-diagnosis The controller cannot • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
[1401] error: Standard recognize the standard • Defective standard 2. Check the standard NVRAM is firmly
NVRAM NVRAM installed or detects NVRAM inserted into the socket.
that the NVRAM is defective. • Defective controller 3. Replace the NVRAM.
4. Replace the controller.
SC 826 Self-diagnostic error: RTC [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[1501] Self-diagnostic • An RTC device is • RTC defective 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
Error: RTC/ recognized, and the • NVRAM without RTC 2. Replace the NVRAM with another
Optional difference between the RTC installed NVRAM with an RTC device.
NVRAM device and the CPU • Backup battery
exceeds the defined limit. discharged
• No RTC device is
recognized.
[15FF] Self-diagnostic • The RTC device is not • NVRAM without RTC 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
Error: RTC/ detected. installed 2. Replace the NVRAM with another
Optional • Backup battery NVRAM with an RTC device.
NVRAM discharged
SC 827 Self-diagnostic error: Standard SDRAM DIMM [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[0201] Verification Error detected during a • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error write/verify check for the • Defective SDRAM 2. Replace the SDRAM DIMM.
standard RAM (SDRAM DIMM 3. Replace the controller.
DIMM). • Defective controller
[0202] Resident The SPD values in all RAM • Defective RAM DIMM 1. Replace the RAM DIMM. CTL
memory error DIMM are incorrect or • Defective SPD ROM
unreadable. on RAM DIMM
• Defective 12C bus
SC 828 Self-diagnostic error : ROM [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[0101] Check sum The boot monitor and OS • Defective ROM DIMM 1. Turn the main switch on and off. CTL
error 1 program stored in the ROM • Defective controller 2. Replace the ROM DIMM
DIMM is checked. If the check 3. Replace the controller.
sum of the program is
incorrect, this SC code is
displayed.

SM 4-45 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
[0104] Check sum All areas of the ROM DIMM
error 2 are checked. If the check sum
of all programs stored in the
ROM DIMM is incorrect, this
SC code is displayed.
SC 829 Self-diagnosis error: optional RAM [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[0302] Composition The result of checking the • Not specified RAM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error (Slot 0) composition data of the RAM DIMM installed 2. Replace the RAM DIMM.
in Slot 0 (CN5) on the • Defective RAM DIMM 3. Replace the controller board.
controller is incorrect.
[0401] Verification The data stored in the RAM in
error (Slot 1) Slot 1 does not match the data
when reading.
[0402] Composition The result of checking the
error (Slot 1) composition data of the RAM
in Slot 1 (CN6) on the
controller is incorrect.
SC 840 EEPROM An error has occurred during Defective EEPROM 1. Replace the EEPROM on the CTL
access error I/O processing. controller.
SC 841 EEPROM read The EEPROM stores three Defective EEPROM 1. Replace the EEPROM on the CTL
error different data in mirrored controller.
areas.
SC 850 Network The network is unusable. • Defective controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
interface error 2. Replace the controller.
SC 851 IEEE1394 The 1394 interface is • Defective IEEE1394 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
interface error unusable. • Defective controller. 2. Replace the IEEE1394 interface
board.
3. Replace the controller.
SC 853 Wireless LAN The wireless LAN card is not • Loose connection SC 854 1. Check the connection. CTL
card not detected before
detected communication is established,
though the wireless LAN board
is detected.

B202/B178/B180 4-46 SM
SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 854 Wireless LAN The wireless LAN card is not • Loose connection SC 853 1. Check the connection. CTL
card not detected after communication
detected is established, though the
wireless LAN board is
detected.
SC 855 Wireless LAN An error is detected in the • Loose connection 1. Check the connection. CTL
card error wireless LAN card. • Defective wireless 2. Replace the wireless LAN card.
LAN card
SC 856 Wireless LAN An error is detected in the • Defective wireless 1. Check the connection. CTL
card error wireless LAN board. LAN board 2. Replace the wireless LAN board.
• Loose connection
SC 857 USB interface The USB interface cannot be • Defective USB driver 1. Check the connection. CTL
error used due to a driver error. • Loose connection 2. Replace the USB board.
SC 860 HDD: The controller detects that the • HDD not initialized 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
Initialization hard disk fails. • Defective HDD 2. Reformat the HDD.
error 3. Replace the HDD.
SC 861 HDD: Reboot The HDD does not become • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error ready within 30 seconds after • Defective cables 2. Check the connection between the
the power is supplied to the • Defective HDD HDD and controller.
HDD. • Defective controller 3. Check and replace the cables.
4. Replace the HDD.
5. Replace the controller.
SC 863 HDD: Read The data stored in the HDD • Defective HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error cannot be read correctly. • Defective controller 2. Replace the HDD.
3. Replace the controller.
SC 864 HDD: CRC While reading data from the • Defective HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error HDD or storing data in the 2. Replace the HDD.
HDD, data transmission fails.
SC 865 HDD: Access An error is detected while • Defective HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error operating the HDD. 2. Replace the HDD.
SC 866 SD card A correct license is not found • SD-card data has 1. Store correct data in the SD card. CTL
authentication in the SD card. corrupted.
error

SM 4-47 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE Rev. 07/05/2006

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 867 SD card error The SD card is ejected from • The SD card is 1. Install the SD card. CTL
the slot. ejected from the slot. 2. Turn the main switch off and on.
SC 868 SD card access An error report is sent from the • An error is detected in 1. For a file system error, format the SD CTL
error SD card reader. the SD card. card on your PC.
243-252: File 2. For a device error, turn the mains
system error switch off and on.
253: Device 3. Replace the SD card.
error 4. Replace the controller.
SC 870 Address book An error is detected in the data • Defective software 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error copied to the address book program 2. Initialize the address book data (SP5-
over a network. • Defective HDD 846-050).
• Incorrect path to the 3. Initialize the user information (SP5-
sever 832-006).
4. Replace the HDD.
SC 872 HDD mail data An error is detected in the • Defective HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error HDD at machine initialization. • Power failure during 2. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-
an access to the HDD 007).
3. Replace the HDD.
SC 873 HDD mail An error is detected in the • Defective HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
transfer error HDD at machine initialization. • Power failure during 2. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-
an access to the HDD 008).
3. Replace the HDD.
SC 880 File format The file format converter does • Defective file format 1. Turn the main switch off on. CTL
converter error not respond. converter 2. Replace the file format converter.
SC 900 Electric counter Abnormal data is stored in the • Defective NVRAM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error counters. • Defective controller 2. Check the connection between the
NVRAM and controller.
3. Replace the NVRAM.
4. Replace the controller.

B202/B178/B180 4-48 SM
Rev. 07/05/2006 SC TABLE

Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
⇒ SC 901 Mechanical
total counter
The mechanical counter is not
connected.
• The counter is
manually ejected.
1. Make sure that the counter is
correctly installed.
D

error 1 NOTE: This error is detected • Loose connection 2. Replace the counter.
⇒ SC 902 Mechanical by the North America
model only.
• Defective counter 3. Check that the DIP-switch setting is
correct ( 5.10).
total counter • Incorrect DIP-switch
error 2 setting
SC 920 Printer An error is detected in the • Defective software 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
application error printer application program. • Unexpected hardware
resource (e.g.,
memory shortage)
SC 921 Printer font A necessary font is not found • A necessary font is 1. Check that the SD card stores correct CTL
error in the SD card. not found in the SD data.
card.
• The SD card data is
corrupted.
SC 925 Net file function The management area or • Defective HDD • When SC 860-865 keep occurring: CTL
error management file on the HDD • Data inconsistency 1. Follow the troubleshooting
is corrupted. (e.g., caused by procedures.
power failure) • In other cases:
2. Turn the main switch off and on.
3. Initialize the net file partition.
4. Initialize the hard disk.
5. Replace the HDD.
SC 990 Software The software makes an • Defective software 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
performance unexpected operation. • Defective controller 2. Reinstall the controller and/or engine
error • Software error main firmware.
3. See NOTE 1 at the end of the SC
table.
SC 991 Software The software has attempted to • Software program This SC is not displayed on the LCD CTL
continuity error perform an unexpected error (logging only).
operation. However, unlike SC • Internal parameter
990, the object of the error is incorrect, insufficient
continuity of the software. working memory.

SM 4-49 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE Rev. 07/05/2006

⇒ SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause


Related
SCs
Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SC 992 Undefined error An undefined error has • Defective software CTL
occurred. program
SC 995 BCU error The DIP switch on the BCU is • The DIP switch on the 1. Set the DIP switch correctly. D
incorrectly set. BCU is incorrectly 2. Turn the main switch off and on.
set.
SC 997 Application • The application selected by • Software (including SC 998 1. Check the devices necessary for the CTL
function the operation panel key the software application program. If necessary
selection error does not start or ends configuration) devices have not been installed,
abnormally. defective install them.
• An option required by 2. Check that application programs are
the application (RAM, correctly configured.
DIMM, board) is not 3. Take necessary countermeasures
installed specific to the application program. If
the logs can be displayed on the
operation panel, see the logs.
SC 998 Application start No applications start within 60 • Loose connection of 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error seconds after the power is RAM-DIMM, ROM- 2. Check if the RAM-DIMM and ROM-
turned on. DIMM DIMM are correctly connected.
• Defective controller 3. Reinstall the controller system
• Software problem firmware.
4. Replace the controller.

NOTE 1: If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file), the problem may be caused by a software
error. In this case, the following data and information needs to be sent back to your product specialist.
• Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken
• Summary sheet (SP mode “Printer SP”, SP1-004 [Print Summary])
• SMC - All (SP5-990-001)
• SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004)
• Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs
• All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the problem is logged.)
• Image file which causes the problem, if possible

B202/B178/B180 4-50 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 1

4.5 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 1


4.5.1 IMAGE QUALITY
Work-flow
The following workflow shows the basic troubleshooting steps for the considerable
image quality problems on this product.

Start

Verification of
problem reported
from users

Can the
Ask customer to
problem be No
duplicate it.
duplicated?

Yes

Troubleshoot using
Image Quality? No the service manual

shooting
Trouble-
or technical bulletin.

Yes

Make copy in the


enlargement or Copy Copy or Print?
reduction mode.

Print

Make a test pattern


in SP5-997.
No
Location of
the image problem
shifted?
Troubleshoot
Colour related? No depending on the
type of problem.

Possible Symptoms No problem on pattern


y Vertical white dotted lines * Font problem
Yes Check the transfer bias or paper * Image data missing
condition.
Yes y Vertical white lines on thick paper Especially, problems
Check the timing when the problem related to the above
occurs. symptoms and if no
y Dirty lines problem is found on the
Check the transfer belt cleaning section. test pattern, it may be
y Poor fusing / Fusing offset related to the application
Check the paper types selected in the used or driver. Collect a
printer driver. capture file for further
y Smeared image at trailing edge investigation (select
Check the fusing unit speed. 'Print to File' in the
y Crow marks driver).
Check the humidity condition and adjust
A B the transfer bias if necessary.

B146T901.WMF

B202/B178/B180 4-51 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 1 15 February 2005

(From previous page)

A B

Possible Symptoms
y Colour shift
Check the level of the Yes
Problem is related to
colour shift and follow All colour?
the scanner section.
the troubleshooting
guide if required.

Make a test print No


from SBU in SP4- Check Points
907 in each colour. y Connection of flat cable Yes
between the controller
and laser optic housing Colour missing
unit.
y Mirror position of related
Can the
colour located in the laser
problem be
optic housing unit.
duplicated? No
y Controller or BCU board
defective
No
Yes
Specify the colour
that caused the
Make a test print image problem.
Check the scanner section
from IPU in SP4-417
(exposure glass, mirrors,
by selecting related
scanner movement, etc.)
colour.

Check the image


processing area of
Can the Check the connection
the colour specified
problem be No between the SBU/IPU or
in the previous step
duplicated? replace the SBU.

Yes

Check connection
between the IPU/
Controller, or
replace the IPU.

Considerable Symptom

y Faint image (K)


Check the image transfer unit position lever.
y Cyan/Magenta jitter
Check if the registration roller speed is suitable for the type of paper used.
y Toner blasting
Check which colour is blasting and adjust the toner limit or transfer bias.
y Image density change
Check when the problem is reported and follow the necessary steps.
y Dirty Background
Check in which condition the problem is reported, and follow the required procedure.
y Colour vertical bands/lines/dirty background
Check the OPC drum and/or development unit.
y Colour shift
Check the level of the colour shift and follow the troubleshooting guide if required.
y Colour lines/bands/dirty background
When the PCU/development unit is close to its life end, the developer or the cleaning blade of the
PCU wears out, causing vertical colour lines, bands, or dirty background. Check the related colour
unit and replace it if necessary.

B146T902.WMF

B202/B178/B180 4-52 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

4.6 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2


4.6.1 IMAGE QUALITY
The table below shows the troubleshooting procedure for the following image problems.
• Smeared image for 4C thin lines or White lines in solid image areas
• Dirty background
• Fireflies
• Crow marks
• Image density change
• Toner blasting
Subject Symptom Cause Action
Smeared image for 4C 4C thin lines become Spurs are located just before the fusing Clean the edges of the spurs and change the
thin lines or white lines smeared in the paper feed section to prevent paper from touching position of the spurs as shown below.
in solid image areas direction or white lines the fusing unit. When paper touches the
If 4C thin lines become smeared:
appear in solid image areas. spurs and the spurs do not rotate, the
spurs scratch the mage.

B146T903.WMF

If white lines appear in solid image areas:

B146T904.WMF

SM 4-53 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Subject Symptom Cause Action


Dirty background Dirty background may When the developer has deteriorated or Perform forced toner refresh mode (SP3-921-1 or
continuously appear on the when prints are made in a very low 2).
left side (relative to paper humidity condition, dirty background may The machine automatically does this in the
feed) under very low appear continuously. following sequence. (It takes about 20 minutes to
temperature and humidity complete this mode.)
conditions.
1. Consumes toner in the development unit
without toner supply until toner end is detected.
2. Starts toner recovery mode.
3. Starts process control self-check.
NOTE: It takes about 20 minutes to complete this
mode, to prevent carrier flowing out.
Dirty background may While making prints with a low image Change the settings of the following SP modes:
intermittently appear with area ratio, the toner-carrier attraction
SP3-906-1 Job End Process Control Self-check
originals that have a high tends to increase. Then, when a large
200 (Default) to 100
image area ratio after making amount of toner is supplied under this
multiple prints of originals condition, the supplied toner cannot be SP3-920-3 OPC Refresh – Prints
with a low image area ratio. correctly charged, causing toner to flow 200 (Default) to 100
out from the development unit.
SP3-920-6 Auto Toner Refresh Mode
Fireflies Fireflies may appear with While making prints with a low image 0 (Disable) to 1 (Default: Enable)
originals that have a high area ratio, developer is agitated with less
During the above mode, toner refresh will
image area ratio after making toner supplied. This may cause some
automatically be done after job end process
multiple prints of originals toner to coagulate and harden. Then,
control self-check, and will consume the
with a low image area ratio. when switching over to originals with a
coagulated or overcharged toner.
high image area ratio, this toner may
cause fireflies. SP3-125-3 Auto TD Adjust
"Disable", "Initial", "Job End", "Initial & Job End"
Making prints with a low image area ratio causes
the toner-carrier attraction to increase, resulting in
low image density. Activating the Auto TD
Adjustment corrects toner density within the target
range; however, it takes up to 6 minutes to
complete the self-check and Auto TD Adjustment.

B202/B178/B180 4-54 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Subject Symptom Cause Action


Crow marks When making duplex prints in A charge is applied to the paper at each Using SP2-301 (Transfer Current), increase the
low temperature and humidity color station in order to attract each paper transfer current for black in the mode in
conditions, crow marks may toner onto the paper. Therefore, the which the problem occurs.
appear on black images, initial toner colors will receive multiple
especially in halftone areas charging as they pass each station,
on the 2nd side. which increases the attractive force NOTE: White dotted lines may appear on outputs
between the toner and paper. Since if the transfer current is increased too
black is the last toner to be applied, the much. Therefore, after adjusting the
attractive force between it and the paper transfer current, it is necessary to check
is lowest. Black toner moves on the the results by making a solid or halftone
paper during transport to the fusing image in duplex mode.
section, due to discharge from the toner
to the surrounding guide plates.

Image density change When the machine is tuned When the machine is off, the If this is often pointed out by users who are very
(1) on in the morning (having environmental conditions can begin to particular about image density, turn on Auto TD
been unused for a while), the affect the machine’s development Adjustment (SP3-125-3) as a solution.
ID of the initial outputs may capability. When the main switch is
NOTE: It takes about 5 minutes to complete the
be relatively low or high, in tuned on, the machine starts a process
self-check.
which case the machine control self-check and adjusts the
needs to compensate by development parameters to achieve the
raising or lowering the ID proper development potential gap
during machine operation. without adjusting the toner
concentration. Over the course of the
print operation, the ID will then get closer
and closer to the target level.

SM 4-55 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Subject Symptom Cause Action


Image density change Image density is too low or If the machine has never been turned off Change the settings of the following SP modes:
(2) high. and Energy Saver 2 (Auto Off mode) is
SP3-906-3 Non-use Time 1
disabled, the machine has never
0 (Default) to 999
performed the initial process control self-
check, causing the image density to SP3-906-4 Non-use Time 2
become low or high. 0 to 2550 (Default: 480)
• If Energy Saver 1 is activated (Default: Off), the
non-use time process control self-check will not
function. Therefore, make sure that Energy
Saver 1 is Off (UP mode).
• With the above setting, the self-check
automatically starts after 500 prints and after no
prints have been made for 480 minutes (8
hours). Based on the average daily printing
volume of 500 prints, self-check would be
performed first thing every morning. These
settings are suitable for machines, which are
used during the day and then kept On in Ready
status throughout the night. Therefore, this SP
mode should be set based on the particular way
the customer uses the printer.
Toner blasting Toner may blast, causing An excessive amount of toner is used for Change the toner limit setting in SP mode.
smeared text characters development. • If toner blasted images appear for text or lines
and/or lines in 2C or process in 2C, decrease the setting for Text from 190%
black mode (depending on to 150 - 170%.
the PDL setting or type of • If toner blasted images for text and lines
paper used.) recognized as pure image data (i.e. not
processed as text/line data), decrease the
setting for Photo from 260% to 170 - 190%.
NOTE: If the toner limit is lowered too much, it
may cause the density of shadow areas to
be not smooth.

B202/B178/B180 4-56 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Detailed Explanation
The table below shows the troubleshooting procedure for the considerable image problems.

Subject Symptom Cause Action


Symptoms not related to color
Vertical white dotted If the paper transfer bias is In the low humidity condition, the • Check if the optional heater has been installed
lines excessive for the paper type electrical resistance of paper tends to in the paper tray and it is activated.
used in the low humidity increase. Excessive paper transfer bias
condition, vertical white may cause electrical leak, causing • Customize (decrease) the paper transfer
dotted lines may appear. vertical white lines. current for the related mode (SP2-301).

Vertical white lines In high temperature and In this condition, the drum sensitivity The drum sensitivity recovers, and this symptom
humidity conditions, vertical tends to drop. Since the image transfer disappears after waiting for about 5 minutes after
white lines may appear in efficiency differs between plain and thick this symptom has been observed.
halftone areas on thick paper paper, sensitivity drop may cause
after multiple prints of the changes in image transfer efficiency on
same image. thick paper, causing vertical white lines.
Dirty lines/bands or The cleaning blade of the transfer belt Check and replace the transfer belt-cleaning unit.
background on 2nd cleaning may be worn away or damaged
side when the transfer belt cleaning unit
becomes close to its life (500KP).
Poor fusing / Fusing The type of paper selected in the printer Please instruct users to select the correct paper
offset driver does not match the paper type type in the printer driver.
used for printing, causing the fusing
temperature not to be controlled for the
paper used.
Smeared image When making prints of an The paper’s trailing edge tends to flip up Please instruct users to select 1800x600 or
original with a solid image and come very close to the fusing belt 1200x1200dpi.
near the trailing, a smeared after it passes the paper transfer unit.
image may appear. The static electricity built up on the
fusing belt may cause toner to move,
resulting in the smeared image.
This is most noticeable with 600x600dpi
printing.

SM 4-57 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Subject Symptom Cause Action


Crow marks When making duplex prints in A charge is applied to the paper at each Using SP2-301 (Transfer Current), increase the
low temperature and humidity color station in order to attract each paper transfer current for black in the mode in
conditions, crow marks may toner onto the paper. Therefore, the which the problem occurs.
appear on black images, initial toner colors will receive multiple
especially in halftone areas charging as they pass each station,
on the 2nd side. which increases the attractive force NOTE: White dotted lines may appear on outputs
between the toner and paper. Since if the transfer current is increased too
black is the last toner to be applied, the much. Therefore, after adjusting the
attractive force between it and the paper transfer current, it is necessary to check
is lowest. Black toner moves on the the results by making a solid or halftone
paper during transport to the fusing image in duplex mode.
section, due to discharge from the toner
to the surrounding guide plates.
Symptoms related to color
Faint image (black) Only black becomes lighter. The transfer belt position is not in the Check the transfer belt unit position and/or the
correct position. transfer belt unit release lever.
Magenta and/or cyan Magenta jitter may appear at If the registration roller speed is too fast Adjust the registration roller speed depending on
jitter 67 mm and/or cyan jitter at for the paper types used, the shock the paper types and/or mode selected.
165 mm from the trailing when the trailing edge has just passed
SP1-004-4: Normal paper (1200 dpi)
edge. the registration roller generates
SP1-004-5: Normal paper (600 dpi)
vibration, causing the jitter.
SP1-005-3: Thick paper (1200 dpi)
This may appear especially when using
If SP1-005-3 cannot improve the level even when
thick paper because of its stiffness.
setting it to “-1.0”, follow the procedure below.
1. Set SP1-005-3 to “-1.0”.
2. Print the samples by adjusting SP1-004-4 from
100% (-0.2% to -0.8%).
After adjusting SP1-004-4, check the image
quality also with normal paper in the 1200 dpi
mode. Readjust it so that the image quality
level is acceptable for both thick and normal
paper if necessary.

B202/B178/B180 4-58 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Subject Symptom Cause Action


Toner blasting (1) Toner may blast, causing An excessive amount of toner is used for Change the toner limit setting in SP mode.
smeared text characters development. • If toner blasted images appear for text or lines
and/or lines in 2C or process in 2C, decrease the setting for Text from 190%
black mode (depending on to 150 - 170%.
the PDL setting or type of • If toner blasted images for text and lines
paper used.) recognized as pure image data (i.e. not
processed as text/line data), decrease the
setting for Photo from 260% to 170 - 190%.
NOTE: If the toner limit is lowered too much, it
may cause the density of shadow areas to
be not smooth.
Toner blasting (2) Black toner may blast on the Black toner moves on the paper during Increase the paper transfer current in SP data
2nd side of paper under the transport to the fusing section, due to from the default setting to a recommended value
low temperature. discharge from the toner to the depending on the mode selected as shown below.
surrounding guide plates.
SP2-301-3 ([K] Middle speed): “16” to “21”
SP2-301-4 ([K] High speed): “27” to “32”
SP2-301-16 ([FC, K] Middle speed): “9” to “13”
SP2-301-17 ([FC, K] High speed): “15” to “20”
NOTE: If the toner limit is lowered too much, it
may cause the density of shadow areas to
be not smooth.
Image density change When the machine is tuned When the machine is off, the If this is often pointed out by users who are very
(1) on in the morning (having environmental conditions can begin to particular about image density, turn on Auto TD
been unused for a while), the affect the machine’s development Adjustment (SP3-125-003) as a solution.
ID of the initial outputs may capability. When the main switch is
NOTE: It takes about 5 minutes to complete the
be relatively low or high, in tuned on, the machine starts a process
self-check.
which case the machine control self-check and adjusts the
needs to compensate by development parameters to achieve the
raising or lowering the ID proper development potential gap
during machine operation. without adjusting the toner
concentration. Over the course of the
print operation, the ID will then get closer
and closer to the target level.

SM 4-59 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Subject Symptom Cause Action


Image density change Image density is too low or If the machine has never been turned off Change the settings of the following SP modes:
(2) high. and Energy Saver 2 (Auto Off mode) is
SP3-906-003 Non-use Time 1
disabled, the machine has never
0 (Default) to 999
performed the initial process control self-
check, causing the image density to SP3-906-004 Non-use Time 2
become low or high. 0 to 2550 (Default: 480)
• If Energy Saver 1 is activated (Default: Off), the
non-use time process control self-check will not
function. Therefore, make sure that Energy
Saver 1 is Off (SP5-101-3 or UP mode).
• With the above setting, the self-check
automatically starts after 500 prints and after no
prints have been made for 480 minutes (8
hours). Based on the average daily printing
volume of 500 prints, self-check would be
performed first thing every morning. These
settings are suitable for machines, which are
used during the day and then kept On in Ready
status throughout the night. Therefore, this SP
mode should be set based on the particular way
the customer uses the printer.
Dirty background Dirty background may When the developer has deteriorated or Perform forced toner refresh mode (SP3-921-001
continuously appear on the when prints are made in a very low or 002).
left side (relative to paper humidity condition, dirty background may The machine automatically does this in the
feed) under very low appear continuously. following sequence. (It takes about 20 minutes to
temperature and humidity complete this mode.)
conditions.
4. Consumes toner in the development unit
without toner supply until toner end is detected.
5. Starts toner recovery mode.
6. Starts process control self-check.
NOTE: It takes about 20 minutes to complete this
mode, to prevent carrier flowing out.

B202/B178/B180 4-60 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Subject Symptom Cause Action


Color Shift Color shift level is out of the The adjustment standard on this product Check the level of the color shifts reported from
adjustment standard. is “maximum 150 µm”. user and follow the troubleshooting procedure
The color shift level may change described in section 4- if necessary.
depending on a type of paper used.
Color missing Color(s) is missing on the • The position of 3rd mirror moves due • When replacing the laser optic housing unit
outputs. to the rough transportation of service due to any reason, make a color demo page in
part; and then, becomes out of the UP mode. If color(s) is missing, open the
position. unit and reposition the mirror(s).
• Flat cable(s) is not correctly • Reconnect the flat cable(s) firmly.
connected to the BCU board.

SM 4-61 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Copy Image processing


Symptom Mode Cause Action
Black image is weaker ACS The ACS Mode use K toner and CMY toner to Specify “Black & White” in the following menu:
when the ACS is on. create black images. CMY toner makes black > Copier/Document Server Features > Adjust
images weaker. Color Image > ACS Priority

Black ballpoint pen FC This symptom is caused by the characteristic of Specify “Darker” level in the following menu:
images are colored. ballpoint pen ink. > Copy Quality > Adjust UCR > Darker

Generation copy makes FC Generation copy is executed in the text mode. Select “Photo” as the original type.
less colorful images. Photo images become less colorful.
Maps are incorrectly FC The Map Mode uses CMYK toner to create black • Specify “Darker” level in the following menu:
colored. letters. Sometimes black images are somewhat > Copy Quality > Adjust UCR > Darker
colored. • Raise the “Sharp” level in the following menu:
> Copy Quality > Sharp/Soft > Sharp
The ACS does not ACS Darker images are sometimes incorrectly taken Specify “Full Color” in the following menu:
correctly distinguish as black & white images. > Copier/Document Server Features > Adjust
between color and black & Color Image > ACS Priority
white images.
Color images are FC, When the following originals are used, color Raise the “Photo” level in the following menu:
enclosed by black lines. Text/Photo images are sometimes incorrectly taken as black > Copy Quality > Text/Photo Sensitivity > Photo
Black letters are enclosed letters, or black letters are incorrectly enclosed
by while lines. by white lines:
• Outputs from a printer (laser or ink-jet)
• Copied images
Black letters and black FC, Black letters and lines are colored when the Raise the “Text” level in the following menu:
lines are colored. Text/Photo background of the original is not clear. > Copy Quality > Text/Photo Sensitivity
NOTE: If you raise the “Text” level too much, some
weaker images are enclosed by black lines.
Mono color images are B&W, This symptom is based on the copier Raise the “Soft” level in the following menu:
not sharp enough. Text/Photo, characteristics. > Copy Quality > Sharp/Soft > Soft
ACS

B202/B178/B180 4-62 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Symptom Mode Cause Action


Letters are not clear when B&W, This symptom is based on the copier • Raise the “Sharp” level in the following menu:
the background is shaded. Text/Photo, characteristics. > Copy Quality > Sharp/Soft > Sharp
ACS • Specify the full-color mode when using color originals.
• Specify the text mode when using black-and-white
originals.
Letters are not clear when B&W, This symptom is based on the copier • Raise the “Sharp” level in the following menu:
the background is slightly Text/Photo, characteristics. This symptom tends to occur > Copy Quality > Sharp/Soft > Sharp
shaded. ACS when the background is shaded with a rough dot • Specify the full-color mode when using color originals.
pattern. • Specify the text mode when using black-and-white
originals.

SM 4-63 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

4.6.2 COLOR SHIFT


The following briefly explain the factors causing color shifts and what to do on the machine to correct it:
• Temperature change causes the optical components in the laser
optics housing unit to contract, causing the main scan The black development motor drives the
magnification to change. To correct the line position, the machine fusing unit pressure roller. The motor
automatically does the line position adjustment when the speed is adjustable in the SP mode.
temperature changes by 5°C since the last position adjustment.
If the line position adjustment functions correctly, no color shift
occurs. If the line position adjustment fails (result: SP5-993-007),
color lines may shift anywhere on the outputs.
• The process speed at each stage (registration roller, transfer belt,
and fusing belt/roller) affects the paper transport speed. If the
paper transport speed changes during image transfer of a color, K
the color line being transferred shifts with respect to the color line Y
already transferred to the paper. The registration roller speed
(adjusted by color development motor speed) and fusing belt/roller C

speed (adjusted by black development motor speed) are adjusted M


by the manufacturer. The transfer motor drives the
transfer belt. The motor speed
Paper speed may slightly change due to the type of paper used or is not adjustable.
after replacing the parts related to the drive sections of the
registration section, transport unit, and fusing unit. (After replacing
the fusing unit, the speed adjustment should be done in the User
The color development motor drives
Program mode.) Also, the position where color shift occurs the registration rollers. The motor
depends on which section starts moving at the incorrect speed. speed is adjustable in SP mode.
• Paper skew directly affects the color shift between the front and B178T905.WMF

rear sides. There are several factors. One of them is the position of
the side fences.

B202/B178/B180 4-64 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

As explained on the previous page, there are several types of color shift problem. The following table shows the symptoms,
factors, action required, and the page to see for details.

Symptom Factors Action Required Refer to #


1 Color shift on entire image in • Line position adjustment does not • Check the result of the line position
main-scan and/or sub-scan function correctly. adjustment (SP5-993-007) and solve the
directions • Transfer belt unit has just been problem if an error was detected.
replaced. • Check which color lines are shifted from
black line and adjust the SP modes for
registration and magnification.
2 Color shifts only at the Registration roller speed is not Adjust the color development motor speed
leading edge area appropriate. (SP1-004-4, 5, and SP1-005-003) depending
(sometimes causing shock on the process speed.
jitter, magenta or cyan lines)
3 Color shifts only at the trailing Fusing belt/roller speed is not Adjust the black development motor speed
edge area appropriate. (SP1-004-001, 002, and 007, or “Fuser
Adjust” in the User Program mode) depending
on the process speed.
4 Color shifts between the front Paper skew on transfer belt Reposition the side fences.
and rear sides • Side fences are not correctly set. Reposition the paper attraction roller unit.
• Pressure between the paper
attraction roller and transfer belt is
not even at the front and rear
sides.

SM 4-65 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Adjustment Standard: Max. 150 µm The flowchart illustrates the procedure to adjust line positions.
NOTE: The allowance of color shift is 150µm. Keep the color shift in the range of 0 to
Start 150µm.

Print out the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002).

Set the factory settings in the following SPs:


SP2-103-055 (M: [K] 64.3 MHz) is ... 250 or higher SP2-909-001, 002, and 003
SP2-103-055, 056, 057, and 058
Less than 250

Print out a pattern with the following settings:


SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"
SP5-997-004 "Full Color"
SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"

Set the factory settings in the following SPs:


SP2-909-001, 002, and 003
How much do the lines shift? 2 mm or more
SP2-916-008, 009, and 010
SP2-103-056, 057, and 058
Less than 2 mm

Execute the line position adjustment (SP5-993-002).

Are the Replace or clean the


Has the SP ended normally? No transfer belt and ID sensors No transfer belt and/or the
clean? ID sensors.
Yes
Yes

Print out a pattern with the following settings:


Execute the forced toner-density
SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"
adjustment with the following SP:
SP5-997-004 "Full Color"
SP3-126-002
SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"

Do the lines shift? No

Yes

A End

B146T906.WMF

B202/B178/B180 4-66 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

When you have come to


Main-scan direction How the lines shift? this step, the lines shift
0.2 mm or less.
Sub-scan direction

Yes Are the black Which part


No Whole part
lines and color lines parallel? of the lines shift?

Leading or trailing edge


Yes Check the transfer-belt speed with Adjust the sub-scan
the following SPs: registration with the
Adjust the main-scan registration with the Adjust the magnification SP5-993-031 following SPs:
following SPs: with the following SPs: SP5-993-033 SP5-993-016
SP5-993-010 SP5-993-013 SP5-993-017
SP5-993-011 SP5-993-014 Leading or trailing edge SP5-993-018
SP5-993-012 SP5-993-015 Disable the transfer-belt feedback SP5-993-019
feature with the following SP: SP5-993-020
SP5-995-020 SP5-993-021

Execute the line position adjustment with the Which


following SP: Leading edges edges of the color lines has Yes
SP5-993-002 shifted? Execute the line position
Adjust the development- adjustment with the
motor speed with the Trailing edges following SP:
following SPs: SP5-993-002
Adjust the development-motor speed
Print out a pattern with the following settings: SP1-004-005
with the following SPs:
SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)" SP1-004-004
SP1-004-002
SP5-997-004 "Full Color" SP1-005-003
SP1-004-001
SP5-997-005 "600 x 600" SP1-007-001
SP1-004-007

Print out a pattern with the


Enable the transfer-belt feedback following settings:
Do the lines shift? No feature with the following SP: SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"
SP5-995-020 SP5-997-004 "Full Color"
SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"
and "1200 x 1200"
No Do the lines shift?

End

B146T907.WMF
SM 4-67 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Action Required
Direction Area Symptom Possible Cause Procedure / Remarks
Output Mode SP Mode
Sub-scan Leading Color shift, Registration roller Normal Paper SP1-004- Check the magenta line position against the black line.
edge especially 100 mm speed is not 004 If the registration roller is too fast or slow, the magenta
1200 dpi
from the leading suitable for the line appears above or below the black line.
edge. paper used. Normal Paper SP1-004- Above: Speed is too fast: Decrease speed
005
600 dpi
Below: Speed is too slow: Increase Speed
(Refer to pattern 1 in Thick Paper SP1-005- When adjusting the speed, change the setting in 0.05
the "How to measure 003
1200 dpi steps, and check the result by printing the grid pattern.
the gap between
Then, repeat this until the shift between magenta and
color lines" (by-pass feed) black is minimized.
described after this
table.) NOTE: If the registration roller is too fast, magenta jitter
may appear at 67 mm and/or cyan jitter at 165
mm from the trailing edge. This is caused by
the mechanical shock when the trailing edge of
the paper passes the registration rollers.
Trailing Color shift, Fusing roller Normal Paper SP1-004- Check the magenta line position against the black line.
edge especially 100 mm speed is not 001 If the fusing roller is too fast or slow, the magenta line
1200 dpi
from the trailing suitable for the appears above or below the black line.
edge. paper used. Normal Paper SP1-004-
Above: Speed is too fast: Decrease speed
002
600 dpi Below: Speed is too slow: Increase Speed
(Refer to pattern 2 in Thick Paper SP1-004- When adjusting the speed, change the setting in 0.1
the "How to measure 007
1200 dpi steps, and check the result by printing the grid pattern.
the gap between
Then, repeat this step until the shift between magenta
color lines" (by-pass feed) and black is minimized.
described after this
table.)

B202/B178/B180 4-68 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Action Required
Direction Area Symptom Possible Cause Procedure / Remarks
Output Mode SP Mode
Sub-scan Entire Color shift on the SP mode setting Normal Paper SP5-993- Measure the gap between the black line and other
image entire image, and is not suitable for 016 (Y) colors (YMC) using a magnification scope.
600 dpi
the amount of shift the paper used. Convert the measured value from [µm] to [dots] with the
SP5-993-
from leading to following formula. Then, add or subtract the calculated
017 (M)
trailing edge is dot value in the SP mode.
almost the same. SP5-993-
018 (C) Correction [dots] = Measured value [µm] / 21.2 or 42.4
600 dpi mode: 1 dot = 42.4 µm
Normal Paper SP5-993- 1200 dpi mode: 1 dot = 21.2 µm
019 (Y)
1200 dpi If color (YMC) has shifted up in relation to black, add the
SP5-993- above value to the current value.
020 (M)
If color (YMC) has shifted down in relation to black,
SP5-993- subtract the above value from the current value.
021 (C)
Examples
• If the magenta line has shifted up in relation to black
by 40µm in 600dpi mode, add 1 to the current setting
of SP5-993-017.
Correction [dots] = +(40/42.4) = Approx. +1
• If the magenta line has shifted down in relation to
black by 70µm in 600dpi mode, subtract 2 from the
current setting of SP5-993-17.
Correction [dots] = -(70/42.4) = Approx. –2

SM 4-69 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Action Required
Direction Area Symptom Possible Cause Procedure / Remarks
Output Mode SP Mode
Main-scan Entire Color shifts on the Main-scan - SP5-993- Measure the gap between the black line and other
image entire image, and magnification is 013 (Y) colors (YMC) using a magnification scope.
the amount of shift not correctly Convert the measured value [mm] to [%] with the
SP5-993-
differs at front, adjusted. following formula. Then, add or subtract the calculated
014 (M)
center, and rear. value in the SP mode
SP5-993-
Correction [%] = Measured value [mm] / 287 x 10000
015 (C)
(Refer to pattern 3 in If the color line is enlarged in relation to black, add the
the How to measure correction value to the current setting.
the gap between
If the color line is reduced in relation to black, subtract
color lines described
the correction value from the current setting.
after this table.)
NOTE: Line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or “Auto
Adjust” in User Program mode) should be done
to check the result after changing the main-
scan magnification data. This is because the
changes will affect the line position adjustment.
Examples
• If the magenta line is enlarged by 0.1mm in relation to
the black line, add “4” to the current setting of SP5-
993-014.
Correction [%] = (0.1/287) x 10000 = Approx. +4
• If the magenta line is reduced by 0.05 mm in relation
to the black line, subtract “2” from the current setting
of SP5-993-014.
Correction [%] = -(0.05/287) x 10000 = Approx. -2

B202/B178/B180 4-70 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Action Required
Direction Area Symptom Possible Cause Procedure / Remarks
Output Mode SP Mode
Main-scan Entire Color shifts on the Main-scan - SP5-993- Measure the gap between the black line and other
image entire image and registration is not 010 (Y) colors (YMC) using a magnification scope.
amount of shifts is correctly Convert the measured value [µm] to [dots] with the
SP5-993-
almost the same at adjusted. following formula. Then, add or subtract the calculated
011 (M)
front, center, and dot value in the SP mode.
rear sides. SP5-993-
012 (C) Correction [dots] = Measured value [µm] / 21.2
If color (YMC) has shifted to the left in relation to black,
(Refer to pattern 4 in add the above value to the current setting.
the How to measure
the gap between If color (YMC) has shifted to the right in relation to black,
color lines described subtract the above value from the current setting.
after this table.) Examples
• If the magenta line has shifted to the left by 40µm,
add 4 to the current setting of SP5-993-011
Correction [dots] = +(40/21.2) = Approx. +2
• If the magenta line has shifted to the right by 70µm,
subtract 3 from the current setting of SP5-993-011.
Correction [dots] = -(70/21.2) = Approx. -3
Front or The amount of color • Side fence - - • Check if the side fences of the paper trays are
rear shift at the front and position correctly positioned. If there is clearance between the
rear sides becomes • Transfer belt paper and the side fences, this causes paper to skew
gradually bigger position during paper transport.
toward the trailing • Check if the transfer belt is in correct position, if the
edge. tension springs are correctly set, or if the paper
attraction roller is correctly installed..
( 3.7.4 Transfer Belt)

SM 4-71 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

A
How to measure the gap between color A

lines
Use a magnification scope to measure the
gap [A] between the two lines. Measure the
distance between the same sides of the two
lines. For example (see the illustration),
measure between the left edges of the lines.

Magnification Black
scope line Color B178T908.WMF

Pattern 1 line

Color shift in the sub-scan direction at the


leading edge
This illustration shows that the colored
(dotted) line is above the black line. This
means that the registration roller speed is too
high for the paper used. Therefore, the
registration roller speed needs to be reduced.
To do this, decrease the setting (percentage)
of SP1-004-004, 005, and SP1-005-003. This
depends on the mode selected.
• SP1-004-004 Normal paper,
Color mode, 1200 dpi (81 mm/s)
• SP1-004-005 Normal Paper,
Color mode, 600 dpi (C2a/k: 125 mm/s, B178T909.WMF

C2b: 162 mm/s)


• SP1-005-003 Thick Paper (81 mm/s)

Pattern 2
Color shift in the sub-scan direction at the
trailing edge
This illustration shows that the colored
(dotted) line is above the black line. This
means that the fusing roller speed is too high
for the paper used. Therefore, the fusing
roller speed needs to be slower. To do this,
decrease the setting (percentage) of SP1-
004-001, 002, or 007. This depends on the
mode selected.
• SP1-004-001 Normal paper, B178T913.WMF
Color mode, 1200 dpi (81 mm/s)
• SP1-004-002 Normal Paper,
Color mode, 600 dpi (C2a/k: 125 mm/s, C2b: 162 mm/s)
• SP1-004-007 Thick Paper (81 mm/s)

B202/B178/B180 4-72 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Pattern 3
Color shift (magnification change) in the main-scan direction
Fig. 1 and 2 shows that the colored (dotted) line has shifted away from the black
line. The amount of shift is not the same as at the front, center, and rear. Both Fig.
1 and Fig. 2 show that the color grid is larger than the black grid. Yellow becomes
larger from left to right in Fig. 1. Cyan and magenta become larger from right to left.
This is because the laser writing direction for B&Y is different from C&M.

shooting
Trouble-
B178T910.WMF
B178T911.WMF

Fig. 1 (Yellow) Fig. 2 (Cyan & Magenta)

Pattern 4
Color shift (registration) in the main-
scan direction

Colored line shifts in the main-scan


direction. This keeps the amount of
shift the same at the left, center, and
right.
This is caused by incorrect color
registration.

B178T912.WMF

SM 4-73 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

4.6.3 COLOR SHIFT AFTER TRANSFER UNIT REPLACEMENT


Do the following procedure below if the color shift level is not within the target
range (max 150µm) after you replace the transfer unit and do the forced line
position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or Auto Color Registration):

Check the color shift level


1. Make sure that OPC Refresh (SP3-920-005) has been done.
2. Print out the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002).
3. Print a 1-dot grid pattern with A3/11" x 17" paper. Refer to the following table
for detailed SP mode settings:
SP5-997 (Test Pattern) Setting
Mode Tray Paper size
Pattern Color mode Resolution
selection (By-pass)
Normal, color, 600 dpi 2 05 Full Color 600x600 —
Normal, color, 1200 dpi 2 05 Full Color 1200x1200 —

NOTE: You need to do each adjustment with the paper type normally used by
the customer.
4. Check the tendency of color shift in the grid pattern printed in step 3. At times,
a magnification scope must be used to measure the amount of color shift
between colors.
5. Go to the next step (fusing/registration roller speed adjustment) if the result is
not within the target.

Fusing/ Registration Roller Speed Adjustment


SP mode (sub-scan registration) reset
1. Make sure that the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002) have been printed out.
2. Reset the setting of SP5-993-016 to 021 to "0."
Transfer belt aging
1. Remove all PCUs. Place them on clean sheets of paper. Cover the drums with
a few sheets of paper to keep the drums away from light. Then secure the drum
positioning plate (2 screws). Then return the transfer unit release lever to the
original position.
2. Perform the transfer belt idling with SP5-804-066 (Drum M M CW) for about 3
minutes. (This stabilizes the transfer belt side-to-side movement.)
3. Reinstall the PCUs.
4. Perform adjustments ( 3.10.1).
5. Print a 1-dot grid pattern with A3/11" x 17" paper in 600 dpi mode.
6. Follow the troubleshooting guide if the color shift in the main-scan direction is
not within the adjustment standard.

B202/B178/B180 4-74 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Fusing roller speed adjustment


1. Do the line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or “Auto Adjust” in User Program
mode).
2. Print a 1-dot grid pattern for each of the following modes with A3/11" x 17"
paper.
(1) Normal, 600 dpi
(2) Normal, 1200 dpi
(3) Thick, 1200 dpi
3. Do the troubleshooting procedure (Sub-scan/Trailing edge) if the color has
shifted within 100 mm from the trailing edge.

Registration roller speed adjustment (for color mode)


1. Do the line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or “Auto Adjust” in User Program
mode).
2. Print a 1-dot grid pattern for each of the following modes with A3/11" x 17"
paper.
(1) Normal, 600 dpi
(2) Normal, 1200 dpi

shooting
Trouble-
3. Do the troubleshooting procedure (Sub-scan/Leading edge) if the color has
shifted within 100 mm from the leading edge.
NOTE: The registration roller speed for by-pass paper feed is the same as for
normal 1200 dpi mode.

Line position fine adjustment for sub-scan


1. Print a 1-dot grid pattern each for each of the following modes with A3/11" x 17"
paper.
SP5-997 (Test Pattern) Setting
Mode Tray Color Paper size
Pattern Resolution
selection mode (By-pass)
Normal, color, 600 dpi 2 05 Full Color 600x600 -
Normal, color, 1200 dpi 2 05 Full Color 1200x1200 -
Thick paper 0 05 Full Color 1200x1200 A3 / 11x17

2. Check if there is any color shift from the black line by the same amount all the
way down the page from leading to trailing edge. Follow the troubleshooting
procedure (Sub-scan/Whole image) if there is.

SM 4-75 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

Registration roller speed adjustment (For B&W mode)


1. Input the following values in the SP modes:
SP1-004-006 = (Value of SP1-004-005)
SP1-007-002 = (Value of SP1-004-005)
SP1-005-002 = (Value of SP1-004-005) – 0.2%
2. Print a 2-dot pattern (pattern 12) with A3/11" x 17" paper.

SP5-997 (Test Pattern) Setting


Mode Tray Single
Pattern Color Mode Resolution
selection Color
Normal color 600 dpi 2 12 6 (Black) Single Color 600x600

3. A horizontal band may show at 60 mm (2.76") from the leading edge on A3 (11"
x 17") paper. This depends on the paper used. Decrease the setting of SP1-
004-006 in 0.05% steps until the problem is solved if the horizontal band shows
on the 2-dot pattern.

B202/B178/B180 4-76 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

4.6.4 BLACK OVER PRINT


Black over print does not let unexpected white lines show when black letters or
lines are printed with color background. You can enable or disable this feature from
the printer driver (default: disabled).
Black over print has the following bad effects when it is enabled:
• Crispness may deteriorate because the black toner spreads out.
• More toner is consumed.
• The background color may be seen through black letters or lines.

Black Over Print Disabled [D]

Black lines and color background are [A]


printed as follows: Y Y [B]
1. The color toner (for example, 1 M M
[C]
magenta [B] and yellow [A] toner)
is transferred on the paper [C].
Some space [D] is left blank for Y Y
the black toner. 1 M K M

shooting
Trouble-
2. The black toner [E] is transferred
in the blank space. [E]

An unexpected white line [F] shows if Y Y


the line position of the black toner is
not correct.
1 M K M

B178T920.WMF

[F]
Black Over Print Enabled
Black lines and color background are [A]
printed as follows:
Y Y Y [B]
1. The color toner (for example, M M M
[C]
magenta [B] and yellow [A] toner)
is transferred on the paper [C]. [D]
K
2. The black toner [D] is transferred Y Y Y
on the color toner. 1 M M M

K
An unexpected white line does not Y Y Y
show even if the line position of the
black toner is not correct.
1 M M M

B178T921.WMF

SM 4-77 B202/B178/B180
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS


4.7.1 SENSORS
Component CN Condition Symptom
Scanner Home Open SC121
648-5
Position Shorted SC120
APS and ARE do not function
Open
Platen Cover 648-2 correctly.
Shorted No symptom
CPU cannot detect the original size
632-13 Open properly. APS and ARE do not
Original Width
632-14 function correctly.
Shorted
CPU cannot detect the original size
632-8 Open correctly. APS and ARE do not
Original Length-1
632-9 function correctly.
Shorted
CPU cannot detect the original size
Open properly. APS and ARE do not
Original Length-2 632-3
function correctly.
Shorted
Open SC261
LD H.P. sensor 220-B12
Shorted SC260
K: 210-A3 Open SC370/371/372/373
C: 210-B9 SC370/371/372/373 or
TD sensor
M: 209-A19 Shorted SC374/375/376/377
Y: 210-A9
Transfer belt Open SC471
210-A12
sensor Shorted
Rear: 228-3 Open SC385
ID sensor Center: 228-4, 7
Shorted
Front: 228-8
The Paper End indicator lights even
Open
Tray1: 205-A5 if paper is placed in the paper tray.
Paper end sensor Tray2: 205-B9 The Paper End indicator does not
By-pass: 209-A15 Shorted light even if there is no paper in the
paper tray.
The bottom plate of the paper feed
Tray1: 205-A2 Open
Paper lift sensor unit is not lifted up.
Tray2: 205-B6
Shorted SC501/502
Paper Jam is detected whenever a
Open
print is made.
Relay sensor 205-A8
Paper Jam is detected even if there
Shorted
is no paper.
Paper Jam is detected whenever a
Open print is made.
Vertical transport
208-B11
sensor Paper Jam is detected even if there
Shorted is no paper.

B202/B178/B180 4-78 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

Component CN Condition Symptom


Paper Jam is detected whenever a
Open
Registration print is made.
209-B2
sensor Paper Jam is detected even if there
Shorted
is no paper.
Paper Jam is detected whenever a
Open
print is made.
Fusing exit sensor 212-A7
Paper Jam is detected even if there
Shorted
is no paper.
Paper Jam is detected whenever a
Open
print is made.
Paper exit sensor 212-B5
Paper Jam is detected even if there
Shorted
is no paper.
The paper overflow message is not
shown even when a paper overflow
Open
Paper overflow condition exists. This causes a
212-A2
sensor paper jam.
The paper overflow message
Shorted
shows.
Toner near end may not be
K: 209-A2 Open detected even when the toner near
Y: 206-A7 end condition is satisfied.
Toner end sensor

shooting
Trouble-
C: 206-A4 Toner near end may be detected
M: 206-A1 Shorted even when the toner near end
condition is not satisfied.
Drum gear K: 213-13 Open SC440
position sensor CMY: 210-B12 Shorted
Open Dancing control does not function.
Belt mark sensor 215-3
Shorted
Waste toner near full message
Open shows, even when a waste toner
near full condition does not exist.
Waste toner
213-4 Waste toner near full message is
sensor
not shown even when a waste toner
Shorted
near full condition exists. This
causes a waste toner leak.
NOTE: The CN numbers are the connector numbers on the BCU.

SM 4-79 B202/B178/B180
BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

4.8 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS


Rating Symptom when turning on the
Fuse
115 V 220 - 240 V main switch
Power Supply Unit
FU1 15A/125V — No response (No power is supplied
CB1 — 8A/250V to the electrical components.)
No response (24V DC power is not
FU2 10A/125V 5A/250V supplied to the all electrical
components.)
24V DC power to the duplex feed
motor, DRB, high voltage supply
FU91 10A/125V 10A/125V board and fusing control is not
supplied. The  LED lights. But you
see no other response.
24V DC power to the scanner unit,
FU92 10A/125V 10A/125V finisher and duplex inverter motor is
not supplied.
24V DC power to the BCU and DRB
FU94 6.3A/125V 6.3A/125V is not supplied. SC902 (NA)/ SC471
(EU/ASIA) occurs.
Sub Power Supply Unit
No response (No power is supplied
FU3 4A/125V 4A/250V
to the electrical components.)
12VE power to the BCU and
FU101 4A/250V 4A/250V
controller is not supplied.
5VE power to the BCU and controller
FU201 6.3A/250 6.3A/250V
is not supplied.

4.9 LEDS (BCU)


Status
LED
Blinking Stays OFF or ON
The Main CPU functions The Main CPU does not function
LED 3 (Red)
correctly. correctly.
The MUSIC CPU functions The MUSIC CPU does not function
LED 2 (Green)
correctly. correctly.
LED 1 (Yellow) The DSP functions correctly. The DSP does not function correctly.

B202/B178/B180 4-80 SM
SERVICE TABLES
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
!CAUTION
Make sure that the data-in LED (!) is not on before you go into the SP mode.
This LED indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is
on, wait for the copier to process the data.

5.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE


NOTE: The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only. If
this mode is used by anyone other than service representatives for any
reason, data might be deleted or settings might be changed. In such case,
product quality cannot be guaranteed any more.

Entering SP Mode
"# 1. Press the Clear Mode key.
$%&# 2. Use the keypad to enter “107”.
'# 3. Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.
4. Enter the Service Mode.
Exiting SP Mode
Exit 5. Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.

Service
Tables

SM 5-1 B202/B178/B180
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

5.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES


Copy SP ...........SP modes related to the engine functions
Printer SP .........SP modes related to the controller functions
Scanner SP ......SP modes related to the scanner functions
Fax SP..............SP modes related to the fax functions
Select one of the Service Program modes (Copy, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from
the touch panel as shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode.
This section explains the functions of the Printer/Copy/Scanner SP modes. Refer to
the Fax service manual for the Fax SP modes.

B178S910.WMF

B202/B178/B180 5-2 SM
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

SP Mode Button Summary


Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.

! " # $ %

& ' ( )
,

B178S911.WMF

! Opens all SP groups and sublevels.


" Closes all open groups and sublevels, and restores the initial SP mode display.
# Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP Mode
(highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen,
$ Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then press
(. (The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing (. If not, just
press the required SP Mode number.)
% Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal

Service
Tables
operation.
& Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.
' Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group.
( Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
) Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line).
* Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.

SM 5-3 B202/B178/B180
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing


1) In the SP mode, select the test print. Then press Copy Window.
2) Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings
(paper size, etc.) for the test print.
3) Press Start ) to start the test print.
4) Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat
from step 1.
Selecting the Program Number
Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust before you
begin.
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP
that you want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to show the SP
number that you want to open. Then press that number to expand the list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item
that you want to set and press it. The small entry box on the right activates and
shows the below default or the current settings.

B178S912.WMF

NOTE: Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings.
5. Do this procedure to enter a setting:
• Press " to toggle between plus and minus and use the keypad to enter
the appropriate number. The number you enter writes over the previous
setting.
• Press ( to enter the setting. (The value is not registered if you enter a
number that is out of range.)
• Press “Yes” when you are prompted to complete the selection.
6. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy window
and select the settings for the test print. Press Start ) and then press SP
Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode display.
7. Press Exit two times to return to the copy window when you are finished.
Exiting Service Mode
Press the Exit key on the touch-panel.

B202/B178/B180 5-4 SM
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

NOTE: You must turn the main switch off and on after exiting service mode to
make the following settings effective.
SP Modes Related to the Engine SP Modes Related to the Controller
SP2-208-009 SP5-302-002
SP2-213-001 SP5-801-003 to 013
SP2-224-001 to 004 SP5-824-001
SP5-150-001 SP5-825-001
SP5-994-001 and 002 SP5-832-001 to 011
SP5-998-001
SP5-999

NOTE: If the settings of SP modes 5-993-013 to 015 are changed, these changes
will affect the next line position adjustment.

Service Mode Lock/Unlock


At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer
cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off.
This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the
permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User
Tool and then set “Service Mode Lock” to OFF after he or she logs in:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock >
OFF
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
• The CE can service the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is not

Service
Tables
necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is
turned on.
2. Go into the SP mode and set SP 5169 to “1” if you must use the printer bit
switches.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP 5169 from “1” to “0”.
• Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed
servicing the machine.
• The Administrator will then set the “Service Mode Lock” to ON.

SM 5-5 B202/B178/B180
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

5.1.3 REMARKS
Display on the Control Panel Screen
The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is
limited to 20 characters. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the
screen need to be abbreviated. The following are abbreviations used for the SP
modes for which the full description is over 20 characters.

Paper Type Paper Feed Station


N: Normal paper P: Paper tray
MTH: Middle thick paper B: By-pass table
TH: Thick paper

Color Mode [Color]


[K]: Black in B&W mode
[Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode
[YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan
[FC]: Full Color mode
[FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full
color mode

Fusing Section Print Mode


H: Heating roller S: Simplex
P: Pressure roller D: Duplex

Process Speed
L: Low speed – 81 mm/s (for all models)
M: Middle speed – 125 mm/s (for C2a/k) or 165 mm/s (for C2b)
H: High speed – 185 mm/s (for C2a/k) or 222 mm/s (for C2b)
As shown in the following table, the process speed (mm/s) depends on the model,
the print mode (B&W or Color), resolution, and/or type of paper selected. Some SP
mode settings depend on the process speed.

Resolution Line speed Print speed


Mode
(dpi) (mm/s) (ppm)
C2a: 35
600 x 600 C2a/k: 162
C2b: 45
1,800 x 600 C2b: 222
C2k: 28
B/W
C2a: 28
1,200 x 1,200 162 C2b: 35
C2k: 24
C2a: 28
600 x 600 C2a/k: 125
C2b: 35
Color 1,800 x 600 C2b: 162
C2k: 24
1,200 x 1,200 81 17
600 x 600
OHP/Thick 1,800 x 600 81 17
1,200 x 1,200

B202/B178/B180 5-6 SM
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

Others
The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.
FA: Factory setting
(Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory
setting sheets enclosed. You can find it under the jammed paper removal decal.)
DFU: Design/Factory Use only
Do not touch these SP modes in the field.
A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main
switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.
An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this
mode is stored in the NVRAM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to
the default value. “BCU” and “CTL” show which NVRAM contains the data.
• BCU: NVRAM on the BCU board
• CTL: NVRAM on the controller board
The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP
table in the following way.
[Adjustable range / Default setting / Step] Alphanumeric
NOTE: If “Alphanumeric” is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the
setting of the SP mode shows on the screen using alphanumeric
characters instead of only numbers. However, the settings in the bracket in
the SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers.
SP number set in bold-italic (e.g. x-001-1):
This denotes a “Special Service Program” mode setting.

Service
Tables

SM 5-7 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

5.2 COPY SERVICE MODE


5.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE
SP1-XXX (Feed)
1001 [Lead Edge Reg.] Leading Edge Registration
(Paper Type, [Color], Process Speed), Paper Type -> N: Normal, OHP, TH: Thick
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration clutch operation
timing for each mode.
1001 1 Normal [K] L *BCU [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA
1001 2 Normal [K] M *BCU
1001 3 Normal [K] H *BCU
1001 4 Normal [FC] L *BCU
1001 5 Normal [FC] M *BCU
1001 6 Thick [K] *BCU
1001 7 Thick [FC] *BCU
1001 8 OHP [K] *BCU
1001 9 OHP [FC] *BCU

1002 [Side to Side Reg.] Side-to-Side Registration


Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for
each mode.
1002 1 By-pass Table *BCU [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA
1002 2 Paper Tray 1 *BCU
1002 3 Paper Tray 2 *BCU
1002 4 Paper Tray 3 *BCU [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1002 5 Paper Tray 4 *BCU
1002 6 Duplex *BCU

1003 [Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle


(Paper Tray or By-pass, Paper Type, Process Speed), Paper Type: N: Normal, TH:
Thick
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the paper
feed timing.
1003 1 Paper Tray L *BCU [-5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
1003 2 Paper Tray M *BCU
1003 3 Paper Tray H *BCU
1003 4 By-pass N L *BCU
1003 5 By-pass N M *BCU
1003 6 By-pass N H *BCU
1003 7 By-pass TH *BCU
1003 8 By-pass OHP *BCU

B202/B178/B180 5-8 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

1004 [Dev. Motor Speed] Development Drive Motor Speed


([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick
Adjusts the development drive motor speed for correcting color shifts at the leading
edge or trailing edge area.
Black Motor [K]: Adjusts fusing roller speed for the trailing edge area.
Color Motor [YMC]: Adjusts registration roller speed for the leading edge area.
NOTE:
• SP1-004-002 and 005 is for color mode. Fine adjustment for B&W mode can be
done with SP1-005-001 and 002.
• SP1-004-004 is for normal paper. Fine adjustment for thick paper can be done with
SP1-005-003.
1004 1 [K] L Normal *BCU [90.0 to 108.0 / 93.9 / 0.1 %/step]
1004 2 [K] M *BCU [90.0 to 108.0 / 93.6 / 0.1 %/step]
1004 3 [K] H *BCU [90.0 to 108.0 / 93.2 / 0.1 %/step]
1004 4 [YMC] L *BCU [96.00 to 104.00 / 100.00 / 0.05 %/step] FA
1004 5 [YMC] M *BCU
1004 6 [YMC] H *BCU
1004 7 [K] L Thick *BCU [90.0 to 108.0 / 93.9 / 0.1 %/step]

1005 [Dev. Motor Speed2] Development Drive Motor Speed 2


([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> TH: Thick
1005 1 [K] *BCU [-0.2 to 1.0 / 0.2 / 0.1 %/step]
Adjusts the black development drive motor speed for the B&W middle process speed.
The value stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-002 (see the note for SP
1-004).
At the middle process speed, the transfer unit position for B&W is different than for
color mode. The transfer unit position affects the paper transport quality, causing the
paper to flip up at the fusing section if the same speed as color mode is used for B&W
mode. To minimize the occurrence of paper flipping up, which causes smeared

Service
Tables
images in the trailing area, this SP mode can change the motor speed in B&W mode.
1005 2 [YMC] *BCU [-1.00 to 1.00 / 0 / 0.05 %/step] FA
Adjusts the color development drive motor speed for the B&W middle process speed.
The value stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-005 (see the note for SP
1-004).
At the middle process speed, the transfer unit position for B&W is different than for
color mode. The transfer unit position affects the paper transport speed slightly. This
SP mode can adjust the motor speed for B&W mode.
1005 3 [YMC] Thick *BCU [-0.30 to 0.30 / 0 / 0.05 %/step]
Adjusts the color development drive motor speed for thick paper in by-pass mode.
The value stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-004 (see the note for SP
1-004).
Normal and thick paper are different types of paper, and this sometime causes color
shift due to paper slippage. This SP mode can change the motor speed for thick
paper.

SM 5-9 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

1006 [Dev. Motor Speed3] Development Drive Motor Speed 3


([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> SP: Special
Adjusts the development motor speed for special paper.
1006 1 [K] L Special *BCU [-4.0 to 4.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
1006 2 [K] M Special *BCU
1006 3 [YMC] L Special *BCU [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.1 / 0.05 %/step]
1006 4 [YMC] M Special *BCU

1007 [Dev. Motor Speed4] Development Drive Motor Speed 4


1007 1 [YMC] Post Card *BCU [-1.00 to 0.00 / -0.40 / 0.05%/step]
Adjusts the development motor speed for postcards.
1007 2 [YMC] L [K]Thick [-0.40 to 0.40 / 0.00 / 0.05%/step]
Adjusts the development motor speed in black mode for thick paper.

1008 [Drum Motor Speed] Drum Motor Speed Adjustment


Adjusts the drum speed of each line-speed mode (low, middle and high speed); this
adjusts drum speed but not transfer belt speed.
1008 1 [CL] L *BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU
1008 2 [CL] M *BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU
1008 3 [Bk] L *BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU
1008 4 [Bk] M *BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU
1008 5 OHP *BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU
1008 6 MUSIC *BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU
1008 8 [Bk] H *BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU

B202/B178/B180 5-10 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

1104 [Fusing Control]


1104 1 Control Method *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric
0: ON/OFF Control
1: Phase Control
Selects the fusing control method.
NOTE: This mode can be used only for N. America models
1104 25 Process Speed *BCU [0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: Color: Low (temperature specified by SP 1-
105-8 and 19)
1: Color: Mid (temperature specified by SP 1-
105-9 and 20)
2: Thick / OHP (temperature specified by SP 1-
105-13 and 24)
3: B/W: Mid (temperature specified by SP 1-
105-4 and 15)
4: B/W: High (temperature specified by SP 1-
105-5 and 16)
5: Color Mid MTH (temperature specified by
SP 1-105-60 and 68)
6: B/W: High MTH (temperature specified by
SP1-105-56 and 64)
Selects the power-on default target fusing operation temperature.
The target operating fusing temperature depends on the process speed. When the
machine is switched on, it starts warming up for the process speed specified in this
SP mode.
1104 [Fusing Stand By]
1104 26 H: Offset Temp *BCU [–20 to 20 / 15 / 1oC /step]
Sets the heating roller offset temperature for the 1st print condition after the heating
roller temperature reaches the ready temperature.
1104 27 P: Offset Temp *BCU [–20 to 20 / 5 / 1oC /step]

Service
Tables
Sets the pressure roller offset temperature for the 1st print condition after the
pressure roller temperature reaches the ready temperature.
1104 28 H: Offset Temp *BCU [–20 to 20 / 15 / 1oC /step]
Sets the heating roller offset temperature for the 1st print condition before the heating
roller temperature reaches the ready temperature.
1104 29 P: Offset Temp *BCU [–20 to 20 / 5 / 1oC /step]
Sets the heating roller offset temperature for the 1st print condition before the
pressure roller temperature reaches the ready temperature.
1104 31 Temp Control *BCU [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: off
1: out of FD/FUS S ON
2: on
Selects the temperature control.

SM 5-11 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE Rev. 02/2006

1105 [Fusing Temperature]


(Heating or Pressure roller: Paper Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex, Process Speed)
Paper Type -> N: Normal, OHP. MTH: Middle Thick, TH: Thick, SP: Special
Some settings of fusing temperature depend on the destination (US or Europe/Asia).
US: Setting for US, EU: Setting for Europe/Asia
1105 1 H: Ready *BCU [10 to 100 / 10 / 1oC/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for the print ready condition.
After the main switch has been turned on, the machine enters the print ready
condition when the heating roller temperature reaches the temperature specified in
this SP mode.
When the machine is in the recovery mode from the energy saver or auto off mode,
the machine becomes ready when both heating and pressure roller temperatures
reach the specified temperature.
Ready temperature = (Target temperature specified in SP1-104-25 or 105-4 to 30) –
Temperature specified in this SP mode.

1105 2 P: Ready *BCU [10 to 100 / 30 / 1oC/step]


Sets the pressure roller temperature for the printing ready condition.
Ready temperature = (Target temperature specified in SP1-104-25 or 105-4 to 30) –
Temperature specified in this SP mode
The following SPs set the target operating temperatures of the heating and pressure
rollers in various modes. (The default settings are different for C2a and C2b)
1105 4 H:N [K] S M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 140, C2b: 160 / 5°C/step]
1105 5 H:N [K] S H *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 160, C2b: 175 / 5°C/step]
1105 6 H:N [K] D M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 140, C2b: 160 / 5°C/step]
1105 7 H:N [K] D H *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 160, C2b: 175 / 5°C/step]
1105 8 H:N[FC] S L *BCU [100 to 190 / 135 / 5°C/step]
1105 9 H:N[FC] S M *BCU [100 to 190 / 140 / 5°C/step]
1105 10 H:N[FC] D L *BCU [100 to 190 / 135 / 5°C/step]
1105 11 H:N[FC] D M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 140, C2b: 160 / 5°C/step]
1105 13 H:OHP *BCU [100 to 190 / 145 / 5°C/step]
1105 15 P:N [K] S M *BCU [0 to 190 / C2a/k: 130, C2b: 145 / 5°C/step]
1105 16 P:N [K] S H *BCU [0 to 190 / C2a/k: 145, C2b: 150 / 5°C/step]
1105 17 P:N [K] D M *BCU [0 to 190 / C2a/k: 130, C2b: 145 / 5°C/step]
1105 18 P:N [K] D H *BCU [0 to 190 / C2a/k: 145, C2b: 150 / 5°C/step]
1105 19 P:N[FC] S L *BCU [0 to 190 / 130 / 5°C/step]
1105 20 P:N[FC] S M *BCU [0 to 190 / C2a/k: 130, C2b: 145 / 5°C/step]
1105 21 P:N[FC] D L *BCU [0 to 190 / 130 / 5°C/step]
1105 22 P:N[FC] D M *BCU [0 to 190 / C2a/k: 130, C2b: 145 / 5°C/step]
1105 24 P:OHP *BCU [0 to 190 / 130 / 5°C/step]
1105 26 H:TH *BCU [0 to 190 / 155 / 5°C/step]
⇒ 1105 28 P:TH *BCU [0 to 190 / 5°C/step] 155 for (B180)
150 for (B178, B202)
1105 29 H:Envelope *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 155 / 5°C/step]
1105 30 P:Envelope *BCU [0 to 190 / 135 / 5°C/step]
1105 31 H: Slow Down *BCU [1 to 20 / 5 / 1°C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for the printing start condition when changing the
process speed.
Fusing temperature must be decreased when the machine changes to a process
speed that is slower than the current process speed (for example, when the speed
changes from high speed to low speed). The machine idles while reducing the fusing
temperature. When the fusing temperature becomes lower than the ready
temperature, the machine starts printing.
Ready Temperature = Target temperature + Temperature specified in this SP mode.

B202/B178/B180 5-12 SM
Rev. 02/2006 COPY SERVICE MODE

1105 [Fusing Temperature]


(Heating or Pressure roller: Paper Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex, Process Speed)
Paper Type -> N: Normal, OHP. MTH: Middle Thick, TH: Thick, SP: Special
Some settings of fusing temperature depend on the destination (US or Europe/Asia).
US: Setting for US, EU: Setting for Europe/Asia
1105 32 P: Slow Down *BCU [1 to 20 / 10 / 1°C/step]
Sets the pressure roller temperature for the printing start condition when changing the
process speed.
1105 33 H:SP L *BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1°C/step]
1105 34 H:SP M *BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1°C/step]
1105 35 H:SP H *BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1°C/step]
1105 36 P:SP L *BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1°C/step]
1105 37 P:SP M *BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1°C/step]
1105 38 P:SP H *BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1°C/step]
1105 55 H: MTH [K] S M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 155, C2b: 175 / 5°C/step]
1105 56 H: MTH [K] S H *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 175, C2b: 180 / 5°C/step]
1105 57 H: MTH [K] D M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 155, C2b: 175 / 5°C/step]
1105 58 H: MTH [K] D H *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 175, C2b: 180 / 5°C/step]
1105 59 H: MTH [FC] S L *BCU [100 to 190 / 140 / 5°C/step]
1105 60 H: MTH [FC] S M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 155, C2b: 175 / 5°C/step]
1105 61 H: MTH [FC] D L *BCU [100 to 190 / 140 / 5°C/step]
1105 62 H: MTH [FC] D M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 155, C2b: 175 / 5°C/step]
1105 63 P: MTH [K] S M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 140, C2b: 150 / 5°C/step]
1105 64 P: MTH [K] S H *BCU [100 to 190 / 150 / 5°C/step]
1105 65 P: MTH [K] D M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 140, C2b: 150 / 5°C/step]
1105 66 P: MTH [K] D H *BCU [100 to 190 / 150 / 5°C/step]
1105 67 P: MTH [FC] S L *BCU [100 to 190 / 135 / 5°C/step]
1105 68 P: MTH [FC] S M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 140, C2b: 150 / 5°C/step]
1105 69 P: MTH [FC] D L *BCU [100 to 190 / 135 / 5°C/step]
1105 70 P: MTH [FC] D M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 140, C2b: 150 / 5°C/step]

Service
Tables
1106 [Temperature Display] Fusing Temperature Display (Heating or Pressure)
Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers.
1106 1 Heat Roller [0 to 230 / - / 5°C/step]
1106 2 Pressure Roller

SM 5-13 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE Rev. 02/2006

1902 [Paper Size] Tray Paper Size


1902 1 Tray 1 A4/LT *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric
0: A4 sideways, 1: LT sideways
Tray 1 can only use these two sizes.
US: 1 FA
Specifies the paper size for tray 1.
1902 2 Tray 2 B4/LG *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric
0: B4 lengthwise, 1: LG lengthwise
This specifies which size is detected for a
sensor output of 1101 (see section 6 for
details).
US: 1 FA
Specifies the paper size for tray 2.
1902 3 Tray 2 A4/LT *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric
0: A4 lengthwise, 1: LT lengthwise
This specifies which size is detected for a
sensor output of 0110 (see section 6 for
details).
US: 1 FA
Specifies the paper size for tray 2.
1902 4 Tray 2 B5/LT *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric
0: LT, 1: B5 lengthwise
This specifies which size is detected for a
sensor output of 1011 (see section 6 for
details).
Specifies the paper size for tray 2.
⇒ 1902 5 Fix Size *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric
0: OFF, 1: ON
ON: The by-pass tray automatically detects the
paper size and orientation. The process speed
is decreased to 1/2.
OFF: The by-pass tray does not detect the
paper size. The process speed stays at normal
speed.
Turns On or Off auto paper size diction for the by-pass tray

1910 [Fusing Idling Time]


Specifies the timer for deciding whether to do fusing idling when receiving a print
command.
When receiving a new job within the time specified in this SP mode after the last job
is completed, fusing idling is not done because the fusing section was already
warmed up during the last job.
1910 1 Idling Time *BCU [0 to 180 / 1 / 1 minute/step] DFU

B202/B178/B180 5-14 SM
Rev. 02/2006 COPY SERVICE MODE

1912 [Machine Temp. Cor.] Machine Temperature Correction


Th: Threshold, Heating or Pressure roller
Corrects the fusing temperature depending on the temperature inside the machine.
If the temperature inside the machine is too high or low, this may cause hot or cold
offset image at the fusing section. To avoid the offset image, the fusing temperature is
corrected depending on the temperature inside machine. This is monitored by the
thermistor located on the right side of the laser optics-housing unit.
If the temperature inside the machine is detected as high or low (based on the
settings of SP1-912-001 or 002), the fusing temperature is decreased or increased by
the temperature specified in SP1-912-003 to 006.
Also, see SP 1-917-1.
1912 1 Th:High Temp *BCU [0 to 50 / 30 / 1°C/step]
Sets the threshold for entering the high temperature condition.
1912 2 Th:Low Temp *BCU [0 to 50 / 17 / 1°C/step]
Sets the threshold for entering the low temperature condition.
1912 3 H:High Temp *BCU [0 to 15 / 0 / 1°C/step]
Sets the fusing temperature decrease for the high temperature condition.
1912 4 P:High Temp *BCU [0 to 15 / 0 / 1°C/step]
1912 5 H:Low Temp *BCU [0 to 15 / 5 / 1°C/step]
Sets the fusing temperature increase for the low temperature condition.
1912 6 P:Low Temp *BCU [0 to 15 / 5 / 1°C/step]
1912 7 H: Temp Control *BCU [10 to 50 / 34 / 1°C/step]
Decreases the fusing temperature by 10 °C if the temperature inside machine, which
is monitored by the thermistor located on the left side of the laser optics housing unit,
reaches the set temperature in this SP.

1913 [Temperature. Cor. 1] Fusing Temperature Correction (Correction Timing)


Specifies the number of sheets to determine whether or not to apply the fusing
temperature correction.
During a multi print job, the fusing temperature tends to slightly overshoot around the

Service
Tables
10th sheet and then stabilize. Temperature overshooting may cause the glossiness to
increase.
To minimize the overshooting, both fusing and pressure roller temperatures are
decreased by the amount specified in SP1-914 at the number of sheets specified in
this SP mode, until the end of the job.
The temperatures are decreased in two steps.
Example: Middle speed
First step (also called “Mode 1”): After 5 sheets (SP 1-913-2), temperature drops by
5°C (SP 1-914-2).
Second step (also called “Mode 2”): After 20 sheets (SP 1-913-7), temperature drops
by 10°C (SP 1-914-7).
Narrow: LT/A4 SEF width or less
Wide: Wider than LT/A4 SEF
1913 1 Mode 1 H *BCU [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 2 Mode 1 M *BCU [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 3 Mode 1 L *BCU [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 4 Mode 1 OHP narrow *BCU [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 5 Mode 1 H wide *BCU [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 6 Mode 2 H *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 7 Mode 2 M *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 8 Mode 2 L *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 9 Mode 2 H narrow *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 10 Mode 2 H wide *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]

SM 5-15 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE Rev. 02/2006

1914 [Temperature Cor. 2] Fusing Temperature Correction (Temperature Setting)


Specifies the temperature to be subtracted from the targeted temperatures specified
in SP1-105-4 to-30.
Narrow: LT/A4 SEF width or less
Wide: Wider than LT/A4 SEF
1914 1 Temp 1 H *BCU [0 to 20 / C2a/k: 0, C2b: 5 / 5°C /step]
1914 2 Temp 1 M *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5°C /step]
1914 3 Temp 1 L *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5°C /step]
1914 4 Temp 1 OHP narrow *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5°C /step]
1914 5 Temp 1 OHP wide *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5°C /step]
1914 6 Temp 2 H *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5°C /step]
1914 7 Temp 2 M *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5°C /step]
1914 8 Temp 2 L *BCU [0 to 20 / 0/ 5°C /step]
1914 9 Temp 2 OHP narrow *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5°C /step]
1914 10 Temp 2 OHP wide *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5°C /step]

1915 [Stand-by Time]


1915 1 Job Receiving *BCU [0 to 180 / 60 / 10 seconds/step]
0: The machine does not shift to the stand-by
mode.
Specifies the time to shift the machine into the stand-by mode when not receiving a
print start command after receiving a print preparation command.
1915 2 Job End *BCU [0 to 180 / 30 / 10 seconds/step]
0: The machine does not shift to the stand-by
mode.
Specifies the time to shift the machine into the stand-by mode after the last job is
completed.

B202/B178/B180 5-16 SM
Rev. 02/2006 COPY SERVICE MODE

1916 [Idling Mode]


(High speed, Middle speed)
1916 1 Mode Set *BCU [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
1: On
Executes the extra idling operation after the fusing unit becomes ready just after the
main switch has been turned on.
1916 2 Idling Time *BCU [10 to 120 / 30 / 10 sec/step]
Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed.
1916 3 Pre-Job Mode *BCU [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
1: On (4 sec)
2: On (Specifies the extra idling operation time
set with SP 1916 7)
Executes the extra idling operation after the fusing unit becomes ready when a print
job arrives at the copier.
1916 4 Idling Time *BCU [0 to 360 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed when special paper is used
and the line speed is 185 mm/s.
1916 5 Pre Job Mode *BCU [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: H: on, M: off
1: H: on, M: on
2: H: off, M: on
3: H: off, M: off
Executes the idling operation if the process speed of a job meets this setting
(combination between high and middle speed) after meeting following conditions. The
idling operation continues until the fusing temperature reaches the printing ready
condition.
• Turning the main power on
• Recovering energy saver mode and off mode

Service
Tables
• Jam recovery
• Door open
• Using Fax

L: Low speed 81 mm/s (for all models)


M: Middle speed 125 mm/s (for C2a/k) or 165 mm/s (for C2b)
H: High speed 185 mm/s (for C2a/k) or 222 mm/s (for C2b)
1916 6 Pre Job Mode *BCU [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Executes the idling operation for 2 seconds if the fusing temperature reaches the
printing ready condition when receiving a job for middle thick paper in color printing
mode.
⇒ 1916 7 Pre Job Mode *BCU [1 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]

Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed after the fusing unit
becomes ready when a print job arrives at the copier.

1917 [Env Condition] Environmental Correction Condition


1917 1 Time *BCU [0 to 23.5 / 23.5 / 0.5 hour/step]
The machine cancels the environmental correction for low temperature
(SP1-912) after a prescribed time has passed after the machine is turned on, or,
recovers from energy saver mode.

SM 5-17 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

1996 [OHP/TH Fusing] OHP/Thick Paper Fusing Temperature Correction


(Heating or Pressure Roller)
Specifies the temperature for starting a print job.
The fusing section is already warmed up when the last print job was completed. If
prints are made on OHP or thick paper at this time, the fusing temperature tends to
be higher than the target, causing exit roller marks or a paper jam in the fusing
section.
To prevent this, the print job will not start if the heating and pressure roller
temperatures are higher than the following:
(Target temperature specified by SP1-105-13, -24, -26, -28) - (Temperature specified
by this SP mode (default: 5°C for heating roller, 10°C for pressure roller))
1996 4 H:Print Temp *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 1°C /step]
1996 5 P:Print Temp *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 1°C /step]
1996 6 PreJob Mode *BCU [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
1: On
This SP enables or disables the 30-second fusing unit idling at the start of an OHP
print job. When enabled, idling is done even if the machine is in the ready condition.

B202/B178/B180 5-18 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

SP2-XXX (Drum)
2001 [Charge Bias] Charge Roller Bias (DC or AC component: [Color], Process Speed)
U: Upper, L: Lower
Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
Charge bias (DC component) is automatically adjusted during process control;
therefore, adjusting these settings does not effect while process control mode (SP3-
125 Default: ON) is activated. When deactivating process control mode with SP3-125,
the values in these SP modes are used for printing.
2001 1 DC:[K] *BCU [300 to 1000 / 620 / 10 -volts/step] DFU
2001 2 DC:[Y] *BCU
2001 3 DC:[M] *BCU
2001 4 DC:[C] *BCU
• Displays the AC component of the charge roller bias adjusted during machine
initialization or process control self-check.
• Sets AC bias in the various print modes for test purposes.
2001 5 AC:[K] L [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
2001 6 AC:[K] M [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
2001 7 AC:[K] H [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
2001 8 AC:[Y] L [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
2001 9 AC:[Y] M [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
2001 10 AC:[M] L [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
2001 11 AC:[M] M [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
2001 12 AC:[C] L [0 to 255 / 170 0 / 1/step] DFU
2001 13 AC:[C] M [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
Sets the target of the AC bias for black.
The actual target of AC bias is calculated by the machine.
2001 14 AC Target [K] *BCU [0 to 255 / C2a/k: 79, C2b: 117 / 1/step] DFU
2001 15 AC Target [Y] *BCU [0 to 255 / C2a/k: 78, C2b: 116 / 1/step] DFU
2001 16 AC Target [M] *BCU [0 to 255 / C2a/k: 79, C2b: 117 / 1/step] DFU
2001 17 AC Target [C] *BCU [0 to 255 / C2a/k: 78, C2b: 116 / 1/step] DFU

Service
Tables
2101 [TrimAdjust] Trimming Adjustment
This program adjusts the trimming area (the area in which no image is created).
2103 1 front *BCU [0.0 to 6.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2103 2 back *BCU [0.0 to 6.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2103 3 lead *BCU [0.0 to 6.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2103 4 trail *BCU [0.0 to 6.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

SM 5-19 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

2103 [LD Control] LD Power Control


([Color Mode, Color], Process Speed, K or Color mode) P: Power, M: Magnification
Adjusts the laser power by changing the current applied to LD.
Laser power is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore, adjusting
these data has no effect while Process Control (SP3-125 Default: ON) is activated.
After deactivating Process Control with SP3-125, the values in these SP modes are
used for printing.
2103 1 P:[K] L C *BCU [0 to 1023 / 702 / 1/step] DFU
2103 2 P:[K] M C *BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU
2103 4 P:[Y] L C *BCU [0 to 1023 / 702 / 1/step] DFU
2103 5 P:[Y] M C *BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU
2103 7 P:[M] L C *BCU [0 to 1023 / 702 / 1/step] DFU
2103 8 P:[M] M C *BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU
2103 10 P:[C] L C *BCU [0 to 1023 / 702 / 1/step] DFU
2103 11 P:[C] M C *BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU
2103 13 P:[K] L K *BCU [0 to 1023 / 702 / 1/step] DFU
2103 14 P:[K] M K *BCU [0 to 1023 / C2a/k: 711, C2b: 702 / 1/step] DFU
2103 15 P:[K] H K *BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU
2103 26 P:[0 1] M K *BCU [0 to 1023 / C2a/k: 711, C2b: 702 / 1/step] DFU
2103 27 P:[0 1] H K *BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU
Main Scan Magnification ([Color], Laser Exposure Frequency)
Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects the
main scan magnification; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next
line position adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-
993-013 to 015 (this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be
effective from the next line position adjustment).
NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can
be adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case, the
line position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.
2103 55 M:[K] 64.3/83.4MHz *BCU [0 to 560 / 280 / 1/2 dot/step]
2103 56 M:[Y] 64.3/83.4MHz *BCU 1 dot = 20μ DFU
2103 57 M:[M] 64.3/83.4MHz *BCU
2103 58 M:[C] 64.3/83.4MHz *BCU
2103 59 M:[K] 57.1MHz *BCU
2103 63 M:[K] 83.4MHz *BCU [0 to 560 / 280 / 1/2 dot/step]
2103 64 M:[Y] 83.4MHz *BCU 1 dot = 20μ DFU
2103 65 M:[M] 83.4MHz *BCU
2103 66 M:[C] 83.4MHz *BCU
2103 101 CF:[K,K] 1 *BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU
2103 102 CF:[K,K] 2 *BCU
2103 103 CF:[FC,K] *BCU
2103 104 CF:[FC:Y] *BCU
2103 105 CF:[FC,M] *BCU
2103 106 CF:[FC,C] *BCU
2103 107 CF:[K] OHP/TH *BCU [0 to 1023 / 635 / 1/step] DFU
2103 108 CF:[Y] OHP/TH *BCU
2103 109 CF:[M] OHP/TH *BCU
2103 110 CF:[C] OHP/TH *BCU

B202/B178/B180 5-20 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

2109 [LD Beam Pitch] LD Beam Pitch


Sets the beam pitch for black in 1200 dpi or 600 dpi mode.
NOTE: After replacing the laser optics-housing unit, the data printed on the decal
attached to the new unit must be input with this SP mode.
2109 2 Pitch 1200 *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 50 pulse/step] FA
2109 3 Pitch 600 *BCU [0 to 255 / 42 / 50 pulse/step] FA
2109 5 Display 1200 [0 to 255 / - / 1 pulse/step]
2109 6 Display 600 [0 to 255 / - / 1 pulse/step]

2112 [Polygon OFF Timing 1] Polygon Mirror Motor OFF Timing


2112 1 Warming-up *BCU [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 second/step]
0: Not turned off except for Energy Saver mode
The polygon mirror motor turns off if the machine receives no print start command for
the time specified in this SP mode after receiving the print preparation command.
2112 2 Job End *BCU [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 second/step]
0: Not turned off except for Energy Saver mode
The polygon mirror motor turns off if the machine receives no print job for the time
specified in this SP mode after the previous job was completed.

2113 [Polygon OFF Timing 2] [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]


Polygon Mirror Motor OFF Timing 0: Enable, 1: Disable
2131 1 The polygon mirror motor does not turn on until the copier enters the ready condition
even after receiving the print start command.
NOTE: When a user complains about high frequency noise, enabling this mode can
minimize the noise.

2150 [LD Pulse] LD Pulse Area Correction (Color, Area) FA

Service
Tables
Adjusts the area correction value for color shift comparing with black. The main scan
(320 mm) is divided into 12 areas. The area 1 is at front side of the machine (left side
of an image) and area 12 is at rear side of the machine (right side of an image).
When you decrease this value, an image shifts to the left side on a print.
When you increase this value, an image shifts to the right side on a print.
1 pulse = 1/16 dot
2150 1 Y: Area1 *BCU [–1023 to 1023 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
2150 2 Y: Area2 *BCU
2150 3 Y: Area3 *BCU
2150 4 Y: Area4 *BCU
2150 5 Y: Area5 *BCU
2150 6 Y: Area6 *BCU
2150 7 Y: Area7 *BCU
2150 8 Y: Area8 *BCU
2150 9 Y: Area9 *BCU
2150 10 Y: Area10 *BCU
2150 11 Y: Area11 *BCU
2150 12 Y: Area12 *BCU
2150 13 M: Area1 *BCU [–1023 to 1023 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
2150 14 M: Area2 *BCU
2150 15 M: Area3 *BCU
2150 16 M: Area4 *BCU
2150 17 M: Area5 *BCU
2150 18 M: Area6 *BCU
2150 19 M: Area7 *BCU

SM 5-21 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

2150 [LD Pulse] LD Pulse Area Correction (Color, Area) FA


Adjusts the area correction value for color shift comparing with black. The main scan
(320 mm) is divided into 12 areas. The area 1 is at front side of the machine (left side
of an image) and area 12 is at rear side of the machine (right side of an image).
When you decrease this value, an image shifts to the left side on a print.
When you increase this value, an image shifts to the right side on a print.
1 pulse = 1/16 dot
2150 20 M: Area8 *BCU [–1023 to 1023 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
2150 21 M: Area9 *BCU
2150 22 M: Area10 *BCU
2150 23 M: Area11 *BCU
2150 24 M: Area12 *BCU
2150 25 C: Area1 *BCU
2150 26 C: Area2 *BCU
2150 27 C: Area3 *BCU
2150 28 C: Area4 *BCU
2150 29 C: Area5 *BCU
2150 30 C: Area6 *BCU
2150 31 C: Area7 *BCU
2150 32 C: Area8 *BCU
2150 33 C: Area9 *BCU
2150 34 C: Area10 *BCU
2150 35 C: Area11 *BCU
2150 36 C: Area12 *BCU

[LD Mag. Pulse] LD Pulse Magnification Correction (Color) DFU


Adjusts the correction value for main scan magnification.
2151 When you decrease this value, an image is reduced.
When you increase this value, an image is enlarged.
1 pulse = 1/16 dot
2151 1 Bk *BCU [–1023 to 1023 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
2151 2 Y *BCU
2151 3 M *BCU
2151 4 C *BCU

[LD Control] LD Power Control (Color, Area) DFU


Adjusts the LD power for each area. The main scan (320 mm) is divided into 32
2152 areas. The areas from 2 to 31 are effective image areas. The area 2 is at front side
of the machine (left side of an image) and area 31 is at rear side of the machine
(right side of an image).
2152 1 Bk: Area0 *BCU [50 to 150 / 108.19 / 0.01%/step]
2152 2 Bk: Area1 *BCU [50 to 150 / 107.28 / 0.01%/step]
2152 3 Bk: Area2 *BCU [50 to 150 / 106.32 / 0.01%/step]
2152 4 Bk: Area3 *BCU [50 to 150 / 105.35 / 0.01%/step]
2152 5 Bk: Area4 *BCU [50 to 150 / 104.40 / 0.01%/step]
2152 6 Bk: Area5 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.49 / 0.01%/step]
2152 7 Bk: Area6 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.65 / 0.01%/step]
2152 8 Bk: Area7 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.90 / 0.01%/step]
2152 9 Bk: Area8 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.24 / 0.01%/step]
2152 10 Bk: Area9 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.68 / 0.01%/step]
2152 11 Bk: Area10 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.23 / 0.01%/step]
2152 12 Bk: Area11 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.90 / 0.01%/step]

B202/B178/B180 5-22 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

[LD Control] LD Power Control (Color, Area) DFU


Adjusts the LD power for each area. The main scan (320 mm) is divided into 32
2152 areas. The areas from 2 to 31 are effective image areas. The area 2 is at front side
of the machine (left side of an image) and area 31 is at rear side of the machine
(right side of an image).
2152 13 Bk: Area12 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.67 / 0.01%/step]
2152 14 Bk: Area13 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.56 / 0.01%/step]
2152 15 Bk: Area14 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.55 / 0.01%/step]
2152 16 Bk: Area15 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.66 / 0.01%/step]
2152 17 Bk: Area16 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
2152 18 Bk: Area17 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
2152 19 Bk: Area18 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.55 / 0.01%/step]
2152 20 Bk: Area19 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.03 / 0.01%/step]
2152 21 Bk: Area20 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.58 / 0.01%/step]
2152 22 Bk: Area21 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.21 / 0.01%/step]
2152 23 Bk: Area22 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.89 / 0.01%/step]
2152 24 Bk: Area23 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.63 / 0.01%/step]
2152 25 Bk: Area24 *BCU [50 to 150 / 104.42 / 0.01%/step]
2152 26 Bk: Area25 *BCU [50 to 150 / 105.24 / 0.01%/step]
2152 27 Bk: Area26 *BCU [50 to 150 / 106.10 / 0.01%/step]
2152 28 Bk: Area27 *BCU [50 to 150 / 106.99 / 0.01%/step]
2152 29 Bk: Area28 *BCU [50 to 150 / 107.91 / 0.01%/step]
2152 30 Bk: Area29 *BCU [50 to 150 / 108.85 / 0.01%/step]
2152 31 Bk: Area30 *BCU [50 to 150 / 109.82 / 0.01%/step]
2152 32 Bk: Area31 *BCU [50 to 150 / 110.83 / 0.01%/step]
2152 33 Y: Area0 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.31 / 0.01%/step]
2152 34 Y: Area1 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.92 / 0.01%/step]
2152 35 Y: Area2 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.89 / 0.01%/step]
2152 36 Y: Area3 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.44 / 0.01%/step]

Service
Tables
2152 37 Y: Area4 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.78 / 0.01%/step]
2152 38 Y: Area5 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.04 / 0.01%/step]
2152 39 Y: Area6 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.33 / 0.01%/step]
2152 40 Y: Area7 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.70 / 0.01%/step]
2152 41 Y: Area8 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.19 / 0.01%/step]
2152 42 Y: Area9 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.81 / 0.01%/step]
2152 43 Y: Area10 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.56 / 0.01%/step]
2152 44 Y: Area11 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.43 / 0.01%/step]
2152 45 Y: Area12 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.40 / 0.01%/step]
2152 46 Y: Area13 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.46/ 0.01%/step]
2152 47 Y: Area14 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.58/ 0.01%/step]
2152 48 Y: Area15 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.73/ 0.01%/step]
2152 49 Y: Area16 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
2152 50 Y: Area17 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
2152 51 Y: Area18 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.28 / 0.01%/step]
2152 52 Y: Area19 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.45 / 0.01%/step]
2152 53 Y: Area20 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.62 / 0.01%/step]
2152 54 Y: Area21 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.80 / 0.01%/step]
2152 55 Y: Area22 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.99 / 0.01%/step]
2152 56 Y: Area23 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.20 / 0.01%/step]
2152 57 Y: Area24 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.45 / 0.01%/step]
2152 58 Y: Area25 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.75 / 0.01%/step]
2152 59 Y: Area26 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.11 / 0.01%/step]

SM 5-23 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

[LD Control] LD Power Control (Color, Area) DFU


Adjusts the LD power for each area. The main scan (320 mm) is divided into 32
2152 areas. The areas from 2 to 31 are effective image areas. The area 2 is at front side
of the machine (left side of an image) and area 31 is at rear side of the machine
(right side of an image).
2152 60 Y: Area27 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.52 / 0.01%/step]
2152 61 Y: Area28 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.98 / 0.01%/step]
2152 62 Y: Area29 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.45 / 0.01%/step]
2152 63 Y: Area30 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.88 / 0.01%/step]
2152 64 Y: Area31 *BCU [50 to 150 / 104.18 / 0.01%/step]
2152 65 M: Area0 *BCU [50 to 150 / 112.42/ 0.01%/step]
2152 66 M: Area1 *BCU [50 to 150 / 111.23 / 0.01%/step]
2152 67 M: Area2 *BCU [50 to 150 / 106.63 / 0.01%/step]
2152 68 M: Area3 *BCU [50 to 150 / 105.55 / 0.01%/step]
2152 69 M: Area4 *BCU [50 to 150 / 104.49 / 0.01%/step]
2152 70 M: Area5 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.48 / 0.01%/step]
2152 71 M: Area6 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.56 / 0.01%/step]
2152 72 M: Area7 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.75 / 0.01%/step]
2152 73 M: Area8 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.06/ 0.01%/step]
2152 74 M: Area9 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.49/ 0.01%/step]
2152 75 M: Area10 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.06/ 0.01%/step]
2152 76 M: Area11 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.75 / 0.01%/step]
2152 77 M: Area12 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.56 / 0.01%/step]
2152 78 M: Area13 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.49/ 0.01%/step]
2152 79 M: Area14 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.52/ 0.01%/step]
2152 80 M: Area15 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.64/ 0.01%/step]
2152 81 M: Area16 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
2152 82 M: Area17 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
2152 83 M: Area18 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.53 / 0.01%/step]
2152 84 M: Area19 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.96/ 0.01%/step]
2152 85 M: Area20 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.45 / 0.01%/step]
2152 86 M: Area21 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.99 / 0.01%/step]
2152 87 M: Area22 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.59 / 0.01%/step]
2152 88 M: Area23 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.23 / 0.01%/step]
2152 89 M: Area24 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.91 / 0.01%/step]
2152 90 M: Area25 *BCU [50 to 150 / 104.64 / 0.01%/step]
2152 91 M: Area26 *BCU [50 to 150 / 105.42 / 0.01%/step]
2152 92 M: Area27 *BCU [50 to 150 / 106.24 / 0.01%/step]
2152 93 M: Area28 *BCU [50 to 150 / 107.12 / 0.01%/step]
2152 94 M: Area29 *BCU [50 to 150 / 108.05 / 0.01%/step]
2152 95 M: Area30 *BCU [50 to 150 / 109.04 / 0.01%/step]
2152 96 M: Area31 *BCU [50 to 150 / 110.10 / 0.01%/step]
2152 97 C: Area0 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.04/ 0.01%/step]
2152 98 C: Area1 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.60 / 0.01%/step]
2152 99 C: Area2 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.79 / 0.01%/step]
2152 100 C: Area3 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.50 / 0.01%/step]
2152 101 C: Area4 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.86 / 0.01%/step]
2152 102 C: Area5 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.08 / 0.01%/step]
2152 103 C: Area6 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.29 / 0.01%/step]
2152 104 C: Area7 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.59 / 0.01%/step]
2152 105 C: Area8 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.03/ 0.01%/step]
2152 106 C: Area9 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.63/ 0.01%/step]

B202/B178/B180 5-24 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

[LD Control] LD Power Control (Color, Area) DFU


Adjusts the LD power for each area. The main scan (320 mm) is divided into 32
2152 areas. The areas from 2 to 31 are effective image areas. The area 2 is at front side
of the machine (left side of an image) and area 31 is at rear side of the machine
(right side of an image).
2152 107 C: Area10 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.38/ 0.01%/step]
2152 108 C: Area11 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.27/ 0.01%/step]
2152 109 C: Area12 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.28/ 0.01%/step]
2152 110 C: Area13 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.38/ 0.01%/step]
2152 111 C: Area14 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.54/ 0.01%/step]
2152 112 C: Area15 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.72/ 0.01%/step]
2152 113 C: Area16 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
2152 114 C: Area17 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
2152 115 C: Area18 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.23 / 0.01%/step]
2152 116 C: Area19 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.35/ 0.01%/step]
2152 117 C: Area20 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.45 / 0.01%/step]
2152 118 C: Area21 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.53 / 0.01%/step]
2152 119 C: Area22 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.62 / 0.01%/step]
2152 120 C: Area23 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.73 / 0.01%/step]
2152 121 C: Area24 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.89 / 0.01%/step]
2152 122 C: Area25 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.12 / 0.01%/step]
2152 123 C: Area26 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.44 / 0.01%/step]
2152 124 C: Area27 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.84 / 0.01%/step]
2152 125 C: Area28 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.32/ 0.01%/step]
2152 126 C: Area29 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.83 / 0.01%/step]
2152 127 C: Area30 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.30 / 0.01%/step]
2152 128 C: Area31 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.61 / 0.01%/step]

Service
Tables
2201 [Development Bias] Development Bias ([Color], Process Speed)
Adjusts the development bias.
Development bias is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore,
adjusting these settings has no effect while Process Control (SP3-125 Default: ON) is
activated.
After deactivating Process Control with SP3-125, the values in these SP modes are
used for printing.
2201 1 [K] L *BCU [200 to 800 / 500 / 10 –V/step] DFU
2201 2 [K] M *BCU
2201 3 [K] H *BCU
2201 4 [Y] L *BCU
2201 5 [Y] M *BCU
2201 6 [M] L *BCU
2201 7 [M] M *BCU
2201 8 [C] L *BCU
2201 9 [C] M *BCU

2207 [Forced Toner Supply] Forced Toner Supply ([Color])


Forces toner to be supplied to the development unit.
The toner supply clutch turns on for 0.7 s and off for 1.3 s.
2207 1 [K]
2207 2 [Y]
2207 3 [M]
2207 4 [C]

SM 5-25 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

2208 [Toner Supply Mode] Toner Supply Mode ([Color])


Selects the toner supply method.
2208 1 [K] *BCU [0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
2208 2 [Y] *BCU 0: Fixed supply (with the supply rates stored
2208 3 [M] *BCU with SP2-208-5 to 8)
2208 4 [C] *BCU 1: Fuzzy control supply
2: Proportional control supply (using the Vref
values stored with SP2-224-5 to 8)
Sets the toner supply rate used when the toner supply method (SP2-208-1 to 4) is set
to “0” (fixed supply mode).
2208 5 Fixed Rate [K] *BCU [0 to 100 / 5 / 1%/step]
2208 6 Fixed Rate [Y] *BCU
2208 7 Fixed Rate [M] *BCU
2208 8 Fixed Rate [C] *BCU
Specifies the maximum possible toner supply, expressed as a percentage of the
maximum amount of toner that can possibly be supplied for a sheet of paper.
If too much toner is supplied to the development unit especially for black or in the low
humidity condition, this may cause dirty background due to insufficient agitation. This
SP mode limits the maximum possible toner supply for black and only in the low
humidity condition for color.
NOTE: The main switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.
2208 9 Upper Limit *BCU [0 to 100 / 63 / 1 %/step] DFU
#
Adjusts the toner supply amount (fixed rate) when making multiple prints of pages
with low image ratio (coverage).
When printing with a low image ratio, toner concentration is controlled only with Vt
outputs since pixel count is not done for low image ratios. This may cause the
attraction force between toner and carrier to increase, resulting in low image density
on outputs. To prevent this, the machine counts the number of pixels and supplies a
fixed amount of toner if the accumulated number of pixels becomes greater than the
specified level.
2208 10 Low Coverage [K] *BCU [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 %/step] DFU
2208 11 Low Coverage[Y]
2208 12 LowCoverage[M]
2208 13 LowCoverage[C]
Specifies each constant to adjust the toner supply amount. The optimum value is
specified before shipment.
2208 14 Vt Coeff[Bk] *BCU [0 to 2.0 / 0.3 / 0.01%/step] DFU
2208 15 Vt Coeff[Y] [0 to 2.0 / 0.28 / 0.01%/step] DFU
2208 16 Vt Coeff[M] [0 to 2.0 / 0.25 / 0.01%/step] DFU
2208 17 Vt Coeff[C]
Specifies each constant to adjust the toner supply amount. The optimum value is
specified before shipment.
2208 18 Img Coeff[Bk] *BCU [0 to 2.0 / 0.45 / 0.01%/step] DFU
2208 19 Img Coeff[Y]
2208 20 Img Coeff[M]
2208 21 Img Coeff[C]
Specifies each constant to adjust the toner supply amount. The optimum value is
specified before shipment.
2208 22 ImgCrctCoef[Bk] *BCU [0 to 2.0 / 0.1 / 0.01%/step] DFU
2208 23 ImgCrctCoef[Y]
2208 24 ImgCrctCoef[M]
2208 25 ImgCrctCoef[C]

B202/B178/B180 5-26 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

2210 [Toner Supply Counter] Toner Supply Counter ([Color])


Displays the total time that the toner supply clutch has been on.
This data is stored in the memory chip on each toner cartridge.
2210 5 [K] *BCU [0 to 5000 / 0 / 1 second/step]
2210 6 [Y] *BCU
2210 7 [M] *BCU
2210 8 [C] *BCU

2212 [Toner Near/End] Toner Near End / End Detection Threshold ([Color])
When the amount of toner amount left in the cartridge becomes less than this value,
the machine starts monitoring the Vt values for toner near end detection.
2212 1 Start [K] *BCU [0 to 1000 / 100 / 10 g/step]
2212 2 Start [YMC] *BCU
Specifies the threshold for toner near-end detection.
The machine detects toner near-end when the following happens 10 times
consecutively.
Vt > Vref + Threshold
2212 5 Near [K] *BCU [0 to 5.0 / 0.4 / 0.1 V/step]
2212 6 Near [YMC] *BCU
Specifies the threshold for toner end detection.
The machine detects toner end when the following happens 10 times consecutively.
Then, the machine stops printing, even during a print job.
Vt > Vref + Threshold
2212 7 End [K] *BCU [0 to 5.0 / 0.5 / 0.1 V/step]
2212 8 End [YMC] *BCU
Specifies the number of sheets with full image coverage that can be printed after
toner near-end has been detected.
When near-end is detected, the pixels in the images are counted. The machine
detects toner end when the following happens, and the machine stops printing even
during a print job.
Pixel count = 5 A4/LT sheets with full image coverage

Service
Tables
NOTE: The setting of SP2-212-11 has priority for deciding when to stop printing.
2212 9 Pixel [K] *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
2212 10 Pixel [YMC] *BCU
Specifies the minimum number of sheets that can be printed after toner near-end has
been detected.
However, when the following happens 10 consecutive times, the machine stops
printing even during a print job or if this guaranteed minimum has not been met.
Vt > Current Vref value + 1.2V or Vt > 4.8V
2212 11 Min. Print *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
Displays the average signal value of the toner end sensor. Printed images can be
weak when the value is larger.
Each toner sensor detects the toner that is falling through the toner path beneath the
toner cartridge. Each sensor outputs “0” when it detects toner in the toner path, or
outputs “1” when it does not detect toner. The signal is “1” if toner is not passing
through the path even though the toner cartridge contains toner. These signals, “0”
and “1”, are periodically checked and used to calculate the signal average. When
enough toner is in the cartridge, the signal average is a smaller value (“0” or its
vicinity). When toner is insufficient, the average is a larger value (“1” or its vicinity).
2212 12 sensor avg [K] *BCU [0 to 1 / 0 / 0.01/step]
2212 13 sensor avg [Y]
2212 14 sensor avg [M]
2212 15 sensor avg [C]

SM 5-27 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

2213 [Toner End ON/OFF] Toner End Detection ON/OFF


Enables or disables toner near-end and end detection (if disabled, the toner supply
clutch on time is still counted).
Use this SP only when tests are necessary under the toner end or toner near end
condition. Specify the default value after the tests.
NOTE: The main switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.
2213 1 T End ON/OFF *BCU [0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step] Alphanumeric, DFU
# 0: Both sensors disabled
1: Both sensors enabled
2: Toner end sensor disabled and TD sensor
enabled

2223 [TD Vcnt Control] TD Sensor Vcnt Control


2223 1 Initialization *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric, DFU
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the Vcnt Auto Adjustment when detecting a new development
unit.
When the machine detects a new development unit, developer initialization
automatically starts. During the developer initialization, Vcnt is automatically adjusted
so that Vt is within 3.0 ± 0.1V.
2223 2 Humidity *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the Humidity Auto Correction. This corrects the Vcnt value for the
current humidity. This correction is applied to both the Vcnt values automatically
adjusted during developer initialization and manually adjusted with SP2-224-1 to 4.
If this correction does not work well under certain environmental conditions or due to
a defective humidity sensor, deactivate the Humidity Auto Correction and adjust the
Vcnt value in SP2-224-1 to 4 (by trial and error).
2223 3 Toner Fill Up *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric, DFU
0: Deactivate
1: Activate
Activates or deactivates the Toner Fill Up mode, which fills up the toner supply tube
with toner during developer initialization.
This function is required only at machine installation. Although the default is “0”, the
factory setting is “1”. After toner fill-up occurs during machine installation, the setting
is changed to “0” automatically.

B202/B178/B180 5-28 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

2224 [Vcnt / Vref] Vcnt / Vref ([Color])


Adjusts the Vcnt value manually.
The value in this SP mode is effective until after the next process control self-check.
To always use this value for some reason, select proportional control supply mode
with SP2-208-1 to 4.
NOTE: The main switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.
2224 1 Vcnt [K] *BCU [8 to 22.0 / 13.5 / 0.1 V/step] FA
2224 2 Vcnt [Y] #
2224 3 Vcnt [M]
2224 4 Vcnt [C]
Adjusts the Vref value manually.
The value in this SP mode is effective until the next process control self-check. To
always use this value for some reason, select proportional control supply mode with
SP2-208-1 to 4.
2224 5 Vref [K] *BCU [0 to 5.0 / 2.8 / 0.1 V/step]
2224 6 Vref [Y] *BCU
2224 7 Vref [M] *BCU
2224 8 Vref [C] *BCU

2301 [Transfer Current]


([Color Mode, Color], Paper Tray or By-pass, Simplex or Duplex, Process Speed)
Paper Type -> TH: Thick Paper, MTH: Middle Thick Paper, SP: Special Paper, OHP
Adjusts the transfer current for each color and each print mode.
NOTE: If the transfer current is increased too much, image offset may occur
especially in halftone areas.
2301 1 [K]P S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 15, C2b: 20 / 1 μA/step]
2301 2 [K]P S H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 20, C2b: 26 / 1 μA/step]
2301 3 [K]P D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]

Service
Tables
2301 4 [K]P D H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 21, C2b: 27 / 1 μA/step]
2301 6 [K]B S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 15, C2b: 20 / 1 μA/step]
2301 7 [K]B S H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 20, C2b: 26 / 1 μA/step]
2301 8 [FC,K]P S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 9 [FC, K]P S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 10 [FC,Y]P S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 11 [FC,Y]P S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 12 [FC,M]P S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 13 [FC,M]P S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 14 [FC,C]P S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 15 [FC,C]P S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 16 [FC,K]P D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 17 [FC,K]P D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 14, C2b: 18 / 1 μA/step]
2301 18 [FC,Y]P D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 19 [FC,Y]P D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 μA/step]
2301 20 [FC,M]P D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 21 [FC,M]P D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 μA/step]
2301 22 [FC,C]P D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 23 [FC,C]P D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 μA/step]
2301 24 [FC,K]B S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 25 [FC,K]B S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 26 [FC,Y]B S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 27 [FC,Y]B S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]

SM 5-29 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

2301 [Transfer Current]


([Color Mode, Color], Paper Tray or By-pass, Simplex or Duplex, Process Speed)
Paper Type -> TH: Thick Paper, MTH: Middle Thick Paper, SP: Special Paper, OHP
2301 28 [FC,M]B S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 29 [FC,M]B S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 30 [FC,C]B S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 31 [FC,C]B S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 32 [K]OHP L *BCU [0 to 50 / 7 / 1 μA/step]
2301 33 [FC,K]OHP L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 34 [FC,Y]OHP L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 35 [FC,M]OHP L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 36 [FC,C]OHP L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 37 [K]TH R L *BCU [0 to 50 / 7 / 1 μA/step]
2301 38 [FC,K]TH R L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 39 [FC,Y]TH R L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 40 [FC,M]TH R L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 41 [FC,C]TH R L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 43 [K]SP S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 15, C2b: 20 / 1 μA/step]
2301 44 [K]SP S H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 20, C2b: 26 / 1 μA/step]
2301 45 [FC,K]SP S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 46 [FC,Y]SP S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 47 [FC,M]SP L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 48 [FC,C]SP L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 49 [FC,K]SP M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 50 [FC,Y]SP M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 51 [FC,M]SP M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 52 [FC,C]SP M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 57 [K]TH S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 7 / 1 μA/step]
2301 58 [FC,K]TH S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 59 [FC,Y]TH S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 60 [FC,M]TH S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 61 [FC,C]TH S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 63 [K]SP D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 64 [K]SP D H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 21, C2b: 27 / 1 μA/step]
2301 65 [FC,K]SP D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 66 [FC,Y]SP D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 67 [FC,M]SP D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 68 [FC,C]SP D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 69 [FC,K]SP D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 14, C2b: 18 / 1 μA/step]
2301 70 [FC,Y]SP D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 μA/step]
2301 71 [FC,M]SP D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 μA/step]
2301 72 [FC,C]SP D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 μA/step]
2301 80 [K]MTH M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 15, C2b: 20 / 1 μA/step]
2301 81 [K]MTH H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 20, C2b: 26 / 1 μA/step]
2301 82 [FC,K]MTH L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 83 [FC,Y]MTH L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 84 [FC,M]MTH L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 85 [FC,C]MTH L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 86 [FC,K]MTH M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 87 [FC,Y]MTH M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 88 [FC,M]MTH M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 89 [FC,C]MTH M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 90 [K]MTH D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]

B202/B178/B180 5-30 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

2301 [Transfer Current]


([Color Mode, Color], Paper Tray or By-pass, Simplex or Duplex, Process Speed)
Paper Type -> TH: Thick Paper, MTH: Middle Thick Paper, SP: Special Paper, OHP
2301 91 [K]MTH D H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 21, C2b: 27 / 1 μA/step]
2301 92 [FC,K]MTH D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 93 [FC,Y]MTH D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 94 [FC,M]MTH D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 95 [FC,C]MTH D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 96 [FC,K]MTH D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 14, C2b: 18 / 1 μA/step]
2301 97 [FC,Y]MTH D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 μA/step]
2301 98 [FC,M]MTH D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 μA/step]
2301 99 [FC,C]MTH D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 μA/step]

2309 [Current Paper Size] Transfer Current - Paper Size Correction


Paper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick, MTH: Middle Thick, OHP
Corrects the transfer current for paper size.
When small paper is used for printing, the transfer current flows to the drum at the
non-image areas where the transfer belt touches the OPC drum. This may cause an
abnormal image due to insufficient current at the image areas.
NOTE: Increase only when an abnormal image (insufficient image transfer) occurs on
a small paper size. However, increasing the current too much may cause
image offset.
2309 5 N LT SEF *BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.1 / 0.1/step]
2309 6 N A5 SEF *BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1/step]
2309 7 TH LT SEF *BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1/step]
2309 8 TH A5 SEF *BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1/step]
2309 9 OHP LT SEF *BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.4 / 0.1/step]
2309 10 MTH LT SEF *BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.1 / 0.1/step]
2309 11 MTH A5 SEF *BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1/step]

Service
Tables
[Transfer Cur.] Transfer Current - Environment Correction
2310 Applies the transfer current correction if the humidity exceeds the current set
value.
2301 1 H Humidity *BCU [25 to 90 / 55 / 5%/step]

2402 [Transfer Ctrl] Transfer Control


2402 1 C Mode Posit *BCU [0 to 500 / 170 / 10/step] DFU
Adjusts the transfer belt position for color printing.
SP2-402-1 is valid only when auto correct (SP2-402-2) is disabled (- 6.11.5).
2402 2 Auto Correct *BCU [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step] DFU
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enable or disable the auto-adjustment of the transfer belt position.
• When SP2-402-2 is enabled, the transfer belt position for color printing is decided in
accordance with the result of the initialization processing (- 6.11.5).
• SP2-402-2 validates the setting of SP2-402-1, but does not affect the setting of
SP2-402-3.
2402 3 Bk Mode Posit *BCU [0 to 500 / 130 / 10/step] DFU
Adjusts the transfer belt position for monochrome printing.
SP2-402-3 is always valid regardless of the setting in SP2-402-2.

SM 5-31 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

2801 [PA Roller Current] Paper Attraction Roller Current


([Color], Simplex or Duplex/ Reverse, Process Speed): Current Adjustment
(Paper or By-pass): Paper Size Correction
Paper Type -> TH: Thick Paper, MTH: Middle Thick Paper, SP: Special Paper, OHP
Adjusts the paper attraction roller current for color printing.
If paper misfeeds occur at the transfer unit in color mode, check and/or adjust the
paper attraction roller current.
NOTE: The magenta development section is close to the paper attraction roller.
Decreasing the current may not cause paper misfeed.
If the current is increased too much, the following image problems may occur
depending on the humidity.
High humidity:
Insufficient image transfer in magenta due to current flow to the magenta OPC drum
Low humidity:
Offset image in magenta halftone areas due to paper charged positive too much
When adjusting the current with this SP mode, the value should be lower than transfer
current.
2801 1 [K] S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 5, C2b 8 / 1 μA/step]
2801 2 [K] S H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b 12 / 1 μA/step]
2801 3 [K] R M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 5, C2b 8 / 1 μA/step]
2801 4 [K] R H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b 12 / 1 μA/step]
2801 6 [FC] S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 μA/step]
2801 7 [FC] S M *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 μA/step]
2801 8 [FC] D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 μA/step]
2801 9 [FC] D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b 10 / 1 μA/step]
2801 14 [K] B TH S *BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 μA/step]
2801 15 [FC] B TH S *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 μA/step]
2801 16 [K] B OHP *BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 μA/step]
2801 17 [FC] B OHP *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 μA/step]
2801 18 [K] B TH D *BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 μA/step]
2801 19 [FC] B TH D *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 μA/step]
2801 20 [K] SP S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 5, C2b: 8 / 1 μA/step]
2801 21 [K] SP S H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b: 12 / 1 μA/step]
2801 22 [K] SP R M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 5, C2b: 8 / 1 μA/step]
2801 23 [K] SP R H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b: 12 / 1 μA/step]
2801 24 [FC] SP S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 μA/step]
2801 25 [FC] SP S M *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 μA/step]
2801 26 [FC] SP R L *BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 μA/step]
2801 27 [FC] SP R M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b: 10 / 1 μA/step]
2801 30 [K] MTH M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 5, C2b: 8 / 1 μA/step]
2801 31 [K] MTH H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b: 12 / 1 μA/step]
2801 32 [K] MTH D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 5, C2b: 8 / 1 μA/step]
2801 33 [K] MTH D H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b: 12 / 1 μA/step]
2801 34 [FC] MTH L *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 μA/step]
2801 35 [FC] MTH M *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 μA/step]
2801 36 [FC] MTH D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 μA/step]
2801 37 [FC] MTH D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b: 10 / 1 μA/step]

B202/B178/B180 5-32 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

2802 [PA Current Paper Size] Paper Attraction Roller Current - Paper Size Correction
Paper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick, MTH: Middle Thick, OHP
Adjusts the correction, depending on the paper size.
When small-width paper is used for printing, the paper attraction roller current flows to
the non-image areas of OPC drum where the transfer belt touches the drum. This
may cause paper misfeed due to insufficient current.
To increase the current by 1.5 times, set the SP mode to “1.5.”
NOTE: Adjust only when a paper misfeed occurs with a small paper size. Increasing
the current too much may cause image offset in magenta halftone areas.
2802 1 N LT SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step]
2802 2 N A5 SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step]
2802 3 TH LT SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step]
2802 4 TH A5 SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step]
2802 5 OHP LT SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 2.4 / 0.1/step]
2802 7 MTH LT SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step]
2802 8 MTH A5 SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step]

2908 [Mirror Motor] Mirror Positioning Motor ([Color])


Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects the
mirror position, which corrects the optically skewed image; however, this will be
automatically corrected at the next line position adjustment.
NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can be
adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case,
the line position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.
2908 2 [C] *BCU [–128 to 127 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] DFU
2908 3 [M] *BCU
2908 4 [Y] *BCU

Service
Tables
2909 [Main-scan Reg.] Main-scan Registration ([Color])
Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects the
main scan registration; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next line
position adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-993-010
to 012 (this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be effective from the
next line position adjustment.
NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can be
adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case,
the line position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.
1 dot = 20μ
2909 1 [Y] DOT *BCU [-500 to 500 / 0 / 1 dot/step] DFU
2909 2 [M] DOT *BCU
2909 3 [C] DOT *BCU
2909 4 [K] DOT *BCU
2909 9 [Y] 1/16 DOT *BCU [–15 to 15 / 0 / 1/16dot/step] DFU
2909 10 [M] 1/16 DOT *BCU
2909 11 [C] 1/16 DOT *BCU
2909 12 [K] 1/16 DOT *BCU

SM 5-33 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

2916 [Sub-scan Reg.] Sub-scan Registration ([Color Mode, Color], Resolution)


Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects the sub
scan registration; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next line position
adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-993-016 to 021
(this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be effective from the next
line position adjustment.
NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can be
adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case,
the line position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.
600 dpi: 1 dot = 40μ, 1200dpi: 1 dot = 20μ
2916 1 [K] 1200 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 7510 / 1 dot] DFU
2916 2 [FC, K] 1200 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 15038 / 1 dot] DFU
2916 3 [FC,Y] 1200 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 10402 / 1 dot] DFU
2916 4 [FC,M] 1200 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 1136 / 1 dot] DFU
2916 5 [FC,C] 1200 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 5762 / 1 dot] DFU
2916 6 [K] 600 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 3755 / 1 dot] DFU
2916 7 [FC,K] 600 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 7519 / 1 dot] DFU
2916 8 [FC,Y] 600 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 5201 / 1 dot] DFU
2916 9 [FC,M] 600 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 568 / 1 dot] DFU
2916 10 [FC,C] 600 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 2881 / 1 dot] DFU

2919 [MScan Lgth Det] Main-scan Length Detection


Enables or disables the main-scan length detection.
2919 1 OFF/ON *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric
0: Disable, 1: Enable
2919 2 Interrupt time 1 *BCU [0 to 999 / 1 / 1 second/step]
Non interrupt during a job (default on)
2919 3 Interrupt time 2 *BCU [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 second/step]
Interrupt during a job (default on)

[LD Pulse]
2920 Enables or disables the LD pulse area correction (SP2-150).
When the "0" is selected, the setting values of the SP2-150 become 0.
NOTE: Set the "Disable" after replacing the laser optics-housing unit.
2920 1 OFF/ON *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Disable, 1: Enable

2994 [Main Scan Reg Cor] Main-scan Registration Correction ([Color])


Not used. DFU
2994 1 [Y] *BCU [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step] DFU
2994 2 [M] *BCU [-128 to 127 / 1 / 1 dot/step] DFU
2994 3 [C] *BCU [-128 to 127 / 1 / 1 dot/step] DFU
2994 4 [K] *BCU [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step] DFU

B202/B178/B180 5-34 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

2995 [Motor Reset] Mirror Positioning Motor Reset


Rotates the mirror position motors (CMY) by 250 pulses clockwise; then by 125
pulses counterclockwise. This moves the mirrors back to the initial position. Then, the
settings of SP2-908-002 to 004 are reset to 0.
When the line position adjustment fails, it is one of possible causes when the mirror
position motor locks. Performing this SP mode can move the mirrors back to the
original position if it locks. Then, do the forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-
002).
2995 1 Motor Reset *BCU

SP3-XXX (Process)
3005 [TD Initial] TD Sensor Initialization ([Color])
3005 1 [K] Initializes the developer. DFU
3005 2 [Y]
3005 3 [M]
3005 4 [C]
3005 5 [All Color]
3005 6 Result *BCU [1 to 9 / - / -]
1: Success
2 to 9: Failure
Displays the developer initialization result.
All colors are displayed. Values are displayed in the order K Y C M.
e.g., 1 1 2 1: Initialization of Cyan failed but the others succeeded - 4.1.1.

3006 [TD Initial] TDt Initial Setting Display ([Color])

3006 1 Vcnt Display [K] *BCU Displays the initial Vcnt value.
3006 2 Vcnt Display [Y] *BCU [0 to 24.0 / - / 0.1 V/step]

Service
Tables
3006 3 Vcnt Display [M] *BCU
3006 4 Vcnt Display [C] *BCU
3006 5 Target [Bk] *BCU Adjusts the target Vcnt for the initial setting.
3006 6 Target [Y] *BCU [0 to 5.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 V/step]
3006 7 Target [M] *BCU
3006 8 Target [C] *BCU

3007 [TD Vcnt] TD sensor Current Vcnt Value ([Color])


Displays the current Vcnt value.
3007 1 Vcnt Current: K *BCU [0 to 24.0 / - / 0.1 V/step]
3007 2 Vcnt Current: Y *BCU
3007 3 Vcnt Current: M *BCU
3007 4 Vcnt Current: C *BCU
3007 5 Vcnt Mode Select *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables or disables the Vcnt correction.
3007 6 Vcnt Max *BCU [0 to 4 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]
Adjusts the maximum Vcnt at developer initialization
3007 7 Vcnt Min *BCU [0 to 4 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]
Adjusts the minimum Vcnt at developer initialization
3007 8 Vcnt SelfChk Max *BCU [0 to 5.4 / 5.4 / 0.1 V/step]
Adjusts the maximum Vcnt at process control self check
3007 9 Vcnt SelfChk Min *BCU [0 to 5.4 / 5.4 / 0.1 V/step]
Adjusts the minimum Vcnt at process control self check

SM 5-35 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

3008 [Humidity]
3008 1 Humidity [0 to 100 / - / 1%/step]
Displays the humidity measured by the humidity/temperature sensor.
3008 2 Temp 1 [0 to 100 / - / 1%/step]
Shows the temperature measured
by thermistor 2 on the laser optics
unit.
3008 3 Temp 2
Shows the temperature measured
by thermistor 1 on the laser optics
unit

3107 [Vsg Display] Vsg Display (Front or Rear)


3107 1 Vsg Front *BCU [0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step]
Displays the Vsg value of the front ID sensor.
Vsg is normally 4.0 ± 0.5 V.
If Vsg is out of the adjustment range and this is detected 3 times consecutively, it
leads to SC385.
3107 2 LED Current Front *BCU [0 to 1023 / - / 1]
Displays the ID sensor LED current adjusted during Vsg adjustment.
3107 3 Vsg Center *BCU [0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step]
Displays the Vsg value of the center ID sensor.
Vsg is normally 4.0 ± 0.5 V.
If Vsg is out of the adjustment range and this is detected 3 times consecutively, it
leads to SC385.
3107 4 LED Current Center *BCU [0 to 1025 / - / 1]
Displays the ID sensor LED current adjusted during Vsg adjustment.
3107 5 Vsg Rear *BCU [0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step]
Displays the Vsg value of the rear ID sensor.
Vsg is normally 4.0 ± 0.5 V.
If Vsg is out of the adjustment range and this is detected 3 times consecutively, it
leads to SC385.
3107 6 LED Current Rear *BCU [0 to 1025 / - / 1]
Displays the ID sensor LED current adjusted during Vsg adjustment.
3107 7 Vsg avg bk *BCU [0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step]
Displays the average black Vsg value of the center ID sensor.

B202/B178/B180 5-36 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

3120 [Dev. Gamma Target] Development Gamma Target ([Color])


Adjusts the development gamma by changing the Vref value used for toner density
control.
Vref is automatically corrected so that the gamma measured during the process
control self-check becomes “the value set with this SP mode ± 0.15”
3120 1 Set [K] *BCU [0.50 to 1.00 / 0.70 / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV / step]
3120 2 Set [Y] *BCU DFU
3120 3 Set [M] *BCU
3120 4 Set [C] *BCU
3120 5 Display [K] *BCU [0.50 to 3.00 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV / step]
3120 6 Display [Y] *BCU
3120 7 Display [M] *BCU
3120 8 Display [C] *BCU
3120 9 Mode Select *BCU [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Non
1: Humidity
2: Dev. Rotation
3: All

3121 [Dev. Gamma Display] Development Gamma Display ([Color])


Displays the development gamma measured during the process control self-check.
3121 1 [K] *BCU [0.00 to 10.00 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV /step]
3121 2 [Y] *BCU Normal Range: 1.00 to 2.00
3121 3 [M] *BCU
3121 4 [C] *BCU

3122 [Vk Display] Vk Display ([Color])

Service
Tables
Displays the current Vk value.
3122 1 [K] *BCU [-255 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]
3122 2 [Y] *BCU Normal Range: -50 to 50
3122 3 [M] *BCU
3122 4 [C] *BCU

3123 [Vref Display] Current Vref Display ([Color])


Displays the current Vref value.
3123 1 [K] *BCU [0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step]
3123 2 [Y] *BCU
3123 3 [M] *BCU
3123 4 [C] *BCU

3125 [Process Control]


3125 1 ON/OFF *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: OFF (Use the fixed values for VD, VL and
VB set with SP2-001, SP2-103, and SP2-
201.)
1: ON
Enables or disables process control.

SM 5-37 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

3125 [Process Control]


3125 2 LD Control *BCU [0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: Fixed (at the value in SP2-103)
1: Process Control
2: LD Power
Selects the LD control mode.
3125 3 Auto TD Adj. *BCU [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: Disable
1: Initial
2: Job end
3: Initial & Job end
Specifies when to perform the Auto Toner Density Adjustment. When performing the
Auto Toner Density Adjustment, the machine supplies or consumes toner so that the
development gamma is within ± 0.15 of the gamma target.
Change if the customer complains of toner density fluctuations. Before changing the
setting away from 0, check whether the forced TD adjustment (3-126-2) is effective. If
the problem is persistent, then change to 1, 2, or 3. However, the machine takes
several minutes to do this adjustment.
3125 4 ACC *BCU [0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
0: Disable
1: Process Control Self-check
2: Auto TD Adjustment & Process Control Self-
check
Enables or disables the process control self-check before printing the ACC pattern.
NOTE: If color balance changes during multi-copy runs after ACC is performed, select
1 or 2. Setting 2 can precisely adjust the image density; however, it takes
about 6 minutes. Select 1 or 2 depending on the customer’s requirement.
3125 5 TD Adj. Cndtn *BCU [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: No
1: Yes
Specifies whether temperature and humidity are taken into account when deciding the
timing of the auto toner density adjustment (described in SP 3-125-3).
Timing for the auto toner density adjustment is determined by the setting of SP3-125-
003. In addition, if SP 3-125-5 is set to 1, the auto toner density adjustment is done
when the temperature and humidity meet specified conditions (same conditions as
used for transfer current correction).
Specify “1” when both temperature and humidity are both high or both
low.
3125 6 TD Adj. Times *BCU [1 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]
Limits the number of auto toner density adjustments.
The auto toner density adjustment consists of three steps: detecting the development
gamma, supplying or consuming toner, and detecting the development gamma again.
When these three steps are all complete, it means a single auto toner density
adjustment is complete.
3125 7 Temperature [0 to 200 / 60 / 1°C /step]
Fusing temperature threshold for process control execution when the main switch is
turned on.
3125 8 Pic Vb Max [600 to 800 / 680 / 10 V /step]
Adjusts the development bias upper limit.
3125 9 Pic Vb Min [200 to 400 / 300 / 10 V /step]
Adjusts the development bias lower limit.

B202/B178/B180 5-38 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

3126 [Forced Self Check] Forced Self-check


3126 1 Forced Self Check Performs a forced process control self-check.
3126 2 Forced TD Adj. Performs a forced auto toner density
adjustment.

3902 [Pointer Display] Pointer Table Display ([Color])


Displays the number in the pointer table that was selected during the latest process
control self-check.
3902 1 Printer [K] *BCU [1 to 40 / - / 1/step]
3902 2 Printer [Y] *BCU
3902 3 Printer [M] *BCU
3902 4 Printer [C] *BCU
3902 5 CF [K] *BCU
3902 6 CF [Y] *BCU
3902 7 CF [M] *BCU
3902 8 CF [C] *BCU

3903 [M/A Target] M/A Target ([Color])


Adjusts the M/A (Mass per Area, mg/cm2) value used during the process control self-
check.
Adjusting this changes the development bias. This causes the solid ID to increase or
decrease. If developer capability causes an ID problem, toner density needs to be
adjusted with SP3-120-1 to 4, depending on the color.
3903 1 Printer [K] *BCU [0 to 1.50 / 0.40 / 0.05 mg/cm2 /step] DFU
3903 2 Printer [Y] *BCU
3903 3 Printer [M] *BCU
3903 4 Printer [C] *BCU
3903 5 CF [K] *BCU

Service
Tables
3903 6 CF [Y] *BCU
3903 7 CF [M] *BCU
3903 8 CF [C] *BCU

3904 [M/A for LD] M/A Target for LD Correction ([Color])


Adjusts the M/A value used during the LD correction mode. This value is effective
when SP3-125-2 “LD Control Selection” is set to “2”.
Adjusting this data effects the image reproduction especially in highlight areas.
3904 1 Printer [K] *BCU [0 to 1.00 / 0.12 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU
3904 2 Printer [Y] *BCU
3904 3 Printer [M] *BCU
3904 4 Printer [C] *BCU
3904 5 CF [K] *BCU [0 to 1.00 / 0.14 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU
3904 6 CF [Y] *BCU
3904 7 CF [M] *BCU
3904 8 CF [C] *BCU

SM 5-39 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

3905 [Intrvl Procon] M/A Target for Paper Interval Process Control
Adjusts the target amount of each toner on paper sheets.
These values are optimized before shipment. Do not change the values. Changing
these values does not affect toner density on paper sheets.
3905 1 Intrvl [K] *BCU [0 to 1.50 / 0.25 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU
3905 2 Intrvl [Y] *BCU
3905 3 Intrvl [M] *BCU
3905 4 Intrvl [C] *BCU
Displays the amount of each toner on the paper.
A problem may have occurred in the copier engine if the value is high or low (i.e., if
the difference between SP3-905-1/2/3/4 and SP3-5/6/7/8 is larger than ±0.03
mg/cm2).
Possible problems: Defective TD sensor, defective ID sensor, toner near-end (if the
value is lower than the target), defective toner supply mechanism
3905 5 Intrvl [K] *BCU [0 to 1.500 / - / 0.001 mg/cm2 /step]
3905 6 Intrvl [Y] *BCU
3905 7 Intrvl [M] *BCU
3905 8 Intrvl [C] *BCU
3905 9 Gamma Correct [K] *BCU [–0.50 to 0.50 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU
3905 10 Gamma Correct [Y] *BCU
3905 11 Gamma Correct [M] *BCU
3905 12 Gamma Correct [C] *BCU

3906 [PC Self Check] Process Control Self-checks


3906 1 Job End *BCU [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 print/step]
Specifies the execution timing of the job end process control self-check.
The job end process control self-check is automatically done after a job is completed
when 200 prints have been made since the last self-check.
The counter for the job end process control self-check resets when one of the
following process control self-checks is done.
• Initial
• Interval: Interrupt
• Non-use Time
• During Toner End
When K prints are made, the number of prints is calculated with the K coefficient in
SP3-906-5.
3906 2 Interrupt *BCU [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 print /step]
Specifies the execution timing of the interrupt process control self-check.
The interrupt process control self-check is automatically done if the number of prints
in the job exceeds the number set in this SP mode. When the print job is completed,
the counter is reset, even if the interrupt self check did not occur.
When K prints are made, the number of prints is calculated with the K coefficient in
SP3-906-5.
3906 3 Non-use Time 1 *BCU [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 print/step]
0: Disable
Specifies the executing timing of the non-use time process control self-check.
The non-use time process control self-check is automatically done after the number of
prints set with this SP mode have been made and no prints have been made for the
time set with SP mode 3-906-4 since the last print job.
If the conditions are met, the self-check will be done after the print job is completed.
The counter is reset when the initial process control self-checks is done or when a
print is made.

B202/B178/B180 5-40 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

3906 [PC Self Check] Process Control Self-checks


3906 4 Non-use Time 2 *BCU [0 to 2550 / 480 / 10 minutes/step]
0: Disable
Specifies the executing timing of the non-use time process control self-check.

3906 5 K Coefficient *BCU [0 to 1.00 / 1.00 / 0.01 /step] DFU


Sets the coefficient to calculate the counter value for black-and-white prints.
With the default setting (100), counters used for process control count up by 1 when 1
black-and-white print has been made.

3910 [Vmin Display] Vmin Display ([Color])


3910 1 [K] *BCU [0 to 2.00 / 0 / 0.01 /step]
Displays the current Vmin value for K
3910 2 [Color] *BCU [0 to 2.00 / 0 / 0.01 /step]
Displays the lowest current Vmin value for the colors (CMY).

3911 [Vt Current Display] Vt Current Display ([Color])


Displays the current Vt value.
3911 1 [K] *BCU [0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.01 V/step]
3911 2 [Y] *BCU
3911 3 [M] *BCU
3911 4 [C] *BCU

3912 [Vt Average Display] Vt Average Display ([Color])


Displays the average Vt value.
3912 1 [K] *BCU [0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.01 V/step]

Service
Tables
3912 2 [Y] *BCU
3912 3 [M] *BCU
3912 4 [C] *BCU

3913 [Toner Supply Time] Toner Supply Time Display ([Color])


Displays the toner supply clutch on time for the most recent page.
3913 1 [K] *BCU [0 to 5000 / - / 1 ms/step]
3913 2 [Y] *BCU
3913 3 [M] *BCU
3913 4 [C] *BCU

SM 5-41 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

3920 [OPC Refresh]


3920 1 Temperature *BCU [10 to 30 / 25 / 1°C /step]
This SP determines the temperature threshold for determining whether refresh mode
is done just after the machine is switched on.
The charge roller generates NOx (nitrogen oxides), and these contaminate the OPC
drum surface and may cause a smeared image.
Just after the main switch is turned on, if the temperature measured by both the
thermistor located at the right side on the laser optics housing unit and the
temperature/humidity sensor is greater than the temperature specified in this SP
mode, refresh mode is done before initial process control.
During refresh mode, toner is developed on the OPC with 50V development potential
and cleaned to remove NOx. This cycle is repeated a few times.
3920 2 Humidity *BCU [10 to 90 / 75 / 1%/step]
This SP determines the humidity threshold for determining whether refresh mode is
done just after the machine is switched on.
Just after the main switch is turned on, if the humidity measured by the
temperature/humidity sensor is greater than the humidity specified in this SP mode,
refresh mode is done before the initial process control self-check.
3920 3 Prints *BCU [10 to 2550 / 200 / 10 prints/step]
Specifies how often refresh mode is done.
When the total number of prints since the last refresh mode exceeds the number
specified in this SP mode, refresh mode is done before the job end process control
self-check.
3920 4 Mode Set *BCU [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: Disabled
1: Mode 1 (Done at power on and toner end
recovery)
2: Mode 2 (Done at power on, toner end
recovery, and after the specified number of
prints.)
Enables/disables refresh mode.
NOTE: Refresh mode is done during the toner end recovery self-check after a new
toner cartridge is installed.
3920 5 Forced
Executes a forced refresh mode.
Use this mode when the image is smeared. It takes about 1 minute.
Also, use after replacing the components of the transfer unit (see section 3).
3920 6 Auto Toner Refresh *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -]
(Auto Toner Refresh) 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Performs a toner refresh during the OPC refresh mode by changing the development
bias from 50V to 400V.
Enable this SP mode when dirty background and/or firefly spots appear intermittently
on prints with a low image area ratio.
While making prints with a low image area ratio, developer is agitated with less toner
supplied. This may cause the toner-carrier attraction force to increase or toner to
coagulate.
This sometimes causes firefly spots or dirty background when a large amount of toner
is supplied.
NOTE: When enabling this SP mode, the following SP modes should be changed.
SP3-906-001 Job End Process Control Self-check
200 (Default) -> 100
SP3-920-003 OPC Refresh Mode / Prints
200 (Default) -> 100

B202/B178/B180 5-42 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

3921 [Forced Toner Refresh] Forced Toner Refresh


Perform forced toner refresh mode.
When the developer has deteriorated or when prints are made in a very low humidity
condition, dirty background may appear continuously.
When this kind of dirty background appears, check whether the development gamma
is within the target (SP3-120 and 121). If the development gamma is not within the
target, do this SP mode.
The machine automatically does the toner refresh mode in the following sequence.
1. Consumes toner in the development unit without toner supply until toner end is
detected
2. Starts toner recovery mode.
3. Starts process control self-check.
NOTE: If toner is drastically consumed for a short time, this may cause carrier to flow
out. To prevent this, toner is consumed over a long period of time. (It takes
about 20 minutes to complete this toner refresh mode).
3921 1 [K]
3921 2 All Color

3922 [OPC Refresh2]


Specifies when the OPC refresh is executed for CMY drums, which forcibly creates a
temporary 15mm-wide toner line on the drum surface by applying the development
bias (200V) and turning on the development clutch at the end of a job.
Note that this OPC refresh is a separate process from the one controlled by SP 3-920
and 3-921.
3922 1 Mode Set *BCU [0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disable (OPC refresh is not executed.)
1: Low coverage (OPC refresh is executed
after an output of low coverage ratio.)
2: Every time (OPC refresh is executed after

Service
Tables
every job.)

[Trans P Pat] Line Pattern between transferred papers.


3923 Generates line patterns between sheets on the transfer belt during a print job to
prevent the transfer cleaning blade from rolling up.
3923 1 Temperature setting *BCU [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: No Line
1: Input HH
2: Input HH, MM
3: Input All
HH (high temperature, high humidity)
MM (middle temperature, middle humidity)
3923 2 Paper width *BCU [1 or 2 / 1 / -]
1: <= LT Lengthwise (LT lengthwise or less)
2: All
3923 3 Pat Interval *BCU [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
If this SP is set to ‘n’, line patterns are generated once per “(n +1)” x 4 intervals.

SM 5-43 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

[Thin out P Pat] Thin out Process Control Pattern


3924
Vref compensation is skipped during a print job.
3924 1 Pat Interval *BCU [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 /step]
If this SP is set to ‘n’, Vref compensation is skipped “n” times per “(n + 1)” times.

3924 2 Cndtn Interval *BCU [0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step]


0: LL condition
1: in LL, MM condition
2: in all condition
LL (low temperature, low humidity)

3975 [Process Control Result] Process Control Self-check Result


Displays the result of the latest process control self-check.
All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order “K Y C M”
e.g., 1 1 9 1: The self-check for Cyan failed but the others were successful
See the troubleshooting section for details
3975 1 Process Control Result *BCU [0 to 9999 / - / 1/step]

B202/B178/B180 5-44 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

SP4-XXX (Scanner)
4008 [SubScanMagnification] Sub-scan Magnification Adjustment
Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed.
4008 1 SubScanMagnification *CTL [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA

4010 [Sub Mag Reg.] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment


Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub-
scan direction.
4010 1 Leading Edge Reg. *CTL [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA

4011 [Main Scan Mag] Side-to-Side registration Adjustment


Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the scanning start timing in the main
scan direction.
4011 1 Side-to-Side Reg. *CTL [–2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA

4012 [Blank Margin] Blank Margin Adjustment


Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by the gap
between the original and the scale.
4012 1 Leading Edge *CTL [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA
4012 2 Trailing Edge
4012 3 Left
4012 4 Right

4013 [Scanner Free Run]

Service
Tables
Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following mode.
Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT
4013 1 Lamp: OFF
4013 2 Lamp: ON

4017 [Scan Operation]


Makes one scan with generating an F-Gate signal and shading on or off in the
following mode.
Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT
Uses this SP mode to check if the F-Gate signal is properly generated (F-Gate tells
the engine to start printing data).
4017 1 Shading ON
4017 2 Shading OFF

4020 [Dust Check]


4020 1 Dust detect: ON/OFF *CTL# Turns the ADF scan glass dust check on/ off.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
4020 2 Detect Level *CTL selects the detect level.
[0 to 8 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: lowest detection level
8: highest detection level

SM 5-45 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

4020 [Dust Check]


4020 3 Dust Reject: Lvl *CTL Selects the level of the sub scan line correction
when using the ARDF.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
1: Weakest
2: Weak
3: Strong
4: Strongest

4301 [APS Operation Check]


Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original sensors.
(See Input Check Table.)
4301 1 APS Operation Check

4303 [APS Min Size (A5/HLT/16K)]


Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors are all
OFF.
4303 1 APS A5size Check *CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / -]
(A5/HLT/16K) 0: out of detection
1: A5 LEF (EU) / SEF (NA)
2: A5 LEF (EU)/ LEF (NA)

4305 [8K/16K Detection] *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -]


0: A/B
1: 8K/16K
4305 1 This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K/16K size.

4417 [IPU Test Pattern]


Selects the IPU test pattern.
4417 1 IPU Test Pattern [0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Scanned image 13: Grid pattern CMYK
1: Gradation main scan A 14: Color patch CMYK
2: Gradation main scan B 15: Gray pattern (1)
3: Gradation main scan C 16: Gray pattern (2)
4: Gradation main scan D
17: Gradation Pattern (3)
5: Gradation sub scan (1)
18: Shading pattern
6: Grid pattern
7: Slant grid pattern 19: Thin line pattern
8: Gradation RGBCMYK 20: Scanned + Grid pattern
9: UCR pattern 21: Scanned + Gray scale
10: Color patch 16 (1) 22: Scanned + Color patch
11: Color patch 16 (2) 23: Scanned + Slant Grid C
12: Color patch 64 24: Scanned + Slant Grid D

B202/B178/B180 5-46 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

4440 [Saturation Adj.] Saturation Adjustment


Adjusts the level of saturation for copying.
4440 1 Saturation Adj. 1 *CTL [0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]
0: High
4440 2 Saturation Adj. 2 *CTL 1: Lowest
2: Lower
3: Default
4: Higher
5: Highest

4460 [Digital Black ADS Level]


Specifies the level of deleting the background in the ADS mode. You can adjust its
level for each scanning method (platen, ADF).
4460 1 Book/ADF *BCU [0 to 128 / 10 / 1 step]
4460 2 ADF *BCU [–127 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]

4540 [Printer V]
4540 1 R: Option *CTL Specifies the printer vector correction value.
4540 2 R: R [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4540 3 R: G
4540 4 R: B
4540 5 Y: Option
4540 6 Y: R
4540 7 Y: G
4540 8 Y: B
4540 9 G: Option
4540 10 G: R
4540 11 G: G

Service
Tables
4540 12 G: B
4540 13 C: Option
4540 14 C: R
4540 15 C: G
4540 16 C: B
4540 17 B: Option
4540 18 B: R
4540 19 B: G
4540 20 B: B
4540 21 M: Option
4540 22 M: R
4540 23 M: G
4540 24 M: B

SM 5-47 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

4550 [SApli: Txt Prt] Scanner Application: Text/Printing DFU


4550 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
Selects the MTF filter level for the B/W Text mode.
Select a higher number for a stronger filter
4550 6 Smooth: 0–7 *CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
Selects the smoothing level for the B/W Text mode.
A larger value could cause moiré to appear in the image.
4550 7 Brightness: 1–255 *CTL [1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Selects the brightness level for the B/W Text mode.
Level 255 is the brightest.
4550 8 Contrast: 1–255 *CTL [1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Selects the contrast level for B/W the Text mode.

4551 [SApli: Txt OCR 1] Scanner Application: Text OCR (except drop out color) DFU
4551 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
4551 6 Smooth: 0–7 *CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
4551 7 Brightness: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
4551 8 Contrast: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

4552 [SApli: Txt OCR 2] Scanner Application: Text OCR (drop out color) DFU
4552 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
4552 6 Smooth: 0–7 *CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
4552 7 Brightness: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
4552 8 Contrast: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

4553 [SApli: T/P] Scanner Application: Text/Photo DFU


4553 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
4553 6 Smooth: 0–7 *CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
4553 7 Brightness: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
4553 8 Contrast: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

4554 [SApli: Photo] Scanner Application: Photo DFU


4554 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
4554 6 Smooth: 0–7 *CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
4554 7 Brightness: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
4554 8 Contrast: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

B202/B178/B180 5-48 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

4555 [SApli: Gray] Scanner Application: Grayscale DFU


4555 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
4555 6 Smooth: 0–7 *CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
4555 7 Brightness: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
4555 8 Contrast: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

4558 [SApli: Col: T/P] Scanner Application: Color: Text/Photo DFU


4558 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
4558 6 Smooth: 0–7 *CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
4558 7 Brightness: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
4558 8 Contrast: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

4559 [SApli: Col: PPr] Scanner Application: Printing Paper/Photo DFU


4559 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
4559 6 Smooth: 0–7 *CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
4559 7 Brightness: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
4559 8 Contrast: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

4560 [SApli: sRGB: T/P] Scanner Application: sRGB: Text/Photo DFU


4560 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
4560 6 Smooth: 0–7 *CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]

Service
Tables
4560 7 Brightness: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
4560 8 Contrast: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

4561 [SApli: sRGB: Per] Scanner Application: sRGB: Printing Paper/Photo DFU
4561 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
4561 6 Smooth: 0–7 *CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
4561 7 Brightness: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
4561 8 Contrast: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

4562 [SApli: Auto Col] Scanner Application: Auto Color DFU


4562 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
4562 6 Smooth: 0–7 *CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
4562 7 Brightness: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
4562 8 Contrast: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

4600 [SBU Version Display]


4600 1 Displays the ID of the SBU.

SM 5-49 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

4623 [R Black Adjustment] Red CCD - Black Offset Level Display


4623 1 R EVEN Displays the black offset value for the even red
signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing
speed).
4623 2 R ODD Displays the black offset value for the odd red
signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing
speed).
4623 5 R BK EVEN Displays the black offset value for the even red
signal in the CCD circuit board (black and white
printing speed).
4623 6 R BK ODD Displays the black offset value for the odd red
signal in the CCD circuit board (black and white
printing speed).

4624 [G Black Adjustment] Green CCD - Black Offset Level Display


4624 1 G EVEN Displays the black offset value for the even
green signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
4624 2 G ODD Displays the black offset value for the odd
green signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
4624 5 G BK EVEN Displays the black offset value for the even
green signal in the CCD circuit board (black
and white printing speed).
4624 6 G BK ODD Displays the black offset value for the odd
green signal in the CCD circuit board (black
and white printing speed).

4625 [B Black Adjustment] Blue CCD - Black Offset Level Display


4625 1 B EVEN Displays the black offset value for the even
blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
4625 2 B ODD Displays the black offset value for the odd blue
signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing
speed).
4625 5 B BK EVEN Displays the black offset value for the even
blue signal in the CCD circuit board (black and
white printing speed).
4625 6 B BK ODD Displays the black offset value for the odd blue
signal in the CCD circuit board (black and white
printing speed).

4628 [R Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Red


Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
4628 1 R EVEN
4628 2 R ODD

4629 [G Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Green


4629 1 G EVEN Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the
4629 2 G ODD controller for Green.
4629 3 G BK EVEN
4629 4 G BK ODD

B202/B178/B180 5-50 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

4630 [B Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Blue


4630 1 B EVEN Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the
4630 2 B ODD controller for Blue.

4654 [R Black Adjustment: Prev] Red CCD - Black Adjustment Previous Value Display
4623 1 R EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for the
even red signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
4623 2 R ODD Displays the previous black offset value for the
odd red signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
4623 5 R BK EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for the
even red signal in the CCD circuit board (black
and white printing speed).
4623 6 R BK ODD Displays the previous black offset value for the
odd red signal in the CCD circuit board (black
and white printing speed).

4655 [G Black Adjustment: Prev] Green CCD - Black Adjustment Previous Value Display
4655 1 G EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for the
even green signal in the CCD circuit board
(color printing speed).
4655 2 G ODD Displays the previous black offset value for the
odd green signal in the CCD circuit board
(color printing speed).
4655 5 G BK EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for the
even green signal in the CCD circuit board
(black and white printing speed).

Service
Tables
4655 6 G BK ODD Displays the previous black offset value for the
odd green signal in the CCD circuit board
(black and white printing speed).

4656 [B Black Adjustment: Prev] Blue CCD - Black Adjustment Previous Value Display
4656 1 B EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for the
even blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
4656 2 B ODD Displays the previous black offset value for the
odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
4656 5 B BK EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for the
even blue signal in the CCD circuit board
(black and white printing speed).
4656 6 B BK ODD Displays the previous black offset value for the
odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board (black
and white printing speed).

4661 [R Gain Display (Prev)] Gain Adjustment Red (Previous Adjustment)


4661 1 R EVEN *BCU This program displays the previous result of
4661 2 R ODD SP4-628.

SM 5-51 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

4662 [G Gain Display (Prev)] Gain Adjustment Green (Previous Adjustment)


4661 1 G EVEN *BCU This program displays the previous result of
4661 2 G ODD SP4-629.

4663 [B Gain Display (Prev)] Gain Adjustment Blue (Previous Adjustment)


4661 1 B EVEN * This program displays the previous result of
4661 2 B ODD BCU SP4-630.

4688 [DF: Density Adj.] DF Density Adjustment


Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF.
Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is
different.
4688 1 DF: Density Adj. *BCU [83 to 100 / 87 / 1 %/ step]

4800 [DF: Density Correction]


Sets a coefficient to adjust the image density level when scanning an image with the
ARDF.
4800 1 R *CTL [–20 to 20 / 0 / 1/step] DFU
4800 2 G
4800 3 B

4885 [Level Convert Adj.: R] *BCU [–128 to 127 / 49 / 1 /step]

4885 1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of red.

4886 [Level Convert Adj.: G] *BCU [–128 to 127 / 17 / 1/step]

4886 1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of green.

4887 [Level Convert Adj.: B] *BCU [–128 to 127 / 29 / 1/step]

4887 1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of blue.

4902 [Display ACC Data]


4902 1 R DATA1 *CTL Displays the ACC data for each color element.
4902 2 G DATA1 *CTL
4902 3 B DATA1 *CTL
4902 4 R DATA2 *CTL
4902 5 G DATA2 *CTL
4902 6 B DATA2 *CTL

B202/B178/B180 5-52 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

4904 [Scanner IPU Test]


4904 1 Test1: Register Access Bit0: ASIC0 image register
Bit1: ASIC0 serial register
Bit2: ASIC1 register
Bit3: ASIC1 register
Bit4: ASIC1 register
Bit5: ASIC3 register
Bit6: ASIC2 register
Bit7: ASIC4 (MC) register
Bit8: ASIC4 (YK) register

0: OK, 1: Error
- 6.4.3 for IPU diagram
Performs a write and read check of the ASICs on the scanner IPU board and displays
the result.
4904 2 Test2: Image Path Bit0: ASIC1 to ASIC3
Bit1: ASIC0 to ASIC1
Bit2: ASIC0 to ASIC1
Bit3: ASIC1 to ASIC2
Bit4: ASIC3 to ASIC1
Bit5: ASIC3 to ASIC1
Bit6: ASIC2 to ASIC4 (MC)
Bit7: ASIC2 to ASIC4 (YK)

0: OK, 1: Error
- 6.4.3 for IPU diagram
Performs an image path check on the scanner IPU board and displays the result.

4905 [Dither Selection]

Service
Tables
Changes the parameters for error diffusion.
4905 1 Dither Selection *CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU

4907 [VPU Test Pattern]


4907 1 Test Pattern: R [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Default (Scanning Image)
1: Gradation(C) main scan (1)
2: Gradation(C) main scan (2)
3: Gradation(C) sub scan (1)
4: Gradation(C) sub scan (2)
5: Grid pattern (C)
Selects the test pattern generated by the controller board.
4907 2 Test Pattern: G [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Default (Scanned Image)
1: Gradation (M) main scan (1)
2: Gradation (M) main scan (2)
3: Gradation (M) sub scan (1)
4: Gradation (M) sub scan (2)
5: Grid pattern (M)
Selects the test pattern generated by the controller board.

SM 5-53 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

4907 [VPU Test Pattern]


4907 3 Test Pattern: B [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Default (Scanned Image)
1: Gradation (Y) main scan (1)
2: Gradation (Y) main scan (2)
3: Gradation (Y) sub scan (1)
4: Gradation (Y) sub scan (2)
5: Grid pattern (Y)
Selects the test pattern generated by the scanner IPU board.

4918 [Manual Gamma Adj.]


4918 9 Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode.
See “Replacement and Adjustment – Gamma Correction – Copy Mode” for how to
use.
Offset: Highlight *CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1 /step]
Offset: Middle
Offset: Shadow
Offset: Imax
Adjusts the option data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode.
Option: Highlight *CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
Option: Middle
Option: Shadow
Option: IDmax

4932 [Dot Position Cor.] Main Scan Dot Position Correction


Corrects the left or right side alignment of the red or blue filter on the CCD.
For details on this adjustment, see Replacement and Adjustment – Image Adjustment
- Scanner
4932 1 R: Left *CTL [0 to 9 / 5 / 1 /step]
4932 2 R: Right
4932 3 B: Left
4932 4 B: Right

B202/B178/B180 5-54 SM
Rev. 02/2006 COPY SERVICE MODE

SP5-XXX (Mode)

⇒ 5005 [IP Address Display]


Display the IP address on the display
5005 1 0: No (default)
1: Yes

5024 [mm/inch Display Selection]


Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.
5024 1 mm/inch display *CTL 0: mm (Europe/Asia)
1: inch (USA)

5045 [Accounting Counter]


Selects the counting method if the meter charge mode is enabled with SP5-930-001.
NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether the
counter value is negative or positive.
5045 1 Counter Method *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Developments
1: Prints

5051 [Toner Refill Detection Display]


Enables or disables the toner refill detection display.
5051 1 Toner Refill Detection *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 /-] Alphanumeric
Display 0: ON
1: OFF

Service
5104 [A3/DLT Double Count]

Tables
Specifies whether the counter is double clicked for 11 X 17 inch size prints.
5104 1 Double Count *CTL [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Normal count
1: Double count
2: Normal count for unknown size

5113 [Optional Counter Type]


5113 1 Default Optional Counter *CTL This program specifies the counter type.
Type 0: None 1: Key card (RK 3, 4)
2: Key card (down) 3: Prepaid card
4: Coin lock 5: MF key card
8: Key counter + Vendor
9: Bar-code Printer
5113 2 External Optional Counter *CTL This program specifies the external counter
Type type.
0: None
1: External optional counter type 1
2: External optional counter type 2
3: External optional counter type 3

5118 [Disable Copying] *CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]


5118 1 This program disables copying.

SM 5-55 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE Rev. 02/2006

5120 [Mode Clear Opt. Counter *CTL [0: Yes (removed)/ 1: Standby (installed but not
Removal] used)/ 2: No (not removed)]
5120 1 This program updates the information on the optional counter. When you install or
remove an optional counter, check the settings.

5121 [Counter Up Timing] *CTL [0: Feed/ 1: Exit]


5121 1 This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to “paper feed”
and “paper exit” respectively.

5127 [APS Mode] *CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]


5127 1 This program disables the APS.

5128 [Code Mode With Key/Card Option] *CTL


5128 1 DFU

5131 [Paper Size Type *CTL [0: DOM (Japan)/1: USA /2: ERP (Europe)]
Selection]
5131 1 The program selects a paper size system from the following alternatives: the AB
system (0), the LT system (1), and the AF system (2).

5150 [By-Pass Length Setting] *CTL [ 0: Off/ 1: On]


5150 1 Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not.
Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is limited
to 600 mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.

5162 [App. Switch Method] *CTL [ 0: Soft Key Set/1: Hard Key Set]
5162 1 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.

[Fax Printing Mode at Optional]


5167 Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This SP is
used when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting device.
5167 1 Fax Printing Mode at *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / –]
Optional Counter Off 0: Automatic printing
1: No automatic printing

[CE Login]
5169 If you will change the printer bit switches, you must ‘log in’ to service mode with this
SP before you go into the printer SP mode.
5169 1 CE Login *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

B202/B178/B180 5-56 SM
Rev. 02/2006 COPY SERVICE MODE

5212 [Page Numbering] *CTL


This program adjusts the position of the second side page numbers.
A "– value" moves the page number positions to the left edge. A "+ value" moves the
page number positions to the right edge.
5212 3 Duplex Printout Right/Left Position [ –10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
5212 4 Duplex Printout High/Low Position [ –10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

5302 [Set Time]


Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.
Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)
NA :-300 (New York) CH :+480 (Peking)
EU :+ 60 (Paris) TW :+480 (Taipei)
AS :+480 (Hong Kong)
5302 2 Set Time *CTL [ -1440 to 1440 / 60 / 1 min./step ]
#

5307 [Summer Time]


5307 1 Setting [ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0
Enables or disables the summer time mode.
NOTE: Make sure that both SP4-307-2 and -3 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is
not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
5307 3 Rule Set (Start)
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the first
digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]

Service
Tables
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
4th and 5th digits: The day of the week.
[0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
6th digit: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time.
[0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time.
[0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March
• The digits are counted from the left.
• Make sure that SP4-307-1 is set to "1".
5307 4 Rule Set (End)
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week.
[0 to 7 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
• The digits are counted from the left.
• Make sure that SP4-307-1 is set to "1".

SM 5-57 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE Rev. 02/2006

5401 [Access Control]


When installing the SDK application, SAS (VAS) adjusts the following settings. DFU
5404 200 SDK1 Unique ID *CTL This ID is overwritten by SAS (VAS) when you
install or uninstall the SDK application.
5404 201 SDK1 Certification *CTL [ 0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Method
5404 210 SDK2 Unique ID *CTL
5404 211 SDK2 Certification *CTL [ 0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Method
5404 220 SDK3 Unique ID *CTL
5404 221 SDK3 Certification *CTL [ 0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Method

5404 [User Code Counter Clear]


5404 1 UCodeCtrClr Clears all counters for users.

5501 [PM Alarm] *CTL


5501 1 PM Alarm Level [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Alarm off
1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1 to 9999) x
1000 ≥ PM counter
5501 2 Original Count Alarm [ 0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: No alarm sounds
1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing
through the ARDF ≥ 10,000

5504 [Jam Alarm] *CTL


5504 1 Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not
included).
[ 0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)

5505 [Error Alarm] *CTL [0 to 255 / 19 / 100 copies /step] Japan only

B202/B178/B180 5-58 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

5507 [Supply Alarm] *CTL


5507 1 Paper Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On, DFU
5507 2 Staple Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On, Japan only
5507 3 Toner Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On, DFU
5507 128 Interval :Others [00250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 /step] DFU
5507 132 Interval :A3
5507 133 Interval :A4
5507 134 Interval :A5
5507 141 Interval :B4
5507 142 Interval :B5
5507 160 Interval :DLT
5507 164 Interval :LG
5507 166 Interval :LT
5507 172 Interval :HLT

5508* [CC Call] *CTL


5508 1* Jam Remains 0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.
5508 2* Continuous Jams 0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.
5508 3* Continuous Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.
5508 4* Low Call Mode 0: Normal mode, 1: Reduced mode
Enables/disables the new call specifications designed to reduce the number of
calls.
5508 11* Jam Detection: Time Length [ 03 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute /step]
Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an “unattended paper jam”. This

Service
Tables
setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
5508 12* Jam Detection: Continuous [ 02 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]
Count
Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call. This setting is
enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
5508 13* Door Open: Time Length [ 03 to 30 / 10 / 1 /step]
Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call.
This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
5508 21* Jam Operation: Time Length 0: Automatic Call
1: Audible Warning at Machine
Determines what happens when a paper jam is left unattended.
5508 22* Jam Operation: Continuous 0: Automatic Call
Count 1: Audible Warning at Machine
Determines what happens when consecutive paper jams occur.
5508 23* Door Operation: Time Length 0: OFF, 1: ON
Determines what happens if the door remains open (15 min.).
Displays a warning if set to ON. Pressing the call button will contact the service
center. This setting is available for setting only if SP5508 004 is set for 1.

SM 5-59 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

5610 [ACC Factory Setting]


5610 4 Recall
Recalls the factory settings.
5610 5 Overwrite
Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings.
5610 6 Previous Setting
Recalls the previous settings.

5611 [Toner Ratio in 2C]


Adjusts the color balance of a single color (blue, green, or red) by changing the
proportion of color toner (C, M, and/or Y).
5611 1 B-C *CTL [ 0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %/step ]
5611 2 B-M [ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]
5611 3 G-C [ 0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %/step ]
5611 4 G-Y [ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]
5611 5 R-M [ 0 to 100 / 100 / 1 %/step ]
5611 6 R-Y [ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]

5801 [Memory Clear]


NOTE: For more information, see “NOTE 1” following "SP8-xxx" table.
5801 1 All Clear
Resets all correction data for process control and all software counters, and returns
all modes and adjustments to their default values.
To execute, hold down $ for over 3 seconds, and then turn the copier off and on
again.
Use this SP only after replacing the NVRAM, or after the copier has malfunctioned
due to a damaged NVRAM.
5801 2 ENG All
Clears the engine settings.
5801 3 SCS
Clears the system settings.
5801 4 IMH Memory Clr
Clears IMH data. DFU
5801 5 MCS
Clears MCS data. DFU
5801 6 Copier Application
Clears the copy application settings.
5801 7 Fax Application
Clears the fax application settings.
5801 8 Printer Application
Clears the printer application settings.
5801 9 Scanner Application
Clears the scanner application settings.
5801 10 Web Service/Network
Application
Delete the netfile application management files and thumbnails, and initializes the
job login ID.

5801 11 NCS
Initializes the system default and interface settings (IP address also),
SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.

B202/B178/B180 5-60 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

5801 [Memory Clear]


NOTE: For more information, see “NOTE 1” following "SP8-xxx" table.
5801 12 R-FAX
Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
5801 13 IPU
Clears the IPU settings
5801 14 Clear DCS Settings
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
5801 15 Clear UCS Settings
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.
5801 16 MIRS Setting
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service) settings.
5801 17 CCS
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service) settings.

5802 [EngineFreeRun]
5802 1 EngineFreeRun
Performs a free run on the copier engine.
NOTE:
• The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence of A4/LT
printing from the 1st tray. Therefore, paper should be loaded in the 1st tray, but
paper is not fed.
• The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode for a
test.

5803 [Input Check] See section 5-2-2.


5804 [Output Check] See section 5-2-3.

Service
Tables
5808 [Destination Code] Destination Code Display
Displays the destination code.
5808 1 Destination *BCU [ 0 to 3 / 0 / – ]
0: DOM
1: NA
2: EURO
3: ASIA

5809 [SC Detection ON/OFF] SC Detection ON/OFF


Enables or disables the service call detection (SC codes will be ignored if disabling
this SP mode).
5809 1 All *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: Enable
1: Disable

5810 [SC Reset]


Resets a type A service call condition.
NOTE: Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code.
5810 1 SC Reset

SM 5-61 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

5811 [Machine Serial No.] Machine Serial Number Display


Displays the machine serial number.
5811 2 Serial No. Display *BCU

5812 [Service Tel. No. Setting]


5812 1 Service *CTL
Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on
the Counter List, which can be printed with the user’s “Counter” menu.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be
input).
5812 2 Facsimile *CTL
Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is
printed on the Counter List.
This can be up to 13 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be
input).
5812 3 Supply *CTL
Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables. Enter the
number and press #.
Press the " key to input a pause. Press the “Clear modes” key to delete the
telephone number.
5812 4 Operation *CTL
Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the number and
press #.
Press the " key to input a pause. Press the “Clear modes” key to delete the
telephone number.

5816 [Remote Service] *CTL


5816 1 I/F Setting Selects the remote service setting.
[ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: NRS remote service on
5816 2 CE Call Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001
is set to “2”.
5816 3 Function Flag Enables or disables the remote service function.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
5816 6 Device Information Call Displays or does not display the device information call
Display Setting content.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
5816 7 SSL Disable Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL
when calling the RCG.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification
1: Does no use the RCG certification

B202/B178/B180 5-62 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

5816 [Remote Service] *CTL


5816 8 RCG Connect Timeout Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the
RCG.
[1 to 90 / 10 / 1 second /step]
5816 9 RCG Write Timeout Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the
RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
5816 10 RCG Read Timeout Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the
RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
5816 11 Port 80 Enable Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP
method.
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

5821 [Remote Service Address]


5821 1 CSS-PI Device Code *CTL [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
5821 2 RCG IP Address

5824 [NV-RAM Data Upload]


Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial number) from
the NVRAM to a flash memory card.
5824 1 NV-RAM Data Upload #

5825 [NV-RAM Data Download]


Downloads the UP and SP mode data from a flash memory card to the NVRAM
5825 1 NV-RAM Download #

Service
Tables
5828 [Network Setting] *CTL
5828 50 1284 Compatibility Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility.
(Centro) [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
5828 52 ECP (Centro) Enables or disables ECP Compatibility.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP5-828-50 is
set to "1".
5828 65 Job Spooling Enables/disables Job Spooling.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
5828 66 Job Spooling Clear: Start Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at
Time power on.
0: ON (Data is cleared)
1: OFF (Automatically printed)

SM 5-63 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

5828 [Network Setting] *CTL


5828 69 Job Spooling (Protocol) Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for
each protocol.
0: Validates
1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR
bit1: FTP
bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: (Reserved)
bit7: (Reserved)
5828 84 Print Settings List Prints the NCS parameter list
5828 90 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON) Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
5828 91 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) Enables or disables the Web operation.
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: Disable, 1: Enable

5832 [HDD] HDD Initialization *CTL


5832 1 HDD Formatting (ALL) Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode only if
5832 2 HDD Formatting (IMH) there is a hard disk error.
5832 3 HDD Formatting
(Thumbnail)
5832 4 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
5832 5 HDD Formatting (Printer
Fonts)
5832 6 HDD Formatting (User Info)
5832 7 Mail RX Data
5832 8 Mail TX Data
5832 9 HDD Formatting (Data for a
Design)
5832 10 HDD Formatting (Log)
5832 11 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F)

5833 [e-Cabinet enable]


5833 13 e-Cabinet enable Enables or disables the e-Cabinet.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable
1: Enable
The “e-Cabinet” supplies the interface for
registration, editing, deleting and obtaining the
user’s code name.
NOTE: Turn the main switch on and off after
using this SP.

B202/B178/B180 5-64 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

5836 [Capture Settings] *CTL


5836 1 Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) 0: Disable, 1: Enable
With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be
initialized, displayed, or selected.
5836 2 Panel Setting 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed
Displays or does not display the capture function buttons.
5836 71 to 5836 78, Copier and Printer Document Reduction
The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents sent to the
document management server via the MLB.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed
5836 71 Reduction for Copy Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
5836 72 Reduction for Copy B&W Text 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
5836 73 Reduction for Copy B&W Other 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
5836 74 Reduction for Printer Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
5836 75 Reduction for Printer B&W 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
5836 76 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
5836 77 Reduction for Printer Color 1200 1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: skipped)
5836 78 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200 1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: skipped)
5836 81 to 5836 86, Stored document format
The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents sent to
the document management server via the MLB.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed
5836 081 Format for Copy Color 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
NOTE: This SP is not used in this model.
5836 082 Format for Copy B&W Text 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
5836 083 Format Copy B&W Other 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,

Service
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR

Tables
5836 084 Format for Printer Color 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
NOTE: This SP is not used in this model.
5836 085 Format for Printer B&W 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
5836 086 Format for Printer B&W HQ 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
5836 091 Default for JPEG [ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management
server via the MLB with JPEG selected as the format.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.

5839 [IEEE1394] *CTL


5839 4 Host Name Displays the 1394 host name.
[Text up to 64 bytes / NULL / – /step]
5839 7 Cycle Master Turns the cycle master function on/off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
5839 8 BCR mode Selects either ‘Standard’, 'IRM Color Copy', or 'Always
Effective'.

SM 5-65 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

5839 [IEEE1394] *CTL


5839 9 IRM 1394a Check Turns the IRM 1394a check on/off.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF
1: ON
If the IRM is not defined as 1394a standard, its node is
used as IRM.
5839 10 Unique ID [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF
1: ON
5839 11 Logout Prevents initiators from logging on or makes initiators
log off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF
(Prevents the initiators, having already logged on, to
log on if they try to log on.)
1: ON
(Makes initiators, having already logged on, to log off if
they try to log on.)
5839 12 Login Allows/disallows an initiator to exclusively log on.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF (Disallows)
1: ON (Allows)
5839 13 Login MAX Specifies the maximum initiators able to log on.
[0 to 63 / 8 / 1 /step]

5840 [IEEE 802.11b]


5840 6 Channel Max *CTL [ 1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the
wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The
default settings are set for the maximum end of the range for each area. Adjust the
upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels. DFU
Note: Do not change the setting
5840 7 Channel Min *CTL [ 1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Europe: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the
wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The
default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust the
lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels. DFU
Note: Do not change the setting
5840 11 WEP key Select *CTL [00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary]
00: Key #1
01: Key #2 (Reserved)
10: Key #3 (Reserved)
11: Key #4 (Reserved)
Selects the WEP key.

B202/B178/B180 5-66 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

5841 [Supply Name Setting]


5841 1 Toner Name Setting: *CTL Specifies supply names. These appear on the
Black screen when the user presses the Inquiry
5841 2 Toner Name Setting: button in the user tools screen.
Cyan
5841 3 Toner Name Setting:
Yellow
5841 4 Toner Name Setting:
Magenta
5841 5 Staple Std
5841 6 Staple Bind
5841 7 OrgStamp
5841 11 Staple Std1
5841 12 Staple Std2
5841 13 Staple Std3
5841 14 Staple Std4

5842 [Net File Analysis Mode Setting] DFU


5842 1 Net File Analysis Mode *CTL Default: 00000000 – do not change
Setting Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document
server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder
software

5844 [USB]
5844 1 Transfer Rate *CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Auto Change
1: Full speed
Adjusts the USB transfer rate.

Service
Tables
5844 2 Vendor ID *CTL Displays the vendor ID. DFU
5844 3 Product ID *CTL Displays the product ID. DFU
5844 4 Device Release Number *CTL Displays the development release version
number. DFU

5845 [Delivery Server Setting] *CTL


Provides items for delivery server settings.
5845 1 FTP Port No. [ 0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]
Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.
5845 2 IP Address (Primary) Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the
transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting.
5845 6 Delivery Error Display Time [ 0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]
Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed
when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and
an external device.

5845 8 IP Address (Secondary) Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255


Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the
secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting of the IP
address without reference to the DNS setting.

SM 5-67 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

5845 9 Delivery Server Model [ 0 to 4/ 0 / 1 /step]


Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.
0: Unknown
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
5845 10 Delivery Svr Capability [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits Changes the
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible capability of
the registered
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
that the I/O
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists device
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists registered.
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to “0”)
5845 11 Delivery Svr Capability (Ext) [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered.
Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)
Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link
Bit5 to 0: Not used

5846 [UCS Settings] *CTL


5846 1 Machine ID (For Delivery Server) Displays ID
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is
only displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the NIC MAC or
IEEE 1394 EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
5846 2 Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server) Clears ID
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory.
Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable.
After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the
machine off and on.
5846 3 Maximum Entries [ 2000 to 20000/ 2000 /1 /step]
Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared,
and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
5846 6 Delivery Server Retry Timer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
5846 7 Delivery Server Retry Times [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
5846 8 Delivery Server Maximum Entries [2000 to 50000 / 2000 / 1/step]
Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user information
managed by UCS.
5846 10 LDAP Search Timeout [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]
Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
5846 47 Initialize Local Addr Book Clears the local address book information,
including the user code.
5846 48 Initialize Delivery Addr Book Clears the distribution address book information,
except the user code.

B202/B178/B180 5-68 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

5846 [UCS Settings] *CTL


5846 49 Initialize LDAP Addr Book Clears the LDAP address book information,
except the user code.
5846 50 Initialize All Addr Book Clears all directory information managed by UCS,
including all user codes.
5846 51 Backup All Addr Book Uploads all directory information to the SD card.
5846 52 Restore All Addr Book Downloads all directory information from the SD
card.
5846 53 Clear Backup Info Deletes the address book data from the SD card
in the service slot.
Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this
machine.
This feature does not work if the card is write-
protected.
NOTE: After you do this SP, go out of the SP
mode, and then turn the power off.
Do not remove the SD card until the
Power LED stops flashing.
5846 90 Plain Data Forbidden Allows you to prevent the address from being
written to the HDD or SD card in plain data. This
is a security function that prevents unauthorized
access to address book data.
0: No check. Address book data not protected.
1: Check. Allows operation of UCS without data
from HDD or SC card and without creating
address book information with plain data.
5846 91 FTP Auth Port Setting Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution
server address book that is used in the
identification mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]
5846 94 Encryption Stat Shows the status of the encryption function for the

Service
Tables
address book data.
5846 98 Bit SW2 DFU
5846 99 Bit SW DFU

5847 [Net File Resolution *CTL


Reduction]
5847 1 through 5847 8 changes the default settings of image data transferred
externally by the Net File page reference function. [ 0 to 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by NetFile.
“Net files” are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software.
5847 1 Rate for Copy Color 0: 1x
5847 2 Rate for Copy B&W Text 1: 1/2x
5847 3 Rate for Copy B&W Other 2: 1/3x
5847 4 Rate for Printer Color 3: 1/4x
5847 5 Rate for Printer B&W 4: 1/6x
5847 6 Rate for Printer B&W HQ 5: 1/8x
5847 7 Rate for Printer Color 1200dpi
5847 8 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi
5847 21 Network Quality Default for JPEG
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This
function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
[ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]

SM 5-69 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

5848 [Web Service] *CTL


5848 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of
0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The default is
equal to 1 gigabyte.
5848 1 Access Control: Netfile Bit switch settings.
Protocol (Lower 4 bits only)
0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Access and deliveries from Scan Router
have no effect on capture.
5848 2 Access Control: Repository 0000: No access control
(only Lower 4 bits) 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
0010: No writing control
5848 3 Access Control: Doc. Svr. Print Switches access control on and off.
(Lower 4 bits) 0000: No access control
5848 4 Access Control: User Directory 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
(only Lower 4 bits)
5848 5 Access Control: Delivery Input
(only Lower 4 bits)
5848 7 Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax
(Lower 4 bits)
5848 9 Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower 4
bits)
5848 11 Access Ctrl: Device
management (Lower 4 bits)
5848 12 Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Copy
(Lower 4 bits)
5848 13 Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Fax
(Lower 4 bits)
5848 14 Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Printer
(Lower 4 bits)
5848 15 Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl
Scanner (Lower 4 bits)
5848 21 Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4
bits)
5848 22 Access Ctrl: Administration
(Lower 4bits)
5848 23 Access Ctrl: Image Edit (Lower
4bits)
5848 41 Security Setting (Lower 4bits
only)
5848 100 Repository: Download Image Specifies the max size of the image data that the
Max. Size machine can download.
[1 to 1024 / 1024 / 1 MB /step]

5849 [Installation Date] *CTL


5849 1 Display DFU
5849 2 Switch to Print DFU

B202/B178/B180 5-70 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

5850 [Address Book Function] *CTL Japan Only


5850 3 Replacement of Circuit Classification
The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line. This SP allows you to switch all at
once to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line. Conversely, if for some reason the
G4 line becomes unusable, you can easily switch back to G3.

5853 [Stamp Data Download]


Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the ROM
and copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as required. This
SP must be executed after replacing or formatting the hard disks.
NOTE: This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed.

5856 [Remote ROM Update]


Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable when updating
the remote ROM.
5856 2 Local Port *CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Disable
1: Enable

5857 [Save Debug Log] *CTL


5857 1 On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF) 0: ON, 1: OFF
Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured until
this feature is switched on.
5857 2 Target (2: HDD 3: SD) 2: HDD, 3: SD Card
Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions set
with SP5-858 are satisfied.

Service
Tables
[ 2 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
5857 5 [Save to HDD] DFU
Saves the debug log in memory to the HDD.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD
Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one
by one to each SD Card.
5857 6 Save to SD Card
5857 9 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
5857 10 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
5857 11 Erase HDD Debug Data
5857 12 Erase SD Card Debug Data
5857 13 Free Space on SD Card
5857 14 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB)
5857 15 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
5857 16 Make HDD Debug
5857 17 Make SD Debug

SM 5-71 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

5858 [Debug Save When] *CTL


These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
destination selected by SP5857 002.
SP5858 3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC error
codes.
5858 1 Engine SC Error Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes generated by
copier engine errors.
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
5858 2 Controller SC Error Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes generated by
GW controller errors.
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
5858 3 Any SC Error [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
5858 4 Jam Turns on/off the debug save for jam errors.
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON

5859 [Debug Save Key No.] *CTL


5859 1 Key 1 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files
5859 2 Key 2 for functions that use common memory on the
5859 3 Key 3 controller board. (- 5.9.1)
5859 4 Key 4 [ –9999999 to 9999999 / 0 / – ]
5859 5 Key 5
5859 6 Key 6
5859 7 Key 7
5859 8 Key 8
5859 9 Key 9
5859 10 Key 10

B202/B178/B180 5-72 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

5860 [SMTP/POP3/IMAP4] *CTL


5860 20 Partial Mail Receive Timeout [ 1 to 168 / 72 / – ]
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception.
The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received
during this prescribed time.
5860 21 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance [ 0 to 1 / 1 / – ]
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.
0: No
1: Yes
5860 22 SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [ 0 to 1 / 0 / – ]
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated
account after the SMTP server is validated.
0: No. “From” item not switched.
1: Yes. “From item switched.
5860 25 SMTP Auth. Direct Setting [ 0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
Selects the authentication method for SMPT.
Bit switch:
• Bit 0: LOGIN
• Bit 1: PLAIN
• Bit 2: CRAM MD5
• Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
• Bit 4 to 7: Not used
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP mode.

5866 [E-mail Alert] Not Used


5866 1 Notice function of E-Mail Enables or disables the E-mail alert function.
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled

Service
Tables
5866 5 Add Date Field

5870 [Common Key Info Writing]


5870 1 Writing *CTL Writes to flash ROM the common proof for
validating the device for NRS specifications.
5870 3 Initialize *CTL Formats the common proof area of the flash
ROM. FA

5871 [HDD Function Disable] *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / – ] (0: OFF, 1: ON)


Disables the HDD functions by suppressing all functions that write data to the HDD.
After this SP is executed, the machine must be switched off and on to enable the
setting.
When "1" is selected, the effective partition of the HDD is limited for the Data
Overwrite Security B735.
NOTE: This SP must be activated when the Data Overwrite Security is installed.

SM 5-73 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE Rev. 02/2006

5873 [SD Card Appli Move]


5873 1 Move Exec This SP copies the application programs from the
original SD card in SD card slot 3 to an SD card in SD
card slot 1.
5873 2 Undo Exec This SP copies back the application programs from an
SD card in SD Card Slot 1 to the original SD card in SD
card slot 3. Use this menu when you have mistakenly
copied some programs by using "Move Exec"
(SP5873-1).

5875 [SC Auto Reboot]


5875 1 SC Auto Reboot *CTL Enables or disables the automatic reboot
function when an SC error occurs.
[ 0 or 1/ 1 / – ]
0: The machine reboots automatically when
the machine issues an SC error and logs
the SC error code. If the same SC occurs
again, the machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC
error occurs.
The reboot is not executed for Type A, B or C
SC codes.

5878 [Option Setup]


5878 1 Option Setup Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit.
Press "EXECUTE" on the operation panel.
Then turn the machine off and on.

⇒ 5886
5886 1
[Remote Firmware Update Function]
ROM Update 0: Yes 1 (Default)
1: No
Allows to access the ROM by the Remote Firmware Update Function

B202/B178/B180 5-74 SM
Rev. 02/2006 COPY SERVICE MODE

5907 [Plug & Play Maker/Model Name] Plug & Play Name Selection
Specifies the manufacturer and model name.
5907 1 Plug/Play *BCU [ 0 to 17 / 0 / 1 /step ] FA

MF Model Name NetBeui


0 RICOH Aficio 3235C Aficio3235C
1 RICOH Aficio 3245C Aficio3245C
2 RICOH Aficio 3228C Aficio3228C
3 SAVIN C3528 C3528
4 SAVIN C4535 C4535
5 SAVIN C2824 C2824
6 Gestetner DSc435 DSc435
7 Gestetner DSc445 DSc445
8 Gestetner DSc428 DSc428
9 NRG DSc435 DSc435
10 NRG DSc445 DSc445
11 NRG DSc428 DSc428
12 infotec ISC 2835 ISC2835
13 infotec ISC 3545 ISC3545
14 infotec ISC 2428 ISC2428
15 LANIER LD335c LD335c
16 LANIER LD345c LD345c
17 LANIER LD328c LD328c

5913 [Switchover Permission Time]


5913 1 Print Application Timer *CTL [ 3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second /step]
Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode (and the
operation panel keys have not been used) before another application can gain

Service
Tables
control of the display.
5913 102 Print Application Set *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 1 / – ] DFU

5961 [Large Capacity Exit *CTL 0: OFF, 1: ON


Mode]
Selects whether or not all stapled copies are sent to Shift Tray 1 when the Two-Tray
finisher is installed.

5967 [Copy Server Set *CTL 0: ON, 1: OFF


Function[
Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that prevents
image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing this
setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.

5970 [Debug Serial Output] *CTL


Enables and disables the debug serial output.
Bit 7: 0 (disable), 1 (enable)

SM 5-75 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE Rev. 02/2006

5974 [Cherry Server]


Specifies which version of ScanRouter, “Lite” or “Full”, is installed.
5974 1 Cherry Server Setting *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: Lite
1: Full

5989 [Loop Back Test]


Executes a communication test with peripherals by using a special tool (connector),
which is unique for each peripheral.
The machine checks if the communication with the peripherals is OK or NG; then
displays the result.
DFU
5989 1 Duplex
5989 3 Finisher
5989 4 Paper Supply Unit
5989 5 ADF

5990 [SP print mode]


Prints out the SMC sheets.
5990 1 All (Data List)
5990 2 SP (Mode Data List)
5990 3 User Program
5990 4 Logging Data
5990 5 Diagnostic Report
5990 6 Non-Default
5990 7 NIB Summary
5990 8 Capture Log
5990 21 Copier User Program
5990 22 Scanner SP
5990 23 Scanner User Program

5991 [Jam OFF/ON] Jam ON/OFF


Enables or disables jam detection.
5991 1 Jam OFF/ON [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: Enable
1: Disable

5993 [Line Position Adj.] Line Position Adjustment


Line Positioning Adjustment ([Color])
M: Main-scan, S: Sub-scan, Reg.: Registration, Mag.: Magnification
For example: M Reg = Main scan registration

B202/B178/B180 5-76 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

5993 [Line Position Adj.] Line Position Adjustment


Line Positioning Adjustment ([Color])
M: Main-scan, S: Sub-scan, Reg.: Registration, Mag.: Magnification
For example: M Reg = Main scan registration
5993 1 Mode Selection *BCU [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step ] Alphanumeric
0: Never done
1: Process Control
Done at
a) all process control self checks except
after toner end recovery and developer
initialisation.
b) new PCU detected.
c) the temperature has changed by 5°C
since the last adjustment.
2: Except ProCon
As for setting “1”, except it is not done
during self-checks. However, it is done
at the initial process control self check.
Specifies when the automatic line position adjustment is done.
The size of the 5°C difference can be changed with SP5-993-3.
5993 2 Execute
Uses to make a line position adjustment.
5993 3 Temperature *BCU [ 3 to 15 / 5 / 1oC /step]
Specifies the temperature for starting the line positioning adjustment.
The line position adjustment automatically starts when the temperature differs by the
amount specified in this SP mode from the temperature when the last adjustment was
done.
There are two thermistors on the laser optics-housing unit. The thermistor close to the
fusing unit monitors the temperature for this adjustment.
5993 4 Interrupt *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

Service
Tables
Enables or disables the line position adjustment during a print job when the
temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the temperature at
the last adjustment.
5993 5 Stand-by *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the line position adjustment during stand-by mode when the
temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the temperature at
the last adjustment.
5993 6 Job Start *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the line position adjustment just before starting a color print job
when the temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the
temperature when the machine woke up from energy saver mode.
5993 7 Result *BCU
Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment in 4 digits.

First and second digits: Error detected on the rear ID sensor


Third and fourth digits: Error detected on the center ID sensor
Fifth and sixth digits: Error detected on the front ID sensor
010101
The 6th digit ↑ ↑ The 1st digit
Refer to the Troubleshooting section for more details about the two-digit codes.
5993 8 Exe. Counter *BCU

SM 5-77 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

5993 [Line Position Adj.] Line Position Adjustment


Line Positioning Adjustment ([Color])
M: Main-scan, S: Sub-scan, Reg.: Registration, Mag.: Magnification
For example: M Reg = Main scan registration
Displays how many times the line position adjustment has been executed.
Counts up by +1 normally.
After a forced adjustment and a PCU replacement, it counts up +3
Also includes adjustments done at the factory.
5993 9 Error Counter *BCU Displays how many times errors have been
detected during the line position adjustment.
The way that the auto line position adjustment is done can be adjusted using the
following SP modes (SP5-993-010 to 021). These are coefficients used for the
adjustment.
Normally, do not change except if the automatic adjustment gives poor results
immediately after installing a new optics-housing unit. Change the value then do a
forced line position adjustment (SP 5-993-2) to check the effects of the changes.
Example: If magenta is always shifted one dot to the left, reduce 5-993-11 by 1.
5993 10 M Offset [Y] *BCU A fine adjustment to the main-scan registration.
5993 11 M Offset [M] *BCU [ –128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] FA
5993 12 M Offset [C] *BCU 1 dot = 20μ
5993 13 M Mag. Offset [Y] *BCU A fine adjustment to the main-scan
5993 14 M Mag. Offset [M] *BCU magnification.
5993 15 M Mag. Offset [C] *BCU [ –1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001% /step] FA
NOTE: The setting changes in this SP mode
will start after the next line position
adjustment.

5993 16 S Offset 600[Y] *BCU A fine adjustment to the sub-scan registration


5993 17 S Offset 600[M] *BCU for each color (color registration).
5993 18 S Offset 600[C] *BCU [ –128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step] FA
5993 19 S Offset 1200[Y] *BCU 600dpi: 1 dot = 40μ
5993 20 S Offset 1200[M] *BCU 1200 dpi: 1 dot = 20μ
5993 21 S Offset 1200[C] *BCU

5993 22 Interrupt *BCU [10 to 250 / 100 / 10 sheets/step]


Specifies the number of sheets to be printed before a line position adjustment is done
during a print job.
SP 5-993-4 must be set to “enabled”.
When the temperature difference meets the conditions specified in SP5-993-3, the
machine starts counting the number of prints in the job. The machine interrupts the
print job and does the line position adjustment if the number of prints exceeds the
number specified in this SP mode.
If the counted number of prints does not exceed the number specified, the machine
resets the counter, then continues to monitor the temperature and does the line
position adjustment next time.
5993 25 Drm Gear Phase *BCU [0 to 345 / 0 / 15 degrees/step] DFU
Adjusts the phases of the black drum gear and the color drum gear.
5993 26 Initialization *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enables or disables the line position adjustment during initialization.
5993 27 Toner Refresh *BCU [0 to 3 / 1 / 1/step] DFU
0: Disable, 1: Line adj.,
2: PPS, 3: Line adj. 2
Selects the toner refreshing operation timing.
Repetitive line position adjustments can cause abnormal outputs such as white spots.
To prevent this, toner is consumed and supplied after line position adjustment.

B202/B178/B180 5-78 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

5993 [Line Position Adj.] Line Position Adjustment


Line Positioning Adjustment ([Color])
M: Main-scan, S: Sub-scan, Reg.: Registration, Mag.: Magnification
For example: M Reg = Main scan registration
5993 31 PPS: M This SP measures the transfer PPS in the middle speed mode.
5993 32 PPS Set: M *BCU C2a: [6043 to 6166 / 6105 / 1 /step]
C2b: [7832 to 7991 / 7912 / 1 /step]
This SP adjusts the transfer PPS in the middle speed mode.
5993 33 PPS: L This SP measures the transfer PPS in the low speed mode.
5993 34 PPS Set: L *BCU [7832 to 7991 / 7912 / 1 step]
This SP adjusts the transfer PPS in the low speed mode.
5993 35 Adj. level *BCU [0 to 5 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: HIGH 1: MID 2: LOW
3: BW-HI 4: BW-MID 5: BW-LOW
This SP specifies the level of color adjustment. This SP sets the following SPs as
listed.

HI MID LOW BW-HI BW-MID BW-LOW


SP2-919-0030 0 0 0 0 0 0
SP3-125-003 1 0 0 1 0 0
SP3-906-001 200 200 255 200 200 999
SP3-906-002 200 0 0 200 0 0
SP3-906-003 200 0 0 0 0 0
SP3-906-004 480 480 480 480 480 480
SP3-906-005 1.00 1.00 0.5 0.20 0.20 0.20
SP5-993-001 1 1 1 1 1 1
SP5-993-003 3 5 7 3 5 7
SP5-993-004 1 1 1 1 1 1
SP5-993-005 0 0 0 0 0 0

Service
Tables
SP5-993-006 1 1 0 1 1 0
SP5-993-022 100 100 250 100 100 250
SP5-993-026 1 0 0 1 0 0
SP5-993-055 1 0 0 100 200 999
The adjustment numbers from 3 to 5 are for users who mainly use this machine for
black and white printing and copying.
Finely adjusts the main-scan registration. This SP can adjust the main scan
36 to 39
registration more precisely than the SP5993-10 to -12. Used for fine main scan offset.
5993 36 S: Off Set: [Y] *BCU [–15 to 15 / 0 / 1/16dot /step] FA
5993 37 S: Off Set: [M] *BCU
5993 38 S: Off Set: [C] *BCU
5993 39 Execute *BCU
Use to make a rough line position adjustment. If color registration errors are more
than 1.4 mm, use this SP. After doing this SP, do SP5993-2 (Line position
adjustment).
5993 40 Color_Adj_level (for *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / –] Alphanumeric
warming up)
Sets the line position adjustment type when the fusing temperature is 60°C or less
immediately after the main power is turned on.
0: High (Skew adjustment once, main and sub scan magnification and registration
adjustment twice)
1: Mid (Skew adjustment once, main and sub scan magnification and registration
adjustment once)

SM 5-79 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

5993 [Line Position Adj.] Line Position Adjustment


Line Positioning Adjustment ([Color])
M: Main-scan, S: Sub-scan, Reg.: Registration, Mag.: Magnification
For example: M Reg = Main scan registration
5993 41 Color_Adj_level *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / –]
Sets the line position adjustment type when the fusing temperature is more than 60°C
immediately after the main power is turned on.
0: Mid (Main and sub scan magnification adjustment twice)
1: Low (Main and sub scan magnification adjustment once)
42 to 44 These SPs adjust the main scan registration when it is in 1200 dpi printing mode. The
polygon motor speed is different between the 1200 dpi printing mode and other dpi
printing modes. Because of this, the registration position of 1200 dpi printing mode is
slightly different from other printing modes.
Example: If magenta is always shifted one dot to the left, reduce 5-993-43 by 1.
5993 42 M: Offset: 1200 [Y] *BCU [–128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step] FA
5993 43 M: Offset: 1200 [M] *BCU
5993 44 M: Offset: 1200 [C] *BCU
45 to 47 These SPs adjust the main scan registration by 1/16 dot when it is in 1200 dpi printing
mode.
5993 45 M Offset 2 1200 [Y] *BCU [–15 to 15 / 0 / 1/16dot /step] FA
5993 46 M Offset 2 1200 [M] *BCU
5993 47 M Offset 2 1200 [C] *BCU
5993 48 Pulse: Y *BCU Displays the correction pulse value of the
5993 49 Pulse: M *BCU main-scan magnification for yellow, cyan and
5993 50 Pulse: C *BCU magenta adjusted by the line position
adjustment.
51 to 53 Specifies the correction pulse value at the center of the image. This SP is used when
color registration errors occur at the center of the main scan but not at the sides, after
the line position adjustment is done. The values of these SPs are added to the
correction values that are adjusted by the center ID sensor when doing the line
position adjustment.
• A "–" value shifts the image to the front side of the machine (left side of the image).
• A "+" value shifts the image to the rear side of the machine (right side of the
image).
5993 51 D Mag Offset [Y] *BCU [–1023 to 1023 / 0 / 1 pulse /step] FA
5993 52 D Mag Offset [M] *BCU
5993 53 D Mag Offset [C] *BCU
5993 54 D Mag Adj *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / –] DFU
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables or disables the main-scan magnification adjustment with the center ID
sensor. When this SP is at "0", main-scan correction is done only with the rear and
front ID sensor during the line position adjustment.
5993 55 FC Pre-job Music *BCU [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 sheet /step]
Specifies the threshold for the line position adjustment when changing from black and
white printing and copying mode to color printing mode. When color printing starts
after the counter has got to the value set by this SP, the line position adjustment is
done before the color printing starts.
If the line position adjustment is done because of other conditions, the counter of this
SP is cleared.

5994 [Unit Detection ON/OFF] Maintenance Unit Detection ON/OFF


5994 1 Dev. Unit/PCU *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric DFU
# 0: Enable
1: Disable

B202/B178/B180 5-80 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

Enables or disables PCU and development unit detection.


NOTE: If this mode is disabled, new unit detection also does not function. Use this
mode as a temporary measure, only when the micro-switches are defective.

5995 [ColorGapAdj2] Color Gap Adjustment 2


Transfer belt speed affects image processing. The transfer belt speed needs to be
adjusted to uniform speed to ensure good quality image production. This machine has
the following two methods to adjust the transfer belt speed:
1. Transfer belt feedback
2. Dancing control
5995 20 Trans Drv FB *BCU Enables or disables the transfer belt feedback
feature and dancing control.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]

Transfer belt Dancing control


feedback feature
0 ON ON
1 ON OFF
2 OFF OFF

[Trans Drv Danc]


Dancing control corrects the belt speed for changes that are caused by deflection of
the belt regularity.
5995 23 Ampli Param *BCU DFU
5995 24 Phase Param *BCU DFU
5995 25 Error Counter *BCU Clears the dancing control error counter.
5995 27 Target Do this SP to detect the HP mark and measure
the belt regularity as a standard value.
5995 28 Drv Rev Set *BCU DFU

Service
Tables
5997 [Test Pattern]
5997 1 Tray Selection [0 to 4 / 1 / 1/step]
0: By-pass Table 1: Tray 1
2: Tray 2 3: Tray 3
4: Tray 4
Selects the tray for making a test print.
NOTE: The machine makes a test pattern on the paper size loaded in the selected
paper tray.

SM 5-81 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

5997 [Test Pattern]


5997 2 Pattern [0 to 23 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric
0: None
1: 1-dot sub-scan line
2: 2-dot sub-scan line
3: 1-dot main-scan line
4: 2-dot main-scan line
5: 1-dot grid pattern (Fine)
7. 1-dot grid pattern (Rough)
9. 1-dot slant grid pattern
11. 1-dot pattern
12. 2-dot pattern
13. 4-dot pattern
14. 1-dot trimming pattern
16. Cross stitch: sub-scan
17. Cross stitch: main-scan
18. Belt pattern (Horizontal)
19. Belt pattern (Vertical)
20. Checkered Flag
21. Grey scale (Vertical)
22. Grey scale (Horizontal)
23. Solid
Selects a test pattern. After selection press "O.K".
5997 3 Single Color [0 to 6 / 6 / 1 /step] Alphanumeric
0: Red 1: Green
2: Blue 3: Yellow
4: Magenta 5: Cyan
6: Black
Selects the color for making a test pattern.
5997 4 Color Mode [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: Full Color 1: Single Color
Selects the color mode for making a test print.
5997 5 Resolution [0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step] Alphanumeric
0: 600x600 1: 1200x600
2: 1200x1200
Selects the resolution for making a test print.
5997 6 By-pass Paper Size [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step] Alphanumeric
0: A4 LEF 1: LT LEF
2: A3 3: DLT
Selects the paper size for making a test pattern from the by-pass table.
5997 7 Print
Prints the test pattern with the settings specified with SP5-997-001 to 006.
NOTE: When exiting the SP mode, the test print mode is automatically canceled.

5998 [Memory Clear]


NOTE: For more information, see “NOTE 1” following the "SP8-xxx" table.
5998 1 ENG Setting Clears the engine settings except for counters.
5998 2 ENG Counter Clears all counters.

5999 [New Unit Set] *BCU [0: Disable/1: Enable]


#
5999 1 PCU: Bk This program makes the machine to start the
5999 2 PCU: Y initialization processing for a newly installed
5999 3 PCU: M unit. You set “1: Enable” before installing a

B202/B178/B180 5-82 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

5999 4 PCU: C new unit.


5999 5 Dev. U: Bk
5999 6 Dev. U: Y
5999 7 Dev. U: M
5999 8 Dev. U: C
5999 9 Fuser

Service
Tables

SM 5-83 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

6016 [Original Size Priority] Original Size Detection Priority


Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since original
sensors cannot recognize all sizes.
6016 1 Original Size Priority *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Setting 1
1: Setting 2

Setting 1 Setting 2
Bit 7 A4 (L) LT (L)
Bit 6 11" x 15" DLT (L)
Bit 5 DLT (L) 11" x 15"
Bit 4 LT (S) US Exec (S)
Bit 3 LT (L) 8" x 10" (L)
Bit 2 LG (L) F4 (L)
Bit 1 A4 (L) 16K (L)
Bit 0 8K (L) DLT (L)

Bits used for detection differ depending on


destination as shown below.
Bit 7 to 6: Only for Japan
Bit 5 to 2: Only for US
Bit 1 to 0: Only for EU/AA

6017 [DF Magnification Adj.] DF Magnification Adjustment


Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for the ARDF.
6017 1 DF Magnification Adj. *CTL [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]

6110 [Punch Position]


Adjusts the punching position.
Punch 1
US: 2 punch holes
Europe: 2 punch holes
North Europe: 4 punch holes
Punch 2
US: 3 punch holes
Europe: 4 punch holes
Increment: Holes move toward the paper center.
Decrement: Holes move toward the paper edge.
6110 1 MF Fin 1 *BCU [-7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]
6110 2 MF Fin 2 *BCU
6110 3 Booklet Fin [-2.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]

B202/B178/B180 5-84 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

6111 [Staple Position]


Adjusts the stapling position.
Increment: Staple position moves toward the edge of paper.
Decrement: Staple position moves toward the center of paper.
NOTE: Although the adjustable range is ±3.5 mm, the stapling position can be
changed only by 1.0 mm when stapling one position at the front or rear side even
when the input value is more than 1.0.
6111 1 MF Fin *BCU [-3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]
6111 2 Booklet Fin [-3.75 to 3.75 / 0 / 0.25 mm/step]

6112 [Fold Position] *BCU [-3.75 to 3.75 / 0. / 0.25 mm/step]


6111 1 A3/DLT Adjusts the folding positions of the optional
6111 2 B4/LG booklet finisher.
6112 3 A4/LT
6112 4 A3/DLT
6112 5 B4/LG
6112 6 A4/LT

6901 [Multi Bin Set]


Specifies whether or not the optional multi-bin output tray is installed. When installing
the multi-bin output tray, this SP mode should be set to “1”.
6901 1 Multi Bin Set *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Not installed
1: Installed

Service
Tables

SM 5-85 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

SP7-XXX (Data Log)


7001 Working Time *BCU Display: 00000000~99999999 min
The number of prints and drive time for drum revolutions can be obtained by counting
the main motor revolution time. If the amount of time required for the drum to revolve
to print 1 copy increases, this data combined with the number of copies can be used
to analyze problems and could be useful for future product development.

7002 [Original Counter]


Displays the total original count (number of originals fed) for the selected mode.
7002 1 Total *CTL
7002 2 Copy
7002 3 Fax
7002 4 Doc. Svr. Application
7002 5 Scanner
7002 6 Others

7003 [Print Counter] Meter Charge Counter


(Print, Development)
Displays the values of the color counters.
7003 1 Total Count *CTL [-9999 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
7003 2 Copy: B&W
7003 4 Copy: Full Color
7003 5 FAX: B&W
7003 7 Print: B&W
7003 8 Print: Full Color
7003 10 Development: CMY *CTL These SP modes are development counters for
7003 11 Development: K the meter charge mode.
7003 12 Copy: Single Color *CTL Displays the values of the color counters.
7003 13 Copy: Twin Color
7003 20 Total: Full Color *CTL These SP modes are used for Japanese
7003 21 Total: B&W Single market only.
7003 22 Total: Single
7003 23 Total: B&W *CTL This SP mode is print counters for the meter
charge mode.
7003 24 Copy: Full Color *CTL These SP modes are used for Japanese
7003 25 Print: Full Color market only.
7003 26 Copy: Color *CTL These SP modes are print counters for the
7003 27 Copy: B/W meter charge mode.
7003 28 Print: Color
7003 29 Print: B&W
7003 30 Total: Color Total

7007 [Other Counter]


Displays counter values.
7007 1 Duplex *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
7007 2 A3/DLT
7007 3 Staple

B202/B178/B180 5-86 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

7101 [Print Count–Paper Size] Paper Size Counter


Displays the counter values for each paper size.
7101 5 A4 LEF *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
7101 6 A5 LEF
7101 14 B5 LEF
7101 38 LT LEF
7101 44 HLT LEF
7101 132 A3 SEF
7101 133 A4 SEF
7101 134 A5 SEF
7101 141 B4 SEF
7101 142 B5 SEF
7101 160 DLT SEF
7101 164 LG SEF
7101 166 LT SEF
7101 172 HLT SEF
7101 255 Other

7105 [Print Count–Paper Size] Paper Size Counter


Displays the counter values for each paper size.
7105 1 Normal *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
7105 2 Recycled
7105 3 Special
7105 4 Color
7105 5 Letterhead
7105 6 Letterhead
7105 7 Label
7105 8 Thick

Service
7105 9 Used

Tables
7105 11 Index
7105 12 Others

7201 [Total Scan Counter]


Displays the total number of scans.
7201 1 Total Scan Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 scan/step]

7204 [Print Counter–Paper Tray] Paper Feed Section Counter


Displays the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.
7204 1 Bypass *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
7204 2 Tray 1
7204 3 Tray 2
7204 4 Tray 3
7204 5 Tray 4
7204 6 Duplex

SM 5-87 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

7205 [Total ADF Counter]


Displays the total number of originals fed by the ARDF.
7205 1 ADF Total Counter *CTL

7206 [Staple Counter]


7206 1 Normal Staple *CTL Displays the number of stapler operations.
7206 2 Binding Staple

7209 [Punch Counter]


Displays the number of times hole punching has been done.
7209 1 Punch *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]

7401 [Total SC Counter]


Displays the number of SC codes detected.
7401 1 SC Counter *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

7403 [SC History]


Logs the SC codes detected.
The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but can be
seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
7403 1 Latest *CTL
7403 2 Latest 1
7403 3 Latest 2
7403 4 Latest 3
7403 5 Latest 4
7403 6 Latest 5
7403 7 Latest 6
7403 8 Latest 7
7403 9 Latest 8
7403 10 Latest 9

7502 [Total Paper Jam Counter]


Displays the total number of jams detected.
7502 1 Total Jam *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

7503 [Total Original Jam Counter]


Displays the total number of original jams.
7503 1 Original Jam counter *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 original/step]

B202/B178/B180 5-88 SM
Rev. 11/2005 COPY SERVICE MODE

7504 [Paper Jam Location]


D: Duplex, MB: Mail Box, F; Finisher, E: External, I: Internal
ON: On check, OFF: Off Check
Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected.
NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.
7504 3 Tray 1: ON *CTL
7504 4 Tray 2: ON
7504 5 Tray 3/LCT: ON
7504 6 Tray 4: ON
7504 8 Regist.: ON
7504 9 External Tray: ON
7504 10 Internal Tray: ON
7504 11 Duplex: ON
7504 12 Duplex Exit 1: ON
7504 13 Duplex Exit 2: ON
7504 14 Duplex Exit 3: ON
7504 15 Duplex Feed: ON
7504 51 Tray 1: OFF
7504 52 Tray 2: OFF
7504 53 Tray 3/LCT: OFF
7504 54 Tray 4: OFF
7504 61 Registration: OFF
7504 63 External Tray: OFF
7504 64 Internal Tray: OFF
7504 65 Duplex: OFF
7504 66 Duplex Exit 1: OFF
7504 67 Duplex Exit 2: OFF
7504 68 Duplex Exit 3: OFF

Service
7504 69 Duplex Feed: OFF

Tables
7504 100 Finisher Entrance
7504 101 Finisher Shift Tray 1
7504 102 Finisher Shift Tray 2
7504 103 Finisher Staple
7504 104 Finisher Exit
7504 105 Finisher Drive
7504 106 Finisher Tray Up/Down
7504 107 Finisher Jogger
7504 108 Finisher Staple
7504 109 Finisher Exit
7504 110 Finisher Punch
7504 111 Finisher Jam Clear
⇒ 7504 120 Finisher Entrance: ON
⇒ 7504 121 Finisher Entrance: OFF
⇒ 7504 122 Finisher STACK Exit
⇒ 7504 123 Finisher Folder: ON
⇒ 7504 124 Finisher Folder: OFF
⇒ 7504 125 Finisher Stapler
⇒ 7504 126 Finisher Punch
⇒ 7504 127 Finisher Transport Motor
⇒ 7504 128 Finisher Paddle Motor
⇒ 7504 129 Finisher Stapler Slide Motor / Stapler Folder Motor
⇒ 7504 130 Finisher Jogger Motor
⇒ 7504 131 Finisher Lift Motor

SM 5-89 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

7505 [Original Jam Detection]


Displays the total number of original jams by location.
7505 1 At Power On *CTL
7505 3 Skew Correction Sensor (On Check)
7505 4 Interval Sensor (On Check)
7505 5 Registration Sensor (On Check)
7505 6 Relay Sensor (On Check)
7505 7 Inverter Sensor (On Check)
7505 53 Skew Correction Sensor (Off Check)
7505 54 Interval Sensor (Off Check)
7505 55 Registration Sensor (Off Check)
7505 56 Relay Sensor (Off Check)
7505 57 Inverter Sensor (Off Check)

7506 [Jam Count by Paper Size]


Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.
7506 5 A4 LEF *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
7506 6 A5 LEF
7506 14 B5 LEF
7506 38 LT LEF
7506 44 HLT LEF
7506 132 A3 SEF
7506 133 A4 SEF
7506 134 A5 SEF
7506 141 B4 SEF
7506 412 B5 SEF
7506 160 DLT SEF
7506 164 LG SEF
7506 166 LT SEF
7506 172 HLT SEF
7506 255 Others

7507 [Plotter Jam History]


Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.
7507 1 Latest *CTL
7507 2 Latest 1
7507 3 Latest 2
7507 4 Latest 3
7507 5 Latest 4
7507 6 Latest 5
7507 7 Latest 6
7507 8 Latest 7
7507 9 Latest 8
7507 10 Latest 9

B202/B178/B180 5-90 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

7508 [Original Jam History]


Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams.
7508 1 Latest *CTL
7508 2 Latest-1
7508 3 Latest-2
7508 4 Latest-3
7508 5 Latest-4
7508 6 Latest-5
7508 7 Latest-6
7508 8 Latest-7
7508 9 Latest-8
7508 10 Latest-9

7801 [ROM No./Firmware Version]


Displays the version of each firmware
7801 Firmware Version
255

7803 [PM Counter]


(Sheets or Rotations, Unit, [Color])
Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Oil Supply: Oil Supply Unit, Fusing:
Fusing Unit, Transfer: Transfer Unit
Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit.
PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets printed.
Therefore, the A3 (DLT) Double Count is activated. The Double Count cannot be
deactivated.
When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is
installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM

Service
Tables
Counter - Previous (SP7-906-1 to 10) and is reset to “0”.
The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked with
SP7-906-1 to 10.
NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.
7803 1 Paper *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
7803 2 S: PCU [K]
7803 3 S: PCU [Y]
7803 4 S: PCU [M]
7803 5 S: PCU [C]
7803 6 S: Dev. [K]
7803 7 S: Dev. [Y]
7803 8 S: Dev. [M]
7803 9 S: Dev. [C]
7803 10 S: Oil Supply
7803 11 PF By-pass
7803 12 PF Tray 1
7803 13 PF Tray 2
7803 14 PF Tray 3
7803 15 PF Tray 4
7803 16 S: Fusing
7803 17 S: Transfer

SM 5-91 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

7803 [PM Counter]


(Sheets or Rotations, Unit, [Color])
Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Oil Supply: Oil Supply Unit, Fusing:
Fusing Unit, Transfer: Transfer Unit
Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current
maintenance unit.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step]
When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is
installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM
Counter - Previous (SP7-906-11 to 20) and is reset to “0”. The total number of
revolutions made with the last unit replaced can be checked with SP7-906-11 to 20.
7803 18 R: PCU [K] *BCU Target Revolution: 300,000
7803 19 R: PCU [Y] Target Revolution: 319,000
7803 20 R: PCU [M] Target Revolution: 319,000
7803 21 R: PCU [C] Target Revolution: 319,000
7803 22 R: Dev. [K] Target Revolution: 1,142,000
7803 23 R: Dev. [Y] Target Revolution: 1,146,000
7803 24 R: Dev. [M] Target Revolution: 1,146,000
7803 25 R: Dev. [C] Target Revolution: 1,146,000
7803 26 R: Oil Supply Target Revolution: 2,559,000
7803 27 R: Fusing Target Revolution: 8,397,000
7803 28 R: Transfer
Displays the number of sheets printed until the waste toner bottle becomes full or
toner runs out.
7803 29 S: Waste Toner *BCU [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 sheet/step]
7803 30 S: Toner [K]
7803 31 S: Toner [Y]
7803 32 S: Toner [M]
7803 33 S: Toner [C]
Displays the total operating time for the toner attraction pump.
7803 34 Toner Supply [K] *BCU [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 s/step]
7803 35 Toner Supply [Y]
7803 36 Toner Supply [M]
7803 37 Toner Supply[C]
Displays the value given by the following formula:
(Current revolution ÷ Target revolution) × 100. This shows how much of the unit’s
expected lifetime has been used up.
The R% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reaches
the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the print count lifetime is
reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the R% counter
is still less than 100%.
Oil supply unit: When the R% counter reaches 100%, it enters the near-end condition,
not the end condition. The end condition occurs some number of rotations after this
(not adjustable).
NOTE: The machine internally adjusts or compensates as necessary, depending on
conditions of machine usage. Due to this, at the oil supply unit near-end
condition, the R% counter of the oil supply unit can be 100%, lower than
100%, or higher than 100%.
7803 38 R(%): PCU [K] *BCU
7803 39 R(%): PCU [Y]
7803 40 R(%): PCU [M]
7803 41 R(%): PCU [C]
7803 42 R(%): Dev [K]
7803 43 R(%): Dev [Y]
7803 44 R(%): Dev [M]
7803 45 R(%): Dev [C]

B202/B178/B180 5-92 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

7803 [PM Counter]


(Sheets or Rotations, Unit, [Color])
Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Oil Supply: Oil Supply Unit, Fusing:
Fusing Unit, Transfer: Transfer Unit
7803 46 R(%): Oil Supply
7803 47 R(%): Fusing
7803 48 S: Trans Cln
7803 49 R: Trans Cln

7804 [PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear


(Unit, [Color])
Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Transfer: Transfer Unit
Clears the PM counter.
Press the Enter key after the machine asks “Execute?”, which will store the PM
counter value in SP7-906-1 to 35 (PM Counter - Previous) and reset the value of the
current PM counter to 0.
NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.
7804 1 Paper
7804 2 PCU [K]
7804 3 PCU [Y]
7804 4 PCU [M]
7804 5 PCU [C]
7804 6 Dev. [K]
7804 7 Dev. [Y]
7804 8 Dev. [M]
7804 9 Dev. [C]
7804 10 Oil Supply
7804 11 PF By-pass
7804 12 PF Tray 1
7804 13 PF Tray 2

Service
Tables
7804 14 PF Tray 3
7804 15 PF Tray 4
7804 16 Fusing
7804 17 Transfer
7804 18 Trans Cln
7804 50 All

7807 [SC/Jam Counter Reset]


Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.
7807 1 SC/Jam Clear

7808 [Counter Reset]


NOTE: For more information, see “NOTE 1” following this table.
Clears all counters.
7808 1 Counter Clear

7810 [Access Code Clear]


Use to clear the access code if the customer forgets the code (password).
7810 1 Access Code Clear

7811 [Original Counter Clear]

SM 5-93 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

7811 1 This program reset the original counter (SP7-002-001 through 006).

7816 [Tray Clear] Paper Tray Counter Clear


Clears the counters (SP7-204) for the number of sheets fed from the paper feed
stations.
NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.
7816 1 Bypass Tray
7816 2 Tray 1
7816 3 Tray 2
7816 4 Tray 3/LCT
7816 5 Tray 4
7816 6 Duplex

7826 [MF Error Counter] Japan Only


7826 1 Error Total
7826 2 Error Staple

7827 [MF Error Counter Clear] Japan Only

7832 [Self-Diagnose Result Display]


Displays the result of the diagnostics.
7832 1 Diag. Result *CTL

7833 [Coverage] Pixel Coverage Ratio


Displays the image coverage ratio for each color of the last output.
This SP mode displays the “coverage ratio” of the output, i.e. the ratio of the total
pixel area of the image data to the total printable area on the paper. Note that this
value is not directly proportional to the amount of toner consumed, although of course
it is one factor that affects this amount. The other major factors involved include: the
type, total image area and image density of the original, toner concentration and
developer potential.
7833 1 Last [K] *BCU [0 to 100.00 / - / 0.01 %/step]
7833 2 Last [C]
7833 3 Last [M]
7833 4 Last [Y]
Displays accumulated average value of image coverage ratio for each color.
SP 7-833-5 to -8 vs SP 8-831-1 to –4
The averages for K (SP 7-833-5 and SP 8-831-1) are the same.
For CMY, SP 8-831 does not include black-and-white pages in the middle of a color
job. However, SP 7-833 does include these pages in the average. As a result, the
readings of SP 7-833 will be lower, because these averages include pages for which
there is zero for CMY, but the averages calculated for SP 8-831 do not include these
pages.

7833 5 Average [K] *BCU [0 to 100.00 / - / 0.01 %/step]


7833 6 Average [C]
7833 7 Average [M]
7833 8 Average [Y]

B202/B178/B180 5-94 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

Displays the total number of toner cartridges replaced.


7833 11 Toner [K] *BCU [0 to 65535 / - / 1 cartridge/step]
7833 12 Toner [C] NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011
7833 13 Toner [M] through 014 and the data in SP8-781-001
7833 14 Toner [Y] through 004 are the same.

7834 [Coverage Clr] Coverage/Toner Data Clear


7834 1 Average This menu resets the data in SP7-833-005
through 008.
7834 2 Toner This menu resets the data in SP7-833-011
through 014 and SP8-781-001 through 004.
7834 3 S: PREV Toner This menu resets the data in SP8-901-001
through 004.
7834 4 S: Coverage 0-100 This menu resets the data in SP8-851-001
through 004, SP8-861-001 through 004, SP 8-
871-001 through 004, and SP8-881-001
through 004.
7834 255 All This menu resets all the data listed above.

7835 ACC Counter *CTL [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]


7835 1 Copy ACC Displays the number of times ACC has been
7835 2 Printer ACC done.

7836 Total Memory Size


Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.

7852 ADF Scan Glass Dust Check Counter

Service
Tables
Counts the number of occurrences (0 ~ 65,535) when dust was detected on the
scanning glass of the ADF. Counting is done only if SP4020 1 (ADF Scan Glass Dust
Check) is switched on. Memory All Clear (SP5801) resets this counter to zero

7901 [Assert Info]


Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data stored in
this SP is used for problem analysis. DFU
7901 1 File Name
7901 2 Number of Lines
7901 3 Location

7905 [Alert Display]


7905 10 Wst Oil: Full *BCU [232 to 464 / 232 / 1 kilo-revolutions/step]
Specifies the number of revolutions the development drive motor-K can make after
the message, “Waste Oil Bottle is Almost Full”, is displayed.
The machine stops after the motor has made the specified number of revolutions.
This SP specifies the interval from near end to end for the waste oil bottle. 232k
revolutions equals 2.5k prints. If it is set to 464, the end condition is 5.0k prints after
near end.
7905 14 Oil: Alert: Page *BCU [25.0 to 27.5 / 27.5 / 0.1 kilo-sheets/step]
Specifies the number of sheets the machine can output after the oil supply reaches
the near-end condition.

SM 5-95 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

7906 [PM Counter: Previous]


(Sheets or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit
Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units.
7906 1 S:PCU [K] *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
7906 2 S:PCU [Y]
7906 3 S:PCU [M]
7906 4 S:PCU [C]
7906 5 S:Dev. [K]
7906 6 S:Dev. [Y]
7906 7 S:Dev. [M]
7906 8 S:Dev. [C]
7906 9 S:Oil Supply
7906 10 S:Fusing
Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous
maintenance units.
7906 11 R:PCU [K] *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step]
7906 12 R:PCU [Y]
7906 13 R:PCU [M]
7906 14 R:PCU [C]
7906 15 R:Dev. [K]
7906 16 R:Dev. [Y]
7906 17 R:Dev. [M]
7906 18 R:Dev. [C]
7906 19 R:Oil Supply
7906 20 R:Fusing
Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or toner
cartridge.
7906 21 S:Waste Toner *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
7906 22 S:Toner [K]
7906 23 S:Toner [Y]
7906 24 S:Toner [M]
7906 25 S:Toner [C]
Displays the value given by the following formula:
(Current count ÷ Yield count) x 100, where “Current count” is the current values in the
counter for the part, and “Yield count” is the recommended yield.
7906 26 R(%): PCU [K] *BCU [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 %/step]
7906 27 R(%): PCU [Y]
7906 28 R(%): PCU [M]
7906 29 R(%): PCU [C]
7906 30 R(%): Dev [K]
7906 31 R(%): Dev [Y]
7906 32 R(%): Dev [M]
7906 33 R(%): Dev [C]
7906 34 R(%): Oil Supply
7906 35 R(%): Fusing

7907 [Check Sum]


Displays the check sum of the firmware.
7907 1 Engine Main *BCU
7907 2 Engine MUSIC

B202/B178/B180 5-96 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

SP8-xxx: Data Log2


Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available,
such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes
that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8 211~SP8 216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8 401~SP8 406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8 691~SP8 696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:
• How is the document server actually being used?
• What application is using the document server most frequently?
• What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of
operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an “application”). Before reading
the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes
mean.

Prefixes What it means


T: Total: (Grand Total). Grand total of the items counted for all
applications (C, F, P, etc.).
C: Copy application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each
F: Fax application. application when the job was not stored on the
P: Print application. document server.
S: Scan application.
L: Local storage Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document
(document server) server. The L: counters work differently case by

Service
Tables
case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored
on the document server; this can be in
document server mode (from the document
server window), or from another mode, such as
from a printer driver or by pressing the Store
File button in the Copy mode window.
Sometimes, they include occasions when the
user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
O: Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web
(external network Image Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK
applications, for (Software Development Kit) will also be counted
example) with this group in the future.

SM 5-97 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of


displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs.
Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name
of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation What it means
/ “By”, e.g. “T:Jobs/Apl” = Total Jobs “by” Application
> More (2> “2 or more”, 4> “4 or more”
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
DesApl Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,
Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
GPC Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter
does not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this
counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10
(e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI,
e.g. border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
NRS New Remote Service, which allows a service center to
monitor machines remotely. “NRS” is used overseas, “CSS”
is used in Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Palm 2 Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that
allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers
on the network, and allows files to moved around,
combined, and converted to different formats.
PC Personal Computer

B202/B178/B180 5-98 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

Abbreviation What it means


PGS Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.
Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as
two pages if the 11 X 17 inch counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
R Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model
A2 only. This machine is under development and currently
not available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8
counters are recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black

NOTE: All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.

Service
Tables

SM 5-99 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 001 T:Total Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of times each
8 002 C:Total Jobs *CTL application is used to do a job.
8 003 F:Total Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 004 P:Total Jobs *CTL Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the
8 005 S:Total Jobs *CTL other applications are used to send a job to the
document server, plus the number of times a file
8 006 L:Total Jobs *CTL
already on the document server is used.
8 007 O:Total Jobs *CTL

• These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of
pages processed.
• When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
• Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer
engineer using the SP modes are not counted.
• When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job),
the job is counted at the time when either “Delete Data” or “Specify Output” is
specified.
• A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
• When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L:
counter does not (the document server is not used).
• A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the
broadcast are not counted separately).
• A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their
destinations. If one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not
be counted until the transmission has been completed.
• A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
• The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
• When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments,
and when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also
increments.
• When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and
L: counters both increment.
• When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter
increments.
• When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
• When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
• When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter
increments.
• When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter
increments. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax
application, the F: counter increments.

B202/B178/B180 5-100 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 011 T:Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the
8 012 C:Jobs/LS *CTL document server by each application, to reveal how
8 013 F:Jobs/LS *CTL local storage is being used for input.
8 014 P:Jobs/LS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 015 S:Jobs/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from
within the document server mode screen at the
8 016 L:Jobs/LS *CTL
operation panel.
8 017 O:Jobs/LS *CTL

• When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments.
When you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter
increments.
• When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
• When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter
increments.
• When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter
increments.
• When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.

8 021 T:Pjob/LS *CTL These SPs reveal how files printed from the
8 022 C:Pjob/LS *CTL document server were stored on the document
8 023 F:Pjob/LS *CTL server originally.
8 024 P:Pjob/LS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 025 S:Pjob/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs
stored from within the document server mode
8 026 L:Pjob/LS *CTL
screen at the operation panel.
8 027 O:Pjob/LS *CTL

Service
Tables
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the C: counter increments.
• When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on
the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the
C: and P: counters both increment.
• When a job already on the document server is printed with another application,
the L: counter increments.
• When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within
document server mode, then the L: counter increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application (including
Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network
application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
• When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.

SM 5-101 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL These SPs reveal what applications were used
8 032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL to output documents from the document server.
8 033 F:Pjob/DesApl *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs
8 035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL printed from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel.
8 036 L:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
8 037 O:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

• When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count
for the application that started the print job is incremented.
• When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web
Image Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.

8 041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the applications that stored
8 042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL files on the document server that were later
8 043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL accessed for transmission over the telephone
8 044 P:TX Jobs/LS *CTL line or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or
as a fax image by I-Fax).
8 045 S:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 046 L:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted
8 047 O:TX Jobs/LS *CTL separately.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
scanned from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel.

• When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter
increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2
is sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.

8 051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL These SPs count the applications used to send
8 052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL files from the document server over the
8 053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL telephone line or over a network (attached to an
8 054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs
merged for sending are counted separately.
8 055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent
8 057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL from within the document server mode screen
at the operation panel.

• If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example,
then the O: counter increments.

B202/B178/B180 5-102 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 061 T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
8 062 C:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.

8 063 F:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
8 064 P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
8 065 S:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
8 066 L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified
from the print window within document server mode.
8 067 O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external
application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the
application.

Service
Tables
8 06x 1 Sort Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is set
for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter
increments. (See SP8 066 1)
8 06x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
8 06x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
8 06x 4 Bookle Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staple
t mode, the Staple counter also increments.
8 06x 5 Z-Fold Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode
and set for folding (Z-fold).
8 06x 6 Punch Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a
print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8 064 6.)
8 06x 7 Other Reserved. Not used.

SM 5-103 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 071 T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages
in the job, regardless of which application was used.
8 072 C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
8 073 F:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
8 074 P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
8 075 S:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
8 076 L:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of
pages in the job.
8 077 O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of “Other” application jobs (Web
Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the
job.
8 07x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21~50 Pages
8 07x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51~100 Pages
8 07x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101~300 Pages
8 07x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301~500 Pages
8 07x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501~700 Pages
8 07x 6 6~10 Pages 8 07x 13 701~1000 Pages
8 07x 7 11~20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001~ Pages

• For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in
document server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
• Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
• Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
• If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is
counted at the time the error occurs.
• For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by
multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One
duplex page counts as 2.)
• The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the
number of pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
• When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the
page is counted.

B202/B178/B180 5-104 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 111 T:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by
fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a
telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8 113 FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by
fax directly on a telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8 11x 1 B/W
8 11x 2 Color

• These counters count jobs, not pages.


• This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application,
including documents stored on the document server.
• If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the
job started.
• If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination
where both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x)
also increments.
• The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.

8 121 T:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent,
either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images
using I-Fax.

Service
Tables
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8 123 IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not
stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8 12x 1 B/W
8 12x 2 Color

• These counters count jobs, not pages.


• The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not
available at this time.
• The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is
sent.

SM 5-105 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 131 T:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was
used or not.
8 135 S-to-Email Jobs *CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and
attached to e-mail, without storing the original on the document server.
8 13x 1 B/W
8 13x 2 Color
8 13x 3 ACS
• These counters count jobs, not pages.
• If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined
to be color or black-and-white then counted.
• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending
on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
• If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or
Scan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. Each send is
counted separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email
as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once
for Scan-to-PC).

8 141 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and sent to a Scan Router server.
8 145 Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in
scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
8 14x 1 B/W
8 14x 2 Color
8 14x 3 ACS
• These counters count jobs, not pages.
• The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the
Scan Router server cannot be confirmed.
• If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is
counted as a “Color” job.
• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending
on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.

B202/B178/B180 5-106 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 151 T:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts.
8 155 S:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and sent with Scan-to-PC.
8 15x 1 B/W
8 15x 2 Color
8 15x 3 ACS

• These counters count jobs, not pages.


• If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending
on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.

8 161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of PC Fax
8 163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL transmission jobs. A job is counted from when it
is registered for sending, not when it is sent.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters

Service
Tables
perform identical counts.

• This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending
the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier.

8 191 T:Total Scan PGS *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by each
8 192 C:Total Scan PGS *CTL application that uses the scanner to scan
8 193 F:Total Scan PGS *CTL images.
8 195 S:Total Scan PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 196 L:Total Scan PGS *CTL

• SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number
of physical pages.
• These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to
adjust color.
• Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
• A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
• Scans made in SP mode are not counted.

SM 5-107 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

Examples
• If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not
stored, the S: count is 4.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using
the Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L:
count is 6.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.

8 201 T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission
are not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display.
8 205 S:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are
not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display.

8 211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned
8 212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL into the document server.
8 213 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 215 S:Scan PGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
8 216 L:Scan PGS/LS *CTL stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen

• Reading user stamp data is not counted.


• If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
• If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S:
count is 4.
• If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not
change.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C:
count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.

B202/B178/B180 5-108 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 221 ADF Org Feeds *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and
backside scanning.
8 221 1 Front Number of front sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either
simplex or duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front
side scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user
loads face up.)
8 221 2 Back Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side
scanning.

• When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count
is 1.
• If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double
counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet
is output.

8 231 Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

Service
Tables
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the workload on the ADF.
8 231 1 Large Volume Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded
in the ADF at one time.
8 231 2 SADF Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the
ADF.
8 231 3 Mixed Size Selectable. Select “Mixed Sizes” on the operation
panel.
8 231 4 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
8 231 5 Platen Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the
original directly on the platen.

• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
• The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application
so if the original’s page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
• If the user selects “Mixed Sizes” for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size
count is enabled.
• In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2
pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.

SM 5-109 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 241 T:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all
jobs, regardless of which application was used.
8 242 C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy
jobs.
8 243 F:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.
8 245 S:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan
jobs.
8 246 L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen
8 247 O:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type by Other
applications.
8 241 8 242 8 243 8 245 8 246 8 247
8 24x 1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 2: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 4: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 5: Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 6: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No No
8 24x 7: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No No
8 24x 8: Binary Yes No No Yes No No
8 24x 9: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No No
8 24x 10: Color Yes No No Yes No No
8 24x 11: Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.

B202/B178/B180 5-110 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL These SPs show how many times Image Edit
8 252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL features have been selected at the operation
8 254 P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL panel for each application. Some examples of
8 256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL these editing features are:
8 257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL • Erase> Border
• Erase> Center
• Image Repeat
• Centering
• Positive/Negative
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the
edit features have been used. A detailed
breakdown of exactly which features have been
used is not given.

The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.

8 261 T:Scan PGS/ColCr *CTL


8 262 C:Scan PGS/ ColCr *CTL
8 266 L:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL
8 26x 1 Color Conversion These SPs show how many times color creation
8 26x 2 Color Erase features have been selected at the operation
8 26x 3 Background panel.
8 26x 4 Other

8 281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned

Service
Tables
8 285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL using a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal
how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery
functions.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.

8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL These SPs count the number of pages stamped
8 293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL with the stamp in the ADF unit.
8 295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 296 L:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen

SM 5-111 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 301 T:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-441].
8 302 C:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].
8 303 F:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output page size [SP 8-443].
8 305 S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output page size [SP 8-445].
8 306 L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to
compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446].
8 30x 1 A3
8 30x 2 A4
8 30x 3 A5
8 30x 4 B4
8 30x 5 B5
8 30x 6 DLT
8 30x 7 LG
8 30x 8 LT
8 30x 9 HLT
8 30x 10 Full Bleed
8 30x 254 Other (Standard)
8 30x 255 Other (Custom)

B202/B178/B180 5-112 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 311 T:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
8 315 Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
Note: At the present time, 8 311 and 8 315 perform identical counts.
8 31x 1 1200dpi ~
8 31x 2 600dpi~1199dpi
8 31x 3 400dpi~599dpi
8 31x 4 200dpi~399dpi
8 31x 5 ~199dpi

• Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.


• The Fax application does not allow finely adjusted resolution settings so no count
is done for the Fax application.

Service
Tables

SM 5-113 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 321 T:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count by compression method the total number of pages
scanned.
8 325 S:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by compression method the total number of pages
scanned by the Scan application.
Note: At the present time, 8 321 and 8 325 perform identical counts.
8 32x 1 JPEG
8 32x 2 JPEG2000
8 32x 3 TIFF (Comp OFF)
8 32x 4 TIFF (Comp ON)
8 32x 5 PDF
8 32x 6 Other

8 381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
8 382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL by the customer. The counter for the application
8 383 F:Total PrtPGS *CTL used for storing the pages increments.
8 384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 385 S:Total PrtPGS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server mode
8 386 L:Total PrtPGS *CTL
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored
8 387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL with the Store File button from within the Copy
mode screen go to the C: counter.

• When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT
page is counted as 2.
• When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored
is counted for the application that stored them.
• These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine,
so the following pages are not counted as printed pages:
• Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
• Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip-
sheets.
• Reports printed to confirm counts.
• All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine
maintenance reports, etc.)
• Test prints for machine image adjustment.
• Error notification reports.
• Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.

B202/B178/B180 5-114 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 391 LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.

8 401 T:PrtPGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
8 402 C:PrtPGS/LS *CTL from the document server. The counter for the
8 403 F:PrtPGS/LS *CTL application used to print the pages is
8 404 P:PrtPGS/LS *CTL incremented.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
8 405 S:PrtPGS/LS *CTL
stored from within the document server mode
8 406 L:PrtPGS/LS *CTL screen at the operation panel.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the
L: count.
• Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F:
count.

Service
Tables

SM 5-115 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 411 Prints/Duplex *CTL This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back


counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing.
Last pages printed only on one side are not
counted.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 421 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
8 422 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by the copier application.
8 423 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by the fax application.
8 424 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by the printer application.
8 425 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
8 426 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window
at the operation panel.
8 427 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by Other applications
8 42x 1 Simplex> Duplex
8 42x 2 Duplex> Duplex
8 42x 3 Book> Duplex
8 42x 4 Simplex Combine
8 42x 5 Duplex Combine
8 42x 6 2> 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
8 42x 7 4> 4 pages on 1 side (4-Up)
8 42x 8 6> 6 pages on 1 side (6-Up)
8 42x 9 8> 8 pages on 1 side (8-Up)
8 42x 10 9> 9 pages on 1 side (9-Up)
8 42x 11 16> 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up)
8 42x 12 Booklet
8 42x 13 Magazine

• These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who
need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper
consumption.
• Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1
page.
• Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:

B202/B178/B180 5-116 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

Booklet Magazine
Original Original
Count Count
Pages Pages
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4

8 431 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
8 432 C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below with the copy application.
8 434 P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below with the print application.
8 436 L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.
8 437 O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

Service
Tables
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below with Other applications.
8 43x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip-sheets inserted. The
count for a cover printed on both side’s counts 2.
8 43x 2 Series/Book The number of pages printed in series (one side) or
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
8 43x 3 User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps were
applied, including page numbering and date stamping.

SM 5-117 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 441 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
8 442 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
copy application.
8 443 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax
application.
8 444 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
printer application.
8 445 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
scanner application.
8 446 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within
the document server mode window at the operation panel.
8 447 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
8 44x 1 A3
8 44x 2 A4
8 44x 3 A5
8 44x 4 B4
8 44x 5 B5
8 44x 6 DLT
8 44x 7 LG
8 44x 8 LT
8 44x 9 HLT
8 44x 10 Full Bleed
8 44x Other (Standard)
254
8 44x Other (Custom)
255

• These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.

B202/B178/B180 5-118 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 451 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
8 451 1 Bypass Bypass Tray
8 451 2 Tray 1 Copier
8 451 3 Tray 2 Copier
8 451 4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8 451 5 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8 451 6 Tray 5 LCT (Option)
8 451 7 Tray 6 Currently not used.
8 451 8 Tray 7 Currently not used.
8 451 9 Tray 8 Currently not used.
8 451 10 Tray 9 Currently not used.

8 461 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
• These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is
based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed
rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
• Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
• During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a
page printed on one side counts as 1.
8 462 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
8 463 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax

Service
Tables
application.
8 464 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
8 466 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
8 46x 1 Normal
8 46x 2 Recycled
8 46x 3 Special
8 46x 4 Thick
8 46x 5 Normal (Back)
8 46x 6 Thick (Back)
8 46x 7 OHP
8 46x 8 Other

SM 5-119 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 471 PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
8 471 1 ~49%
8 471 2 50%~99%
8 471 3 100%
8 471 4 101%~200%
8 471 5 201% ~

• Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation
panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of
performing magnification adjustment as well.
• Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as
Excel are also counted.
• Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on
the document server are not counted.
• Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge
copying are counted.
• The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip-sheets, etc. are automatically
assigned a rate of 100%.

8 481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL


8 484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results, as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 491 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
8 492 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL in the Color Mode by each application.
8 493 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 496 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 49x 1 B/W
8 49x 2 Single Color
8 49x 3 Two Color
8 49x 4 Full Color

8 501 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
8 504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL in the Color Mode by the print application.
8 50x 1 B/W
8 50x 2 Single Color
8 50x 3 Full Color

B202/B178/B180 5-120 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 511 T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
8 514 P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
8 514 1 RPCS
8 514 2 RPDL
8 514 3 PS3
8 514 4 R98
8 514 5 R16
8 514 6 GL/GL2
8 514 7 R55
8 514 8 RTIFF
8 514 9 PDF
8 514 10 PCL5e/5c
8 514 11 PCL XL
8 514 12 IPDL-C
8 514 13 BM-Links Japan Only
8 514 14 Other

• SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results, as they are both limited to the
Print application.
• Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.

Service
Tables

SM 5-121 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 521 T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
8 522 C:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Copy application.
8 523 F:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Fax application.
NOTE: Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
8 524 P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Print application.
8 525 S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Scanner application.
8 526 L:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
8 52x 1 Sort
8 52x 2 Stack
8 52x 3 Staple
8 52x 4 Booklet
8 52x 5 Z-Fold
8 52x 6 Punch
8 52x 7 Other

NOTE: 1) If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling,
the unstapled pages are still counted.
2) The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so
jam recoveries are counted.

8 531 Staples *CTL This SP counts the amount of staples used


by the machine.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 581 T:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of
the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8 581 1 Total
8 581 2 Total: Full Color
8 581 3 B&W/Single Color
8 581 4 Development: CMY
8 581 5 Development: K
8 581 6 Copy: Color
8 581 7 Copy: B/W
8 581 8 Print: Color

B202/B178/B180 5-122 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 581 T:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of
the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8 581 9 Print: B/W
8 581 10 Total: Color
8 581 11 Total: B/W
8 581 12 Full Color: A3
8 581 13 Full Color: B4 JIS or Smaller
8 581 14 Full Color Print
8 581 15 Mono Color Print
8 581 16 Full Color GPC

8 582 C:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by
color output.
8 582 1 B/W
8 582 2 Single Color
8 582 3 Two Color
8 582 4 Full Color

8 583 F:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by color
output.
8 583 1 B/W
8 583 2 Single Color

Service
Tables
8 584 P:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by
color output.
8 584 1 B/W
8 584 2 Single Color
8 584 3 Full Color

8 586 L:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color
output.
8 582 1 B/W
8 582 2 Single Color
8 582 3 Two Color
8 582 4 Full Color

SM 5-123 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 591 O:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
8 591 1 A3/DLT
8 591 2 Duplex
8 591 3 Staple

8 631 T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
8 633 FAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
8 63x 1 B/W
8 63x 2 Color

• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8631 and SP8633 are the same.
• The counts include error pages.
• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.

B202/B178/B180 5-124 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 641 T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax
images using I-Fax.
8 643 IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax
images using I-Fax.
8 64x 1 B/W
8 64x 2 Color

• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8641 and SP8643 are the same.
• The counts include error pages.
• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.

Service
Tables

SM 5-125 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 651 T:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-
mail for both the Scan and document server applications.
8 655 S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-
mail for the Scan application only.
8 656 L:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-
mail for LS applications only.
8 65x 1 B/W
8 65x 2 Color

NOTE: 1) The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored
on the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not
counted.
2) If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses,
the count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
3) If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the
count is 50 (the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP
server).
4) Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a
10-page document to a large number of destinations, the count may be
divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is
sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and
the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).

B202/B178/B180 5-126 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 661 T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
8 665 Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by the Scan application.
8 666 L:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by LS applications.
8 66x 1 B/W
8 66x 2 Color

NOTE: 1) The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the
HDD of the Scan Router server.
2) If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes,
the counts are not done.
3) The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at
the Scan Router server.

8 671 T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
8 675 Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-
to-PC with the Scan application.
8 676 L:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

Service
Tables
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-
to-PC function with the LS applications.
8 67x 1 B/W
8 67x 2 Color

SM 5-127 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 681 T:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC
8 683 PCFAX TXPGS *CTL Fax. These SPs are provided for the Fax
application only, so the counts for SP8 681 and
SP8 683 are the same.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

• This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC
through the copier to the destination.
• When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting,
the pages are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location
A and location B. The counter goes up by 10, not 20.)

8 691 T:TX PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent from
8 692 C:TX PGS/LS *CTL the document server. The counter for the
8 693 F:TX PGS/LS *CTL application that was used to store the pages is
8 694 P:TX PGS/LS *CTL incremented.
8 695 S:TX PGS/LS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
8 696 L:TX PGS/LS *CTL
from within the document server mode screen at
the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen go
to the C: counter.

NOTE: 1) Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are
added to the count.
2) If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages
stored is counted for the application that stored them.
3) When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is
done for the number of pages sent to each destination.

8 701 TX PGS/Port *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to
send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via
ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
8 701 1 PSTN-1
8 701 2 PSTN-2
8 701 3 PSTN-3
8 701 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8 701 5 Network

8 715 S:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode.
8 715 1 JPEG/JPEG2000
8 715 2 TIFF(Multi/Single)
8 715 3 PDF
8 715 4 Other

B202/B178/B180 5-128 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 741 RX PGS/Port *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port
used to receive them.
8 741 1 PSTN-1
8 741 2 PSTN-2
8 741 3 PSTN-3
8 741 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8 741 5 Network

8 771 Dev Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the
development rollers) for black and other color toners.
8 771 1 Total
8 771 2 K
8 771 3 Y
8 771 4 M
8 771 5 C

8 781 Toner Bottle Info. *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in SP8-
781-001 through 004 are the same.
8 781 1 Toner [BK] The number of black-toner bottles
8 781 2 Toner [Y] The number of yellow-toner bottles
8 781 3 Toner [M] The number of magenta-toner bottles
8 781 4 Toner [C] The number of cyan-toner bottles

Service
Tables
8 791 LS Memory Remain *CTL This SP displays the percent of space
available on the document server for
storing documents.
[0~100/ 0 / 1]

8 801 Toner Remain *CTL [0~100/ 0 / 1]


These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP
allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps)
is better than other machines in the market that can only measure in
increments of 10 (10% steps).
8 801 1 K
8 801 2 Y
8 801 3 M
8 801 4 C

SM 5-129 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 831 Coverage *BCU [0~100/ 0 / 1]


These SPs display the average coverage by color. ( SP 7-833)
8 831 1 Average [BK]
8 831 2 Average [Y]
8 831 3 Average [M]
8 831 4 Average [C]

8 841 Coverage *BCU [0~100/ 0 / 1]


These SPs display the coverage of the last print by color. ( SP 7-833)
8 841 1 Last [BK]
8 841 2 Last [Y]
8 841 3 Last [M]
8 841 4 Last [C]

8 851 Coverage: 0-10% *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is from 0% to 10%.
8 851 1 S: BK
8 851 2 S: Y
8 851 3 S: M
8 851 4 S: C

8 861 Coverage: 11-20% *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is from 11% to 20%.
8 851 1 S: BK
8 851 2 S: Y
8 851 3 S: M
8 851 4 S: C

8 871 Coverage: 21-30% *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is from 21% to 30%.
8 871 1 S: BK
8 871 2 S: Y
8 871 3 S: M
8 871 4 S: C

8 881 Coverage: 31%- *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is 31% or higher.
8 881 1 S: BK
8 881 2 S: Y
8 881 3 S: M
8 881 4 S: C

B202/B178/B180 5-130 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 891 PM Counter *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs display the number of sheets output by the scan application.
8 891 1 S: Toner [BK]
8 891 2 S: Toner [Y]
8 891 3 S: Toner [M]
8 891 4 S: Toner [C]

8 901 PM Counter: Previous *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs display the number of sheets output by the scan application with
the previously replaced units.
8 901 1 S: Toner [BK]
8 901 2 S: Toner [Y]
8 901 3 S: Toner [M]
8 901 4 S: Toner [C]

8 941 Machine Status *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]


These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine
operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
8 941 1 Operation Time Engine operation time. Does not include time while
controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
8 941 2 Standby Time Engine not operating. Includes time while controller
saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
8 941 3 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performing
background printing.

Service
Tables
8 941 4 Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing.
8 941 5 Off Mode Time Includes time while machine is performing
background printing. Does not include time machine
remains powered off with the power switches.
8 941 6 Down Time/SC Total down time due to SC errors.
8 941 7 Down Time/PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
8 941 8 Down Time/OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning.
8 941 9 Down Time/TonEnd Total down time due to toner end.

SM 5-131 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

8 951 AddBook Register *CTL


These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
8 951 1 User Code User code registrations. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations.
8 951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.
8 951 4 Group Group destination registrations.
8 951 5 Transfer Request Fax relay destination registrations
for relay TX.
8 951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations.
8 951 7 Copy Program Copy application registrations with [0~255 / 0 / 255]
the Program (job settings) feature.
8 951 8 Fax Program Fax application registrations with
the Program (job settings) feature.
8 951 9 Printer Program Printer application registrations
with the Program (job settings)
feature.
8 951 10 Scanner Scanner application registrations
Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.

B202/B178/B180 5-132 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

NOTE: Memory Clear (SP5-801)


The following tables list the items that are cleared. The serial number information,
meter charge setting and meter charge counters (SP8-581, 582, 583, 584, and
586) are not cleared.
5801 [Memory Clear]
5801 1 All Clear Resets all correction data for process control and all
software counters, and returns all modes and
adjustments to their default values.
5801 2 ENG All Clears the engine settings.
5801 3 SCS Initializes default system settings, SCS (System
Control Service) settings, operation display
coordinates, and ROM update information.
5801 4 IMH No SP modes are cleared. But, all files stored in the
HDD are cleared.
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
5801 5 MCS No SP modes are cleared.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
5801 6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.
5801 7 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer.
5801 8 Printer application The following service settings:
• Bit switches
• Gamma settings (User & Service)
• Toner Limit
The following user settings:
• Tray Priority
• Menu Protect
• System Setting except for setting of Energy Saver
• I/F Setup (I/O Buffer and I/O Timeout)
• PCL Menu

Service
5801 9 Scanner application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all

Tables
the scanner SP modes.
5801 10 Netfile application Deletes the network file application management files
and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
5801 11 NCS All setting of Network Setup (User Menu)
(NCS: Network Control Service)
5801 12 IPU Clears the IPU settings
5801 13 R-Fax Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
5801 14 Clear DCS Settings Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
5801 15 Clear UCS Settings Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service)
settings.
5801 16 MIRS Setting Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report
Service) settings.
5801 17 CCS Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control
Service) settings.

5998 [Memory Clear]


5998 1 ENG Setting All engine related SP modes except for the following:
• Serial number information
• SP modes related to meter charge
• Counters and logging data
5998 2 ENG Counter All counters and logging data related to engine

SM 5-133 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

5.2.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE


When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each
digit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.

Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1

5803 Reading
Bit Description
0 1
5803 1 Paper Tray 1
0 Paper End Sensor Paper end Paper detected
1 Paper Lift Sensor Activated
Deactivated (Actuator not
inside sensor)
2 Paper Height Sensor 1
See Table 1.
3 Paper Height Sensor 2
4 Tray Set Not set Set
5803 2 Paper Tray 2
0 Paper End Sensor Paper end Paper detected
1 Paper Lift Sensor Activated
Deactivated (Actuator not
inside sensor)
2 Paper Height Sensor 1 See Table 1.
3 Paper Height Sensor 2 1: Activated
(Actuator inside sensor)
4 Paper Size Switch 1
5 Paper Size Switch 2 See Table 2.
6 Paper Size Switch 3 1: Pushed
7 Paper Size Switch 4
5803 3 By-pass Table
0 Paper End Sensor Paper end Paper detected
1 Paper Size 1
2 Paper Size 2
See Table 3.
3 Paper Size 3
4 Paper Size 4
5803 4 Doors
0 Front Door Switch Opened Closed
1 Left Door Switch Opened Closed
2 Right Door Switch Opened Closed
3 Vertical Transport Switch Opened Closed
4 Duplex Inverter Unit Switch Opened Closed
5 Right Door Switch (LCT/PFU) Opened Closed
5803 5 Paper Feed
0 Relay Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
1 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Upper Relay Sensor (PFU) Paper not detected Paper detected
3 Lower Relay Sensor (PFU) Paper not detected Paper detected
4 Registration Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
5 Duplex Inverter Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6 Duplex Feed Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

B202/B178/B180 5-134 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

5803 6 Paper Exit


0 Fusing Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
1 Paper Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Duplex Exit Sensor 1 Paper not detected Paper detected
3 Duplex Exit Sensor 2 Paper not detected Paper detected
4 Duplex Exit Sensor 3 Paper not detected Paper detected
5 Exit Upper Limit Sensor Not full Full
5803 7 Fusing Unit
0 Fusing Unit (Set) Not set Set
1 Fusing Unit (New) 0 to 1 : New unit installed
2 Oil Supply Unit (Set) Set Not set
3 Oil Supply Unit (New) 1 to 0 : New unit installed
4 European Version US Europe
5 Waste Oil Bottle Set Sensor Not Set Set
6 Waste Oil Sensor Not full Full
5803 8 Motor Lock
0 Development Drive Motor - CMY Not locked Locked
1 Development Drive Motor - K Not locked Locked
2 Fusing Fan Motor Not locked Locked
3 Air Pump Motor - MY Not locked Locked
4 Air Pump Motor - CK Not locked Locked
5803 9 Dev. Unit/ PCU
0 Development Unit - K Not set Set
1 Development Unit - C Not set Set
2 Development Unit - M Not set Set
3 Development Unit - Y Not set Set
4 PCU - K Not set Set
5 PCU - C Not set Set
6 PCU - M Not set Set

Service
Tables
7 PCU - Y Not set Set
5803 10 Toner End Sens
0 Black Toner Not end End
1 Cyan Toner Not end End
2 Magenta Toner Not end End
3 Yellow Toner Not end End
5803 13 Others
0 LD H.P. Sensor Not H.P. H.P.
1 Transfer Belt Sensor Not contact Contact
2 - - -
3 Used Toner Sensor Not full Full
4 Used Toner Bottle Set Sensor Not set Set
5 Drum Gear Position Sensor - K Activated
Deactivated (Actuator inside
sensor)
6 Drum Gear Position Sensor - CMY Activated
Deactivated (Actuator inside
sensor)

SM 5-135 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

5803 Reading
Bit Description
0 1
5803 15 Mail Box 1 (Not used)
0 Tray 1 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full
1 Tray 1 Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Tray 2 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full
3 Tray 2 Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
4 Tray 3 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full
5 Tray 3 Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6 Tray 4 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full
7 Tray 4 Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
5803 16 Mail Box 2 (Not used)
0 Vertical Transport Sensor 1 Paper not detected Paper detected
1 Vertical Transport Sensor 2 Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Door Safety Switch Opened Closed

ARDF Input Check: SP6-007


6007 Reading
Bit Description
0 1
6007 1 7 Original width sensor 4 Paper not detected Paper detected
6 Original width sensor 3 Paper not detected Paper detected
5 Original width sensor 2 Paper not detected Paper detected
4 Original width sensor 1 Paper not detected Paper detected
3 Skew correction sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Original set sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
1 Original length sensor 1* Paper not detected Paper detected
0 Original length sensor 2* Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 2 7 Original stopper HP sensor Original stopper up Original stopper down
6 Pick-up HP sensor Cover closed Cover opened
5 Top cover Sensor Cover closed Cover opened
4 Lift sensor Pick-up roller up Pick-up roller down
3 Inverter sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Exit sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
1 Registration sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
0 Interval Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6007 3 7 (Not used) — —
6 (Not used) — —
5 (Not used) — —
4 (Not used) — —
3 (Not used) — —
2 (Not used) — —
1 (Not used) — —
0 Original length sensor 3* Paper not detected Paper detected

NOTE: The original length sensors detect the following paper sizes: B5 (sensor 1),
LG (sensor 2), and A4 (sensor 3).

B202/B178/B180 5-136 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

Table 1: Paper Height Sensor


Low: Deactivated, High: Activated (actuator inside sensor)
Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2
Full Low Low
Nearly full Low High
Near end High High
Almost empty High Low

Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)


0: Not pushed, 1: pushed
Models Switch Location
North America Europe/Asia 1 2 3 4
11" x 17" SEF 11" x 17" SEF 0 1 0 0
A3 SEF A3 SEF 1 0 1 0
81/2" x 14" SEF *1 B4 SEF *1 1 1 0 1
81/2" x 11" SEF *2 A4 SEF *2 0 1 1 0
11" x 81/2" LEF *3 11" x 81/2" LEF *3 1 0 1 1
A4 LEF A4 LEF 0 1 0 1
B5 LEF B5 LEF 0 0 1 0
A5 LEF A5 LEF 0 0 0 1

NOTES:
*1
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-2
*2
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 11" SEF or A4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-3
*3
: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or B5 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-4

Service
Tables
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)
Models Bit No.
North America Europe/Asia 4 3 2 1
11" x 17" SEF 11" x 17" SEF 0 0 1 1
A3 SEF A3 SEF 0 0 0 1
- B4 SEF 0 0 1 0
81/2" x 11" SEF A4 SEF 0 1 1 0
8" x 13" SEF F SEF 0 1 0 0
- A5 SEF 1 1 0 0
51/2" x 181/2" SEF B6 SEF 1 0 0 0
Post Card Post Card 0 0 0 0

SM 5-137 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

Table 4: Original Size Detection


Width
Original Size Length Sensor SP4-301
Sensor
display
A4/A3 version LT/DLT version L3 L2 L1 W2 W1
A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 132
B4 10" x 14" O O O X O 141
F4 8.5" x 14" (8" x 13") O O O X X 165
A4-L 8.5" x 11" X O O X X 133
B5-L X X O X X 142
A4-S 11" x 8.5" X X X O O 5
B5-S X X X X O 14
A5-L, A5-S 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5" X X X X X 128

B202/B178/B180 5-138 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

5.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE


CH: Charge
PF: Paper Feed
TS: Toner Supply
CW: Clockwise
CCW: Counterclockwise
MB: 4-bin Mailbox
DI: Duplex Inverter

5804 Description
5804 1 Lift M UP (1) Tray 1 Lift Motor / UP
5804 2 Lift M DOWN(1) Tray 1 Lift Motor / DOWN
5804 3 Lift M UP(2) Tray 2 Lift Motor / UP
5804 4 Lift M DOWN(2) Tray 2 Lift Motor / DOWN
5804 5 By-pass CL By-pass Feed Clutch
5804 6 Pick-up SOL Pick-up Solenoid
5804 7 PF CL (1) Paper Feed Clutch - Tray 1
5804 8 PF CL (2) Paper Feed Clutch - Tray 2
5804 9 PF GRP SOL Grip Roller Release Solenoid
5804 10 Regist CL Registration Clutch
5804 11 Junction SOL Exit Junction Gate Solenoid
5804 12 Oil Supply SOL Oil Supply Unit Solenoid
5804 13 Fusing CL Fusing Clutch
5804 14 Wst Tn Vib M Waste Toner Vibration Motor
5804 19 K Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - K
5804 20 C Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - C
5804 21 M Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - M
5804 22 Y Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - Y

Service
Tables
5804 23 K Dev M H Development Motor - K / High Speed
5804 24 K Dev M M Development Motor - K / Middle Speed
5804 25 K Dev M L Development Motor - K / Low Speed
5804 26 K Dev M Card Black Development Motor - Thick paper
5804 27 FC Dev M H Color Development Motor - 185mm/s
5804 28 FC Dev M M Color Development Motor - 125mm/s
5804 29 FC Dev M L Color Development Motor - 62.5mm/s
5804 30 TS CL [Y] Toner Supply Clutch for Yellow
5804 31 TS CL [M] Toner Supply Clutch for Magenta
5804 32 TS CL [C] Toner Supply Clutch for Cyan
5804 33 TS CL [K] Toner Supply Clutch for Black
5804 34 Valve SOL [K] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Black
5804 35 Valve SOL [C] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Cyan
5804 36 Valve SOL [M] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Magenta
5804 37 Valve SOL [Y] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Yellow
5804 38 Toner Sply Mt1 Toner Supply Motor 1 - yellow and magenta
5804 39 Toner Sply Mt2 Toner Supply Motor 2 - cyan and black
5804 40 Air Supply [Y] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Yellow
5804 41 Air Supply [M] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Magenta
5804 42 Air Supply [C] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Cyan
5804 43 Air Supply [K] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Black
5804 44 T End Sens [Y] Toner End Sensor - Y

SM 5-139 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

5804 Description
5804 45 T End Sens [M] Toner End Sensor - M
5804 46 T End Sens [C] Toner End Sensor - C
5804 47 T End Sens [K] Toner End Sensor - K
5804 50 PSU Fan PSU Cooling Fan Motor
5804 51 Fusing Fan H Fusing Fan Motor / High Speed
5804 52 Fusing Fan L Fusing Fan Motor / Low Speed
5804 53 M Fan Laser Optics Housing Unit Cooling Fan
5804 54 Belt M CW Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Clockwise
5804 55 Belt M CCW Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Counterclockwise
5804 56 Belt M Break Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Break
5804 57 Fusing Relay Fusing Relay
5804 58 Heat Lamp Heating Roller Fusing Lamp
5804 59 Pressure Lamp Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp
5804 65 Drum M L CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / Low Speed / Clockwise
5804 66 Drum M M CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / Middle Speed /
Clockwise
5804 67 Drum M H CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / High Speed / Clockwise
5804 76 PF M L CW Paper Feed Motor / Low Speed / Clockwise
5804 77 PF M M CW Paper Feed Motor / Middle Speed / Clockwise
5804 78 PF M H CW Paper Feed Motor / High Speed / Clockwise
5804 79 PF M Feed Paper Feed Motor / Feed Speed / Clockwise
5804 80 By-Pass M L CW Paper Feed Motor / Low Speed / Clockwise
5804 81 By-Pass M C CW Paper Feed Motor / Thick paper or OHP mode /
Clockwise
5804 82 By-Pass M M CW Paper Feed Motor / Middle Speed / Clockwise
5804 89 CH DC [Y] Charge DC Bias for Yellow / 125 mm/s
5804 90 CH DC [M] Charge DC Bias for Magenta / 125 mm/s
5804 91 CH DC [C] Charge DC Bias for Cyan / 125 mm/s
5804 92 CH DC [K] Charge DC Bias for Black / 125 mm/s
5804 93 CH AC [FC] 62.5 Charger AC / Full Color / 62.5 mm/s
5804 94 CH AC [K] 62.5 Charger AC / Black / 62.5 mm/s
5804 95 CH AC [FC] 125 Charger AC / Full Color / 125 mm/s
5804 96 CH AC [K] 125 Charger AC / Black / 125 mm/s
5804 97 CH AC [FC] 185 Charger AC / Full Color / 185 mm/s
5804 98 CH AC [K] 185 Charger AC / Black / 185 mm/s
5804 99 Dev DC [Y] Development DC Bias for Yellow
5804 100 Dev DC [M] Development DC Bias for Magenta
5804 101 Dev DC [C] Development DC Bias for Cyan
5804 102 Dev DC [K] Development DC Bias for Black
5804 103 Dev AC [FC] 62.5 Development AC Bias for Color - 62.5 mm/s
5804 104 Dev AC [K] 62.5 Development AC Bias for Black - 62.5 mm/s
5804 105 Dev AC [FC] 125 Development AC Bias for Color - 125 mm/s
5804 106 Dev AC [K] 125 Development AC Bias for Black - 125 mm/s
5804 107 Dev AC [FC] 185 Development AC Bias for Color - 185 mm/s
5804 108 Dev AC [K] 185 Development AC Bias for Black - 185 mm/s
5804 109 Transfer [Y] Transfer Current for Yellow
5804 110 Transfer [M] Transfer Current for Magenta
5804 111 Transfer [C] Transfer Current for Cyan

B202/B178/B180 5-140 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

5804 Description
5804 112 Transfer [K] Transfer Current for Black
5804 113 Cleaning Bias Transfer Belt Cleaning Roller Bias
5804 114 PA Roller Bias+ Paper Attraction Roller Bias
5804 115 PA Roller Bias- Paper Attraction Roller Bias
5804 116 DevAC TRG [FC] Development AC Trigger for Color
5804 117 DevAC TRG [K] Development AC Trigger for Black
5804 118 DevPWM TRG [K] Development PWM Trigger for Black
5804 119 DevPWM TRG [C] Development PWM Trigger for Cyan
5804 120 DevPWM TRG [M] Development PWM Trigger for Magenta
5804 121 DevPWM TRG [Y] Development PWM Trigger for Yellow
5804 122 CHdcPWM TRG [K] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Black
5804 123 CHdcPWM TRG [C] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Cyan
5804 124 CHdcPWM TRG [M] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Magenta
5804 125 CHdcPWM TRG [Y] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Yellow
5804 126 CHac1 TRG [FC] Charge AC1 Trigger for Color
5804 127 Chac2 TRG [FC] Charge AC2 Trigger for Color
5804 128 Chac3 TRG [FC] Charge AC3 Trigger for Color
5804 129 CHac1 TRG [K] Charge AC1 Trigger for Black
5804 130 Chac2 TRG [K] Charge AC2 Trigger for Black
5804 131 Chac3 TRG [K] Charge AC3 Trigger for Black
5804 132 ID Sensor LED ID Sensor LED
5804 133 TD Vcnt TD Sensor / Vcnt
5804 134 Memory Chip Memory Chip / Power (5V) Supply
5804 136 PCU Cln Bias K PCU Cleaning Bias Black
5804 137 PCU Cln Bias YMC PCU Cleaning Bias YMC
5804 141 Polygon M 29 Polygon Motor / 29.528

Service
5804 142 Polygon M 21 Polygon Motor / 21.850

Tables
5804 143 LD FC[K]62.5 LD Power for Black in Color Mode / 62.5
5804 144 LD FC[K]125 LD Power for Black in Color Mode / 125
5804 145 LD FC[Y]62.5 LD Power for Yellow in Color Mode / 62.5
5804 146 LD FC[Y]125 LD Power for Yellow in Color Mode / 125
5804 147 LD FC[M]62.5 LD Power for Magenta in Color Mode / 62.5
5804 148 LD FC[M]125 LD Power for Magenta in Color Mode / 125
5804 149 LD FC[C]62.5 LD Power for Cyan in Color Mode / 62.5
5804 150 LD FC[C]125 LD Power for Cyan in Color Mode / 125
5804 151 LD1 [K] 62.5 LD1 Power for Black / 62.5
5804 152 LD1 [K] 125 LD1 Power for Black / 125
5804 153 LD1 [K] 185 LD1 Power for Black / 185
5804 154 LD2 [K] 62.5 LD2 Power for Black / 62.5
5804 155 LD2 [K] 125 LD2 Power for Black / 125
5804 156 LD2 [K] 185 LD2 Power for Black / 185
5804 157 LD [K]62.5 LD Power for Black / 62.5
5804 158 LD [K]125 LD Power for Black / 125
5804 159 LD [K]185 LD Power for Black / 185
5804 165 PSU M Optional Paper Feed Unit (PSU: Paper Supply Unit) /
Motor
5804 166 PF CL PFU (1) Paper Feed Clutch / Optional Paper Feed Unit / Tray 1
5804 167 PF CL PFU (2) Paper Feed Clutch / Optional Paper Feed Unit / Tray 2

SM 5-141 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE

5804 Description
5804 168 Pick-up SOL PSU Pick-up Solenoid / Optional Paper Feed Unit (PSU:
Paper Supply Unit)
5804 170 MB M 4-bin Mailbox Main Motor
5804 171 MB SOL1 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 1
5804 172 MB SOL2 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 2
5804 173 MB SOL3 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 3
5804 174 MB Gate SOL 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid
5804 176 Duplex SOL Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid
5804 177 DI M1 81CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 81 / Counterclockwise
5804 178 DI M1 125CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 125 / Counterclockwise
5804 179 DI M1 162CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 162 / Counterclockwise
5804 180 DI M1 222CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 222 / Counterclockwise
5804 181 DI M1 370CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 370 / Counterclockwise
5804 182 DI M1 450CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 450 / Counterclockwise
5804 187 DI M1 370CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 370 / Clockwise
5804 188 DI M1 450CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 450 / Clockwise
5804 189 DI M1 560CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 560 / Clockwise
5804 190 DI M2 81CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 81 / Counterclockwise
5804 191 DI M2 125CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 125 / Counterclockwise
5804 192 DI M2 162CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 162 / Counterclockwise
5804 193 DI M2 222CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 222 / Counterclockwise
5804 194 DI M2 370CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 370 / Counterclockwise
5804 195 DI M2 450CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 450 / Counterclockwise
5804 200 DI M2 370CW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 370 / Clockwise
5804 201 DI M2 450CW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 450 / Clockwise
5804 202 DI M2 560CW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 560 / Clockwise
5804 203 DI M12 81CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 81 / Counterclockwise
5804 204 DI M12 125CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 125 / Counterclockwise
5804 205 DI M12 162CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 162 / Counterclockwise
5804 206 DI M12 222CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 222 / Counterclockwise
5804 207 DI M12 370CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 370 / Counterclockwise
5804 208 DI M12 450CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 450 / Counterclockwise
5804 213 DI M12 370CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 370 / Clockwise
5804 214 DI M12 450CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 450 / Clockwise
5804 215 DI M12 560CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 560 / Clockwise
5804 216 PF M 81 Paper Feed Motor 81
5804 217 PF M 125 Paper Feed Motor 125
5804 218 PF M 162 Paper Feed Motor 162
5804 219 PF M 222 Paper Feed Motor 222
5804 220 PF M 230 Paper Feed Motor 230
5804 221 PF M 275 Paper Feed Motor 275
5804 222 PF M 370 Paper Feed Motor 370
5804 223 PF M 450 Paper Feed Motor 450
5804 224 DI M2 OFF Duplex Inverter Motor 2 Off
5804 225 ALL OFF All Off

B202/B178/B180 5-142 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE

5.2.4 TEST PATTERN (SP5-997)

Test Pattern Selection (SP5-997-002)


0: None
Test Pattern Printting 1: 1-dot sub-scan line
2: 2-dot sub-scan line
3: 1-dot main-scan line
Selects the tray in which 4: 2-dot main-scan line
SP5-997-001 desired paper size is 5: 1-dot grid pattern (Fine)
loaded.
6: 2-dot grid pattern (Fine)
7. 1-dot grid pattern (Rough)
8. 2-dot grid pattern (Rough)
SP5-997-002 Selects a pattern. 9. 1-dot slant grid pattern
10. 2-dot slant grid pattern
11. 1-dot pattern
Selects a color if printing 12. 2-dot pattern
SP5-997-003 the test pattern in the 13. 4-dot pattern
Single Color mode. 14. 1-dot trimming pattern
15. 2-dot trimming pattern
16. Cross stitch: sub-scan
Selects the Single Color 17. Cross stitch: main-scan
SP5-997-004
or Full Color mode.
18. Belt pattern (Horizontal)
19. Belt pattern (Vertical)
20. Checkered Flag
SP5-997-005 Selects the resolution. 21. Grey scale (Vertical)
22. Grey scale (Horizontal)
23. Solid

Selects the desired


Tray or by-pass By-pass SP5-997-006

Service
Tables
paper size.

Tray

SP5-997-007 Prints the test pattern.

B178S913.WMF

SM 5-143 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER SERVICE MODE

5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE


SP1-XXX (Service Mode)
1001 [Bit Switch]
1001 1 Bit Switch 1 Settings *CTL Adjusts the bit switch settings. DFU
1001 2 Bit Switch 2 Settings
1001 3 Bit Switch 3 Settings
1001 4 Bit Switch 4 Settings
1001 5 Bit Switch 5 Settings
1001 6 Bit Switch 6 Settings
1001 7 Bit Switch 7 Settings
1001 8 Bit Switch 8 Settings

1003 [Clear Setting]


1003 1 Initialize Printer System
Initializes settings in the “System” menu of the user mode.
1003 3 Delete Program

1004 [Print Summary]


1004 1 Print Summary
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).

1005 [Display Version]


1005 1 Disp. Version
Displays the version of the controller firmware.

1006 [Sample/Locked Print] *CTL 0: Linked, 1: On


1006 1 Enables and disables the document server. When you select “0,” the document
server is enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5-967. When
you select “1,” the document server is enabled regardless of Copy Service Mode
SP5-967.

1101 [Data Recall]


Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b) the
previous setting, or c) the current setting.
1101 1 Factory *CTL
1101 2 Previous
1101 3 Current
1101 4 ACC

1102 [Resolution Setting]


Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment.
1102 1 1200x1200 Photo, 1800x600 Photo, 600 x 600 Photo, 1200x1200 Text, 1800x600,
Text, 600x600 Text

B202/B178/B180 5-144 SM
PRINTER SERVICE MODE

1103 [Test Page]


Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma
adjustment.
1103 1 Color Gray Scale
1103 2 Color Pattern

1104 [Gamma Adjustment]


Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the “Mode Selection” menu.
1104 1 Black: Highlight * [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step]
1104 2 Black: Shadow CTL
1104 3 Black: Middle
1104 4 Black: IDmax
1104 21 Cyan: Highlight
1104 22 Cyan: Shadow
1104 23 Cyan: Middle
1104 24 Cyan: IDmax
1104 41 Magenta: Highlight
1104 42 Magenta: Shadow
1104 43 Magenta: Middle
1104 44 Magenta: IDmax
1104 61 Yellow: Highlight
1104 62 Yellow: Shadow
1104 63 Yellow: Middle
1104 64 Yellow: IDmax

1105 [Save Tone Control Value]


Stores the print gamma adjusted with the “Gamma Adj.” menu item as the current

Service
setting. Before the machine stores the new “current setting", it moves the data

Tables
currently stored as the “current setting” to the “previous setting” memory storage
location.
1105 1 Save Tone Control Value

1106 [Toner Limit]


Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.
1106 1 Toner Limit: Photo *CTL [100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step]
1106 2 Toner Limit: Text [100 to 400 / 190 / 1 %/step]

SM 5-145 B202/B178/B180
SCANNER SP MODE

5.4 SCANNER SP MODE


SP1-xxx (System and Others)
1004 [Compression Type]
Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.
1004 1 Compression Type *CTL [1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step]
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR

1005 [Erase margin]


Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin.
1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm *CTL [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

1009 [Remote scan disable] *CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]


0: enable, 1: disable
1009 1 Enable or disable remote scan.

SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)

2021 [Compression ratio of gray-scale]


Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the three
settings that can be selected at the operation panel.
2021 1 Compression ratio (Normal image) * [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
2021 2 Compression ratio (High comp image) CTL [5 to 95 / 60 / 1 /step]
2021 3 Compression ratio (Low-comp image) [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step]
2021 4 High Lv 2-comp image [5 to 95 / 70 / 1 /step]
2021 5 Low Lv 2-comp image [5 to 95 / 30 / 1 /step]

B202/B178/B180 5-146 SM
REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET

5.5 REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET


5.5.1 SOFTWARE RESET
You can reboot the software with one of the following two procedures:
1) Turn the main power switch off and on.
2) Press and hold down   together for over 10 seconds. When the
machine beeps once, release both buttons. After “Now loading. Please wait”
shows for a few seconds, the copy window will open. The machine is ready
for normal operation.

5.5.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET


System Setting Reset
The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the
following procedure.

1. Press User Tools/Counter .


2. Hold down  and then press System Settings.
NOTE: You must press  first.

Service
Tables
B178S914.JPG

3. Press yes when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the
system settings.
4. Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.

SM 5-147 B202/B178/B180
REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET

Copier Setting Reset


Use the following procedure to reset the copy settings in the UP mode to their
defaults.

1. Press User Tools/Counter .


2. Hold down  and then press Copier/Document Server Settings.
NOTE: You must press  first.

B178S914.JPG

3. Press “Yes” when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset
the Copier Document Server settings.
4. Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.

B202/B178/B180 5-148 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE

5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE


To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the
firmware downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted
into SD Card Slot 3 on the right side of the controller box.

5.6.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE


There are 16 types of firmware as shown below.

Location of
Type of firmware Function Message shown
firmware
Engine - Main Printer engine control BCU Flash ROM Engine
Engine - Music Line position adjustment BCU MUSIC CPU Music
Operating system Flash ROM on the Onboard System
System
controller board
Feature application Printer/scanner Network DocBox
Netfile Application
SD card
Feature application Printer/scanner Onboard Printer
Printer Application
SD card
Feature application Printer/scanner Onboard Scn
Scanner Application
SD card
Feature application Flash ROM on the Opt DIMM Fax
Fax Application
controller board
Network Interface Printer/scanner Network Support
NIB
SD card
Scanner IPU Scanner control IPU Flash ROM Scanner IPU
Operation Panel Panel control Operation Panel Op Panel. XX

Service
Tables
Fax FCU Fax control FCU Jupi FCU (XXX)-1
Language firmware Operation Panel LANG.1
Language Two languages can be LANG.2
(16 languages) selected from 16
languages.
Document server Printer/scanner Web Document Box
WebDocBox
application SD card
Web Service application Printer/scanner Web Support
WebSys
SD card
Page description language PS3 SD card Option PS3
PS3
(PostScript3)
SG3-PRE1 Optional G3 fax control FCU SG3DREI-1

SM 5-149 B202/B178/B180
FIRMWARE UPDATE

5.6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN


An SD card is a precision device. Always observe the following precautions when
you handle SD cards:
• Always switch the machine off before you insert an SD card. Never insert the SD
card into the slot with the power on.
• Do not remove the SD card from the service slot after the power has been
switched on.
• Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD
card.
• Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to high
temperature, high humidity, or exposure to direct sunlight.
• Always handle SD cards with care. Do not bend or scratch them. Do not let the
SD card get exposed to shock or vibration.
Keep the following points in mind when you use the firmware update software:
• “Upload” means to send data from the machine to the SD card. “Download”
means to send data from the SD card to the machine.
• To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touch-
screen of the LCD, or, press the appropriate number key on the 10-key pad of
the operation panel. For example, when “Exit (0)” shows on the screen you can
touch the Exit button on the screen, or, press the  button on the operation
panel of the copier.
• Make sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print
job for arriving while the firmware update is in progress before you start the
firmware update procedure.

B202/B178/B180 5-150 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE

5.6.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE


Preparation
1. If the SD card is blank, copy the entire “romdata” folder onto the SD card.
2. If the card already contains the “romdata” folder, copy the “B178” folder onto the
card.
If the card already contains folders up to “B178”, copy the necessary firmware files
(e.g. B178xxxx.fwu) into this folder.
NOTE: Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card.
Copy the only model firmware you want.

1. Turn the main power switch off.


2. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 1).
3. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 3 [C]
[C]. Make sure the label on the SD card
[B] faces the rear side of the machine.
4. Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it [A]
locks in place. You will here it click. Make
sure the SD card locks in place.
NOTE: To remove the SD, push it in to
unlock the spring lock. Then
release it so it pops out of the
slot.

Service
Tables
5. Disconnect the network cable from the
copier if the machine is connected to a [B]
B178S501.WMF
network.
6. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial version
update screen appears on the LCD in English.
7. On the screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key on the
operation panel to select the item in the menu that you want to update.

ROM/NEW WHAT IT MEANS


Tells you the number of the module and name of the version currently installed.
ROM:
The first line is the module number, the second line the version name.
Tells you the number of the module and name version on the SD card. The first
NEW:
line is the module number, the second line the version name.

SM 5-151 B202/B178/B180
FIRMWARE UPDATE

8. Touch “UpDate (#)” (or ) to start the update.

NOTE: The progress bar does not show for the operation panel firmware after you
touch “OpPanel”. The power on key flashes on and off at 0.5 s intervals
when the LCDC firmware is updating. The power key flashes on and off at
3 s intervals when the update is finished.
9. The "Update Done" message appears on the operation panel after completing
the updating. The message differs depending on the firmware that has been
updated.
10. Switch the copier main power switch off when you see the “Update Done”
message or follow the procedure that is displayed on the operation panel.
11. Press in the SD card to release it. Then remove it from the slot.
12. Switch the copier on for normal operation.
Error Messages
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during the download.

The error code consists of the letter “E” and a number. The example above
shows error “E24” displayed. For details, refer to the Error Message Table.
( 5.6.7)

B202/B178/B180 5-152 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE

Firmware Update Error


If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during
the update because the module selected for update was not on the SD card.

PCcard -> ROM

Reboot after card insert. E82

BLC2 eplot Card No.:1/1

B178S922.WMF

Recovery After Power Loss


If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the
firmware is updating, then the correct operation of the machine cannot be
guaranteed after the machine is switched on again. If the ROM update does not
complete successfully for any reason, then in order to ensure the correct operation
of the machine, the ROM update error will continue to show until the ROM is
updated successfully.
In this case, insert the card again and switch on the machine to continue the

Service
Tables
firmware download automatically from the card without the menu display.

SM 5-153 B202/B178/B180
FIRMWARE UPDATE

5.6.3 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL


Do the following procedure to update the LCDC (LCD Control Board).
1. Turn the copier main switch off.
2. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 3.
3. Switch the copier main switch on.
4. The initial screen opens in English after about 45 seconds.
5. Touch “Op Panel.xx”.
NOTE: "xx" differs depending on the destination.
6. Touch “UpDate(#) or () to start the update.
Downloading starts after about 9 seconds.
The operation panel goes off and the main power on key flashes in red at 0.5 s
intervals when the data is downloading. The same key starts flashing in green
at 1 s intervals when the update is finished.
7. Switch the copier main power switch off and remove the SD card. Then switch
the copier on.

B202/B178/B180 5-154 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE

5.6.4 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA


The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the hard
disks at the following times:
• When the machine is installed.
• After the hard disks have been replaced.
The print data contains the controller software. Execute SP 5853 to download the
fixed stamp data required by the hard disks.
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Select SP5853 and then press “EXECUTE”. The following screen opens while
the stamp data is downloading.

B178S502.JPG

The download is finished when the message prompts you to close.

Service
Tables
B178S503.JPG

3. Press the “Exit” button. Then turn the copier off and on again.

SM 5-155 B202/B178/B180
FIRMWARE UPDATE

5.6.5 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD


Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card
Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
NOTE: This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is
replaced.
1. Do SP5990 001 (SMC Print) before you switch the machine off. You will need a
record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
2. Switch the copier main power switch off.
3. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 3. Then switch the copier on.
4. Execute SP5824 001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and then press the “Execute” key
The following files are coped to an NVRAM folder on the SD card when the
upload procedure is finished. The file is saved to the path and the following
filename:
NVRAM\<serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number “K5000017114”:
NVRAM\K5000017114.NV
5. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card
that holds the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the
data was uploaded.
NOTE: You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same
SD card.

Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM


Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in
the machine.
• The NVRAM data down load may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is
damaged, or if the connection between the controller and BCU is defective.
• Do the download procedure again if the download fails.
• Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails:
• Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before
uploading the NVRAM data ( 5.6.5)
1. Switch the copier main power switch off.
2. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 3.
3. Switch the copier main power switch on.
4. Do SP5825 001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the “Execute” key.
NOTE: The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial
number of the machine for the NVRAM data to download successfully.
The download fails if the serial numbers do not match.

B202/B178/B180 5-156 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE

This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
• Total Count
• C/O, P/O Count

5.6.6 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE


Many languages are available. But you can only switch between two languages at
a time. Do the following procedure to select the two languages you want. You can
select both of the languages you want from the user interface on the operation
panel.
1. Switch the copier main power switch off.
2. Insert the SD card with the language data into SD Card Slot 3.
3. Switch the copier main power switch on. The initial screen opens after about 45
seconds.
4. Touch “Language Data (2)” on the screen (or press ).

Download Language LC D C R O M B 0705370 Lang.C ard ------

S elect Lang.
N ow Lang.
LANG. 1(1) Japanese 2.87 -> ------------ ---------------
------ ---------------
LANG. 2(2) English - U K 2.87 -> ------------ ---------------
---------------
------

Service
Tables
Exit(0)

B178S930.WMF

5. Touch “LANG. 1(1)” or “LANG. 2(2)"

Key What it does


Touch this button on the screen (or press  on the 10-key pad) to open the next
LANG. 1(1)
screen so you can select the 1st language.
Touch this button on the screen (or press  on the 10-key pad) to open the next
LANG. 1(2)
screen so you can select the 2nd language.
Touch this key on the screen (or press  on the 10-key pad) to quit the update
Exit(0)
procedure and return to normal screen.

SM 5-157 B202/B178/B180
FIRMWARE UPDATE

6. Touch “LANG 1(1)” to select the 1st Language. Touch “LANG (2)” to select the
2nd Language.

PCcard -> ROM Page02

(7) Italian (1)


S panish (2)
D utch (3)
N orw egian (4)
D anish (6)

(9)

Exit(0)

B178S931.WMF

7. Touch the appropriate button on the screen (or press the number on the 10-
keypad) to select a language as the 1st (or 2nd) language.
If a language is already selected, it will show in reverse.
Touching “Exit (0)” returns you to the previous screen.
8. If you do not see the language that you want to select, touch “↑(7)” or “↓(9)” on
the screen (or press  or ) to show more choices.

B202/B178/B180 5-158 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE

The Download Screen opens after you select a language.


The 1st or 2nd language selected for updating shows.
The following show to right of the selection:
1) The first column shows the language currently selected
2) The 2nd column shows the language selected to replace that language.
The example below shows that the download will replace “Japanese” with
“Italian” as the 1st language.

Download Language LC D C R O M B 0705370 Lang.C ard ------

S elect Lang.
N ow Lang.
LANG. 1(1) Japanese 2.87 -> Italian 2.88
------ ---------------
LANG. 2(2) English - U K 2.87 -> ------------ ---------------
---------------
------

Exit(0) UpDate(#)

B178S932.WMF

9. Touch “Update(#)” on the screen (or press ) to start the download.


Another screen with a progress bar does not show when the language is
downloading.

Service
Tables
The following occur at the time the language is downloading:
• The operation panel switches off.
• The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly.
10. After the Start LED begins to flash slowly, switch the copier main power switch
off. Then remove the SD card from the slot.
11. Switch the copier main power switch on to resume normal operation.

SM 5-159 B202/B178/B180
FIRMWARE UPDATE Rev. 12/2005

5.6.7 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS


An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during a download. The
error code consists of the letter “E” and a number (“E20”, for example).
Error Message Table
Code Meaning Solution
20 Cannot map logical address Make sure the SD card is inserted correctly.
21 Cannot access memory HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
Cannot decompress Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is
22
compressed data corrupted.
Error occurred when ROM Controller program abnormal. If the second attempt
23
update program started fails, replace controller board.
SD card access error Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use
24
another SD card.
No HDD available for stamp HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
30
data download
Data incorrect for continuous Insert the SD card with the remaining data required
31
download for the download, the re-start the procedure.
Data incorrect after download Execute the recovery procedure for the intended
32 interrupted module download, then repeat the installation
procedure.
Incorrect SD card version Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is
33
corrupted.
Module mismatch - Correct SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct
34 module is not on the SD card) data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install
again.
Module mismatch – Module on SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD
35 SD card is not for this machine card is for another machine. Acquire correct update
data then install again.
Cannot write module – Cause SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD
36 other than E34, E35 card is for another machine. Acquire correct update
data then install again.
Engine module download Replace the update data for the module on the SD
40
failed card and try again, or replace the BCU board.
Operation panel module Replace the update data for the module on the SD
42
download failed card and try again, or replace the LCDC.
Stamp data module download Replace the update data for the module on the SD
43
failed card and try again, or replace the hard disks.
44 Controller module download Replace the update data for the module on the SD


failed card and tray again, or replace controller board.
Write Protect switch on SD Card is set ON.
Electronic confirmation check SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD
50 failed card is for another machine. Acquire correct update
data then install again.

B202/B178/B180 5-160 SM
SD CARD APPLI MOVE

5.7 SD CARD APPLI MOVE


5.7.1 OVERVIEW
The service program “SD Card Appli Move” (SP5-873) lets you to copy application
programs from one SD card to another SD card.
Slot 1 and Slot 2 are used to store application programs. Slot 3 is for maintenance
work only. You cannot run application programs from Slot 3. However you can
move application programs from Slot 3 to either Slot 1 or Slot 2. Do the following
procedure it you want to move an application procedure from Slot 3:
1) Choose a SD card with enough space.
2) Enter SP5873 “SD Card Appli Move”. Then move the application from the
SD Card in Slot 3 to the Slot you want.
NOTE: Do steps 1-2 again if you want to move another application program.
3) Exit the SP mode

Use high caution when you do the AD Card Appli Move procedure:
1. The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application
program from an SD card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to
use the SD card after you copy the application program from one card to
another card.
2. Do not use the SD card if it has been used by the user on the computer.
Normal operation is not guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
3. Keep the SD card in a safe place after you copy the application program from

Service
Tables
one card to another card. This is done for the following reasons:
1) The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the
application program.
2) You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the
future.
4. You cannot copy PostScript data to another SD card. You have to copy other
data to the same SD card that stores PostScript data.

SM 5-161 B202/B178/B180
SD CARD APPLI MOVE

5.7.2 MOVE EXEC


The menu “Move Exec” (SP5-873-001) lets you copy application programs from the
original SD card to another SD card.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1. The application program is
copied into this SD card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 3.
The application program is copied from this SD card.
4. Turn the main switch on.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-001 “Move Exec.”
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
8. Turn the main switch off.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3.
10. Turn the main switch on.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.

B202/B178/B180 5-162 SM
Rev. 11/2005 SD CARD APPLI MOVE

5.7.3 UNDO EXEC


⇒ Do this procedure if you moved an option from the original SD card to another card
by mistake, and you want to restore it to the original SD card.
1. Turn the main switch OFF.
2. Put the original source SD card into Slot 3.
3. Put the SD card that contains the application(s) into Slot 1.
4. Turn the main switch ON.
5. Execute SP5873-002 (Undo Exec).
6. Follow the instructions on the LCD.
7. Turn the main switch OFF.
8. Remove the original source SD card from Slot 3.
9. Turn the main switch ON.
10. Make sure that the application(s) in the SD card work correctly.

Service
Tables

SM 5-163 B202/B178/B180
CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

5.8 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS


5.8.1 OVERVIEW
There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller.
1) Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-
diagnostics just after the power has been turned on.
2) Detailed self-diagnostics: The machine does the detailed self-diagnostics by
using a loop-back connector (P/N G0219350)
3) SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on
or during operation.
The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.

Power ON A

Diagnostic RAM Check NG Not initialized Power-on or


Detailed

CPU Check NG SC820 Detailed

ROM Sum Check NG SC828


ASIC Check NG SC821

Standard RAM Detailed


NG SC829
Standard RAM Check
NG SC827
Conection Check
Optional RAM Detailed
NG
Optional RAM Check Not use optional RAM
NG SC829
Connection Check Error Logged
Standard NVRAM
NG
Detailed Check
Clock Generator Check NG SC838
Error Logged
Optional NVRAM Power-on
NG
Standard NVRAM Detailed Check
Check Error Logged

Optinoal HDD Check NG


Optional NVRAM Check NG SC824
Error Logged
IEEE1284 Loop-back
NG
Check
Font Header Check NG
Error Logged
Error Logged Real Time Clock
NG SC826
Detailed Check
Real Time Clock Check NG SC826

Font ROM Sum Check NG


Network Check NG
Error Logged
Error Logged
END
Engine I/F Check NG

Error Logged

Interrupt Check NG

Error Logged

Memory Chip Check NG

Error Logged

B178S933.WMF

B202/B178/B180 5-164 SM
CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

5.8.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS


In addition to the self-diagnostic test initiated every time the main machine is
powered on, you can set the machine in a more detailed diagnostic mode manually.
This lets you test other components or conditions that are not tested during self-
diagnosis after power on. The following device is required in order to put the
machine in the detailed self-diagnosis mode:

No. Name
G0219350 Parallel Loopback Connector

Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis


Do the following procedure to execute detailed self-diagnosis.
1. Switch off the machine, and connect the parallel loopback device to the
Centronics I/F port.
2. Hold down , press and hold down . Then switch on the machine while
pressing both keys at the same time.

You will see “Now Loading” on the touch-panel. Then you will see the results of
the test.
The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics and prints the diagnostic
report after completing the test.
• Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors. You can check the
errors detected during self-diagnostics with SP7-832-001 (Diag. Result).
• Refer to section 4.3 for details about the error codes.

Service
Tables

SM 5-165 B202/B178/B180
USING THE DEBUG LOG

5.9 USING THE DEBUG LOG


This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer
Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory. But
this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main
features:
• Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD
for later retrieval.
• Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
Do the following procedure below to set up the machine so the error information is
saved automatically to the HDD when a user has problems with the machine. Then
ask the user to reproduce the problem.

5.9.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG


The debug information cannot be saved until the “Save Debug Log” function has
been switched on and a target has been selected.
1. Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on.
• Press  then use the 10-key pad to enter .
• Press and hold down  for more than 3 seconds.
• Touch “Copy SP”.
• On the LCD panel, open SP5857.
2. Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, touch “1 On/Off”.

B178S001.JPG

3. On the control panel keypad, press “1”. Then press . This switches the Save
Debug Log feature on.
NOTE: The default setting is “0” (OFF). This feature must be switched on in
order for the debug information to be saved.

B202/B178/B180 5-166 SM
USING THE DEBUG LOG

4. Select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under
“5857 Save Debug Log”, touch “2 Target”, enter “2” with the operation panel
key to select the hard disk as the target destination. Then press .

B178S002.JPG

NOTE: Select “3 SD Card” to save the debug information directly to the SD


card if it is inserted in the service slot.
5. Now touch “5858” and specify the events that you want to record in the debug
log. SP5858 (Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
Saves data when an engine-related
1 Engine SC Error
SC code is generated.
Saves debug data when a controller-
2 Controller SC Error
related SC Code is generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that
3 Any SC Error
you specify by entering code number.
4 Jam Saves data for jams.
NOTE: More than one event can be selected.
Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Touch the appropriate items(s). Press “ON” for each selection. This example
shows “Engine SC Error” selected.

Service
Tables
B178S003.JPG

Example 2: To Specify an SC Code


Touch “3 Any SC Error”, enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control
panel number keys. Then press . This example shows an entry for SC670.

B178S004.JPG

NOTE: For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in
Section 4. “Troubleshooting”.

SM 5-167 B202/B178/B180
USING THE DEBUG LOG

6. Select one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug
information. Touch “5859”.
Under “5859” press the necessary key item for the module that you want to
record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number. Then press .
NOTE: Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each
key.
The example below shows “Key 1” with “2222” entered.

B178S005.JPG

The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in
parentheses indicate the names of the modules.)

4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10


KEY NO. COPY PRINTER SCANNER WEB
1 2222 (SCS)
2 2223 (SRM)
3 256 (IMH)
4 1000 (ECS)
5 1025 (MCS)
6 4848 (COPY) 4400 (GPS) 5375 (Scan) 5682 (NFA)
7 2224 (BCU) 4500 (PDL) 5682 (NFA) 6600 (WebDB)
8 4600 (GPS-PM) 3000 (NCS) 3300 (PTS)
9 2000 (NCS) 2000 (NCS) 6666 (WebSys)
10 2224 (BCU) 2000 (NCS)
NOTE: The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (“0”).

Key to Acronyms
Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning
ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application
GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language
GSP-PM GW Print Service – Print Module PTS Print Server
IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service
MCS Memory Control Service SRM System Resource
Management
NCS Network Control Service WebDB Web Document Box
(Document Server)

The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on


the HDD (the target selected with SP5857-002) for the events that you selected
with SP5858 and the memory modules selected with SP5859.

B202/B178/B180 5-168 SM
USING THE DEBUG LOG

Please keep the following important points in mind when you do this setting:
• Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer,
Scanner, and Web memory modules.
• The initial settings are all zero.
• These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the
settings, especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting,
enter a zero for that key.
• You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the
corresponding 4-digit numbers from the table.
• You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006~010. For
example, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the
settings from the 9 available selections for the “PRINTER” column only.
• One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is
limited to 4 MB.

5.9.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD


Retrieve the debug log by copying it from the hard disk to an SD card.
1. Insert the SD card into the service slot of the copier.
2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4
MB)) to write the debugging data to the SD card.
3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh

Service
Tables
representative by email. You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you
want.

SM 5-169 B202/B178/B180
USING THE DEBUG LOG

5.9.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY


SC errors and jams only are recorded to the debug log automatically. Please
instruct the user to do the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug
data for any other errors that occur while the customer engineer is not on site.
Such problems also include a controller or panel freeze.
NOTE: You must previously switch on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and
select the hard disk as the save destination (SP5857-002) if you want to
use this feature.

1. Press  (Clear Modes). on the operation panel when the error occurs.

2. On the control panel, enter “01”. Then hold down  for at least 3 seconds
until the machine beeps and then release it. This saves the debug log to the
hard disk for later retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives.

3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.


The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk. This lets the
service representative retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD
to an SD card.

B202/B178/B180 5-170 SM
USING THE DEBUG LOG

5.9.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES


SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written
directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation
is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This
function does not copy from one slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4
MB of file data. Unique file names are created for the data during the copy
operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name. This means that log data
from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC card. This
command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the
specified key.

SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log


This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a
completely empty file. The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the HDD when the first log is stored on the HDD (it takes some time to
complete this operation). This creates the possibility that the machine may be
switched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this
SP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time
required to acquire the log information and save onto the HDD. With the file already
created on the HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded. A new log
file does not need to be created. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-011 to

Service
Tables
delete the debug log data from the HDD. Then do SP5857-016.

SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log


This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not a
completely empty file. The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the SD card when the first log is stored on the SD card (it takes some
time to complete this operation). This creates the possibility that the machine may
be switched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute
this SP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time
required to acquire the log information and save onto the SD card. With the file
already created on the SD card for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded;
a new log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-
012 to delete the debug log data from the SD card. Then do SP5857-017.

SM 5-171 B202/B178/B180
DIP SWITCHES Rev. 10/2005

5.10 DIP SWITCHES


Controller Board
DIP SW No. OFF ON
⇒ 1
2 to 4
Boot-up from Flash ROM Boot-up from SD card
Factory Use Only: Keep these switches OFF.

BCU Board
Set the DIP switch on the BCU and connect the connector as listed in the table.

⇒ Model
1 2
DIP Switch
3 4
Connector

North America ON OFF OFF OFF Not connected


B178
North America ON OFF OFF ON Not connected
B180
North America ON OFF OFF OFF Connected
B202
Europe B178 OFF ON OFF OFF Not connected
Europe B180 OFF ON OFF ON Not connected
Europe B202 OFF ON OFF OFF Connected
Asia B178 ON ON OFF OFF Not connected
Asia B180 ON ON OFF ON Not connected
Asia B202 ON ON OFF OFF Connected
Korea B178 OFF ON ON OFF Not connected
Korea B180 OFF ON ON ON Not connected
Korea B202 OFF ON ON OFF Connected
Taiwan B178 ON OFF ON OFF Not connected
Taiwan B180 ON OFF ON ON Not connected
Taiwan B202 ON OFF ON OFF Connected

⇒One of the following errors occur when the DIP switch is incorrectly set:
• SC195
• SC902
• SC995
• Fusing Unit Setting Error
• Toner Cartridge Setting Error

B202/B178/B180 5-172 SM
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
OVERVIEW

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS


6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
26
25 10
24

23 11

12
22
K
21 13
Y
14
20 C

M 15
19

16

18

17
Descriptions
Detailed

B178D501.WMF
1. Scanner HP sensor 15. Transfer unit
2. ADF exposure glass 16. Rotation encoder
3. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage) 17. Tray 2
4. Scanner lamp 18. Tray 1
5. 1st scanner (1st carriage) 19. Waste toner bottle
6. Original width sensor 20. Waste toner vibrator
7. Original length sensor
21. Duplex feed unit
8. Scanner motor
9. Exposure glass
22. Transfer belt cleaning unit
10. Sensor board unit (SBU) 23. ID sensor
11. Toner cartridge 24. Development unit (each color)
12. Laser optics housing unit 25. PCU (each color)
13. Polygon mirror motor 26. Fusing unit
14. By-pass feed table

SM 6-1 B202/B178/B180
OVERVIEW

6.1.2 PAPER PATH


1 2

12

11

10

9
K
8 Y

C
3
7
M

B178D502.WMF
1. Original tray 7. Duplex inverter unit
2. Original exit tray 8. Duplex feed unit
3. By-pass tray 9. To optional finisher
4. Tray 1 10. To optional finisher
5. Tray 2 11. External Tray
6. Optional paper feed unit/LCT 12. Standard tray

The two-tray finisher requires an optional paper feed unit or the LCT. The duplex
inverter unit has two exits for the two-tray finisher. When the one-tray paper feed
unit is installed, paper feeds out to the two-tray finisher from the upper exit. When
the two-tray paper feed unit or LCT is installed, paper feeds out to the two-tray
finisher from the lower exit.

B202/B178/B180 6-2 SM
OVERVIEW

6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

3 7

4 9

B178D503.WMF

1. Scanner motor: Drives the scanner unit.


2. Development drive Drives the development unit for black, the fusing unit, and the paper

Descriptions
motor-K: exit section. Detailed
3. Development drive Drives the color development units (magenta/cyan/yellow), the
motor-CMY: registration roller, and the waste toner collection coils from the PCUs.
4. Drum drive motor-CMY: Drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow.
5. Transfer belt contact Moves the transfer belt into contact and away from the color PCUs.
motor:
6. Paper feed motor: Drives the paper feed mechanisms (tray 1/tray 2/by-pass tray).
7. Drum drive motor-K: Drives the black PCU and the collection coil in the waste toner bottle.
8. Transfer unit drive Drives the transfer unit.
motor:
9. Waste toner vibration Makes vibrations to not let waste toner clog the waste toner path.
motor:

SM 6-3 B202/B178/B180
OVERVIEW

6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE


Overview
Laser Optics Unit
Polygon
Motor
LD LD LDB ADF
LD LDB Original Size
Detection
LD LDB

LD LDB
I2C CN
Drive PCB:
Scanner Unit PCB: Operation
SIO Panel
Motors DRB
Xenon Lamp
Transfer Roller LCDC
Voltage Scanner Motor
Voltage Main
Paper Attractio HPS PCB:SBU transpare SW
Voltage
APS CCD
Transfer Voltage 24V
Base
Charge Voltage
Engine
Development Voltage Control HDD
Unit
ID sensor

Motors

Sensors

Duplex Controller IPU Board Fax Unit


Feed Unit CN

Paper
Feed Unit CN

5V(Energy PCI PCI PCI PCI


Saver Mode)
5V
24V
5V generated
from 24V
24V
Motherboard
CN

Finisher Sub Power Supply Unit


24V

Duplex
CN

Inverter Unit Main SW


Safety
SW
Fusing Main Power
CN

Unit Breaker SW
Fusing Relay Supply Unit

B178D504A.WMF

B202/B178/B180 6-4 SM
OVERVIEW

Descriptions
BCU (Base Engine Control Unit):
The BCU controls all the mechanical components. The BCU has three CPUs (Main,
MUSIC, and DSP). The CPUs control the following functions:
Main CPU
• Engine sequence
• Engine operation
• Timing for peripherals
• High voltage supply, laser, and fusing
• Sensors, drive board, and solenoids
• Motors
MUSIC (Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval Correction) CPU
• TD sensor
• Line position adjustment
• Memory chip on the toner cartridge
DSP (Digital Signal Processor)
• Line position adjustment
Controller:
The controller connects to the BCU through a PCI bus. The controller handles the
following functions:
• Machine-to-host interface
• Operation panel interface
• Network interface
• Interfacing and control of the optional IEEE1284, Bluetooth, IEEE1394,
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN), HDD, and DRAM DIMM
LD Drive Board:
This is the laser diode drive circuit board.
DRB:

Descriptions
The DRB (driver board) controls the paper feed motor, development motors Detailed
(color/black), drum drive motors (color/black), and transfer unit drive motor.
IPU:
The Image Processing Unit is a large-scale integrated circuit. This unit processes
digital signals.
SBU:
The Sensor Board Unit has a CCD (charge-coupled device) and an analog-to-
digital conversion circuit.
Operation Panel Board:
Controls the display panel, the LED and the keypad.
Motherboard:
The motherboard is the main circuit board connecting with the BCU, FCU,
controller and IPU.

SM 6-5 B202/B178/B180
OVERVIEW

FCU:
The FCU (fax controller unit) controls the fax programs and communicates with the
controller to share copier resources.
Scanner I/O Board:
The scanner I/O board is a circuit board that transmits control signals, image data,
and electricity.

6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS

2, 6
1

5
3
8

10 K

4
Y

9
C

B178D505.WMF

This machine uses four PCUs, four development units, and four laser beams for
color printing. Each PCU has a drum, charge roller, cleaning brush, and blade.
From the left, the PCU stations are black, yellow, cyan, and magenta.
A transfer belt feeds paper past the PCUs. Then the toner image on each drum is
transferred to the paper.
The paper path is inclined at about 38 degrees. This helps to keep the machine as
compact as possible.

B202/B178/B180 6-6 SM
OVERVIEW

1. Drum charge:
The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge
2. Laser exposure:
The laser beam from the laser diode (LD) goes through the lens and mirrors
and reaches the drum. The machine turns the laser beam on and off to make a
latent image on the drum.
3. Development:
The development roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on
the drum surface. This machine uses four independent development units (one
for each color).
4. Image transfer:
The charge given to the transfer roller attracts the toner from the drum to the
paper. Four toner images are super-imposed onto the paper.
5. Cleaning for OPC drum:
The cleaning brush and blade remove remaining toner on the drum surface
after image transfer to the paper.
6. Quenching for OPC drum:
Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at
the end of every job.
7. Paper attraction:
Paper is attracted to the transfer belt by the charge given to the paper attraction
roller.
8. Separation:
Paper separates from the transfer belt when the belt curves away from it.
9. Cleaning and quenching for transfer belt:
The cleaning brush and blade clean the belt surface. The grounding roller
inside the transfer belt unit removes the remaining charge on the belt.
10. ID sensor:

Descriptions
The ID sensor board contains three ID sensors (front, center, and rear). The ID Detailed
sensor detects the density of the ID sensor pattern on the transfer belt. The ID
sensor output is used for the following:
• Process control and for automatic line position
• Skew
• Color registration adjustments for the latent image.

SM 6-7 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL

6.2 PROCESS CONTROL


6.2.1 OVERVIEW
This machine provides the following two forms of process control:
• Potential control
• Toner supply control
The process control facilities of this machine have the following features:
• Three ID (image density) sensors (front, center, and rear). Only the center ID
sensor is used for process control. All ID sensors are used for line positioning
and other adjustments.
• TD sensor.

6.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL


Overview
Potential control controls development to maintain the density of the toner images
on the drums. It does this by compensating for variations in drum chargeability and
toner density.
The machine uses the center ID sensor to measure the reflectivity of the transfer
belt and the density of a standard sensor pattern. This is done during the process
control self check.
The machine determines the following depending on the ID sensor output and a
reference table in memory.
• VD: Drum potential without exposure. The machine adjusts the charge roller
voltage to adjust this.
• VB: Development bias
• VL: Drum potential at the strongest exposure. The machine adjusts the laser
power to adjust this.
(In addition, VREF is corrected. This is used for toner supply control.)
This process controls the development potential so that the maximum amount of
toner given to the drum is constant. However, the laser power control method can
be changed to control the development potential to improve reproduction of
highlight parts of images. This depends on the setting of SP3-125-2. The default
setting is "Process Control". Set this SP mode to "LD Power" if you want to change
the highlight range control method.
If SP3-125-1 is set to "Off", the machine does not do the potential control. Instead,
the machine uses the following:
• Development bias adjusted with SP2-201-1 to –9
• Charge roller voltage adjusted with SP2-001-1 to -13
• Laser power selected with SP2-103-1 to -27.
You should not adjust these SP modes in the field.

B202/B178/B180 6-8 SM
PROCESS CONTROL

Process Control Self Check


This machine uses the process control self check method to do the potential
control. The machine uses seven types of process control self check. These are
categorized according to their execution timing:
1. Forced
This is done when SP3-126-1 is used.
2. Initial
This starts automatically when the power is turned on, or, when the machine
recovers from energy saver mode. This occurs only if the fusing unit pressure
roller temperature is 60°C or less.
3. Interval: Job End
This starts automatically at the end of a print job when the total print counter for
this feature exceeds 200 (you can change this with SP3-906-1). The counters
are reset to ‘0’ after all process control is done (except for forced process
control).
4. Interval: Interrupt (default: not done)
This interrupts printing and then starts automatically at the following times:
1) When the machine makes a certain number (A) of continuous color prints in
the same job
2) The main scan length detection is executed.
After the above are completed, the machine continues to make prints.
You can adjust value A with SP3-906-2 (default: off). At this time, only VREF is
corrected. Potential control (VD, VB, VL correction) is not done.
5. Non-use Time (default: not done)
This starts before the next print job if the machine has no job for a certain time
(M) after it makes more than a certain number (N) of prints.

Descriptions
You can adjust M with SP3-906-4. You can adjust N with SP3-906-3. Detailed

6. After Toner End Recovery


This starts after recovery from a toner end condition.
7. After Developer Initialization
The machine executes the Auto Toner Density Adjustment (SP3-125-003). This
starts after a developer initialization is done. Developer initialization occurs
automatically after a new development unit has been installed.

SM 6-9 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL

6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE

Start

VSG adjustment Step 1

ID sensor solid pattern generation Step 2

Sensor pattern density detection Step 3

Toner amount calculation Step 4

VD, VB, VL selection and VREF adjustment Step 5

ID sensor highlight pattern generation Step 6

Sensor pattern density detection Step 7 Default: off

VL (LD power) selection Step 8

End

B178D608.WMF

Step 1: VSG Adjustment


This machine uses three ID sensors (direct reflection type). They are located at the
front, center, and rear of the transfer unit. Only the center ID sensor is used for
process control. The ID sensor checks the bare transfer belt’s reflectivity. Then the
machine calibrates the ID sensor until its output (known as VSG) is as follows.
• VSG = 4.0 ± 0.5 Volts
This calibration compensates for the transfer belt’s condition and the ID sensor
condition. For example, if dirt gets on the surface of the belt or ID sensor.

B202/B178/B180 6-10 SM
PROCESS CONTROL

Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation

12 mm

15 mm

Left

Transfer belt
B178D506.WMF

First, the machine agitates the developer for between 15 and 30 seconds until the
fluctuation in TD sensor output becomes less than 0.3V.
Second, the machine makes the first series of grade patterns (see the diagram).
This 5-grade pattern is made in black, yellow, cyan, and magenta (20 squares in
total). They are made by changing the development bias and charge roller voltage.
The difference between development bias and charge roller voltage is always the
same.

Descriptions
Finally, the machine makes the second series of grade patterns in the same order
Detailed
as the first series. The development bias and charge roller voltage are not the
same as those of the first series.

Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection


The ID sensor detects the densities of the 10 solid-color squares for each color (5
squares in the first series and another 5 squares in the second series). This data
goes to memory.

Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation


The amount of toner on the transfer belt (M/A, mass per unit area, mg/cm2) is
calculated for each of the 10 grades of the sensor pattern from the ID sensor
output value from each grade of the pattern.

SM 6-11 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL

Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment

M/A

Development Bias Charge Bias LD Power


B0 C0 L0
Target B1 C1 L1
M/A — — —
B C L
— — —
Bn-1 Cn-1 Ln-1
Bn Cn Ln

B Development Bias
B178D507.WMF

The machine determines the relationship between the amount of toner on the
transfer belt and the development bias for each of the 10 grades. Then the
machine selects the development bias and charge roller voltages for the target M/A
for each color by referring to a table in memory.
Laser power (VL) selected depends on the setting of SP3-125-2.
• If it is set to "Fixed", the LD power is fixed at the value of SP2-103-1, to -27.
• If it is set to "Process Control", LD power is selected using the same memory
table as mentioned above.
• If it is set to "LD power", LD power is determined by ID sensor highlight pattern
generation (steps 6 to 8 later in this procedure).
The machine also adjusts VREF (toner density target) at the same time so that the
development gamma detected by process control will be the value stored in SP3-
120-1 to -4 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).
NOTE: The patterns on the transfer belt are cleaned by the transfer belt-cleaning
unit.
Allowable changes to VD, VB, and VL (as a result of process control):
This depends on the process control type as follows.
• Forced: No limit
• Initial: After Developer Initialization: ± 80 volts
• Interval: (Job End/ Non-use Time/ During Toner End Recovery): ± 40 volts
• Interval: (Interrupt): Constant (The memory table is not used.)
Steps 6 to 8 are done only if SP3-125-2 is set to "LD Power". (Default: Steps 6
to 8 are not used)

B202/B178/B180 6-12 SM
PROCESS CONTROL

Step 6: ID Sensor Highlight Pattern Generation

12 mm

15 mm

Left

Transfer belt
B178D508.WMF

The machine makes a 10-grade pattern on the transfer belt for each toner color.
The pattern has 10 squares. Each of the squares is 12 mm x 15 mm, and is a dot-
pattern squares (not solid-color squares like in the process of step 2). They are
made using constant bias and charge roller voltages selected from one of the types
mentioned above. The various grades are made by changing the LD power.

Step 7: Sensor Pattern Density Detection


The ID sensor detects the densities of the 10 grade-pattern squares for each color.
This data goes to memory.

Descriptions
Detailed
Step 8: VL (LD Power) Selection
The machine determines the relationship M/A
between the amount of toner on the transfer
belt and the laser power for each of the 10
grades. Then the machine selects the laser
power to get the target M/A. Target
M/A

L LD Power
B178D509.WMF

SM 6-13 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL

6.2.4 VREF COMPENSATION DURING A PRINT JOB

[A]

[B]

Left

Transfer belt
B178D510.WMF

Highlight Pattern
The M/A target (mass-per-area target) is the target toner amount in a given area.
To adjust the toner amount, a highlight pattern [B] is created on the transfer belt at
the following times during each print job.
Job Interval Color of highlight pattern
Black-and-white printing After every four pages Black
Color printing After every one page One of four colors

For color jobs, the order of pattern generation is K → Y → M → C → K → Y → M


→ C. The highlight pattern is made about 2 cm after the trailing edge of the paper
[A].

Adjustment Process
The machine generates a highlight pattern (one grade) of a specified density. The
center ID sensor checks the density. Then the machine adjusts VREF by comparing
the reading with the target of each color (SP3-905-1 to 4). The machine adjusts
VCNT when this adjustment is not sufficient.

B202/B178/B180 6-14 SM
PROCESS CONTROL

6.2.5 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL


Overview
Toner supply control uses the following to determine the amount of toner to be
supplied. This is done before every development for each color.
• Density of the toner in the developer (detected by the TD sensor) - VREF, VT
• Pixel count

The image density is kept constant by adjusting the density of toner in the
development unit. At the same time, it accommodates changes in the development
conditions through the potential control mechanism. Environmental changes and
the number of prints made are also used in the calculation.
The amount of toner supplied is determined by the ‘on’ time of the toner supply
clutch. The total ‘on’ time for each toner supply clutch is stored in the memory chip
for the relevant toner cartridge. The amount of toner supplied also depends on the
process line speed for the current job. The machine supplies the calculated amount
of toner for each color.

Toner Supply Control Modes


This machine has three toner supply control modes. You can select them with SP2-
208-1 to -4.
1. Fuzzy control mode
This is the default toner supply control mode. The TD sensor, ID sensor, and
pixel count are used in this mode.
2. Proportional control mode
This mode is used when the ID sensor at the center becomes faulty. Only the
TD sensor is used to control toner supply. The machine uses the VREF that is
stored in SP2-224-5 to -8.

Descriptions
3. Fixed supply mode Detailed
This mode is used when the TD sensor becomes faulty. You can adjust the
amount of toner supply with SP2-208-5 to -8 if the image density is incorrect
(the default setting is 5%).

SM 6-15 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL

6.2.6 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION

[B] [C]

[A]

[D]

B178D511.WMF

Introduction

Toner Near End


The controller considers the following information to determine the toner near end
status:
• TD sensor [A] in the development unit
• Operation time counter of the toner attraction pump [B]
• Memory chip [C] on the toner cartridge
• Toner end sensor [D]
There are two different toner near-end detection procedures (referred to as “Toner
Near End Detection 1” and “Toner Near End Detection 2”). The machine enters the
near-end condition if either of these is detected.

Toner End
To determine the toner end status, the controller considers the following
information:
• TD sensor [A] in the development unit
• Pixel counter

B202/B178/B180 6-16 SM
PROCESS CONTROL

Toner Near End Detection 1


The controller considers the following information from the TD sensor:
1) The controller checks that the following condition is satisfied ten times
consecutively:
VREF + 0.4 V < VT
NOTE: You can adjust the condition with SP2-212.
2) If the above condition is satisfied, toner is supplied to the development unit.
The messages, “Loading Toner” and “Please wait,” show.
3) The controller checks the above condition again.
a) If the condition is satisfied, the controller decides that the machine is in
the toner near end status. The messages, “Toner is almost empty,”
“Replace Toner Cartridge(s),” and “Xxxxx,” shows. “Xxxxx” indicates the
color, such as cyan.
b) If the condition is not satisfied, the controller decides that the machine is
not in the toner near end status. The machine resumes its normal
operation.

Toner Near End Detection 2


The controller considers the information from the operation time counter of the
following:
• Toner attraction pump
• Memory chip on the toner bottle
• Toner end sensor.
1) To calculate the toner amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the controller
considers the operation time counter of the toner attraction pump and the
initial amount of the toner (recorded in the memory chip).
2) If the amount reaches the predefined weight (default: 100 g), the controller

Descriptions
checks the signals from the toner end sensor. Detailed
NOTE: You can adjust the weight with SP2-212-1 and -2.
a) If the signals indicate the toner amount has fallen to a certain level
(determined by SP 2-212-12 to -15), the controller decides that the
machine is in the toner near end status. The messages, “Toner is almost
empty,” “Replace Toner Cartridge(s)”, and “Xxxxx,” show. “Xxxxx”
indicates the color, such as cyan.
b) If the signals indicate the toner amount is not less than a certain level,
the controller decides that the machine is not in the toner near end status.
The machine resumes its normal operation.

SM 6-17 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL

Toner End Detection


The machine flags the toner end status when one of the conditions below is
detected for a toner color. The messages, “No Toner,” “Replace Toner Cartridge,”
and “Xxxxx,” show. “Xxxxx” indicates the color, such as cyan.
• VREF + 0.5 V < VT (ten times consecutively)
• The pixel counter counts up to the equivalent of 50 A4 sheets of pixels (100%
coverage) since near-end was detected.
However, printing continues if fewer pages have been made since near-end than
the number set with SP 2-212-11 (default: 10 pages).
NOTE: If one of the following conditions is detected 10 consecutive times, the
machine flags a “toner end condition”. This condition does not depend on
the number of pages printed since near-end.
• VREF + 1.2 V < VT
• VT > 4.8 V
The machine cannot print until the toner cartridge is replaced after it detects toner
end for black. The machine can print in black and white only if cyan, magenta, or
yellow are in a toner end condition during standby mode. At this time the machine
cannot do color print jobs.
NOTE: If the yellow, cyan, or magenta toner ends during a color-printing job, the
job is suspended until toner is supplied. If new color toner is not installed,
the user can print black-and-white jobs only.

Toner End Recovery


The machine assumes that the toner cartridge has been replaced if either of the
following occurs when the near-end or end status exists:
• The upper right cover is opened and closed.
• The main switch is turned off and on.
Then the machine starts to supply toner to the development unit. After supplying
toner, the machine clears the toner near-end or end status if the following
conditions are detected:
• Vt [0] – Vt [3] > 0.5V
• Vt – Vref > 0.3V

B202/B178/B180 6-18 SM
PROCESS CONTROL

6.2.7 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION


You must set “Enable” in SP5-999-005 (black), 006 (yellow), 007 (magenta), or 008
(cyan) for the machine to detect the new unit after you install a new development
unit. These settings depend on the development unit you install. The machine
initializes the developer when it detects a new unit.
First, the machine agitates the developer for about 60 seconds. Second, it adjusts
VCNT (control voltage for TD sensor) so that VT (TD sensor output) becomes 3.0 ±
0.2 volts. Finally, the machine keeps this VT as VREF.
VCNT is corrected for the current humidity every print job. VCNT is also corrected for
the total number of prints. This does not let the developer Q/M vary.

If the humidity correction is giving poor


results (for example, if the humidity sensor
[A] is broken), it can be disabled with SP2-
223-2. Then a value for VCNT must be input
manually using SP2-224-1 to -4 (adjust by
trial and error).
During developer initialization, the machine
forcibly supplies toner because there is no
toner inside the toner transport tube at
installation. Then the machine does the
process control self check.

[A]

B178D512.WMF

Descriptions
Detailed

SM 6-19 B202/B178/B180
SCANNING

6.3 SCANNING
6.3.1 OVERVIEW

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

10 9
B178D513.WMF

1. Scanner HP sensor 6. Scanner motor


2. ADF exposure glass 7. Exposure glass
3. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage) 8. Sensor board unit (SBU)
4. Scanner lamp 9. Original length sensor
5. 1st scanner (1st carriage) 10. Original width sensor

The original on the exposure glass or ARDF exposure glass reflects the light
emitted from the scanner lamp. The reflected light goes to the CCD on the sensor
board by way of the 1st and 2nd scanners. The sensor board converts the CCD
analog signals into digital signals.
When the original is manually placed on the exposure glass, the scanner motor
pulls the 1st and 2nd scanners via mechanical linkage. The original is scanned
from left to right as shown above.
When the original is fed from the optional ARDF, it is automatically transported
onto the ARDF exposure glass, and to the original exit. The original does not stay
on the glass; but goes to the exit. The 1st and 2nd scanners stay at their home
positions.

B202/B178/B180 6-20 SM
SCANNING

6.3.2 SCANNER DRIVE

[A] [E]

[B]

[C]
[D]
B178D514.WMF

The scanner motor [B] drives the 1st scanner [A] and the 2nd scanner [E] through
the scanner drive pulley, scanner drive shaft [C], and two scanner wires [D].

Book mode -
The SBU board controls the scanner drive motor. The 2nd scanner speed is half
that of the 1st scanner.
In reduction or enlargement mode, the scanning speed depends on the
magnification ratio. The returning speed is always the same, whether in full size or
magnification mode. The image length change in the sub scan direction is done by
changing the scanner motor speed. In the main scan direction it is done by image
processing on the IPU board.

Descriptions
Detailed
You can adjust the magnification in the sub-scan direction by changing the scanner
motor speed with SP4-008.

ARDF mode -
The scanners always stay in their home position (the scanner HP sensor detects
the 1st scanner) to scan the original. The ARDF motor feeds the original through
the ARDF. In reduction/enlargement mode, the image length change in the sub-
scan direction is done by changing the ARDF motor speed. Magnification in the
main scan direction is done in the IPU board. This is the same as for book mode.
You can adjust magnification in the sub-scan direction by changing the ARDF
motor speed with SP6-017.

SM 6-21 B202/B178/B180
SCANNING

6.3.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

[A]

[B]

B178D515.WMF

• The original width sensors [A] detect the original width. The original length
sensors [B] detect the original length.
• The SBU controller on the SBU board checks each sensor status when the
platen cover sensor is activated as it is closed. It detects the original size by the
on/off signals it gets from each sensor.
• If the copy is made with the platen cover fully open, the SBU controller on the
SBU determines the original size from the sensor outputs after the Start key is
pressed.

L1 L2 L3

W1
W2

B178D516.WMF

B202/B178/B180 6-22 SM
SCANNING

Width
Original Size Length Sensor
Sensor SP4-301
Metric display
Inch version L3 L2 L1 W2 W1
version
A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 132
B4 10" x 14" O O O X O 141
F4 8.5" x 14" (8" x 13") O O O X X 165
A4-L 8.5" x 11" X O O X X 133
B5-L X X O X X 142
A4-S 11" x 8.5" X X X O O 5
B5-S X X X X O 14
A5-L, A5-S 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5" X X X X X 128

NOTE: L: Lengthwise, S: Sideways, O: Paper present, X: Paper not present

For other combinations, “Cannot detect original size.” shows on the operation
panel.
The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size. This
original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre-scan and
increases the machine’s productivity.
However, if the by-pass tray is used, the machine assumes that the copy paper is
lengthwise (L). For example, if A4 sideways paper is placed on the by-pass tray,
the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans a full A3 area. Information from the
original size sensors is disregarded.
Refer to the ARDF manual for more information on original size detection with the
ARDF.

Descriptions
Detailed
6.3.4 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
The anti-condensation heater is available as an optional unit. The anti-
condensation heater prevents condensation on the mirrors. Condensation can
occur when the scanner unit is moved from a cold room to a warm room, for
example. Condensation can cause abnormal images.

SM 6-23 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE PROCESSING

6.4 IMAGE PROCESSING


6.4.1 OVERVIEW

CCD SBU

IPU

FCU
Option
Mother Board

LD Board
HDD

M
Controller BCU
C
Y
Memory
K
B178D517.WMF

Memory
• The CCD (Charged Coupled Device) generates three analog video signals. K
• The SBU (Sensor Board Unit) converts the three analog signals to 10-bit digital
signals. It sends these signals to the IPU (Image Processing Unit).
• The IPU processes the image. Then the image data goes to the controller.

B202/B178/B180 6-24 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING

6.4.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM

O R(B)
Analog Amplifier 10 bit R 10 bit Field 8 bit
E A/D Converter Memory

O G
Analog Amplifier 10 bit SBU G 10 bit Field 8 bit
CCD E ASIC
A/D Converter Controller Memory

O B(R)
Analog Amplifier 10 bit B 10 bit 8 bit
E A/D Converter

SBU IPU

B178D518.WMF

Signal Processing
1. Signal Amplification
• Operational amplifiers amplify odd-pixel and even-pixel RGB analog signals
from the CCD.
2. Signal Composition
• The amplified signals (even-pixel and odd-pixel for each RGB color) are
combined by the MPX circuit after A/D conversion.

A/D Conversion
• The analog signals (CCD output) are converted to 10-bit (1024 gradations) digital
signals.

Descriptions
White Level Correction Detailed
A white plate is on the back of the left scale. The scanner scans this plate to see
the actual white level when you turn the switch on. To compensate the difference
between the actual white level and the ideal white level (target white level), the
CCD-gain control is conducted.

Others
The SBU controller exchanges the R and B signals if the original is scanned with
the ARDF.

SM 6-25 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE PROCESSING

Black Level Correction


• Improves image reproduction for high-density areas.
• Reads the black video level at black elements on the CCD. These pixels are
masked off, and should produce a pure black signal.
• This is subtracted from the value of each pixel.
• Calculated for each scan line.
• Corrects the image data for any changes in black level with time, as the machine
scans down the page.

Adjustments
The properties of the scanner unit, (necessary for controlling the scanner VPU
(video processing unit)), are stored in the NVRAM on the controller.
Adjust the following after you replace the SBU:
SP4–008 Scanner sub-scan magnification
SP4–010 Scanner leading edge registration
SP4–011 Scanner side-to-side registration

VPU Test Mode


Output the VPU test pattern with SP4-907 to make sure the scanner VPU control
functions correctly. ( “4. Troubleshooting” for details)

B202/B178/B180 6-26 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING

6.4.3 IPU BLOCK DIAGRAM

SBU

• SBU I/F ASIC0

• Shading Correction
• Picture Elemnet Correction
• Color Correction
• Scanner γ Correction
• Main Scan Magnification
• Filter
• ADS ASIC1

I/F
Controller

• ACS • Printer γ Correction


• Image Separation

PCI BUS
ASIC3

BCU
ASIC2

• Gradation Processing

ASIC4
IPU

Controller
FCU
Option

B178D519.WMF

Shading Correction
Auto shading compensates for the possible differences in the amount of light at the
edge and center of a scanned image caused by the scanner lens, or, variations
Descriptions
Detailed
among pixels of the CCD.

SM 6-27 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE PROCESSING

Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction


Picture element correction does the following two things:
1. Completion of the scan line correction process.
2. Correction if the CCD is not perpendicular to the light.
• The green CCD line is taken as a standard.
• Both ends of the red and blue lines are adjusted to match.
• Use SP 4-932-1 to 4-932-4 to change the vertical line correction level
( “3. Replacement and Adjustment – Image Adjustments”).

Scan Line Correction


R, G, and B CCD lines are spaced 4 lines apart (8 lines total) when full size
magnification is used.
• Scan line correction synchronizes these signals by storing each line in memory.
• The difference between the R, G and B signals depends on the magnification
ratio.
• If this calculation does not result in an integer, the corrected data is set to the
closest integer. At this time, further correction is needed ( “Picture Element
Correction”).

Image Separation
The machine separates the original image into text and photo (dot screen) areas.

Edge Separation
• Used to locate text and line diagrams
• Locates areas of strong contrast.
• Looks for continuity of black or colored pixels.
• Looks for continuity of white pixels around black or colored pixels.
• Only uses data from the green CCD.

Dot Screen Separation


• If white pixels are not detected around non-white pixels, it is a dot screen area.

Colored Text Separation


• Identifies whether the text area’s pixels are black or color.
• This is based on the following:
1) Differences among the RGB maximum signal levels.
2) Output levels of the RGB video signals.

B202/B178/B180 6-28 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING

ACS (Auto Color Select)

Black and white first

255
Signal Level

204 (50% UCR rate)

153 (50% UCR rate)

Color first

RGB common data


0 102 128 255
R G B
(40% UCR rate) (50% UCR rate)
RGB signal after scanner γ correction

B178D520.WMF
B178D609.WMF

The Auto Color Select determines if an original is black/white or color. Black copy
mode or full color mode is automatically selected.
Selection is made based on the difference between the RGB signal levels. RGB
video signals are compared. If the maximum difference among RGB signals is
within a certain range, the original is considered black and white.

Descriptions
Detailed

SM 6-29 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE PROCESSING

Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction)

255 255

0 1023 0
255
Dark Light Dark Light
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
B178D610.WMF
B178D521.WMF

The RGB video signals from the CCD go to the IPU section. This signal is
proportional to the intensity of light reflected from the original image (Fig. 1).
Scanner gamma correction inverts the video signals. The shading circuit converts
the signal from 10-bit to 8-bit.
• The IPU section converts the signal levels as shown in Fig. 2.
• This improves the accuracy of RGB to CMY color conversion (conversion is done
later in the image process).
• The same table is used for R, G, and B signals.

B202/B178/B180 6-30 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING

Filtering
Necessary software filters are applied to the RGB video signals.
• Varies depending on the results of auto text/photo separation (or on the selected
original mode).
• RGB smoothing is applied to photo areas
• Edge emphasis applied to text areas.

Background Density Control


• Removes low ID image signals (background) that are less than a certain
threshold.
• The threshold depends on the color mode (single color or full color).
Users can select a different threshold for each mode.

ADS (Auto Image Density Selection)


• Full color mode
1) Refers to the RGB data taken from the entire original.
2) Calculates a threshold for removing the background based on this data.
• Black and white mode
1) Determines the peak white level.
2) Peak level data is taken for each scan line.
3) Removes the peak white level from the image. This produces a white
background.
4) Also uses the peak white level to determine the white reference value for
A/D conversion.
5) Background density is adjusted before data is input to the A/D converter.

Descriptions
Detailed

SM 6-31 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE PROCESSING

Color Conversion
Transparency for each color toner is not ideal. Color conversion compensates for
the differences between the ideal and actual characteristics. A matrix converts the
RGB video signals into CMYK video signals while the original is scanned once.

Conversion Matrix
The following color conversion table is an example of the results from the matrix
operation.
• Simple color copying.
• No special modes applied.
• To represent green, the yellow and cyan toners are used in a 1:1 ratio.

Color Conversion Table


Original Color
K R Y G C B M W
Toner
Y 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
M 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0
C 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
K 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

User Program Mode


When the user selects one of the following special modes, the values in this table
may fall between 0 and 1.
Photo mode
• Glossy Photo
• Printed Photo
• Copied Photo
Others
• Generation Mode
• Pale Mode
• Map Mode
Two-color mode
• Separates black areas and colored areas.
• Converts black areas to a color selected by the user.
• All other areas are converted to a second color selected by the user.
( Operator’s manual for details)

B202/B178/B180 6-32 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING

Main Scan Magnification


The ASIC2 chip on the IPU board handles reduction and enlargement in the main
scan direction while the machine changes the scanner speed to reduce or enlarge
the original in the sub-scan direction.
• Scanning and laser writing are done at a fixed pitch (CCD elements cannot be
squeezed or expanded).
• Imaginary points are calculated. These correspond to a physical enlargement or
reduction.
• Image density is then calculated for each of the imaginary points based on the
image data for the nearest two true points.
• The calculated data then becomes the new (reduced or enlarged) image data.
NOTE: The actual calculations for main scan magnification use the polynomial
convolution method. This mathematical process is beyond the scope of this
service manual and will not be covered here.

Descriptions
Detailed

SM 6-33 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE PROCESSING

Printer Gamma Correction

Example: Y
K
High

Output ID

Low
Low Input Signal High

Fig. 1
Fig. 2
B178D611.WMF
B178D522.WMF

The gamma curves for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black should be identical, as
shown in figure 1. However, slight variations in the electrical components can result
in varying gamma curves, as shown in figure 2.
• Printer characteristics are much more variable than scanner ones. Printer
gamma needs recalibration and adjustment from time to time.
• The Auto Color Calibration (ACC) procedure compensates for any discrepancies
in color reproduction.
• ACC makes new gamma curves for each color in each mode (text, photo, and
black text).
• After ACC, you can adjust the gamma curve for each color with service program
(SP4-918).
• 4 different modes:
1) ID max.
2) Shadow (High ID)
3) Middle (Middle ID)
4) Highlight (Low ID)
• You can get back the previous gamma curve if it was better.
• You can load factory settings with SP 5-610-4.
NOTE: If the factory settings have been overwritten, this will return the new
values, not the actual settings made in the factory. This is deliberate,
since some drift is expected. After a time, the original factory settings
may no longer be suitable.
• Factory settings can be overwritten by the current gamma settings with SP5-610-
5.

B202/B178/B180 6-34 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING

ID Max.
This mode adjusts the total image density
as shown in figure 3. High

ID MAX
OFFSET

Output ID

Low

Low Input Signal High

Fig. 3
B178D523.WMF

Shadow (High ID)


The High ID mode adjusts the image
density between Level 6 and Level 9 of the High
color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart Shadow
(figure 4). OFFSET
Output ID

0
Low

Low Input Signal High

Fig. 4
B178D524.WMF

Middle (Middle ID)


The Middle ID mode adjusts the image
density between Level 3 and Level 7 of the High

color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart Middle


OFFSET
(figure 5). Output ID

Descriptions
Detailed
0
Low

Low Input Signal High

Fig. 5 B178D525.WMF

Highlight (Low ID)


High
The Low ID mode adjusts the image density Highlight
between Level 2 and Level 5 of the color OFFSET

gradation scale on the C-4 test chart (figure Output ID

6).
0
Low

Low Input Signal High

Fig. 6
B178D526.WMF

SM 6-35 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE PROCESSING

Auto Color Calibration Test Pattern


The test pattern has eight, 17-step
gradation scales for each color (CMYK).
This includes background white for Text
and Photo modes.

ACC automatically calibrates the printer Dark Light


gamma curve. The user starts the ACC K
process.
C
1. The user prints an ACC Test
M
Pattern.
Y
2. The user places the test pattern on
the exposure glass. K
3. The copier makes 8 scans to read C
each color scale.
M
4. The copier corrects the printer
Y
gamma by comparing the ideal
settings with the current image
density.
5. The copier combines the corrected
gamma curve with the shadow, B178D527.WMF

middle, and highlight values in the


current memory.
6. Then the copier calculates the ID
max (amplitude of the gamma curve) based on data from the ACC scan.
7. You can adjust the corrected printer gamma further with SP mode (SP4-918).

Error Diffusion
Error diffusion reduces the difference in contrast between light and dark areas of a
halftone image. Each pixel is corrected using the difference between it and the
surrounding pixels. The corrected pixels are then compared with an error diffusion
matrix.

IPU Board Test


You can check the IPU board with SP4-904-1 or 2.
( “4. Troubleshooting” for details)

B202/B178/B180 6-36 SM
IMAGE DATA PATH

6.5 IMAGE DATA PATH

CCD SBU

IPU

FCU
Option
Mother Board

LD Board
HDD

M
Controller BCU
C
Y
Memory
K
B178D517.WMF

Copier Application
SBU → IPU → Controller (HDD/Memory) → IPU → Controller (straight through) →
BCU
Descriptions
Detailed
Printer Application
Controller → IPU (through) → Controller → BCU

Scanner Application (1 bit/8 bits)


SBU → IPU → Controller (HDD/Memory)

Fax Application (Transmission/Reception)


Transmission: SBU → IPU → FCU
Reception: FCU → IPU → Controller (straight through) → BCU

SM 6-37 B202/B178/B180
LASER EXPOSURE

6.6 LASER EXPOSURE


6.6.1 OVERVIEW
1 2
18
17 3
16
4

15 5
6

14 8

13

12

11
9
10 B178D529.WMF

1. Synchronizing detector board-Y, K-E 10. OPC drum-M


2. LD unit-Y 11. WTL
3. LD unit-K 12. OPC drum-C
4. LD Mirror-M 13. OPC drum-Y
5. LD unit-M 14. OPC drum-K
6. LD unit-C 15. Synchronizing detector board-Y, K-S
7. F-theta lens-M, C 16. F-theta lens-Y, K
8. Synchronizing detector board-M, C-S 17. Polygon mirror motor
9. Synchronizing detector board-M, C-E 18. LD Mirror-K

This machine uses four LD units and one polygon mirror motor to produce latent
images on four OPC drums (one drum for each color toner).
There are two hexagonal mirrors. Each mirror reflects beams from two LD units.
The LD unit for black has two laser diodes to do dual beam writing (this is only
done for black-and-white printing; for full color printing, only one of the beams is
used).
Laser exposure for magenta and cyan starts from the rear side of the drum.
However, for yellow and black it starts from the front side of the drum. This is
because the units for magenta and cyan are on the other side of the polygon mirror
from the units for yellow and black.

B202/B178/B180 6-38 SM
LASER EXPOSURE

6.6.2 OPTICAL PATH


[D]
[A]
[F]

[B]

[C]

[E]

B178D530.WMF

The laser beams for cyan [C] and yellow [A] are directed to the upper part of the
polygon mirror [B]. Laser beams for magenta [E] and black [D] are directed to the
lower part of the polygon mirror. The LD mirrors (see the previous page) deflect the
laser beams for magenta and black towards the lower polygon mirror.
The WTL [F] corrects the main scan line. Without this component, the line bends
out towards the middle of the main scan. The central bend of the WTL is adjusted
in the factory.
The speed of the polygon mirror depends on the selected mode and model (see
below).

Descriptions
Detailed
Resolution Polygon motor Process line Print speed
Mode Remarks
(dpi) speed (rpm) speed (mm/s) (ppm)
C2a: 38,268 C2a: 162 C2a: 35
600 x 600
B/W C2b: 26,221 C2b: 222 C2b: 45
1,800 x 600
(except C2k: 38,268 C2k: 162 C2k: 28 Dual beam
OHP/Thick C2a: 29,528 C2a: 125 C2a: 28 writing
paper) 1,200 x 1,200 C2b: 38,268 C2b: 162 C2b: 35
C2k: 29,528 C2k: 125 C2k: 24
Color C2a: 29,528 C2a: 125 C2a: 28
600 x 600
(except C2b: 38,268 C2b: 162 C2b: 35
1,800 x 600
OHP/Thick C2k: 29,528 C2k: 125 C2k: 24
paper) 1,200 x 1,200 38,268 81 17
600 x 600
OHP/Thick 1,800 x 600 38,268 81 17
1,200 x 1,200

SM 6-39 B202/B178/B180
LASER EXPOSURE

6.6.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR

[B]

[B]

[A]

[A]
B178D531.WMF

Overview
The machine has four laser synchronizing detector boards (LSD). There is one at
each corner of the laser optics-housing unit.
Each pair of boards detects two colors. The machine recognizes each color from
the time that they are detected. The two LSDs at the right [A] are used for magenta
and cyan. The two LSDs at the left [B] are used for yellow and black.

Main Scan Start Detection


For magenta and cyan, the LSD at the rear detects the start of the main scan. For
yellow and black, the LSD at the front detects the start of the main scan.

Clock Frequency Adjustment


Each pair ensures that the number of laser clock pulses in the main scan is
constant. If the count for one particular beam varies from normal, the LD clock
frequency for that beam is adjusted.
If the board at the end position is defective, this cannot be detected. At this time,
you must disable the detection feature with SP2-919-1.

B202/B178/B180 6-40 SM
LASER EXPOSURE

6.6.4 DUAL BEAM WRITING


Dual Beam Mechanism
The LD unit for black has two laser diodes. Each face of the polygon mirror writes
two main scan lines. This only happens for black and white printing.

Laser Beam Pitch Change Mechanism

[E]

[A]

[B]
1
2
3
B178D532.WMF
[C] [D]
B178D612.WMF

There is a spring [A] at the front end of the black LD unit [E]. There is a positioning
motor [D] at the right end. The spring pushes the unit clockwise, while the motor
pushes it counterclockwise. These two components drive the unit to one of the
following three positions:
• 600-dpi position []
• 1,200-dpi position []

Descriptions
• Home position [‘] Detailed
Before it is driven to the 600-dpi position or the 1,200-dpi position, the black LD unit
is set to its home position. When driven from one position to another, the unit goes
as follows:
• 600-dpi position → Home position → 1,200-dpi position
• 1,200-dpi position → Home position → 600-dpi position
The home position is detected by the home position sensor [B]. When the unit is in
its home position, the actuator [C] is out of the sensor. The 600-dpi and 1,200-dpi
positions are determined by the distance from the home position. The distance is
calculated from the operation time of the LD positioning motor.

SM 6-41 B202/B178/B180
LASER EXPOSURE

Printing Mode and Black LD Unit Position


The machine changes the main scan resolution between 600 and 1,200 dpi for
black and white printing by rotating the LD unit. However, this does not occur for
OHP sheets and thick paper (remains at the 600 dpi position).

The table shows the printing modes and the positions of the black LD unit.

Mode Position
600 dpi 600-dpi position
Monochrome
1,200 dpi 1,200-dpi position
600 dpi 600-dpi position
Color
1,200 dpi 600-dpi position

You must adjust the beam pitch for 600 dpi and 1,200 dpi with SP2-109-2 -3 after
you replace the laser optics-housing unit.

B202/B178/B180 6-42 SM
LASER EXPOSURE

6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH

24 Front C over
V and U pper
Left C over 5
R ight C over SW V
LD 5 LD 5
SW V V LD 5V
R ELA 1.8V
Y R EG 3.3V
24V S 5V 1.8V 3.3V 5V L P
1.8V LD O F PM AC A D D
5V R EG 3.3 F
PSU 3.3V V
G AVD LD
PD

24V 3.3V
24V 5V
LD B (M )
GND BCU LD 5
V

A relay on the PSU ensures 3.3V


1.8V
5V
PM AC A
L
D
P
D
technician and user safety. It G AVD LD O F
F LD
PD
also prevents the laser
beam from turning on during G APC I
LD B (C )
servicing. This relay turns off
when the front cover, upper C PU
(H 8)
LD 5
V

left cover, or right door is 3.3V


5V L
D
P
1.8V PM AC A D
opened. At this time it cuts G AVD LD O F
F LD

the power (+5V) supplied to PD

the LD board for each color


LD B (Y)
through the BCU.
LD 5
V

3.3V 5V L
D P
1.8V LD O F PM AC A D
G AVD F
24V LD
P olygon PD
M otor GN
D

LD B (K )

B178D533.WMF

Two safety switches are used to turn the relay off. One switch is used for the front

Descriptions
cover and upper left cover. This safety switch is off when either of the two covers is Detailed
opened. The other safety switch is used for the right door.
• PMAC: Precise Pulse Modulation ASIC on
C-MOS technology
• LDB: LD Drive Board (included in the LD Unit)

Front and Upper Left Cover Switch


The micro switch [A] on the PSU is activated or
deactivated by the actuator [B] when the front [A]
cover or the upper left cover is opened and closed.
[B]

B178D500.WMF

SM 6-43 B202/B178/B180
LASER EXPOSURE

Error Messages

[A]

[B]
[C]
[D]

[E]

B178D534.WMF

Along with other switches, the LD safety switches help show error messages
related to external covers. When one or more covers are open, the messages,
“Cover is open as shown” and “Close it,” show with a diagram. The diagram shows
which cover is open. The table lists the diagram indications and the switch
conditions. Note that some diagram indications take precedence over others.

Condition
Diagram indication [A] Upper left [B] Duplex unit [C] Front door [E] Right door
cover switch switch switch switch
Upper left cover Open (any) (any) (any)
Duplex unit (any) Open (any) (any)
Front cover Closed (any) Open (any)
Right door Closed (any) Closed Open

NOTE: 1) In the table, “any” indicates that the condition does not affect the
diagram indication.
2) The left door switch [D] stays closed when the upper left cover switch
[A] is closed.

B202/B178/B180 6-44 SM
LASER EXPOSURE

6.6.6 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT


Overview
YY, KK, CC, MM: Spaces between two lines of the same color
KY, KC, KM: Spaces between a black line and a color line

Front Center Rear

Y
YY KY YY KY YY KY
K
KK KC KK KC KK KC
C
CC KM CC KM CC KM

M
MM MM MM

Y
K
C
M

B178D535.WMF

During automatic line position adjustment, the line patterns above are created eight
times on the transfer belt. The spaces between the lines (YY, KK, CC, MM, KY, KC,
KM) are measured by the front, center, and rear ID sensors. The controller takes
the average of the spaces. Then it adjusts the following positions and
magnification:

Descriptions
• Sub scan line position for YCM Detailed
• Main scan line position for YCM
• Magnification ratio for KYCM
• Skew for YCM
The transfer belt-cleaning unit cleans the transfer belt after the patterns are
measured. SC285 shows if an error is detected four times consecutively.

SM 6-45 B202/B178/B180
LASER EXPOSURE

Summary of Each Adjustment

Sub scan line position for YCM


The adjustment of the sub-scan line position for YCM is based on the line position
for K (color registration). The machine measures the gaps between the lines of
each color in the pattern on the transfer belt. If the gaps for a color are not correct,
the machine moves the image of the color up or down the sub scan axis. To do this,
it changes the laser write timing for that color.

Main scan line position for YCM


If the machine detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, it
changes the laser write start timing for each scan line.

Magnification adjustment for KYCM


If the machine detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes the
LD clock frequency for the required color.

Skew for YCM


The adjustment of the skew for YCM is based on the line position for K.

B202/B178/B180 6-46 SM
LASER EXPOSURE

Adjustment Conditions
Line position adjustment timing depends on several SP mode settings. However,
the mode selection, SP5-993-001, takes precedence over the others. The table
below shows the conditions and the processes you need to do. Note that the
adjustments of the sub-scan line position, main scan line position, and
magnification are done under the same conditions.
The numbers in the mode selection column show the setting of SP 5-993-001. For
details, refer to the description for SP 5-993-001 in the SP table.

Mode S-pos./
selectio Condition Setting M-pos./ Skew
n Magni.
Job End SP3-906-001 
Interrupt SP3-906-002 
Process Non-use Time 1, 2 SP3-906-003, 004 
1
control Recovery (fusing
temperature 60°C or None  
lower)
Standby SP5-993-003, 005 
Temperature
Job start SP5-993-003, 006 
difference
Interrupt SP5-993-003, 04, 022 
1 or 2 Main scan length detection SP2-919-001 *
Initialization (fusing temperature over
SP5-993-026 
60°C)
Replacement of development unit or
None  
PCU
0, 1, or 2 Forced self check SP5-993-002  

S-pos. : Sub-scan line position  : Executed


M-pos. : Main scan line position * : Executed one time when the
Magni. : Magnification conditions are met twice

NOTE: 1) “Recovery” includes turning on the main switch.

Descriptions
2) Fusing temperature is measured by the thermistor in the fusing unit. Detailed
Other temperatures are measured by the sensors on the laser optics-
housing unit.
3) You can use SP5-993-035 to select one of the six frequency levels of
the line position adjustment.

SM 6-47 B202/B178/B180
LASER EXPOSURE

Main Scan Skew Adjustment

[B]

[C]

[D]

[A]
B178D536.WMF

The 3rd mirror positioning motors for magenta [A], cyan [B], and yellow [C] adjust
the angle of the 3rd mirrors [D] respectively, based on the 3rd mirror position for
black. This mechanism corrects main scan skew.

6.6.7 DIFFERENCES IN THE COPY AND PRINTER MODES


To improve reproduction in the copy mode, the machine generates the print image
with 2 bits per pixel. Different parameters are used for the copy and print modes as
shown in the table below.
Function Copy Mode Printer Mode
Gradation for printing 2 bits / pixel 1 bit / pixel
LD control SP2-103-101 to -110 SP2-103-1 to -66
Pointer table display SP3-902-5 to -8 SP3-902-1 to -4

B202/B178/B180 6-48 SM
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT


6.7.1 OVERVIEW

1
7 2
6

B178D537.WMF

1. Cleaning brush roller 5. Waste toner collection auger


2. Charge roller (non-contact) 6. Lubricant bar
3. OPC drum 7. Cleaning blade
4. Cleaning brush

Descriptions
This machine has four independent PCUs, one for each color. Each PCU has the Detailed
following:
1) OPC drum
2) Non-contact charge roller
3) Cleaning brush
4) Cleaning blade.
The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (circumference: about 94.25 mm).
The photoconductor gap between a PCU and the corresponding development roller
is determined by the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft. You cannot adjust
this in the field.

SM 6-49 B202/B178/B180
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.7.2 DRIVE

[A]

[B]

M
B178D538.WMF

The drum drive motor-K [A] drives the PCU for black.
The drum drive motor-CMY [B] drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow.
Using one motor to drive these three drums reduces CMY color misalignment.
Both motors are brush-less DC motors. This helps to reduce the drive noise. The
brush-less DC motors make sound that is not the same as other machines, but this
sound does not mean machine defective.

B202/B178/B180 6-50 SM
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.7.3 DRUM GEAR POSITION SENSORS

[E]

[D]
[C]

[B]

[A]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[I]
B178D539.WMF

Mechanism
The machine uses these sensors to detect if the drum motors rotate. SC440 shows

Descriptions
when it detects that the drum motor is not moving. These sensors also help the
Detailed
machine to initialize the relative positions of the gears when the main switch is
turned on, and during initializing. This prevents phase fluctuation between
printouts.
There is an interrupter [E] on each of the black [D] and yellow [C] drum gears. The
drum gear position sensors [F][G] detect the positions of these interrupters
respectively. The sensors check that the two interrupters are parallel. This
mechanism makes sure that output quality does not vary. The cyan [B] and
magenta [A] drum gears operate with the yellow drum gear because these three
drum gears are linked through other gears [H][I].

In the ready status, the two interrupters stay in a parallel position. If they are not in
a parallel position (shown in the illustration), the machine adjusts the position of the
black drum gear.
The relative positions of the gears are adjusted every 30 jobs.

SM 6-51 B202/B178/B180
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

Initialization Process and SC Codes


SC code 440-1 or 440-2 show when a drum gear position sensor detects an error.
The table shows the following:
• Steps of the initialization process
• Possible errors
• Corresponding SC codes.
Initialization process Possible error SC code
The four drums simultaneously The black drum gear
440-1
operated\ for seven seconds. The interrupter is not detected.
two drum position sensors detect the The yellow drum gear
two drum gear interrupters several 440-2
Step 1 interrupter is not detected.
times. Both black and yellow drum
gear interrupters are not 440-1
detected.
The time lags between detection of
the black drum gear interrupter and
Step 2 detection of the yellow drum gear
interrupter are checked. The average
time lag is calculated.
The black drum is operated. The The black drum gear
Step 3 position of the gear is adjusted interrupter is not detected 440-1
according to the average time lag. ( NOTE).

NOTE: No error occurs in step 1 and step 2 if the connector of the black drum
position sensor has been connected to the yellow drum position sensor
(and the connector of the yellow drum position sensor, to the black drum
position sensor).

B202/B178/B180 6-52 SM
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.7.4 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING

[B]

[A]

B178D540.WMF

This machine uses a non-contact charge roller [A] to reduce ozone. The non-
contact charge roller gives the drum surface a negative charge. The high voltage
supply board – C.B, which is located at the rear of the machine, applies a dc and
ac voltage (at a constant current) to the roller. The ac voltage helps to ensure that
the charge given to the drum is as uniform as possible.
The machine automatically controls the charge roller voltage if automatic process
control is enabled (i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to "ON"). However, if process control is
switched off, (i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to "OFF"), the dc voltage is the value stored
in SP2-001-1 to -4 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).
The diameter of the roller is 11.14 mm (circumference about 35 mm). The gap
between a drum and the corresponding charge roller is about 50 µm.
The cleaning brush roller [B], which always contacts the charge roller, cleans the

Descriptions
charge roller. Detailed
The charge roller can generate small amounts of nitrogen oxide gases (known as
NOx). These gases can stay on the surface of the drum. This can cause unfocused
copies. To avoid this, the film of NOx is removed at the following times:
• Power on
• At the end of a job (if more than 200 prints)
• When a toner cartridge has been replaced
SP3-920-1 to -4 determines when this procedure (known as “refresh mode”) is
done. You can do this at any time with SP3-920-5 if the prints are smeared.
Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at the
end of every job.

SM 6-53 B202/B178/B180
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.7.5 DRUM CLEANING

[D]
[B]

[C]

[A]

B178D541.WMF

The cleaning brush [A] spreads out the waste toner that stays on the drum. Then
the cleaning blade [B] scrapes it off. The toner collection auger [C] transports the
toner towards the waste toner collection duct.
The lubricant bar [D] is on the cleaning brush. The cleaning brush rubs against the
lubricant bar and lubricates the drum surface. Excess lubricant is removed by the
cleaning blade. Then it goes to the waste toner collection duct.

B202/B178/B180 6-54 SM
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.7.6 WASTE TONER COLLECTION

[F]
[G]
[E] [J]
[H]

[M]
[K]

[I]

[B] [L]

[A] [D]

[C] B178D542.WMF

Waste Toner Path


The waste toner from the collection augers in the four PCUs drops into the waste
toner collection duct from the four openings [F][G][H][I] at the rear of the PCUs. The
toner collection coils [J][K][L] in the duct transport this waste toner towards the

Descriptions
waste toner bottle [A]. The coils [J][K][L] are driven by development drive motor- Detailed
CMY. The openings and PCUs correspond as follows: black → [F], yellow → [G],
cyan → [H], magenta → [I].

The waste toner from the transfer belt-cleaning unit drops into the waste toner
collection duct from another opening [E].
The end of the waste toner collection duct is in the waste toner bottle [A]. There are
three openings [B][C] and one collection coil [D] in this part. The waste toner drops
into the bottle through the openings. The collection coil [D] is driven by drum drive
motor-K.

SM 6-55 B202/B178/B180
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

Waste Toner Vibrator


The waste toner vibrator has one motor [M]. The motor operates for about one
second at a time. Its vibration does not let waste toner clog the waste toner path.

The table shows the conditions under which the motor operates.

Machine status Motor operation


During machine start (machine Two times
initialization)
At the beginning of the process One time
control
Printing jobs that output five or less At the job end if 3 or more papers have been output
papers since the previous operation (of the motor) ()
Printing jobs that output 6 or more Every five papers and at the job end ()
papers

Case 1: The copier does two jobs. The first job outputs one paper, and the second
job outputs two papers. In this case, the motor operates one time at the end of the
second job (see ).

Case 2: The copier does one job, and the job outputs 12 papers. In this case, the
motor operates at the following times:
• One time during the fifth printing
• One time during the tenth printing
• One time at the job end (see ).
Case 3: The copier does two jobs. The first job outputs one paper, and the second
job outputs 12 papers. In this case, the motor operates at the following times:
• One time during the fifth printing of the second job
• One time during the tenth printing of the second job
• One time at the end of the second job (see ; This case does not satisfy
condition ).

B202/B178/B180 6-56 SM
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.7.7 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION

[A]

[B]

B178D543.WMF

The waste toner bottle set switch [A] detects the bottle when it is placed in the
machine.
The waste toner sensor [B] detects the weight of the bottle and informs the
machine when it is almost full.
When the bottle contains a certain amount of waste toner, the sensor is
deactivated. The machine detects that the waste toner bottle is almost full and
shows “Waste Toner is Almost Full”.
Descriptions
Detailed
At this time, the machine can print about 2,500 more sheets. After printing 2,500
sheets, it shows “Replace Waste Toner,” at the end of the job. After this, you
cannot use the machine again until the bottle is replaced or emptied.
NOTE: The number of sheets is calculated on the assumption that the paper size
is A4 and that the coverage ratio of each color is 5%.

SM 6-57 B202/B178/B180
DEVELOPMENT

6.8 DEVELOPMENT
6.8.1 OVERVIEW

3
6
4

B178D544.WMF
5

1. Doctor blade 4. TD sensor


2. Developer hopper 5. Mixing auger (left)
3. Mixing auger (right) 6. Development roller

This machine has four independent development units, one for each color. Each
contains 300 g of developer when new. The developer in each unit is supplied to
the development roller by the two mixing augers and attracted onto the surface of
the roller.
The photoconductor gap between PCU and development roller is determined by
the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft. You cannot adjust this in the field.
The TD sensor and center ID sensor control toner density. Each development unit
has a TD sensor.
The diameter of the development roller is 18.2 mm (circumference about 57.2 mm).

B202/B178/B180 6-58 SM
DEVELOPMENT

6.8.2 DRIVE

[A]

[C]

B178D545.WMF
[B]

[C]
B178D546.WMF

Descriptions
Detailed
The development drive motor-K [A] drives the development roller for black through
gears and a clutch. This motor also drives the fusing unit and paper exit rollers.
The gear trains are shown in the diagram by dotted lines.
The development drive motor-CMY [B] drives the development unit for magenta,
cyan, and yellow through gears and clutches. This motor also drives the
registration roller.
The drive gears [C] of the development units are flexible. This creates a smooth
connection between the development motor gear and the drive gear of the
development unit.

SM 6-59 B202/B178/B180
DEVELOPMENT

6.8.3 DEVELOPER AGITATION

[C]

[A] B178D547.WMF

[B]

Two mixing augers [A and B] circulate the developer forward and backward to
agitate the developer.
This happens at the following times:
• During process control self check
• During toner supply
• During development.
Ducts on the top of the developer hopper [C] make sure that the internal pressure
does not become too high. These ducts are sealed to not let the toner solidify.
This development unit does not operate very well at high temperatures (over 50°
C). The toner inside the development unit can become solid at temperatures higher
that this value. A developer initialization error shows if the toner does become solid.
At this time, you must do the following procedure:
NOTE: You should also do this procedure when you install a new development
unit.
1. Remove the (old) development unit.
2. Keep the (new) development unit level and shake it several times from side to
side.
3. Install it to the machine.

B202/B178/B180 6-60 SM
DEVELOPMENT

6.8.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS

[B]

[A]

B178D548.WMF

The sub PSU [A] supplies development bias to the development roller via the
receptacle [B] at the rear of each development unit.
There is a dc bias voltage.

Descriptions
The machine automatically controls the dc bias, if automatic process control is Detailed
enabled (i.e., if SP3-125-001 is set to "ON"). However, if process control is
switched off, (i.e., if SP3-125-001 is set to "OFF"), the dc bias is the value stored in
SP2-201-001 to 009 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).

SM 6-61 B202/B178/B180
DEVELOPMENT

6.8.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM


[D]
[E]

[C]
[B] [F]

[A]
[G]

[H]

B178D549.WMF
[I]
Overview
The air transport system agitates the toner [H] in the toner cartridges [G]. Toner is
transported to the development unit [A] by the toner attraction pump [B] (each
cartridge has a separate pump). This provides a more stable way to transport fine
powder than previous methods.

Toner Agitation and Attraction


The rear air pump [D] supplies air to the yellow and magenta toner cartridges. The
front air pump [E] supplies air to the black and cyan toner cartridges. Air agitates all
the toner in each cartridge. The pumps and four valves [C] control the airflow.
Mixed with air, the toner passes part of the way along the transport tube [I] towards
the toner attraction pump. This pump draws the toner the rest of the way ( Toner
Transport).
The air pump turns on to supply air to the toner cartridges for one second under the
following conditions:
• During normal operation (when the “on” time for a toner supply clutch
reaches a certain value).
• When forced toner supply (SP2-207) is done
• When forced toner density adjustment (SP3-126-002) is done
• At toner end recovery
• Developer initialization
The filter [F] on the inner package of the toner cartridge ensures that the internal
pressure does not become too high.

B202/B178/B180 6-62 SM
DEVELOPMENT

Air Flow and Toner Flow

[B]

[C]

[A] [D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

B178D550.WMF

The air tube [F] and the toner tube [E] are connected to the joint [C] at the bottom
of the toner cartridge holder. This joint contains an inner pipe [A] and an outer pipe
[B]. These two pipes are L-shaped. The inner pipe goes through the outer pipe.
The inner pipe is longer than the outer pipe.

The toner goes through the inner pipe [A], and reaches the toner tube [E] at the
Descriptions
bottom end of the pipe. The toner passes the sensor windows [G] on its way to the Detailed
toner tube. The windows are transparent and are at the front side and the rear side
of the pipe. The light emitted from the toner end sensor [D] goes through this area
if there is no toner in the pipe.

The airflow generated by the air pump goes through the outer pipe [B], and comes
out of the four openings at the top end.

Toner Near End Detection


Toner end sensors [D] detect toner near end conditions ( 6.2.6).

SM 6-63 B202/B178/B180
DEVELOPMENT

Toner Transport

[B]
[C] [D]

[E]

[A]
B178D551.WMF

Each toner attraction pump has the same mechanism. The pump (toner attraction
pump) [A], has the following components:
• Toner supply clutch [B]
• Rubber tube [C]
• Rotor [D]
The above components attract the toner in the toner transport tube [E] toward the
development unit.
The toner supply clutch drives the rotor, which draws the toner in from the cartridge
and passes it to the development unit. When supplying toner, the clutch turns on
and off as many times as necessary to supply the necessary amount of toner. The
amount of toner depends on the results of toner supply control.
Motor drive comes from the development drive motors.

B202/B178/B180 6-64 SM
DEVELOPMENT

Shutter Mechanism
[D] [C]

[F]
[E]

[B]
[A]
B178D552.WMF

The development unit and toner attraction pump each have a shutter mechanism.
The protrusion [A] on the development unit opens the shutter [B] in the pump when
the development unit is placed in the machine. At the same time, the protrusion [C]
on the pump opens the shutter [D] in the development unit. When both shutters are
open, toner can enter the development unit from the toner attraction pump.
The shutter spring [E and F] pulls and closes the shutter when the development
unit is removed.

6.8.6 TONER CARTRIDGE DETECTION


The memory chip [A] on each toner cartridge [A]
stores the total “on” time of the toner supply
Descriptions
clutch. This is used to calculate the amount of Detailed
toner remaining in the toner cartridge. The chip
is also used to detect whether the cartridge is
installed (if the cartridge is not installed, the
machine does not detect a signal from the
memory chip).

B178D553.WMF

SM 6-65 B202/B178/B180
PAPER FEED

6.9 PAPER FEED


6.9.1 OVERVIEW

1 2 3 4 5
6

7
8

10

11

12

16 15 14 13 B178D554.WMF

1. Pick-up roller - tray 1 9. Separation roller - By-pass feed


2. Feed roller - tray 1 10. Transport roller
3. Separation roller - tray 1 11. Vertical transport roller
4. Relay roller 12. Feed roller - tray 2
5. Registration roller 13. Separation roller - tray 2
6. Feed roller - By-pass feed 14. Pick-up roller - tray 2
7. Pick-up roller - By-pass feed 15. Paper tray 2
8. By-pass feed table 16. Paper tray 1

There are two paper trays (500 sheets each), and a by-pass feed table (100
sheets).
The paper feed mechanism uses an FRR system.
Tray 1 can hold A4 or letter paper only. Tray 2 can hold a range of sizes.

B202/B178/B180 6-66 SM
PAPER FEED

6.9.2 DRIVE – TRAY 1, TRAY 2, AND BY-PASS TRAY

[B]
[A]
[C]
[E] [D]
[H]

[I] [F] [Q]


[J]

[K] [G]
[N]
[L]
[O]
[M] [P] B178D613.WMF
B178D555.WMF

The paper feed motor [A] drives the pick-up and feed mechanisms in tray 1 [E], tray
2 [F], and the by-pass tray [G]. It uses clutches and complex trains of gears (the
locations of the gear trains are indicated by dotted lines in the above diagram) to
do this.
When tray 1 and tray 2 are inside the machine, their pick-up rollers [H][K] are
always in contact with each top sheet of the paper stack. However, the pick-up
roller [P] of the by-pass tray stays away until the by-pass pick-up solenoid [Q] turns
Descriptions
on. When the paper feed clutch [B][C][D] turns on, the pick-up, feed [I][L][N], and Detailed
separation [J][M][O] rollers start rotating to feed the paper. The paper feed clutch
stays on until shortly after the registration sensor activates.

SM 6-67 B202/B178/B180
PAPER FEED

6.9.3 PAPER LIFT – TRAYS 1 & 2

[G] [F] [E]

[H]
[A]

[B]
[I]

[D]
[C]
B178D556.WMF

The tray 1 set switch [A] and tray 2-paper size switches [B] detect when the paper
trays [C] are placed in the machine. When the machine detects that a tray has
been placed in the machine, the tray lift motor [D] rotates and the coupling gear [E]
on the tray lift motor engages the pin [F] on the lift arm shaft [G]. Then the tray lift
arm [I] lifts the tray bottom plate [H] until the paper lift sensor for the tray detects
that the top of the stack is at the paper feed position.

B202/B178/B180 6-68 SM
PAPER FEED

6.9.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2

[D]
[F]
[A] [E]
[G]

[C]

[B]

B178D557.WMF

There is no size switch for tray 1. The paper size is fixed at either A4 or LT. You
can change this with SP1-902-1.
For tray 2, four paper size switches, working in combination, detect the paper size
as shown in the table below. The actuators are on the side plate [A]. The side plate
is moved by the end plate [B] through a cam [C].
1: Pushed
Models Switch Location
North America Europe/Asia 1 [D] 2 [E] 3 [F] 4 [G]
11" x 17" SEF 11" x 17" SEF 0 1 0 0
A3 SEF A3 SEF 1 0 1 0

Descriptions
*1
81/2" x 14" SEF B4 SEF *1 1 1 0 1 Detailed
81/2" x 11" SEF *2 A4 SEF *2 0 1 1 0
11" x 81/2" LEF *3 11" x 81/2" LEF *3 1 0 1 1
A4 LEF A4 LEF 0 1 0 1
B5 LEF B5 LEF 0 0 1 0
A5 LEF A5 LEF 0 0 0 1

NOTE:
*1
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-2
*2
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 11" SEF or A4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-3
*3
: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or B5 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-4

The machine disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected
(if the paper size actuator is broken or no tray is installed).

SM 6-69 B202/B178/B180
PAPER FEED

6.9.5 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2

[A] [C]

[B]

B178D558.WMF

Two paper height sensors, working in combination, detect the amount of paper in
the tray.
When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever moves up
and the actuator [A] (on the pressure lever drive shaft) rotates.

Remaining paper Paper height sensor 2 [B] Paper height sensor 1 [C]
Full OFF OFF
Nearly full ON OFF
Near end ON ON
Almost empty OFF ON
OFF: No actuator

6.9.6 PAPER END DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2


The paper stack raises the paper end feeler and the paper end sensor deactivates
if there is some paper in the paper tray.
When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout in
the tray bottom plate. At this time the paper end sensor activates.

B202/B178/B180 6-70 SM
PAPER FEED

6.9.7 REGISTRATION
[A]

[B]

B178D559.WMF

The development drive motor - CMY [A] drives the registration roller [B] with a
clutch and a complex train of gears (the location of the gear train is indicated by
dotted lines in the above diagram).
The machine makes a paper buckle at the registration roller to correct paper skew.
You can adjust the paper buckle with SP1-003-1 to -8.

Descriptions
Detailed

SM 6-71 B202/B178/B180
PAPER FEED

6.9.8 PAPER FEED LINE SPEED


This machine has three process line speeds (for feed from registration roller to
fusing unit). The line speeds depend on the mode, selected resolution, and model.

Resolution Line speed Print speed


Mode
(dpi) (mm/s) (ppm)
C2a: 35
600 x 600 C2a/k: 162
C2b: 45
1,800 x 600 C2b: 222
C2k: 28
B/W
C2a: 28
C2a/k:125
1,200 x 1,200 C2b: 35
C2b:162
C2k: 24
C2a: 28
600 x 600 C2a/k: 125
C2b: 35
Color 1,800 x 600 C2b: 162
C2k: 24
1,200 x 1,200 81 17
600 x 600
OHP/Thick 1,800 x 600 81 17
1,200 x 1,200

The machine changes the line speed if there is a page with color in the middle of
the job during a monochrome print job. However, it will not change the line speed if
there is a monochrome page in the middle of a color print job.

Line speed (mm/s)


Paper feed from tray to registration roller 230
Fusing, paper exit to standard tray, and mailbox A bit slower than “Process line speed”
Duplex invert and feed 370
Finisher 450

B202/B178/B180 6-72 SM
PAPER FEED

6.9.9 GRIP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM

[C] [D] [E]

[B] [F]

[A]

[G]

B178D560.WMF

The grip roller release mechanism reduces the pressure of the grip roller [E].
The grip roller transports a sheet of paper to the transfer unit. When the transfer
unit starts to feed the leading edge of the paper [G], the trailing edge has still not
reached the grip roller. Paper is handled by the transfer unit and the grip roller at
the same time. If the handling speeds are not the same, this may skew the paper.
Longer paper sizes are more affected by the speed difference than shorter sizes.
From the viewpoint of image crispness, multi-color images are more easily affected
than mono-color images.

Descriptions
To solve this possible problem, the grip roller release mechanism is activated Detailed
under the following conditions:
1) B4 paper or longer is being fed.
2) The machine is operating in the full-color mode.
3) The leading edge of the paper has been fed in the transfer unit.
The spring [A] always presses the grip roller against the transport roller [B]. When
the above conditions are met, the solenoid [F] turns on. Then the lever [C] pushes
the grip roller shaft [D], and the grip roller moves away from the paper.

SM 6-73 B202/B178/B180
DUPLEX UNIT

6.10 DUPLEX UNIT


6.10.1 OVERVIEW
1 2

4
B178D561.WMF

1. Exit sensor 1 6. Junction mylar 2


2. Junction gate 7. Exit sensor 3
3. Duplex feed sensor 8. Junction mylar 1
4. Duplex inverter sensor 9. Exit sensor 2
5. Junction mylar 3

• The second page (rear side) is printed first for duplex print jobs.
• To print on the second side, the duplex inverter unit (on the side of the machine)
inverts the paper from the fusing unit and feeds it to the duplex feed unit (inside
the machine).
• The duplex feed unit feeds the inverted paper back to the paper feed section.
• When both sides have been printed, the duplex inverter unit feeds the paper out
to the finisher.
• If the mailbox or standard exit tray (on top of the machine) was selected to
receive the duplex copies, the print will not enter the duplex unit after the second
side has been printed. The junction gate inside the machine directs it upwards to
the selected tray.
• Duplex copies are not fed out to the external tray (on the left of the machine).

B202/B178/B180 6-74 SM
DUPLEX UNIT

6.10.2 DUPLEX OPERATION


Up to A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF
There are three sheets of paper in the paper feed path at the same time. The
interleave method is used.
Example: 8 pages. The callout [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. The
callout [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of paper (shaded
indicates the second side).

[A]

2 ⇒ 4 ⇒ 6 ⇒ 1 ⇒ 8 ⇒ 3 ⇒ 5 ⇒ 7
1 2 3 1 4 2 3 4
[B]
B178D562.WMF

Larger than A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF


There are two sheets of paper in the paper feed path at the same time. The
interleave method is used.
Example: 8 pages. The callout [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. The
callout [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of paper (shaded
indicates the second side).

[A]

2 ⇒ 4 ⇒ 1 ⇒ 6 ⇒ 3 ⇒ 8 ⇒ 5 ⇒ 7
1 2 1 3 2 4 3 4
[B]

Descriptions
B178D563.WMF

Detailed

SM 6-75 B202/B178/B180
DUPLEX UNIT

6.10.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT


[B]
[C]

[D]

[A]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[H]
[I]

B178D564.WMF

The duplex inverter motor 1 [A] drives the following:


• Paper exit roller 1 [B]
• Paper transport roller [C]
• Paper exit roller 2 [D]
• Upper inverter roller [E].
The duplex inverter motor 2 [F] drives the following:
• Exit roller 3 [G]
• Paper exit roller 4 [H]
• Lower inverter roller [I].

B202/B178/B180 6-76 SM
DUPLEX UNIT

6.10.4 FEED TO EXTERNAL EXIT TRAY (NON-DUPLEX MODE)

[B]
[A]

B178D565.WMF

This shows how the machine feeds paper through the duplex unit to the external
tray [A], when duplex mode is not selected.
NOTE: The paper cannot be fed out to the external tray if duplex printing is
selected.
The junction gate [B] directs the paper from the fusing unit out to the external tray

Descriptions
at one of the following times: Detailed
• If thick paper or OHP mode is selected
• If the external tray is selected as the output tray with the operation panel or the
printer driver

SM 6-77 B202/B178/B180
DUPLEX UNIT

6.10.5 FEED TO DUPLEX FEED UNIT

[A]

[C]
B178D566.WMF
[B] B178D567.WMF

This shows how the machine feeds paper back into the machine after side 1 is
printed.
The junction gate [A] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of the
inverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [B] is activated, the machine waits
until the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 3 [C]. Then the paper is switched
back and junction mylar 3 directs the paper back into the machine for the second
side.
The next page shows how the paper is fed out to the finisher after both sides are
printed.

B202/B178/B180 6-78 SM
DUPLEX UNIT

6.10.6 FEED TO TWO-TRAY FINISHER AND BOOKLET FINISHER


With Optional One-Tray Paper Feed Unit

[B]
[D]
[A]

[D]

B178D568.WMF
[C]
B178D569.WMF

The paper is fed out to the finisher from the upper exit [A].
The junction gate [B] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of the
inverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [C] is activated, the machine waits
until the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 1 [D]. Then the paper is switched
back and junction mylar 1 directs the paper out to the finisher.

With Optional LCT or Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit


[B]

[A]

Descriptions
[D] Detailed

[D] [E]

B178D570.WMF
[C] B178D571.WMF

The paper is fed out to the finisher from the lower exit [A].
The junction gate [B] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of the
inverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [C] is activated, the machine waits
until the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 2 [D], but before it passes junction
mylar 3 [E]. Then the paper is switched back and junction mylar 2 directs the paper
out to the finisher.

SM 6-79 B202/B178/B180
DUPLEX UNIT

6.10.7 DUPLEX FEED UNIT


Drive

[A]

B178D572.WMF

The duplex feed motor [A] drives all paper transport rollers.

Feed-in and feed-out

[A]

B178D573.WMF

The duplex feed unit feeds the paper from the duplex inverter unit to the relay roller
[A].

B202/B178/B180 6-80 SM
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

6.11 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION


6.11.1 OVERVIEW

12 1

2
11

10 4
9
8
5

B178D574.WMF

1. Transfer unit drive motor 7. Back-up roller


2. Transfer belt 8. Cleaning blade
3. Transfer belt mark sensor 9. Toner collection auger
4. Rotation encoder 10. Cleaning brush
5. Paper attraction roller 11. Cleaning unit
6. Transfer roller 12. ID sensor
Paper is fed to the transfer belt before image transfer begins. The paper attraction
Descriptions
Detailed
roller charges the paper to ensure that the paper is attracted to the belt.
The magenta, cyan, yellow, and black color images transfer to the paper while the
transfer belt feeds the paper past the drums towards the fusing unit. A positive
charge is applied to the paper under the transfer belt, opposite each drum, to
transfer the toner from the drums onto the paper. The back-up roller makes sure
that the contact area between the drum and belt is sufficient.

The cleaning unit in the transfer unit cleans the belt surface with the cleaning blade
and brush. The waste toner collected from the belt is transported to the waste toner
bottle.

There are three ID sensors (front, center, and rear). Only the center ID sensor
detects the image density of the patterns generated on the transfer belt for process
control. The other function of the ID sensors is for automatic line position
adjustment. All ID sensors are used for this.

SM 6-81 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

6.11.2 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE


Drive Motor

[B]

[A]

B178D575.WMF

The transfer unit drive motor [A] drives the transfer belt [B] and the cleaning unit via
the timing belt and gears. The speed of transfer belt drive depends on the process
line speed.

B202/B178/B180 6-82 SM
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

Transfer belt speed control


This machine uses two devices (Rotation encoder and transfer belt mark sensor) to
control the transfer belt speed.

Rotation Encoder

[A]

[C]

[B]
B178D576.WMF

An encoder [C] is on one of the rollers. This encoder checks the rotation speed of
the transfer belt. The controller analyzes the signals from the encoder. Then it
adjusts the rotation speed of the transfer belt.
The encoder contains a disk that has 300 notches on its surface [B]. These
notches are read by the sensor [A]. The controller counts the number of notches
that the sensor has read in the unit of time. If the sensor has read an unusually
large number of notches or an unusually small number of notches, the controller
ignores such unusual signals. Therefore, incorrect reading does not affect the
rotation speed.

Descriptions
Ignored
Detailed

Number of notches
(read by the sensor) Filter H

Filter L

Ignored
Time

B178D577.WMF

Filter H: The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt is
at its highest possible value.
Filter L: The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt is
at its lowest possible value.

SM 6-83 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

Transfer belt mark sensor

[A]

B178D575A.WMF

There is the transfer belt mark sensor [A].


Transfer belt mark sensor monitors the belt speed. The machine uses this
information to adjust the speed of the belt to account for the belt regularity.

This control method is called "Dancing Control" in the SP5-995. You must execute
SP5-995-025 and -027 after replacing the transfer belt unit or transfer belt.

B202/B178/B180 6-84 SM
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

6.11.3 TRANSFER CURRENT

[A]
[F] [B]

[C]

[E]

[D]

B178D578.WMF

The transfer roller [D] applies a current to transfer the toner to the paper on the
transfer belt [A]. The high voltage supply board supplies current to the transfer
roller and the paper attraction roller [C].

These currents are automatically corrected for paper size, temperature (measured
by the thermistor on the right side of the laser optics housing unit), and humidity
(measured by the humidity sensor).

Descriptions
The following adjustments are shown below: Detailed

• You can adjust the transfer roller current for each printing mode (color or B/W,
resolution, paper type) with SP2-301-1 to -99. The by-pass tray settings are used
when the duplex unit has not been installed and the user is making duplex prints
manually from the by-pass tray. There is a correction for narrow-width paper with
SP2-309-5 to -11.
• You can adjust the current for paper attraction with SP2-801-1 to -37.
The back-up roller [E] makes a wider contact area between the drum [B] and the
belt. The transfer exit roller [F] is charged to 2 kV. The roller prevents the toner
from being scattered while the paper is leaving the transfer unit.
The other rollers are grounded to neutralize the belt surface.

SM 6-85 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

6.11.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING

[F]

[C]

[A]
[D]

[B]

B178D579.WMF
[E]

The transfer belt-cleaning unit removes toner (during printing) and the ID sensor
patterns (during process control or automatic line position adjustment) on the belt.
Belt cleaning is completed while the transfer belt makes one rotation. The transfer
unit drive motor [A] drives the unit.
The cleaning brush [B] always contacts the transfer belt [C], and removes waste
toner from the belt. The cleaning blade [D] in the cleaning unit scrapes the toner off
the transfer belt. Then the toner collection auger [E] transports the toner towards
the waste toner collection duct.
The scraper [F] does not let the waste toner stick to the cleaning brush.

B202/B178/B180 6-86 SM
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

6.11.5 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]
B178D580.WMF

Mechanism
The transfer belt contact and release mechanism increases the lifetime of the
transfer belt and drums.
The drum for black always contacts the belt. However, the transfer belt moves
away from the other drums during monochrome printing.
In the standby mode, the transfer belt contacts only the black drum. The transfer
belt moves away from the black drum when you turn the release lever
Descriptions
Detailed
counterclockwise.
When the machine prints a color page, the machine waits until the previous page
has gone through the transfer unit. Then the transfer belt contact motor [C] turns on
and a cam [D] moves the lower end [E] of the transfer belt upward, so that it
contacts the other three drums.
The machine does not release the transfer belt from the color drums during the job,
even if a monochrome page comes again. This is because the total printing speed
reduces if the transfer belt changes position.
The belt moves away from the color drums if the job is interrupted by any error
except a power failure.
NOTE: If a power failure occurs when the transfer belt is in contact with the drum,
the belt stays in this position. To release the belt, swing out the controller
box. Then turn the drive gear [B] manually.

SM 6-87 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

Transfer Belt Sensor


The transfer belt sensor [A] operates as a detection sensor during machine
initialization, and also as a position sensor during machine operations.
Before machine initialization, the lower end of the transfer belt is in the home
position. When initialization starts, the transfer belt contact motor lifts the lower end
until the actuator has passed the sensor. Then it lowers it to its home position. This
action actuates the sensor in a certain pattern.
The table lists the sensor actuation patterns.

Machine status Sensor pattern


Initialization On → Off → On→ Off → On
Standby (Default) On
Operation B/W printing On
Color Printing Off
On: The actuator is out of the sensor.
Off: The actuator is interrupting the sensor.

Copier ACS
The Auto Color Select manages the transfer belt and PCUs. To print color pages,
the ACS lifts the transfer belt and operates the four PCUs. To print black and white
pages, the ACS manages the transfer belt and the PCUs as follows:
1. The ACS keeps the transfer belt in the lower position and operates the black
PCU (does not operate the other PCUs) if the first print of a job is a black and
white page.
2. The ACS lifts the transfer belt to the upper position and operates the four PCUs
if a color page occurs in the job.
3. The ACS keeps the transfer belt in
the upper position and keeps
operating the four PCUs after the first K K Color Color K K Color

color page. Note that all PCUs are in


operation even when black and white K PCU Four PCUs

pages are processed.


The ACS works when the user pushes B178D614.WMF

the Auto Color Select key from the operation panel. The table lists which PCUs are
in operation.
Original
Key
B/W Only Color Only B/W and Color
Auto Color Select Black PCU Four PCUs Black PCU or four
PCUs
Full Color Four PCUs Four PCUs Four PCUs
Black and White Black PCU Black PCU Black PCU

B202/B178/B180 6-88 SM
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

Printer ACS
The user can validate or invalidate the ACS from the following menu:  > Printer
Features > System > B&W Page Detect. The ACS works when B&W Detect is on.
The ACS does not work when B&W detect is off. The tables list which PCUs are in
operation.

B&W Page Detect: On


Print
Printer Driver
B/W Only Color Only B/W and Color
Black and White Black PCU Black PCU Black PCU
Color Black PCU Four PCUs Black PCU or four
PCUs

B&W Page Detect: Off


Print
Printer Driver
B/W Only Color Only B/W and Color
Black and White Black PCU Black PCU Black PCU
Color Four PCUs Four PCUs Four PCUs

Descriptions
Detailed

SM 6-89 B202/B178/B180
FUSING

6.12 FUSING
6.12.1 OVERVIEW
1

13 3

12
4

6
11
7

10
9 8 B178D003.WMF

1. Heating roller thermistor 8. Pressure roller fusing lamp


2. Heating roller thermostat 9. Oil supply roller
3. Heating roller 10. Cleaning roller
4. Heating roller fusing lamp 11. Pressure roller
5. Fusing belt 12. Hot roller
6. Pressure roller thermo fuse 13. Tension roller
7. Pressure roller thermistor

• A belt fusing system is used. This has a faster warm-up time than a conventional
hot and pressure roller system.
• The heating roller is made of aluminum to increase the temperature of the fusing
belt quickly.
• The hot roller is made of sponge, which flattens slightly, also increasing the
fusing nip. This roller does not contain a fusing lamp.
• Each of the heating and pressure rollers has a fusing lamp.
– NA: 770W for the heating roller. 350W for the pressure roller
– EU: 700W for the heating roller. 325W for the pressure roller
• The heating roller thermistor and pressure roller thermistor control the
temperature of these lamps.
• Temperature is normally controlled by turning the fusing lamps on and off. SP1-
104-1 is used to change between on/off control and phase control
• The oil supply roller supplies a small amount of oil to the pressure roller through
the cleaning roller. Oil does not need to be supplied to the oil supply roller
because it contains oil and the amount of oil supplied to the pressure roller is
small.

B202/B178/B180 6-90 SM
FUSING

6.12.2 FUSING UNIT DRIVE

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[G]

[E]
B178D002.WMF
[F]

Belt and Rollers


Development drive motor-K drives the pressure roller [E] and the hot roller [D]
through the gear train. The heating roller [C] is driven by the pressure with the
fusing belt [B]. The cleaning roller [G] and oil supply roller [F] are driven by the

Descriptions
friction with the pressure roller. Detailed

Fusing Clutch
The fusing clutch [A] turns off and cuts the drive power when the fusing unit does
not operate. This mechanism prevents wear on the belt and rollers.
NOTE: The fusing clutch turns off when images and patterns are created on the
transfer belt during process control and line position adjustment.

SM 6-91 B202/B178/B180
FUSING

6.12.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL


Fusing Temperatures
When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays
on until the thermistor detects the standby temperature. Then the CPU raises the
temperature to the printing temperature.
The fusing temperature for each mode is as follows.

Resolution Temperature of Temperature of


Mode Note
(dpi) Heating Roller Pressure Roller
Energy saver
100°C 130°C
level 1
If SP1-104-
C2a/k: 165°C 025 is set to
Standby mode 120°C
C2b: 170°C "B/W:
H Normal".
1,200 x 1,200 135°C 130°C
Color
(simplex/duplex) 1,800 x 600 C2a/k: 140°C C2a/k: 130°C
600 x 600 C2b: 160°C C2b: 145°C
C2a/k: 140°C C2a/k: 130°C
1,200 x 1,200
Black and white C2b: 160°C C2b: 145°C
(simplex/duplex) 1,800 x 600 C2a/k: 160°C C2a/k: 145°C
600 x 600 C2b: 175°C C2b: 150°C
1,200 x 1,200 140°C 135°C
Middle thick color
(simplex/duplex) 1,800 x 600 C2a/k: 155°C C2a/k: 130°C
600 x 600 C2b: 175°C C2b: 150°C
C2a/k: 155°C C2a/k: 140°C
Middle thick black 1,200 x 1,200
C2b: 175°C C2b: 150°C
and white
(simplex/duplex) 1,800 x 600 C2a/k: 175°C
150°C
600 x 600 C2b: 180°C
OHP All 145°C 130°C
Thick All 155°C 135°C

The heating and pressure roller temperatures for fusing are stored in SP1-105-4 to
-70.
When the machine is switched on, the fusing lamp temperatures increase to those
specified by SP1-104-25.
The print ready temperature is slightly less than the fusing temperature. The
difference is specified by SP1-105-1 and -2.

B202/B178/B180 6-92 SM
FUSING

Temperature Corrections
The following SP modes are available to prevent excessive glossiness caused by
fusing temperature overshoot:
• 1-913: Fusing temperature is reduced after this number of pages during the
job.
• 1-914: This shows how much the temperature is reduced
If a job using OHP or thick paper starts while the fusing unit is still warm, the fusing
temperature could be higher than the target for this type of paper. This can cause
marks to show on the output. The following SP modes prevents this problem:
• 1-996-4, 5: These SPs specify a limit, above which printing will not start.

Overheat Protection
The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp at the following times:
• The heating roller temperature becomes higher than 250°C for two seconds
or more
• The pressure roller temperature becomes higher than 210°C for five seconds
or more.
SC543 for the heating roller or SC553 for the pressure roller are displayed for
these conditions.

The following components are used if the thermistor overheat protection system
fails.
• Two thermostats for the heating roller and two thermofuses for the pressure roller
in series with the common ground line of the fusing lamp.
• If one of the thermostat temperatures becomes higher than 234°C, it opens
and cuts power from the fusing lamp.
If the other thermostat temperature becomes higher than 235°C, it also
opens and cuts power from the fusing lamp.

Descriptions
• If either of the two thermofuses temperature becomes higher than 154°C, the Detailed
thermofuse opens and cuts power from the fusing lamp.
NOTE: These thermofuses make a series circuit.
In either case, the machine stops operation.

SM 6-93 B202/B178/B180
FUSING

6.12.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES


Overview

Stand-by Mode
Operation Sw. Off
-or-
Auto Off Timer
(1 mni. to 240 min. / Default: 60 min.) Energy Saver Key ON
-or-
Panel Off Timer (10 s to 999 s / Default: 10 s)

Key Operation
Operation Sw. Off Panel-Off Mode (1&2) Return Time Less Than 3s Panel-Off Level 1
-or- Return Time Less Than 10s Panel-Off Level 2
Auto Off Timer
(1 mni. to 240 min. / Default: 60 min.)
Energy Saver Timer
(1min. to 240 min. / Default: 15 min.)

Key Operation
Operation Sw. Off Low Power Mode Return Time Less Than 30 s
-or-
Auto Off Timer
(1 mni. to 240 min. / Default: 60 min.)

Operation Sw. On
Auto Off Mode Platen Cover Open / Close
Original Set ADF
Off Mode
Return Time Less Than 101 s

FAX: RX, etc.


After Printing
Printer Data in

Off Stand-by Mode

B178D583.WMF

When the machine is not being used, the energy saver function reduces power
consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.
This machine has the following two types of energy saver modes:
1) Panel-off mode
2) Auto Off mode
These modes are controlled by the following UP and SP modes:
• Panel off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Setting – Panel Off
Timer
• Auto off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Setting – Auto Off
Timer

B202/B178/B180 6-94 SM
FUSING

Panel Off Mode


Entering the panel off mode
The machine enters the panel off mode when one of the following is done:
• The panel off timer runs out.
• The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Key is held down for one second.
If the value specified in the panel off timer is larger than the value specified in the
energy saver timer, the machine goes into the low power mode. At this time, it does
not go into the panel off mode. A similar thing happens when the value in the panel
off timer is larger than that in the auto off timer. To make the panel off mode
effective, specify a value smaller than the values in the energy saver timer and
auto off timer.

What happens in panel off mode


When the machine is in the panel off mode, each of the fusing lamps are kept at
the temperatures indicated in the table at the bottom of the page. The operation
panel indicators are turned off except for the Energy Saver LED and the Power
LED.
If the controller receives an image print out command from an application program
(e.g. to print incoming fax data or to print data from a PC), the temperature of each
fusing lamp rises to print the data.

Return to stand-by mode


The machine returns to stand-by mode if one of the following is done:
• The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Mode key is pressed
• Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed
• An original is placed in the ADF
• The ADF is lifted
• A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table
The return time from the panel off mode is less than 30 seconds.
Descriptions
Detailed
Operation Energy
Mode Fusing Temperature +24V System +5V
Switch Saver LED
Heating roller: 100oC
Panel off On On On On
Pressure roller: 130oC

SM 6-95 B202/B178/B180
FUSING

Auto Off Mode


There are two Auto Off modes: Off Stand-by mode and Off mode. The difference
between Off Stand-by mode and Off mode is the machine’s condition when it
enters the Auto Off mode.

Entering off stand-by and off modes


The machine enters the Off Stand-by mode or Off Mode when one of the following
is done.
• The auto off timer runs out.
• The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off.
If one or more of the following conditions exists, the machine enters Off Stand-by
mode. If none of these conditions exist, the machine enters the Off Mode.
• Error or SC condition
• Image data is stored in the memory
• During memory TX or polling RX
• The handset is off hook
• An original is in the ARDF
• The ARDF is open

Off Stand-by mode


The system +5V is still supplied to all components. When the machine detects a
ringing signal or receives a stream of data for a print job, the +24V supply is
activated. At this time, the machine automatically prints the incoming message or
executes the print job.

Off Mode
The system +5V supply also turns off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy saver
mode) is still activated. When the machine detects a ringing signal, off-hook signal,
or receives a print job, the machine returns to the Off Stand-by mode and the
system +5V and +24V supplies are activated.

Returning to stand-by mode


The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed. The
return time is less than 99 seconds.
Operation Energy
Mode Fusing Lamp +24V System +5V Note
Switch Saver LED
Off Off
Off Off On On
Stand-by (On when printing)
+5VE is
Off Off Off Off Off Off
supplied

B202/B178/B180 6-96 SM
PAPER EXIT

6.13 PAPER EXIT


6.13.1 OVERVIEW

[A]

[D]
[C]

[B]

B178D584.WMF
B178D585.WMF

[A]: To standard paper tray


[B]: To external paper tray
[C]: Junction gate

Descriptions
[D]: Junction gate solenoid Detailed

After fusing, the junction gate feeds paper to the standard paper tray or the
external paper tray. The junction gate solenoid [D] controls the junction gate as
follows:
• To the standard paper tray: The junction gate solenoid is off (default)
• To the external paper tray: The junction gate solenoid is on.

Development drive motor-K drives the exit rollers.

SM 6-97 B202/B178/B180
PAPER EXIT

6.13.2 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION

[A]

B178D586.WMF

When the paper overflow sensor [A] is activated, the machine detects that the
paper stack height has exceeded a certain limit. At this time, printing stops.

B202/B178/B180 6-98 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS

6.14 PRINTER FUNCTIONS


6.14.1 OVERVIEW

Option
PS3/
Printer/ Data RAM RAM
SD Card 2.5" HDD 2.5" HDD
Scanner Overwrite (512 MB) (512 MB)
Security Unit

SDRAM SDRAM
SD Slot 1 SD Slot 2 SD Slot 3 IDE IDE
DIMM DIMM

Local BUS

System
NVRAM
Flash ROM ASIC CPU
(128 kB)
(16 MB)

PCI BUS

CONTROLLER
PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI

IEEE1394/
File Format Wireless LAN/
BCU USB\NIB FCU G3
Converter Bluetooth/
IEEE1284
Option Option Option Option
Option: Optional component for all models

B178D999.WMF

The controller is based on the GW (Grand Work) architecture.


Descriptions
Detailed
CPU: RM7065C-600 MHz
ASIC:
This is one of the GW-architecture ASICs. It uses a 133 MHz bus to interface with
the CPU and memory. ASIC controls the interface, memory, local bus, interruption
processing, PCI bus, video data, HDD, network, operation panel, IEEE1284, and
image processing.
Flash ROM: The 16-MB flash ROM is for the system program.
SDRAM DIMM (2 slots):
The controller has 1024-MB resident SDRAM. (512 MB x 2).
NVRAM:
The 128-KB NVRAM stores the engine/controller settings and logs.

SM 6-99 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER FUNCTIONS

Interface Option:
You can install one of the four network components (IEEE1284, IEEE1394,
Wireless LAN, Bluetooth).
HDD:
Two 40-GB HDDs are standard components. Each hard disk is partitioned as
shown below. You cannot change the partition sizes.

B202/B178/B180 6-100 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS

6.14.2 HARD DISK


Overview
The capacity of the hard disk is 80 GB. The controller partitions it into several
drives and allocates them for different functions. You can initialize these partitions
as necessary ( SP5-832). The table lists the contents of the hard disk.

Volatile/ Initialization
Contents Capacity (MB)
Nonvolatile (SP5-832)
37,500 Nonvolatile
Images 002
25,000 Volatile
Thumbnails 2,400 Nonvolatile 003
Job Logs 10 Nonvolatile 004
Printer fonts 500 Nonvolatile 005
User information 300 Nonvolatile 006
Mail RX data 200 Nonvolatile 007
Mail TX data 1,000 Nonvolatile 008
1,256 Nonvolatile
Designer data 009
1,000 Volatile
Logs 150 Nonvolatile 010
Ricoh interfaces 500 Nonvolatile 011
Volatile: The data is lost when you turn the main switch off.
Nonvolatile: The data is not lost when you turn the main switch off.

Data Transfer
Memory
The machine executes the direct memory access
(DMA) two times faster than the conventional DMA.
The controller has two identical hard disk drives.
One HDD interface connects these drives with the HDD Interface
memory. There is a 32-bit data bus between the
memory and the HDD interface. There is also a

Descriptions
16-bit data bus between the HDD interface and Detailed
each hard disk drive (two 16-bit data busses in
total).
When receiving 32-bit data from the memory, the
HDD interface divides them into two 16-bit data
and transfers them to each hard disk drive. Hard
disk drive 1 and 2 store data in an address. These
two addresses correspond with each other. When
HDD 1 HDD 2
receiving two 16-bit data from two corresponding
B178D588.WMF
addresses of the hard disk drives, the HDD
interface combines them and transfers 32-bit data to the memory.
If an incorrect sector is found in an address of one hard disk drive, the sector in the
corresponding address of the other hard disk drive is also treated as an incorrect
sector.

SM 6-101 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER FUNCTIONS

6.14.3 PRINT DATA PROCESSING


RPCS Driver
Host Controller Printer
Engine
ICM Engine/
ICMprofile
ICM Profile
CMYK
RGB Gray
Correction
RPCS Driver RGB
OR
Matching
Corrected UCR/BG
RGB
RCM profile

γ Correction

CMYK

Toner Limitation

CMYK
8 bits CMYK
1 bit or 2 bits
Dithering & ROP

B178D589.WMF

PCL5e/PCL6c Driver
Host Controller Printer
Engine

(Matching by Host)
RGB
PCL Driver RGB 8 bits

Decode
ICM Engine/ RGB & RGB
ICM profile Scale 8 bits Color
8 bits Matching

CMY
8 bits

CMY • Negative γ Correction

BG/UCR,
8 bits • γ Correction
• Toner Limitation
CMY
1 bit
Dithering CMYK
1 bit
&
ROP

B178D590.WMF

B202/B178/B180 6-102 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS

PS3 Driver

Host Controller Printer


Engine
ICM Engine/
ICMprofile
ICM Profile
CMYK
RGB UCR/BG

RPCS Driver RGB

ColorSvn
Corrected RGB
ColorSync profile
PS3 Matching
CIE XYZ

γ Correction

CMYK

Toner Limitation

CMYK
8 bits CMYK
1 bit or 2 bits
Dithering & ROP

B178D591.WMF

CMS (Color Management System)


CMS optimizes the color print quality using a color profile that is based on the
characteristics of the printer. With RPCS, the color profile is applied by the driver.
With PS3 and PCL5e, the color profile is applied in the matching/CRD module on
the controller except when using CMM/ICC/ICM profiles.
CMS is not used when the color profile setting in the printer driver is set to “Off.”

Descriptions
Gray Correction Detailed
Gray correction processes gray with the K or CMYK toner depending on the driver
settings.

BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)


The RGB data is converted to CMYK data with BG/UCR. During CMYK conversion,
some CMY data is replaced with K data by the BG/UCR algorithm.

Gamma Correction
The printer gamma can be adjusted with controller SP mode (Gamma Adj.). For
CMYK, there are15 points between 0 and 100%. The corrected gamma data is
stored in NVRAM.

SM 6-103 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER FUNCTIONS

Toner Limitation
Toner limitation prevents toner from being scattered around text or printed lines.
Maximum values have been prepared independently for text and photo. They can
be adjusted with controller SP mode (Toner Limit).
• Default: 190% for text, 260% for photo
• Adjustable range: 100% to 400%

Dither Processing and ROP/RIP


Dither patterns have been prepared for photo and text independently. Dithering
converts 8-bit data to 1-bit or 2-bit data. However, these dither patterns create the
illusion of 256 gradations for high quality prints. The optimum dither pattern is
selected depending on the selected resolution.
RIP: Raster Image Processing
ROP: Raster Operation

B202/B178/B180 6-104 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS

6.14.4 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS


Sample Print
This feature was formerly known as “Proof Print.” This function gives users a
chance to check the print results before starting a multiple-set print run.
• The size of the hard disk partition for the sample print feature is 6.3 GB. This
partition is also used by the collation and locked print features.
• The partition can hold up to 30 files, including files stored using locked print.
• The partition can hold a log containing up to 20 errors, excluding jobs stored
using locked print.
• The maximum number of pages is 1,100, including jobs using locked print
and collation.

Locked Print
Using this feature, the print job is stored in the machine but will not be printed until
the user inputs an ID at the machine’s operation panel. This ID must match the ID
that has been input with the printer driver.
• Stored data is automatically deleted after it is printed.
• Stored data can be manually deleted at the operation panel.
• The partition can hold up to 30 files, including files stored using sample print.
• The partition can hold a log containing up to 20 errors, excluding logs stored
using locked print.
• The maximum number of pages is 1,100, including jobs using sample print
and collation.
• Locked print uses the same hard disk partition (6.3 GB) as sample print and
collation.

Descriptions
Detailed

SM 6-105 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER FUNCTIONS

6.14.5 JOB SPOOLING


Print data can be spooled (stored) in the machine’s HDD, and the machine starts to
print when data transfer is complete. Since the machine stores all data first before
printing, the host computer is freed up more quickly.
NOTE: 1) The supported print protocols are IPP and LPR.
2) The default setting for this feature is “off”. The user must switch it on
using UP mode to enable this feature.
• The size of the HDD partition for job spooling is 1 GB.
• The partition can hold up to 150 jobs.

Related SP Modes
Job spooling can be turned on and off using the SP mode (SP5-828-069) for each
protocol.
The machine does not spool jobs when job spooling is switched off with the SP
mode, even when the customer switches it on with the user mode.

B202/B178/B180 6-106 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS

Paper Source Selection


Tray Priority (Auto Tray Select)
The “Tray Priority” setting Priority Tray
Start of
Tray Search
determines the start of the tray
search when the user selects “Auto
Tray Select” with the driver. The Tray 1
machine searches paper trays for
the specified paper size and type.
When no tray contains paper that Tray 2

matches the paper size and type


specified by the driver, the controller
stops printing until the user loads the
LCT (Optional) Tray 3 (Optional)
correct paper.
The “Tray Priority” setting can be
specified in the following menu:  Tray 4 (Optional)
> System Settings > Tray Paper
Settings > Paper Tray Priority: B178D592.WMF

Printer.
NOTE: The by-pass feed table is not part of the tray search.

Tray Locking
If “Tray Locking” is enabled for a tray, the controller skips the “locked” tray in the
tray search process.
The “Tray Locking” setting can be specified in the following menu:  > System
Settings > Tray Paper Settings > Paper Type: Tray # > Apply Auto Paper Select
(where the “#” indicates the tray number).
NOTE: The by-pass feed table cannot be unlocked (Tray Locking is always
enabled).

Descriptions
Detailed
Manual Tray Select
If the selected tray does not have the paper size and type specified by the driver,
the controller stops printing until the user loads the correct paper.

SM 6-107 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER FUNCTIONS

Auto Continue
Overview
When this function is enabled, the machine waits for a specified period (0, 1, 5, 10,
15 minutes) for the correct paper size and type to be set in the tray. If the timer
runs out, the machine starts printing, even if there is no paper tray which matches
the paper size and paper type specified by the driver.
The machine searches for a paper tray in the following way:
• The interval can be set with the following menu:  > Printer Features > System
> Auto Continue.
NOTE: The default setting for this feature is “Off.”

Auto Tray Select


When there is no paper tray that Priority Tray
Start of
Tray Search
matches the paper size and type
specified by the driver, the machine
searches for any tray that has paper, Tray 1
and prints from the first tray it finds.
The start of the tray search is the
tray selected as the priority tray. Tray 2

LCT (Optional) Tray 3 (Optional)

Tray 4 (Optional)

B178D593.WMF

Manual Tray Select


The machine prints from the selected tray even if the paper size and type do not
match the setting specified from the driver.
If “Auto Continue” is disabled, the machine waits until the user loads the correct
paper in the tray.

B202/B178/B180 6-108 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS

Paper Output Tray


You can select output trays as follows: User Tools > System Settings > Tray Paper
Settings. If a print job does not specify an output tray or if the driver specifies the
default tray, the output tray selected with this user tool will be used.

Output Tray Selected


• If the machine cannot print to the selected output tray, it prints to the default
paper output tray.
• If paper overflow is detected at the selected output tray, the controller suspends
printing.

Stapling
The optional two-tray finisher and booklet finisher can staple papers. Both finishers
support the following stapling positions:
[A]
[A]: One staple (vertical) is at the rear right
corner.
[B]: Two staples (vertical) are at the right Paper exit [B]
middle edge.
[C]: One staple (vertical) is at the front right
corner. [C]

The two-tray finisher supports the following


stapling position (the booklet finisher does [D]
not):
[D]: One staple (slant) is at the front right [E]
corner.

The booklet finisher supports the following


stapling position (the two-tray finisher does
not):

Descriptions
[E]: Two staples (vertical) are at the center. B178D594.WMF Detailed

The table lists the number of papers that the finishers can staple.
Position Paper size
A4, B5, LT A3, Ledger, Legal
Two-tray finisher [A][B][C][D] 50 sheets 30 sheets
[A][B][C] 50 sheets 25 sheets
Booklet finisher
[E] — 10 sheets
NOTE: For more paper sizes, see the specifications.

SM 6-109 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER FUNCTIONS

Punching
To enable a finisher to punch out holes, you must install the optional punch unit to
it. Each punch unit needs the dedicated punch unit. Note that these punch units
are not interchangeable with each other. To make two holes on a sheet of paper,
you must install the two-hole type; to make three, the three-hole type; and to make
four, the four-hole type. The table shows which type you can install to your finisher.
Finisher model Two holes Three holes Four holes
North America   N/A
Europe (excluding
 N/A 
North Europe)
North Europe N/A N/A 

: Available
N/A: Not available

B202/B178/B180 6-110 SM
FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)

6.15 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)


In previous models (such as A-C2, R-C2), DeskTopBinder V2 could retrieve copy
and print jobs from the document server and convert them to TIFF. However, this
software-based conversion was slow for many users.
In this machine, this conversion is hardware-based, using the optional File Format
Converter. Without the File Format Converter, copy and print jobs cannot be
downloaded to a PC (or e-Cabinet) from the document server.
Two common target formats are provided for conversion to files that can be
selected by the SP modes: These are JPEG and TIFF.
In scanner mode, users can select file format from TIFF, JPEG, or PDF. The time
to create TIFF and JPEG files is shortened with the File Format Converter,
especially for high scanning resolution and large image size. When the customer
selects PDF, the machine creates a TIFF or JPEG file from the scanned image
first. Then it converts it to PDF. Therefore, the total time to create a PDF is also
shortened with the File Format Converter.

Descriptions
Detailed

SM 6-111 B202/B178/B180
DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)

6.16 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)


6.16.1 AUTO ERASE MEMORY
A document scanned in the copier or scanner mode, or data sent from a printer
driver for printing, is stored temporarily on the hard disk of the machine. The
document stays in the hard disk as temporary data even after the copy or print job
is completed. Auto Erase Memory erases the temporary data on the hard disk by
writing over it.
Types of Data Overwritten and Not Overwritten
The following table shows the types of data that can or cannot be overwritten by
Auto Erase Memory.
Data overwritten by Copier Copy jobs
Auto Erase Memory Printer 1) Print jobs
2) Sample Print/Locked Print jobs(*1)
3) Spool Printing jobs
Scanner(*2) 1) Scanned files sent by e-mail
2) Files sent by Scan to Folder
3) Documents sent or retrieved by using Web
Image Monitor, Desk Top Binder, or Scan
Router
Fax PC fax print jobs, Internet fax transmission jobs
Document Temporary data that still remains in the Document
Server Server even after user erases the data in the
Document Server.
Data not overwritten by 1) Documents stored by the user in the Document Server using the
Auto Erase Memory Copier, Printer or Scanner functions
2) Information registered in the Address Book (*3)
3) Counters stored under each user code
4) Network setting

NOTE: *1: A Sample Print or Locked Print job can only be overwritten after it has
been executed.
*2: Temporary data via TWAIN scanner function are not originally stored in
HDD. You can use TWAIN scanner functions together with the DOS
unit.
*3: Data stored in the Address Book can be encrypted for security.

Overwrite timing
Overwriting starts automatically once a copy, print or scanner job is completed.
Copier, printer and scanner functions take priority over the Data Overwrite function.
If a copier, printer or scanner job comes while a previous job is being overwritten,
the overwrite process is automatically interrupted until the next job is completed.

B202/B178/B180 6-112 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 BASIC
Configuration: Desktop
Print Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system
Number of scans: 1
Resolution: Scan: 600 dpi
Print: 600 dpi
Gradation: Scan: 8 bits/pixel
Print: 2 bits/pixel
Original type: Sheets, book, objects
Maximum original A3/11" x 17"
size:
Original reference Left rear corner
position:
Copy speed: Normal (ADF 1 to 1, LT/ A4 LEF)
C2k: 24 cpm (color) or 28 cpm (black & white)
C2a: 28 cpm (color) or 35 cpm (black & white)
C2b: 35 cpm (color) or 45 cpm (black & white)
OHP/Thick
C2k: 17 cpm (color/black & white)
C2a: 17 cpm (color/black & white)
C2b: 17 cpm (color/black & white)
First copy (normal C2a/k: Color: 10 seconds or less
mode): Black & white: 8 seconds or less
C2b: Color: 8 seconds or less
Black & white: 6 seconds or less
Warm-up time: 99 seconds or less (23°C, 50%)
Print Paper Capacity: Standard tray: 500 sheets x 2
(80 g/m2, 20 lb) By-pass tray: 100 sheets
Optional paper feed tray: 500 sheets x 1, 500 sheets x 2, Optional
Specifications

LCT: 2000 sheets


Print Paper Size: (Refer to “Supported Paper Sizes”.)
Minimum Maximum
Tray 1 A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)
Tray 2 A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11" A3/11" x 17"
By-pass 90 x 148 mm 305 x 458 mm/12" x 18"
Optional Tray A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11" A3/11" x 17"
LCT A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)
Printing Paper Standard tray: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Weight: Optional paper tray: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

SM 7-1 B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS

Weight: By-pass tray: 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb.)


Output Paper Standard exit tray: 500 sheets (face down)
Capacity: External exit tray: 100 sheets (face up)
Continuous copy: Up to 999 sheets
Zoom: Arbitrary: From 25 to 400% (1% step)
Fixed:
North America Europe
25% 25%
50% 50%
65% 65%
73% 71%
78% 75%
85% 82%
93% 93%
100% 100%
121% 115%
129% 122%
155% 141%
200% 200%
400% 400%

Memory: Standard: 1024MB


Power Source: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12A (for North America)
220 V – 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 8A (for Europe)
Power Consumption:
120V 230V
Maximum 1440 W or less 1680 W or less
Energy Saver 18 W or less 20 W or less

B202/B178/B180 7-2 SM
SPECIFICATIONS

Noise Emission:
(Sound Power Level)
Complete
Model State Mainframe
system(*1)
Standby 40db(A) or Less 40db(A) or Less
J-C2k
Operating 65db(A) or Less 71db(A) or Less
Standby 40db(A) or Less 40db(A) or Less
J-C2a
Operating 65db(A) or Less 71db(A) or Less
Standby 40db(A) or Less 40db(A) or Less
J-C2b
Operating 67db(A) or Less 73db(A) or Less
(*1) The complete system consists of mainframe, ARDF, finisher, and LCT.

NOTE: The above measurements were made in accordance with Ricoh


standard methodology.
Dimensions (W x D x H):
Copier: 670 x 698 x 859 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 33.8")
Copier + 1-Tray PFU: 670x 698 x 1,020 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 40.2")
Copier + 2-Tray PFU or LCT: 670 x 698 x 1,118 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 44.0")
Weight: Less than 120 kg (265 lb.) [excluding toner]

Specifications

SM 7-3 B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS

1.2 PRINTER
Printer Languages: PCL5e/ PCL6c
Adobe PostScript 3 (optional)
RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream)
Resolution and PCL5e/ PCL6c:
Gradation: 600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 300 x 300 dpi (1 bit/pixel)
Adobe PostScript 3:
1,200 x 1,200 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel),
600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel)
RPCS:
1,200 x 1,200 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel),
600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel)
NOTE: 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel) = 600 x 600 dpi (2 bits/pixel)
Printing speed:
Resolution Plain paper Thick/OHP
600 x 600 dpi 35 ppm 17 ppm
Monochrome 1,800 x 600 dpi 35 ppm 17 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 28 ppm 17 ppm
C2a
600 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 17 ppm
Color 1,800 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 17 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 17 ppm 17 ppm
600 x 600 dpi 45 ppm 17 ppm
Monochrome 1,800 x 600 dpi 45 ppm 17 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 35 ppm 17 ppm
C2b
600 x 600 dpi 35 ppm 17 ppm
Color 1,800 x 600 dpi 35 ppm 17 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 17 ppm 17 ppm
600 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 17 ppm
Monochrome 1,800 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 17 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 24 ppm 17 ppm
C2k
600 x 600 dpi 24 ppm 17 ppm
Color 1,800 x 600 dpi 24 ppm 17 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 17 ppm 17 ppm

Resident Fonts: PCL5e/ PCL6c:


35 Intelli fonts
10 TrueType fonts
Adobe PostScript 3:
136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)
Host Interfaces: USB 2.0 ............................................................... Standard
Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T)...................... Standard
IEEE1284 parallel x 1 .......................................... Optional
IEEE1394............................................................. Optional
IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN)............................... Optional
Bluetooth (Wireless)............................................. Optional

B202/B178/B180 7-4 SM
SPECIFICATIONS

Network Protocols: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto Switching),


SMB (NetBEUI, NetBIOS over TCP/IP)
First Print Speed: Color: 9 seconds or less (from tray 1)
Monochrome: 7 seconds or less (from tray 1)

1.3 SCANNER
Standard Scanner Main scan/Sub scan
Resolution: 600 dpi
Available scanning Twain Mode:
Resolution Range: 100 ~ 1200 dpi
Delivery Mode:
100/200/300/400/600 dpi
Grayscales: 1 bit or 8 bits/pixel each for RGB
Scanning Scan to E-mail / Folder:
Throughput BW: 50 ppm (A4LEF / BW Text (Print) / 200dpi /
(ARDF mode): Compression: On (MH))
FC: 35 ppm (A4LEF / FC Text / Photo / 200dpi /
Compression: Standard)
Network TWAIN Scan:
BW: 36 ppm (A4LEF / Quality: Colors / Binary / 200dpi /
Compression: Data compression (MMR))
FC: 20 ppm (A4LEF / Quality: Colors / 16770K colors
/ 200dpi / Compression: Standard quality)
Interface: Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T for TCP/IP), IEEE 1394,
Wireless LAN
Compression B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)
Method: Gray Scale, Full Color: JPEG Specifications

SM 7-5 B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS

2. SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES


2.1 PAPER FEED
North America Europe/Asia
Paper Size (W x L) By- By-
Tray Tray
Tray 1 LCT pass Tray 1 LCT pass
2/3/4 2/3/4
Tray Tray
A3 W 12" x 18" N N N Y# N N N Y#
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm N Y N Y# N Y N Y
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm N Y#/Y* N Y# N Y N Y
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm N Y N Y# Y* Y Y Y#
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm N N N Y# N N N Y
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm N Y N Y# N Y N Y#
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm N N N Y# N N N Y#
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm N Y#/Y* N Y# N Y N Y#
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm N Y#/Y* N Y# N Y#/Y* N Y#
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm N Y N Y# N Y N Y#
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm N N N Y# N N N Y#
Ledger 11" x 17" N Y N Y N Y N Y#
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" N Y N Y N Y#/Y* N Y#
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Y* Y Y Y# N Y N Y#
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" N Y N Y# N Y#/Y* N Y#
Half Letter
5.5" x 8.5" N N N Y N N N Y#
SEF
Executive 7.25" x 10.5" N Y# N Y# N Y# N Y#
SEF
Executive 10.5" x 7.25" N N N Y# N N N Y#
LEF
F SEF 8" x 13" N Y# N Y# N Y# N Y
Foolscap 8.5" x 13" N Y# N Y# N Y# N Y#
SEF
Folio SEF 8.25" x 13" N Y# N Y# N Y# N Y#
8K 267 x 390 mm N Y# N Y# N Y# N Y#
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm N Y# N Y# N Y# N Y#
16K LEF 267 x 195 mm N Y# N Y# N Y# N Y#
Custom Minimum:
90 x 148 mm
N N N Y# N N N Y#
Maximum:
305 x 458 mm
Com10 4.125" x 9.5" N N N Y# N N N N
Env.
Monarch 3.875" x 7.5" N N N Y# N N N N
Env.
C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm N N N N N N N Y#
C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm N N N N N N N Y#
DL Env. 110 x 220 mm N N N N N N N Y#

Remarks:
Y Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.
Y# Supported: the user specifies the paper size.
Y* Supported: depends on a technician adjustment
N Not supported

B202/B178/B180 7-6 SM
SPECIFICATIONS

2.2 PAPER EXIT


Internal Tray External Tray 2-tray Booklet
Paper Size (W x L) Duplex
(Face Down) (Face Up) Finisher Finisher
A3 W 12" x 18" N Y N N N
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm Y Y Y Y Y
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm Y Y Y Y Y
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y* Y
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm Y Y N N N
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm Y Y Y N Y
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm N N N N N
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm Y Y Y Y Y
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm Y Y Y Y* Y
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm Y Y Y Y* Y
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm N N N N N
Ledger 11" x 17" Y Y Y Y Y
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Y Y Y Y Y
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Y Y Y Y* Y
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" Y Y Y Y Y
Half Letter SEF 5.5" x 8.5" Y Y N N N
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" Y Y Y N Y
Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" Y Y N N N
F SEF 8" x 13" Y Y Y N Y
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" Y Y Y N Y
Folio SEF 8.25" x 13" Y Y Y N Y
8K 267 x 390 mm Y Y Y N Y
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm Y Y Y N Y
16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Y Y Y N Y
Custom Minimum:
90 x 148 mm
Y Y N N N
Maximum:
305 x 458 mm
Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" N Y N N N
Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" N Y N N N
C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm N Y N N N
C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm N Y N N N
DL Env. 110 x 220 mm N Y N N N

Remarks:
Y Supported
Specifications

N Not supported
Y* Stack only (Booklet not supported)

SM 7-7 B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS

PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION


Size (width x length) Platen ARDF
[mm] Inches Metric Inches Metric
A3 (297 x 420) L No Yes Yes Yes
B4 (257 x 364) L No Yes No Yes
A4 (210 x 297) L No Yes No Yes**
A4 (297 x 210) S No Yes Yes Yes
B5 (182 x 257) L No Yes No Yes
B5 (257 x 182) S No Yes No Yes
A5 (148 x 210) L No No* No Yes
A5 (210 x 148) S No No No Yes
B6 (128 x 182) L No No No Yes
B6 (182 x 128) S No No No Yes
11" x 17" (DLT) Yes No Yes** Yes**
11" x 15" No No Yes** No
10" x 14" No No Yes No
8.5" x 14" (LG) Yes No Yes** No
8.5" x 13" (F4) No No Yes** Yes
8.25" x 13" No No No No
8" x 13"(F) No Yes No No
8.5" x 11" (LT) Yes No Yes** No
11" x 8.5" (LT) Yes No Yes** No
8" x 10.5" No No No No
8" x 10" No No Yes** No
5.5" x 8.5" (HLT) No* No Yes No
8.5" x 5.5" (HLT) No No Yes No
8K (267 x 390) No No No Yes**
16K L (195 x 267) No No No Yes**
16K S (267 x 195) No No No Yes
7.25" x 10.5"
No No Yes No
(Executive)
10.5" x 7.25"
No No Yes** No
(Executive)

*: Use SP4-303 to detect original sizes as A5 lengthwise/HLT when the message


“Cannot detect original size” shows.
**: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP6-016-1.

B202/B178/B180 7-8 SM
SPECIFICATIONS

3. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run
installer lets you to select the components you want to install.

3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS


Printer Windows Windows Windows Windows Windows
Macintosh
Language 95/98/ME NT4.0 2000 XP 2003
PCL 5e Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
/ PCL6c
PS3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
RPCS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

NOTE: 1) The printer drivers for Windows NT 4.0 are only for the Intel x86
platform. There is no Windows NT 4.0 printer driver for the PowerPC,
Alpha, or MIPS platforms.
2) The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows
2000/XP/2003. Windows 2000 uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each
operating system is provided with the driver.
3) The PS3 driver for Macintosh supports Mac OS 8.6 or later versions.

Specifications

SM 7-9 B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS

3.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE


Software Description
Agfa Font Manager 2000 A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer.
(Win95/98/ME,
2000/XP/2003, NT4)
SmartNetMonitor for Admin A printer management utility for network administrators. NIB
(Win95/98/ME, setup utilities are also available.
2000/XP/2003, NT4)
SmartNetMonitor for Client • A printer management utility for client users.
(Win95/98/ME, • A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP/IP
2000/XP/2003, NT4) network.
• A peer-to-peer print utility over a TCP/IP network. This
provides the parallel printing and recovery printing features.
Printer Utility for Mac This software provides several convenient functions for printing
(Mac) from Macintosh clients.
IEEE1394 Utility This utility deletes a print port for IEEE1394 in Win2000.
(Win2000/XP)
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite itself can be used as personal document
(Win95/98/ME, management software and can manage both image data
2000/XP/2003, NT4) converted from paper documents and application files saved in
each client’s PC.
LAN-Fax Driver This software lets you fax documents directly form your PC.
Address Book Editor and Cover Sheet Editor are to be installed
as well. (These require the optional fax unit.)
USB Print Support This utility deletes a print port for USB in Win98SE/ME.
Graphic Update Module This provides bitmap images used to represent the various
statuses of devices graphically within Smart Device Monitor or
Web Smart Device Monitor.

SCANNER
The scanner driver and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM.

Scanner Drivers
• Network Twain Driver for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP/2003

Scanner Utilities
• Scan Router V2 Lite (Cherry-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP
• Desk Top Binder V2 Lite (Plumeria-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP/2003

B202/B178/B180 7-10 SM
SPECIFICATIONS

4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
[A]
[J]

[I]

[B]

[C]
[H]

[G]

[D]
[E]

B178V501.WMF
[F]
Machine
Item Remarks
Code
Copier B178 C
Platen cover G329 B
One from the two
ARDF B714 A
One from [G], [H], and [I]; Requires one
Booklet finisher B602 I
from [D], [E], and [F]
Punch unit (for B602) B647 Requires [I]
One from [G], [H], and [I]; Requires one
Two-tray finisher B599 G
from [D], [E], and [F]
Punch unit (for B599) B377 Requires [G]
Specifications

Multi-Bin output tray G306 H One from [G], [H], and [I]
One-tray paper feed unit B601 D
Two-tray paper feed unit B598 F One from the three
LCT B600 E
Scanner accessibility
G570 J
option

SM 7-11 B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS

[F]
[E]
I/F Card Slot
A Ethernet&USB(ver2.0)
B File Format Converter

[A] C Option
SD Card Slot
1 Option
2 Option
3 Service

[B]

[C]

[G]
[D] B178V563.WMF

Machine
Item Remarks
Code
USB 2.0: [F] — Standard
Ethernet: [F] — Standard
Wireless LAN: [A] G813
Bluetooth: [B] B736 You can only install one of these at
IEEE 1394: [C] B581 a time.

IEEE 1284: [D] B679


File Format Converter: [E] B609
Hard Disk Drive — Standard
PostScript 3: [G] B763
Data overwrite security unit: [G] B735

B202/B178/B180 7-12 SM
SPECIFICATIONS

5. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
5.1 ARDF
Paper Size/Weight:
Size A3 to B6, DLT to HLT
Simplex
Weight 40 to 128 g/m2 (11 to 34 lb.)
Size A3 to B5, DLT to HLT
Duplex
Weight 50 to 105 g/m2 (14 to 28 lb.)
Table Capacity: 80 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Original Standard Rear left corner
Position:
Separation: Feed belt and separation roller
Original Transport: Roller transport
Original Feed Order: From the top original
Supported Magnification
Ratios:
Copy 50 to 200 %
Color 32.6 to 200 %
Fax
Black & white 48.9 to 200 %
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V from the scanner unit
Power Consumption: 60 W or less
Dimensions (W × D × H): 570 mm x 518 mm x 150 mm (22.4" x 20.4" x 5.9")
Weight: 12 kg

Specifications

SM 7-13 B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS

5.2 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT


Paper Size: Maximum: A3/11" x 17" (SEF)
Minimum: A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"
Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Tray Capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Paper Feed System: FRR system
Paper Height Detection: 3 steps (100%, 50%, Near End)
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main unit)
Power Consumption: 50 W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 540 x 600 x 172 mm (21.3" x 23.7" x 6.8")
Weight 18 kg (39.7 lb.)

5.3 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT


Paper Size: Maximum: A3/11" x 17" (SEF)
Minimum: A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"
Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Tray Capacity: 500 sheets x 2 (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Paper Feed System: FRR system
Paper Height Detection: 3 steps (100%, 50%, Near End)
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main unit)
Power Consumption: 50 W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 540 x 600 x 270 mm (21.3" x 23.7" x 10.7")
Weight 25 kg (55.2 lb.)

5.4 2000-SHEET LARGE CAPACITY TRAY


Paper Size: A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)
Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Tray Capacity: 2000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Paper Feed System: FRR system
Paper Height Detection: 5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near End)
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main unit)
Power Consumption: 50 W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 540 x 600 x 270 mm (21.3" x 23.7" x 10.7")
Weight 25 kg (55.2 lb.)

B202/B178/B180 7-14 SM
SPECIFICATIONS

5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER & PUNCH UNIT


Print Paper Size: No punch mode:
A3/11" x 17" to A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"
Punch mode:
2 holes: A3/11" x 17" to A4/81/2" x 11" (SEF)
A4/81/2" x 11" to A5 (LEF)
3 holes: A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF)
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
4 holes (Europe): A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF)
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
4 holes (North Europe): A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF)
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
Staple mode:
A3/11" x 17" to B5/81/2" x 11"
Paper Weight: No punch mode:
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Punch mode:
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Staple mode:
64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 23 lb.)
Label/Thick paper/OHP cannot be stapled
Tray Capacity: Upper tray:
500 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" , B5, A5 (LEF)
250 sheets: 11" x 17", A3, 81/2" x 14", B4
Lower tray (default mode – stapled output only goes to
tray 2):
2000 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
750 sheets: A3, B4, A4, B5, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17",
81/2" x 11" (SEF)
500 sheets: A5 (LEF)
Lower tray (multi-tray staple mode – stapled output can
go to either tray):
1500 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
750 sheets: A3, B4, A4, B5, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17",
81/2" x 11" (SEF)
500 sheets: A5 (LEF)
Specifications

Staple capacity: Single size:


50 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" , B5
30 sheets: A3, B4, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17"
Mixed size:
30 sheets: A4 (LEF) & A3, B5 (LEF) & B4,
81/2" x 11" (LEF) & 11" x 17"
Staple position: 7 positions
1-staple: 4 positions (Top Left, Top Right,
Top Left-Oblique, Top Right-Oblique)
2-staples: 3 positions (Left, Top, Right)

SM 7-15 B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS

Staple replenishment: Cartridge (5000 staples)


Power consumption: 48 W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 680 x 620 x 1030 mm (26.8" x 24.4" x 40.6")
Weight Without punch unit: 53 kg (116.9 lb.)
With punch unit: 55 Kg (121.3 lb.)

5.6 BOOKLET FINISHER


Paper Size: A3, A4, B4, B5, DLT, LG, LT
Booklet Paper Size: A3, B4, A4 SEF, DLT, LG, LT SEF
Paper Weight: Stack/Sort mode:
60 to 128 g/m2 (16 to 34 lb.)
Staple mode:
64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 24 lb.)
Booklet mode:
64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 21 lb.)
Tray Capacity: 1,000 sheets: A4, LT, B5
500 sheets: A3, B4, DLT, LG
Booklet Tray Capacity: 2 to 5 sheets/booklet: 20
6 to 10 sheets/booklet: 10
Staple capacity: 30 sheets
Booklet capacity: 10 sheets
Staple position: 3 positions (excluding booklet mode)
1-staple: 2 positions (Top right, Top left)
2-staples: 1 positions (Left)
Staple replenishment: Cartridge (5000 staples)

5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY


Number of Bins 2
Paper Size Maximum: A3/11" x 17" (SEF)
Minimum: A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"
Paper Weight 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Stack Capacity Tray 1: 100 sheets
(80 g/m2, 20 lb.) Tray 2: 100 sheets (A4/smaller than 81/2" x 11")
250 sheets (B4/81/2" x 14")

B202/B178/B180 7-16 SM
SPECIFICATIONS

5.8 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION


Place Right side of the mainframe
Length of connector 1m
cable:
Power consumption: Power is supplied from the mainframe.
Dimensions (W x D x H): 570 x 757 x 100 mm
Weight: Less than 20 kg

NOTE: 1) This scanner option also has an operation panel. You cannot operate
the operation panel of the mainframe and the operation panel for the
scanner option at the same time.
2) You need to cover the contact glass of the mainframe with the platen
cover option.

Specifications

SM 7-17 B202/B178/B180
B377
PUNCH UNIT
PUNCH UNIT B377
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................1


1.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT.............................................................. 1

2. DETAILS .........................................................................................2
2.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM ...................................................................... 2
2.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ................................................................... 4

SM i B377
PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


1.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT
To adjust the position of the punch holes in the paper feed direction, use SP6113
(Punch Hole Adjustment).
The punch position can be adjusted by up to 4 mm using combinations of the 3
spacers provided with the finisher. To adjust the horizontal position of the holes,
use the spacers provided with the punch unit.

Punch Unit
B377
[B] [A] B377R119.WMF

1. Rear cover ( x 4)
2. Punch unit [A] ( x 3,  x 5)
3. Spacers [B]

SM 1 B377
PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM

2. DETAILS
The punch unit punches holes in printed sheets, one by one. The punch unit is
provided with a new punch mechanism to improve the accuracy of punching.
NOTE: The illustrations below show the unit for Europe for 2/4 hole punching. The
North American unit has five holes for 2/3 hole punching.

2.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM

[A]

[F]

[D] [E]

[C]

[B]
B377D505.WMF

The punch motor [A] drives the punch mechanism. At the correct time after the
trailing edge of the paper passes the finisher entrance sensor [B], the punch motor
turns on and the paper stops. The punch clutch [C] turns and drives the punch
heads [D].
The punch HP sensor [E] detects the home position for the actuator. The punch
unit switches off when the cut-out in the punch shaft disk [F] enters the punch HP
sensor.
NOTE: SP6113 (Punch Hole Adjustment) adjusts the punch hole position in the
sub scan direction for two holes (001 2-Hole) or for three holes (002 3-
Hole). Use the spacers provided with the punch unit to adjust the position
of the punch in the main scan direction. For details, refer to the installation
of the punch unit in section “1. Installation”).

B377 2 SM
PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM

[C]

[B]
[D]

[A]

Punch Unit
B377D504.WMF

B377
When the finisher has received the command that changes the number of punch
holes for the job, the punch hole motor [A] turns on until the actuator disk changes
the status of the punch hole switch [B] (until it switches on or off). This indicates
that the cover [C] and the punch cam [D] have moved to one side or the other to
determine which punchers are used.

SM 3 B377
PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION

2.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION

[A]

[B]

[C]

B377D506.WMF

Waste punchouts are collected in the punch waste hopper [A] below the punch unit
inside the finisher.
When the top of the punchout waste in the hopper reaches and actuates the
hopper sensor [B], a message will be displayed on the operation panel after the
current job is completed.
This sensor also detects whether the punch waste hopper is installed. When the
waste hopper is taken out, the arm [C] moves down and this will actuate the sensor
and display a message in the operation panel. This message is the same as for the
hopper full condition.

B377 4 SM
TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT
B598
TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B598
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1
1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT ............................................................................. 1
1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ........................................................................... 2
1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS .................. 2
1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD ................................................ 3
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTORS................................................................................... 4
1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES........................................................................... 4
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT.......................................................... 5

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................6


2.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 6
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.............................................. 6
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................... 7
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................. 8

SM i B598
COVER REPLACEMENT

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT

Paper Feed
Unit B598
Two-Tray
[A]

B598R102.WMF

1. Rear cover [A] ( x 2)

SM 1 B598
ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT


1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS

[B]

[A] [C]

B598R101.WMF

1. Paper tray
2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook)
3. Paper Feed Roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Separation Roller [C] ( x 1)

B598 2 SM
PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD

1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD

Paper Feed
Unit B598
Two-Tray
[B]

[A]
B598R103.WMF

1. Rear cover (! 1.1)


2. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 1,  x 3)
3. Main board [B] ( x 2)

SM 3 B598
TRAY LIFT MOTORS

1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTORS


1. Rear cover (! 1.1) [A]
2. Tray lift motor [A] ( x 1,  x 2)

B598R104.WMF

1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES


[A]
1. Rear cover (! 1.1)
2. Paper feed clutches [A] ( x 1, 1
bracket, 1 bushing)

B598R105.WMF

B598 4 SM
PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT

1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT

Paper Feed
Unit B598
Two-Tray
[A]

B598R107.WMF

[B]

B598R108.WMF

1. Vertical transport cover [A] (1 hook)


2. Paper feed unit [B] ( x 2,  x 1)

SM 5 B598
OVERVIEW

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1 2

10
3
4
9 5
6
7

8 B598D001.WMF

1. Upper Pick-up Roller 6. Lower Paper Feed Roller


2. Upper Paper Feed Roller 7. Lower Separation Roller
3. Upper Relay Roller 8. Lower Pick-up Roller
4. Upper Separation Roller 9. Lower Tray
5. Lower Relay Roller 10. Upper Tray

B598 6 SM
OVERVIEW

2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Paper Feed
Unit B598
Two-Tray
9
10

11
25
12
13
24
14
23
15
22 16
21
17
20
19 18

B598D101.WMF

1. Paper Size Switch 1 14. Vertical Guide Switch


2. Paper Size Switch 2 15. Lower Lift Sensor
3. Paper Size Switch 3 16. Lower Tray Lift Motor
4. Paper Size Switch 4 17. Lower Paper End Sensor
5. Main Board 18. Lower Relay Sensor
6. Upper Paper Height 1 Sensor 19. Lower Paper Height 2 Sensor
7. Paper Feed Motor 20. Lower Paper Height 1 Sensor
8. Upper Paper Height 2 Sensor 21. Upper Relay Sensor
9. Upper Lift Sensor 22. Paper Size Switch 4
10. Upper Paper Feed Clutch 23. Paper Size Switch 2
11. Upper Paper End Sensor 24. Paper Size Switch 3
12. Upper Tray Lift Motor 25. Paper Size Switch 1
13. Lower Paper Feed Clutch

SM 7 B598
OVERVIEW

2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

11
2
10

6
4

B598D102.WMF

1. Tray Motor 7. Lower Pick-up Roller


2. Upper Paper Feed Clutch 8. Upper Separation Roller
3. Lower Paper Feed Clutch 9. Upper Relay Roller
4. Lower Relay Roller 10. Upper Paper Feed Roller
5. Lower Separation Roller 11. Upper Pick-up Roller
6. Lower Paper Feed Roller

B598 8 SM
TWO-TRAY FINISHER
B599
TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1
1.1 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS.......................................................................... 1
1.1.2 INNER COVER.................................................................................... 1
1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER............................................................................... 2
1.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR ................................................................................ 2
1.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR ................. 3
1.5 STAPLER TRAY........................................................................................... 3
1.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH ....... 4
1.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR....................................................................... 5
1.8 LIFT MOTORS ............................................................................................. 5
1.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR ............................................................................... 7
1.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS......................................................... 8
1.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR........................................................ 8
1.12 STAPLER UNIT .......................................................................................... 8
1.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR.......................................................... 9
1.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR ..................................................................................... 9
1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS .............................................................................. 9
1.14.2 TRAY SHIFT SENSORS AND TRAY RELEASE SENSOR............. 10
1.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR .................................................................. 10
1.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH........................................................ 10
1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD ......................................................................... 11
1.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ............................................... 11

2. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 12
2.1 JAM DETECTION....................................................................................... 12

3. SERVICE TABLES........................................................................ 13
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS............................................................................ 13
3.2 TEST POINTS ............................................................................................ 13
3.3 FUSES........................................................................................................ 13

. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ........................................................... 14


4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................................... 14
4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 15
4.3 JUNCTION GATES .................................................................................... 16
4.4 TRAY SHIFTING ........................................................................................ 17
4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS............................................................. 17
Tray 1 (Upper Tray) ............................................................................... 17
Tray 2 (Lower Tray) ............................................................................... 18
4.5 TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS .............................................................. 19
4.5.1 TRAY 1 .............................................................................................. 19
Introduction ............................................................................................ 19

SM i B599
Normal and sort/stack modes ................................................................ 19
Staple Mode........................................................................................... 20
Tray 1 release mechanism..................................................................... 21
4.5.2 TRAY 2 .............................................................................................. 22
4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM ............................................................... 23
4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM............................... 24
Vertical Paper Alignment .......................................................................24
Horizontal Paper Alignment ...................................................................24
4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM ............................................................................ 25
4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT..................................................................... 25
Stapler Rotation ..................................................................................... 25
Side-to-Side Movement .........................................................................25
4.7.2 STAPLER .......................................................................................... 26
4.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT ......................................................... 27
4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) ........................................................................ 28
4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM ........................................................... 28
4.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ........................................................ 29

B599 ii SM
COVERS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


1.1 COVERS
1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS
[A] [D]
1. Top cover [A] ( x 4)
NOTE: If the shift tray below is [B]
blocking the screw hole,
remove the shift tray.
2. Bracket [B] ( x 1) [C]
3. Front door [C]
4. Rear cover [D] ( x 4)
5. Right cover [E] ( x 2)

[E] B599R151.WMF

Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
1.1.2 INNER COVER

1. Front cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL


COVERS)
2. Inner cover [A] ( x 3, tabs [B] x 3)

[A]
[B]

B599R102.WMF

[B]

SM 1 B599
POSITIONING ROLLER

1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER


1. Open the front door.
2. Positioning roller [A] ( x 1)
3. Belt [B]

[B]

[A]

B599R103.WMF

1.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR


[B]
[C]
1. Top cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS) [A]
2. Open transport door [A]
3. Bracket [B] ( x 1, ( x 1)
4. Tray 1 exit sensor [C]

B599R104.WMF

B599 2 SM
ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR

1.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE


SENSOR
1. Entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x 1,  x 1)
2. Entrance sensor [B] ( x 1) [B]
3. Stapler tray entrance sensor bracket [C] ( x
1,  x 1) [A]
4. Stapler tray entrance sensor [D]

[C]

[D] B599R105.WMF

Two-Tray
Finisher
1.5 STAPLER TRAY

B599
[A]
[C]

[E]
[D]

[B]
B599R106.WMF B599R107.WMF

1. External covers, front door, inner cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS, 1.1.2
INNER COVER)
2. Two clamps [A]
3. Harnesses [B] ( x 8)
4. Stapler tray [C] ( x 2 [D],  x 2 [E])
NOTE: At the front of the finisher, pull the stapler tray toward you and lift it out.

SM 3 B599
UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH

1.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER


LIMIT SWITCH

[B]

[D]

B599R201.WMF

[A]

[F] [C]
[E]

[G]
B599R109.WMF

[H]

B599R110.WMF

1. External covers (! 1.1.1)


2. Place one hand under tray 2 (the lower tray), press in on the gear [A] to release
the tray, and then support it with your hand as it descends.
3. Place one hand under tray 1 (the upper tray), press in on the gear [B] to release
the tray, and then support it with your hand as it descends.
4. Tray 1 back fence [C] ( x 4)
5. Sensor stay [D] ( x 2, ( x 4)
6. Plastic bracket [E] ( x 1)
7. Stack height sensors [F]
8. Metal bracket [G] ( x 1)
9. Upper limit switch [H]

B599 4 SM
EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR

1.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR


1. Tray 1 back fence (! 1.6)
2. Exit guide plate motor [A] ( x2, 
x1)
NOTE: Disengage the shaft of the exit
guide plate motor from the
ring.

B599R111.WMF

[A]

Two-Tray
Finisher
1.8 LIFT MOTORS

B599
[A]
1. Top cover and rear cover (! 1.1.1)
2. Tray 1 back fence [A] (! 1.6)
3. Sensor stay [B] ( x 4)

[B]

B599R203.WMF

SM 5 B599
LIFT MOTORS

4. Motor bracket [C] ( x 3,  x 2)

[C]

B599R204.WMF

5. Tray 1 lift motor [D] ( x 2, drive belt)


6. Tray 2 lift motor [E] ( x 2, drive belt) [D]
[E]

B599R205.WMF

B599 6 SM
LOWER EXIT SENSOR

1.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR


1. Front door, external and internal
covers. (! 1.1)
2. Exit guide plate motor (! 1.7)
3. Guide plate [A] ( x 1)
NOTE: Pull the shaft toward you
through the round hole.

[A] B599R112.WMF

4. Guide plate exit assembly [B] ( x 1,


 x 1)

Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[B] B599R113.WMF

5. Anti-static brush [C] ( x 2) [C]


6. Bracket guide exit [D] ( x 2)
7. Lower exit sensor [E] ( x 1,  x 1)

[E]

[D]

B599R114.WMF

SM 7 B599
LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS

1.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS

[B] [C]
1. Stapler tray (! 1.5)
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1,  x 2)
[A]
3. Bracket [B] ( x 1)
4. Feeler [C]
5. Lower stack height sensors [D]

[D]

B599R116.WMF

1.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR


1. Stapler tray (! 1.5)
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1,  x 1)
3. Tray 2 shunt position sensor [B] ( x
1) [B]

[A]

B599R202.WMF

1.12 STAPLER UNIT


1. Open the front door [A]
2. Stapler unit [A] ( x 1,  x 2)
NOTE: Hold the stapler holder [B] with
one hand as you remove the
stapler. Do not twist or rotate
the stapler bracket as you
remove it.
[B]
B599R117.WMF

B599 8 SM
STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR

1.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR


1. Stapler unit (! 1.12)
[D]
2. Carefully rotate the stapler holder [A].
[C]
3. Stapler cover [B] ( x 1)
4. Sensor bracket [C] ( x 1,  x 1)
5. Stapler rotation HP sensor [D] [B]
[A]

1.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR B599R118.WMF

1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS


[A]
1. Tray 1 [A] ( x 1)
2. Rear tray cover [B] ( x 1)

Two-Tray
Finisher
[B]

B599
3. Front tray cover [C] ( x 1)
4. Bottom tray cover [D] ( x 2)

[C]

[D]
B599R207.WMF

5. Bottom bracket [E] ( x 3)

[E]
B599R208.WMF

SM 9 B599
TRAY 1 INTERIOR

1.14.2 TRAY SHIFT SENSORS AND TRAY RELEASE SENSOR


[B]
1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)
2. Gear disk [A] ( x 1)
3. Tray shift sensors [B] ( x 1 each).
4. Tray release sensor [C] ( x 1)

[B]

[C]
[A]
B599R210.WMF

1.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR

1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)


2. Motor bracket [A] ( x 3,  x 1)
3. Tray 1 shift motor [B] ( x 3, belt x 1)

[A]

[B] B599R209.WMF

1.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH

1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)


2. Back fence lock clutch [A] ( x 1,  x
1)

B599R211.WMF

[A]

B599 10 SM
FINISHER MAIN BOARD

1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD


1. Rear cover (! 1.1.1)
2. Main PCB [A] ( x 6, All )

[A]

Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
B599R206.WMF

1.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT


To adjust the position of the punch holes in the paper feed direction, use the
appropriate SP mode.
To adjust the horizontal position of the holes, use the spacers provided with the
punch unit.
1. Rear cover (! 1.1.1)
2. Punch unit [A] ( x 3,  x 5)
3. Spacers [B]
The punch position can be adjusted
by up to 4 mm using combinations
of the 3 spacers provided with the
finisher.

[B] [A]
B599R119.WMF

SM 11 B599
JAM DETECTION

2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 JAM DETECTION
Mode Jam Content
Shift 1 Shift 2 Staple
Entrance sensor: After the exit sensor in the main machine
! ! ! no detection went off, the entrance sensor did not switch
on for at least 2 s.
Entrance sensor: After the entrance sensor switched on, it did
! ! !
no detection not remain on for at least 150 ms.*1
Upper exit sensor: After the entrance sensor switched on, the
! no detection upper exit sensor did not remain on for at
least 59 pulses. *2
Upper exit sensor: After the upper exit sensor switched on, it
!
jam did not switch off within 150 ms. *1
Lower exit sensor: After the entrance sensor switched on, the
! no detection lower exit sensor did not switch on within 59
pulses. *2
Lower exit sensor: After the lower exit sensor switched on, it did
!
jam not switch off within 150 ms. *1
Stapler tray After the entrance sensor switched off, the
! entrance sensor: stapler tray entrance sensor did not switch
no detection on within 102 pulses.*2
Stapler tray After the stapler tray entrance sensor
! entrance sensor: switched on, it did not switch off within 59
jam pulses.*1
Lower tray exit After the transport motor switched on, the
! sensor: no lower tray exit sensor did not switch on
detection within 1260 ms.

*1
: Timing for A4 L (differs according to paper size).
*2
: Counted by entrance motor pulses because timing differs for feed out.

B599 12 SM
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those described
in the table below.
DPS101
Mode Description
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 Default.
1 1 1 0 Free run. No paper.
0 0 0 1 Transportation See the note below.

NOTE: The following procedure repositions the shift trays to the shipping position.
1) Make sure that the main switch is turned off.
2) Turn on DIP SW101-4 on the main board.
3) Turn on the main switch.
4) After the fisher completes the initialization, turn off DIP SW101-4.
Finisher automatically repositions the shift trays to the shipping position.

Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
3.2 TEST POINTS
No. Label Monitored Signal
TP101 GND Ground
TP102 5V 5V
TP103 RXD Received command data
TP104 TXD Transmitted command data

3.3 FUSES
No. Function
FU101 Protects 24 V.

SM 13 B599
GENERAL LAYOUT

4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1

8
2

7
4

6
5

B599D118.WMF

1. Upper junction gate 5. Stapler


2. Punch unit (option) 6. Stapler tray
3. Stapler junction gate 7. Tray 2
4. Pre-stack tray 8. Tray 1
Tray junction gate: Directs paper either to the upper or lower exit. In staple mode,
the stack always goes out to the lower exit.
Stapler junction gate: Directs paper either to the lower exit or to the stapler tray.
Pre-stack tray: When stapling multiple prints (A4 LEF, LT LEF, B5 LEF only) in the
staple mode, the first sheet of the second print waits here for the next sheet to feed
while the previous stack is stapled. After the second print is fed, the first and
second sheets are fed together to the pre-stack tray. This delay allows enough time
for the previous stack to be stapled without interrupting paper feed.
Shift trays: Tray 1 (upper) and tray 2 (lower) shift side to side in the sort mode,
and raise and lower to receive ejected prints.
Stapler tray jogger: Employs positioning rollers and jogger fences to align stacks
for stapling.
Punch unit: Punches holes in stacked prints.

B599 14 SM
DRIVE LAYOUT

4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT

4
3
2
1 5

6
14
13
7
12
11
15
10
16

Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
9 8

B599D104.WMF

17

18 B599D103.WMF

1. Tray 1 lift motor 10. Lower transport motor


2. Entrance roller 11. Pre-stack motor
3. Tray 2 lift motor 12. Upper transport motor
4. Upper exit roller 13. Punch motor
5. Tray 1 shift motor 14. Entrance motor
6. Exit guide plate motor 15. Stack feed-out motor
7. Lower exit roller 16. Jogger motor
8. Tray 2 shift motor 17. Stapler motor
9. Exit motor 18. Stapler rotation motor

SM 15 B599
JUNCTION GATES

4.3 JUNCTION GATES


The two junction gates can direct paper to three destinations.
In sort/stack mode for tray 1, the tray junction [A]
solenoid [A] is on, and the prints go to the upper exit
(tray 1 is at the upper exit for sort/stack mode).

B599D205.WMF

In sort/stack mode for tray 2, both the tray junction gate [A]
solenoid [A] and stapler junction gate solenoid [B] are
off, and prints go to the lower exit.

[B]

B599D206.WMF

In staple mode, the tray junction solenoid [A] is off and [A]
the stapler junction gate solenoid [B] is on, and prints go
to the stapler tray.

[B]
B599D207.WMF

B599 16 SM
TRAY SHIFTING

4.4 TRAY SHIFTING


4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS

[F]
[A] [B]

[C]

[D] [E]

Two-Tray
Finisher
B599D106.WMF

B599
Tray 1 (Upper Tray)
In sort/stack mode, tray 1 [A] moves from side to side to separate the printed sets.
The tray 1 shift motor [B], inside the shift tray, controls the horizontal position of
tray 1 through the timing belt [C] and gear disk [D].
After one print set is delivered to tray 1, the shift motor turns on, driving the gear
disk and the arm [E], and the tray drive unit moves to one side.
Two shift sensors [F] detect when to stop this side-to-side movement. There is a
cut-out in the gear disk. The shift tray moves in one direction until one of the shift
sensors detects the cut-out. Then the shift tray stops.
The next set of prints is then delivered, and the gear disk is turned in the opposite
direction until the other shift sensor is activated.

SM 17 B599
TRAY SHIFTING

Tray 2 (Lower Tray)

[C]
[A]

[E]

[D]
[B]
B599D105.WMF

In sort/stack mode, tray 2 [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of prints.
The shift mechanism for tray 2 is similar to that used for tray 1. However, when the
tray 2 shift motor [B] turns on, the arm [D] moves the entire end fence [C] from side
to side (not just the tray).
After the gear disk has turned 180 degrees, the cut-out in the gear disk enters the
tray half-turn sensor [E], and the motor stops. When the next set of prints is
delivered, the motor turns on again, and moves the tray back to its previous
position.

B599 18 SM
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS

4.5 TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS


4.5.1 TRAY 1
[I] [E] [D]

[C]
[H]
[B]
[A]

[C]
[F]

[G]

Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
B599D204.WMF

Introduction
The tray 1 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 1 [B] through gears and
timing belts [C].

Normal and sort/stack modes


When the main switch is turned on, the tray is initialized at the upper position. To
do this, the tray is moved up until upper stack height sensor 1 [D] is de-actuated.
During printing, if upper stack height sensor 2 [E] is actuated, the tray 1 lift motor
lowers the tray for a specified time.
When the tray lowers during printing, the actuator [F] will pass through the tray 1
overflow 1 sensor [G]. When the actuator drops below the sensor (to deactivate the
sensor), the machine detects that the paper stack height has exceeded the
overflow limit.
The upper limit switch for tray 1 [H] prevents the drive gear from being damaged if
the upper stack height sensor 1 should fail. If the tray is raised to the tray
positioning roller [I], the switch will automatically cut the power to the tray 1 lift
motor.

SM 19 B599
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS

Staple Mode

[A]

[B]

[D]

[E]
[G]

[C] [F]

B599D204.WMF

In staple mode, stapled stacks can be delivered to either tray, but they can only go
to the lower exit. So, if tray 1 is selected, tray 1 [A] moves down to the lower paper
exit.
Tray 1 lowers until the actuator [B] enters the tray 1 lower limit sensor [C]. Tray 1
then lifts up until lower stack height sensor 1 [D] is activated.
When tray 1 is moved down to the lower exit, tray 2 must be moved down out of
the way. So, tray 2 [E] is also lowered until the tray 2 shunt position sensor [F]
detects tray 2 (or the top of the paper stack in tray 2).
The method of paper height detection is the same as for the upper exit area.
When the tray lowers during printing, the actuator will enter the tray 1 overflow 2
sensor [G]. When this happens, the machine detects that the paper stack height
has exceeded the overflow limit.

B599 20 SM
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS

Tray 1 release mechanism [A]


When tray 1 is selected for staple mode, tray
1 must be moved down to the lower paper
exit. However, to move past the sensors at
the lower exit, the tray must be moved away
from the finisher.
To do this, the tray 1 shift motor turns until
the cut-out in the gear disk enters the tray
release sensor [A]. At this time, the arm [B] [D]
has reached position [C], and is pushing
against the plate [D], in towards the finisher.
However, the plate is fixed, so the tray [B]
moves out away from the finisher.
Then, the tray 1 shift motor stops, then the [C]
B599D201.WMF
tray 1 lift motor lowers tray 1.

When the tray 1 lower limit sensor is


activated (as described on the previous [E]

Two-Tray
Finisher
page), the tray has moved past the sensors

B599
at the lower exit. The tray 1 shift motor turns
on again until the gear disk activates the
tray shift sensor [E]. This moves the tray
back against the finisher.
Next, tray 1 lifts until the finisher detects that
the tray is at the correct height.

B599D202.WMF

When tray 1 is at the lower exit, the tray lock


solenoid [F] is on, and the lever [G] locks the [F]
[I]
tray. This prevents the user from moving the
tray out of position (the first tray has some
play when it is at the lower position).
Before tray 1 goes back to the upper exit
area, the tray lock solenoid [F] turns off to
unlock the tray. In addition, the back fence
lock clutch [H] turns on to hold the back
fence [I]. This prevents the springs inside [G]
the back fence from suddenly contracting
(these springs normally keep the tray steady [H]
during side-to-side shift).
B599D203.WMF

Then, tray 1 is released and it moves up to


the upper exit area.

SM 21 B599
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS

4.5.2 TRAY 2

[H]

[A]
[E]
Overflow condition
[B]

[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[D]
[C] Multi Tray Staple Mode Normal Mode
[F]
B599D500.WMF

[G]

B599D109.WMF

The tray 2 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 2 [B] through gears and
timing belts [C].
The paper height detection is the same as for tray 1.
When the tray lowers during printing, the tray is judged to be overflowing when the
tray 2 overflow sensor 1 [D] is off and the tray 2 overflow sensor-2 [F] is on (see
‘Normal Mode’ in the above diagram).
In the multi-tray staple mode (selected by the service technician), the machine
detects that the paper stack height has exceeded the overflow limit when the
actuator [E] enters the tray 2 overflow 1 sensor [D].
The lower limit sensor [G] for tray 2 detects when tray 2 is at its lowest limit and
stops the tray 2 lift motor.
The function of the tray 2 upper limit switch [H] is the same as for tray 1.

B599 22 SM
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS

4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM

[B]

[A]

[C]

[D]

B599D200.WMF

Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
NOTE: This feature is available only when using A4 L, LT L, and B5 L.
During stapling, the main machine must wait. This mechanism reduces the wait by
holding the first two sheets of a job while the previous job is still being stapled. It
only works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi-set print job.
The pre-stack junction gate solenoid [A] switches on after the first sheet activates
the entrance sensor. This directs the sheet to the pre-stack tray [B].
The pre-stack feed roller [C] stops for a specified time after the trailing edge of the
paper has passed through the entrance sensor and stops the paper from leaving
the pre-stack tray.
At the same time, the pre-stack junction gate solenoid switches off, and the second
sheet is sent to the paper guide [D]. The pre-stack feed roller (controlled by the
pre-stack motor) starts to rotate again for a specified time after the trailing edge of
the second page has been passed through the entrance sensor, and then both
sheets are sent to the stapler tray together.

SM 23 B599
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM

4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM


[C]

[E]
[A]

[B]

[F] [D]
B599D110.WMF

In staple mode, each sheet of print paper is vertically and horizontally aligned when
it arrives in the stapler tray.

Vertical Paper Alignment


After the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor [A], the
positioning roller solenoid [B] is energized for a specified time to push the
positioning roller [C] into contact with the paper.
The positioning roller rotates to push the paper back and align the trailing edge of
the paper against the stack stopper [D].

Horizontal Paper Alignment


When the start key is pressed, the jogger motor [E] turns on and the jogger fences
[F] move to the waiting position, which is 8 mm wider on both sides than the
selected paper.
When the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor, the
jogger motor turns on to move the jogger fences 5 mm towards the paper. After a
short time, the jogger motor turns on again for the horizontal paper alignment then
returns to the waiting position.

B599 24 SM
STAPLER MECHANISM

4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM


4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT

[D]

[B]

[A]

[E] [B]
B599D112.WMF

Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[C] B599D113.WMF

The stapler can be moved from side to side or rotated according to the
requirements of the selected stapling mode.

Stapler Rotation
After the start key is pressed, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the staple unit
[B] until the stapler rotation HP sensor [C] is activated. Then, the stapler moves
from front to rear of the finisher.
When oblique stapling at one position has been selected, after the stapler moves to
the stapling position, the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler 45 degrees
(clockwise) at the stapling position before the stapler fires.

Side-to-Side Movement
The stapler motor [D] moves the stapler from side to side. After the start key is
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
The amount of movement required to reach the stapling position is determined by
the size of the selected paper. If the two-staple mode is selected, the stapler
moves to the front stapling position first, and then moves to the rear stapling
position. However, for the next print set, it staples in the reverse order.
After the stapling job is finished, the stapler returns to its home position,
determined by the stapler HP sensor [E].

SM 25 B599
STAPLER MECHANISM

4.7.2 STAPLER

[D]

[B]

[C]

B599D208.WMF

[A]

The staple hammer is driven by the stapler hammer motor [A] inside the stapler.
As soon as the paper stack is aligned, the staple hammer motor starts. When
stapling is finished, the staple hammer HP sensor [B] is turned on, and the staple
hammer motor then stops.
The staple end sensor [C] detects the staple end condition and whether the staple
cartridge is installed or not. If a stapler cassette is not installed, or after the stapler
cassette runs out of staples, a message is displayed in the operation panel. If this
condition is detected during a print job, the indicator will appear, but the print job
will not stop.
The staple position sensor [D] detects if there is a staple sheet at the stapling
position. After a new staple cartridge is installed, the staple hammer motor turns on
to transfer the staple sheet until the staple position sensor is activated by the staple
sheet.
If a staple jam occurs and overloads the motor, this causes a staple jam message
to appear on the operation panel.

B599 26 SM
STAPLER MECHANISM

4.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT

[A]

[C]
[I]

[B]

[D]
B599D115.WMF

[G]
[E]

Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[F] [H] B599D114.WMF

When stapling starts, the exit guide plate motor [A] switches on and opens the exit
guide plate [B], so that the stapled stack can exit to the tray. The exit guide plate
sensor [C] detects when to switch off the exit guide plate motor.
After the prints have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [D] starts. The pawl [E]
on the stack feed out belt [F] lifts the stapled set and feeds it to the tray [G].
The exit guide plate closes at a specified interval after the stapled prints have
started to feed out. Then the exit roller takes over the stack feed-out. The stack
feed-out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt home
position sensor [H].
When tray 1 is passing this area on its way back up to the upper exit, the exit guide
safety switch [I] cuts power to the tray lift motor if the guide is opened too far. This
prevents damage to the user’s fingers if they are inside the lower exit when the tray
is moving up.

SM 27 B599
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)


The punch unit punches holes in printed sheets, one by one. The punch unit is
provided with a new punch mechanism to improve the accuracy of punching.

[A]

[E]

[D]

[C]

B599D102.WMF
[B]
[H]

[I]

B599D101.WMF

[F] [G]

4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM


The punch drive mechanism is driven by the punch motor [A]. Each sheet is
positioned and punched by pressure from above. A certain time after the trailing
edge of the paper passes through the finisher entrance sensor [B], the punch motor
turns on and the paper stops. Then the punch clutch [C] turns on to make the
punch holes.
The home position is detected by the punch HP sensor [D]. When the cut-out in the
punch shaft disk [E] enters the punch HP sensor, the punch clutch turns off.
When the finisher has received the command that changes the number of punch
holes, the punch hole motor [F] turns on until the disk changes the status of the
punch hole switch [G] (until it switches on or off). This indicates that the cover [H]
and the punch cam [I] have moved to one side or the other to change the number
of holes.

B599 28 SM
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

4.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION

[A]

[B]

[C]

Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
B599D153.WMF

Waste punchouts are collected in the punch waste hopper [A] below the punch unit
inside the finisher.
When the top of the punchout waste in the hopper reaches and actuates the
hopper sensor [B], a message will be displayed on the operation panel after the
current job is completed.
This sensor also detects whether the punch waste hopper is installed. When the
waste hopper is taken out, the arm [C] moves down and this will actuate the sensor
and display a message in the operation panel. This message is the same as for the
hopper full condition.

SM 29 B599
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
B600
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1
1.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME.................................... 1
1.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR ........................................................................ 1
1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE.......................................................... 2
1.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR ............................................................ 3
1.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ..................................................................................... 4
1.6 TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH.................................. 5
1.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ............................................................................... 6
1.8 PAPER FEED UNIT...................................................................................... 7
1.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS ......... 8
1.10 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER ...................................... 9

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ........................................ 10


2.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................ 10
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................ 10
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................. 11
2.2 PAPER FEED............................................................................................. 12
2.3 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE .................... 13
2.4 TRAY LIFT.................................................................................................. 14
2.5 NEAR END/END DETECTION................................................................... 15
2.6 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM............................................. 16
2.7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION................................................... 17

SM i B600
DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


1.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME

1. To draw the tray out, press the


stopper [A] on the guide rail.
2. To install the tray, set the tray on the
guide rails, keep the tray level, and
push the tray in.

Capacity Tray
Large

B600
[A]
B600R101.WMF

1.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR


1. Pull out the large capacity tray. [B]
2. Left tray rear side fence [A] ( x 2) [C]

3. Rear fence bracket [B] ( x 1)


[D] [A]
4. Connector of the rear fence HP
sensor [C]
5. Rear fence HP sensor [D] ( x 1)

B600R102.WMF

SM 1 B600
CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE

1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE


[A]

[B]

A4
A4
Lt
Lt B600R103.WMF

1. Screws [A] [B]


2. Change the position of the side fences.
3. Change the position of the rear fence HP sensor (! 1.2).
4. Before securing the right tray side fence, load the paper in the right tray, and
adjust the fence.

B600 2 SM
LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR

1.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR

[B]

[A]

[C]

Capacity Tray
Large

B600
B600R104.WMF

1. Pull out the large capacity tray.


2. Left tray side fence [A] ( x 2)
3. Rear fence bracket [B] ( x1)
4. Left tray paper end sensor [C] ( x 1)

SM 3 B600
TRAY LIFT MOTOR

1.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

[A]

B600R105.WMF

[B]

B600R106.WMF

1. Rear cover [A] ( x 2)


2. Tray lift motor [B] ( x 3,  x 1)

B600 4 SM
TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH

1.6 TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH

[C]

[A]

Capacity Tray
Large

B600
[B]

B600R107.WMF

1. Rear cover (! 1.5)


2. Tray motor [A] ( x 6,  x 1)
3. Bracket [B] ( x 1)
4. Stack transport clutch [C] ( x 2, 2 bushings, 1 gear)

SM 5 B600
PAPER FEED CLUTCH

1.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH

[B]

[A]

B600R108.WMF

1. Rear cover (! 1.5)


2. Bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Bushing
4. Paper feed clutch [B]

B600 6 SM
PAPER FEED UNIT

1.8 PAPER FEED UNIT

[A]

Capacity Tray
Large

B600
[C]

[B]
B600R109.WMF

1. Stack transport clutch (! 1.6)


2. Paper feed clutch (! 1.7)
3. Paper feed unit cable [A]
4. Open the vertical transport guide plate [B].
5. Paper feed unit [C] ( x 2)

SM 7 B600
UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS

1.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND


RELAY SENSORS

[A] [C]

[B]

[D]

B600R111.WMF

1. Paper feed unit (! 1.8)


2. Sensors
• Upper limit [A]
• Relay [B] ( x 1, 1 bracket)
• Right tray paper end [C]
NOTE: To remove the upper limit [A] or paper end sensor[C], press the lever [D]
and hold it down.

B600 8 SM
PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER

1.10 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER

[C]

Capacity Tray
Large

B600
[A] [B]
B600R110.WMF

1. Paper tray unit


2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook)
3. Separation roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Feed roller [C] ( x 1)
NOTE: If the rollers are incorrectly installed, the one-way clutch does not work.

SM 9 B600
OVERVIEW

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS


2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10

11

B600D001.WMF

13 12

1. Paper Height Sensors 5 8. Relay Roller


2. Paper Height Sensors 4 9. Separation Roller
3. Paper Height Sensors 1 10. Paper Height Sensors 2
4. Pick-up Roller 11. Paper Height Sensors 3
5. Upper Limit Sensor 12. Lower Limit Sensor
6. Paper Feed Roller 13. Left Paper End Sensor
7. Relay Sensor

B600 10 SM
OVERVIEW

2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

5 6 7
8
4 9
3
2 10
11
1
12

13

Capacity Tray
Large

B600
14
15

16

17
B600D101.WMF
20 19 18

1. End Fence Home Position Sensor 11. Upper Limit Sensor


2. Left Tray Paper End Sensor 12. Paper Feed Clutch
3. Paper Height Sensor 4 13. Paper Height Sensor 2
4. Paper Height Sensor 5 14. Right Tray Paper End Sensor
5. Paper Size Sensor 15. Paper Height Sensor 3
6. Main Board 16. Vertical Guide Switch
7. Side Fence Open/Closed Sensor 17. Lower Limit Sensor
8. Tray Sensor 18. Tray Lift Motor
9. Tray Motor 19. Relay Sensor
10. Paper Height Sensors 1 20. Stack Transport Clutch

SM 11 B600
PAPER FEED

2.2 PAPER FEED

[A]

[B]
[C]

B600D102.WMF

• This product uses an FRR type paper feed mechanism.


• The paper feed unit consists of the pick-up roller [A], paper feed roller [B],
separation roller [C], and relay roller.
• There is a torque limiter (ferrite powder type) in the back of the separation roller.

B600 12 SM
SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE

2.3 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER


RELEASE

[C]
[E]

[A]

Capacity Tray
Large

B600
B600D107.WMF
[B]

[E]

[A]

[D]
B600D108.WMF

To prevent the paper from being torn when pulling out the paper feed tray, the
separation and pickup rollers are set so that they release automatically.
When the paper tray [A] is not inside the machine, the separation roller [B] is away
from the paper feed roller [C] and the pick-up roller [D] stays in the upper position.
When the paper tray is set into the machine, it pushes the release lever [E]. This
causes the pick-up roller to go down into contact with the top sheet of paper and
the separation roller to move up and contact the paper feed roller.

SM 13 B600
TRAY LIFT

2.4 TRAY LIFT

[F]

[G] [E]

[A]

[C]
[D]

B600D103.WMF
[B]

When the paper feed tray is put in the machine, the tray sensor on the back face
turns on and the tray lift motor [A] starts. The base plate lift shaft [B] is coupled to
the lift motor at shaft [C], so the base plate of the tray is lifted. After a short while,
the top of the paper stack contacts the pick-up roller and lifts it up.
When this occurs, the actuator enters the upper limit sensor, the sensor turns off
and the lift motor stops. When paper in the tray is used up, the pick-up roller is
gradually lowered, and the actuator leaves the upper limit sensor (turning the
sensor on). When this happens, the lift motor begins turning again. The tray will
then be lifted until the actuator enters the upper limit sensor (turning the sensor off
again).
When the tray is removed from the printer, the coupling between the lift motor and
base plate lift shaft is broken and the base plate goes into a controlled free fall
(using a damper [D] to slow the fall and prevent damage).

B600 14 SM
NEAR END/END DETECTION

2.5 NEAR END/END DETECTION


This tray holds two stacks of paper, so the machine needs to monitor the status of
both these stacks. There are seven sensors to do this.
In the right tray (paper feed side), three height sensors ([E] in the diagram on the
previous page) measure the height of the stack, and an end sensor detects when
all the paper is used up. As the amount of paper remaining in the tray decreases,
the base plate rises and the actuator activates the paper height sensors. When
paper runs out in the right tray, the stack in the left tray is moved across to the right
tray.
There are also two height sensors ([F] in the diagram on the previous page) and an
end sensor in the left tray (paper storage side) ([G] in the diagram on the previous

Capacity Tray
page). When there is no paper in both trays, paper end is detected.

Large
The machine determines the amount of remaining paper based on the sensor

B600
outputs, as shown in the following table.
Amount of paper
100% 75% 50%
Paper Height Sensor 1 " " " " " " $ " "
Paper Height Sensor 2 " " " " " $ – " $
Paper Height Sensor 3 " " $ " " – – $ –
Right Tray Paper End Sensor $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
Paper Height Sensor 4 " " " $ $ " " " "
Paper Height Sensor 5 " $ " $ $ " " $ $
Left Tray Paper End Sensor " " " " $ " " " "

Amount of paper
25% Near-end End
Paper Height Sensor 1 $ " " " " $ $ –
Paper Height Sensor 2 – " $ " $ – – –
Paper Height Sensor 3 – $ – $ – – – –
Right Tray Paper End Sensor $ $ $ $ $ $ $ "
Paper Height Sensor 4 " $ $ $ $ $ $ $
Paper Height Sensor 5 $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
Left Tray Paper End Sensor " " " $ $ " $ $

Right tray paper end sensor: " = Low (no paper), $ = High (paper present)
Other sensors: " = Low (paper present), $ = High (no paper)

The following diagram is the sensor layout, as viewed from the front.

Paper Storage Side Paper Feed Side

Paper End
Sensor 1
Paper Height
Sensor 1
Paper Height
Sensor 5 Paper Height
Sensor2
Paper Height
Sensor 4 Paper Height
Sensor 3
Paper End
Sensor 2

B600D112.WMF

SM 15 B600
PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM

2.6 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM


[E] [D] [B]
[C]

[A]

B600D104.WMF

When the paper in the right tray is used up, the tray motor [A] and stack transport
clutch [B] turn on. Then the rear fence [C] moves the stack of paper from the left
tray to the right tray.
While the stack is being moved, it pushes the side fence aside, and the side fence
open/closed sensor [D] detects that the fence is open.
After the stack has been moved across, a spring in the side fence moves the side
fence back, and the sensor detects that the fence is closed. Then, the tray motor
reverses until end fence home position sensor [E] is deactivated.

B600 16 SM
RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION

2.7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION

[A]

[B]

Capacity Tray
Large

B600
[C]
B600D106.WMF

[E] [D]

B600D111.WMF

The paper end sensor [A] detects when copy paper in the right tray runs out.
When there is paper in the tray, the paper pushes up the paper end feeler [B] and
causes the actuator to enter the sensor. When paper runs out, the feeler drops and
the actuator leaves the sensor, and the machine detects that there is no paper in
the tray.
When the tray is being pulled out, the lever [E] lifts the pick-up roller and this also
lifts up the feeler.

SM 17 B600
ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT
B601
ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1
1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT ............................................................................. 1
1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ........................................................................... 2
1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS .................. 2
1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD ................................................ 3
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ..................................................................................... 4
1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ............................................................................... 4
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT.......................................................... 5

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................6


2.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 6
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.............................................. 6
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................... 7
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................. 8

SM i B601
COVER REPLACEMENT

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT

[A]

B601R102.WMF

1. Rear cover [A] ( x 2)

Paper Feed
One-Tray

B601
Unit

SM 1 B601
ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT


1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS

[B]

[A] [C]

B601R101.WMF

1. Paper tray
2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook)
3. Paper Feed Roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Separation Roller [C] ( x 1)

B601 2 SM
PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD

1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD

[B]

[A]
B601R103.WMF

1. Rear cover (! 1.1)


2. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 1,  x 3)
3. Main board [B] ( x 2)

Paper Feed
One-Tray

B601
Unit

SM 3 B601
TRAY LIFT MOTOR

1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR


1. Rear cover (! 1.1)
2. Tray lift motor [A] ( x 1,  x 2)

[A] B601R104.WMF

1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH


1. Rear cover (! 1.1)
2. Bracket [B] ( x 1)
3. Bushing
[B]
4. Paper feed clutch [C]

[C] B601R105.WMF

B601 4 SM
PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT

1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT

[B]

[A]
B601R106.WMF

1. Right cover [A]


2. Paper feed unit [B] ( x 2,  x 1)

Paper Feed
One-Tray

B601
Unit

SM 5 B601
OVERVIEW

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1 2

B601D001.WMF

1. Pick-up Roller
2. Paper Feed Roller
3. Relay Roller
4. Separation Roller
5. Tray

B601 6 SM
OVERVIEW

2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1 2 3 4
5
6
7

8
9

10
7

11
14
12
13

B601D101.WMF

1. Paper Size Switch 1 8. Lift Sensor


2. Paper Size Switch 2 9. Paper Feed Clutch
3. Paper Size Switch 3 10. Vertical Guide Switch
4. Paper Size Switch 4 11. Tray Lift Motor
5. Main Board 12. Relay Sensor
6. Paper Feed Motor 13. Paper Height 2 Sensor
7. Paper End Sensor 14. Paper Height 1 Sensor
Paper Feed
One-Tray

B601
Unit

SM 7 B601
OVERVIEW

2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

B601D102.WMF

1. Paper Feed Motor


2. Paper Feed Clutch
3. Paper Feed Roller
4. Separation Roller
5. Pick-up Roller

B601 8 SM
BOOKLET FINISHER
B602
BOOKLET FINISHER B602
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................ 1
1.1 REGULAR TRAY.......................................................................................... 1
1.2 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.2.1 FRONT COVER................................................................................... 1
1.2.2 REAR COVER ..................................................................................... 3
1.2.3 LEFT/RIGHT TOP AND TRAY UPPER COVER ................................. 3
1.2.4 UPPER RIGHT COVER ...................................................................... 5
1.3 SIDE GUIDE................................................................................................. 6
Removal................................................................................................... 6
Reassembly ............................................................................................. 6
1.4 STAPLER UNIT............................................................................................ 7
Removal................................................................................................... 7
Adjusting the Stapler Gear Phase.......................................................... 10
1.5 FOLDING UNIT .......................................................................................... 13
Removal................................................................................................. 13
Adjusting the Folding Unit Gear Phase .................................................. 15
1.6 STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE ....................................................... 16
1.6.1 STACK TRAY UNIT........................................................................... 16
1.6.2 JOGGER FENCE UNIT ..................................................................... 18
1.7 STAPLER MOTOR UNIT ........................................................................... 20
1.8 TRANSPORT ............................................................................................. 22
1.8.1 TRANSPORT MOTOR ...................................................................... 22
1.8.2 TRANSPORT ROLLER ..................................................................... 22
1.9 STACK TRAY ............................................................................................. 24
1.9.1 STACK TRAY UPPER ROLLER ....................................................... 24
1.9.2 STACK TRAY PADDLE..................................................................... 25
1.9.3 STACK TRAY LOWER ROLLER....................................................... 27
Removal................................................................................................. 27
Reassembly ........................................................................................... 29
1.10 CIRCUIT BOARD ..................................................................................... 30
1.10.1 CONTROLLER BOARD .................................................................. 30
1.10.2 STAPLER HOME POSITION SENSOR BOARD............................. 30
1.11 PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER....................................... 32
1.11.1 PUNCH UNIT AND PUNCH UNIT MOTOR..................................... 32
1.11.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR ............................................................... 34
1.11.3 CONTROLLER ................................................................................ 35
1.11.4 PHOTO SENSOR BOARD .............................................................. 35
1.11.5 LED BOARD .................................................................................... 36
1.11.6 CHAD BOX FULL SENSOR BOARD AND LED BOARD ................ 37
1.11.7 ADJUSTMENT AND INITIALIZATION............................................. 38
Sensor Voltage ...................................................................................... 38

SM i B602
Punch Type............................................................................................ 39
EEPROM ............................................................................................... 39

2. SERVICE TABLES ........................................................................ 40


2.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ........................................................................... 40
Punch Controller Board.......................................................................... 40

3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS.......................................................... 41
3.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................................... 41
3.2 DRIVE ........................................................................................................ 42
3.3 CONTROLLER ........................................................................................... 43
3.4 STACK TRAY ............................................................................................. 44
3.4.1 SIMPLE OUTPUT.............................................................................. 44
Mechanism ............................................................................................ 44
Stack-Tray Belt ...................................................................................... 44
3.4.2 SORT................................................................................................. 45
3.4.3 STACK............................................................................................... 46
Paddle.................................................................................................... 46
Stack-Tray Stopper ................................................................................ 46
Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism................................................................ 47
Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism................................................................ 48
Home Position ....................................................................................... 48
Stapler Switch........................................................................................ 48
Safety Feature ....................................................................................... 48
3.4.4 JOGGER FENCE .............................................................................. 49
Action..................................................................................................... 49
Drive ...................................................................................................... 49
Home Position ....................................................................................... 49
Paper Position ....................................................................................... 50
3.4.5 PAPER OUTPUT............................................................................... 51
Mechanism ............................................................................................ 51
Stack-Tray Belt Home Position .............................................................. 51
3.5 STAPLING.................................................................................................. 52
3.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 52
3.5.2 STAPLER .......................................................................................... 53
Mechanism ............................................................................................ 53
Stapler Switch........................................................................................ 53
Sensors.................................................................................................. 53
3.5.3 POSITIONING ................................................................................... 54
Action and Drive .................................................................................... 54
Home Position and Ready Position........................................................ 54
Staple Position ....................................................................................... 55
3.6 REGULAR TRAY........................................................................................ 57
Action and Drive .................................................................................... 57
Ready Position....................................................................................... 57
Paper Sensor......................................................................................... 58

B602 ii SM
Paper Full .............................................................................................. 58
Fail Safe Feature ................................................................................... 58
3.7 SADDLE STITCH ....................................................................................... 59
3.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 59
3.7.2 STACK TRAY .................................................................................... 60
3.7.3 STAPLER .......................................................................................... 60
3.7.4 PAPER TRANSPORT ....................................................................... 61
3.7.5 PAPER OUTPUT............................................................................... 62
Folding Plate Mechanism....................................................................... 62
Folding Plate Home Position.................................................................. 62
Folder Rollers Mechanism ..................................................................... 63
Folder Rollers Home Position ................................................................ 63
Shape of Folder Rollers ......................................................................... 64
3.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) ........................................................................ 65
3.8.1 REGISTRATION................................................................................ 65
Slide Unit ............................................................................................... 65
Home Position ....................................................................................... 65
Registration............................................................................................ 65
3.8.2 PUNCH.............................................................................................. 67
Types of Punch Unit............................................................................... 67
Drive ...................................................................................................... 67
Home Position ....................................................................................... 67
Two Holes and Four Holes .................................................................... 68
Two or Three Holes ............................................................................... 69

SM iii B602
REGULAR TRAY

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


1.1 REGULAR TRAY
Regular tray [A] ( x 4)

[A]

B602R901.WMF

Booklet Fin-
1.2 COVERS

isher
B602
1.2.1 FRONT COVER

[A]

[B]
B602R987.WMF B602R988.WMF

1. Joint guard [A] ( x 2)


2. Front lower cover [B] ( x 2)

SM 1 B602
COVERS

[A]
3. Open the front door [A].
4. Release the stopper and remove the knob
[B].
5.  [C] x 2
[C]

B602R902.WMF
[B]

6. Front cover [D]

[D]

B602R903.WMF

B602 2 SM
COVERS

1.2.2 REAR COVER


[A]

[B]

[D]
[C]
B602R905.WMF
B602R904.WMF

Rear cover [A] ( [B] x 2,  [C] x 1)

Booklet Fin-
NOTE: One of the screws is under the mylar [D].

isher
B602
1.2.3 LEFT/RIGHT TOP AND TRAY UPPER COVER

1. Front cover (! 1.2.1)


2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2) [B]
3. Screw (on the right top cover holder) [A]
NOTE: Remove the regular tray [B] if it is
in its upper position.

[A]

B602R907.WMF

SM 3 B602
COVERS

[A] [D]

[B]

B602R908.WMF
[C] B602R906.WMF

4. Open the left top cover [A].


5. Fastener [B]
6. Strap [C]
7. Tray upper cover [D] ( x 1,  x 1)
8. Right top cover (with the right top cover holder)

B602 4 SM
COVERS

1.2.4 UPPER RIGHT COVER

1. Front cover (! 1.2.1)


2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
3. Left top cover (! 1.2.3)
4.  [A] x 1

[A]

B602R910.WMF

Booklet Fin-
5. Upper right cover [B]
( [C] x 1, 4 hooks)

isher
B602
[B]

[C]

B602R911.WMF

SM 5 B602
SIDE GUIDE

1.3 SIDE GUIDE


[C]
Removal
1. Regular tray (! 1.1)
2. Front cover (! 1.2.1)
3. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
[D]
4. Regular tray holders [A][B] [B]
( x 1 for each) [A]
5.  [C] x 4
[C]
6. Side-guide fastener [D]

B602R912.WMF

7. Open the side guide [E] and release


the feeler link [F]. (The diagram shows [F]
the view seen from the top.)
8. Side guide

[E]
B602R913.WMF

Reassembly
Place the feeler link [A] between the feeler [B] and
the side guide. After installing the side guide, check
that the feeler link moves with the feeler.

[A] [B]
B602R914.WMF

B602 6 SM
STAPLER UNIT

1.4 STAPLER UNIT


Removal [A]
CAUTION: Do not remove the stapler [A] [B]
from the stapler unit. The stapler and the
staple holder [B] must be in their original
positions.

B602R915.WMF

1. Open the front door [C]. [C]


2. Release the lever [D] and pull out the
stapler unit.

Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
[D]

B602R989.WMF

3. Stapler knob [E]


4. Jam-release knob [F] ( x 1)
5. Front cover [G] ( x 3) [E]

[F]

[G] B602R990.WMF

SM 7 B602
STAPLER UNIT

6. Gear cover [A] (2 hooks)


7. Side cover [B] ( x 1)

[B]

[A]

B602R918.WMF

8. Gear [C] ( x 1), gear [D] ( x 1), and


timing belt [E]
[E]
9. Spacer (behind gear [C])
10. Gear (behind the spacer)
[C]
11. Belt guide [F]
( x 1, Spring [G] x 1,  [H] x 1) [D]
12. Tension bracket [I]
[G]
[H]

[I] [F]

B602R919.WMF

B602 8 SM
STAPLER UNIT

13. Timing belt [A]


14. Gear [B] ( x 1)
[B]

[A]

Booklet Fin-
B602R920.WMF

isher
B602

SM 9 B602
STAPLER UNIT

Adjusting the Stapler Gear Phase


If you remove the gears [A][C] and timing belt [B],
you must adjust the phase of the gears when you
reassemble the machine. These gears and the belt
decide when the staple holder sends a staple and
when the stapler bends the staple. The diagram
shows the view seen from the rear.

[A]

[B]

[C]
B602R917.WMF

1. By rotating the timing-belt gear [A],


align the hole in the staple-holder gear
[B] with the hole in the frame [C].
[A]

[C]

[B]

B602R921.WMF

B602 10 SM
STAPLER UNIT

2. To fix the gear in position, place a thin


tool [A] such as an Allen key or
screwdriver through the holes.

[A]

B602R922.WMF

3. By rotating gear [B], align the hole in cam


[C] with the hole in the frame [D].

Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
[B]

[D]
[C] B602R923.WMF

4. To fix the gear in position, place a thin


tool [E] such as an Allen key or
screwdriver through the holes.

[E] B602R924.WMF

SM 11 B602
STAPLER UNIT

5. Install the timing belt [A].

[A]

B602R925.WMF

6. Align the blue mark [B] on the gear with


the hole [C] in the frame, and install the [C]
gear.
NOTE: The stapler is in the home
position when the blue mark and [B]
the hole are aligned.

B602R926.WMF

7. Remove the two thin tools that you


placed earlier to secure the gears in [D]
position.
8. Install the spring [D], spacer [E], gears
[F][G], and timing belt [H].
9. Reassemble the whole stapler unit. [E]
[H]
10. Check the operation.

[F] [G]

B602R927.WMF

B602 12 SM
FOLDING UNIT

1.5 FOLDING UNIT


Removal
1. Front cover (! 1.2.1)
2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
3. Open the right cover [A].
4. Magnet bracket [B] ( x 2)
5. Inner cover [C] ( x 2)
[C]
6. Tension plate [D]

[A]

[D]

Booklet Fin-
[B]

isher
B602
B602R991.WMF

7. Rotate the shaft [F] clockwise and lower


the folder plate [E].
[E]
NOTE: You may have to rotate the
shaft about 20 times (7,200°).

[F]

B602R929.WMF

SM 13 B602
FOLDING UNIT

8. Timing belt [A] ( x 1, 1 spacer)


9. Two connectors [B][C]

[A]

[B] B602R930.WMF
[C]

10. Stapler unit [D] (! 1.4).


11. Folding unit [E] ( [F] x 3)

[D] [F]

[E]

B602R931.WMF

B602 14 SM
FOLDING UNIT

Adjusting the Folding Unit Gear Phase


If you remove gears from the folding unit, you must adjust the phase of the gears
when you reassemble the folding unit.

[B]
[C]

[D]
[A]

[E]

[F]

Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
B602R932.WMF

B602R994.WMF

1. Arrange the folding rollers [A] and cam [B] as shown in the diagram.
2. Install the gears as follows:
• Align either of the two “"” marks [C] on the cam gear with one of the “"”
marks [D] on the relay gear. The “"” marks on the relay gear must be at one
o'clock [D] and five o'clock [E] respectively.
• Align the other “"” mark on the relay gear [E] with the protruding plastic tab
(“#”) on the roller gear [F].
NOTE: When you have correctly installed the gears, the shorter teeth on the relay
gear [D] are at the upper right, and the longer teeth are at the lower left.

SM 15 B602
STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE

1.6 STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE


1.6.1 STACK TRAY UNIT

[A]

[B]

[B]

B602R934.WMF

[A]
1. Left top cover, tray upper cover (! 1.2.3)
2. Side guide (! 1.3)
3.  [A] x 2
4.  [B] x 5, 2 standoffs

5. Release the front lock [D] and the rear


lock [C] on the mechanical link of the
stack-tray stopper.

[C]

[D]

B602R935.WMF

B602 16 SM
STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE

6.  [A] x 3
7. Open the cable fasteners [B].
8. Release the cables [C].

[C]

[B]

Booklet Fin-
[A]

isher
B602
B602R936.WMF

9. Timing belt [D] ( x 1, 1 spacer)


10. 2 standoffs [E]

[E]
[D]

[F] B602R937.WMF

SM 17 B602
STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE

11.  [A] x 2
12. Slide the stack tray [B] to the rear and
lift it.

[B]

[A]

B602R938.WMF

1.6.2 JOGGER FENCE UNIT


CAUTION: Do not damage the jogger fences.
1. Stack tray (!1.6.1)
2. Place the stack tray unit on a level
surface. Check that the fences [A] are in
safe positions.

[A]
B602R939.WMF

B602 18 SM
STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE

3. Timing belt [A]


4.  [B] x 2

[B]
[A]

Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
B602R940.WMF

5. Jogger fence unit [C]


[C]

B602R941.WMF

SM 19 B602
STAPLER MOTOR UNIT

1.7 STAPLER MOTOR UNIT


1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
2. Stapler unit (! 1.4).
3. Connector holder [A] ( x 1)
4. Release all the cables (on the stapler
motor unit) [B] from the clamps.
5. Release the cables [D] ( x 2 [from
the stapler motor unit or from the
controller])
[D]

[B]

[A]

B602R942.WMF [E]
6. Cable fastener [E] ( x 2)

B602R944.WMF

7. Release the cables ( x 2)

[F]

B602R945.WMF

B602 20 SM
STAPLER MOTOR UNIT

8.  [A] x 3

[A]

Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
B602R946.WMF

9. Stapler motor unit [B] ( [C] x 1)

[C]

B602R947.WMF

[B]

SM 21 B602
TRANSPORT

1.8 TRANSPORT
1.8.1 TRANSPORT MOTOR
[B]
1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
2. Cable guide [A] ( x 1)
3. Transport motor (with the timing belt [A]
behind) [B] ( x 1,  x 3)

B602R948.WMF

1.8.2 TRANSPORT ROLLER

1. Front cover (! 1.2.1)


2. Upper cover (! 1.2.3)
3. Upper right cover (! 1.2.4)
4. Transport motor (!1.8.1)
5.  [A] x 1
6. Bushing [B] ( x 1)

[A] [B]
B602R949.WMF

B602 22 SM
TRANSPORT

[A]
7.  [A] x 2

B602R950.WMF

8. Gear [B] [D] [B]

Booklet Fin-
9. Gear (with the pin behind) [C]

isher
B602
10. Bushing [D] ( x 1)
11.  [E] x 1
[E]
12. Paper guide [F] [F] [C]

B602R951.WMF

13. Transport roller [G]


[G]

B602R952.WMF

SM 23 B602
STACK TRAY

1.9 STACK TRAY


1.9.1 STACK TRAY UPPER ROLLER

1. Jogger fence unit (! 1.6.2) [B]


2. Rotate the gear [A] counterclockwise
and lift the stack tray upper roller unit
[B].

[A]

B602R953.WMF

3. Release the stack tray upper roller [C]


from the shaft [D].

[C]

B602R954.WMF

[D]

B602 24 SM
STACK TRAY

[B]
4. Lift up the stack tray upper roller [A],
and push it down.
5. In the same manner, remove the [A]
other roller [B].

B602R955.WMF

1.9.2 STACK TRAY PADDLE

Booklet Fin-
1. Jogger fence unit (! 1.6.2)
[B]

isher
B602
2. Rotate the gear [A] counterclockwise
and lift the stack tray upper roller unit
[B].

[A]

B602R953.WMF

SM 25 B602
STACK TRAY

3. Push the bottom of the guide [A] and


release the rear side of it.

[A]

B602R956.WMF

4. Push the bottom of the guide [B] and


release the front side of it.

[B]
B602R957.WMF

5. Paddle [C]

[C]

B602R958.WMF

B602 26 SM
STACK TRAY

1.9.3 STACK TRAY LOWER ROLLER


Removal
1. Jogger fence unit (! 1.6.2)
2. Slide the jogger fences (the front
fence [A] to the front, the rear fence
[B] to the rear) and remove them.

[B]

[A]
B602R959.WMF

3. Tray stopper [C] (2 clips)


[C]

Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
B602R960.WMF

[D]
4. Paper guide [F] ( [D] x 1)
[F]

B602R961.WMF

SM 27 B602
STACK TRAY

5. Paper guide [A] ( [B] x 1) [B]

[A]

B602R962.WMF

6. Slide the bushing [C] ( x 2).

[C]
B602R963.WMF

7. Stack tray lower roller unit [E] ( [F] x [F]


4)

[E]

B602R964.WMF

B602 28 SM
STACK TRAY

8. Stack tray lower roller [A] [B]


9. Belt [B]

[A]

B602R965.WMF

Reassembly
When reassembling, align the positions of
the belt pawls [A][B]. [A]

Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
[B]

B602R966.WMF

SM 29 B602
CIRCUIT BOARD

1.10 CIRCUIT BOARD


1.10.1 CONTROLLER BOARD

1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)


2. Controller board [A]
(all 's,  x 1, 3 hooks)
NOTE: After replacing the controller
board, remove the NVRAM on
the old board and install it on the
new board.

B602R967.WMF
[A]

1.10.2 STAPLER HOME POSITION SENSOR BOARD

1. Stapler unit (! 1.4)


2. Guide [A] ( x 2)

[A]

B602R969.WMF

B602 30 SM
CIRCUIT BOARD

3. Turn the knob [B] until you see the


screw [C] (on the home position sensor
board) through the opening. The home [B]
position board moves to the front when
you turn the knob clockwise.
4.  [C] x 1

[C]

B602R970.WMF

Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
5. Home position board [D]
( x 1, 1 flat cable)

[D] B602R971.WMF

SM 31 B602
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER

1.11 PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER


1.11.1 PUNCH UNIT AND PUNCH UNIT MOTOR

1. Right top cover (! 1.2.3)


2. Chad box [A]
[A]

B602R993.WMF

3. Release the cables [B] ( x 1).

[B]

B602R973.WMF

B602 32 SM
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER

4. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1,  x 1)

[A]
B602R974.WMF

5. Remove the whole punch unit from the saddle


finisher.
6. Washer [B] ( x 1)

Booklet Fin-
7. Base cover [C] ( x 2,  [D] x 2) (The

isher
B602
diagram shows the view seen from the
bottom.)

[B]

[C]

B602R975.WMF

[D]

SM 33 B602
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER

[A]

8. Sensor unit [A] ( x 2,  x 3)

B602R976.WMF

9. Punch unit motor [B] ( x 2)

[B]

B602R978.WMF

1.11.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR


[A]
1. Remove the whole punch unit from
the saddle finisher.
2. Registration motor [A]
( x 1,  x 2)

B602R979.WMF

B602 34 SM
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER

1.11.3 CONTROLLER

1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)


2. Punch unit controller [A] (all 's,  x 2)
NOTE: After replacing the punch unit controller,
adjust the sensor voltage and specify the
punch type (! 1.11.7). After replacing
the EEPROM, make the controller
initialize the new EEPROM (! 1.11.7).

[A]

B602R980.WMF

Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
1.11.4 PHOTO SENSOR BOARD

1. Base cover (! 1.11.1)


2. Release the cables [A] [B]
3. Board cover [B] ( x 1)

[A]

B602R981.WMF

SM 35 B602
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER

[A]
4. Photo sensor board [A] ( x 1)
NOTE: After replacing the photo sensor
board, adjust the sensor voltage
(! 1.11.7).

B602R982.WMF

1.11.5 LED BOARD


[A]
1. Base cover (! 1.11.1)
2. LED board [A] ( x 1,  x 1)
NOTE: After replacing the LED board,
adjust the sensor voltage (!
1.11.7).

B602R983.WMF

B602 36 SM
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER

1.11.6 CHAD BOX FULL SENSOR BOARD AND LED BOARD

1. Punch unit controller (! 1.11.3)


2. Remove the whole punch unit from the
saddle finisher.
3. Protector [A] ( x 2)

[A]

B602R984.WMF

4. Sensor board [B] ( x 1)


NOTE: After replacing the sensor board,

Booklet Fin-
adjust the sensor voltage (!

isher
B602
1.11.7).

[B]

B602R985.WMF

5. LED board [C] ( x 1,  x 1)


NOTE: After replacing the LED board,
adjust the sensor voltage (!
1.11.7).

[C]

B602R986.WMF

SM 37 B602
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER

1.11.7 ADJUSTMENT AND INITIALIZATION

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]
Sensor Voltage
You make the controller adjust the LED
voltage of the sensors after you have
replaced any of the following units and
components:
• Punch unit controller (! 1.11.3)
• Photo sensor board (! 1.11.4)
B602R995.WMF
• LED board (! 1.11.5)
• Chad box full sensor board (! 1.11.6)
• Chad box LED board (! 1.11.6)
[H]
Perform as follows:
1. Set the DIP switch [B] on the punch-unit controller board as
follows: 1 = ON, 2 = OFF, 3 = ON, 4 = OFF [H].
2. Push SW1002 [C] or SW1003 [D]. The controller starts to adjust
the LED voltage of the sensors.
3. Wait until LED1001 [E], LED1002 [F], and LED1003 [G] light.
This indicates the controller ends the adjustment. [I] B602R996.WMF

4. Set the DIP switch as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4 =


OFF.

B602R997.WMF

B602 38 SM
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER

Punch Type [J]


After you replace the punch-unit controller, specify the punch type
as follows:
1. Set the DIP switch [B] on the punch-unit controller board as
follows: 1 = ON, 2 = ON, 3 = OFF, 4 = ON [J].
2. Push SW1002 [C] to select a punch type. As you push SW1002,
the three LEDs [E][F][G] change as shown in the table. These
LEDs indicate which punch type you have selected.
B602R998.WMF

Punch Type LED1001 LED1002 LED1003


2 holes Lights — —
2 or 3 holes Lights Lights —
4 holes* — Lights —
4 holes** — — Lights
** For the North Europe model
* Four the other models
3. Push SW1003 [D]. The LEDs blink. [K]

Booklet Fin-
4. Push SW1003 again. The controller stores the punch type in the

isher
B602
EEPROM.
5. Set the DIP switches as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4
= OFF [K].
B602R997.WMF

EEPROM [L]

After you replace the EEPROM [A], make the controller initialize the
new EEPROM as follows:
1. Set the DIP switch on the punch-unit controller board as follows:
1 = ON, 2 = ON, 3 = OFF, 4 = OFF [L].
2. Push SW1002 and SW1003 at the same time. The controller
starts initializing the EEPROM.
B602R999.WMF

3. Wait until LED1001, LED1002, and LED1003 light. This


indicates that the initialization ends. [M]
4. Adjust the sensor voltage (! Sensor Voltage).
5. Specify the punch type (! Punch Type)
6. Set the DIP switches as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4
= OFF [M].
B602R997.WMF

SM 39 B602
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

2. SERVICE TABLES
2.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
Punch Controller Board
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those described
in the table below.
SW1001
Mode Description
1 2 3 4
OFF OFF OFF OFF Default
ON OFF ON OFF Sensor voltage adjustment See 1.11.7.
ON ON OFF ON Punch type setting See 1.11.7.
ON ON OFF OFF EEPROM initialization See 1.11.7.

B602 40 SM
GENERAL LAYOUT

3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
3.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
8

9
20
10
19

18
11
17 12

Finisher
Booklet

B602
13
16
14

15

B602D901.WMF

1. Regular tray 11. Stack-tray transport roller


2. Jogger fence 12. Folding plate
3. Exit roller 13. Folder rollers
4. Paddle 14. Booklet exit roller
5. Stack tray stopper 15. Booklet tray
6. Transport roller 16. Booklet stopper
7. Cam* 17. Stapler
8. Punch* 18. Stack-tray lower roller
9. Punch base* 19. Stack-tray belt
10. Chad box* 20. Stack-tray upper roller
* Installed with the optional punch unit.

SM 41 B602
DRIVE

3.2 DRIVE 1

4
5

B602D902.WMF

1. Paddle motor 6. Rear fence motor


2. Transport motor 7. Front fence motor
3. Stapler slide motor 8. Lift motor
4. Stack-tray exit motor 9. Finisher controller
5. Stapler/folder motor

B602 42 SM
CONTROLLER

3.3 CONTROLLER

Finisher Punch (optional)

Motor
Controller board
Controller
board
Sensor
CPU (IC13)

EEP-ROM (IC12)

Motors
Communication IC
(IC11)
Clutches
EP-ROM (IC6)

Switches

Finisher
Booklet

B602
Regulator IC (IC1)

Sensors

Main unit
Controller board

B602D903.WMF

The finisher controller board communicates with the controllers of the optional
punch unit and the copier or printer. Listed below are the functions of important
ICs:
• CPU (IC13): Controls the sequence or the processing.
• EEP-ROM (CS12): Stores adjustment settings.
• Communication IC (IC11): Contains the program.
• EP-ROM (IC6): Communicates with other controllers.
• Regulator IC (IC1): Generates 5-volt power source.

SM 43 B602
STACK TRAY

3.4 STACK TRAY


3.4.1 SIMPLE OUTPUT
Mechanism
The exit roller transports the paper to the stack tray. The rollers and belts on the
stack tray transport the paper to the regular tray. The finisher operates like this
even when it handles one sheet of paper.

Phase 1: The transport motor drives the [A]


exit roller [A] to transport the paper to the
stack tray.

Phase 2: The paddle motor operates in


reverse to lower the stack-tray upper
roller [B] onto the paper.

Phase 3: The stack-tray exit motor


drives the stack-tray upper roller [B], the [B]
stack-tray lower roller [E], and the stack-
tray belts [C] to transport the paper to the
regular tray.

[C]
[D] [E]
B602D904.WMF

Stack-Tray Belt
The stack tray has two stack-tray belts. Each stack-tray belt has a paper support
[D] on its surface. As stack-tray exit motor rotates the stack-tray belts
counterclockwise (viewed from the machine front), the paper supports moves
counterclockwise. While moving, these paper supports transport the paper from the
stack tray to the regular tray.
For the home position of the stack-tray belt, see “Stack-Tray Belt Home Position” in
section 3.4.5.

B602 44 SM
STACK TRAY

3.4.2 SORT
The finisher can sort and stack the paper. To do this, it uses the stack tray and the
regular tray.

Phase 1: The exit roller transports the [B] [A]


paper on the stack tray [A]. The front
fence motor or the rear fence motor drives
the jogger fence [B] to push the paper to
the front or rear. The jogger fence handles
the next paper in the same way, and
pushes the paper in the same direction.
For the jogger fence mechanism, see
section 3.4.4.
[C]
Phase 2: When the number of papers on
the stack tray reaches one of the following
numbers, the stack-tray upper roller, the
stack-tray lower roller, and the stack-tray

Finisher
Booklet

B602
belts (! 3.4.1) transport the paper stack
[C] to the regular tray.

Paper Size Number of Sheets


300 mm and longer 10
Shorter than 300 mm 30

[D]
Phase 3: The finisher repeats Phase 1
and Phase 2 until it finishers handling the
first set of paper.

Phase 4: For the next set, the finisher


conducts phases 1 through 3 again. This [E] B602D905.WMF
time, the other jogger fence pushes the
paper in the opposite direction in phase 1.

Every time phase 3 ends, the finisher stacks one set of paper on the regular tray.
The diagram shows the paper stack [D] on the regular tray after the finisher stacks
four sets of paper. The arrow [E] indicates the direction of paper travel.

SM 45 B602
STACK TRAY

3.4.3 STACK
Paddle
[B]

[A] [C]

[D]

B602D906.WMF

B602D907.WMF

There are four paddles [C] above the stack tray. These paddles push down the
paper [B] to the stack-tray stopper [D]. This aligns the right edges of the paper
(viewed from the machine front). The paddle motor [A] drives these paddles.

Stack-Tray Stopper
The stack-tray stopper [E] remains standing (as shown in the diagram) while the
exit roller is transporting the paper to the stack tray.

Before the stack-tray upper and lower


rollers transport the paper to the stapler
(! 3.5 and 3.7), the stapler slide motor [E]
starts to move the stapler to the machine
front. The stapler pushes the mechanical
link of the stack-tray stopper (! 1.6.1).
This link pulls down the stack-tray
stopper.

B602D908.WMF

B602 46 SM
STACK TRAY

Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism

[A]

[B]

B602D906.WMF B602D909.WMF

[C]

Finisher
Booklet

B602
B602D910.WMF

The paddle motor [A] drives the stack-tray guide. The stack-tray guide stays away
from the paper (the upper position [B]) under either of the following conditions:
• When the exit roller transports the paper to the stack tray
• When the jogger fences adjust the direction of the paper
The paddle motor drives the stack-tray guide onto the paper (the lower position [C])
under either of the following conditions:
• When the stapler operates
• When the stack-tray upper roller, stack-tray lower roller, and stack-tray belt
transport the paper

SM 47 B602
STACK TRAY

Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism


The paddle motor [A] moves the timing [D] [E]
[C]
belts [B][G], which drive the cam [D]. The [B]
cam pushes up the first lever [C], which
[A]
pushes down the second lever [H]. The
second lever lowers the stack-tray guide
[I].

Home Position [F]


The actuator [F] moves with the cam [D].
The actuator interrupts the home position [G]
sensor [E] while the cam does not push
the first lever [C] (in other words, while the [K]
stack-tray guide is in its upper position).
[J] [H]

Stapler Switch
The second lever [H] moves with the
stapler-switch actuator [J]. When the first
lever pushes the second lever (in other
words, when the stack tray guide is in its
lower position), the actuator pushes the
stapler switch [K], turning it on. The stapler [I]
can operate only when this switch is on.

Safety Feature
The stapler switch, along with the stack-
B602D949.WMF
tray guide mechanism, works as a safety
feature. The stapler operates only when the stack-tray guide is in the lower position.
When the stack-tray guide is in this position, the user cannot access the stapler
through the opening between the stack-tray guide and the stack tray. Therefore,
staples do not injure the user.

B602 48 SM
STACK TRAY
[B]
3.4.4 JOGGER FENCE
[I]

[G]

[E]

[D]
[A] [C]

[H]

[F]

B602D911.WMF

Finisher
Booklet

B602
Action
There are two jogger fences: the front fence [A] and the rear fence [B]. These two
jogger fences adjust the position of the paper [C] on the stack tray.

Drive
The front-jogger-fence motor [D] and the rear-jogger-fence motor [E] drive the
jogger fences.

Home Position
There are two home position sensors: the front-fence home-position sensor [F] and
the rear-fence home-position sensor [G]. Each jogger fence is linked to an actuator
[H][I]. When the main switch is turned on, the front and rear fence motors drive the
jogger fences until each home position sensor detected its actuator.

SM 49 B602
STACK TRAY

Paper Position
To align the paper to the front of the ↑ Rear
stack tray, the jogger fences operate as [A]
follows:
• The rear fence [A] pushes the
paper [B] to the front each time the
exit roller transports the paper to [B]
the stack tray.
• The front fence [C] stays at the
front side.
[C]

Regular tray
↓ Front B602D912.WMF

↑ Rear
To align the paper to the rear side of the [D]
stack tray, the jogger fences operate as
follows:
• The rear fence [D] stays at the [E]
rear side.
• The front fence [E] pushes the
paper [F] to the rear each time the
exit roller transports the paper to [F]
the stack tray.
Regular tray

B602D913.WMF
↓ Front

B602 50 SM
STACK TRAY

3.4.5 PAPER OUTPUT

[A] [I]
[F]

[G]

B602D906.WMF
[H]
[B] [C]
B602D915.WMF

[E]
[J]

[K]

Finisher
Booklet

B602
B602D914.WMF

[D]

B602D916.WMF

Mechanism
The paper in the stack tray is transported to the regular tray as follows:
1. The paddle motor [A] moves the stack-tray guide to its lower position [G].
2. The stack-tray exit motor [B] drives the stack-tray upper roller [F], the stack-tray
lower roller [H], and the stack-tray belt [I]. The stack-tray belt has a pair of
paper supports [K] that push the paper [C] (! 3.4.1).
3. When the paper supports have left the home position, the controller starts to
count the pulses of the stack-tray exit motor.
4. When the pulse count reaches the predefined number (not adjustable), the
paddle motor moves the stack-tray guide to its upper position [J].
5. The paper supports keep pushing the paper to the regular tray [D].

Stack-Tray Belt Home Position


When the stack-tray belt is at its home position, one of the paper supports [K]
pushes the actuator of the home position sensor [E].

SM 51 B602
STAPLING

3.5 STAPLING
3.5.1 OVERVIEW
The finisher staples the paper as [B] [A]
follows:

Phase 1: The exit roller transports the


paper to the stack tray [A] until the
number of papers reaches a specified
number.

Phase 2: The jogger fences [B] adjust


the position of the paper. For the jogger
fence mechanism, see section 3.4.4. [D] [C]

Phase 3: The stapler [C] staples the


paper.

Phase 4: The stapled paper [D] is


transported to the regular tray.

When the finisher has conducted


phases 1 through 4, it starts the same
processing from phase 1.
B602D917.WMF

B602 52 SM
STAPLING

3.5.2 STAPLER
Mechanism [A]

B602D918.WMF B602D919.WMF

Finisher
Booklet

B602
B602D920.WMF

The stapler/folder motor [A] drives the stapler (! “Action and Drive” in section
3.5.3).

Stapler Switch
See “Stapler Switch” in section 3.4.3.

Sensors
There are three sensors inside the stapler:
• Staple Home Position Sensor: The staple home position sensor detects the
cam position.
• Staple Sensor: The staple sensor detects the staples in the cartridge.
• Staple Ready Sensor: The staple ready sensor detects the upper end of
the staple.
The staple home position sensor above is different from the home position sensor
on the bottom of the stapler (! 3.5.3).

SM 53 B602
STAPLING

3.5.3 POSITIONING

Front

[A]
[C]
[B]
[K]
[J] [D]
[I]
[E]

[F]

Rear [G]

[H]

B602D921.WMF

Action and Drive


There is one stapler [A] in the finisher. The stapler is on six rails [C][D][E][I]. The
rail [C], rail [D], rail [I], and rail [J] transmit the drive power:
• The rail [C] and rail [I] transmit the drive power of the stapler/folder motor.
The stapler uses this power to staple the paper (! 3.5.2).
• The rails [D] and [J] transmit the drive power of the staple slide motor [H].
This drive power moves the stapler to the front or rear.
In the diagram above, [B] is the paper stack on the stack tray.

Home Position and Ready Position


The home position sensor [G] is at the bottom of the stapler; the sensor blade [F] is
on the frame of the unit. The controller references the home position sensor to set
the stapler in its ready position. Note that the stapler is not in the home position
when it is ready. The controller sets the stapler in the ready position as follows:
1. You turn the main switch on (or you close the front door of the finisher).
2. The slide motor drives the stapler from the rear side to the front side.
3. The home position sensor detects the sensor blade. The slide motor stops.
4. The slide motor starts in reverse to drive the stapler to the rear side. The
controller starts to count the pulses of the motor.
5. When the pulse count reaches a predefined number (not adjustable), the
controller stops the slide motor. The stapler is in its ready position.

B602 54 SM
STAPLING

Staple Position
The controller counts the pulses of the stapler slide motor to calculates the
distance between the ready position (! Home Position and Ready Position) and
the staple position

Front-End One Staple [A]


1. Before the stapler slide motor starts, [C]
the stapler is in the ready position [C].
2. The stapler slide motor starts to slide
the stapler to the front. The controller [B]
counts the pulses of the stapler slide
motor.
3. While moving to the front, the stapler
lowers the stack-tray stopper [B] (! [D]
“Stack-Tray Stopper” in 3.4.3).
4. When the pulse count reaches the
B602D922.WMF
predefined number (not adjustable),
the controller stops the stapler slide motor. The stapler is in the stapling

Finisher
Booklet

B602
position [D].
5. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paler [A].

[F]
Rear-End One Staple
1. The stapler is in the ready position [F].
2. The stapler/folder motor drives the [E]
stapler. The stapler staples the paper.
The stapler does not move to the front.
The stack-tray stopper [E] keeps
standing

B602D923.WMF

SM 55 B602
STAPLING

[G]
Two Staples
1. Before the stapler slide motor starts, [H]
the stapler is in the ready position [G].
[J]
2. The stapler slide motor starts to slide
the stapler to the front. The controller
counts the pulses of the stapler slide
motor. [I]
3. While moving to the front, the stapler
lowers the stack-tray stopper [J].
B602D924.WMF
4. When the pulse count reaches the
predefined number (not adjustable), the controller stops the stapler slide motor.
The stapler is in the first stapling position [H].
5. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paler.
6. The stapler slide motor starts to slide the stapler to the front. The controller
counts the pulses of he stapler slide motor.
7. When the pulse cont reaches the predefined number (not adjustable), the
controller stops the stapler slide motor. The stapler is in the second stapling
position [I].
8. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paper.

Saddle Stitch
1. The stack-tray upper and lower rollers
transport the paper to the stapler unit
until the center of the paper [K]
reaches the stapling positions (!
3.7.4).
2. The stapler operates as described in
the previous paragraph (! Two
Staples).
B602D925.WMF
[K]

B602 56 SM
REGULAR TRAY

3.6 REGULAR TRAY

[A]

[B] [E]

[C] [F]

[G]
[D]

Finisher
Booklet

B602
[H]

[I]
B602D926.WMF

Action and Drive


The lift motor [I] drives the regular tray to adjust its height.

Ready Position
Before the stack-tray rollers and belts transport the paper to the regular tray, the lift
motor sets the regular tray in the ready position:
1. The lift motor lowers the regular tray. The controller references the lift motor
encoder sensor [D] to count how many turns the motor makes.
2. When the number of turns reaches a predefined number (not adjustable), the
controller stops the lift motor.
3. The lift motor operates in reverse, lifting the regular tray.
4. The paper height sensor [F] detects the edge [G] of the tray or the top of the
paper stack (!Paper Sensor). The lift motor stops.

SM 57 B602
REGULAR TRAY

Paper Sensor
As illustrated in the previous paragraph (! Ready Position), the paper height
sensor [F] can detect either the tray edge or the paper stack. Therefore, the signals
from the paper height sensor are not enough to let the controller know if any paper
is on the tray.
To find the paper on the regular tray, the controller references the paper sensor [E].
This sensor detects the paper but does not detect the tray.

Paper Full
While the stack-tray rollers and belts continue to transport the paper to the regular
tray, the ready position becomes lower (! Ready Position). When the number of
paper reaches about 500 sheets, the paper full sensor [B] is interrupted by its
actuator. When the number of paper reaches about 1,000 sheets, the lower limit
sensor [C] is interrupted by its actuator. To decide the paper-full status, the
controller considers these sensor signals and the paper sizes. The table lists the
paper sizes and the numbers of paper in the paper-full status.
Paper Size Number of Paper
A3, B4, DLT, LG About 500 sheets
Smaller sizes About 1,000 sheets

Fail Safe Feature


When the regular tray reaches its uppermost position, the upper limit sensor [A]
detects it. The finisher stops its operation.
The regular tray does not reach this position in normal operations. The upper limit
sensor works as a failsafe feature. If the regular tray fails to actuate the paper
height sensor [F] because of some hardware error, this failsafe feature works.

B602 58 SM
SADDLE STITCH

3.7 SADDLE STITCH


3.7.1 OVERVIEW

2
1

Finisher
Booklet

B602
B602D927.WMF

The saddle stitch process consists of the following four phases:


1. The stack tray aligns the paper (!3.7.2).
2. The stapler staples the paper (! 3.7.3).
3. The rollers and the sensor cooperate to transport the paper in the folding
position (! 3.7.4).
4. The folding plate and folder rollers cooperate to fold the paper and to transport
it to the booklet tray (! 3.7.5).

SM 59 B602
SADDLE STITCH

3.7.2 STACK TRAY


The stack tray operates as follows: [A] [B]
1. The stack-tray stopper aligns the right
edges of the paper in the stack tray (!
“Stack-Tray Stopper” in 3.4.1).
2. The jogger fences adjust the position of
the paper (! 3.4.4).
3. When a specified number of paper [A] is [C]
stacked, the paddle motor operates in
reverse to lower the stack-tray guide and
the stack-tray upper roller [B] onto the
paper.
4. The stack-tray exit motor drives the
stack-tray upper roller and lower roller to
transport the paper to the stapler unit.

B602D928.WMF

5. The booklet clutch [D] turns on. This


clutch transmits the driver power of the
transport motor to the stack-tray
transport roller [C]. [D]

B602D950.WMF

3.7.3 STAPLER

The stapler waits for the paper in the ready position, and operates when the paper
is set to the stapler positions (! 3.5.3). When the finisher is processing one sheet
of paper, the stapler does not staple the paper.

B602 60 SM
SADDLE STITCH

3.7.4 PAPER TRANSPORT

[A]

[B]

B602D931.WMF

Finisher
Booklet

B602
B602D930.WMF

The rollers and the sensor cooperate to transport the paper as follows:
1. When the leading edge of the paper stack reaches the folder home position
sensor [A], the controller starts to count the pulses of the transport motor.
2. When the pulse count reaches the number equivalent to the distance [B]
between the stapler and the folding plate, the transport motor stops. The center
of the paper is in the folding position.

SM 61 B602
SADDLE STITCH

3.7.5 PAPER OUTPUT


Folding Plate Mechanism

[E]
[A]
[F]
[B]

[C]

[D]

B602D932.WMF

B602D933.WMF

The folding plate is driven by the stapler/folder motor. The folding plate operates as
follows:
1. The folding plate waits for the stack-tray transport roller to transport the paper.
2. When the center of the paper is set in the folding position, the stapler/folder
motor drives the folding plate [C] and the folder rollers [D]. The folding plate
presses the paper between the folder rollers.
3. The folder rollers feed the paper about 10 mm, the folding plate returns to its
home position. The folder rollers keep feeding the paper.

Folding Plate Home Position


The home position of the folding plate is detected by the folder home position
sensor [E]. The actuator [F] is linked to the folding plate by way of cam [A] and
lever [B] (though they are separated in the diagram).
The sensor also detects the home position of the folder rollers (! Folder Rollers
Home Position).

B602 62 SM
SADDLE STITCH

Folder Rollers Mechanism


[F]

[A]
[G]

[B]

[C] [H]

[D]

[E]

Finisher
Booklet
B602D935.WMF

B602
B602D934.WMF

The folder rollers are driven by the stapler/folder motor. The folder rollers operate
as follows:
1. The folder rollers [B] feed the paper pressed by the folding plate.
2. The folder rollers and the booklet exit rollers [C] feed the paper [D] and
transport it to the booklet tray [E].

Folder Rollers Home Position


The home position of the folder rollers is detected by the folder home position
sensor [F]. The folder home position sensor blade [A] is linked to the folder rollers
by way of the gears [G][H] (though they are separated in the diagram).
The sensor also detects the home position of the folding plate (! Folding Plate
Home Position).

SM 63 B602
SADDLE STITCH

Shape of Folder Rollers

Folding Plate

[A]

B602D936.WMF

Viewed from the front or rear, each folder rollers is a half-circle [A] except both
ends and middle. This structure prevents the rollers from crumpling the paper stack.

B602 64 SM
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

3.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)


3.8.1 REGISTRATION
Slide Unit [C]
The slide unit includes the punch motor
[B]
[C], the punch [A], and paper edge and
size sensors [B]. This unit is driven by the
[A]
registration motor [E].

Home Position
The home position of the slide unit (in
other words, the home position of the
paper edge sensors) is detected by the
registration home position sensor [F].

B602D937.WMF

Finisher
Booklet

B602
Registration [F] [E]
Registration is executed as follows:
1. When the paper [D] comes from the main [G]
unit, the leading edge [I] of the paper is [D]
detected by the paper edge sensor [H].
2. The registration motor starts to operate.
The slide unit [G] moves to the front.

[H]

[I] B602D938.WMF

SM 65 B602
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

3. One of the paper size sensors [A] that


[A] [B]
corresponds to the paper size detects the
rear end [B] of the paper.
4. When the slide unit is set in place, the
registration motor stops its operations.

B602D939.WMF

5. When the paper edge sensor [C] detects the


trailing edge of the paper, the transport
motor [D] (of the finisher) stops.

[C]

B602D940.WMF
[D]

B602D941.WMF

B602 66 SM
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

3.8.2 PUNCH
Types of Punch Unit
There are four types:
• 2 holes
• 2 or 3 holes (The user can select 2-hole punching or 3-hole punching from
the operation panel or the printer driver.)
• 4 holes
• 4 holes
There are two 4-hole types: for the North Europe models and for the other models.

Drive
[A] [C]

[D]

Finisher
Booklet

B602
[B]

B602D942.WMF

The diagram shows the 2 or 3 holes type, which has five punch cams [B]: two of
them are for 2-hole punching and the other three are for 3-hole punching. The
punch motor [A] drives the punch cams.

Home Position
The controller uses two sensors, the home position sensor [D] and the encoder
sensor [C], to set the punch cams in the home position. The controller fine-adjusts
the home position by referencing the encoder sensor signals.

SM 67 B602
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

Two Holes and Four Holes


When the finisher punches holes, the punch motor drives all punches at the same
time.

Phase 1 [A]
1) The punch is in the home position.
1) 2) 3)
The punch home position sensor [A] [B]
is on. When the first sheet of paper is
set, the punch cam starts a forward
turn.
2) When the punch cam has made a
90-degree turn, a hole is punched.
3) When the punch cam has made a
180-degree turn, the punch comes
back to the home position. Note that
B602D943.WMF
the punch cam [B] is not in the
previous position.
Phase 2
4) 5) 6)
4) The punch is in the home position.
The punch home position sensor is
on. When the second sheet of paper
is set, the punch cam starts a
backward turn.
5) When the punch cam has made a 90-
degree turn, a hole is punched.
6) When the punch cam has made 180-
degree turn, the punch comes back
to its home position. Note that the B602D944.WMF

punch cam is not in the previous


position but in the same position as
the start fo phase 1.
Phase 3
• Phase 1 and phase 2 are alternately executed.

B602 68 SM
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

Two or Three Holes


There are five punches. When the finisher punches holes, the punch drives all
punches at the same time. But three of them do not reach the paper (when the
finisher is punching two holes), or two of them do not reach the paper (when the
finisher is punching three holes).

Phase 1

1) 2) 3) 1) 2) 3)

[A]

B602D946.WMF

[B]
B602D945.WMF Standby
Working

Finisher
Booklet

B602
Working punches operate as Standby punches operate as
follows: follows:
1) The punch is in the home 1) When the first sheet of paper is
position. The punch home set, the punch cam starts a
position sensor [A] is on. When forward turn.
the first sheet of paper is set, the 2) When the punch cam has made a
punch cam starts a forward turn. 90-degree turn, the punch is away
2) When the punch cam has made a from the paper.
180-degree turn, a hole is 3) When the punch cam has made a
punched. 180-degree turn, the punch is
3) When the punch cam has made a back to the home position.
180-degree turn, the punch
comes back to the home position.
Note that the punch cam [B] is not
in the previous position.

SM 69 B602
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

Phase 2

4) 5) 6) 4) 5) 6)

[A]

B602D948.WMF

[B]
B602D947.WMF Standby
Working

Working punches operate as Standby punches operate as


follows: follows:
4) The punch is in the home 4) When the next sheet of paper is
position. The punch home set, the punch cam starts a
position sensor [A] is on. When backward turn.
the next sheet of paper is set, the 5) When the punch cam has made a
punch cam starts a backward 90-degree turn, the punch is away
turn. from the paper.
5) When the punch cam has made a 6) When the punch cam has made a
90-degree turn, a hole is 180-degree turn. the punch
punched. comes back to the home position.
6) When the punch cam has made a
180-degree turn, the punch
comes back to the home position.
Note that the punch cam [B] is not
in the previous position but in the
same position as the start of
phase 1.

Phase 3
• Phase 1 and phase 2 are alternately executed.

B602 70 SM
B712
FAX OPTION TYPE 3245
B712
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
1.1 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW .......................................................................... 1
1.2 FAX UNIT ..................................................................................................... 3
Accessory Check ..................................................................................... 3
Installation Procedure .............................................................................. 4
When you use the hand set or an external telephone:............................. 5
1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT .................................................................................. 6
Accessory Check ..................................................................................... 6
Installation Procedure .............................................................................. 7
Do the procedures below for either single port or double ports................ 8
1.4 EXPANSION MEMORY ............................................................................. 11
1.5 HANDSET .................................................................................................. 12
Accessory Check ................................................................................... 12
Installation Procedure ............................................................................ 13

2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........................................14


2.1 NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT............................................. 14

3. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................15
3.1 ERROR CODES......................................................................................... 15
3.2 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES......................................... 27
3.3 FAX SC CODES......................................................................................... 30
3.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 30
3.3.2 SC1201.............................................................................................. 30
3.3.3 FAX SC CODE TABLE ...................................................................... 31

4. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................32
4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE..................................................................... 32
4.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION...................................... 32
Entering and Exiting SP Mode ............................................................... 32
SP Mode Button Summary .................................................................... 33
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ............ 34
Selecting the Program Number.............................................................. 34
4.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ............................................. 35
4.2 BIT SWITCHES .......................................................................................... 41
4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ........................................................................ 41
4.2.2 I-FAX SWITCHES.............................................................................. 51
4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES ....................................................................... 57
4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES........................................................ 63
4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES .................................................................................. 71
4.2.6 G3-2/3 SWITCHES............................................................................ 78
4.2.7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES ............................................................... 84

SM i B712
4.2.8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES........................................................... 84
4.2.9 IP FAX SWITCHES ........................................................................... 84
4.3 NCU PARAMETERS .................................................................................. 90
4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ......................................... 99
4.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ....................................................... 99
4.4.2 PARAMETERS ................................................................................ 100
4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES.................................................................. 103

5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS .......................................112


5.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................................. 112
5.2 BOARDS .................................................................................................. 113
5.2.1 FCU ................................................................................................. 113
5.2.2 MBU................................................................................................. 114
5.2.3 SG3 BOARD.................................................................................... 115
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH ................................................................................. 116
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION ............................................................................. 116
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission.................. 117
Immediate Transmission...................................................................... 117
JBIG Transmission............................................................................... 117
Adjustments ......................................................................................... 117
5.3.2 RECEPTION.................................................................................... 118
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES ...................................................... 119
5.4.1 MULTI-PORT................................................................................... 119
5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER .................................................................... 120
5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION ............................................. 121
Mail Transmission ................................................................................ 121
Mail Reception ..................................................................................... 122
Handling Mail Reception Errors ........................................................... 124
Secure Internet Reception ................................................................... 124
Transfer Request ................................................................................. 125
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode) ............................................................ 126
Subject and Level of Importance ......................................................... 126
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type .................................. 126
Subjects Displayed on the PC ............................................................. 126
E-mail Messages ................................................................................. 127
Message Disposition Notification (MDN).............................................. 128
Handling Reports ................................................................................. 129
5.5 IP-FAX ...................................................................................................... 130
What is IP-FAX? .................................................................................. 130
T.38 Packet Format ............................................................................. 130

SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................131
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................... 131
2. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS .......................................... 132
3. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. 133
4. IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................... 134
5. MACHINE CONFIGURATION .................................................................... 135

B712 ii SM
PROCEDURE OVERVIEW

1. INSTALLATION

Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
1.1 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW
WARNING
1. Never install telephone during a lightning storm.
2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is
specifically designed for wet locations.
3. Never touch un-insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
4. Use caution when you install or modify telephone lines.
5. Do not use the telephone (other than a cordless type) during an
electrical storm. There may be remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
6. Do not use a telephone or cellular phone to report a gas leak in the
vicinity of the leak.

CAUTION
1. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord before you
install the fax unit.
2. The fax unit contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if
a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same
or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacture. Discard
batteries in accordance with the manufacture’s instructions and local
regulations.

NOTE FOR AUSTRALIA


Unit must be connected to Telecommunication Network through a line
cord, which meets the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008.

SM 1 B712
PROCEDURE OVERVIEW

The flowchart shows the installation procedure.

Start

Do you install the No


expansion memory?

Yes

Install the fax unit


Install the expansion in the copier.
memory in the fax unit.

Do you install No
the handset?

Yes

Install the handset


in the copier.

Specify necessary
settings.

Do you install No
the optional G3 unit?
Check the operations.
Yes

Install the optional G3


unit in the fax unit.

End

B712I910.WMF

B712 2 SM
FAX UNIT

1.2 FAX UNIT

Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the following accessories:

Description Q’ty
1. Fax key ................................................................................2
2. Fax panel.............................................................................1
3. Stamp ..................................................................................1
4. G3 decal ..............................................................................1
5. Serial number decal.............................................................1
6. FCC decal (for North America model only) ..........................1
7. Cable holder ........................................................................1
8. Base bracket (for North America model only) ......................1
9. Core.....................................................................................1
10.Telephone line (for North America model only) ..................1

1 2 3

6
4

7
5

10
8 B712I906.WMF
9

NOTE: You need the cable holder when you install the optional handset (North
America model only).

SM 3 B712
FAX UNIT

Installation Procedure
CAUTION
Do the following before you install this option:
1. Print out all data in the printer buffer if there is a printer option in the
machine.
2. Press the operation switch to the standby mode. Make sure the power
LED is not lit. Then turn off the main switch and disconnect the power
cord and the network cable.

1. Remove the option cover [A]


( x 2).
2. Change the position of the jogger
switch [B] from "OFF" to "ON".
3. Carefully press down the MBU.
NOTE: Make sure that the MBU is
seated correctly. If not, SC819
occurs. [D]
4. Install the fax unit [C] ( x 2).
5. Attach the serial number decal [D] on [B] [A]
the rear cover.
6. Attach the FCC decal on the rear
[C]
cover (only for USA/Canada). B712I001.WMF

[F]
[E]
[H]
7. Remove the key cover [E]. Then
install one of the fax keys [F].
8. Remove the panel cover [G]. Then [G]
install the fax panel [H].

B603I902.WMF

B712 4 SM
FAX UNIT

9. Attach the G3 decal [A].

Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
[A]
B603I903.WMF

10. Install the stamp [B] to the ADF [C] (if installed).
11. Connect the telephone line to “LINE 1” jack at the
left of the machine.
12. Turn the main switch on. [C]

[B]

13. Make sure that the date and time are correctly set. G307I105.WMF

14. Enter the service mode. Then program the serial number into the fax unit (SP3-
102-000). You can find the serial number on the serial number decal (attached
to the machine in step 5).
When you use the hand set or an external telephone:
Put the core [A] to the telephone line for the handset or an
external telephone as shown.
[A]

B178I564.WMF

SM 5 B712
G3 INTERFACE UNIT

1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT


Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the following accessories:

Description Q’ty
1. G3 board..............................................................................1
2. Interface board ....................................................................1
3. CCU drive board ..................................................................1
4. Cable ...................................................................................1
5. Flat cable .............................................................................1
6. Clamp ..................................................................................1
7. Screw M3 x 6 .......................................................................10
8. Telephone line (for North America model only) ...................1

1 2 3 4

5
8 7 6 B713I101.WMF

B712 6 SM
G3 INTERFACE UNIT

Installation Procedure

Fax Option
Type 3245
CAUTION

B712
Do the following before you install this option:
1. Print out all data in the printer buffer if there is a printer option in the
machine.
2. Press the operation switch to the standby mode. Make sure the power
LED is not lit. Then turn off the main switch and disconnect the power
cord and the network cable.

[B]

[A]

B713I001.WMF

1. Remove the fax controller board [A] from the fax controller base [B] ( x 3, 
x 6).

SM 7 B712
G3 INTERFACE UNIT

Do the procedures below for either single port or double ports.


For Single Port Installation

[A]
[B] [G]

[F]

[E]

[D] [C]

B713I002.WMF

1. Install the CCU drive board [A] on the spacers ( x 4).


2. Install the flat cable [B] to the CCU drive board.
NOTE: Make sure that the blue side of the flat cable faces up.
3. Connect the G3 board [C] to the interface board [D].
4. Remove the "LINE 2" cover [E].
5. Attach the interface board and G3 board to the spacers ( x 6).
6. Connect the cable [F] to the interface board and CCU drive board.
7. Attach the clamp [G] and bind the cable [F] with this clamp.

B712 8 SM
G3 INTERFACE UNIT

For Dual Port Installation

Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
[A]
[B]
[H]

[G]

[E]

[F]

[D]

[C]
B713I003.WMF


1. Install the CCU drive board [A] on the spacers ( x 4).
2. Install the flat cable [B] to the CCU drive board.
NOTE: Make sure that the blue side of the flat cable faces up.
3. Connect the two G3 boards [C] to the interface board [D].
4. Remove the "LINE 2" cover [E] and the "LINE 3" cover [F].
5. Attach the interface board and two G3 boards to the spacers ( x 8).
6. Connect the cable [G] to the interface board and CCU drive board.
7. Attach the clamp [H] and bind the cable [G] with this clamp.

SM 9 B712
G3 INTERFACE UNIT

For Single and Dual Ports Installation


1. Install the fax-controller board to the fax-controller base ( x 6,  x 3).
2. Carefully press down the MBU.
NOTE: Make sure that the MBU is seated correctly. If not, SC819 occurs. Also
make sure that the jumper switch on the MBU is set to "ON".
3. Connect the flat cable to the fax controller board.
NOTE: Make sure that the blue side of the flat cable faces up.
4. Install the fax unit to the copier.
5. Turn the main switch on.
6. Enter the service mode. Set bit 1 of communication switch 16 to “1.”
7. Set bit 3 of communication switch 16 to "1" (SP1-104-023) if you installed two
G3 boards.
8. Turn the main switch off and on.
9. Print out the system parameter list. Then check that “G3” shows as an option.
10. Set up and program the items required for PSTN-2 communications.

B712 10 SM
EXPANSION MEMORY

1.4 EXPANSION MEMORY

Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
CAUTION
Do the following before you install this option:
1. Print out all data in the printer buffer.
2. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the
network cable.

[A]

B712I002.WMF

1. Install the expansion memory [A] into the memory slot.


2. Assemble the copier.
3. Print out the system parameter list, and check that the correct memory size is
shown (Fax SP6-101).

SM 11 B712
HANDSET

1.5 HANDSET
The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only.

Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the following accessories:

Description Q’ty
1. Handset cradle ....................................................................1
2. Handset ...............................................................................1
3. Screw M3 x 8 .......................................................................2
4. Screw M3 x 14 .....................................................................2

1 2
4 3

B433I909.WMF

B712 12 SM
HANDSET

Installation Procedure

Fax Option
Type 3245
[E]

B712
[A] [D]

[C]

[B]

[G]

[F]
B603I907.WMF

1. Make two holes [A] in the scanner left cover.


2. Attach the bracket [B] enclosed with the fax unit ( x 2) as shown.
3. Remove the label [C] from the handset cradle [D].
4. Attach the cradle to the bracket [B] ( x 2). Then replace the label [C].
5. Install the handset [E] on the cradle.
6. Connect the cable [F] to the “TEL” jack at the rear of the machine.
7. Attach the cable holder [G].
NOTE: The cable holder is distributed with the fax unit (not with the handset).
8. Fix the cable to the holder.

SM 13 B712
NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT

2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


2.1 NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT
1. When replacing the FCU board, remove the MBU board from the old FCU
board and install it on the new FCU board.
2. Adjust the date and time (UP — System Settings — Timer Setting — Set
Date/Set Time).
NOTE: 1) Do not turn off the battery switch (SW1).
2) Print out the system parameter list (SP6-101) to confirm the settings.

B712 14 SM
ERROR CODES

3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
3.1 ERROR CODES
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to
fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the
error code display and on the service report.

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action


0-00 DIS/NSF not detected within • Check the line connection.
40 s of Start being pressed • Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
• The machine at the other end may be
incompatible.
• Replace the NCU or FCU.
• Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
• If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.
0-01 DCN received unexpectedly • The other party is out of paper or has a jammed
printer.
• The other party pressed Stop during
communication.
0-03 Incompatible modem at the • The other terminal is incompatible.
other end
0-04 CFR or FTT not received • Check the line connection.
after modem training • Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
• Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
• Replace the FCU or NCU.
• The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to
another machine.
• If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be
a bad line.
Cross reference
• Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
• Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
• Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
0-05 Unsuccessful after modem • Check the line connection.
training at 2400 bps • Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.
• Replace the FCU or NCU.
• Check for line problems.
Cross reference
• See error code 0-04.

SM 15 B712
ERROR CODES

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action


0-06 The other terminal did not • Check the line connection.
reply to DCS • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
• Replace the NCU or FCU.
• The other end may be defective or incompatible;
try sending to another machine.
• Check for line problems.
Cross reference
• See error code 0-04.
0-07 No post-message response • Check the line connection.
from the other end after a • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
page was sent • Replace the NCU or FCU.
• The other end may have jammed or run out of
paper.
• The other end user may have disconnected the
call.
• Check for a bad line.
• The other end may be defective; try sending to
another machine.
0-08 The other end sent RTN or • Check the line connection.
PIN after receiving a page, • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
because there were too • Replace the NCU or FCU.
many errors
• The other end may have jammed, or run out of
paper or memory space.
• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
• The other end may have a defective
modem/NCU/FCU; try sending to another
machine.
• Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
• Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
• Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
• Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
0-14 Non-standard post message • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
response code received • Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try
sending to another machine.
• Noisy line: resend.
• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
• Replace the NCU or FCU.
Cross reference
• See error code 0-08.

B712 16 SM
ERROR CODES

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

Fax Option
Type 3245
0-15 The other terminal is not The other terminal is not capable of accepting the

B712
capable of specific following functions, or the other terminal’s memory
functions. is full.
• Confidential rx
• Transfer function
• SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
0-16 CFR or FTT not detected • Check the line connection.
after modem training in • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
confidential or transfer mode • Replace the NCU or FCU.
• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
• The other end may have disconnected, or it may
be defective; try calling another machine.
• If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a line
problem.
Cross reference
• See error code 0-08.
0-20 Facsimile data not received • Check the line connection.
within 6 s of retraining • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
• Replace the NCU or FCU.
• Check for line problems.
• Try calling another fax machine.
• Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first
line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
• Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
• Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
0-21 EOL signal (end-of-line) • Check the connections between the FCU, NCU, &
from the other end not line.
received within 5 s of the • Check for line noise or other line problems.
previous EOL signal • Replace the NCU or FCU.
• The remote machine may be defective or may
have disconnected.
Cross reference
• Maximum interval between EOLs and between
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
0-22 The signal from the other • Check the line connection.
end was interrupted for • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
more than the acceptable • Replace the NCU or FCU.
modem carrier drop time
• Defective remote terminal.
(default: 200 ms)
• Check for line noise or other line problems.
• Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Cross reference
• Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch
0A, bits 0 and 1

SM 17 B712
ERROR CODES

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action


0-23 Too many errors during • Check the line connection.
reception • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
• Replace the NCU or FCU.
• Defective remote terminal.
• Check for line noise or other line problems.
• Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.
• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or
rx error criteria.
Cross reference
• Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
• Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0
and 1
0-30 The other terminal did not • Check the line connection.
reply to NSS(A) in AI short • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
protocol mode • Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
• The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
• Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4
0-32 The other terminal sent a • Check the protocol dump list.
DCS, which contained • Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
functions that the receiving
machine cannot handle.
0-52 Polarity changed during • Check the line connection.
communication Retry communication.
0-55 FCE does not detect the • FCU firmware or board defective.
SG3-V34. • SG3-V34 firmware or board defective.
0-56 The stored message data • SG3-V34 firmware or board defective.
exceeds the capacity of the
mailbox in the SG3-V34.
0-70 The communication mode • The other terminal did not have a compatible
specified in CM/JM was not communication mode (e.g., the other terminal was
available a V.34 data modem and not a fax modem.)
(V.8 calling and called • A polling tx file was not ready at the other terminal
terminal) when polling rx was initiated from the calling
terminal.
0-74 The calling terminal fell back • The calling terminal could not detect ANSam due
to T.30 mode, because it to noise, etc.
could not detect ANSam • ANSam was too short to detect.
after sending CI. • Check the line connection and condition.
• Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-75 The called terminal fell back • The terminal could not detect ANSam.
to T.30 mode, because it • Check the line connection and condition.
could not detect a CM in • Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
response to ANSam
(ANSam timeout).

B712 18 SM
ERROR CODES

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

Fax Option
Type 3245
0-76 The calling terminal fell back • The called terminal could not detect a CM due to

B712
to T.30 mode, because it noise, etc.
could not detect a JM in • Check the line connection and condition.
response to a CM • Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
(CM timeout).
0-77 The called terminal fell back • The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to
to T.30 mode, because it noise, etc.
could not detect a CJ in • A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot pass
response to JM JM to the other end.
(JM timeout). • Check the line connection and condition.
• Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-79 The called terminal detected Check for line noise or other line problems.
CI while waiting for a V.21 If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back to
signal. T.30 mode.
0-80 The line was disconnected • The guard timer expired while starting these
due to a timeout in V.34 phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or low
phase 2 – line probing. signal level can cause these errors.
0-81 The line was disconnected If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:
due to a timeout in V.34 • Try making a call at a later time.
phase 3 – equalizer training. • Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
0-82 The line was disconnected dedicated tx parameters.
due to a timeout in the V.34 • Try increasing the tx level.
phase 4 – control channel
• Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
start-up.
If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
0-83 The line was disconnected
• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.
due to a timeout in the V.34
control channel restart • Try increasing the tx level.
sequence. • Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same
error is frequent when receiving from multiple
senders.
0-84 The line was disconnected • The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling in • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
V.34 phase 4 – control • If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
channel start-up.
0-85 The line was disconnected • The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling in • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
V.34 control channel restart. • If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
0-86 The line was disconnected • The other terminal was incompatible.
because the other terminal • Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
requested a data rate using
MPh that was not available
in the currently selected
symbol rate.
0-87 The control channel started • The receiving terminal restarted the control
after an unsuccessful channel because data reception in the primary
primary channel. channel was not successful.
• This does not result in an error communication.
0-88 The line was disconnected • Try using a lower data rate at the start.
because PPR was • Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
transmitted/received 9
(default) times within the
same ECM frame.

SM 19 B712
ERROR CODES

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action


2-11 Only one V.21 connection • Replace the FCU.
flag was received
2-12 Modem clock irregularity • Replace the FCU.
2-13 Modem initialization error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
• Update the modem ROM.
• Replace the FCU.
2-23 JBIG compression or • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
reconstruction error
2-24 JBIG ASIC error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
2-25 JBIG data reconstruction • JBIG data error
error (BIH error) • Check the sender’s JBIG function.
2-26 JBIG data reconstruction • Update the MBU ROM.
error (Float marker error)
2-27 JBIG data reconstruction
error (End marker error)
2-28 JBIG data reconstruction
error (Timeout)
2-29 JBIG trailing edge maker • FCU defective
error • Check the destination device.
2-50 The machine resets itself for • If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
a fatal FCU system error FCU.
2-51 The machine resets itself • If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
because of a fatal FCU.
communication error
2-53 Snd msg() in the manual • The user did the same operation many times, and
task is an error because the this gave too much load to the machine.
mailbox for the operation
task is full.
4-01 Line current was cut • Check the line connector.
• Check the connection between FCU and NCU.
• Check for line problems.
• Replace the FCU or the NCU.
4-10 Communication failed • Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs
because of an ID Code programmed correctly, then resend.
mismatch (Closed Network) • The machine at the other end may be defective.
or Tel. No./CSI mismatch
(Protection against Wrong
Connections)
5-10 DCR timer expired • Replace the FCU.
5-20 Storage impossible because • Temporary memory shortage.
of a lack of memory • Test the SAF memory.
5-21 Memory overflow • Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board
5-23 Print data error when • Test the SAF memory.
printing a substitute rx or • Ask the other end to resend the message.
confidential rx message • Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board.
5-25 SAF file access error • Replace the FCU or EXMEM board.
6-00 G3 ECM - T1 time out • Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.
during reception of facsimile • Replace the FCU or NCU.
data

B712 20 SM
ERROR CODES

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

Fax Option
Type 3245
6-01 G3 ECM - no V.21 signal • Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.

B712
was received • Replace the FCU or NCU.
6-02 G3 ECM - EOR was
received
6-04 G3 ECM - RTC not detected • Check the line connection.
• Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
• Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
• Replace the FCU or NCU.
6-05 G3 ECM - facsimile data • Check the line connection.
frame not received within 18 • Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
s of CFR, but there was no • Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
line fail
• Replace the FCU or NCU.
• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
Cross reference
• Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
6-06 G3 ECM - coding/decoding • Defective FCU.
error • The other terminal may be defective.
6-08 G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received • The other end pressed Stop during
in reply to PPS.NULL communication.
• The other terminal may be defective.
6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received • Check for a noisy line.
• Adjust the tx levels of the communicating
machines.
• See code 6-05.
6-10 G3 ECM - error frames still • Check for line noise.
received at the other end • Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the
after all communication dedicated tx parameter for that address).
attempts at 2400 bps • Check the line connection.
• Defective remote terminal.
6-21 V.21 flag detected during • The other terminal may be defective or
high speed modem incompatible.
communication
6-22 The machine resets the • Check for line noise.
sequence because of an • If the same error occurs frequently, replace the
abnormal handshake in the FCU.
V.34 control channel • Defective remote terminal.
6-99 V.21 signal not stopped • Replace the FCU.
within 6 s
13-17 SIP user name registration • Double registration of the SIP user name.
error • Capacity for user-name registration in the SIP
server is not sufficient.
13-18 SIP server access error • Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server.
• Defective SIP server.
14-00 SMTP Send Error Error occurred during sending to the SMTP server.
Occurs for any error other than 14-01 to 16. For
example, the mail address of the system
administrator is not registered.

SM 21 B712
ERROR CODES Rev. 05/2006

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action


14-01 SMTP Connection Failed Failed to connect to the SMTP server (timeout)
because the server could not be found.
• The IP address for the SMTP server is not stored
in the machine.
• The DNS IP address is not registered.
• Network not operating correctly.
• Defective PC that does file transfer
14-02 No Service by SMTP SMTP server operating incorrectly.
Service (421)
14-03 Access to SMTP Server Failed to access the SMTP server because the
Denied (450) access is denied.
• SMTP server operating incorrectly
• Defective PC that does file transfer
14-04 Access to SMTP Server SMTP server operating incorrectly
Denied (550)
14-05 SMTP Server HDD Full Failed to access the SMTP server because the HDD
(452) is full.
• SMTP Server hard disk full.
• Insufficient HDD space in the PC that does file
transfer
14-06 User Not Found on SMTP The user does not exist locally.
Server (551)
14-07 Data Send to SMTP Server Failed to access the SMTP server because the
Failed (4XX) transmission fails.
• SMTP server operating incorrectly
• Defective PC that does file transfer
14-08 Data Send to SMTP Server Failed to access the SMTP server because the
Failed (5XX) transmission fails.
• SMTP server operating incorrectly
• Defective PC that does file transfer
14-09 Authorization Failed for • POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization failed.
Sending to SMTP Server • Incorrect setting for file transfer
14-10 Addresses Exceeded Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the limit
for the SMTP server.
14-11 Buffer Full The send buffer is full so the transmission could not
be completed. Buffer is full due to using Scan-to-
Email while the buffer is being used send mail at the
same time.
14-12 Data Size Too Large Transmission was cancelled because the detected
size of the file was too large.
14-13 Send Cancelled Processing is interrupted because the user pressed
Stop.
⇒ 14-14 Internal processing error Update the Fax and FCU firmware to the latest
version.
14-15 Email parameter error Update the Fax and FCU firmware to the latest
version.
14-16 Email partitioning error Update the Fax and FCU firmware to the latest
version.
14-17 Defective authentication Update the Fax and FCU firmware to the latest
ticket version.

B712 22 SM
Rev. 05/2006 ERROR CODES

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action


Fax Option
Type 3245
14-18 Internal processing error Update the Fax and FCU firmware to the latest

B712
version.
14-30 MCS File Creation Failed Failed to create the MCS file because:
• The number of files created with other
applications on the Document Server has
exceeded the limit.
• HDD is full or not operating correctly.
• Software error.
14-31 UFS File Creation Failed UFS file could not be created:
• Not enough space in UFS area to handle both
Scan-to-Email and IFAX transmission.
• HDD full or not operating correctly.
• Software error.
14-32 Cancelled the Mail Due to Error detected with NFAX and send was cancelled
Error Detected by NFAX due to a software error.
14-33 No Mail Address For the Neither the mail address of the machine nor the mail
Machine address of the network administrator is registered.
14-50 Mail Job Task Error Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send was
cancelled:
• Address book was being edited during creation of
the notification mail.
• Software error.
14-51 UCS Destination Download Not even one return notification can be downloaded:
Error • The address book was being edited.
• The number for the specified destination does not
exist (it was deleted or edited after the job was
created).
14-60 Send Cancel Failed The cancel operation by the user failed to cancel the
send operation.
14-61 Notification Mail Send Failed All addresses for return notification mail failed.
for All Destinations
15-01 POP3/IMAP4 Server Not At startup, the system detected that the IP address
Registered of the POP3/IMAP4 server has not been registered
in the machine.
15-02 POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not been
Information Not Registered registered.
15-03 Mail Address Not Registered The mail address has not been registered.
15-10 DCS Mail Receive Error Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.
15-11 Connection Error The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be
found:
• The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server is
not stored in the machine.
• The DNS IP address is not registered.
• Network not operating correctly.
15-12 Authorization Error POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:
• Incorrect IFAX user name or password.
• Access was attempted by another device, such as
the PC.
• POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.

SM 23 B712
ERROR CODES Rev. 05/2006

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action


⇒ 15-13 Receive Buffer Full Occurs only during manual reception. Transmission
cannot be received due to insufficient buffer space.
The buffer is being used for mail send or Scan-to-
Email.
15-14 Mail Header Format Error The mail header is not standard format. For
example, the Date line description is incorrect.
15-15 Mail Divide Error The e-mail is not in standard format. There is no
boundary between parts of the e-mail, including the
header.
15-16 Mail Size Receive Error The mail cannot be received because it is too large.
15-17 Receive Timeout May occur during manual receiving only because
the network is not operating correctly.
15-18 Incomplete Mail Received Only one portion of the mail was received.
15-31 Final Destination for The format of the final destination for the transfer
Transfer Request Reception request was incorrect.
Format Error
15-39 Send/Delivery Destination The transmission cannot be delivered to the final
Error destination:
• Destination file format is incorrect.
• Could not create the destination for the file
transmission.
15-41 SMTP Receive Error Reception rejected because the transaction
exceeded the limit for the “Auth. E-mail RX” setting.
15-42 Off Ramp Gateway Error The delivery destination address was specified with
Off Ramp Gateway OFF.
15-43 Address Format Error Format error in the address of the Off Ramp
Gateway.
15-44 Addresses Over The number of addresses for the Off Ramp
Gateway exceeded the limit of 30.
15-61 Attachment File Format The attached file is not TIFF format.
Error
15-62 TIFF File Compatibility Error Could not receive transmission due to:
Resolution error
• Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi without
extended memory.
• Resolution is not supported.
Page size error
• The page size was larger than A3.
Compression error
• File was compressed with other than MH, MR, or
MMR.
15-63 TIFF Parameter Error The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be
received because the TIFF header is incorrect:
• The TIFF file attachment is a type not supported.
• The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.
• Software error.
15-64 TIFF Decompression Error The file received as an attachment caused the TIFF
decompression error:
• The TIFF format of the attachment is corrupted.
• Software error.

B712 24 SM
Rev. 05/2006 ERROR CODES

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action


Fax Option
Type 3245
15-71 Not Binary Image Data The file could not be received because the

B712
attachment was not binary image data.
15-73 MDN Status Error Could not find the Disposition line in the header of
the Return Receipt, or there is a problem with the
firmware.
15-74 MDN Message ID Error Could not find the Original Message ID line in the
header of the Return Receipt, or there is a problem
with the firmware.
15-80 Mail Job Task Read Error Could not receive the transmission because the
destination buffer is full and the destination could
not be created (this error may occur when receiving
a transfer request or a request for notification of
reception).
15-81 Repeated Destination Could not repeat receive the transmission because
Registration Error the destination buffer is full and the destination
could not be created (this error may occur when
receiving a transfer request or a request for
notification of reception).
15-91 Send Registration Error Could not receive the file for transfer to the final
destination:
• The format of the final destination or the transfer
destination is incorrect.
• Destinations are full so the final and transfer
destinations could not be created.
15-92 Memory Overflow Transmission could not be received because
memory overflowed during the transaction.
15-93 Memory Access Error Transaction could not complete due to a malfunction
of SAF memory.
15-94 Incorrect ID Code The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
transfer request, because the ID code in the
incoming e-mail did not match the ID code
registered in the machine.
15-95 Transfer Station Function The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
transfer because the transfer function was
unavailable.
22-00 Original length exceeded the Divide the original into more than one page.
maximum scan length Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower the
scan resolution if possible.
Add optional page memory.
22-01 Memory overflow while Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.
receiving Delete unnecessary files from memory.
Transfer the substitute reception files to an another
fax machine, if the machine’s printer is busy or out
of order.
Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk.
22-02 Tx or rx job stalled due to The job started normally but did not finish normally;
line disconnection at the data may or may not have been received fully.
other end Restart the machine.
22-04 The machine cannot store • Update the ROM
received data in the SAF • Replace the FCU.

SM 25 B712
ERROR CODES Rev. 05/2006

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action


⇒ 22-05 No G3 parameter • Defective FCU board or firmware.
confirmation answer
23-00 Data read timeout during Restart the machine.
construction Replace the FCU
25-00 The machine software • Update the ROM
resets itself after a fatal • Replace the FCU.
transmission error occurred
F0-xx V.34 modem error Replace the FCU.
F6-xx SG3-V34 modem error Update the SG3-V34 modem ROM.
Replace the SG3-V34 board.
• Check for line noise or other line problems.
• Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.

B712 26 SM
IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

3.2 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of
the network is causing the problem.

Communication
Item Action Remarks
Route
1. Connection with • Check that the LAN
the LAN cable is connected to
the machine.
• Check that the LEDs
on the hub are lit.
General LAN
2. LAN activity • Check that other
devices connected to
the LAN can
communicate through
the LAN.
1. Network settings on • Check the network • Is the IP address
the PC settings on the PC. registered in the
TCP/IP properties in
the network setup
correct? Check the IP
address with the
administrator of the
network.
2. Check that PC can • Use the “ping” • At the MS-DOS
Between IFAX connect with the command on the PC prompt, type ping then
and PC machine to contact the the IP address of the
machine. machine, then press
Enter.
3. LAN settings in the • Check the LAN • Use the “Network”
machine parameters function in the User
• Check if there is an IP Tools.
address conflict with • If there is an IP
other PCs. address conflict,
inform the
administrator.
1. LAN settings in the • Check the LAN • Use the “Network”
machine parameters function in the User
Between • Check if there is an IP Tools.
machine and e- address conflict with • If there is an IP
mail server other PCs. address conflict,
inform the
administrator.

SM 27 B712
IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

Communication
Item Action Remarks
Route
2. E-mail account on • Make sure that the • Ask the administrator
the server machine can log into to check.
the e-mail server.
• Check that the
account and
password stored in
the server are the
same as in the
machine.
Between
machine and e- 3. E-mail server • Make sure that the • Ask the administrator
mail server client devices which to check.
have an account in • Send a test e-mail
the server can with the machine’s
send/receive e-mail. own number as the
destination. The
machine receives the
returned e-mail if the
communication is
performed
successfully.
1. E-mail account on • Make sure that the PC • Ask the administrator
the Server can log into the e-mail to check.
server.
• Check that the
account and
password stored in
the server are the
same as in the
machine.
2. E-mail server • Make sure that the • Ask the administrator
client devices which to check.
have an account in • Send a test e-mail
Between e-mail the server can with the machine’s
server and send/receive e-mail. own number as the
internet destination. The
machine receives the
returned e-mail if the
communication is
performed
successfully.
3. Destination e-mail Make sure that the e-
address mail address is actually
used.
Check that the e-mail
address contains no
incorrect characters
such as spaces.

B712 28 SM
IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

Communication
Item Action Remarks

Fax Option
Route

Type 3245
Use the “ping” command • Ask the administrator

B712
4. Router settings
to contact the router. of the server to check.
Between e-mail
Check that other devices
server and
connected to the router
internet
can sent data over the
router.
1. Error message by • Check whether e-mail • Inform the
e-mail from the can be sent to another administrator of the
network of the address on the same LAN.
Between e-mail destination. network, using the
server and
application e-mail
internet software.
• Check the error e-mail
message.

SM 29 B712
FAX SC CODES

3.3 FAX SC CODES


3.3.1 OVERVIEW
When the FCU detects a Fax SC Code condition, it resets itself automatically
(default setting). This initializes the FCU without erasing files in the SAF memory or
resetting the switches.
For details on Fax SC Codes 1201, refer to the following sections.
If bit 7 of System Switch 1F is changed to “1”, when the FCU detects a Fax SC
Code condition, it displays the code on the display and stops working until the fax
unit is initialized using one of the following methods:
Hold down the “7” and “9” keys for more than
10 s.
Turn off the main power switch and turn it
back on.

3.3.2 SC1201
When the FCU detects an unrecoverable error in the SRAM, which requires a
complete SRAM initialization, the fax unit displays this SC Code and stops.
There is no way to recover from this error condition without a complete SRAM
initialization (all the user and service programmed data will be erased).
The possible causes are:
• SRAM backup battery defect, or SW1 on the MBU is at the “OFF” position.
• The SRAM on the MBU has a physical defect.
• SD card connection was loose.

B712 30 SM
FAX SC CODES

3.3.3 FAX SC CODE TABLE

Fax Option
Type 3245
Sys Switch Sys Switch

B712
Suggested
SC Code Description
Action 1F bit 7 = 0 1F bit 7 = 1
1001 FCU error Initialize the fax unit. Automatic SC Code
(See section 2.3.1.for reset display
the initialization
procedure)
1201 Unrecoverable FCU - Refer to section 2.3.2. “Service Call”
SRAM error display
1299 Software error Initialize the fax unit. Automatic
1305 reset
1310
1311
1312
1401
1405

SM 31 B712
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

4. SERVICE TABLES
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.

NOTE: The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or
ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile
or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or
memory for reading or writing data.

4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE


4.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes,
and adjust values.
Entering and Exiting SP Mode
 1. Press the Clear Mode key.

 2. Use the keypad to enter “107”.


 3. Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.
Fax SP 4. On the touch-panel, press Fax SP.
Exit 5. Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.

B712 32 SM
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

SP Mode Button Summary

Fax Option
Type 3245
Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.

B712
B750S500.WMF

 Opens all SP groups and sublevels.


 Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
‘ Not used for the Fax SP mode.
’ Enter the SP mode directly with the number keys if you know the SP number and then
press . (SP Mode must be highlighted before you can enter the number. Just press SP
Mode if it is not highlighted.)
“ Press twice to leave the SP mode return to the copy window to resume normal operation.
” Press any Group number to open a list of SP modes and titles for that group. For
example, to open the SP mode list for SP1-nnn , press Group1. If an SP has sublevels,
click the appropriate button to expand the list.
• Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group.
– Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
— Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.
˜ Press to move to the highlight to the previous or next selection in the list on the left.

SM 33 B712
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing


1) In the SP mode, select the test print and then press Copy Window.
2) Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings
(paper size, etc.) for the test print.
3) Press Start  to execute the test print.
4) Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat
from step 1.

Selecting the Program Number


Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Before you begin, refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to
adjust. ( 4.1.2)
2. Click the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP
that you want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display the
SP number that you want to open, and then press that number to expand the
list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item
that you want to set and press. The small entry box on the right is activated and
displays the default or the current setting below.

B712S501.WMF

NOTE: Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings. ( 4.1.2)
1. To enter a setting
• Press  to toggle between plus and minus and then use the keypad to enter
the appropriate number. The number you enter write over the previous
setting.
• Press  to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the
key press is ignored.)
• When you are prompted to complete the selection, press Yes.
2. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window.

B712 34 SM
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

4.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES

Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
SP1-XXX (Bit Switches) Section 3.2 Bit Switches
1 Mode No. Function
101 System Switch
001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for system settings
for the fax option
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
102 Ifax Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for internet fax
settings for the fax option
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
103 Printer Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for printer settings
for the fax option
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
104 Communication Switch
001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for communication
settings for the fax option
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
105 G3-1 Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol
settings of the standard G3 board
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
106 G3-2 Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol
settings of the optional G3 board
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
107 G3-3 Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol
settings of the optional G3 board
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
108 G4 Internal Switch
001 – 032 00 – 1F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
109 G4 Parameter Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
111 IP fax Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for optional IP fax
parameters
Section 4.2 Bit Switches

SP2-XXX (RAM Data)


2 Mode No. Function
101 RAM Read/Write
001 Change RAM data for the fax board directly.
Section 4.5 Service RAM Addresses
102 Memory Dump
001 G3-1 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the fax board.
Section 4.5 Service RAM Addresses

SM 35 B712
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

2 Mode No. Function


102 002 G3-2 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
board.
003 G3-3 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
board.
004 G4 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the SiG4 board.

103 G3-1 NCU Parameters


001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the standard
G3 board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters
104 G3-2 NCU Parameters
001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3
board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters
105 G3-3 NCU Parameters
001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3
board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters

SP3-XXX (Tel Line Settings)


3 Mode No. Function
101 Service Station
001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station.
002 Select Line Select the line type.
102 Serial Number
000 Enter the fax unit’s serial number.
103 PSTN-1 Port Settings
001 Select Line Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line.
If the machine is installed on a PABX line,
select “PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or
“PABX(FLASH)”.
002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the
G3-1 line.
003 Memory Lock If the customer does not want to receive
Disabled transmissions using Memory Lock on this
line, turn this SP on.
104 PSTN-2 Port Settings
001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. If
the machine is installed on a PABX line,
select “PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or
“PABX(FLASH)”.

002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-
2 line.

003 Memory Lock If the customer does not want to receive


Disabled transmissions using Memory Lock on this
line, change this SP to on.
004 Transmission If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
Disabled send any fax messages on the G3-2 line.

B712 36 SM
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

3 Mode No. Function

Fax Option
Type 3245
105 PSTN-3 Port Settings

B712
001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3-3 line. If
the machine is installed on a PABX line,
select “PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or
“PABX(FLASH)”.
002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-
3 line.
003 Memory Lock If the customer does not want to receive
Disabled transmissions using Memory Lock on this
line, change this SP to on.
004 Transmission If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
Disabled send any fax messages on the G3-3 line.
106 ISDN Port Settings
001 Select Line Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
002 PSTN Access Number
003 Memory Lock
Disabled
004 Transmission
Disabled
107 IPFAX Port Settings
001 H323 Port
002 SIP Port
003 RAS Port
004 Gatekeeper port
005 T.38 Port
006 SIP Server Port
007 IPFAX Protocol Select "H323" or "SAP".
Priority
201 FAX SW
001 – 032 00 – 1F

SP4-XXX (ROM Versions)


4 Mode No. Function
101 001 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version.
102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.
103 001 G3-1 ROM Version Displays the G3-1 modem version.
104 001 G3-2 ROM Version Displays the G3-2 modem version.
105 001 G3-3 ROM Version Displays the G3-3 modem version.
106 001 G4 ROM Version Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
107 001 Charge ROM Version Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

SM 37 B712
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

SP5-XXX (Initializing)
5 Mode No. Function
101 Initialize SRAM
000 Initializes the bit switches and user
parameters, user data in the SRAM, files in
the SAF memory, and clock.
102 Erase All Files
000 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.
103 Reset Bit Switches
000 Resets the bit switches and user
parameters.
104 Factory setting
000 Resets the bit switches and user
parameters, user data in the SRAM and
files in the SAF memory.

SP6-XXX (Reports)
6 Mode No. Function
101 System Parameter List
000 Touch the “ON” button to print the system
parameter list.
102 Service Monitor Report
000 Touch the “ON” button to print the service
monitor report.
103 G3 Protocol Dump List
001 G3 All Prints the protocol dump list of all
Communications communications for all G3 lines.
002 G3-1 (All Prints the protocol dump list of all
Communications) communications for the G3-1 line.
103 003 G3-1 Prints the protocol dump list of the last
(1 Communication) communication for the G3-1 line.
004 G3-2 Prints the protocol dump list of all
(All Communications) communications for the G3-2 line.
005 G3-2 Prints the protocol dump list of the last
(1 Communication) communication for the G3-2 line.
006 G3-3 Prints the protocol dump list of all
(All Communications) communications for the G3-3 line.
007 G3-3 Prints the protocol dump list of the last
(1 Communication) communication for the G3-3 line.
104 G4 Protocol Dump List
001 Dch + Bch 1 Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
002 Dch
003 Bch 1 Link Layer
004 Dch Link Layer
005 Dch +Bch 2
006 Bch 2 Link Layer

B712 38 SM
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

6 Mode No. Function

Fax Option
Type 3245
105 All Files print out

B712
000 Prints out all the user files in the SAF
memory, including confidential messages.
NOTE: Do not use this function, unless the
customer is having trouble printing
confidential messages or recovering
files stored using the memory lock
feature.
106 Journal Print out
001 All Journals The machine prints all the communication
records on the report.
002 Specified Date The machine prints all communication
records after the specified date.
107 Log List Print out
001 All log files These log print out functions are for
002 Printer designer use only.
003 SC/TRAP Stored
004 Decompression
005 Scanner
006 JOB/SAF
007 Reconstruction
008 JBIG
009 Fax Driver
010 G3CCU
011 Fax Job
012 CCU
013 Scanner Condition
108 IP Protocol Dump List
001 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all
communications for the IP fax line.
002 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the last
communication for the IP fax line.

SM 39 B712
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

SP7-XXX (Test Modes)


These are the test modes for PTT approval.
7 Function
101 G3-1 Modem Tests
102 G3-1 DTMF Tests
103 Ringer Test
104 G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)
105 G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)
106 G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)
107 G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)
108 G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)
109 Recorded Message Test
110 G3-2 Modem Tests
111 G3-2 DTMF Tests
112 G3-2 V34 (S2400baud)
113 G3-2 V34 (S2800baud)
114 G3-2 V34 (S3000baud)
115 G3-2 V34 (S3200baud)
116 G3-2 V34 (S3429baud)
117 G3-3 Modem Tests
118 G3-3 DTMF Tests
119 G3-3 V34 (S2400baud)
120 G3-3 V34 (S2800baud)
121 G3-3 V34 (S3000baud)
122 G3-3 V34 (S3200baud)
123 G3-3 V34 (S3429baud)
124 IG3-1 Modem Tests - Not used
125 IG3-1 DTMF Tests - Not used
126 IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used
127 IG3-1 V34 (S2800baud) - Not used
128 IG3-1 V34 (S3000baud) - Not used
129 IG3-1 V34 (S3200baud) - Not used
130 IG3-1 V34 (S3429baud) - Not used
131 IG3-2 Modem Tests - Not used
132 IG3-2 DTMF Tests - Not used
133 IG3-2 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used
134 IG3-2 V34 (S2800baud) - Not used
135 IG3-2 V34 (S3000baud) - Not used
136 IG3-2 V34 (S3200baud) - Not used
137 IG3-2 V34 (S3429baud) - Not used

SP9-XXX (Design Switch Mode)


9 Mode No. Function
702 Design Switch DFU

B712 40 SM
BIT SWITCHES

4.2 BIT SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
WARNING
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as “Not used”,
as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner
that is not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other
areas, such as Japan.

NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the
System Parameter List printed by the machine.

4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES


System Switch 00 SP No. 1-101-001
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Dedicated transmission Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated
parameter programming transmission parameters.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated
transmission parameters.
1 Confidential RX message print 1: Confidential RX messages can be printed out
out without the password. without the password. Use this bit if the customer
0: Disabled 1: Enabled forgot the password for the confidential messages.
Reset this bit to 0 after printing confidential RX
messages.
2 Technical data printout on the 1: Instead of the personal name, the following data
Journal are listed on the Journal for each G3
0: Disabled communication.
1: Enabled
e.g. 0000 32V34 288/264 L0100 03 04
(1) (2)(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
Note:
EQM and rx level are fixed at “FFFF” in tx mode.
The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at “00” for transmission records and
ECM reception records.

SM 41 B712
BIT SWITCHES

System Switch 00 SP No. 1-101-001


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
2 Rx level calculation

Example: 0000 32 V34 288/264 L 01 00 03 04

The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after “L” indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by -
16 to get the rx level.

In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.


So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB
3 Not used Do not change this setting.
4 Line error mark print When "1" is selected, a line error mark is printed on
0: OFF, 1: ON (print) the printout if a line error occurs during reception.
5 G3/G4 communication This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key
parameter display parameters (see below). This is normally disabled
0: Disabled because it cancels the CSI display for the user.
1: Enabled Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.
6 Protocol dump list output after This is only used for communication
each communication troubleshooting. It shows the content of the
0: Off transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always reset
1: On this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at “1”, the list is only
printed if there was an error during the
communication.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.

G3 Communication Parameters
Modem rate 336: 33600 bps 168: 16800 bps
312: 31200 bps 144: 14400 bps
288: 28800 bps 120: 12000 bps
264: 26400 bps 96: 9600 bps
240: 24000 bps 72: 7200 bps
216: 21600 bps 48: 4800 bps
192: 19200 bps 24: 2400 bps
Resolution S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm)
D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm)
SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)
Compression mode MMR: MMR compression
MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode)
JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)
Communication ECM: With ECM
mode NML: With no ECM

B712 42 SM
BIT SWITCHES

Width and A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction


reduction B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction

Fax Option
Type 3245
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction

B712
I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line 10: 10 ms/line
25: 2.5 ms/line 20: 20 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line 40: 40 ms/line
Note:
“40” is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI short
protocol.

System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 02 SP No. 1-101-003


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-3 Not used Do not change these settings.
4 File retention time 1: A file that had a communication error will not be
0: Depends on User Parameter erased unless the communication is successful.
24 [18(H)]
1: No limit
5 Not used Do not change this setting.
6-7 Memory read/write by RDS (0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
Bit 7 6 Setting (0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out,
0 0 Always disabled but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow
0 1 User selectable RDS operations to take place. RDS will
1 0 User selectable automatically be locked out again after a certain
1 1 Always enabled time, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note that
if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not switch
off until this time limit has expired.
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the
machine.

System Switch 03 SP No. 1-101-004


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Length of time that RDS is 00 - 99 hours (BCD).
to temporarily switched on when
7 bits 6 and 7 of System Switch This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System
02 are set to “User selectable” Switch 02 are set to “User selectable”.
The default setting is 24 hours.

System Switch 04 SP No. 1-101-005


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-2 Not used Do not change these settings.
3 Printing dedicated tx 1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is
parameters on Quick/Speed printed with the dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes
Dial Lists each).
0: Disabled The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed
1: Enabled dedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are
printed (the other 24 bytes have no use for service
technicians).

SM 43 B712
BIT SWITCHES

System Switch 04 SP No. 1-101-005


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

System Switch 05 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 06 SP No. 1-101-007


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Margin setting for Create 71 to 99 (BCD) %. This setting determines the
to Margin Transmission reduction ratio when the user uses the Create
7 Margin Transmission feature.
Default setting:1001 0011 (93%)

System Switch 07 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 08 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 09 SP No. 1-101-010


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Addition of image data from If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first
confidential transmissions on page of confidential messages will be printed on
the transmission result report transmission result reports.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1 Inclusion of communications on 0: Communications that reached phase C (message
the Journal when no image tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
data was exchanged. 1: Communications that reached phase A (call
0: Disabled 1: Enabled setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
This will include telephone calls.
2 Automatic error report printout 0: Error reports will not be printed.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1: Error reports will be printed automatically after
failed communications.
3 Printing of the error code on the 1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
error report
0: No 1: Yes
4 Not used Do not change this setting.
5 Power failure report 1: A power failure report will be automatically printed
0: Disabled 1: Enabled after the power is switched on if a fax message
disappeared from the memory when the power was
turned off last.
6 Conditions for printing the This switch becomes effective only when system
protocol dump list switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.
0: Print for all communications 1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol
1: Print only when there is a dump list only for communications with errors.
communication error

B712 44 SM
BIT SWITCHES

System Switch 09 SP No. 1-101-010

Fax Option
Type 3245
No FUNCTION COMMENTS

B712
7 Priority given to various types This bit determines which set of priorities the
of remote terminal ID when machine uses when listing remote terminal names
printing reports on reports.
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel.
number Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the
1: Dial label > Tel. number > Quick/Speed Dial number.
RTI > CSI

System Switch 0A SP No. 1-101-011


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Automatic port selection When "1" is selected, a suitable port is automatically
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled selected if the selected port is not used.
1-2 Not used Do not change these settings.
3 Continuous polling reception This feature allows a series of stations to be polled
0: Disabled 1: Enabled in a continuous cycle. This will continue until the
polling reception file is erased.
The dialing interval is the same as memory
transmission.
4 Dialing on the ten-key pad 0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the
when the external telephone is external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when
off-hook the external telephone is not by the machine, or if a
0: Disabled 1: Enabled wireless telephone is connected as an external
telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machine’s ten-key pad
when the handset is off-hook.
5 On hook dial 0: On hook dial is disabled.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
6-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings

System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 0E SP No. 1-101-015


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-2 Not used Do not change the settings.
3 Action when the external 0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the external
handset goes off-hook handset is off-hook. However, memory tx is not
0: Manual tx and rx operation possible.
1: Memory tx and rx operation 1: The display stays in standby mode even when
(the display remains the same) the external handset is used, so that other people
can use the machine for memory tx operation.
Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with this
setting.
4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

SM 45 B712
BIT SWITCHES

System Switch 0F SP No. 1-101-016


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Country/area code for This country/area code determines the factory
to functional settings (Hex) settings of bit switches and RAM addresses.
7 However, it has no effect on the NCU parameter
00: France 11: USA settings and communication parameter RAM
01: Germany 12: Asia addresses.
02: UK 13: Japan
03: Italy 14: Hong Kong Cross reference
04: Austria 15: South Africa NCU country code:
05: Belgium 16: Australia SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1
06: Denmark 17: New Zealand SP No. 2-104-001 for G3-2
07: Finland 18: Singapore SP No. 2-105-001 for G3-3
08: Ireland 19: Malaysia
09: Norway 1A: China
0A: Sweden 1B: Taiwan
0B: Switz. 1C: Korea
0C: Portugal 20: Turkey
0D: Holland 21: Greece
0E: Spain 22: Hungary
0F: Israel 23: Czech
10: Canada 24: Poland

System Switch 10 SP No. 1-101-017


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Threshold memory level for Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB
to parallel memory transmission N can be between 00 - FF(H)
7 Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB

System Switch 11 SP No. 1-101-018


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 TTI printing position Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information
0: Superimposed on the page that the customer considers to be important (G3
data transmissions).
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
1 TSI (G3) printing position Change this bit to 1 if the TSI (G3) overprints
0: Superimposed on the page information that the customer considers to be
data important.
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
2 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
3 TTI used for broadcasting 1: The TTI (TTI_1 or TTI_2) which is selected for all
0: The TTIs selected for each destinations during broadcasting.
Quick/Speed dial are used
1: The same TTI is used for all
destinations

B712 46 SM
BIT SWITCHES

System Switch 11 SP No. 1-101-018

Fax Option
Type 3245
No FUNCTION COMMENTS

B712
4 Type of TTI used for 1: The machine uses TTI_2 when the user dials the
transmission using the ten-key destination using the ten-key pad. It is also used for
pad polling transmission and manual transmission using
0: TTI_1 the handset.
1: TTI_2
5-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings.

System Switch 12 SP No. 1-101-019


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 TTI printing position in the main TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm
to scan direction Input even numbers only.
7 This setting determines the print start position for
the TTI from the left edge of the paper. If the TTI is
moved too far to the right, it may overwrite the file
number which is on the top right of the page. On an
A4 page, if the TTI is moved over by more than 50
mm, it may overwrite the page number.

System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings)


System Switch 14 - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 15 SP No. 1-101-022


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Not used Do not change the settings.
1 Going into the Energy Saver 1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver
mode automatically mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is
0: Enabled active even in the Energy Saver mode.
1: Disabled
2-3 Not used Do not change these settings.
4-5 Interval for preventing the If there is a file waiting for transmission, the machine
machine from entering Energy does not go to Energy Saver mode during the
Saver mode if there is a selected period.
pending transmission file. After transmitting the file, if there is no file waiting for
Bit 5 4 Setting transmission, the machine goes to the Energy Saver
0 0 1 min mode.
0 1 30 min
1 0 1 hour
1 1 24 hours
6 Print user codes on reports. 1: User codes are printed out on the Journal or
0: Disabled 1: Enabled other reports.
7 Not used Do not change this setting.

SM 47 B712
BIT SWITCHES

System Switch 16 SP No. 1-101-023


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Parallel Broadcasting 1: The machine sends messages simultaneously
0: Disabled using all available ports during broadcasting.
1: Enabled
1 Priority setting for the G3 line. This function allows the user to select the default G3
0: PSTN-1 > PSTN-2 or 3 line type. The optional SG3 unit(s) are required to
1: PSTN-2 or 3 > PSTN-1 use the PSTN-2 or 3 setting.
2-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

System Switch 17 - Not used (do not change these settings)


System Switch 18 - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 19 SP No. 1-101-026


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-5 Not used Do not change the settings.
6 Extended scanner page 0: After installing the memory expansion option, the
memory after memory option scanner page memory is extended to 4 MB from 2
is installed MB.
0: Disabled 1: If this bit is set to 1 after installing the memory
1: Enabled expansion option, the scanner page memory is
extended to 12 MB. But the SAF memory decreases
to 18 MB.
7 Special Original mode 1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form
0: Disabled or letterhead which has a colored or printed
1: Enabled background, change this bit to “1”. “Original 1” and
“Original 2” can be selected in addition to the “Text”,
“Text/Photo” and “Photo” modes.

System Switch 1A - Not used (do not change these settings)


System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 1D SP No. 1-101-030


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 RTI/CSI/CPS display 1: RTI/CSI/CPS is displayed on the top line of the
0: Disabled LCD panel during communication.
1: Enabled
1 Not used Do not change this setting.
2 Destination telephone number When "1" is selected, the destination telephone
display limitation number display is limited and redial is disabled.
0: OFF, 1: ON
3-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

B712 48 SM
BIT SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
System Switch 1E SP No. 1-101-031

B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Communication after the This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal
Journal data storage area has printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the
become full report (e.g., no paper).
0: Impossible 0: If the buffer memory of the communication
1: Possible records for the Journal has become full, fax
communications will become impossible, to prevent
overwriting the communication records before the
machine prints them out.
1: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal is full, fax communications
are still possible. But the machine will overwrite the
oldest communication records.
Cross Reference
Automatic Journal output - User switch 03 bit 7
Number of communication records for the
Journal:
200 records (standard)
1000 records (with the Function Upgrade unit
installed)
1 Action when the SAF memory 0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
has become full during the successfully scanned pages are transmitted.
scanning 1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
0: The current page is erased. the file is erased and no pages are transmitted.
1: The entire file is erased.
This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory
transmission.
2 RTI/CSI display priority This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is
0: RTI 1: CSI displayed on the LCD while the machine is
communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
3 File No. printing 1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4 Action when authorized If authorized reception is enabled but the user has
reception is enabled but stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the
authorized RTIs/CSIs are not machine will not be able to receive any fax
yet programmed messages.
If the customer wishes to receive messages from
0: All fax reception is disabled any sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to block
1: Faxes can be received if the messages from senders that do not include an RTI
sender has an RTI or CSI or CSI, change this bit to “1”, then enable
Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at “0 (default setting)”.
5 Address display priority in the 0: When the machine has both RTI/CSI and the
AI redial mode telephone number information, the machine displays
0: RTI/CSI RTI/CSI.
1: Telephone number 1: The machine always displays the telephone
number.
6-7 Not used Do not change the settings

SM 49 B712
BIT SWITCHES

System Switch 1F SP No. 1-101-032


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Not used Do not change the settings.
1 Report printout after an original 0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory
jam during SAF storage or if overflows during scanning, a report will be printed.
the SAF memory fills up Change this bit to “1” if the customer does not want
0: Enabled to have a report in these cases.
1: Disabled Memory tx – Memory storage report
Parallel memory tx – Transmission result report
2 Not used Do not change the settings.
3 Received fax print start timing 0: The machine prints each page immediately after
(G3 reception) the machine receives it.
0: After receiving each page 1: The machine prints the complete message after
1: After receiving all pages the machine receives all the pages in the memory.

4-6 Not used Do not change the factory settings.


7 Action when a fax SC has 0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other
occurred than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automatically
0: Automatic reset resets itself.
1: Fax unit stops 1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the
fax unit stops.

Cross Reference
Fax SC codes - See “Troubleshooting”

B712 50 SM
BIT SWITCHES

4.2.2 I-FAX SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
I-fax Switch 00 SP No. 1-102-001

B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
Original Width of TX This setting sets the maximum size of the original
Attachment File that the destination can receive. (Bits 3~7 are
reserved for future use or not used.)
0 A4 0: Off, 1: On
1 B4 NOTE: If more than one of these three bits is set to
2 A3 “1”, the larger size has priority. For example,
3-6 Reserved if both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to “1” then the
maximum size is “A3” (Bit 2).
7 Not used
When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the
receiving machine at the destination, so the sending
machine cannot make a selection for the receiving
capabilities (original width setting) of the receiving
machine. The original width selected with this switch
is used as the RX machine’s original width setting,
and the original is reduced to this size before
sending. The default is A4.
If the width selected with this switch is higher than
the receiving machine can accept, the machine
detects this and this causes an error.

I-fax Switch 01 SP No. 1-102-002


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
Original Line Resolution of TX This setting sets the maximum resolution of the
Attachment File original that the destination can receive.

0 200x100 Standard

1 200x200 Detail

2 200x400 Fine

3 Reserved

4 400 x 400 Super Fine

5-6 Reserved

0: Not selected, 1: Selected

NOTE: If more than one of these three bits is set to “1”, the higher resolution has priority.
For example, if both Bit 3 and Bit 2 are set to “1” then the resolution is set for
"Reserve (300 x 300)" (Bit 3).

SM 51 B712
BIT SWITCHES

I-fax Switch 01 SP No. 1-102-002


7 mm/inch
This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.
0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion)

When on (set to “1”), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.
There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters.
NOTE: Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver
to determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the
mm/inch selection is determined by the sender fax.

When this switch is Off (0):


• Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
• Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.
• Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
• Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.
When this switch is On (1):
• Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
• Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.
• Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are converted to inches.

I-fax Switch 02 SP No. 1-102-003


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 RX Text Mail Header Processing
This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails
when they are received.
0: Prints only text mail.
1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.

• When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the “From” address and
“Subject” address are printed as header information.
• When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this
setting is ignored and no header is printed.

1 Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error


This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail
attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs. This
allows the customer to see which documents have not reached their intended
destinations if sent to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example.
0: Prints 1st page only.
1: Prints all pages.

B712 52 SM
BIT SWITCHES

I-fax Switch 02 SP No. 1-102-003

Fax Option
Type 3245
No FUNCTION COMMENTS

B712
2-3 Text String for Return Receipt
This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the
transmission was received normally at the destination.

00: “Dispatched”
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
“dispatched” in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched
The “dispatched” string is included in the Subject string.
01: “Displayed”
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
“displayed” in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The “displayed” string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
NOTE: A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to
“00” (for “dispatched”) received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error.
If any setting other than “displayed” (01) causes a problem, change the setting
to “01” to enable normal sending of the Return Receipt.
4 Media accept feature
This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to
confirm a reception.
0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail
1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.
NOTE: Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer
mail, which contains the media accept feature field.
5-6 Not Used
7 Image Resolution of RX Text Mail
This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.
0: 200 x 200
1: 400 x 400
NOTE: The “1” setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to
have enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x
400 resolution.

SM 53 B712
BIT SWITCHES

I-fax Switch 03 SP No. 1-102-004


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Original Output at Transfer Station
This setting determines whether the original is output at the transfer station when it is
received from the sender that initiated the transfer transmission. This feature is the
same as for G3 transfer transmissions.
0: Received original not output at the transfer station.
1: Received original output. The original is printed after the transfer station has
transferred it to the destinations, so its output confirms that the original has been
transferred.
1 Transfer Result Report
This setting determines when a Transfer Result Report is generated and returned to
the transfer requestor.
0: Returns the report after each transfer.
1: Returns the report only if an error occurred during transfer.

2 Destination Error Handling for Reception Transfer Request


This setting restricts transfer transmission based on whether the final destinations are
correct or not.
0: The transfer station transmits to correct destinations only (addresses with no errors
in them).
1: If any address has an error in it, the transfer station transfers no transmissions and
returns a transfer transmission failure report to the requestor that initiated the
transfer.
There is no negotiation between the transfer initiator and the transfer station to
determine whether the final destination addresses are correct or not. This setting
determines whether or not the transfer station transfers the transmissions if there is a
mistake in even one of the final destination addresses.
3 Polling ID Check for Reception of Transfer Request
This setting determines whether the polling IDs of incoming transmissions are checked
to ensure that the polling IDs match.
0: Receives and transfers only messages that have matching polling IDs.
1: Receives and transfers all messages, even if the polling IDs do not match.
4-7 Not Used

B712 54 SM
BIT SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
I-fax Switch 04 SP No. 1-102-005

B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer
This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSI
of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI
or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the
Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determine
automatically the destination folder for each e-mail.
1-7 Not Used

I-fax Switch 05 SP No. 1-102-006


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients
Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive
transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.
For example:
"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a broadcast
to 9 destinations.
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded
1-7 Not Used

I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-007
I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-008

I-fax Switch 08 SP No. 1-102-009


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-7 Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception
This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF stores
fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and also holds
incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF memory
available falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received; received mail is then
stored on the mail server.
00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)
NOTE: The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the
amount of memory.

SM 55 B712
BIT SWITCHES

I-fax Switch 09 SP No. 1-102-010


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-3 Not used Do not change the settings
4-7 Restrict TX Retries This setting determines the number of retries when
connection and transmission fails due to errors.
01-F (1-15 Hex)

I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-011
I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-012
I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-013
I-fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-014
I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-015

I-fax Switch 0F SP No. 1-102-016


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files
This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or
output immediately.
0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.
1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.
1-7 Not used

B712 56 SM
BIT SWITCHES

4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
Printer Switch 00 SP No. 1-103-001

B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Page separation mark 0: No marks are printed.
0: Disabled 1: If a received page has to be printed out on two
1: Enabled sheets, an asterisk inside square brackets is printed
at the bottom right hand corner of the first sheet,
and a “2” inside a small box is printed at the top right
hand corner of the second sheet. This helps the
user to identify pages that have been split.
1 Repetition of data when the 0: The next page continues from where the previous
received page is longer than page left off.
the printer paper 1: The final few mm of the previous page are
0: Disabled repeated at the top of the next page. The amount of
1: Enabled repeated data depends on printer switch 04, bits 5
and 6.
2 Prints the date and time on This switch is only effective when user parameter 02
received fax messages - bit 2 (printing the received date and time on
0: Disabled received fax messages) is enabled.
1: Enabled 1: The machine prints the received and printed date
and time at the bottom of each received page.
3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Printer Switch 01 SP No. 1-103-002


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-2 Not used Do not change the settings.
3-4 Maximum print width used in These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer
the setup protocol switch 01 is “1”.
Bit 4 3 Setting
0 0 Not used
0 1 A3
1 0 B4
1 1 A4
5-6 Not used Do not change the settings.
7 Received message width 0: The machine informs the transmitting machine of
restriction in the protocol signal the print width depending on the paper size
to the sender available from the paper feed stations.
0: Disabled Refer to the table on the next page for how the
1: Enabled machine chooses the paper width used in the setup
protocol (NSF/DIS).
1: The machine informs the transmitting machine of
the fixed paper width which is specified by bits 3 and
4 above.

SM 57 B712
BIT SWITCHES

Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the
setup protocol
Available Paper Size Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)
A4 or 8.5" x 11" 297 mm width
B5 256 mm width
A5 or 8.5" x 5.5" 216 mm width
No paper available (Paper end) 216 mm width

Printer Switch 02 SP No. 1-103-003


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 1st paper feed station usage for 0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax
fax printing messages and reports.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled 1: The specified paper feed station will not be used
1 2nd paper feed station usage for printing fax messages and reports.
for fax printing
0: Enabled Note: Do not disable usage for a paper feed station
1: Disabled which has been specified by User Parameter Switch
2 3rd paper feed station usage 0F (15), or which is used for the Specified Cassette
for fax printing Selection feature.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
3 4th paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4 LCT usage for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
5-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

B712 58 SM
BIT SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
Printer Switch 03 SP No. 1-103-004

B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Length reduction of received 0: Incoming pages are printed without length
data reduction.
0: Disabled (Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4
1: Enabled to 7)
1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04,
bits 0 to 4)
1-3 Not used Do not change the settings
4 Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with switch 03-0 above)
to
7 If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the length of copy paper, the excess
portion will not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than the
length of copy paper, the excess portion will be printed on the next page.
The value of x is determined by these four bits.

Hex value of bits 4 to 7 x (mm)


0 0
1 1
and so on until
F 15

Default setting: 6 mm

Cross reference
Length reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0

Printer Switch 04 SP No. 1-103-005


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above.
to <Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm)
4 “N” is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.

Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm

0 0 1 0 0 20 mm (default setting)

1 1 1 1 1 155 mm

For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper


<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)
5 Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken
6 place.
 0 1   0 1
 =4 mm, =10 mm, =15 mm, = Not used
 0  0 1  1
7 Not used. Do not change the setting.

SM 59 B712
BIT SWITCHES

Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 06 SP No. 1-103-007


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Printing while a paper cassette
is pulled out, when the Just
Size Printing feature is Cross reference
enabled. Just size printing on/off – User switch 05, bit 5
0: Printing will not start
1: Printing will start if another
cassette has a suitable size of
paper, based on the paper size
selection priority tables.
1-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.

Printer Switch 07 SP No. 1-103-008


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Reduction for Journal printing 1: The Journal is reduced to 91% to ensure that
0: Off there is enough space in the left margin for punch
1: On holes or staples.
2-3 Not used. Do not change the settings.
4 List of destinations in the 1: Only destinations where communication failure
Communication Failure Report occurred are printed on the Communication Failure
for broadcasting Report.
0: All destinations
1: Only destinations where
communication failure occurred
5-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.

Printer Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)


Printer Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)

B712 60 SM
BIT SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
Printer Switch 0E SP No. 1-103-015

B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Paper size selection priority 0: A paper size that has the same width as the
0: Width received data is selected first.
1: Length 1: A paper size which has enough length to print all
the received lines without reduction is selected first.
1 Paper size selected for This switch determines which paper size is selected
printing A4 width fax data for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine has
0: 8.5" x 11" size both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.
1: A4 size
2 Page separation 1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page
0: Enabled separation to print a received fax message, the
1: Disabled machine does not print the message (Substitute
Reception is used).
After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the
machine automatically prints the fax message.
3 Printing the sample image on “Same size” means the sample image is printed at
to reports 100%, even if page separation occurs.
4 Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set to
0 0 The upper half “0” to enable this switch.
only Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on
0 1 50% reduction this feature.
in sub-scan only
1 0 Same size
1 1 Not used
5-6 Not used Do not change the settings.
7 Equalizing the reduction ratio 0: When page separation has taken place, all the
among separated pages pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.
(Page Separation) 1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected
0: Enabled paper size when page separation has taken place.
1: Disabled Other pages are printed without reduction.

SM 61 B712
BIT SWITCHES

Printer Switch 0F SP No. 1-103-016


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Smoothing feature (0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine
to Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting receives halftone images from other manufacturers
1 0 0 Disabled fax machines frequently.
0 1 Disabled
1 0 Enabled
1 1 Not used
2 Duplex printing 1: The machine always prints received fax
0: Disabled messages in duplex printing mode:
1: Enabled
3 Binding direction for Duplex
printing
0: Left binding
1: Top binding
4 Printing fax messages in user 1: The machine holds the received fax messages
code mode until the machine exits the restricted access mode
0: Enabled (user code or key counter).
1: Disabled If the machine enters the restricted access mode
again while printing fax messages, the machine
stops printing the machine exits the mode again.
5-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

B712 62 SM
BIT SWITCHES

4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
Communication Switch 00 SP No. 1-104-001

B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Compression modes available These bits determine the compression capabilities
to in receive mode to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30
1 Bit 1 0 Modes protocol.
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
2 Compression modes available These bits determine the compression capabilities
to in transmit mode to be used in the transmission and to be declared in
3 Bit 3 2 Modes phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
4 Not used Do not change the settings.
5 JBIG compression method: Change the setting when communication problems
Reception occur using JBIG compression.
0: Only basic supported
1: Basic and optional both
supported
6 JBIG compression method: Change the setting when communication problems
Transmission occur using JBIG compression.
0: Basic mode priority
1: Optional mode priority
7 Closed network (reception) 1: Reception will not go ahead if the ID code of the
0: Disabled other terminal does not match the ID code of this
1: Enabled terminal. This function is only available in NSF/NSS
mode.

SM 63 B712
BIT SWITCHES

Communication Switch 01 SP No. 1-104-002


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 ECM If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all
0: Off 1: On communications.
In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are
switched off automatically.
1 Not used Do not change the setting.
2 Wrong connection prevention (0,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
to method sending a fax message, if the last 8 digits of the
3 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting received CSI do not match the last 8 digits of the
0 0 None dialed telephone number. This does not work when
0 1 8 digit CSI manually dialed.
1 0 4 digit CSI (1,0) - The same as above, except that only the last
1 1 CSI/RTI 4 digits are compared.
(1,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
sending a fax message, if the other end does not
identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will always
go ahead.

Note: This function does not work when dialing is


done from the external telephone.
4-5 Not used Do not change the setting.
6 Maximum printable page length The setting determined by these bits is informed to
to available the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
7 Bit 7 6 Setting protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
0 0 No limit
0 1 B4 (364 mm)
1 0 A4 (297 mm)
1 1 Not used

Communication Switch 02 SP No. 1-104-003


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Burst error threshold If there are more consecutive error lines in the
0: Low 1: High received page than the threshold, the machine will
send a negative response.
The Low and High threshold values depend on the
sub-scan resolution, and are as follows.
Resolution 100 dpi200 dpi 400 dpi
3.85 l/mm 7.7 l/mm 15.4 l/mm
Low settings 6 12 24
High settings 12 24 48
1 Acceptable total error line ratio If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the
0: 5% 1: 10% acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.
2 Treatment of pages received 0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
with errors during G3 reception
0: Deleted from memory
without printing
1: Printed

B712 64 SM
BIT SWITCHES

Communication Switch 02 SP No. 1-104-003

Fax Option
Type 3245
No FUNCTION COMMENTS

B712
3 Hang-up decision when a 0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is
negative code (RTN or PIN) is received.
received during G3 immediate 1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it
transmission receives RTN or PIN.
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if
ECM is being used.
4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Communication Switch 03 SP No. 1-104-004


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Maximum number of page 00 - FF (Hex) times.
to retransmissions in a G3 This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
7 memory transmission Default setting - 03(H)

Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)


Communication Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 0A SP No. 1-104-011


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Point of resumption of memory 0: The transmission begins from the page where
transmission upon redialing transmission failed the previous time.
0: From the error page 1: Transmission begins from the first page, using
1: From page 1 normal memory transmission.
1-6 Not used Do not change the settings.
7 Emergency calls using 999 If this bit is at 1, the machine will not allow you to
0: Enabled 1: Disabled dial 999 at the auto-dialer. This is a PTT
requirement in the Hong Kong.

SM 65 B712
BIT SWITCHES

Communication Switch 0B SP No. 1-104-012


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Use of Economy Transmission These bits determine whether the machine uses the
during a Transfer operation to Economy Transmission feature when it is carrying
end receivers out a Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1 Use of Economy Transmission
during a Transfer operation to
the Next Transfer Stations
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
2 Use of Label Insertion for the This bit determines whether the machine uses the
End Receivers in a Transfer Label Insertion feature when it is carrying out a
operation Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
3 Conditions required for 0: When acting as a Transfer Station, the machine
Transfer Result Report will always send a Transfer Result Report back to
transmission the Requesting Station after completing the Transfer
0: Always transmitted Request, even if there were no problems.
1: Only transmitted if there was 1: The machine will only send back a Transfer
an error Result Report if there were errors during
communication, meaning one or more of the End
Receivers could not be contacted.
4 Printout of the message when When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station,
acting as a Transfer Station this bit determines whether the machine prints the
0: Disabled 1: Enabled fax message coming in from the Requesting
Terminal.
5 Action when there is no fax After the machine receives a transfer request, the
number in the programmed machine compares the last N digits of the
Quick/Speed dials which meets requesting terminal’s own fax number with all the
the requesting terminal’s own Quick/Speed dials programmed in the machine. (N
fax number is the number programmed in communication switch
0: Transfer is disabled 0C.)
1: Transfer is enabled 0: If there is no matching number programmed in
the machine, the machine rejects the transfer
request.
1: Even if there is no matching number programmed
in the machine, the machine accepts the transfer
request. The result report will be printed at the
transfer terminal, but will not be sent back to the
requesting terminal.
6-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

B712 66 SM
BIT SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
Communication Switch 0C SP No. 1-104-013

B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Number of digits compared to 00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits)
to find the requester’s fax number After the machine receives a transfer request, the
4 from the programmed machine compares the own telephone number sent
Quick/Speed Dials when acting from the Requesting Terminal with all Quick/Speed
as a Transfer Station Dials programmed in the machine, starting from
Quick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed Dials.
This number determines how many digits from the
end of the telephone numbers the machine
compares.
If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report to
the first Quick/Speed Dial that the machine
compared. If Quick Dial 01 is programmed, the
machine will send the report to Quick 01. If Quick
Dial 01 through 04 are not programmed and Quick
Dial 05 is programmed, the machine will send the
report to Quick 05.
Default setting - 05(H) = 5 digits
5-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Communication Switch 0D SP No. 1-104-014


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 The available memory 00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes
to threshold, below which ringing (e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)
7 detection (and therefore One page is about 24 kbytes.
reception into memory) is
disabled The machine refers to this setting before each fax
reception. If the amount of remaining memory is
below this threshold, the machine cannot receive
any fax messages.
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect
ringing signals and go into receive mode even if
there is no memory available. This will result in
communication failure.

Communication Switch 0E SP No. 1-104-015


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Minimum interval between 06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
to automatic dialing attempts (e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
7 This value is the minimum time that the machine
waits before it dials the next destination.

Communication Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings.)

SM 67 B712
BIT SWITCHES

Communication Switch 10 SP No. 1-104-017


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Memory transmission: 01 - FE (Hex) times
to Maximum number of dialing
7 attempts to the same
destination

Communication Switch 11 - Not used (do not change the settings.)

Communication Switch 12 SP No. 1-104-019


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Memory transmission: Interval 01 - FF (Hex) minutes
to between dialing attempts to the
7 same destination

Communication Switch 13 - Not used (do not change the settings.)

Communication Switch 14 SP No. 1-104-021


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Inch-to-mm conversion during 0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch
transmission format are transmitted without conversion.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF
memory in mm format are transmitted without
conversion.
Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF
memory, the fax unit always converts the data into
mm format.

1: The machine converts the scanned data or stored


data in the SAF memory to the format which was
specified in the set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before
transmission.
1-5 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
6 Available unit of resolution in For the best performance, do not change the factory
to which fax messages are settings.
7 received
Bit 7 Bit 6 Unit The setting determined by these bits is informed to
0 0 mm the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
0 1 inch protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
1 0 mm and inch
(default)
1 1 Not used

Communication Switch 15 - Not used (do not change the settings)

B712 68 SM
BIT SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
Communication Switch 16 SP No. 1-104-023

B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Not used Do not change the settings.
1 Optional G3 unit (G3-2) Change this bit to 1 when installing the first optional
0: Not installed G3 unit.
1: Installed
2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Communication Switch 17 SP No. 1-104-024


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 SEP reception 0: Polling transmission to another maker’s machine
0: Disabled using the SEP (Selective Polling) signal is disabled.
1: Enabled
1 SUB reception 0: Confidential reception to another maker’s
0: Disabled machine using the SUB (Sub-address) signal is
1: Enabled disabled.
2 PWD reception 0: Disables features that require PWD (Password)
0: Disabled signal reception.
1: Enabled
3-6 Not used Do not change the settings.
7 Action when there is no box Change this setting when the customer requires.
with an F-code that matches
the received SUB code
0: Disconnect the line
1: Receive the message
(using normal reception mode)

Communication Switch 18 - Not used (do not change the settings)


Communication Switch 19 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)

SM 69 B712
BIT SWITCHES

Communication Switch 1B SP No. 1-104-028


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Extension access code (0 to 7) If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol
to to turn V.8 protocol On/Off procedure, set this bit to “1” to disable V.8.
7 0: On Example: If “0” is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
1: Off to 1. When the machine detects “0” as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (Alternatively, if “3” is the PSTN access
code, set bit 3 to 1.)

Communication Switch 1C SP No. 1-104-029


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Extension access code (8 and Refer to communication switch 1B.
to 9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off Example: If “8” is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
1 0: On to 1. When the machine detects “8” as the first
1: Off dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (If “9” is the PSTN access code, use bit 1.)
2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)


Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)

B712 70 SM
BIT SWITCHES

4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
G3 Switch 00 SP No. 1-105-001

B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
1 communication (tx and rx) the communication.
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
0 0 Disabled the T.30 protocol.
0 1 Up to Phase B (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
1 0 All the time all through the communication. Make sure that you
1 1 Not used reset these bits after testing.
2 Monitor speaker during 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
memory transmission transmission.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3 Switch 01 SP No. 1-105-002


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-3 Not used Do not change the settings.
4 DIS frame length 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
5 Not used Do not change the setting.
6 CED/ANSam transmission Do not change this setting, unless the
0: Disabled communication problem is caused by the
1: Enabled CED/ANSam transmission.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.

G3 Switch 02 SP No. 1-105-003


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 G3 protocol mode used Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
0: Standard and non-standard only communicate with machines that send T.30-
1: Standard only standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
1-4 Not used Do not change the settings.
5 Use of modem rate history for 0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
transmission using start from the highest modem rate.
Quick/Speed Dials 1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
0: Disabled communications with the same machine when
1: Enabled determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
6 AI short protocol (transmission Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
and reception) Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
7 Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Manual for details about Short Preamble.

SM 71 B712
BIT SWITCHES

G3 Switch 03 SP No. 1-105-004


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
(Echo countermeasure) DIS frame twice.
0: 1 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
1: 2 second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
1 V.8 protocol in manual 0: The machine sends CED instead of ANSam
reception when starting a manual reception.
0: Disabled 1: The machine sends ANSam during manual
1: Enabled reception.
2 V.8 protocol 0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
0: Disabled Note:
1: Enabled Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
3 ECM frame size Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.
0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
4 CTC transmission conditions When using ECM, the machine will choose a slower
0: Ricoh mode (PPR x 1) modem rate after receiving PPR once (Ricoh mode)
1: ITU-T mode (PPR x 4) or four times (ITU-T mode).
This bit is ineffective in V.34 communications.
5 Modem rate used for the next 1: The machine’s tx modem rate will fall back before
page after receiving a negative sending the next page if a negative code is
code (RTN or PIN) received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
6 V.8 protocol in manual 1: The machine detects either ANSam or CED
transmission during manual transmission.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
7 Not used Do not change the setting.

G3 Switch 04 SP No. 1-105-005


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Training error detection 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
to threshold If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
3 below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

B712 72 SM
BIT SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
G3 Switch 05 SP No. 1-105-006

B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Initial Tx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) transmission.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you
0 0 1 1 7.2 k need to change this for specific receivers.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
0 1 1 0 14.4 k protocol should be disabled manually.
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k Cross reference
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used
4 Initial modem type for 9.6 k or These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
to 7.2 kbps. kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
5 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0 0 V.29
0 1 V.17
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
6-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3 Switch 06 SP No. 1-105-007


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Initial Rx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) reception.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
0 0 1 1 7.2 k during reception.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
0 1 1 0 14.4 k protocol should be disabled manually.
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k Cross reference
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used

SM 73 B712
BIT SWITCHES

G3 Switch 06 SP No. 1-105-007


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
4 Modem types available for The setting of these bits is used to inform the
to reception transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
7 Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting the machine in receive mode.
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29 If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29 disabled manually.
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, Cross reference
V.17/V.33 V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
Other settings - Not used

G3 Switch 07 SP No. 1-105-008


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
to (tx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting the modem and the telephone exchange.
0 0 None Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
0 1 Low specific receivers.
1 0 Medium
1 1 High Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
• Communication error
• Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

Note: This setting is not effective in V.34


communications.
2 PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
to (rx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between
3 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting the modem and the telephone exchange.
0 0 None
0 1 Low Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
1 0 Medium the following symptoms occurs.
1 1 High • Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.
• Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

Note: This setting is not effective in V.34


communications.
4 PSTN cable equalizer Keep this bit at “1”.
(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
5 PSTN cable equalizer Keep this bit at “1”.
(V.34 rx mode; External)
6- Not used Do not change the settings.
7

B712 74 SM
BIT SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

B712
G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3 Switch 0A SP No. 1-105-011


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Maximum allowable carrier These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
1 drop during image data time.
reception Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms) frequent.
0 0 200
0 1 400
1 0 800
1 1 Not used
2-3 Not used Do not change the settings.
4 Maximum allowable frame This bit set the maximum interval between EOL
interval during image data (end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
reception. between ECM frames from the other end.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is
frequent.
5 Not used Do not change the settings.
6 Reconstruction time for the first When the sending terminal is controlled by a
line in receive mode computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
0: 6 s 1: 12 s data after the local machine accepts set-up data and
sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
7 Not used Do not change the settings.

SM 75 B712
BIT SWITCHES

G3 Switch 0B SP No. 1-105-012


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Protocol requirements: Europe The machine does not automatically reset these bits
0: Disabled 1: Enabled for each country after a country code (System
1 Protocol requirements: Spain Switch 0F) is programmed.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Change the required bits manually at installation.
2 Protocol requirements:
Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
3 Protocol requirements: France
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
4 PTT requirements: Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
5 PTT requirements: France
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
6 Not used Do not change the settings.
7 DTS requirements : Germany Change this bit manually if required.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled

G3 Switch 0C SP No. 1-105-013


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Pulse dialing method P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0 0 Normal(P=N)
0 1 Oslo (P=10 - N)
1 0 Sweden
(N+1)
1 1 Not used
2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3 Switch 0D SP No. 1-105-014


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-1 Not used Do not change the settings.
2 Data rate threshold during V.34 The machine changes the modulation parameters in
to reception the MPh signal to lower the initial modem rate
5 Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting during V.34 reception. If this switch is set to “0111”,
0 0 0 0 Normal the machine lowers the initial speed one step, for
0 1 1 1 Lower by example, from 28,800 to 26,400 bps.
one step This switch reduces transmission time if the
1 1 1 1 Lower by machine frequently sends PPR signals during V.34
two steps reception.
6 Not used Do not change the settings.
7 B signal detection time for V.34 Change this switch only when there are
polling transmission communication errors during V.34 polling
0: 75 ms (default setting) transmission to a machine with a Panasonic
1: 65 ms modem.

G3 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)

B712 76 SM
BIT SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
G3 Switch 0F SP No. 1-105-016

B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Alarm when an error occurred If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each
in Phase C or later error communication, change this bit to “1”.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1 Alarm when the handset is off- If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the
hook at the end of handset is off-hook at the end of fax communication,
communication change this bit to “1”.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

SM 77 B712
BIT SWITCHES

4.2.6 G3-2/3 SWITCHES


These switches require an optional G3 interface unit.
G3-3 switches are the same as for G3-2 switches.
G3-2 Switch 00 SP No. 1-106-001
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-1 Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
communication (tx and rx) the communication.
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
0 0 Disabled the T.30 protocol.
0 1 Up to Phase B (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
1 0 All the time all through the communication. Make sure that you
1 1 Not used reset these bits after testing.
2 Monitor speaker during 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
memory transmission transmission.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
3-6 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3-2 Switch 01 SP No. 1-106-002


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-3 Not used Do not change the settings.
4 DIS frame length 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
5 Not used Do not change the setting.
6 CED/ANSam transmission Do not change this setting, unless the
0: Disabled communication problem is caused by the
1: Enabled CED/ANSam transmission.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.

G3-2 Switch 02 SP No. 1-106-003


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 G3 protocol mode used Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
0: Standard and non-standard only communicate with machines that send T.30-
1: Standard only standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
1-4 Not used Do not change the settings.
5 Use of modem rate history for 0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
transmission using start from the highest modem rate.
Quick/Speed Dials 1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
0: Disabled communications with the same machine when
1: Enabled determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
6 AI short protocol (transmission Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
and reception) Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
7 Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Manual for details about Short Preamble.

B712 78 SM
BIT SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
G3-2 Switch 03 SP No. 1-106-004

B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
(Echo countermeasure) DIS frame twice.
0: 1 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
1: 2 second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
1 Not used Do not change the settings.
2 V.8 protocol 0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
0: Disabled Note:
1: Enabled Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
3 ECM frame size Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.
0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
4 CTC transmission conditions 0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)
0: After one PPR signal mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
received modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
1: After four PPR signals condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
received (ITU-T standard) 9.6, and 7.2 kbps.

N Transmit ≤ NRe send

NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames


NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted

1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to


drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.

PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.

This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.


5 Modem rate used for the next 1: The machine’s tx modem rate will fall back before
page after receiving a negative sending the next page if a negative code is
code (RTN or PIN) received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
6 Not used Do not change the settings.
7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3-2 Switch 04 SP No. 1-106-005


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Training error detection 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
to threshold If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
3 below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

SM 79 B712
BIT SWITCHES

G3-2 Switch 05 SP No. 1-106-006


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Initial Tx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) transmission.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you
0 0 1 1 7.2 k need to change this for specific receivers.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
0 1 1 0 14.4 k protocol should be disabled manually.
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k Cross reference
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used
4 Initial modem type for 9.6 k or These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
to 7.2 kbps. kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
5 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0 0 V.29
0 1 V.17
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
6-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3-2 Switch 06 SP No. 1-106-007


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Initial Rx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) reception.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
0 0 1 1 7.2 k during reception.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
0 1 1 0 14.4 k protocol should be disabled manually.
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k Cross reference
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used

B712 80 SM
BIT SWITCHES

G3-2 Switch 06 SP No. 1-106-007

Fax Option
Type 3245
No FUNCTION COMMENTS

B712
4 Modem types available for The setting of these bits is used to inform the
to reception transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
7 Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting the machine in receive mode.
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29 If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29 disabled manually.
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, Cross reference
V.17/V.33 V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
Other settings - Not used

G3-2 Switch 07 SP No. 1-106-008


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
to (tx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting the modem and the telephone exchange.
0 0 None Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
0 1 Low specific receivers.
1 0 Medium
1 1 High Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
• Communication error
• Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

Note: This setting is not effective in V.34


communications.
2 PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
to (rx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between
3 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting the modem and the telephone exchange.
0 0 None
0 1 Low Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
1 0 Medium the following symptoms occurs.
1 1 High • Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.
• Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

Note: This setting is not effective in V.34


communications.
4 PSTN cable equalizer Keep this bit at “1”.
(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
5 PSTN cable equalizer Keep this bit at “1”.
(V.34 rx mode; External)
6-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

SM 81 B712
BIT SWITCHES

G3-2 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)


G3-2 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 0A SP No. 1-106-011


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Maximum allowable carrier These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
1 drop during image data time.
reception Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms) frequent.
0 0 200
0 1 400
1 0 800
1 1 Not used
2-3 Not used Do not change the settings.
4 Maximum allowable frame This bit set the maximum interval between EOL
interval during image data (end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
reception. between ECM frames from the other end.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is
frequent.
5 Not used Do not change the settings.
6 Reconstruction time for the first When the sending terminal is controlled by a
line in receive mode computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
0: 6 s 1: 12 s data after the local machine accepts set-up data and
sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
7 Not used Do not change the settings.

B712 82 SM
BIT SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
G3-2 Switch 0B SP No. 1-106-012

B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Protocol requirements: Europe The machine does not automatically reset these bits
0: Disabled 1: Enabled for each country after a country code (System
1 Protocol requirements: Spain Switch 0F) is programmed.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Change the required bits manually at installation.
2 Protocol requirements:
Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
3 Protocol requirements: France
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
4 PTT requirements: Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
5 PTT requirements: France
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
6 Not used Do not change the settings.
7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3-2 Switch 0C SP No. 1-106-013


No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Pulse dialing method P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0 0 Normal(P=N)
0 1 Oslo (P=10 - N)
1 0 Sweden
(N+1)
1 1 Not used
2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3-2 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)


G3-2 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)

SM 83 B712
BIT SWITCHES

4.2.7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES


The G4 internal switches (SW00 to 1F) are displayed but do not change these
settings.

4.2.8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES


The G4 parameter switches (SW00 to 0F) are displayed but do not change these
settings.

4.2.9 IP FAX SWITCHES


IP Fax Switch 00 SP No. 1-111-001
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Not used Do not change this setting.
IP Fax Transport
1
0: TCP, 1: UDP
IP Fax single port selection
2
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
IP Fax double ports (single data
3 port) selection
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
IP Fax Gatekeeper
4
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse Reverses the T30 bit signal.
5
0: LSB first, 1: MSB first
IP Fax max bit rate setting When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does
0: Not affected, 1: Affected not affect the value of the DIS/DCS.
6
When "1" is selected, the max bit rate affects
the value of the DIS/DCS.
IP Fax received telephone number When "0" is selected, fax data is received
confirmation without checking the telephone number.
0: No confirmation, 1: Confirmation When "1" is selected, fax data is received only
7 when confirming that the telephone number
from the sender matches the registered
telephone number in this machine. If this
confirmation fails, the line is disconnected.

B712 84 SM
BIT SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
IP Fax Switch 01 SP No. 1-111-002

B712
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
IP Fax delay level setting
Selects the acceptable delay level. Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Level 0 is the highest quality 0 0 0 0 Level 0
0-3 Default is "0000" (level 0). 0 0 0 1 Level 1
0 0 1 0 Level 2
0 0 1 1 Level 3

IP Fax preamble wait time setting Selects the preamble wait time.
[00 to 0f]
There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary switch
4-7 combination.
Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms
Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time)
The default is "0000" (00H).

IP Fax Switch 02 SP No. 1-111-003


No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 IP Fax bit signal reverse setting When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse
0: Maker code setting method is decided by the maker code.
1: Internal bit switch setting When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse
method is decided by the internal bit switch.
NOTE: When communicating between IP Fax
devices, LSB first is selected.)
1 IP Fax transmission speed setting Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax
0: Modem speed communication.
1: No limitation
2 SIP transport setting This bit switch sets the transport that has
0: TCP priority for receiving IP Fax data.
1: UDP This function is activated only when the
sender has both TCP and UDP.
3-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

SM 85 B712
BIT SWITCHES

IP Fax Switch 03 SP No. 1-111-004


No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Effective field limitation for G3
standard function information
0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS)
1 Switching between G3 standard
and G3 non standard
0: Enable switching
1: G3 standard only
2 AI modem rate function
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
3 ECM frame size selection at
transmitting
0: 256byte, 1: 64byte
4 DIS detection times for echo
prevention
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
5 CTC transmission selection When "0" is selected, the transmission
0: PPRx1 condition is decided by error frame numbers.
1: PPRx4 When "1" is selected, the transmission
condition is based on the ITU-T method.
6 Shift down setting at receiving
negative code
0: OFF, 1: ON
7 Not used Do not change this setting.

IP Fax Switch 04 SP No. 1-111-005


No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 TCF error threshold Sets the TCF error threshold level.
1 [00 to 0f]
2 The default is "1111" (0fH).
3
4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

B712 86 SM
BIT SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
IP Fax Switch 05 SP No. 1-111-006

B712
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
Modem bit rate setting for transmission
Sets the modem bit rate for transmission. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 0 1 2400 bps
0 0 1 0 4800 bps
0 0 1 1 7200 bps
0 1 0 0 9600 bps
0 1 0 1 12.0K bps
0-3 0 1 1 0 14.4K bps
0 1 1 1 16.8K bps
1 0 0 0 19.2K bps
1 0 0 1 21.6K bps
1 0 1 0 24.0K bps
1 0 1 1 26.4K bps
1 1 0 0 28.8K bps
1 1 0 1 31.2K bps
1 1 1 0 33.6K bps

Modem setting for transmission


Sets the modem for transmission.
The default is "00" (V29). Bit 5 Bit 4
0 0 V29
4-5 0 1 V17
1 0 V34
1 1 Not used

6-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

SM 87 B712
BIT SWITCHES

IP Fax Switch 06 SP No. 1-111-007


No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
Modem bit rate setting for reception
Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 0 1 2400 bps
0 0 1 0 4800 bps
0 0 1 1 7200 bps
0 1 0 0 9600 bps
0 1 0 1 12.0K bps
0-3 0 1 1 0 14.4K bps
0 1 1 1 16.8K bps
1 0 0 0 19.2K bps
1 0 0 1 21.6K bps
1 0 1 0 24.0K bps
1 0 1 1 26.4K bps
1 1 0 0 28.8K bps
1 1 0 1 31.2K bps
1 1 1 0 33.6K bps

Modem setting for reception


Sets the modem for reception. The default is "0010" (V27ter, V29).
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
0 0 0 1 V27ter
4-7 0 0 1 0 V27ter, V29
0 0 1 1 V27ter, V29, V33 (invalid)
0 1 0 0 V27ter, V29, V17
0 1 0 1 V27ter, V29, V17, V34

IP Fax Switch 07 SP No. 1-111-008


No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 TSI information Adds or does not add TSI information to
0: Not added, 1: Added NSS(S).
1 DCN transmission setting at T1 Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1
timeout timeout.
0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted
2 Not used Do not change this setting.
3 Hang up setting at DIS reception
disabled
0: No hang up
1: Hang up after transmitting DCN
4 Number of times for training Selects the number of times training is done at
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times the same bit rate.
5 Space CSI transmission setting at When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled.
no CSI registration When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is
0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted all spaces.
6-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

B712 88 SM
BIT SWITCHES

Fax Option
Type 3245
IP Fax Switch 08 SP No. 1-111-009

B712
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-1 T1 timer adjustment
Adjusts the T1 timer.
The default is "00" (35 seconds). Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 35 sec
0 1 40 sec
1 0 50 sec
1 1 60 sec

2-3 T4 timer adjustment


Adjust the T4 timer. Bit 3 Bit 2
The default is "00" (3 seconds). 0 0 3 sec
0 1 3.5 sec
1 0 4 sec
1 1 5 sec

4-5 T0 timer adjustment


Bit 5 Bit 4
0 0 75 sec
0 1 120 sec
1 0 180 sec
1 1 240 sec
Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets the interval between "setup" data
transmission and T.38 phase decision.

If your destination return is late on the network or G3 fax return is late, adjust the
longer interval timer.
The default is "00" (75 seconds).

6-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

IP Fax Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-010
IP Fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-011
IP Fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-012
IP Fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-013
IP Fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-014
IP Fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-015
IP Fax Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-016

SM 89 B712
NCU PARAMETERS

4.3 NCU PARAMETERS


The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units
that the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The
factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must be changed by
RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed using NCU Parameter
programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104 and 105 can be used, this
will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex code
unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.
NOTE: The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.
Change the fourth digit from “5” to “6” (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for the
settings for the first optional G3 interface unit and from “5” to “7” (e.g.
680700) for the settings for the second optional G3 interface unit.

B712 90 SM
NCU PARAMETERS

Fax Option
Type 3245
Address Function Unit Remarks

B712
680500 Country/Area code for NCU
parameters
Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this address, or
use the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001

Country/Area Decimal Hex


France 00 00 Hong Kong 20 14
Germany 01 01 South Africa 21 15
UK 02 02 Australia 22 16
Italy 03 03 New Zealand 23 17
Austria 04 04 Singapore 24 18
Belgium 05 05 Malaysia 25 19
Denmark 06 06 China 26 1A
Finland 07 07 Taiwan 27 1B
Ireland 08 08 Korea 28 1C
Norway 09 09 Greece 33 21
Sweden 10 0A Hungary 34 22
Switzerland 11 0B Czech 35 23
Portugal 12 0C Poland 36 24
Holland 13 0D
Spain 14 0E
Israel 15 0F
USA 17 11
Asia 18 12

680501 Line current detection time 20 ms Line current detection is


680502 Line current wait time disabled.
680503 Line current drop detect time Line current is not
detected if 680501
contains FF.
680504 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
(high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680505 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit disabled.
(low byte)
680506 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
(high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680507 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit disabled.
(low byte)
680508 PSTN dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680508 contains FF(H),
680509 PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW) the machine pauses for
68050A PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH) the pause time (address
68050B PSTN dial tone continuous tone time 68050D / 68050E).
68050C PSTN dial tone permissible drop time
Italy: See Note 2.
68050D PSTN wait interval (LOW)
68050E PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
68050F PSTN ring-back tone detection time 20 ms Detection is disabled if
this contains FF.
680510 PSTN ring-back tone off detection 20 ms
time

SM 91 B712
NCU PARAMETERS

Address Function Unit Remarks


680511 PSTN detection time for silent period 20 ms
after ring-back tone detected (LOW)
680512 PSTN detection time for silent period 20 ms
after ring-back tone detected (HIGH)
680513 PSTN busy tone frequency upper Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680514 PSTN busy tone frequency upper disabled.
limit (low byte)
680515 PSTN busy tone frequency lower Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680516 PSTN busy tone frequency lower disabled.
limit (low byte)
680517 PABX dial tone frequency upper limit Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
(high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680518 PABX dial tone frequency upper limit disabled.
(low byte)
680519 PABX dial tone frequency lower limit Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
(high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
68051A PABX dial tone frequency lower limit
(low byte)
68051B PABX dial tone detection time 20 ms If 68051B contains FF,
68051C PABX dial tone reset time (LOW) the machine pauses for
68051D PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH) the pause time (680520 /
68051E PABX dial tone continuous tone time 680521).
68051F PABX dial tone permissible drop time
680520 PABX wait interval (LOW)
680521 PABX wait interval (HIGH)
680522 PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms If both addresses contain
680523 PABX ringback tone off detection 20 ms FF(H), tone detection is
time disabled.
680524 PABX detection time for silent 20 ms If both addresses contain
period after ringback tone detected FF(H), tone detection is
(LOW) disabled.
680525 PABX detection time for silent 20 ms
period after ringback tone detected
(HIGH)
680526 PABX busy tone frequency upper Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680527 PABX busy tone frequency upper disabled.
limit (low byte)
680528 PABX busy tone frequency lower Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680529 PABX busy tone frequency lower disabled.
limit (low byte)
68052A Busy tone ON time: range 1 20 ms
68052B Busy tone OFF time: range 1
68052C Busy tone ON time: range 2
68052D Busy tone OFF time: range 2
68052E Busy tone ON time: range 3

B712 92 SM
NCU PARAMETERS

Address Function Unit Remarks

Fax Option
68052F Busy tone OFF time: range 3 20 ms

Type 3245
B712
680530 Busy tone ON time: range 4
680531 Busy tone OFF time: range 4
680532 Busy tone continuous tone detection
time
680533 Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ON-
OFF must be detected twice).

Tolerance (±)
Bit 1 0
0 0 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always
0 1 50% be kept at 0.
1 0 25%
1 1 12.5%

Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection


680534 International dial tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
upper limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680535 International dial tone frequency disabled.
upper limit (low byte)
680536 International dial tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
lower limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680537 International dial tone frequency disabled.
lower limit (low byte)
680538 International dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680538 contains FF,
680539 International dial tone reset time the machine pauses for
(LOW) the pause time (68053D /
68053A International dial tone reset time 68053E).
(HIGH)
68053B International dial tone continuous Belgium: See Note 2.
tone time
68053C International dial tone permissible
drop time
68053D International dial wait interval (LOW)
68053E International dial wait interval (HIGH)
68053F Country dial tone upper frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
limit (HIGH) FF(H), tone detection is
680540 Country dial tone upper frequency disabled.
limit (LOW)
680541 Country dial tone lower frequency If both addresses contain
limit (HIGH) FF(H), tone detection is
680542 Country dial tone lower frequency disabled.
limit (LOW)
680543 Country dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680543 contains FF,
680544 Country dial tone reset time (LOW) the machine pauses for
680545 Country dial tone reset time (HIGH) the pause time (680548 /
680549).
680546 Country dial tone continuous tone
time

SM 93 B712
NCU PARAMETERS

Address Function Unit Remarks


680547 Country dial tone permissible drop 20 ms
time
680548 Country dial wait interval (LOW)
680549 Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
68054A Time between opening or closing the 1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8.
DO relay and opening the OHDI SP2-103-012 (parameter
relay 11).
68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.
SP2-103-013 (parameter
12).
68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.
SP2-103-014 (parameter
13).
68054D Time between final OHDI relay 1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8.
closure and DO relay opening or SP2-103-015 (parameter
closing 14).
This parameter is only
valid in Europe.
68054E Minimum pause between dialed 20 ms See Note 3 and 8. SP2-
digits (pulse dial mode) 103-016 (parameter 15).
68054F Time waited when a pause is SP2-103-017 (parameter
entered at the operation panel 16). See Note 3.
680550 DTMF tone on time 1 ms SP2-103-018 (parameter
17).
680551 DTMF tone off time SP2-103-019 (parameter
18).
680552 Tone attenuation level of DTMF -N x 0.5 –3.5 SP2-103-020 (parameter
signals while dialing dBm 19).
See Note 5.
680553 Tone attenuation value difference -dBm x 0.5 SP2-103-021 (parameter
between high frequency tone and 20).
low frequency tone in DTMF signals The setting must be less
than –5dBm, and should
not exceed the setting at
680552h above.
See Note 5.
680554 PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation level -N x 0.5 –3.5 SP2-103-022 (parameter
after dialling dBm 21). See Note 5.
680555 ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level -dBm x 0.5 See Note 5
after dialling
680556 Not used Do not change the
settings.
680557 Time between 68054Dh (NCU 1 ms This parameter takes
parameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCU effect when the country
parameter 15) code is set to France.
680558 Not used Do not change the
setting.
680559 Grounding time (ground start mode) 20 ms The Gs relay is closed for
this interval.
68055A Break time (flash start mode) 1 ms The OHDI relay is open
for this interval.

B712 94 SM
NCU PARAMETERS

Address Function Unit Remarks

Fax Option
68055B International dial access code (High) BCD

Type 3245
For a code of 100:

B712
68055C International dial access code (Low) 68055B - F1
68055C - 00
68055D PSTN access pause time 20 ms This time is waited for
each pause input after
the PSTN access code. If
this address contains
FF[H], the pause time
stored in address 68054F
is used.
Do not set a number
more than 7 in the UK.
68055E Progress tone detection level, and Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm
cadence detection enable flags 0 0 0 -25.0
0 0 1 -35.0
0 1 0 -30.0
1 0 0 -40.0
1 1 0 -49.0

Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.


68055F Not used Do not change the
to settings.
680564
680565 Long distance call prefix (HIGH) BCD For a code of 0:
680566 Long distance call prefix (LOW) BCD 680565 - FF
680566 - F0
680567 Not used Do not change the
to settings.
680571
680572 Acceptable ringing signal frequency: 1000/ N SP2-103-003 (parameter
range 1, upper limit (Hz). 02).
680573 Acceptable ringing signal frequency: SP2-103-004 (parameter
range 1, lower limit 03).
680574 Acceptable ringing signal frequency: SP2-103-005 (parameter
range 2, upper limit 04).
680575 Acceptable ringing signal frequency: SP2-103-006 (parameter
range 2, lower limit 05).
680576 Number of rings until a call is 1 SP2-103-007 (parameter
detected 06).
The setting must not be
zero.
680577 Minimum required length of the first 20 ms See Note 4.
ring SP2-103-008 (parameter
07).
680578 Minimum required length of the 20 ms SP2-103-009 (parameter
second and subsequent rings 08).
680579 Ringing signal detection reset time 20 ms SP2-103-010 (parameter
(LOW) 09).
68057A Ringing signal detection reset time SP2-103-011 (parameter
(HIGH) 10).

SM 95 B712
NCU PARAMETERS

Address Function Unit Remarks


68057B Not used Do not change the
to settings.
680580
680581 Interval between dialing the last digit 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
and switching the Oh relay over to
the external telephone when dialing
from the operation panel in handset
mode.
680582 Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used

Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time


Bit 3 2 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used

Bits 4 to 7 - Not used


680583 Not used Do not change the
to settings.
6805A0
6805A1 Acceptable CED detection frequency BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
upper limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
6805A2 Acceptable CED detection frequency disabled.
upper limit (low byte)
6805A3 Acceptable CED detection frequency BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
lower limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
6805A4 Acceptable CED detection frequency disabled.
lower limit (low byte)
6805A5 CED detection time 20 ms Factory setting: 200 ms
± 20 ms
6805A6 Acceptable CNG detection frequency BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
upper limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
6805A7 Acceptable CNG detection frequency disabled.
upper limit (low byte)
6805A8 Acceptable CNG detection frequency BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
lower limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
6805A9 Acceptable CNG detection frequency disabled.
lower limit (low byte)
6805AA Not used Do not change the
setting.
6805AB CNG on time 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
6805AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting: 200 ms
6805AD Number of CNG cycles required for The data is coded in the
detection same way as address
680533.
6805AE Not used Do not change the
settings.

B712 96 SM
Rev. 10/2006 NCU PARAMETERS

Address Function Unit Remarks

Fax Option
6805AF Hz (BCD)

Type 3245
Acceptable AI short protocol tone If both addresses contain

B712
(800Hz) detection frequency upper FF(H), tone detection is
limit (high byte) disabled.
6805B0 Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (low byte)
6805B1 Acceptable AI short protocol tone Hz(BCD) If both addresses contain
(800Hz) detection frequency lower FF(H), tone detection is
limit (high byte) disabled.
6805B2 Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (low byte)
6805B3 Detection time for 800 Hz AI short 20 ms Factory setting: 360 ms
protocol tone
6805B4 PSTN: Tx level from the modem -N – 3 dBm SP2-103-002 (parameter
01).
6805B5 PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 –3.5 (dB)
level See Note 7.
6805B6 PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 –3 (dB)
level See Note 7.
6805B7 PABX: Tx level from the modem - dBm
6805B8 PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)
level
6805B9 PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)
level
6805BD Modem turn-on level (incoming -37-0.5N
signal detection level) (dBm)
6805BE Not used Do not change the
to settings.
6805C6
6805C7 Bits 0 to 3 – Not used.
Bit 4 – V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)
Bits 5 to 7 – Not used.
6805C8 Not used Do not change the
to settings.
6805D9
6805DA T.30 T1 timer 1s
6805E0 Maximum wait time for post 0: 12 s 1: Maximum wait time for
bit 3 message 1: 30 s post message
(EOP/EOM/MPS) can be
changed to 30 s.
Change this bit to “1” if
communication errors
occur frequently during
V.17 reception.
⇒ 6805E4 Threshold for ring level Change bit 2 to 1
bit 2 This will increase the threshold for
ringing level detection.
⇒ 6805E4 On-Hook impedance level Change bit 3 0 to 1
bit 3 This will decrease the on-hook
impedance level

SM 97 B712
NCU PARAMETERS Rev. 10/2006

Address Function Unit Remarks


6805E5 Signal Detection Method 80h: Auto Signal detection method,
Edge Auto Edge (80h) or Fixed
81h or 83h: Edge (81h or 83h).
Fixed Edge

NOTES
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only

RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)

If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are
changed.
680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address
680533.
68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10
pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time
specified by this parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone: – 0.5 x N680552/680554–3.5 dBm
– 0.5 x N680555 dBm
Low frequency tone: – 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) –3.5 dBm
– 0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm
NOTE: N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)
6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds
closing and Di opening
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds
opening and Di closing
7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI
short protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher
than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h.
8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the
sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and
68054E.

B712 98 SM
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable
parameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience
problems, store that terminal’s fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and
adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be
described.

4.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.


2. Press "Dest. Management" in the facsimile standby mode.
3. Press "Program/Change/Delete Quick Dial".
4. Select the destination key you want to program.

5. When the programmed dial


number is displayed, press
“Start”.
Make sure that the LED of
the Start button is lit as
green.

B712S104.WMF

6. The settings for the switch


01 are now displayed.
Press the bit number that
you wish to change.
7. To scroll through the
parameter switches, either:
8. Select the next switch:
press “Next”
B712S105.WMF
or
Select the previous switch: “Prev.” until the correct switch is displayed.
Then go back to step 6.
9. After the setting is changed, press “OK”.
10. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.

SM 99 B712
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

4.4.2 PARAMETERS
The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are
disabled.

Switch 01
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)
If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.

Switch 02
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Tx level If communication with a particular remote terminal
to Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting often contains errors, the signal level may be
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for
0 0 0 0 1 -1 communications with that terminal until the results
0 0 0 1 0 -2 are better.
0 0 0 1 1 -3
0 0 1 0 0 -4 If the setting is “Disabled”, the NCU parameter 01
: setting is used.
:
0 1 1 1 1 -15 Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
1 1 1 1 1 Disabled left.
5 Cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
to Bit 7 6 5 Setting frequencies because of the length of wire between
7 0 0 0 None the modem and the telephone exchange when
0 0 1 Low calling the number stored in this Quick/Speed Dial.
0 1 0 Medium
0 1 1 High Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
1 1 1 Disabled the following symptoms occurs.
• Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.
• Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the


left.

If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is


used.

B712 100 SM
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

Fax Option
Type 3245
Switch 03

B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Initial Tx modem rate If training with a particular remote terminal always
to Bit3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) takes too long, the initial modem rate may be too
3 0 0 0 0 Not used high. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these
0 0 0 1 2,400 bits.
0 0 1 0 4,800
0 0 1 1 7,200 For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit 4
0 1 0 0 9,600 must be changed to 0.
0 1 0 1 12,000
0 1 1 0 14,400 Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
0 1 1 1 16,800 left.
1 0 0 0 19,200
1 0 0 1 21,600 If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1 0 1 0 24,000 used.
1 0 1 1 26,400
1 1 0 0 28,800
1 1 0 1 31,200
1 1 1 0 33,600
1 1 1 1 Disabled

Other settings: Not used


4-5 Not used Do not change the settings.
6 AI short protocol Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
0: Off Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
1: Disabled If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
used.
7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Switch 04
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Inch-mm conversion before tx The machine uses inch-based resolutions for
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting scanning. If “inch only” is selected, the printed copy
0 0 Inch-mm may be slightly distorted at the other end if that
conversion machine uses mm-based resolutions.
available
0 1 Inch only If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1 0 Not used used.
1 1 Disabled
2 DIS/NSF detection method (0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are
to Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of
3 0 0 First DIS or transmission. The machine will then wait for the
NSF second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
0 1 Second DIS or
NSF If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1 0 Not used used.
1 1 Disabled

SM 101 B712
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

Switch 04
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
4 V.8 protocol If transmissions to a specific destination always end
0: Off at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),
1: Disabled disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
used.
5 Compression modes available This bit determines the capabilities that are informed
in transmit mode to the other terminal during transmission.
0: MH only If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1: Disabled used.
6 ECM during transmission For example, if ECM is switched on but is not
7 Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use
0 0 Off the (0, 0) setting.
0 1 On Note that V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression
1 0 Not used are automatically disabled if ECM is disabled.
1 1 Disabled If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
used.

Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)


Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Switch 10 - Not used (do not change the settings)

B712 102 SM
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
CAUTION
Do not change the settings which are marked as “Not used” or “Read only.”

680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)


680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
680002(H) - Year (BCD)
680003(H) - Month (BCD)
680004(H) - Day (BCD)
680006 to 680015(H) - Machine’s serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches
680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches
680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches
680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches
680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches
6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches
6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used
6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used
6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)
Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Reception time printing
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: CIL printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 6: TID printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 7: Not used
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report
printout)
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Polling clear report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On

SM 103 B712
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report


printout)
Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output
0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: Indicated
Bit 5: Include sender’s name on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On
6800D5(H) - User parameter switch 05 (SWUSR_05)
Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages
(Paper end, toner end, jam, and during night mode)
Bit 2 1 Setting
0 0 The machine receives all the fax messages.
0 1 The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.
1 0 The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.
1 1 The machine does not receive anything.
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On
6800D6(H) - User parameter switch 06 (SWUSR_06)
Bits 0 to 5: Not used
Bit 6: Scan sequence in Book transmission
0: Left page then right page, 1: Right page then left page
Bit 7: Not used
6800D7(H) - User parameter switch 07 (SWUSR_07)
Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 3 to 7: Not used
6800D8(H) - User parameter switch 08 (SWUSR_08)
Bits 0 and 1: Not used.
Bit 2: Authorized reception
0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature
are accepted.
1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature
are accepted.
Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09) : Not used
6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: 2 into 1 0: Off, 1: On

B712 104 SM
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

Bit 2: Not used


Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On

Fax Option
Type 3245
Bit 4: Not used

B712
Bit 5: Reception file printout 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bits 6 and 7: Not used
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Not used
Bits 2 to 5: Not used
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Polling Standby duration 0: Once, 1: No limit
6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used
6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used
6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)
Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 1: Maximum document length detection
0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log) – up to 1,200 mm
Bit 2: Batch transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer
/Scanner) is pressed
0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
Bits 4 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Manual service call (sends the system parameter list to the service station)
0: Off, 1: On

SM 105 B712
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)


(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout
Bit 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 1 1st paper feed station
0 1 0 2nd paper feed station
0 1 1 3rd paper feed station
1 0 0 4th paper feed station
1 0 1 LCT
Other settings Not used
Bits 3 and 4: Not used
Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off
Bits 6 and 7: Not used
6800E0(H) – User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size
paper is not available.
0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority
Bits 3 to 7: Not used
6800E1(H) – User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)
Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Inclusion of the “Add” button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is
selected for broadcasting
0:Not needed, 1: Needed
Bits 3 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Press “Start” key without an original when using the on hook dial or the
external telephone,
0: displays “Cannot detect original size”.
1: Receives fax messages.
6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)
Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4 to 7: Not used

B712 106 SM
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

6800E3(H) - User parameter switch 19 (SWUSR_13)

Fax Option
Type 3245
Bit 0: Offset sort function for the fax (only using the shift tray on the 1,000 sheet

B712
finisher)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Journal format
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions
1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, G3-3 and G4 communications
Bit 2: Action when the paper cassette that was selected by the specified cassette
selection feature becomes empty.
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: The machine will not print any received files until paper is added.
1: The machine will use other cassettes to print received files that are not
specified by this feature.
Bit 3: 90° image rotation during B5 portrait Tx
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-
scan directions. (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Off, 1: On
Bits 6 and 7: Not used
6800E4(H) - User parameter switch 20 (SWUSR_14)
Bit 0: Automatic printing of the PC fax (LAN fax) error report
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Reprint the documents fail to print from PC fax (LAN fax) driver
0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax
(LAN fax) driver
Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 min.
0 0 0 1 1 min.

1 1 1 0 14 min.
1 1 1 1 15 min.
Bits 6 and 7: Not used.
6800E5(H) - User parameter switch 21 (SWUSR_15)
Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message
0: Disabled (print only when error occurs), 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1:PDF
Bit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed
Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled

SM 107 B712
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

6800E6(H) - User parameter switch 22 (SWUSR_16)


(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Dial tone detection (PSTN 2) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Dial tone detection (PSTN 3) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bits 3 to 7: Not used
6800E7(H) – User parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17) : Not used
6800E8(H) - User parameter switch 24 (SWUSR_18)
Bits 0 and 1: File retention time (Cross reference: System switch 02 bit 4)
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 File retention impossible
0 1 24 hours
1 0 File retention impossible
1 1 72 hours
Bits 2 to 7: Not used
6800E9(H) - User parameter switch 25 (SWUSR_19)
Bit 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Auto switching 0: Fax, 1: Telephone
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: RDS operation
0: Not acceptable
1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03
NOTE: This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user
(see system switch 02).
Bits 5 to 7: Not used
6800EA(H) to 6800EF(H) - User parameter switch 26 to 31 (SWUSR_1A to 1F)
: Not used
6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20)
Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the
specified type
0: Paper output priority
Priority order
1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3. E-mail address, 4. Folder
1: Electric putout order
Priority order
1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax destination, 4. Fax number
Bits 1 to 7: Not used

6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used


6800F2(H) - User parameter switch 34 (SWUSR_22)
Bit 0: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches
680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches

B712 108 SM
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches


680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches

Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
680190 to 6801AF(H) - Service station’s fax number (SP3-101)
6801B0 to 6801B0(H) - Own fax PABX extension number
6801BA to 6801C3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN)
6801C4 to 6801D7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4)
6801D8 to 6801E3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3)
6801E4 to 6801EF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3)
6801F0 to 6801FB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4)
6801FC to 680207(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4)
680208 to 68021B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
68021C to 68022F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
680230 to 680246(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
680247 to 680286(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
680287 to 680296(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
680297 to 680306(H) - TTI 3 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
680307 to 68031A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
68031B to 68032E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
68032F to 680342(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
680343(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)
680344(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex)
680345(H) Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex)-
NOTE: If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for
TTI), add a stop code (FF[H]) after the last character.
680380 to 680387(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
680380(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM),
02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)
680381(H) - Year (BCD)
680382(H) - Month (BCD)
680383(H) - Day (BCD)
680384(H) - Hour
680385(H) - Minute
680386(H) - Second
680387(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
680394(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bit 0: Page Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 1: SAF Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bits 2 to 7; Not used
680395(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bits 0 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 6 and 7: Not used

SM 109 B712
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

680406 to 68040A – Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)


680406(H) - Suffix (BCD)
680407(H) - Version (BCD)
680408(H) - Year (BCD)
680409(H) - Month (BCD)
68040A(H) - Day (BCD)
68040B to 68040F – Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only)
68040B(H) - Suffix (BCD)
68040C(H) - Version (BCD)
68040D(H) - Year (BCD)
68040E(H) - Month (BCD)
68040F(H) - Day (BCD)
680410(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only)
680412(H) - G3-2 Modem ROM version (Read only)
680414(H) - G3-3 Modem ROM version (Read only)
680420(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only)
680476(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)
680477(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)
680492(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680493(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680494(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680495(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680496(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)
680497(H) - Beeper volume 00 - 07(H)
69ED04 to 69F003(H) - SIP server address (Read only)
69ED04(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69ED84(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EE04(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EE04(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EF04(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EF04(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F004(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F084(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F104(H) - Arias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F184(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F204(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A0DC0(H) - Stand-by port number for H.232 connection
6A0DC2(H) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection
6A0DC4(H) - RAS port number
6A0DC6(H) - Gatekeeper port number
6A0DC8(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.38
6A0DCA(H) - Port number of SIP server
6A0DCC(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 0: H.323, 1: SIP
6A0DCD(H) - SIP function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6A0DCE(H) - H.323 function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

B712 110 SM
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

6A0DD0(H) - RAS/SIP back-up server: IP address (Max. 128 characters- ASCII)


6A0DD4(H) - SIP back-up server: Host name (Max. 128 characters- ASCII)

Fax Option
Type 3245
6A0E54(H) - RAS back-up server: gatekeeper address - Main

B712
(Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A0ED4(H) - RAS back-up server: gatekeeper address - Sub
(Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A0F54(H) - SIP back-up server: registrar server address - Main
(Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A0FD4(H) - SIP back-up server: registrar server address - Sub
(Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A1054(H) - RAS back-up server: Arias number (Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A10D4(H) - RAS back-up server: Stand-by port number for H.232 connection
6A10D6(H) - RAS back-up server: RAS port number

SM 111 B712
OVERVIEW

5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS


5.1 OVERVIEW

   FCUIF

MBU
to IPU

Memory DIMM

CCUDRV
GWFCU3

CCUIF

SG3 SG3

B712D501.WMF

The basic fax unit consists of two PCBs: an FCU and an MBU.
The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with
the controller board. The MBU contains the ROM and SRAM. Also, the FCU has an
NCU circuit.

Fax Options:
1. Extra G3 Interface option: This provides one more analog line interface. This
allows full dual access. Two extra G3 interface options can be installed.
2. Memory Expansion: This expands the SAF memory and the page memory
(used for image rotation); without this expansion, the page memory is not big
enough for image rotation at 400 dpi, so transmission at 400 dpi is not possible.

B712 112 SM
BOARDS

5.2 BOARDS

Fax Option
Type 3245
5.2.1 FCU

B712
SAF SDRAM DIMM FCU  
BACKUP (16MB) (32 MB)

FCUIF
DMA BUS
IPU

PCI BUS
FACE3
CPU BUS

v.34
SRAM FROM MODEM Line
(256kB) (3MB) NCU
Circuit
Speaker
TEL
BACKUP Drive
& RESET
MBU

CCUIF CCUDRV

G3 G3
Speaker

B712D502.WMF

The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface
to the base copier’s engine, and all the fax options.

FACE3 (Fax Application Control Engine)


• CPU
• Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)
• DMA control
• Clock generation
• DRAM backup control

Modem (FAME)
• V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8

SM 113 B712
BOARDS

DRAM
• The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.
SAF memory : 4MB
Working memory : 8MB
Page memory : 4MB
• The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.

Memory back-up
• A Rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 1 hour.

5.2.2 MBU
On this board, the flash ROM contains the FCU firmware, and the SRAM contains
the system data and user parameters. Even if the FCU is changed, the system
data and user parameters are kept on the MBU board.

ROM
• 3MB flash ROMs for system software storage
2MB (16bit x 1MB) + 1MB (16bit x 512K)

SRAM
• The 256 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a
lithium battery.

Memory back-up
• A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in
the SRAM, in case the base copier's main switch is turned off.

Switches
Item Description
SW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.

B712 114 SM
BOARDS

5.2.3 SG3 BOARD

Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
G3 Board
SG3-D
SG3-D
NCCP
CPU FROM SDRAM
(Ru30) (1MB) (8MB)

DPRAM

DMAC

FCU DCR

JBIG Line

DSP
CODEC AFE NCU
(modem)

+5V +3.3V
REG

B712D902.WMF

The SG3 board allows up to three simultaneous communications when used in


combination with the FCU and optional G3 boards. The NCU is on the same board
as the common SG-3 board. This makes the total board structure smaller. But, the
specifications of the SG3 board do not change.
NCCP (New Communication Control Processor)
• Controls the SG3 board.
• CPU (RU30)
• DPRAM (Dual Port RAM): Handshaking with the FCU is done through this block.
• DMA controller
• JBIG
• DSP V34 modem (RL5T892): Includes the DTMF Receiver function
• DCR for MH, MR, MMR, and JBIG compression and decompression
FROM
• 1Mbyte flash ROM for SG3 software storage and modem software storage
SDRAM
• 8Mbyte DRAM shared between ECM buffer, line buffer, and working memory
AFE (Analog Front End)
• Analog processing
CODEC (COder-DECoder)
• A/D & D/A conversions for modem
REG
• Generates +3.3 V from the +5V from the FCU

SM 115 B712
VIDEO DATA PATH

5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH


5.3.1 TRANSMISSION

SCANNER

IPU

FBI FCU

FACE3

Page Memory

DCR

SAF SG3

DCR QM-CODER DCR QM-CODER

Modem Modem NCCP

NCU NCU

Analog G3 Analog G3

B712D511.WMF

B712 116 SM
VIDEO DATA PATH

Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission

Fax Option
Type 3245
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch

B712
format. The IPU processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the IPU uses the MTF, independent dot
erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’s
scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.
Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMR
or raw format to store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, the
image is rotated in page memory before compression.
At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then re-
compresses and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU
transmits the data to the line.

Immediate Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the
receiving terminal. The IPU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the IPU uses the MTF, independent dot
erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’s
scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.
Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for
transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the line.

JBIG Transmission
• Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the DCR to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line.
When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line
type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.
• Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the page memory to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the
line. When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the
line type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.

Adjustments
• Priority for the line used for G3 transmissions (PSTN 1/PSTN 2 or 3): System
switch 16 bit 1

SM 117 B712
VIDEO DATA PATH

5.3.2 RECEPTION

Analog G3 Analog G3

NCU NCU

Modem Modem

QM-CODER
SAF DCR

CCD (DCR) DCR QM-CODER


NCCP

Page Memory

FACE3

FBI
SG3 FCU

IPU

Printer

B712D512.WMF

First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line to the SAF
memory. (The data goes to the FACE3 at the same time, and is checked for error
lines/frames.)
The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image
rotation will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is
transferred to the IPU.
If the optional G3 unit is installed, the line that the message comes in on depends
on the telephone number dialed by the other party (the optional G3 unit has a
different telephone number from the main fax board).

JBIG Reception
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line),
the data is sent to the QM-CODER for decompression. Then the data is stored in
the page memory, and transferred to the IPU.
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-2 (optional extra analog
line), the data is sent to the QM-CODER on the SG3 board for decompression.

B712 118 SM
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

Fax Option
Type 3245
5.4.1 MULTI-PORT

B712
When the optional extra G3 Interface Unit is installed, communication can take
place at the same time through the two or three lines at once.

Available protocol
Option Available Line Type
Combinations
Standard only PSTN G3
Extra G3 Interface Unit (single) PSTN + PSTN G3 + G3
Extra G3 Interface Unit (double) PSTN + PSTN +PSTN G3 + G3 +G3

SM 119 B712
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER

Scanner Controller
Comoressed
MMR

Page
IPU
Memory
HDD

FCU
FBI

FACE3 DCR Modem NCU To


PSTN

DATA/ADDRESS BUS

B712D514.WMF

The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution. The IPU
video processes the data and transfers it to the controller board.
Then the controller stores the data in the page memory for the copier function, and
compresses the data in MMR (by software) to store it in the HDD. If image rotation
will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory before compression.
For transmission, the stored image data is transferred to the FCU. The FCU
decompresses the image data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data if
necessary for transmission. the NCU transmits the data to the line.
The documents can be stored in the HDD (Document Server) from the fax
application. The stored documents in the document sever can be used for the fax
transmission in many times. More than one document and the scanned document
can be combined into one file and then the file can be transmitted.
• When using the document server, the SAF memory is not used.
• The document is compressed with MMR and stored.
• Up to 9,000 pages can be stored. (1 file: Up to 1,000 pages) from the fax
application.
• Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted.
• Scanned documents are given a name automatically, such as “FAX001”. But it is
possible to change the file name, user name and password.
• Up to 30 files can be selected at once.
NOTE: 1) The compression method of the fax application is different from the copy
application. The storing time is longer than the copier storing.
2) When selecting “Print 1st page”, the stored document will be reduced to
A4 size.

B712 120 SM
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
Mail Transmission
For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –
Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Mail Transmission
Data Formats
The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file (only MH compression
can be used).
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field Content
From Mail address of the sender
Reply To Destination requested for reply
To Mail address of the destination
Bcc Backup mail address
Subject From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Content Type Multipart/mixed
Attached files: image/tiff
Content Transfer Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
Message Body MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how files
are attached to e-mail messages)

Selectable Options
These options are available for selection:
• With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail.
Inch-mm conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution
will be used if Super Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled
with IFAX SW01.
• The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory
capacity) are the same as for G3 fax memory tx.
• The default compression is TIFF-F format.
• IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending
• IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination

Secure Internet Transmission


• SMTP Authentication:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> SMTP Authentication
• POP Before SMTP:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP Before SMTP

SM 121 B712
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

Mail Reception
This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:
• POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)
• IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)
• SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –
Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Mail Reception

POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure


The machine automatically picks up e-mail from the server at an interval which is
adjustable in the range 2 to 1440 min. in 1-minute steps:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> E-mail Reception Interval
SMTP Reception
• The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS
server, and the address of the received mail must specify the IFAX.
• Enable SMTP reception:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot be
received with SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled:
However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the
MX record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending on
the setting:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Mail Delivery Conditions: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP
1) The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery:
User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery
Settings
2) If the user wishes to limit this feature so that the machine will only deliver
mail from designated senders, the machine’s “Auth. E-mail RX” feature must
be set (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File
Delivery Settings).
3) If the “SMTP RX File Delivery Setting” is set to 0 to prohibit SMTP receiving,
and if there is mail designated for delivery, then the machine responds with
an error. (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File
Delivery Settings)
4) If the quick dial, speed dial, or group dial entry is incorrect, the mail
transmission is lost, and the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and
outputs an error report.

B712 122 SM
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

Auth. E-mail RX

Fax Option
Type 3245
In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must

B712
be limited using the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.
1) Access Limit Entry
For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:
gts@IFAX.ricoh.co.jp Matches and is delivered.
gts@IFAX.abcde.co.jp Does not match and is not delivered.
IFAX@ricoh.co.jp Does not match and is not delivered.

2) Conditions
• The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.
• If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming
mail do not match, the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and
the SMTP server responds with an error. However, in this case an error
report is not output.
• If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming
mail specifies a delivery destination, then the mail is delivered
unconditionally.

SM 123 B712
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

Handling Mail Reception Errors


Abnormal files
When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands the
server to erase the message. Then the machine prints an error report and sends
information about the error by e-mail to the sender address (specified in the “From”
or “Reply-to” field of the message). If there is an incomplete received message in
the machine memory, it will be erased.
The machine prints an error message when it fails to send the receive error
notification after a certain number of attempts.
The following types of files are judged to be abnormal if one or more of the
following are detected:
1. Unsupported MIME headers.
Supported types of MIME header
Header Supported Types
Content-Type Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff
Charset US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be handled,
and some garbage may appear in the data.
Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable

2. MIME decoding errors


3. File format not recognized as TIFF-F format
4. Resolution, document size, or compression type cannot be accepted

Remaining SAF capacity error


The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAF
capacity is less than a certain value (the value depends on IFAX Switch 08. The e-
mail will be received when the SAF capacity increases (for example, after
substitute reception files have been printed). The error handling method for this
type of error is the same as for “Abnormal files”.
If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception, the machine
operates in the same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to “Abnormal
files” above).

Secure Internet Reception


To enable password encryption and higher level security:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP3/IMAP4 Settings> Encryption
(set to “On”)

B712 124 SM
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

Transfer Request

Fax Option
Type 3245
For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –

B712
Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Transfer Request
Request by Mail
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field Content
From E-mail address of the requesting terminal
To Destination address (Transfer Station address)
Bcc Backup mail address
Subject From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Content-Type Multipart/mixed
Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)
Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
Mail body (text part) RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code)
RELAY: #01#*X#**01….
Message body MIME-converted TIFF-F.

SM 125 B712
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode)


The following features are available as options for mail sending: entering a subject,
designating the level of importance, confirming reception of the mail.

Subject and Level of Importance


You can enter a subject message with: Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
The Subject entry for the mail being sent is limited to 64 characters. The subject
can also be prefixed with an “Urgent” or “High” notation.
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type
Mail Type   ‘
Subject Entry --- Entry Condition
1. “CSI” (“RTI”) Fax Message No.
No Subject 2. “RTI” CSI not registered +
Entry 3. “CSI” RTI not registered File No.
4. None CSI, RTI not registered
1. “CSI” (“RTI”) Normal:
Return Receipt
(dispatched).
2. “RTI” CSI not registered You can select
Confirmation
From “displayed” with IFAX
of Reception
SW02 Bits 2 and 3.
3. “CSI” RTI not registered Error:
Return Receipt
4. None CSI, RTI not registered (processed/error)
RTI or CSI of
the station
Mail delivery
designated for
Mail delivery, delivery
memory
RTI or CSI of Mail sending from G3
transfer, Fax Message No. + File
From sender memory
SMTP Number
receiving and Mail address
Memory sending
delivery of sender
SMTP receiving and
Mail address
delivery (Off Ramp
of sender
Gateway)
Mail error
--- Error Message No. xxxx From CSI (RTI)
notification
Items   ‘ of the table above are in the Subject.
Subjects Displayed on the PC

IFAXD919.WMF

B712 126 SM
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

E-mail Messages

Fax Option
Type 3245
After entering the subject, you can enter a message with:

B712
Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail
Message
Limitations on Entries
Item Maximum
Number of Lines 5 lines
Line Length 80 characters
Name Length 20 characters

SM 127 B712
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

Message Disposition Notification (MDN)


For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –
Internet/LAN Fax Boards – E-mail Options
The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been
received correctly or not. This confirmation is done in four steps.
1. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable this
request (known as MDN):
Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
2. Mail reception (receive confirmation request)
3. Send confirmation of mail reception
4. Receive confirmation of mail reception
The other party’s machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditions
below are met:
• The other party’s machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request.
• The other party’s machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification).

- Setting up the Receiving Party -


The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if:
1) The “Disposition Notification To” field is in the received mail header
(automatically inserted in the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page,
if MDN is enabled), and
2) Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User Parameter
Setting SW21 (15 [H]) Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response is
as follows:
Normal reception: “Return Receipt (dispatched)” in the Subject line
IFAX SW02 (Bit 2, 3) “Return Receipt (displayed)” in the Subject line
Error: “Return Receipt (processed/error)” in the Subject line

B712 128 SM
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

Handling Reports

Fax Option
Type 3245
1. Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail

B712
After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail sender’s
journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a “Q” in the
Mode column.
2. Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt
Response
After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the
mail receiver’s journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column
and an “A” in the Mode column.
3. Receiving the Return Receipt Mail
• After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail
sender’s journal about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is
annotated with “OK” in the Result column.
• When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an “E”
in the Result column.
• The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate
communication. Its arrival is only reported by the presence of “OK” or “E” in
the Result column.
• If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group
destination; the machine sends the mail to more than one location. See “How
to set up Mail Delivery”), the Result column of the Journal is updated every
time a return receipt is received. For example, if the mailing list was to 5
destinations, the Result column indicates the result of the communication
with the 5th destination only. The results of the communications to the first 4
destinations are not shown.
Exceptions:
If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E,
even if subsequent communications were OK.
If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the
destination for the first error only.

Report Sample

DATE TIME ADDRESS MODE TIME PAGE RESULT

MAY. 5 10:15 fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SM 0'09" 2 --


10:16 fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'05" 1 --
10:17 s_tadashi@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'09" 2 OK
10:19 m_masataka@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMA 0'05" 1 --

IFAXD921.WMF

SM 129 B712
IP-FAX

5.5 IP-FAX
What is IP-FAX?
For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –
Internet/LAN Fax Boards – IP-FAX
T.38 Packet Format
TCP is selected by default for NIC FAX; you can change this to UDP with LAN
switch 10 bit 1.

UDP Related Switches


IP-Fax Switch 01
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-3 Select IP FAX Delay Level Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too
Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting many transmission errors are occurring on the
0 0 0 0 Level 0 network.
0 0 0 1 Level 1 If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise this
0 0 1 0 Level 2 setting on the T.30 machine. Increasing the delay
0 0 1 1 Level 3 time allows the recovery of more lost packets.
If only UDP is enabled, increase the number of
redundant packets.
Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets
Level 3: 4 Redundant packets
4-7 Not used. Do not change these settings.

Settings
User parameter switch 32 (20[H]), bit 0
IP-Fax Gate Keeper usage 0: No, 1: Yes
LAN switches 10 to 12: Various IP-FAX settings (see the bit switch table)

B712 130 SM
SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS

Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Type: Desktop type transceiver
Circuit: PSTN (max. 3ch.)
PABX
Connection: Direct couple
Original Size: Book (Face down)
Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]
Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]
ARDF (Face up)
(single sided document)
Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
(double sided document)
Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
Scanning Method: Flat bed, with CCD
Resolution: G3
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)
8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) Note1
16 x15.4 line/mm (Super Fine) See Note.
200 x 100 dpi (Standard)
200 x 200 dpi (Detail)
400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine) See Note.
NOTE: Note 1: Optional Expansion Memory required
Transmission Time: G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM using
memory for an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at
standard resolution
Data Compression: MH, MR, MMR
JBIG
Protocol: Group 3 with ECM
Modulation: V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),
V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FM)
Data Rate: G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Automatic fallback
I/O Rate: With ECM: 0 ms/line
Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line

SM 131 B712
SPECIFICATIONS

Memory Capacity: ECM: 128 KB


SAF
Standard: 4 MB
With optional Expansion Memory: 28 MB (4 MB+ 24 MB)
Page Memory
Standard: 4 MB (Print: 2 MB + Scanner: 2 MB)
With optional Expansion Memory: 12 MB (8 MB + 4 MB)
(Print 8 MB + Scanner: 4 MB)

2. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS


The following table shows how the capabilities of each programmable item will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit is installed.

Item Standard
Quick Dial 2000
Groups 100
Destination per Group 500
Destinations dialed from the ten-key pad overall 500
Programs 100
Auto Document 6
Communication records for Journal stored in the
200
memory
Specific Senders 30

The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit and the Expansion Memory
are installed.

With the
Without the
Expansion
Expansion Memory
Memory
Memory
400 400
Transmission file
Maximum number of
page for memory 1,000 1,000
transmission
Memory capacity for
memory transmission 320 2,240
(Note1)

NOTE: 1) Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at the


standard resolution, the auto image density mode and the Text mode.

B712 132 SM
SPECIFICATIONS

3. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS

Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
Type E-mail File Format
Fax Unit and Printer/Scanner Unit Single/multi-part
MIME conversion
Connectivity
Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR)
Local area network
format only
Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394) Protocol
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN) (Supported by TCP/IP protocol)
Connection Transmission:
100base-Tx/10base-T direct SMTP, TCP/IP
connection Reception:
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
Resolution
Main scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi Data rate
Sub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi 100 Mbps(100base-Tx)
10 Mbps (10base-T)
NOTE: To use 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit
4 must be set to “1” or "Full Authentication method
mode" in the address book of a SMTP-AUTH
client pc must be selected with POP before SMTP
Web Image Monitor. A-POP
Transmission Time Remark
1 s (through a LAN to the server) The machine must be set up as an e-
Condition: ITU-T #1 test document mail client before installation. Any
(Selerexe Letter) client PCs connected to the machine
MTF correction: OFF through a LAN must also be e-mail
TTI: None clients, or some features will not work
Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi (e.g. Autorouting).
Communication speed: 10 Mbps
Correspondent device: E-mail server
Line conditions: No terminal access
Document Size
Maximum message width is A4/LT.
NOTE: To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX
SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2
(A3) must be set to “1” or "Full
mode" in the address book of a
client pc must be selected with
Web Image Monitor.

SM 133 B712
SPECIFICATIONS

4. IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS
Network: LAN: Local Area Network
Ethernet/10Base-T, 100Base-TX,
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394),
IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN)

Scan line density: 8x3.85 lines/mm, 200x100 dpi (standard character),


8x7.7 lines/mm, 200x200 dpi (detail character),
8x15.4 lines/mm, 200x400 dpi (fine character),
16x15.4 lines/mm, 400x400dpi (super fine character)

Original size: Maximum A3 or 11”x17” (DLT)

Maximum scanning size: Standard size: A3, 297mm x 432mm,


Irregular size 297 x 1200mm

Transmission protocols: Recommendation: T.38 Annex protocol,


TCP, UDP/IP communication

Compatible machines: IP-Fax compatible machines

IP-Fax transmission Specify IP address and send fax to an IP-Fax


function: compatible fax through a network.
Also capable of sending fax to G3 fax connected to
the public telephone lines via a VoIP gateway.

IP-Fax reception function: Receive a fax sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax
through a network.
Also capable of receiving fax from a G3 fax
connected the public telephone lines via a VoIP
gateway.

B712 134 SM
SPECIFICATIONS

5. MACHINE CONFIGURATION

Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
[A] [B] [C]

[D]

PPC
[G]

[F]
[E]

B712V101.WMF

Machine
Component Remarks
Code
FCU [A]
MBU B712 [F] Included in the Fax unit.
FCU Interface [G]
Expansion Memory G578 [B] Option
CCU drive board [C]
Included in the optional G3
Interface Board B713 [D]
unit.
G3 Board [E]
Handset Type 1018 B433 USA only
Common with J-C1
Refill ink for stamp
Marker Type 30 H903
Common with J-C1

SM 135 B712

You might also like